7SJ6x Iec

Preface
Table of Contents
Introduction 1
SIPROTEC Functions 2
Multi-Functional
Installation and Commissioning 3
Protective Relay with Technical Data 4
Local Control
7SJ62/63/64 Appendix A
V4.4
Index
Manual
C53000-G1140-C147–1
Liability Statement Copyright
We have checked the text of this manual against the Copyright © Siemens AG 2002. All rights reserved.
hardware and software described. Exclusions and de- Dissemination or reproduction of this document, or evalu-
viations cannot be ruled out; we accept no liability for ation and communication of its contents, is not authorized
lack of total agreement. except where expressly permitted. Violations are liable for
The information in this manual is checked periodically, damages. All rights reserved, particularly for the purposes
and necessary corrections will be included in future of patent application or trademark registration.
editions. We appreciate any suggested improvements.
Registered trademarks
We reserve the right to make technical improvements SIPROTEC®, SIMATIC®, SIMATIC NET ®, SINAUT ®, SI-
without notice. CAM®, and DIGSI® are registered trademarks of Siemens
AG. Other designations in this manual may be trademarks
Release 4.40.02
that if used by third parties for their own purposes may vi-
olate the rights of the owner.
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Buch-Nr. C53000-G1140-C147–1

Preface
Purpose of This This manual describes the functions, operation, installation, and placing into service
Manual of the devices 7SJ62, 7SJ63 and 7SJ64. In particular, one will find:
• Descriptions of device functions and settings → Chapter 2;
• Instructions for mounting and commissioning → Chapter 3;
• Compilation of technical specifications → Chapter 4;
• As well as a compilation of the most significant data for experienced users in the
Appendix.
General information about design, configuration, and operation of SIPROTEC® devic-
es are laid down in the SIPROTEC® 4 system manual, order no. E50417–H1176–
C151.
Target Audience Protection engineers, commissioning engineers, personnel concerned with adjust-
ment, checking, and service of selective protective equipment, automatic and control
facilities, and personnel of electrical facilities and power plants.
Applicability of This manual is valid for: SIPROTEC® 4 7SJ62/63/64 Multifunction Protective Relays;
This Manual firmware version 4.4.
Indication of Conformity
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities
on the approximation of the laws of the member states relating to electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC Council Directive 89/336/EEC) and concerning electrical equip-
ment for use within certain voltage limits (Low-voltage Directive 73/23/EEC).
This conformity is proved by tests conducted by Siemens AG in accordance with Ar-
ticle 10 of the Council Directive in agreement with the generic standards EN 50081
and EN 50082 for EMC directive, and with the standard EN 60255–6 for the low-volt-
age directive.
The product conforms with the international standard of the series IEC 60255 and the
German standard DIN 57435 /Part 303 (corresponds to VDE 0435/Part 303).
ANSI This product has been designed according to ANSI C37.90.* standards.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual i
C53000-G1140-C147-1–1
Preface
This product is UL–certified with the data as stated in Section 4.1:
IND. CONT. EQ. IND. CONT. EQ.

TYPE 1 TYPE 1
69CA
Additional Support Should further information be desired or should particular problems arise which are
not covered sufficiently for the purchaser's purpose, the matter should be referred to
the local Siemens representative.
Training Courses Individual course offerings may be found in our Training Catalogue, or questions may
be directed to our training center. Please contact your Siemens representative.
Instructions and The warnings and notes contained in this manual serve for your own safety and for an
Warnings appropriate lifetime of the device. Please observe them!
The following terms are used:
DANGER
indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage will result
if proper precautions are not taken.
Warning
indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage can result
if proper precautions are not taken.
Caution
indicates that minor personal injury or property damage can result if proper precau-
tions are not taken. This particularly applies to damage on or in the device itself and
consequential damage thereof.
Note
indicates information about the device or respective part of the instruction manual
which is essential to highlight.
Warning!
Hazardous voltages are present in this electrical equipment during operation. Non–
observance of the safety rules can result in severe personal injury or property dam-
age.
Only qualified personnel shall work on and around this equipment after becoming thor-
oughly familiar with all warnings and safety notices of this manual as well as with the
applicable safety regulations.
The successful and safe operation of this device is dependent on proper handling, in-
stallation, operation, and maintenance by qualified personnel under observance of all
warnings and hints contained in this manual.
In particular the general erection and safety regulations (e.g. IEC, DIN, VDE, EN or
other national and international standards) regarding the correct use of hoisting gear
must be observed. Non–observance can result in death, personal injury or substantial
property damage.
ii 7SJ62/63/64 Manual
C53000-G1140-C147-1–1
Preface
QUALIFIED PERSONNEL
For the purpose of this instruction manual and product labels, a qualified person is one
who is familiar with the installation, construction and operation of the equipment and
the hazards involved. In addition, he has the following qualifications:
• Is trained and authorized to energize, de-energize, clear, ground and tag circuits
and equipment in accordance with established safety practices.
• Is trained in the proper care and use of protective equipment in accordance with es-
tablished safety practices.
• Is trained in rendering first aid.
Typographic and The following text formats are used when literal information from the device or to the
Symbol Conven- device appear in the text flow:
tions
Parameter names, i.e. designators of configuration or function parameters which
may appear word-for-word in the display of the device or on the screen of a personal
computer (with operation software DIGSI® 4), are marked in bold letters of a mono-
space type style.
Parameter options, i.e. possible settings of text parameters, which may appear
word-for-word in the display of the device or on the screen of a personal computer
(with operation software DIGSI® 4), are written in italic style, additionally.
“Annunciations”, i.e. designators for information, which may be output by the relay
or required from other devices or from the switch gear, are marked in a monospace
type style in quotation marks.
Deviations may be permitted in drawings when the type of designator can be obviously
derived from the illustration.
The following symbols are used in drawings:
Earth fault device-internal logical input signal
Earth fault device-internal logical output signal
UL1–L2 internal input signal of an analogue quantity

FNo 567
>Release external binary input signal with function number Fno
FNo 5432
Dev. Trip external binary output signal with function number Fno
Parameter address
Parameter name
1234 FUNCTION example of a parameter switch designated FUNCTION with the

On
address 1234 and the possible settings On and Off
Off
Parameter options
Besides these, graphical symbols are used according to IEC 60617–12 and
IEC 60617–13 or similar. Some of the most frequently used are listed below:
7SJ62/63/64 Manual iii

C53000-G1140-C147-1–1
Preface
Input signal of an analogue quantity
or OR gate
& AND gate
signal inversion
Exclusive–OR gate (antivalence): output is active, if only one

=1
of the inputs is active
Coincidence gate (equivalence): output is active, if both input are

=
active or inactive at the same time
Dynamic inputs (edge–triggered)

above with positive, below with negative edge
Formation of one analogue output signal from

a number of analogue input signals (example: 3)
2610 Iph>>
Iph> Limit stage with setting address and parameter designator (name)
2611 T Iph>>
T 0
Timer (pickup delay T, example adjustable)
with setting address and parameter designator (name)
0 T
Timer (dropout delay T, example non-adjustable)
T Dynamic triggered pulse timer T (monoflop)
S Q Static memory (RS–flipflop) with setting input (S),

R Q resetting input (R), output (Q) and inverted output (Q)
Furthermore, the graphic symbols according IEC 60617–12 and IEC 60617–13 or
similar are used in most cases.
iv 7SJ62/63/64 Manual
C53000-G1140-C147-1–1
Table of Contents
1 Introduction.......................................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 Overall Operation ................................................................................................................... 2
1.2 Applications ............................................................................................................................ 6
1.3 Characteristics........................................................................................................................ 9
2 Functions............................................................................................................................................ 15
2.1 General................................................................................................................................. 17
2.1.1 Configuration of Functions.................................................................................................... 19
2.1.2 General Device Data ............................................................................................................ 23
2.1.2.1 Setting Notes ........................................................................................................................ 24
2.1.2.2 Information Overview............................................................................................................ 24
2.1.3 Power System Data 1........................................................................................................... 26
2.1.3.1 Power System ...................................................................................................................... 26
2.1.3.2 Current Transformers (CT’s) ................................................................................................ 28
2.1.3.3 Voltage Transformers (VT’s) ................................................................................................ 28
2.1.3.4 Circuit Breaker (CB) ............................................................................................................. 29
2.1.3.5 Information .......................................................................................................................... 30
2.1.4 Waveform Capture ............................................................................................................... 31
2.1.4.1 Information ........................................................................................................................... 32
2.1.5 Setting Groups ..................................................................................................................... 33
2.1.5.1 Settings ................................................................................................................................ 33
2.1.5.2 Information ........................................................................................................................... 33
2.1.6 Power System Data 2........................................................................................................... 34
2.1.6.1 Settings ................................................................................................................................ 36
2.1.6.2 Information .......................................................................................................................... 37
2.2 Overcurrent Protection (50, 50N, 51, 51N)........................................................................... 38

2.2.1 Description ........................................................................................................................... 39
2.2.1.1 Definite Time, Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection (50, 50N)........................................... 39
2.2.1.2 Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protection (51, 51N) ................................................................... 43
2.2.1.3 Dynamic Cold Load Pick-up Function .................................................................................. 46
2.2.1.4 Inrush Restraint .................................................................................................................... 47
2.2.1.5 Reverse Interlocking Bus Protection .................................................................................... 49
2.2.2 Programming Time-Overcurrent Settings............................................................................. 50
2.2.2.1 General................................................................................................................................. 50
2.2.2.2 Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (50-2, 50-1) ............................................................... 51
2.2.2.3 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (51) ............................................................................ 53
2.2.2.4 Programming Settings for Time-Overcurrent Ground Protection ......................................... 57
2.2.2.5 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (51N) ......................................................................... 58
7SJ62/63/64 Manual v
C53000-G1140-C147–1
Table of Contents
2.2.2.6 Inrush Restraint .................................................................................................................... 58

2.2.3 Settings................................................................................................................................. 59
2.2.3.1 Information List ..................................................................................................................... 61
2.3 Directional Overcurrent Protection (67, 67N)........................................................................ 64

2.3.1 Description of Directional Overcurrent Protection................................................................. 66
2.3.1.1 Definite Time, Directional Overcurrent Protection ................................................................ 66
2.3.1.2 Inverse Time, Directional Overcurrent Protection (67-TOC, 67N-TOC) ............................... 68
2.3.1.3 Determination of Direction .................................................................................................... 70
2.3.1.4 Reverse Interlocking for Looped Lines ................................................................................. 73
2.3.2 Programming Directional Overcurrent Settings .................................................................... 75
2.3.2.1 General ................................................................................................................................. 75
2.3.2.2 Definite-Time, Directional Overcurrent Protection (67-2, 67-1) ............................................ 77
2.3.2.3 Inverse-Time Directional Overcurrent Protection (67-TOC) ................................................. 78
2.3.2.4 Programming Settings for Directional Overcurrent Ground Protection................................. 81
2.3.2.5 Inverse-Time Directional Overcurrent Protection (67N-TOC)............................................... 82
2.3.3 Settings................................................................................................................................. 83
2.3.3.1 Information List for Directional Ground Overcurrent Protection............................................ 85
2.4 Dynamic Cold Load Pick-Up Function (50c, 50Nc, 51Nc, 67c, 67Nc).................................. 87
2.4.1 Description of Dynamic Cold Load Pick-Up Function ........................................................... 87
2.4.2 Programming Settings .......................................................................................................... 90
2.4.2.1 General ................................................................................................................................. 90
2.4.2.2 Non-Directional Phase Elements.......................................................................................... 91
2.4.2.3 Non-Directional Ground Elements ........................................................................................ 91
2.4.2.4 Directional Phase Elements.................................................................................................. 91
2.4.2.5 Directional Ground Element.................................................................................................. 92
2.4.2.6 Settings for Dynamic Cold Load Adjustments ...................................................................... 92
2.4.2.7 Information List for Dynamic Cold Load Setting Adjustments............................................... 93
2.5 Voltage Protection (27, 59) ................................................................................................... 94

2.5.1 Description of Voltage Protection ......................................................................................... 94
2.5.1.1 Measurement Principle ......................................................................................................... 94
2.5.1.2 Overvoltage Protection (59).................................................................................................. 95
2.5.1.3 Undervoltage Protection (27)................................................................................................ 96
2.5.2 Programming Settings ........................................................................................................ 100
2.5.2.1 Voltage Protection – General.............................................................................................. 100
2.5.2.2 Undervoltage Protection ..................................................................................................... 100
2.5.2.3 Overvoltage Protection ....................................................................................................... 101
2.5.2.4 Settings for Voltage Protection .......................................................................................... 102
2.5.2.5 Information List for Voltage Protection................................................................................ 102
2.6 Negative Sequence Protection (46).................................................................................... 104

2.6.1 Description of Negative Sequence Protection .................................................................... 104
2.6.1.1 Determination of Unbalanced Load .................................................................................... 104
2.6.1.2 Definite Time Elements (46-1, 46-2)................................................................................... 104
2.6.1.3 Inverse Time Element (46-TOC)......................................................................................... 105
2.6.2.1 General ............................................................................................................................... 107
2.6.2.2 Definite Time Elements....................................................................................................... 107
2.6.2.3 Inverse Time Element 46-TOC ........................................................................................... 109
2.6.2.4 Settings for Negative Sequence (Phase Balance) Current Protection ............................... 110
2.6.2.5 Information List for Negative Sequence Current Protection ............................................... 111
vi 7SJ62/63/64 Manual
C53000-G1140-C147–1
Table of Contents
2.7 Motor Protection (Motor Starting Protection, 48 and Start Inhibit for Motors, 66/68).......... 112
2.7.1 Description of Motor Starting Protection............................................................................. 112
2.7.2 Description of Start Inhibit for Motor ................................................................................... 114
2.7.3.1 General............................................................................................................................... 118
2.7.3.2 Motor Starting Protection (48) ............................................................................................ 119
2.7.3.3 Start Inhibit for Motors (66, 86)........................................................................................... 120
2.7.3.4 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 123
2.7.3.5 Information ......................................................................................................................... 124
2.8 Frequency Protection (81 O/U)........................................................................................... 126

2.8.1 Description of Frequency Protection .................................................................................. 126
2.8.2.1 General............................................................................................................................... 127
2.8.2.2 Frequency Protection Settings ........................................................................................... 127
2.8.2.3 Settings for Frequency Protection ...................................................................................... 128
2.8.2.4 Information List for Frequency Protectio............................................................................. 129
2.9 Thermal Overload Protection (49) ...................................................................................... 130

2.9.1 Description of Thermal Overload Protection....................................................................... 130
2.9.2.1 General............................................................................................................................... 134
2.9.2.2 Overload Settings ............................................................................................................... 134
2.9.2.3 Settings for Thermal Overload Protection .......................................................................... 138
2.9.2.4 Information List for Thermal Overload Protection............................................................... 139
2.10 Monitoring Functions .......................................................................................................... 140

2.10.1 Description of Measured Values Monitoring....................................................................... 140
2.10.1.1 Hardware Monitoring .......................................................................................................... 140
2.10.1.2 Software Monitoring............................................................................................................ 141
2.10.1.3 Monitoring of External Current Transformer Circuits .......................................................... 142
2.10.1.4 Description of Fuse-Failure-Monitor ................................................................................... 144
2.10.2 Programming Settings for Measured Values Monitoring .................................................... 144
2.10.2.1 General............................................................................................................................... 144
2.10.2.2 Measured Values Monitoring.............................................................................................. 144
2.10.2.3 Fuse-Failure-Monitor .......................................................................................................... 145
2.10.2.4 Settings for Measured Values Monitoring........................................................................... 145
2.10.2.5 Information List for Measured Values Monitoring ............................................................... 146
2.10.3 Description of Trip Circuit Monitor (74TC) .......................................................................... 147
2.10.4 Programming Settings for Trip Circuit Monitor ................................................................... 150
2.10.4.1 Setting for Trip Circuit Monitor............................................................................................ 152
2.10.4.2 Information ......................................................................................................................... 152
2.10.5 Malfunction Responses of the Monitoring Functions.......................................................... 152
2.10.6 Group Alarms ..................................................................................................................... 154
2.11 Sensitive Ground Fault Detection (64, 50Ns, 67Ns)........................................................... 155

2.11.1 Description of Sensitive Ground Fault Detection................................................................ 155
2.11.1.1 Voltage Element ................................................................................................................. 155
2.11.1.2 Current Elements................................................................................................................ 156
2.11.1.3 Determination of Direction .................................................................................................. 156
2.11.1.4 Location of Ground Connections ........................................................................................ 160
7SJ62/63/64 Manual vii

C53000-G1140-C147–1
Table of Contents

2.11.2.1 General Settings ................................................................................................................. 161
2.11.2.2 Definite Current Stage (50Ns-2, 50Ns-1)............................................................................ 162
2.11.2.3 Inverse Current Stage (51Ns)............................................................................................. 162
2.11.2.4 Phase-to-Ground Voltage ................................................................................................... 164
2.11.2.5 Direction.............................................................................................................................. 164
2.11.2.6 Current Transformer ........................................................................................................... 166
2.11.2.7 Settings for Sensitive Ground Fault Detection.................................................................... 166
2.11.2.8 Information List for Sensitive Ground Fault Detection ........................................................ 168
2.12 Intermittent Ground Fault Protection................................................................................... 170

2.12.1 Functional Description ........................................................................................................ 170
2.12.2 Functional Settings ............................................................................................................. 175
2.12.2.1 Settings of the Intermittent Ground Fault Protection........................................................... 176
2.12.2.2 Information List of the Intermittent Ground Fault Protection .............................................. 176
2.13 Automatic Reclosing System (79M).................................................................................... 177

2.13.1 Description of Automatic Reclosing System ....................................................................... 177
2.13.1.1 General ............................................................................................................................... 177
2.13.1.2 Program Execution ............................................................................................................. 178
2.13.1.3 Controlling Protective Stages ............................................................................................. 184
2.13.1.4 Zone Sequence Coordination1) .......................................................................................... 186
2.13.2.2 Configuration ...................................................................................................................... 190
2.13.2.3 First Reclosing Attempt....................................................................................................... 191
2.13.2.4 Second to Fourth Reclosuring Attempt............................................................................... 191
2.13.2.5 Fifth to Ninth Reclosing Attempt ......................................................................................... 192
2.13.2.6 Blocking .............................................................................................................................. 192
2.13.2.7 Zone Sequencing1)............................................................................................................. 193
2.13.2.8 Controlling Directional/Non-Directional Overcurrent Protection Stages via
Cold Load Pickup................................................................................................................ 193
2.13.2.9 Settings for Automatic Reclosing........................................................................................ 194
2.13.2.10Information List for Automatic Reclosing ............................................................................ 199
2.14 Fault Location ..................................................................................................................... 201

2.14.1 Description of Fault Location .............................................................................................. 201
2.14.2 Setting The Functional Parameters .................................................................................... 203
2.14.2.1 Settings for Fault Locator.................................................................................................... 204
2.14.2.2 Information List for Fault Location ...................................................................................... 204
2.15 Breaker Failure Protection (50BF) ...................................................................................... 205

2.15.1 Description of Breaker Failure Protection ........................................................................... 205
2.15.2.1 Settings for Breaker Failure Protection .............................................................................. 209
2.15.2.2 Information List for Breaker Failure Protection ................................................................... 209
2.16 Synchronism and Voltage Check (7SJ64 only) .................................................................. 210

2.16.2 Functional Settings ............................................................................................................. 217
2.16.2.2 Power System Data ............................................................................................................ 219
2.16.2.3 Asynchronous Conditions ................................................................................................... 221
viii 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
Table of Contents
2.16.2.4 Synchronous Conditions..................................................................................................... 221

2.16.2.5 Synchrocheck ..................................................................................................................... 222
2.16.3 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 222
2.16.4 List of Information ............................................................................................................... 224
2.17 Temperature Detection via RTD-boxes .............................................................................. 226

2.17.2 Configuration Notes............................................................................................................ 227
2.17.2.1 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 229
2.17.2.2 List of Information ............................................................................................................... 233
2.18 Phase Rotation ................................................................................................................... 235

2.18.1 Description of Phase Rotation ............................................................................................ 235
2.19 Protection Function Logic ................................................................................................... 236

2.19.1 Pickup Logic for the Entire Device...................................................................................... 236
2.19.2 Tripping Logic of the Entire Device..................................................................................... 236
2.19.2.1 Description ......................................................................................................................... 236
2.19.2.2 Programming Settings for Tripping Logic ........................................................................... 237
2.19.3 Statistical Counters............................................................................................................. 237
2.19.3.1 Description ......................................................................................................................... 237
2.19.3.2 Reading/Setting/Resetting.................................................................................................. 238
2.20 Auxiliary Functions ............................................................................................................. 239

2.20.1 Message Processing .......................................................................................................... 239
2.20.1.1 Event Log (Operating messages)....................................................................................... 240
2.20.1.2 Trip Log (Fault messages).................................................................................................. 240
2.20.1.3 Ground Fault Messages ..................................................................................................... 241
2.20.1.4 General Interrogation ......................................................................................................... 241
2.20.1.5 Spontaneous Messages ..................................................................................................... 241
2.20.1.6 Statistics ............................................................................................................................. 242
2.20.2 Measurements.................................................................................................................... 242
2.20.3 Commissioning Aids ........................................................................................................... 245
2.20.3.1 Test Messages to the SCADA Interface during Test Operation ......................................... 245
2.20.3.2 Testing System Ports ......................................................................................................... 246
2.20.3.3 Checking the Binary Inputs and Outputs ............................................................................ 246
2.20.3.4 Triggering Oscillographic Recordings................................................................................. 246
2.20.4.1 Settings for Auxiliary Functions .......................................................................................... 247
2.20.4.2 Information List for Auxiliary Functions............................................................................... 248
2.21 Breaker Control .................................................................................................................. 252

2.21.1 Types of Commands .......................................................................................................... 253
2.21.2 Steps in the Command Sequence...................................................................................... 254
2.21.3 Interlocking ......................................................................................................................... 255
2.21.3.1 Interlocked/Non-Interlocked Switching ............................................................................... 255
2.21.4 Recording and acknowledgement of commands................................................................ 262
7SJ62/63/64 Manual ix
C53000-G1140-C147–1
Table of Contents
3 Installation and Commissioning..................................................................................................... 265
3.1 Installation and Connections............................................................................................... 266

3.1.1 Installation .......................................................................................................................... 266
3.1.2 Connections........................................................................................................................ 275
3.1.2.1 Connection Examples for 7SJ62 ........................................................................................ 275
3.1.2.4 General Connections for 7SJ62/63/64................................................................................ 276
3.1.3 Hardware Modifications ...................................................................................................... 279
3.1.3.1 General ............................................................................................................................... 279
3.1.3.2 Disassembly of the Device ................................................................................................. 281
3.1.3.3 Jumper Settings on Printed Circuit Boards of 7SJ62.......................................................... 288
3.1.3.4 Switching Elements on the Printed Circuit Boards of 7SJ63 .............................................. 294
3.1.3.5 Switching Elements on the Printed Circuit Boards of 7SJ64 .............................................. 302
3.1.3.6 Interface Modules ............................................................................................................... 313
3.1.3.7 Reassembly of Device ........................................................................................................ 317
3.2 Checking Connections........................................................................................................ 318

3.2.1 Data Connections ............................................................................................................... 318
3.2.2 Checking Power Plant Connections ................................................................................... 321
3.3 Commissioning ................................................................................................................... 323

3.3.1 Testing mode and transmission blocking............................................................................ 324
3.3.2 Checking the System (SCADA) Interface ........................................................................... 324
3.3.3 Checking the Binary Inputs and Outputs ............................................................................ 326
3.3.4 Tests for the Circuit Breaker Failure Protection.................................................................. 329
3.3.5 Testing User-Defined Functions ......................................................................................... 330
3.3.6 Current, Voltage, and Phase Rotation Testing ................................................................... 331
3.3.7 Testing the Reverse Interlocking Scheme (if applicable).................................................... 332
3.3.8 Directional Checks with Load Current ................................................................................ 333
3.3.9 Polarity check for the voltage input U4 (only 7SJ64) .......................................................... 334
3.3.10 Ground Fault Check in a Non-Grounded System ............................................................... 336
3.3.11 Polarity Check for the Current Measuring Input IN............................................................................... 337
3.3.12 Checking the Temperature Measurement via RTD-Box..................................................... 339
3.3.13 Measuring the operating time of the circuit breaker (only 7SJ64) ...................................... 341
3.3.14 Switching Check for the Configured Operating Devices..................................................... 341
3.3.15 Triggering Oscillographic Recordings................................................................................. 342
3.4 Final Preparation of the Device .......................................................................................... 344
4 Technical Data.................................................................................................................................. 345
4.1 General Device Data .......................................................................................................... 346

4.1.1 Analog Inputs...................................................................................................................... 346
4.1.2 Power Supply...................................................................................................................... 346
4.1.3 Binary Inputs and Outputs .................................................................................................. 347
4.1.4 Communications Interfaces ................................................................................................ 349
4.1.5 Electrical Tests ................................................................................................................... 353
4.1.6 Mechanical Stress Tests..................................................................................................... 355
x 7SJ62/63/64 Manual
C53000-G1140-C147–1
Table of Contents
4.1.7 Climatic Stress Tests.......................................................................................................... 356

4.1.8 Service Conditions.............................................................................................................. 356
4.1.9 Certifications....................................................................................................................... 357
4.1.10 Construction ....................................................................................................................... 357
4.2 Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (50 and 50N Elements) ........................................... 359
4.3 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (51 and 51N Elements) ........................................... 360
4.4 Directional Time Overcurrent Protection (67 and 67N Elements) ...................................... 370
4.5 Inrush Restraint .................................................................................................................. 371
4.6 Dynamic Cold Load Pick-up Function (50c, 50Nc, 51Nc, 67c, 67Nc) ................................ 371
4.7 Voltage Protection (27 and 59)........................................................................................... 372
4.8 Negative Sequence Protection (46).................................................................................... 373

4.8.1 Definite–Time Elements (46-1 and 46-2)............................................................................ 373
4.8.2 Inverse–Time Elements (46-TOC)...................................................................................... 373
4.9 Motor Starting Protection (48) ............................................................................................ 379
4.10 Start Inhibit for Motors (66/68)............................................................................................ 380
4.11 Frequency Protection (81 Over-Frequency and Under-Frequency) ................................... 381
4.12 Thermal Overload Protection (49) ...................................................................................... 382
4.13 Sensitive Ground Fault Detection (64, 50Ns, 67Ns)........................................................... 384
4.14 Intermittent Ground Fault Protection .................................................................................. 387
4.15 Automatic Reclosing System (79M) ................................................................................... 388
4.16 Fault Location ..................................................................................................................... 389
4.17 Breaker Failure Protection (50BF)...................................................................................... 389

4.18 Synchronism and Voltage Check (25) (7SJ64 only)........................................................... 390
4.19 RTD-Boxes for Temperature Detection ............................................................................. 391
4.20 User Defined Functions with CFC ...................................................................................... 392
4.21 Additional Functions ........................................................................................................... 395
4.22 Breaker Control .................................................................................................................. 399
4.23 Dimensions......................................................................................................................... 400
A Appendix .......................................................................................................................................... 409
A.1 Ordering Information and Accessories ............................................................................... 410

A.1.1 Ordering Information 7SJ62 V4.4 (present release .../EE and higher) ............................... 410
A.1.2 Ordering Information 7SJ62 V4.2 (releases to date until .../DD) ........................................ 413
A.1.3 Ordering Information 7SJ63 V4.4 (present release .../EE and higher) ............................... 415
A.1.4 Ordering Information 7SJ63 V4.2 (releases to date until .../DD) ........................................ 418
7SJ62/63/64 Manual xi
C53000-G1140-C147–1
Table of Contents
A.1.5 Ordering Information 7SJ64 V4.4 ....................................................................................... 420

A.1.6 Accessories ........................................................................................................................ 423
A.2 Elementary Diagrams ......................................................................................................... 426

A.2.1 Elementary Diagrams for 7SJ62......................................................................................... 426
A.2.1.1 Housing for panel flush mounting or cubicle installation..................................................... 426
A.2.1.2 Panel Surface Mounting ..................................................................................................... 428
A.2.2.2 Housing for panel surface mounting ................................................................................... 437
A.2.2.3 Devices With Detached Operation Unit .............................................................................. 446
A.2.2.4 Devices for panel surface mounting without Operation Unit............................................... 451
A.2.3.2 Housing for panel surface mounting ................................................................................... 460
A.2.3.3 Housing for Mounting with Detached Operator Panel ........................................................ 464
A.2.3.4 Devices for panel surface mounting without Operator Panel.............................................. 467
A.3 Connection Examples......................................................................................................... 470

A.3.1 Connection Examples for 7SJ62 ........................................................................................ 470
A.3.4 Connection Examples for RTD-Box.................................................................................... 493
A.4 Default Settings .................................................................................................................. 494

A.4.1 LED Displays ...................................................................................................................... 494
A.4.2 Binary Inputs....................................................................................................................... 494
A.4.3 Binary Outputs .................................................................................................................... 496
A.4.4 Function Keys ..................................................................................................................... 497
A.4.5 Standard Default Display .................................................................................................... 498
A.4.6 Spontaneous Display Annunciations .................................................................................. 499
A.4.7 Pre-Defined CFC Charts..................................................................................................... 500
A.5 Interoperability List.............................................................................................................. 503
A.6 Protocol-dependent functions ............................................................................................. 505
A.7 Functions Overview ............................................................................................................ 506
A.8 Settings............................................................................................................................... 508
A.9 Overview of the masking features of the user defined information..................................... 541
A.10 Information List ................................................................................................................... 545

A.11 Measured Values................................................................................................................ 582
Index.................................................................................................................................................. 589
xii 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
Introduction 1
The SIPROTEC® 4 7SJ62/63/64 devices are introduced in this section. An overview
of the devices is presented in their application, characteristics, and scope of functions.
1.1 Overall Operation 2

1.2 Applications 6
1.3 Characteristics 9
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 1
C53000–G1140–C147–1
Introduction
1.1 Overall Operation
The SIPROTEC® 4 7SJ62/63/64 are numerical, multi-functional, protective and con-

trol devices equipped with a powerful microprocessor. All tasks, such as the acquisi-
tion of the measured quantities, issuing of commands to circuit breakers and other pri-
mary power system equipment, are processed in a completely digital way. Figure 1-1
illustrates the basic structure of the devices 7SJ62/63, Figure 1-1 illustrates the basic
structure of the device 7SJ64.
Analog Inputs The measuring inputs (MI) section consists of current and voltage transformers. They
convert the signals from the measuring transducers to levels appropriate for the inter-
nal processing of the device.
Four current inputs are available in the MI section. Three inputs are used for measur-
ing of the phase currents. The use of the fourth input depends on the version of the
device ordered. The fourth input can be used for measuring the ground current as the
residual of the phase current transformers (In), or for measuring the ground current
from a separate current transformer (INs/3I0). The latter is used in a highly sensitive
MI IA AD µC AV
Ia ERROR
A
RUN
Ib
Status
Ic
Output
In / INs Relays, User-
Programmable
Va
LEDs
on the Front
Vb Panel, User-
µC Programmable
Vc / 3V0 D
Display on
the Front Panel
7 8 9
Operator 4 5 6 Front To
Control Panel PC Port PC
1 2 3
. 0 +/- System To
Serial Interface SCADA
CTRL ESC ENTER
Rear PC/Modem/
Binary Inputs, Service Port RTD-Box
Programmable
Time DCF 77/
Uaux. Power Supply Synchronization IRIG B
Figure 1-1 Hardware Structure of the Numerical Device 7SJ62/63
2 7SJ62/63/64 Manual
C53000–G1140–C147–1
Overall Operation
ground fault protective scheme (INs) or as a polarizing 3I0 current to determine the fault
direction.
The 7SJ62/63 has three voltage inputs in the MI section. The inputs can either be used
to measure the three phase-ground voltages, or two phase-phase voltages and 3V0
from, for example, open delta voltage transformers. Displacement voltage is another
term used for 3V0. It is also possible to connect two phase-to-phase voltages in open-
delta connection.
The 4 voltage transformers of 7SJ64 can either be applied for the input of 3 phase-
ground voltages, one displacement voltage Uen or a further voltage for the synchroniz-
ing function.
The analog input quantities from the MI stage are passed on to the input amplification
(IA) stage, which provides high-resistance terminations for the analog quantities. The
IA stage consists of filters for processing the measured values. The filters are opti-
mized with regard to bandwidth and processing speed.
MI IA AD µC AV
Ia ERROR
A
RUN
Ib
Status
Ic
In / INs Output
Relays, User-
Programmable
Va
LEDs
Vb on the Front
Panel, User-
µC Programmable
Vc
Display on
Vsyn/3V0
D the Front Panel
Front To
PC Port PC
7 8 9
Operator 4 5 6 System
Control Panel To
1 2 3 Serial Interface SCADA
. 0 +/-
Rear PC/Modem/
CTRL ESC ENTER Service Port RTD-Box
Additional
Binary Inputs, Port RTD-Box
Programmable
Time DCF 77/
Uaux. Power Supply Synchronization IRIG B
Figure 1-2 Hardware Structure of the Numerical Device 7SJ64
C53000–G1140–C147–1
Introduction
The analog-to-digital (AD) stage consists of memory components, a multiplexer, and

an analog-to-digital (A/D) converter. The A/D converter processes the analog signals
from the IA stage. The digital signals from the converter are input to the microcomputer
system where they are processed as numerical values in the residing algorithms.
Microcomputer The actual protection and control functions of the 7SJ62/63/64 are processed in the
System microcomputer system (µC). In addition, the µC controls the measured quantities.
Specifically, the µC performs:
− Filtering and preparation of the measured quantities
− Continuous monitoring of the measured quantities
− Monitoring of the pickup conditions for the individual elements and functions
− Evaluation of limit values and sequences in time
− Control of signals for the logic functions
− Decision for trip, close, and other control commands
− Output of control commands for switching devices (output contacts)
− Recording of messages and data for events, alarms, faults, and control actions, and
provision of their data for analysis
− Management of the operating system and the associated functions such as data re-
cording, real-time clock, communications, interfaces, etc.
Binary Inputs and The µC obtains external information through the binary inputs such as blocking com-
Outputs mands for protective elements or position indications of circuit breakers. The µC is-
sues commands to external equipment via the output contacts. These output com-
mands are generally used to operate circuit breakers or other switching devices. They
can also be connected to other protective devices, annunciators, or external carrier
equipment for use in Pilot-Relaying schemes.
Front Elements The devices with integrated or detached operator panel light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
and a display screen (LCD) on the front panel providing information such as messages
related to events and functional status of the device.
Integrated control and numeric keys in conjunction with the LCD facilitate local inter-
action with the 7SJ62/63/64. All information of the device can be accessed using the
integrated control and numeric keys. The information includes protective and control
settings, operating and fault messages, and metering values (see also Chapter 2).
The settings can be modified; the procedures are discussed in Chapter 2. In addition,
control of circuit breakers and other equipment is possible from the 7SJ62/63/64 front
panel.
Serial Interfaces A serial PC Port on device is provided for local communications with the 7SJ62/63/
64 through a personal computer. Convenient operation of all functions of the device is
possible. The operating program DIGSI® 4 is required which facilitates a comfortable
handling of all device functions.
A separate Service Port can be provided for remote communications via a modem,
or substation computer. The operating program DIGSI® 4 is required. This port is es-
pecially well suited for the fixed wiring of the devices to the PC or operation via a mo-
C53000–G1140–C147–1
Overall Operation
dem. The service port can also be used to connect a RTD-Box (= resistance temper-
ature detector) for entering external temperatures (e.g. for overload protection).
The additional port (only 7SJ64) is exclusively designed for the connection of a RTD-
Box (= resistance temperature detector) for entering external temperatures.
All 7SJ62/63/64 data can be transferred to a central control and monitor system (RTU/
SCADA) through the Scada Port. Various protocols and physical interfaces are avail-
able to suit the particular application.
A further port is provided for the time synchronization of the internal clock via external
synchronization sources.
Further communications protocols can be realized via additional interface modules.
Power Supply The 7SJ62/63/64 can be supplied with any of the common power supply voltages from
24 VDC to 250 VDC. The device can also be supplied with 115 VAC. Momentary dips
of the supply voltage up to 50 ms are bridged by a capacitor (see Technical Data, Sub-
section 4.1). Voltage dips can occur, for example, if the voltage supply system (sub-
station battery) becomes short-circuited or experiences a severe variation in load.
C53000–G1140–C147–1
Introduction
1.2 Applications
The numerical, multi-functional SIPROTEC® 4 7SJ62/63/64 are versatile devices de-

signed for many applications. The 7SJ62/63/64 can be used as protective, control,
and monitoring devices for distribution feeders and transmission lines of any voltage
in networks that are grounded, low-resistance grounded, ungrounded, or of a compen-
sated neutral point structure. The devices are suited for networks that are radial or
looped, and for lines with single or multi-terminal feeds. The 7SJ62/63/64 are
equipped with motor protection applicable for asynchronous machines of all sizes.
The 7SJ62/63/64 includes the functions that are necessary for protection, monitoring
of circuit breaker positions, and control of the circuit breakers in straight bus applica-
tions or breaker-and-a-half configurations; therefore, the devices can be universally
employed. The 7SJ62/63/64 provides excellent backup facilities of differential protec-
tive schemes of lines, transformers, generators, motors, and busbars of all voltage lev-
els.
Protective Non-directional overcurrent protection (50, 50N, 51, 51N) is the basis of the 7SJ62/63/
Functions 64. Four definite-time overcurrent protective elements exist, two for the phase and two
for the ground (50 and 50N) currents. The elements can be set with no time delay,
where instantaneous tripping is desired. Inverse-time overcurrent protective elements
are also available for both the phase and the ground (51 and 51N) currents. The com-
mon U.S. ANSI time-characteristics are also available. Alternatively, user-defined
characteristics can be programmed or IEC characteristics can be selected.
Depending on the version of the device that is ordered, the non-directional overcurrent
protection can be supplemented with directional overcurrent protection (67, 67N),
breaker failure protection (50BF), and sensitive ground fault detection for high-resis-
tance ground faults or systems that are resistively grounded (50 Ns, 67Ns). The highly
sensitive ground fault detection can be directional or non-directional.
Other protective functions are available, some of which depend on the version of the
device that is ordered. These additional functions include negative sequence (phase
balance) current protection (46), automatic reclosing (79), thermal overload protection
(49), overvoltage protection (59), undervoltage protection (27), and over/under fre-
quency protection (81O/U). For motor protection, starting time supervision (48), start
inhibit (66/68), and undercurrent monitoring (37) are optionally available. Finally, the
7SJ62/63/64 is equipped with a fault locator.
A protection feature can be ordered for the detection of intermittent ground faults
which detects and accumulates transient ground faults.
External detectors account for ambient temperatures or coolant temperatures (by
means of an external RTD-box).
Before reclosing after three-pole tripping 7SJ64 can verify the validity of the reclosure
by voltage check and/or synchronous check. The synchronization function can also be
controlled externally.
Control Functions The 7SJ62/63/64 supports all control and monitoring functions that are required for op-
erating medium to high-voltage substations. A major application is the reliable control
of switchgear or circuit breakers. Such control can be accomplished via the integrated
operator panel, the system interface, the binary inputs, and the serial port using a per-
sonal computer with DIGSI® 4.
C53000–G1140–C147–1
Applications
The status of the primary equipment or auxiliary devices can be transmitted to the
7SJ62/63/64 via auxiliary contacts connected to binary inputs. The present status (or
position) of the primary equipment can be displayed on the 7SJ62/63/64, and used for
interlocking or, if applicable, plausibility monitoring. Only the quantity of binary inputs
and outputs available in the 7SJ62/63/64 limits the number of primary devices that can
be operated. Depending on the primary equipment being controlled, one binary input
(single indication) or two binary inputs (double indication) can be used in the position
monitoring process.
The capability of switching primary equipment can be restricted by a setting associat-
ed with switching authority – Local, DIGSI® 4 PC, or Remote, and by the operating
mode – Interlocked or Non-Interlocked, with password request. Processing of inter-
locking conditions for switching (e.g. switching error protection) can be established
with the aid of integrated, user-configurable logic functions.
Messages and The operating messages provide information about conditions in the power system
Measured Values; and the 7SJ62/63/64. Measurement quantities and values that are calculated can be
Recording of Event displayed locally and communicated via the serial interfaces.
and Fault Data
Messages of the 7SJ62/63/64 can be indicated by a number of programmable LEDs
on the front panel, externally processed through programmable output contacts, and
communicated via the serial interfaces (see Communication below).
Important events and changes in conditions are saved under Annunciation in the
Event Log or the Trip Log, the latter being used for faults. Waveform capture is avail-
able, as an option.
Communication Serial interfaces are available for communications with PC’s, RTU’s, and SCADA sys-
tems.
A 9-pin D-subminiature female connector on the front panel is used for local commu-
nications with a personal computer. DIGSI® 4 software is required to communicate via
this port. Using the DIGSI® 4 software, settings and configuration can be made to the
relay, Realtime operating quantities can be viewed, Waveform capture and Event Log
records can be displayed, and controls can be issued.
A DIGSI® 4 service interface port, a system (SCADA) port and a time-sync port (IRIG-
B or DCF77) are optionally available on the rear of the device.
A rear service interface can be supplied as RS-232, RS-485, or multimode fiber optics
type ST. DIGSI® 4 software is required to communicate via this port.
The additional port (only 7SJ64) is designed exclusively for connection of a RTD-Box
(= resistance temperature detector) for entering external temperatures. It can also be
operated via data lines or fibre optic cables.
A rear system interface can be supplied as RS-232, RS-485, or multimode fiber optics
type ST for communications between the 7SJ62/63/64 and a PC’s, RTU’s, or SCADA
systems Standard Protocols, IEC 60870–5–103 are available via the system port. In-
tegration of the devices into the automation systems SINAUT® LSA and SICAM® also
take place with this profile.
Alternatively, a field bus coupling with PROFIBUS FMS is available for the 7SJ62/63/
64. The PROFIBUS FMS is performed in accordance with IEC 61850, is an open com-
munications standard that particularly has wide acceptance in process control and au-
tomation engineering, with especially high performance. A profile has been defined for
the PROFIBUS communication that covers all of the information types required for
C53000–G1140–C147–1
Introduction
protective and process control engineering. The integration of the devices into the en-
ergy automation system SICAM® can also take place with this profile.
Besides the field-bus connection with PROFIBUS FMS, further couplings are possible
with PROFIBUS DP and the protocols DNP3.0 and MODBUS. These protocols do not
support all possibilities which are offered by PROFIBUS FMS.
C53000–G1140–C147–1
Characteristics
1.3 Characteristics
General • Powerful 32-bit microprocessor system.

Characteristics
• Complete digital processing and control of measured values, from the sampling of
the analog input quantities to the initiation of outputs for, as an example, tripping or
closing circuit breakers or other switchgear devices.
• Total electrical separation between the processing stages of the 7SJ62/63/64 and
the external transformer circuits, control circuits, and DC supply circuit because of
the design of the binary inputs, outputs, and the DC converters.
• Complete set of functions necessary for the proper protection of lines, feeders, mo-
tors, and busbars.
• Easy devise operation through an integrated operator panel or by means of a con-
nected personal computer running DIGSI® 4.
• Continuous calculation and display of measured quantities on the front of the de-
vice.
• Storage of min/max measured values (slave pointer function) and storage of long-
term mean values;
• Recording of event data, fault data, and waveform captures with SER information
to be used for analysis and troubleshooting.
• Constant monitoring of the measurement quantities, as well as continuous self-di-
agnostics covering the hardware and software.
• Communication with SCADA or substation controller equipment via serial interfaces
through the choice of data cable, modem, or optical fibers.
• Battery-buffered clock that can be synchronized with an IRIG-B (or DCF77) signal,
binary input signal, or system interface command;
• Recording of circuit breaker statistics including the number of trip signals sent and
the accumulated, interrupted currents of each pole of the circuit breaker;
• Tracking of operating hours (time when load is supplied) of the equipment being
protected;
• Commissioning aids such as connection check, direction determination, status in-
dication of all binary inputs/outputs and display of test recordings.
Time-Overcurrent • Two instantaneous (Definite-Time) overcurrent elements and an inverse-time over-

Protection current element, for both phase protection and ground protection (50-1, 50-2, 51,
50N-1, 50N-2, and 51N);
• The 50 and 50N elements can be set with definite-time delay;
• Common ANSI and IEC time overcurrent curves are available for 51 and 51N, or
user defined characteristics can be employed.
• Blocking capability for reverse-interlocking busbar protection, or directional com-
parison line protection;
• Second harmonic inrush restraint of 50, 50N, 51, and 51N for transformer energiz-
ing;
• Instantaneous tripping by any overcurrent element upon manual closure of a circuit
breaker, if selected (Switch-Onto-Fault-Protection).
C53000–G1140–C147–1
Introduction
Directional Time- • Three directional time-overcurrent elements for both phase protection and ground
Overcurrent protection (67-1, 67-2, 67-TOC, 67N-1, 67N-2, and 67N-TOC). The 67 and 67N el-
Protection ements can have instantaneous or definite-time tripping. The 67-TOC and 67N-
TOC elements have inverse-time characteristics. The directional time-overcurrent
elements are independent of the non-directional time-overcurrent elements;
• Fault direction is calculated for each phase and direction is determined indepen-
dently for phase faults (using phase-phase voltage opposite of the current being
compared) and for ground faults (using zero sequence quantities).
Dynamic Cold Load • Dynamic adjustments of the pickup values and the tripping times of both the direc-
Setting Adjustment tional and non-directional time-overcurrent functions when cold load conditions are
anticipated;
• Cold load conditions are anticipated when the circuit breaker has been in the open
position for an extended period of time. Circuit breaker position is determined by
auxiliary contacts or the state of a sensitive overcurrent element.
• Activation via automatic reclosure (AR) possible;
• Start also possible via binary input.
Voltage Protection • Two undervoltage elements 27-1 and 27-2 measuring positive sequence voltage;
• Choice of current supervision for 27-1 and 27-2;
• Adjustable dropout voltage for 27-1;
• Separate two overvoltage elements 59-1 and 59-2.
Negative Sequence • Two definite-time elements 46-1 and 46-2 and one inverse-time element 46-TOC;
Current Protection • Common U.S. ANSI time-characteristics or IEC characteristics are available for 46-
TOC.
Starting Time • Current dependent tripping based on an evaluation of the motor starting current.
Monitoring for
• Blocked rotor protection.
Motors
Start Inhibit • Rotor temperature is calculated based on the stator currents;

for Motors
• Start-up is permitted only if the rotor has sufficient thermal reserves for a complete
start-up;
• Disabling of the start inhibit is possible if an emergency start-up is required.
Frequency • Four elements that are independently adjustable for function - underfrequency or
Protection overfrequency, pickup, and time delay;
• Insensitive to harmonics and abrupt phase angle changes;
• Adjustable undervoltage blocking.
Thermal Overload • Temperature rise of the protected equipment is calculated using a thermal homo-
Protection geneous-body model that takes into account energy entering the equipment and
energy losses. Thermal overload protection has full memory capability;
10 7SJ62/63/64 Manual
C53000–G1140–C147–1
Characteristics
• True r.m.s. calculation;

• Adjustable warning levels based on temperature rise and current magnitude;
• Additional time constant setting for motors to accommodate both the motor rotating
and the motor at standstill.
• Integration of ambient temperature or coolant temperature is possible via external
temperature sensors and RTD-Box.
Monitoring • Availability of the 7SJ62/63/64 is greatly increased because of self-monitoring of

Functions the internal measurement circuits, power supply, hardware, and software;
• Current transformer and voltage transformer secondary circuits are monitored us-
ing summation and symmetry check techniques;
• Trip circuit monitoring;
• Phase rotation.
Sensitive Ground • Ideal for sensing a grounded phase on ungrounded networks;

Fault Detection
• Displacement voltage (3V0) is calculated from the measurements of the three
phase-ground voltages, or measured from the output of, for example, voltage trans-
formers connected in a open delta configuration;
• Ground fault detection optionally with high sensitivity or for large current range;
• Two sensitive ground fault instantaneous overcurrent elements 50Ns-1 and 50Ns-
2 that can have definite time delay;
• Pickup currents of 50Ns-1 and 50Ns-2 are adjustable and can be set very sensitive
(as low as 1 mA);
• Sensitive ground fault time-overcurrent element 51Ns is available instead of 50Ns-
1, if selected;
• Time-current characteristic curve for 51Ns is defined by the user;
• Two ground fault elements 67Ns-1 and 67Ns-2 that can be set as non-directional,
forward sensing directional, or reverse sensing directional;
• Fault direction is determined by calculating the zero sequence real power or reac-
tive power, as determined by a setting;
• Directional characteristics of 67Ns-1 and 67Ns-2 are adjustable;
• Optionally applicable as additional ground fault protection.
Intermittent Ground • Detects and accumulates intermittent ground faults;

Fault Protection
• Tripping after configurable total time.
Automatic • Single-shot or multi-shot;

Reclosing
• Dead times associated with the first, second, third, and fourth shots are program-
mable and can be different from one another. Dead times for the remaining shots
are identical to the dead time for the fourth shot;
• Protective elements that initiate automatic reclosing are selectable. The choices
can be different for phase faults and ground faults;
• Different programs for phase and ground faults;
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 11
C53000–G1140–C147–1
Introduction
• Monitoring of the circuit breaker response during reclosing sequence is possible.

• Interaction to time overcurrent protection stages and ground fault stages. They can
be blocked in dependence of the reclosing cycle or released instantaneously;
• Synchronous reclosing is possible (only 7SJ64) in combination with the integrated
synchronizing feature.
Fault Location • Triggers include a trip command, reset of the trip command, operation of a protec-
tive element, and an external command via a binary input;
• Fault distance is calculated and given in secondary ohms, miles, or kilometers.
Breaker Failure • Breaker failure condition determined by current flow and/or evaluation of the circuit
Protection breaker auxiliary contacts after a trip signal has been issued;
• Breaker failure protection initiated by the tripping of any integrated protective ele-
ment that trips the circuit breaker (internal start);
• Initiation possible through a binary input from an external protective device (exter-
nal start);
• Initiation possible through the integrated control function (control start).
Synchronizing • Verification of the synchronous conditions before reclosing after three-pole tripping;
Function (only
• Fast measurement of the voltage difference ∆U, the phase angle difference ∆ϕ and
7SJ64)
the frequency difference ∆f;
• Alternatively, check of the de-energized state before reclosing;
• Switching possible for asynchronous system conditions with prediction of the syn-
chronization time;
• Settable minimum and maximum voltage;
• Verification of the synchronous conditions or de-energized state also possible be-
fore the manual closing of the circuit breaker, with separate limit values;
• Measurement also possible via transformer without external intermediate matching
transformer;
• Measuring voltages optionally phase–phase or phase–ground.
RTD-Boxes • Detection of any ambient temperatures or coolant temperatures by means of RTD-

Boxes and external temperature sensors.
Phase Rotation • Selectable ABC or ACB with a setting (static) or binary input (dynamic).
User-defined • Internal and external signals can be logically combined to establish user-defined
Functions logic functions;
• All common logic functions are available for programming (AND, OR,NOT, Exclu-
sive OR, etc.);
• Time delays and limit value inquiries are available;
• Processing of measured values, including zero suppression, adding a knee charac-
teristic for a transducer input, and live-zero monitoring.
12 7SJ62/63/64 Manual
C53000–G1140–C147–1
Characteristics
Breaker Control • Circuit breakers can be opened and closed via the process control keys (models
with graphic displays only) or the programmable function keys on the front panel,
through the SCADA, or through the front PC interface using a personal computer
with DIGSI® 4;
• Circuit breakers are monitored via the breaker auxiliary contacts;
• Plausibility monitoring of the circuit breaker position and check of interlocking condi-
tions. n
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 13
C53000–G1140–C147–1
Introduction
14 7SJ62/63/64 Manual
C53000–G1140–C147–1
Functions 2
This chapter describes the numerous functions available on the SIPROTEC® 7SJ62/
63/64 relay. The setting options for each function are defined, including instructions for
reporting setting values and formulas where required.
2.1 General 17
2.2 Overcurrent Protection (50, 50N, 51, 51N) 38
2.3 Directional Overcurrent Protection (67, 67N) 64
2.4 Dynamic Cold Load Pick-Up Function (50c, 50Nc, 51Nc, 67c, 67Nc) 87
2.5 Voltage Protection (27, 59) 94
2.6 Negative Sequence Protection (46) 104
2.7 Motor Protection (Motor Starting Protection, 48 and Start Inhibit for Motors,
66/68) 112
2.8 Frequency Protection (81 O/U) 126
2.9 Thermal Overload Protection (49) 130
2.10 Monitoring Functions 140
2.11 Sensitive Ground Fault Detection (64, 50Ns, 67Ns) 155
2.12 Intermittent Ground Fault Protection 170
2.13 Automatic Reclosing System (79M) 177
2.14 Fault Location 201
2.15 Breaker Failure Protection (50BF) 205
2.16 Synchronism and Voltage Check (7SJ64 only) 210
2.17 Temperature Detection via RTD-boxes 226
2.18 Phase Rotation 235
2.19 Protection Function Logic 236
2.20 Auxiliary Functions 239
2.21 Breaker Control 252
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 15
C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
Regionalization The SIPROTEC® 7SJ62/63/64 devices are offered in regional versions. The prepared
functions are adapted to the technical requirements of the regions. The user should
purchase only the functional scope that is needed.
Table 2-1 Regionalization
Function Region DE Region Worldwide Region US

Germany Worldwide USA
Language German English American English
Frequency 50 Hz 50 Hz / 60 Hz 60 Hz
Default 50 Hz
Unit of distance given by km km / Miles Miles

Fault Locator Default km
Disk-emulation for reset X for IEC- and ANSI X

characteristics of inverse Curves
time-overcurrent elements
(emulation of
(electromechanical
elements)
Characteristic curves for

inverse time-overcurrent
elements
IEC Curves X X –
Default IEC
Characteristic Curves
X
ANSI Curves – X
Automatic X – –
Reclosing
Automatic Reclosing – X X
with zone sequence
coordination
Control Buttons on Front Red, Green Red, Green Control Gray Colored
Panel (7SJ63, 7SJ64) Control Buttons Buttons Control Buttons
Legend
(X) – Selectable Option
(–) – Function not available for this region
16 7SJ62/63/64 Manual
C53000-G1140-C147-1
General
2.1 General
The settings associated with the various device functions may be modified using the
controls on the front panel of the device or by using the operator interface in DIGSI® 4
in conjunction with a personal computer. The SIPROTEC® 4–System Manual gives a
detailed description of the procedure. Therefore, it will only be described briefly here.
Password No. 5 is required to modify individual settings.
:
From PC with To select a function, the user should double-click on Settings, and then double-click
DIGSI® 4 on the desired setting function (e.g. Power System Data 1 is selected by double-
clicking Settings, and then double-clicking Power System Data 1 as illustrated
in Figure 2-1).
Figure 2-1 Navigating Using DIGSI® 4 — Example
A dialog box associated with the selected function is displayed (e.g., if Power Sys-
tem Data 1 function is selected, the dialog box shown in Figure 2-2 will appear). If
a function contains many settings, the dialog box may include multiple windows. In this
situation, the user can select individual windows via tabs located at the top of the dia-
log box (e.g., In Figure 2-2, tabs exist for Power System, CT’s, VT’s, and Break-
er).
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 17
C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
Figure 2-2 Power System Data Dialog Box in DIGSI® 4 — Example
The left column of the dialog box (identified as the No. column) contains the four-digit
address number of the setting. The middle column of the dialog box (identified as the
Settings column) contains the title of the setting, and the right column of the dialog
box (identified as the Value column) contains the current value of the setting in text
or numerical format. When the mouse cursor is positioned over a numerical field in the
Value column, the allowable range is shown.
To modify a setting, the user must click on the setting value which is displayed in the
Value column.
Text Values When a text setting value is selected, a pull-down menu of possible setting options is
displayed. To modify the setting, the user simply clicks on the desired option. The pull-
down menu closes, and the new setting value appears in the Value column.
Numerical Values When a numerical setting value is selected, the setting is modified using the number
(including ∞) keys, if applicable, with a decimal comma (not a decimal point). A value of “infinity”
may be entered by pressing the small o key twice. The setting modification is con-
firmed by clicking on Apply, or the user may select another setting to modify.
If the value entered is outside the allowable range, a message block appears on the
screen describing the error and displaying the acceptable range of values. To ac-
knowledge the message, the user should click OK, and the original value reappears.
A new entry can be made or another setting value can be modified.
Primary or Setting values can be entered and displayed in primary terms or secondary terms, as
Secondary Values desired. DIGSI® 4 automatically performs the conversions. For this, the station data
have to be entered correctly.
18 7SJ62/63/64 Manual
C53000-G1140-C147-1
General
To switch between primary values and secondary values:

G Click on Options in the menu bar, as shown in Figure 2-3.
G Click on the desired alternative.
Figure 2-3 Selection of Primary or Secondary Value Entry — Example
Additional Settings Those settings that are modified only in special cases are typically hidden. They may
be made visible by checking on Display Additional Settings.
2.1.1 Configuration of Functions
General The 7SJ62/63/64 relay contains selectable protection functions as well as many other
functions, based on the options purchased. The first step in configuring the relay is to
determine which functions are required.
Example for the configuration of functional scope:
A protected system consists of overhead and underground feeders. Since automatic
reclosing is only needed for the overhead feeders, the automatic reclosing function is
not configured or “Disabled” for the relays protecting the underground feeders.
The available functions must be configured as enabled or disabled. For individual
functions, the choice between several alternatives may be presented, as described
below.
Functions configured as disabled are not processed by the 7SJ62/63/64. There are
no messages, and corresponding settings (functions, limit values) are not displayed
during detailed settings.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 19
C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
Note:
Available functions and default settings are depending on the ordering code of the re-
lay (see table 2-1 and ordering code in the appendix for details).
Determination of Configuration settings must be entered using a PC and the software program
Functional Scope DIGSI® 4 and transferred via the front serial port, or via the DIGSI® 4 serial port inter-
face. Operation via DIGSI® 4 is described in the SIPROTEC® 4 System Manual.
Entry of password No. 7 (for setting modification) is required to modify configuration
settings (see Section 4). Without the password, the settings may be read, but may not
be modified and transmitted to the device.
The functional scope with the available alternatives is set in the Device Configu-
ration dialog box to match equipment requirements.
Special Most settings are self-explaining. Peculiarities will be explained in the following.
Characteristics
If use of the setting group change function is desired, address 0103 Grp Chge OP-
TION should be set to Enabled. In this case, up to four different groups of settings
(see Chapter 6) may be entered quickly and easily during device operation. Only one
setting group may be selected and used if the setting is Disabled.
For the relay elements associated with non-directional overcurrent protection (both
phase and ground), various tripping characteristics may be selected at the addresses
0112 Charac. Phase and 0113 Charac. Ground. If only the definite time char-
acteristic is desired, then Definite Time should be selected. Additionally, depend-
ing on the relay model ordered, various inverse time characteristics are available
(based on either IEC (TOC IEC) standards or ANSI (TOC ANSI) standards), or user
defined characteristics may be specified. The dropout behavior of the IEC and ANSI
curves will be specified later during the setting (addresses 1210 and 1310), however,
for the user-defined characteristic you determine in address 0112 and 0113 whether
to specify only the pick-up characteristic (User Defined PU) or the pick-up and the
dropout characteristic (User def. Reset).
The superimposed high-current stage 50-2 is available in all these cases. Non-direc-
tional overcurrent protection may be defeated during configuration by selecting Dis-
abled.
For directional overcurrent protection, the same information can be entered at ad-
dresses 0115 67/67-TOC (phase) and 0116 67N/67N-TOC (ground) that was en-
tered for the non-directional overcurrent protection at addresses 0112 and 0113.
For sensitive ground fault protection, address 0131 Sens. Gnd Fault is used to
specify whether the function should be Disabled, enabled with definite time tripping
characteristics only (Definite Time), or enabled with a user defined inverse time
characteristic (User Defined PU).
For the intermittent ground-fault protection specify in address 0133 INTERM.EF the
measured quantity (with Ignd, with 3I0 or with Ignd,sens.) which is to be
used by this protection function.
For negative sequence protection, address 0140 46 is used to specify whether the
function should be Disabled, enabled with Definite Time tripping characteristics
only, or enabled with an inverse time characteristic (TOC IEC or TOC ANSI).
20 7SJ62/63/64 Manual
C53000-G1140-C147-1
General
Set in address 0142 49 for the overload protection whether (With amb. temp.) or
not (No ambient temp) the thermal replica of the overload protection will account
for a coolant temperature or ambient temperature or whether the entire function is set
to Disabled.
Up to four function groups are available for the synchronizing function. They are en-
abled in address 016x (x = 1 ... 4). Parameters 0161 25 Function 1 to 0164 25
Function 4 indicate whether a synchronizing function is to be Disabled or en-
abled. The latter is determined by pre-selecting the operating mode ASYN/SYNCHRON
(switching takes place for asynchronous and synchronous conditions) or SYNCHRO-
CHECK (corresponds to the classical synchro-check function). The function groups
which are configured to enabled via ASYN/SYNCHRON or SYNCHROCHECK are dis-
played when you select the synchronizing function; function groups set to Disabled
are hidden.
For trip circuit monitoring, address 00182 74 Trip Ct Supv is used to specify
whether two binary inputs should be utilized (2 Binary Inputs), one binary input
should be utilized (1 Binary Input), or the function should be Disabled.
If you want to detect an ambient temperature or a coolant temperature and send the
information to the overload protection, specify in address 0190 RTD-BOX INPUT the
port to which the RTD-box is connected. For 7SJ62/63 Port C (service port) is used
for this purpose, for 7SJ64 either Port C (service port) or Port D (additional port).
The number and transmission type of the temperature detectors (RTD = Resistance
Temperature Detector) can be specified in address 0191 RTD CONNECTION: 6 RTD
simplex or 6 RTD HDX (with one RTD-box) or 12 RTD HDX (with two RTD-boxes).
Appendix A.3.4 gives design examples. The settings in address 0191 has to comply
with those at the RTD-box (see Subsection 2.17.2).
Addr. Setting Title Setting Options Default Setting Comments

103 Grp Chge OPTION Disabled Disabled Setting Group Change Option
Enabled
104 OSC. FAULT REC. Disabled Disabled Oscillographic Fault Records

Enabled
112 Charac. Phase Disabled Definite Time only 50/51
Definite Time only
Time Overcurrent Curve IEC
Time Overcurrent Curve ANSI
User Defined Pickup Curve
User Defined Pickup and Reset Curve
113 Charac. Ground Disabled Definite Time only 50N/51N
Definite Time only
115 67/67-TOC Disabled Definite Time only 67, 67-TOC
Definite Time only
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 21
C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions

116 67N/67N-TOC Disabled Definite Time only 67N, 67N-TOC
Definite Time only
117 Coldload Pickup Disabled Disabled Cold Load Pickup

Enabled
122 InrushRestraint Disabled Disabled 2nd Harmonic Inrush Res-

Enabled traint
131 Sens. Gnd Fault Disabled Disabled sensitive Ground fault

Definite Time only
133 INTERM.EF Disabled Disabled Intermittent earth fault protec-

with Ignd (measured) tion
with 3I0 (calculated)
with Ignd,sensitive (measured)
140 46 Disabled Disabled 46 Negative Sequence Pro-

Time Overcurrent Curve ANSI tection
Definite Time only
141 48 Disabled Disabled 48 Startup Supervision of

Enabled Motors
142 49 Disabled Disabled 49 Thermal Overload Protec-
Without ambient temperature measu- tion
rement
With ambient temperature measure-
ment
143 66 #of Starts Disabled Disabled 66 Startup Counter for Motors

Enabled
150 27/59 Disabled Disabled 27, 59 Under/Overvoltage

Enabled Protection
154 81 O/U Disabled Disabled 81 Over/Underfrequency Pro-

Enabled tection
161 25 Function 1 Disabled Disabled 25 Function group 1

ASYN/SYNCHRON
SYNCHROCHECK

ASYN/SYNCHRON
SYNCHROCHECK

ASYN/SYNCHRON
SYNCHROCHECK

ASYN/SYNCHRON
SYNCHROCHECK
22 7SJ62/63/64 Manual
C53000-G1140-C147-1
General

170 50BF Disabled Disabled 50BF Breaker Failure Protec-
Enabled tion
171 79 Auto Recl. Disabled Disabled 79 Auto-Reclose Function

Enabled
180 Fault Locator Disabled Disabled Fault Locator

Enabled
182 74 Trip Ct Supv Disabled Disabled 74TC Trip Circuit Supervision

with 2 Binary Inputs
with 1 Binary Input
190 RTD-BOX INPUT Disabled Disabled External Temperature Input

Port C
Port D (only 7SJ64)
191 RTD CONNEC- 6 RTD simplex operation 6 RTD simplex ope- Ext. Temperature Input Con-
TION 6 RTD half duplex operation ration nection Type
12 RTD half duplex operation
2.1.2 General Device Data
The device requires some general information such as the type of annunciation to be
issued in the event a power system fault occurs.
The required data can be entered directly at the device if it features an integrated or
detached operator panel: Select the MAIN MENU by pressing the MENU key. Using the
key, select Settings, and then press the key to navigate to the SETTINGS
display. There use the key to select the Device submenu.
Double-click SETTINGS in DIGSI® 4 and the corresponding menu appears. A dialog
box will open under the option Device in which you can configure the individual pa-
rameters.
“No Trip – No Flag” The indication of messages masked to local LEDs, and the maintenance of spontane-
Option ous messages, can be made dependent on whether the device has issued a trip sig-
nal. In this situation, messages are not reported, if one or more protective functions
have picked up on a fault, but a trip signal has not been issued yet by the device be-
cause the fault was cleared by another device (for instance, in another line). These
messages are then limited to faults in the line to be protected.
Figure 2-4 shows the logic diagram for this function. When the relay drops off, station-
ary conditions (fault display on every pickup/on trip only; trip/no trip) decide whether
the new fault will be stored or reset.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 23
C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
0610 FltDisp.LED/LCD
Targets on every PU
“1“
Targets on Trip only
F# 00511
&
Relay TRIP Reset LED und LCD-Messages
Trip Signal drop out
Figure 2-4 Generation of Reset Command for LED and LCD Display Memory
Spontaneous You can determine whether or not the most important data of a fault event is displayed
Annunciations on automatically after the fault has occurred (see also Subsection 2.20.1.2).
the Display
2.1.2.1 Setting Notes
Pickup of a new protective function generally turns off any previously set light displays,
so that only the latest fault is displayed at any time. It can be selected whether the
stored LED displays and the spontaneous messages on the display appear upon re-
newed pickup, or only after a renewed trip signal is issued. In order to enter the desired
type of display, select the sub-menu Device in the SETTINGS menu. The two alter-
natives (Target on PU or Target on TRIP) are selected at address 0610
FltDisp.LED/LCD.
Use parameter 0611 Spont. FltDisp. to specify whether or not a spontaneous
fault annunciation will appear on the display.

610 FltDisp.LED/LCD Display Targets on every Display Targets on Fault Display on LED / LCD
Pickup every Pickup
Display Targets on TRIP only
611 Spont. FltDisp. YES NO Spontaneous display of

NO flt.annunciations
2.1.2.2 Information Overview
F.No. Alarm Comments

00003 >Time Synch >Synchronize Internal Real Time Clock
00005 >Reset LED >Reset LED
---- >Light on >Back Light on
00051 Device OK Device is Operational and Protecting
00052 ProtActive At Least 1 Protection Funct. is Active
24 7SJ62/63/64 Manual
C53000-G1140-C147-1
General

00055 Reset Device Reset Device
00056 Initial Start Initial Start of Device
00060 Reset LED Reset LED
00067 Resume Resume
00068 Clock SyncError Clock Synchronization Error
00069 DayLightSavTime Daylight Saving Time
00110 Event Lost Event lost
00113 Flag Lost Flag Lost
00125 Chatter ON Chatter ON
00140 Error Sum Alarm Error with a summary alarm
00160 Alarm Sum Event Alarm Summary Event
00178 I/O-Board error I/O-Board Error
00144 Error 5V Error 5V
00145 Error 0V Error 0V
00146 Error -5V Error -5V
00147 Error PwrSupply Error Power Supply
00177 Fail Battery Failure: Battery empty
00070 Settings Calc. Setting calculation is running
00071 Settings Check Settings Check
00072 Level-2 change Level-2 change
00073 Local change Local setting change
00183 Error Board 1 Error Board 1
00301 Pow.Sys.Flt. Power System fault
00302 Fault Event Fault Event
00303 sens Gnd flt sensitive Ground fault
---- DataStop Stop data transmission
00016 >DataStop >Stop data transmission
---- Test mode Test mode
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 25
C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions

00015 >Test mode >Test mode
---- Feeder gnd Feeder GROUNDED
---- Brk OPENED Breaker OPENED
---- HWTestMod Hardware Test Mode
---- SynchClock Clock Synchronization
---- Error FMS1 Error FMS FO 1
---- Error FMS2 Error FMS FO 2
2.1.3 Power System Data 1
The device requires certain basic data regarding the protected equipment, so that the
device will be compatible with its desired application. Phase sequence data, nominal
system frequency data, CT&PT ratios and their physical connections, as well as,
breaker operating times and minimum current thresholds are selected in the Power
System Data 1 display.
To modify these settings from the front of the device, the user should press the MENU key
and wait for the MAIN MENU to appear. From the MAIN MENU, the user should use the
key to select Settings, and then use the key to navigate to the SETTINGS
display. To obtain the P.System Data1 display, the user should use the key to
select P.System Data1 in the SETTINGS display, and then press the ENTER key.
To modify settings associated with Power System Data 1 using DIGSI® 4, the user
should double-click Settings, and then Power System Data 1, and the desired
selection options will be displayed. A dialog box opens under Power System Data
1 which contains the tabs “Power System”, “CT’s”, “VT’s” and “Circuit Breaker”. In
these tabs individual settings are configured. Thus the following Subsections are
structured accordingly.
2.1.3.1 Power System
Nominal Frequency Address 0214 Rated Frequency corresponds to the frequency at which the pro-
tected equipment operate. The setting is dependent on the model number of the relay
purchased, and must be in accordance with the nominal frequency of the power sys-
tem.
Phase Sequence Address 0209 PHASE SEQ. is used to establish phase rotation. The default phase
sequence is “A B C”. For systems that use a phase sequence of “A C B”, address
0209 should be set accordingly. A temporary reversal of rotation is also possible using
binary inputs (see Section 2.18).
Temperature Unit Address 0276 TEMP. UNIT allows you to display the temperature values either in de-
gree Celsius or in degree Fahrenheit.
26 7SJ62/63/64 Manual
C53000-G1140-C147-1
General
Polarity of Current At address 0201 CT Starpoint, the polarity of the wye-connected current trans-
Transformers formers is specified (see Figure 2-5 for options). Modifying this setting also results in
a polarity reversal of the ground current inputs IN or INS.
Busbar
IA IG
IB
IC
IA
IG IB
IC
Line Line
Address 0201 = Address 0201=
towards Line towards Busbar
Figure 2-5 Current Transformer Polarity
Voltage Connection Address 0213 VT Connection specifies how the voltage transformers are connect-
ed. When the voltage transformers are connected in a wye configuration, address
0213 is set at Van, Vbn, Vcn. VT Connection = Vab, Vbc, VGnd meaning that
two phase-to-phase voltages (V-connection) and Vgnd are connected. The latter set-
ting is also selected when only two phase-to-phase voltage transformers are utilized
or when only the displaced voltage (zero sequence voltage) is connected to the de-
vice.
7SJ64 features 4 voltage measuring inputs which enable further options besides the
above mentioned connection types: VT Connection = Van,Vbn,Vcn,VGn is se-
lected if the three phase voltages in wye-connection and Vgnd are connected to the
fourth voltage input of the device. Select VT Connection = Van,Vbn,Vcn,VSy if
the fourth voltage input is used for the synchronizing function.
Units of Length Address 0215 Distance Unit corresponds to the units of length (km or Miles) ap-
plicable to fault locating. If a fault locator is not included with the device, or if the fault
locating function is disabled, this setting has no effect on operation of the device.
Changing the length unit will not result in an automatic conversion between the sys-
tems. Such conversions must be entered at the appropriate addresses.
ATEX100 Parameter 0235A ATEX100 allows to fulfil the requirements for the protection of haz-
ardous-duty motors for thermal replicas. Set this parameter to YES to save all thermal
replicas of 7SJ62/63/64 in the event of a power supply failure. After the supply voltage
has been restored the thermal replicas will resume operation using the stored values.
Set the parameter to NO to reset the calculated overtemperatures of all thermal repli-
cas to zero if the power supply fails.
Ground Fault With Parameter 0613A 50N/51N/67N w. You can specify whether the ground fault
Protection protection function operates with measured values (Ignd (measured)) or with the
values calculated from the three phase currents (Ignd (measured)) .
In the first case the measured quantities applying at the fourth current input are eval-
uated, the latter case calculates the summation current from the three phase current
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 27
C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
inputs. If the device features a sensitive ground current input (measuring range starts
at 1 mA), the ground fault protection generally uses the calculated quantity 3I0.
2.1.3.2 Current Transformers (CT’s)
CT’s Nominal Val- At addresses 0204 CT PRIMARY and 0205 CT SECONDARY, information is entered
ues regarding the primary and secondary ampere ratings of the current transformers. It is
important to note that the primary ampere rating of the current transformers is based
on the actual tapped connection of the current transformers’ secondary winding (i.e.
for a 1200/5 ampere multi-ratio current transformer connected at a 600/5 ampere tap,
the user should enter a value of 600 for CT PRIMARY and a value of 5 for CT SEC-
ONDARY). It is also important to ensure that the rated secondary current of the current
transformer matches the rated current of the device, otherwise the device will incor-
rectly calculate primary amperes.
Addresses 0217 Ignd-CT PRIM and 0218 Ignd-CT SEC provide the device with
information on the primary and secondary rated current of the ground CT. In case of
a normal connection (starpoint current connected to Ignd-transformer) 0217 Ignd-CT
PRIM and 0204 CT PRIMARY must be set to the same value.
If the device is equipped with a sensitive ground fault current input, parameter 0218
Ignd-CT SEC is preset to 1 A. In this case the setting cannot be modified.
2.1.3.3 Voltage Transformers (VT’s)
VT’s Nominal Val- At addresses 0202 Vnom PRIMARY and 0203 Vnom SECONDARY, information is en-
ues tered regarding the rated primary nominal voltage and rated secondary nominal volt-
ages (L-L) of the connected voltage transformers.
VT’s Ratio Address 0206A Vph / Vdelta corresponds to the factor by which the secondary
phase-to-ground voltage must be adjusted relative to the secondary displacement
voltage (zero sequence voltage), and only applies in situations where the displace-
ment voltage is actually measured by the device as opposed to calculated by the de-
vice.
If the voltage transformer set provides open delta windings and if these windings are
connected to the device, this must be specified accordingly in address 0213 (see
above margin heading “Voltage Connection“). The relationships between the second-
ary device input voltages and the primary phase-to-ground and displacement voltages
are given as follows:
For the secondary input voltages representing phase-to-phase voltages:
Vprim-φφ Vprim-φg
Vsec-input = ------------------------ = 3 ⋅ ------------------------
VT Ratio VT Ratio
For the secondary input voltage representing displacement voltage:
Vprim-disp
Vsec-input = 3 × ----------------------------
VT Ratio
28 7SJ62/63/64 Manual
C53000-G1140-C147-1
General
Since the per unit base values of the phase-to-ground voltage and the displacement
voltage are equivalent, Vsec-input / Vprim-φg should equal Vsec-input / Vprim-disp.
To compensate for the voltage transformer connection, the device must adjust the
secondary phase-to-ground voltage upward by a factor of √3. Therefore, in this case,
address 0206A Vph / Vdelta would be set at 1.73 (= √3).
For situations where displacement voltage is measured by the device and other types
of voltage transformer connections are utilized, the setting at address 0206A should
be modified accordingly.
2.1.3.4 Circuit Breaker (CB)
Trip and Close Address 0210A TMin TRIP CMD is used to set the minimum time the tripping con-
Command Duration tacts will remain closed. This setting applies to all protective functions that initiate trip-
ping.
Address 0211A TMax CLOSE CMD is used to set the maximum time the closing con-
tacts will remain closed. This setting applies to the integrated reclosing function and
must be long enough to allow the circuit breaker contacts to reliably engage. An ex-
cessive duration causes no problem since the closing command is interrupted in the
event another trip is initiated by a protective function.
Current Flow Moni- Address 0212 BkrClosed I MIN corresponds to the threshold value of the integrat-
toring ed current flow monitoring system. This setting is used by several protective functions
(e.g., voltage protection with current supervision, breaker failure protection, overload
protection, and restart block for motors). If the threshold value set at address 0212 is
exceeded, the circuit breaker is considered closed.
The threshold value setting applies to all three phases, and takes precedence over all
other protective functions.
With regard to breaker failure protection, the threshold value must be set at a level be-
low the minimum fault current for which breaker failure protection must operate. On
the other hand, the current threshold should not be set more sensitive than necessary
to avoid extended resetting times on transient phenomena of the current transformers
after interruption of high short–circuit currents. A setting of 10% below the minimum
fault current for which breaker failure protection must operate is recommended.
When using the device for motor protection, overload protection, and restart blocking;
the protective relay can distinguish between a running motor and a stopped motor, as
well as take into account the varying motor cool-down behavior. Under this application,
the set value must be lower than the minimum no-load current of the motor.

214 Rated Frequency 50 Hz 50 Hz Rated Frequency
60 Hz
209 PHASE SEQ. ABC ABC Phase Sequence

ACB
276 TEMP. UNIT Degree Celsius Degree Celsius Unit of temparature measure-
Degree Fahrenheit ment
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 29
C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions

201 CT Starpoint towards Line towards Line CT Starpoint
towards Busbar
213 VT Connection Van, Vbn, Vcn Van, Vbn, Vcn VT Connection

Vab, Vbc, VGnd
Van, Vbn, Vcn, VGnd *)
Van, Vbn, Vcn, VSyn *)
215 Distance Unit km km Distance measurement unit

Miles
235A ATEX100 NO NO Storage of th. Replicas w/o

YES Power Supply
613A 50N/51N/67N w. Ignd (measured) Ignd (measured) 50N/51N/67N Ground Overcur-

3I0 (calculated) rent with
204 CT PRIMARY 10..50000 A 100 A CT Rated Primary Current
205 CT SECONDARY 1A 1A CT Rated Secondary Current

5A
217 Ignd-CT PRIM 1..50000 A 60 A Ignd-CT rated primary current
218 Ignd-CT SEC 1A 1A Ignd-CT rated secondary current

5A
202 Vnom PRIMARY 0.10..800.00 kV 12.00 kV Rated Primary Voltage
203 Vnom SECON- 100..225 V 100 V Rated Secondary Voltage (L-L)

DARY
206A Vph / Vdelta 1.00..3.00 1.73 Matching ratio Phase-VT To

Open-Delta-VT
210A TMin TRIP CMD 0.01..32.00 sec 0.15 sec Minimum TRIP Command Dura-
tion
211A TMax CLOSE CMD 0.01..32.00 sec 1.00 sec Maximum Close Command
Duration
212 BkrClosed I MIN 0.04..1.00 A 0.04 A Closed Breaker Min. Current

Threshold
*) 7SJ64 only
2.1.3.5 Information

05145 >Reverse Rot. >Reverse Phase Rotation
05147 Rotation ABC Phase rotation ABC
05148 Rotation ACB Phase rotation ACB
30 7SJ62/63/64 Manual
C53000-G1140-C147-1
General
2.1.4 Waveform Capture
The 7SJ62/63/64 relay is equipped with an oscillographic data saving feature. The
momentary values for the measurement quantities
Ia, Ib, Ic, IG, and INs, and Va, Vb, Vc, 3V0 and VSYN (only 7SJ64)
(voltages depending on the connection) are scanned at intervals of 1.04 ms for 60 Hz
(1.25 ms for 50 Hz) and stored in a revolving buffer (16 samples per cycle). For a fault,
the data are stored for an adjustable period of time, but not more than 5 seconds. Up
to 8 fault records can be recorded in this buffer. The memory is automatically updated
with every new fault, so no acknowledgment for previously recorded faults is required.
Waveform capture can also be started with protection pickup, via binary input, via PC-
interface, or SCADA.
Using the PC-interface or the rear service port, data can be retrieved by a personal
computer and processed, using the protective data processing program DIGSI® 4,
and the graphics program DIGRA® 4. DIGRA® 4 graphically prepares the data gener-
ated during the fault, and calculates additional quantities, such as impedance or rms
values, from the delivered measured values. The currents and voltages can be repre-
sented as primary or secondary quantities. In addition, relay sequence of events sig-
nals are recorded as well.
Fault data may be retrieved via the serial interface of a PC. Data evaluation is per-
formed by the PC using the respective programs. For this, the currents and voltages
are related to their maximum values, are standardized to the nominal value, and pre-
pared for graphical display. Additionally, events such as the pickup of a relay element
or the initiation of a trip signal can be displayed as well.
If configured in SCADA, data are transferred automatically to the SCADA computer.
Programming Settings
Waveform Capture Waveform capture of faults is executed only when Address 0104 OSC. FAULT REC.
is set for Enabled. Other settings pertaining to waveform capture are found under
the OSC. FAULT REC. sub-menu of the SETTINGS menu.
The trigger for an oscillographic record and the criterion to save the record are deter-
mined with the setting of Address 0401 WAVEFORMTRIGGER. With the setting Save
w. Pickup, the trigger and the criterion for saving are the same – the pickup of a
protective element. Another option for Address 0401 is Start w. TRIP. A trip com-
mand issued by the device is both the trigger and the criterion to save the record with
this setting. The final — and more commonly used — option for Address 0401 is Save
w. TRIP. The trigger under this setting is the pickup of a protective element (first
element to pick up) and saving of the waveforms occurs only if the device issues a trip
command. Each setting for Address 0401 has specific advantages. The choice de-
pends primarily on the expected duration of faults, the time period of a complete fault
duration that is of most interest (e.g. inception or clearing), and the frequency of wave-
form capturing that is to be expected.
There are two options available for the coverage of oscillographic recording. The se-
lection is made under Address 0402 WAVEFORM DATA and is based on the user’s
preference for recording events that occur while automatic reclosing is performed by
the device. With the setting Fault event, waveform capturing occurs each time
the recording trigger and save criterion are established. If automatic reclosing in the
device is employed, the second option Pow.Sys.Flt. can be selected if desired.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 31
C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
With this setting, the entire course of a fault - from inception, through reclosing, to
clearing - is captured. This option provides detailed data for analysis of the entire fault
history; however, the option also requires considerable memory for recording during
dead times.
An oscillographic record includes data recorded prior to the time of trigger, and data
after the dropout of the recording criterion. The user determines the length of pre-trig-
ger time and post-dropout time to be included in the fault record with the settings in
Address 0404 PRE. TRIG. TIME and Address 0405 POST REC. TIME. The set-
tings depend on Address 0401 and the information desired. For example, consider the
trigger being a pickup of a protective element and the save criterion being a trip. The
pre-trigger time is set based on the amount of pre-fault information that is desired. The
post-dropout time is set based on the amount of information desired after clearing (e.g.
checking for restrikes).
The maximum length of time of a record is entered in Address 0403 MAX. LENGTH.
The largest value here is 5 seconds. A total of 8 records can be saved. However the
total length of time of all fault records in the buffer may not exceed 5 seconds. Once
the capacity of the buffer is exceeded the oldest fault is deleted, whereas the new fault
is saved in the buffer.
An oscillographic record can be triggered and saved by a change in status of a binary
input or via the operating interface connected to a PC. The trigger is dynamic. The
length of a record for these special triggers is set in Address 0406 BinIn
CAPT.TIME (upper bound is Address 0403). Pre-trigger and post-dropout settings in
Addresses 0404 and 0405 do not apply. If Address 0406 is set for “∞,” then the length
of the record equals the time that the binary input is activated (static), or the MAX.
LENGTH setting in Address 0403, whichever is shorter.

401 WAVEFORMTRIG- Save with Pickup Save with Pickup Waveform Capture
GER Save with TRIP
Start with TRIP
402 WAVEFORM DATA Fault event Fault event Scope of Waveform Data
Power System fault
403 MAX. LENGTH 0.30..5.00 sec 2.00 sec Max. length of a Waveform Cap-
ture Record
404 PRE. TRIG. TIME 0.05..0.50 sec 0.25 sec Captured Waveform Prior to
Trigger
405 POST REC. TIME 0.05..0.50 sec 0.10 sec Captured Waveform after Event
406 BinIn CAPT.TIME 0.10..5.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec Capture Time via Binary Input
2.1.4.1 Information

00004 >Trig.Wave.Cap. >Trigger Waveform Capture
32 7SJ62/63/64 Manual
C53000-G1140-C147-1
General

00203 Wave. deleted Waveform data deleted
---- FltRecSta Fault Recording Start
2.1.5 Setting Groups
Purpose of Setting A setting group is nothing more than a collection of setting values to be used for a par-
Groups ticular application. In the 7SJ62/63/64 relay, 4 independent setting groups (A ~ D) are
possible. The user can switch back and fourth between setting groups locally, via bi-
nary inputs (if so configured), via the operator or service interface using a personal
computer, or via the system interface. For reasons of safety it is not possible to change
between setting groups during a power system fault.
A setting group includes the setting values for all functions that have been selected as
Enabled during configuration (see Chapter 5). While setting values may vary among
the 4 setting groups, the selected functions of each setting group remain the same.
Multiple setting groups allows a specific relay to be used for more than one application.
While all setting groups are stored in the relay, only one setting group may be active
at a given time.
If multiple setting groups are not required, Group A is the default selection, and the
following paragraph is not applicable.
If multiple setting groups are desired, address 0103 Grp Chge OPTION must be set
to Enabled in the relay configuration. For the setting of the function parameters, you
configure each of the required setting groups A to D, one after the other. A maximum
of 4 is possible. Please refer to the DIGSI® 4–System Manual, Order No. E50417–
H1176–C151 to learn how to copy setting groups or reset them to their status at deliv-
ery and also what you have to do to change from one setting group to another.
Subsection 3.1.2 tells you how to change between several setting groups externally
via binary inputs.
2.1.5.1 Settings

302 CHANGE Group A Group A Change to Another Setting
Group B Group
Group C
Group D
Binary Input
Protocol
2.1.5.2 Information

00007 >Set Group Bit0 >Setting Group Select Bit 0
00008 >Set Group Bit1 >Setting Group Select Bit 1
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 33
C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions

---- Group A Group A
---- Group B Group B
---- Group C Group C
---- Group D Group D
2.1.6 Power System Data 2
General protective data (P.SYSTEM DATA2) includes settings associated with all
functions rather than a specific protective or monitoring function. In contrast to the
P.SYSTEM DATA1 as discussed in Sub-section 2.1.3, these settings can be changed
over with the setting groups. To modify these settings, the user should select SET-
TINGS menu option Group A (setting group A), and then P.System Data2.
The other setting groups are Group B, Group C, and Group D, as described in
Subsection 2.1.5.
Definition of At addresses 1101 FullScaleVolt. and 1102 FullScaleCurr., the reference

Nominal Rated voltage (phase-to-phase) and reference current (phase) of the protected equipment is
Values entered (e.g., motors). These values do not effect pickup settings. If these reference
values match the primary VT’s and CT’s, they correspond to the settings in address
0202 and 0204 (Subsection 2.1.3). They are generally used to show values in refer-
ence to full scale. For example, if a CT ratio of 600/5 is selected and the full load cur-
rent of a motor is 550 amps, a value of 550 amps should be entered for
FullScaleCurr. if monitoring in reference to full load current is desired. 550 amps
are now displayed as 100 % in the percentage metering display.
Ground Impedance The ground impedance ratios must be entered to facilitate line fault location. At ad-
Ratios (only for dress 1103 RG/RL Ratio, the resistance ratio of the line is entered, and at address
fault location) 1104 XG/XL Ratio, the reactance ratio of the line is entered. The ground impedance
ratios are calculated separately, and do not correspond to the real and imaginary com-
ponents of Z0/Z1. Therefore, no complex calculations are necessary. The ground im-
pedance ratios are obtained from conductor data using the following formulas:
Resistance Ratio: Reactance Ratio:
RG 1 R XG 1 X
-------- = --- ⋅ æ ------0- – 1ö ------- = --- ⋅ æ ------0 – 1ö
R L 3 èR 1
ø X L 3 èX 1
ø
Where
R0 = Zero sequence resistance of the line
X0 = Zero sequence reactance of the line
R1 = Positive sequence resistance of the line
X1 = Positive sequence reactance of the line
The ground impedance ratios may be calculated using the impedance values for the
entire line or the impedance per mile values associated with the conductor, since the
34 7SJ62/63/64 Manual
C53000-G1140-C147-1
General
length of the line is factored out in the formulas above.
Calculation example:
20 kV free line 120 mm2 with the following data:
R1/s = 0.39 Ω/mile
X1/s = 0.55 Ω/mile Positive sequence impedance
R0/s = 1.42 Ω/mile
X0/s = 2.03 Ω/mile Zero sequence impedance
For ground impedance ratios, the following emerge:

RG 1 R0 1 1.42 Ω ⁄ mile
-------- = --- ⋅ æè ------- – 1öø = --- ⋅ æè -------------------------------- – 1öø = 0.89
RL 3 R1 3 0.39 Ω ⁄ mile
XG 1 X0 1 2.03 Ω ⁄ mile
------- = --- ⋅ æè ------ – 1öø = --- ⋅ æè -------------------------------- – 1öø = 0.90
XL 3 X1 3 0.55 Ω ⁄ mile
These values are set at addresses 1103 and 1104 respectively.
Reactance Setting The reactance setting must be entered if line fault location is desired. The reactance
(only for fault loca- setting enables the protective relay to report fault location in terms of distance.
tion)
The reactance value is entered as a secondary value at address 1105 in ohms per
mile if address 0215 is set to Miles, or at address 1106 in ohms per kilometer if ad-
dress 0215 is set to Kilometers (see Subsection 2.1.3 under “Units of Length”). If the
setting of address 0215 is modified after entry of a reactance value at address 1105
or 1106, the reactance value must be modified and reentered accordingly.
The calculation of primary ohms in terms of secondary ohms is accomplished using
the following formula:
Current-Transformer-Ratio
Z sec ondary = -------------------------------------------------------------------------- ⋅ Z primary
Voltage-Transformer - Ratio
Because the reactance value must be entered in secondary ohms per unit length, the
formula above must be used to convert primary ohms per unit length into secondary
ohms per unit length as shown below:
N CTR
X’ sec = -------------- ⋅ X’ prim where:
N VTR
NCTR = Current transformer ratio
NVTR = Voltage transformer ratio
Example calculation:
The same example used to illustrate calculation of ground impedance ratios will be
used to illustrate calculation of the reactance setting, with the following additional data
on the current transformers and voltage transformers:
Current transformer 500 A / 5 A
Voltage transformer 20 kV / 0.1 kV
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 35
C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
The secondary reactance value is calculated as follows:
N CTR 500 A/5 A

X’ sec = --------------- ⋅ X’ prim = ----------------------------------- ⋅ 0.55 Ω/mile = 0.275 Ω/mile
N VTR 20 kV/0.1 kV
This value is entered at Address 1106.
Recognition of Address 1107 I MOTOR START, is used for motor protection applications and corre-
Running Condition sponds to the minimum starting current of the protected motor. The current setting en-
(only for motors) tered at address 1107 enables the device to determine if the protected motor is in
start-up mode, thus allowing the device to properly perform the start-up time monitor-
ing and overload protection functions.
In determining the setting for address 1107, the following should be considered:
• A setting must be selected that is lower than the actual motor start-up current under
all load and voltage conditions.
• Because the thermal cure of the overload protection is “frozen” (held constant) dur-
ing motor start-up, the setting must be high enough to allow operation of the over-
load protection at higher load current levels.
2.1.6.1 Settings
In the list below, the setting ranges and default setting values are for a device with a
nominal current rating IN = 1 A. Consider the current transformer ratios when setting
the device with primary values
For a nominal current rating IN = 5 A:
− For the pickup current (I MOTOR START), multiply the Setting Options values and
default setting values by 5.
− For the Ground resistance and reactance ratios, divide Setting Range and Setting
Increments by 5.

1101 FullScaleVolt. 0.10..800.00 kV 12.00 kV Measurem:FullScaleVol-
tage(Equipm.rating)
1102 FullScaleCurr. 10..50000 A 100 A Measurem:FullScaleCur-

rent(Equipm.rating)
1103 RG/RL Ratio -0.33..7.00 1.00 RG/RL - Ratio of Gnd to Line

Resistance
1104 XG/XL Ratio -0.33..7.00 1.00 XG/XL - Ratio of Gnd to Line

Reactance
1105 x' 0.010..10.000 Ohm / mile 1.000 Ohm / mile x' - Line Reactance per length
unit
36 7SJ62/63/64 Manual
C53000-G1140-C147-1
General

1106 x' 0.005..6.215 Ohm / km 0.620 Ohm / km x' - Line Reactance per length
unit
1107 I MOTOR START 0.60..10.00 A 2.50 A Motor Start Current (Block 49,
Start 48)
2.1.6.2 Information

00356 >Manual Close >Manual close signal
02720 >Enable ANSI#-2 >Enable 50/67-(N)-2 (override 79 blk)
04601 >52-a >52-a contact (OPEN, if bkr is open)
04602 >52-b >52-b contact (OPEN, if bkr is closed)
00533 Ia = Primary fault current Ia
00534 Ib = Primary fault current Ib
00535 Ic = Primary fault current Ic
00501 Relay PICKUP Relay PICKUP

00511 Relay TRIP Relay GENERAL TRIP command
00561 Man.Clos.Detect Manual close signal detected
00126 ProtON/OFF Protection ON/OFF (via system port)
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 37
C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
2.2 Overcurrent Protection (50, 50N, 51, 51N)
General Time-overcurrent protection is the main protective function of the 7SJ62/63/64 relay.
It may be enabled or disabled for phase or ground faults, and may be configured with
various time-overcurrent characteristic curves.
There are four definite time (Instantaneous elements with optional timers) and two in-
verse time-overcurrent elements in the device. The definite time elements include two
phase elements and two ground elements. The definite time (Instantaneous) phase el-
ements are designated 50-2 and 50-1, whereas the definite time (Instantaneous)
ground elements are designated 50N-2 and 50N-1. The inverse time elements include
a phase element designated as 51 and a ground element designated as 51N.
The overcurrent protection for the ground current can operate either using measured
values Ignd or the quantities 310 calculated from the three phase currents depending
on the parameter 0613A 50N/51N/67N w. Devices featuring a sensitive ground cur-
rent input, however, use generally the calculated quantity 3I0.
All overcurrent elements, inverse and definite time, enabled in the device may be
blocked via the automatic reclosure function (depending on the cycle) or via an exter-
nal signal to the binary inputs of the device. Removal of the external signal to the bi-
nary input will re-enable these elements. Also, a feature described as Manual Close
Mode can be configured to improve fault clearing times associated with Switch-on-to-
Fault Conditions. Under this situation, the time delay may be bypassed for one of the
three time-overcurrent phase elements and one of the three time-overcurrent ground
elements via an impulse from the external control switch, thus resulting in high speed
tripping. This impulse is prolonged by a period of 300 ms. The phase and ground ele-
ments utilized for high speed tripping in this situation are selected at addresses 1213
and 1313 respectively.
The automatic reclosure function may also initiate the immediate tripping for the over-
current stages and high-current stages depending on the cycle.
Pickup and delay settings may be quickly adjusted to system requirements via Cold
Load Pickup function (see Section 2.4).
Tripping by the 50-1, 51, 50N-1, and 51N elements may be blocked for inrush condi-
tions by utilizing the inrush restraint feature.
Table 2-2 gives an overview of the interconnection to other functions of 7SJ62/63/64..
Table 2-2 Interconnection to other functions

Time Overcurrent Connection to Manual Dynamic Inrush
Stages Automatic CLOSE Cold-Load- Restraint
Reclosure Pick-up
50-1 • • • •
50-2 • • •
51 • • • •
50N-1 • • • •
50N-2 • • •
51N • • • •
38 7SJ62/63/64 Manual
C53000-G1140-C147-1
Overcurrent Protection (50, 50N, 51, 51N)
2.2.1 Description
2.2.1.1 Definite Time, Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection (50, 50N)
50-2, 50N-2 The 50-2 and 50N-2 overcurrent elements, phase and ground currents are compared
separately with the pickup values of the 50-2 (50-2 PICKUP) and 50N-2 (50N-2
PICKUP) relay elements. Currents above the pickup values are detected and recorded
within the protective relay. After the user-configured time delay has elapsed, a trip sig-
nal is issued.
Figures 2-6 and 2-7 show the logic diagrams for the 50-2 and 50N-2 protection.
1213A MANUALCLOSEMODE
Inactive
„1“ 51 instant.
50 -1 instant.
50-2 instant.
&
Manual Close
79 AR 50-2 instant. or
FNo. 01910
>INSTANT. 50-2
50-2 PhA PU FNo. 01800

or 50-2 picked up
&
1203 50-1 DELAY or FNo. 01805
& T 0 or 50-2 TRIP
A or
FNo. 01804
B 50-2 TimeOut
C
Measurement/Logic
79 AR 50-2 blk FNo. 01852
FNo. 01721 or 50-2 BLOCKED
>BLOCK 50-2
FNo. 01704 FNo. 01752

>BLK 50/51 50/51 PH BLK
1201 Charac. Phase or FNo. 01751
OFF
50/51 PH OFF
„1“ ON
Figure 2-6 Logic Diagram for 50-2 Relay Element
If the parameter MANUALCLOSEMODE is set to 50N-2 instant. and if manual close

mode is applied, the pick-up is tripped instantaneously, also for blocking of the stage
via binary input. The same applies to 79 AR 50-2 instant. and the binary input
for instantaneous tripping.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 39
C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
Inactive
„1“ 51N instant.
50N-1 instant.
50N-2 instant.
&
Manual Close
79 AR 50N-2 inst. or
FNo. 01916
>INSTANT. 50N-2.
FNo. 01831
50N-2 PU 50N-2 picked up
&
FNo. 01833
1303 50N-2 DELAY
or 50N-2 TRIP
& T 0
FNo. 01832
Measurement/Logic 50N-2 TimeOut
79 AR 50N-2 blk FNo. 01854

FNo. 01724 or 50N-2 BLOCKED
>BLOCK 50N-2
FNo. 01714 FNo. 01757

>BLK 50N/51N 50N/51N BLK
1301 FCT 50N/51N
or
OFF FNo. 01756
50N/51N OFF
„1“ ON
Figure 2-7 Logic Diagram for 50N-2 Relay Element
If the parameter MANUALCLOSEMODE is set to 50N-2 instant. and if manual close

mode is applied, the pick-up is tripped instantaneously, also for blocking of the stage
via binary input. The same applies to 79 AR 50N-2 instant. and the binary input
for instantaneous tripping.
50-1, 50N-1 The 50-1 and 50N-1 overcurrent elements, phase and ground currents are compared
separately with the pickup values of the 50-1 (50-1 PICKUP) and 50N-1 (50N-1
PICKUP) relay elements. Currents above the pickup values are detected and recorded
within the protective relay. After the user-configured time delay has elapsed, a trip sig-
nal is issued.
If the inrush restraint feature is enabled (see below), and an inrush condition exist, no
tripping takes place, but a message is recorded and displayed indicating when the
overcurrent element time delay elapses.
Different messages are recorded and displayed appear depending on whether tripping
takes place or the time delay expires without tripping.
The dropout value of the definite time, time-overcurrent elements is roughly equal to
95 % of the pickup value for currents greater than or equal to 30 % of the nominal cur-
rent of the device.
These stages may be blocked by the automatic reclosure function.
Figures 2-8 and 2-9 show the logic diagrams for the 50-1 and 50N-1 protection.
40 7SJ62/63/64 Manual
C53000-G1140-C147-1
Pickup and delay settings for the 50-1, 50-2, 50N-1, and 50N-2 elements may be in-
dividually programmed.
Inactive
„1“ 51 instant.
50-2 instant.
50 -1 instant.
&
Manual Close
79 AR 50-1 inst. or
FNo. 01912 Inrush Recognition 50-1 (see Figure 2-12)
50-1 INSTANT.
FNo. 07551
50-1 PhA PU & 50-1 InRushPU
or
FNo. 01810
&
& 50-1 picked up
1205 50-1 DELAY or FNo. 01815

& 50/51 TRIP
T 0 or
&
A or
FNo. 01814
B 50-1 TimeOut
C
Measurement/Logic
79 AR 50-1 blk
FNo. 01851
>BLOCK 50-1
FNo. 01704 FNo. 01752
>BLK 50/51 50/51 PH BLK
1201 FCT 50/51
or
FNo. 01751
OFF
50/51 PH OFF
„1“ ON
Figure 2-8 Logic Diagram for the 50-1 Relay Element
If the parameter MANUAL CLOSE is set to 50 -1 instant. and if manual close mode
is applied, the pick-up is tripped instantaneously, also for blocking of the stage via bi-
nary input. The same applies to 79 AR 50-1 inst. and the binary input for instan-
taneous tripping.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 41
C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
Inactive
„1“ 51N instant.
50N-2 instant.
50N-1 instant.
&
Manual Close
79 AR 50N-1 inst. or
FNo. 01919 Inrush Recognition 50N-1 (see Figure 2-12)
>INSTANT. 50N-1
FNo. 07552
& 50N-1 InRushPU
50N-1 PU
FNo. 01834
& & 50N-1 picked up
1305 50N-1 DELAY
or FNo. 01836
& 50N-1 TRIP
T 0
&
FNo. 01835
50N-1 TimeOut
Measurement/Logic
79 AR 50N-1 blk
FNo. 01853
FNo. 01725 or
50N-1 BLOCKED
>BLOCK 50N-1
FNo. 01714 FNo. 01757
1301 FCT 50N/51N or
FNo. 01756
OFF
50N/51N OFF
„1“ ON
Figure 2-9 Logic Diagram for the 50N-1 Relay Element
If the parameter MANUAL CLOSE is set to 50 -1 instant. and if manual close mode
nary input. The same applies to 79 AR 50N-1 inst. and the binary input for instan-
taneous tripping.
The pickup values of each stage 50-1, 50-2 for the phase currents and 50N-1, 50N-2
for the ground current and the valid delay times for each stage can be set individually.
Pickup Logic and The pick-up signals of the individual phases (or ground) and the individual stages are
Tripping Logic connected with each other such that the phase information and the stage are issued
that have picked up (Table 2-3).
42 7SJ62/63/64 Manual
C53000-G1140-C147-1
Also for the tripping signals the stage is indicated which has initiated the tripping.
Table 2-3 Pick-up indications of the time overcurrent protection
Internal indication Figure Output indication FNo.

50-2 Ph A PU 2-6
50-1 Ph A PU 2-8 50/51 Ph A PU 01762
51 Ph A PU 2-10
50-2 Ph B PU 2-6
50-1 Ph B PU 2-8 50/51 Ph B PU 01763
51 Ph B PU 2-10
50-2 Ph C PU 2-6
50-1 Ph C PU 2-8 50/51 Ph C PU 01764
51 Ph C PU 2-10
50N-2 PU 2-7
50N-1 PU 2-9 50N/51NPickedup 01765
51N PU 2-11
50-2 Ph A PU 2-6
50-2 Ph B PU 2-6
50-2 picked up 01800
50-2 Ph C PU 2-6
50N-2 PU 2-7
50-1 Ph A PU 2-8
50-1 Ph B PU 2-8
50-1 picked up 01810
50-1 Ph C PU 2-8
50N-1 PU 2-9
51 Ph A PU 2-10
51 Ph B PU 2-10
51 picked up 01820
51 Ph C PU 2-10
51N PU 2-11
(all pickups) 50(N)/51(N) PU 01761
2.2.1.2 Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protection (51, 51N)
Inverse time-overcurrent protection, the 51 and 51N relay elements may contain IEC
characteristic curves or ANSI characteristic curves depending on the model ordered.
A user-specified curve may also be applied to the inverse-overcurrent relay elements.
The curves and associated formulas are given in Technical Specifications (Figures 4-
1 to 4-6 in Section 4.3). During configuration of the 51 and 51N characteristic curves,
the definite time relay elements (50-2, 50-1, 50N-2, and 50N-1) are enabled (see Sub-
section 2.2.1.1).
Pickup and Trip- Each phase and ground current is separately compared with the pickup values of the
ping 51 and 51N relay elements. When the current in the 51 and 51N relay elements ex-
ceeds the corresponding pickup value by a factor of 1.1, the element picks up and a
message is displayed and recorded within the device. Pickup of a 51 or 51N relay el-
ement is based on the rms value of the fundamental harmonic. When the 51 and 51N
elements pickup, the time delay of the trip signal is calculated using an integrated
measurement process. The calculated time delay is dependent on the actual fault cur-
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 43
C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
rent flowing and the selected time-current characteristic curve. Once the time delay
elapses, a trip signal is issued.
If the inrush restraint feature is enabled, and an inrush condition exist, no tripping
takes place, but a message is recorded and displayed indicating when the overcurrent
element time delay elapses.
These stages can be blocked by the automatic reclosing function.
The characteristic curves of the 51 and 51N relay elements may be selected indepen-
dently of each other. In addition, pickup, time multipliers, and time dials for the 51 and
51N elements may be individually set.
Figures 2-10 and 2-11 show the logic diagram for the 51 and 51N protection, Figure
2-12 the logic diagram of the inrush restraint.
Dropout for ANSI For ANSI and IEC curves you can specify whether the dropout of a stage, after it has
and IEC Curves fallen below a threshold, takes places instantaneously or via disk emulation. Instanta-
neously means that the dropout of a stage which has picked up is performed as soon
as the value falls below approximately 95 % of the pickup value. The timer will start
again for all new pick-ups.
Dropout of an element occurs when the current decreases to about 95 % of the pickup
value if instantaneous reset is selected, or 90 % of the pickup value if disk emulation
is selected. When instantaneous reset is selected, reset of the element occurs without
delay. When disk emulation is selected, reset occurs just as it would for an electrome-
chanical relay utilizing an induction disk.
For disk emulation, the reset process begins after fault current is interrupted. Reset
corresponds to the unwinding of an induction disk. A subsequent pickup of the device
element prior to full reset will result in a reduced tripping time delay. The reduced trip-
ping time delay will be based on the degree to which the device had reset when the
subsequent pickup occurred. When the current in the relay element is between 90 %
and 95 % of the pickup value following dropout, neither disk movement in the tripping
or reset direction is simulated. When the current in the relay elements falls below 5 %
of the pickup value, disk emulation is canceled and full reset takes place.
Disk emulation offers advantages when the inverse time, time-overcurrent relay ele-
ments must be coordinated with conventional electromechanical overcurrent relays lo-
cated toward the source.
User Specified When user specified curves are utilized, the time-current characteristic curve may be
Curves defined point by point. Up to 20 pairs of values (current, time) may be entered. The
relay element then approximates the curve using linear interpolation.
When utilizing user specified time-current curves, the reset curve may user specified
as well. See reset for ANSI and IEC characteristics in the function description. If user
specified reset curves are not utilized, the relay element drops out when current de-
creases to about 95 % of the relay element’s pickup value, and immediate reset takes
place.
44 7SJ62/63/64 Manual
C53000-G1140-C147-1
Inactive
„1“ 50-2 instant.
50 -1 instant.
51 instant.
&
Manual Close
79 AR 51 inst. or
Inrush Recognition 51 (see Figure 2-12)
FNo. 01914
>INSTANT. 51
FNo. 07553
51 Ph A PU & 51 InRushPU
or
FNo. 01820
&
& 51 picked up
1208 51 TIME DIAL or FNo. 01825

& 51 TRIP
or
&
A or FNo. 01824
B 51 Time Out
C
measurement
pickup/tripping logic
79 AR 51 blk FNo. 01855

FNo. 01723 or 51 BLOCKED
>BLOCK 51
FNo. 01704 FNo. 01752

>BLK 50/51 50/51 PH BLK
1201 FCT 50/51 or

FNo. 01751
OFF
50/51 PH OFF
„1“ ON
Figure 2-10 Logic Diagram for the 51 Relay Element
If the parameter MANUAL CLOSE is set to 51 instant. and if manual close mode is
applied, the pick-up is tripped instantaneously, also for blocking of the stage via binary
input and the binary input for instantaneous tripping. The same applies to 79 AR 51
inst. and the binary input for instantaneous tripping.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 45
C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
Inactive
50N-2 instant.
„1“ 50N-1 instant.
51N instant.
&
Manual Close
79 AR 51N inst. or
FNo. 01983
>INSTANT. 51N Inrush Recognition 51N (s. Figure 2-12)
FNo. 07554
& 51N InRushPU
51N PU
FNo. 01837
& & 51N picked up
1308 51N TIME DIAL
or FNo. 01839
& 51N TRIP
&
FNo. 01838
measurement 51N TimeOut
pickup/tripping logic
FNo. 01856
79 AR 51N blk.
FNo. 01726 or 51N BLOCKED
>BLOCK 51N
FNo. 01714 FNo. 01757

1301 FCT 50N/51N or

FNo. 01756
OFF
50N/51N OFF
„1“ ON
Figure 2-11 Logic Diagram for the 51N Relay Element
If the parameter MANUAL CLOSE is set to 51N instant. and if manual close mode
nary input and the binary input for instantaneous tripping. The same applies to 79 AR
51N inst. and the binary input for instantaneous tripping.
2.2.1.3 Dynamic Cold Load Pick-up Function
With the dynamic cold load pick-up feature, it is possible to dynamically increase the
pickup values of the directional and non-directional overcurrent relay elements when
dynamic cold load pickup conditions are anticipated (i.e. after a long period of zero
voltage). By allowing pickup settings to increase dynamically, it is not necessary to in-
corporate dynamic cold load capability in the normal pickup settings, and directional
and non-directional overcurrent protection may be set more sensitive.
This dynamic pick-up value changeover is common to all overcurrent stages and is de-
scribed in Section 2.4. The alternative pick-up values can be set individually for each
stage of the time overcurrent protection.
46 7SJ62/63/64 Manual
C53000-G1140-C147-1
2.2.1.4 Inrush Restraint
When the 7SJ62/63/64 relay is installed to protect a power transformer, large magne-
tizing inrush currents will flow when the transformer is energized. These inrush cur-
rents may be several times the nominal transformer current, and, depending on the
transformer size and design, may last from several milliseconds to several seconds.
Although pickup of the relay elements is based only on the fundamental harmonic
component of the measured currents, false device pickup due to inrush is still a poten-
tial problem since, depending on the transformer size and design, the fundamental
harmonic comprises a large component of the inrush current.
The 7SJ62/63/64 features an integrated inrush restraint function that may be utilized
when the device is installed at or near a transformer. It supervises the “normal” tripping
of all directional and non-directional overcurrent relay elements with the exception of
the 50-2, 50N-2, 67-2 and 67N-2 relay elements. For example, when a transformer is
energized the current levels may exceed the normal pickup of the overcurrent ele-
ments set in the device. If inrush conditions are identified (the 2nd harmonic content
of current exceeds the value of setting at address 2202 2nd HARMONIC), special in-
rush messages are created within the device that will block tripping of the overcurrent
elements. Note, that only the tripping elements are affected by harmonic inrush detec-
tion, the pickup values and corresponding timers continue to operate normally. If in-
rush conditions are still present after the tripping time delay has elapsed, a corre-
sponding message is displayed and recorded, but the overcurrent tripping is blocked.
(see Figures 2-8 to 2-11).
Inrush current contains a relatively large second harmonic component which is nearly
absent during a short-circuit fault. Inrush current detection, therefore, is based on the
evaluation of the second harmonic component present during inrush conditions. For
frequency analysis, digital filters are used to conduct a Fourier analysis of all three
phase currents and the ground current. As soon as the second harmonic component
of the current flowing in a specific phase or ground relay element exceeds a set value,
tripping is blocked for that element (does not apply to 50-2, 50N-2, 67-2, and 67N-2
elements). Since quantitative analysis of the harmonic components of the current flow-
ing through a specific relay element cannot be completed until a full cycle of inrush cur-
rent has been measured, inrush restraint blocking, and the associated inrush detec-
tion message, is automatically delayed by one cycle. It is important to note, however,
that the tripping time delays associated with the relay elements are started immediate-
ly after pickup of the relay element, even if the inrush conditions are detected. If inrush
blocking drops out during the time delay, tripping will occur when the time delay of the
element elapses. If inrush blocking drops out after the time delay has elapsed, tripping
will occur immediately. Therefore, utilization of the inrush restraint feature will not re-
sult in any additional tripping delays. If a relay element drops out during inrush block-
ing, the associated time delay will reset.
Cross Blocking Since inrush restraint operates individually for each phase, inrush restraint will not
block tripping in situations where a power transformer is energized into a single-phase
fault and inrush currents are detected on the unfaulted phases. This feature provides
maximum protection, however, inrush restraint can be configured to allow inrush de-
tection on one phase to block tripping by the elements associated with the other phas-
es. This is referred to as cross-blocking and can be enabled at address 2203. Inrush
currents flowing in the ground path will not cross-block tripping by the phase elements.
The cross-blocking function may also be limited to a particular time interval, which can
be set at address 2204. After expiration of this time interval, the cross-blocking func-
7SJ62/63/64 Manual
tion will be disabled. 47
C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
The inrush restraint has an upper limit. It no longer takes effect when a (configurable)
current value is surpassed since, in this case, it can only be an internal high-current
fault.
Figure 2-12 shows the logic diagram of the inrush restraint including cross-blocking.
FNo. 07565
Ia InRush PU
I2 ⋅ fn Ph A a
FNo. 07566
Ib InRush PU
2202 2nd HARMONIC a>b⋅c FNo. 07567
&
b
& Ic InRush PU
Ia 1/2 Period c FNo. 07564
Gnd InRush PU
or
Inrush Recog.
2205 I Max
a & 50-1
a<b
b
Inrush Recog.
50-1 Ph A PU or & 50N-1
or 1 Period
51 Ph A PU or
Inrush Recog.
& 51
or
Inrush Recog.
& 51N
Inrush Recog.
or & 67-1
67-1 Ph A PU
or 1 Period
67-TOC Ph A PU
Inrush Recog.
& 67N-1
or
Inrush Recog.
& 67-TOC
Inrush Recog.
& 67N-TOC
2204 CROSS BLK TIMER

Inrush Recog. 50-1
FNo. 01843
Inrush Recog. 67-1 &
S Q INRUSH X-BLK
Inrush Recog. 51 or & T 0
Inrush Recog. 67-TOC
R Inrush Recognition for phase and
ground (50-1, 51, 50N-1, 51N,
67-1, 67-TOC, 67N-1, 67N-TOC)
2203 CROSS BLOCK
YES
„1“
NO measurement/logic
FNo. 07563 FNo. 07557

>BLOCK InRushPh InRushPhBLOCKED
2201 INRUSH REST.

or
ON FNo. 07556
1“ OFF
InRush OFF
Figure 2-12 Logic Diagram for Inrush Restraint
48 7SJ62/63/64 Manual
C53000-G1140-C147-1
2.2.1.5 Reverse Interlocking Bus Protection
Application Exam- The pickup of a time-overcurrent relay element may be blocked via binary inputs. At
ple the users option, the binary inputs can be set up to block tripping when DC voltage is
applied or when DC voltage is removed. Reverse interlocking allows for faster protec-
tion by eliminating the need for time-current coordination. Reverse interlocking is often
used, for example, at generating stations in applications where a station supply trans-
former supplied from the transmission grid serves internal loads of the generation sta-
tion via a medium voltage bus with multiple feeders (see Figure 2-13).
When the 7SJ62/63/64 relay is used as the source-side relay in a reverse interlocking
scheme, a short time delay must be set for the 50-2 element so that a load-side relay
has the chance to block tripping (Figure 2-13). The load-side relay should pickup im-
mediately for down-line faults so that a blocking signal is immediately sent to the
source-side relay’s binary inputs. The load-side protective device can then initiate a
time delayed trip, as long as the time delay is less than the time delay settings of the
source-side relay’s 50-1 and 50N-1 relay elements and the time multiplier settings of
the source-side relay’s 51 and 51N relay element. The source side relay’s 50-1, 50N-
1, 51 and 51N relay elements will provide redundant protection against faults in the
load side relay’s zone of protection since their associated time delay settings are
greater than the load side relay’s time delay setting.
Pickup messages generated by the load-side relay are passed to a binary input of the
source-side relay as input message “>50-2 block.”.
A
B
Normal Load Flow 52
52
52
50-1 50-2 50-1 50-1
“50-2 Block“
T50-1 T50-2 t1 t1
TRIP TRIP TRIP TRIP
T50-1
T50-2 t1
Fault Location B: Source-side Trip Time = T50-2 = Source side 50-2 Delay
Fault Location A: Load-side Trip Time = t1

Source-side Backup Trip Time = T50-1 =Source-side 50-1 Delay
Figure 2-13 Reverse Interlocking Protection Scheme
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 49
C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
2.2.2 Programming Time-Overcurrent Settings
Selecting the time-overcurrent protection in DIGSI® 4 opens a dialog box containing

the tabs “General”, “50”, “51”, “50N”, “51N” and “Inrush Restraint” in which you can
modify the individual settings. The setting notes in this manual are structured accord-
ingly.
2.2.2.1 General
50/51 The functions associated with time-overcurrent protection were established during
configuration of protective functions (Section 2.1.1) at address 0112 Charac.
Phase. If address 0112 was set to Definite Time, then only the settings for the
definite-time elements are available. The selection of TOC IEC or TOC ANSI makes
available additional inverse characteristics. The superimposed high-current stage 50-
2 is available in all these cases.
At address 1201 FCT 50/51, phase time-overcurrent protection may be switched ON
or OFF.
50N/51N The functions associated with time-overcurrent protection were established during
configuration of protective functions (Section 2.1.1) at address 0113. If address 0113
was set equal to Charac. Ground = Definite Time, then only the settings for the
definite-time elements are available. Inverse characteristics may be available in addi-
tion. The superimposed high-set stage 50N-2 is available in all these cases.
Depending on the parameter 0613A 50N/51N/67N w.the overcurrent protection for
ground currents can either operate with measured values IGnd or with the quantities
3I0 calculated from the three phase currents. Devices featuring a sensitive ground cur-
rent input, however, generally use the calculated quantity 3I0.
The time-overcurrent protection for ground currents can be switched ON or OFF in ad-
dress 1301 FCT 50N/51N independent of the time-overcurrent protection for phase
currents.
For ground faults characteristic, pick-up value and delay time can be set separately
from those of the phase branches. This allows to use a different grading with shorter
delays and more sensitive settings for ground faults.
Manual Close Mode When a circuit breaker is closed into a faulted line, a high speed trip by the circuit
(Phase, Ground) breaker is often desired. The manual closing feature is designed to remove the delay
from one of the time-overcurrent elements when a circuit breaker is manually closed
into a fault. The time delay may be bypassed for one of the three time-overcurrent
phase elements and one of the three time-overcurrent ground elements via an impulse
from the external control switch, thus resulting in high speed tripping. This impulse is
prolonged by a period of 300 ms. Address 1213A MANUALCLOSEMODE can be set
such that the delay is defeated for the 50-2 element, the 50-1 element, the 51 element,
or none of the elements (Inactive). Defeating the delay on just one of the three el-
ements allows control over what level of fault current is required to initiate high speed
tripping of a circuit breaker that is closed into a fault.
Accordingly, address 1313A MANUALCLOSEMODE is taken into account for the ground
path. It specifies for the phase and ground which pick-up value takes effect with what
delay time if the circuit breaker is closed manually.
50 7SJ62/63/64 Manual
C53000-G1140-C147-1
External control If the manual closing signal is not from a 7SJ62/63/64, that is, neither via the built-in
switch operator interface nor via a series interface, but, rather, directly from a control switch,
this signal must be passed to a 7SJ62/63/64 binary input, and configured accordingly
so that the element selected for high speed tripping will be effective.
Internal control The manual closing information must be routed via CFC (interlocking task-level) using
function the CMD_Information block, if the internal control function is used (see Figure 2-14).
“IN: Control Device “OUT: P. System Data 2

52 Breaker CF_D12” >Manual Close SP”
Figure 2-14 Example for manual close feature using the internal control function
Inrush Restraint When applying the protection device to transformers where high inrush currents must
be expected, 7SJ62/63/64 can make use of an inrush restraint function for the time
overcurrent stages 50-1 PICKUP, 51 PICKUP, 50N-1 PICKUP and 51N PICKUP.
The inrush restraint option is enabled or disabled in 2201 INRUSH REST.. Subsec-
tion 2.2.2.6 shows the characteristic values of the inrush restraint function.
2.2.2.2 Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (50-2, 50-1)
50-2 Relay Element The pickup and delay of the 50-2 relay element are set at addresses 1202 50-2
PICKUP and 1203 50-2 DELAY respectively. The 50-2 relay element is typically uti-
lized for protection against high magnitude faults. For this reason, the relay element
pickup is often set high while the delay is set short. It is always important to set the
pickup and delay such that operation of the 50-2 element will coordinate with other
protective equipment in the system.
Below is an example of how a 50-2 relay element might be set to protect a power
transformer in a radial distribution system against high magnitude internal faults:
Example: Transformer used to supply distribution bus with the following data:
Base Transformer Rating 16 MVA
Transformer Impedance (ZTX) 10%
Nominal High Side Voltage 110 kV
Nominal Low Side Voltage 20 kV
Transformer Connection Delta-Grounded Wye
High Side Fault MVA 1,000 MVA
High Side Current Transformer Ratio 100 A / 1 A
Low Side Current Transformer Ratio 500 A / 1 A
Based on the data above, the following are calculated:

3-phase high side fault current @ 110kV 5250 A
3-phase low side fault current @ 20kV 3928 A
3-phase low side fault current @ 110kV 714 A
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 51
C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
Transformer full load current @ 110kV 84 A

(IBase-110kV)
Transformer full load current @ 20kV 462 A
(IBase-20kV)
High side current transformer ratio (CTR-HS) 100 A / 1 A
Low side current transformer ratio (CTR-LS) 500 A / 1 A
The minimum pickup setting for the 50-2 element can be governed by a single inequal-
ity:
1 I Base-110kV
50-2 Pickup > ---------- × ----------------------------
Z TX CTR-HS
If the pickup of the 50-2 relay element is set according to the inequality above, the 50-
2 element will never pickup for a fault beyond the transformer’s low-side bushings,
even if changing system conditions increase the high side fault MVA. Using the ine-
quality above as a guide, a setting of 10.00 amperes is chosen for the 50-2 element.
At address 1203, a short time delay should be entered to prevent inrush currents from
initiating false trips.
For motor protection, the 50-2 relay element must be set smaller than the smallest
phase-to-phase fault current and larger than the largest motor starting current. Since
the maximum motor starting current is generally on the order of 1.6 times the nominal
motor current, the 50-2 phase element should be set as follows:
1,6 ⋅ I startup < 50-2 Pickup < I φφ – Min
The potential increase in starting current caused by overvoltage conditions is already

accounted for by the 1.6 factor. The 50-2 phase element may be set with no delay
since, unlike the transformer, no saturation of the cross reactance occurs in a motor.
If the reverse interlocking principle is used (see Subsection 2.2.1.5), the 50-2 element
can be employed in a high speed bus protection scheme. With a brief safety delay en-
tered at address 1203 (50 ms), the 50-2 element can be blocked for faults beyond the
bus feeder breakers. The 50-1 element or 51 element will serve as redundant protec-
tion for the bus. The pickup values of both the 50-2 unit and the 50-1 or 51 unit are set
equal to each other. The time delay associated with the 50-1 or 51 element is then
time-coordinated with the individual bus feeder devices.
The delay set at address 1203 is in addition to the 50-2 pickup time. The delay of the
50-2 element may be set to ∞. The 50-2 element will then pickup and generate a mes-
sage, but will never trip. If the 50-2 element is not required at all, then the pickup value
should be set to ∞, thus preventing pickup, trip, and the generation of a message.
50-1 Relay Element The pickup value of the 50-1 relay element (set at address 1204 50-1 PICKUP)
should be set above the maximum anticipated load current. Pickup due to overload
should never occur since the 50-1 relay element is designed only for fault protection.
For this reason, a setting equal to 120 % of the expected peak load is recommended
for line protection, and a setting equal to 140 % of the expected peak load is recom-
mended for transformers and motors.
If the 7SJ62/63/64 relay is used to protect transformers with large inrush currents, the
energization stabilization feature may be used to prevent a false trip of the 50-1 relay
52 7SJ62/63/64 Manual
C53000-G1140-C147-1
element. The configuration data for the inrush restraint feature is programmed at ad-
dress block 22 (see Subsection 2.9.2).
The delay of the 50-1 element is set at address 1205 50-1 DELAY and should be
based on system coordination requirements.
The delay set at address 1205 is in addition to the 50-1 element’s pickup time. The
delay of the 50-1 element may be set to ∞. The 50-1 element will then pickup and gen-
erate a message, but will never trip. If the 50-1 element is not required at all, then the
pickup value should be set to ∞, thus preventing pickup, trip, and the generation of a
message.
Interaction with Au- When reclosing occurs, it is desirable to have high speed protection against temporary
tomatic Reclosing faults. If the fault still exists after the first reclose, the 50-2 elements can be blocked
Equipment and the 50-1 and/or 51 elements will provide time delay tripping. At address 1214A
50-2 active, it can be specified whether or not the 50-2 elements should be super-
vised by the status of an internal or external automatic reclosing device. If address
1214A is set to With 79 Active, the 50-2 elements will not operate unless auto-
matic reclosing is not blocked. If address 1214A is set to Always, the 50-2 elements
will always operate.
The integrated automatic reclosing function of 7SJ62/63/64 also provides the option
to individually determine for each time overcurrent stage whether tripping or blocking
is to be carried out instantaneously or with time delay, unaffected by the AR (see Sub-
section 2.13.1.3).
2.2.2.3 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (51)
51 Relay Element Having set TOC IEC or TOC ANSI when configuring the protection functions (Subsec-
With IEC or ANSI tion 2.1.1) in address 0112 Charac. Phase, also the parameters for the inverse
Curves characteristics are available.
Having set TOC IEC in address 0112 Charac. Phase, specify the desired IEC
curve (Normal Inverse, Very Inverse, Extremely Inv. or Long Inverse)
in address 1211 51 IEC CURVE. If TOC ANSI was selected in address 0112
Charac. Phase, specify the desired ANSI curve (Very Inverse, Inverse, Short
Inverse, Long Inverse, Moderately Inv., Extremely Inv. or Definite
Inv.) in address 1212 51 ANSI CURVE.
Pickup of the 51 relay element will occur for currents greater than or equal to 110 %
of the 51 element’s pickup value, and may or may not occur for currents between
100 % and 110 % of the 51 element’s pickup value. Dropout of the 51 relay element
occurs when the current decreases to 95 % of the 51 element’s pickup value. Select-
ing the option Disk Emulation in address 1210 51 Drop-out, the dropout is per-
formed according to the dropout characteristic as described in Subsection 2.2.1.2.
The pickup of the 51 element is set at address 1207 51 PICKUP. As is the case for
the 50-1 relay element, the pickup value of the 51 relay element should be set above
the maximum anticipated load current. Pickup due to overload should never occur
since the 51 relay element is designed only for fault protection. For this reason, a set-
ting equal to 120 % of the expected peak load is recommended for line protection, and
a setting equal to 140 % of the expected peak load is recommended for transformers
and motors.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 53
C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
The associated time multiplier becomes accessible when selecting an IEC curve at
address 1208 51 TIME DIAL and an ANSI curve at address 1209 51 TIME DIAL.
It must be coordinated with the time grading of the network.
The time multiplication factor may be set to ∞. The 51 element will then pickup and
generate a message, but will never trip. If the 51 element is not required at all, address
0112 should set to Charac. Phase = Definite Time during protective function
configuration.
User Specified If address 0112 Charac. Phase = User Defined PU or User def. Reset dur-
Characteristic ing configuration of the user-specified curve option, a maximum of 20 value pairs (cur-
Curves rent and time) may be entered at address 1230 51/51N to represent the time-current
characteristic curve associated with the 51 element. This option allows point-by-point
entry of any desired curve. This option allows point-by-point entry of any desired
curve. If address 0112 was set to User def. Reset during configuration of the
user-specified curve option, additional value pairs (current and reset time) may be en-
tered at address 1231 MofPU Res T/Tp to represent the reset curve associated
with the 51 element.
Since the entered current values are rounded off in a certain grid system of the device
before the editing (see Table 2-4), we recommend the use of these exact values.
Current and time values are entered as multiples of the address 1207 and 1208 set-
tings. Therefore, it is recommended that addresses 1207 and 1208 be initially set to
1.00 to simplify the calculation of these ratios. Once the curve is entered, the settings
at addresses 1207 and 1208 may be modified if necessary.
Upon delivery of the device, all time values are set at ∞, preventing pickup of the de-
vice from initiating a trip signal.
When entering a user-specified curve, the following must be observed:
− Enter the data points in ascending order. The time overcurrent functions will sort the
data points by current values in ascending order. The graphical representation dis-
plays the data points in the order they are entered.
− As few as 10 pairs of numbers may be entered at the user’s option. Each unused
pair must then be marked as unused by entering “∞” as for the time and current val-
ues. It is important to view the curve to ensure that it is clear and constant.
− The current values entered should be those from Table 2-4, along with the matching
times. Other values for MofPU are changed to the nearest adjacent value although
this is not indicated.
Table 2-4 Preferential Values of Standardized Currents for User Specific Tripping Characteristics
MofPU = 1 to 1.94 MofPU = 2 to 4.75 MofPU = 5 to 7.75 MofPU = 8 to 20

1.00 1.50 2.00 3.50 5.00 6.50 8.00 15.00
1.06 1.56 2.25 3.75 5.25 6.75 9.00 16.00
1.13 1.63 2.50 4.00 5.50 7.00 10.00 17.00
1.19 1.69 2.75 4.25 5.75 7.25 11.00 18.00
1.25 1.75 3.00 4.50 6.00 7.50 12.00 19.00
54 7SJ62/63/64 Manual
C53000-G1140-C147-1

1.31 1.81 3.25 4.75 6.25 7.75 13.00 20.00
1.38 1.88 14.00
1.44 1.94
− Current flows which are less than the smallest current value entered will not lead to
an extension of the tripping time beyond the time associated with the smallest cur-
rent value entered. The characteristic curve (see Figure 2-15) represents constant
tripping time for currents less than the smallest current value entered
.
t Reset Curve Characteristic Curve
Largest Current Point

Smallest Current Point

0.05 0.9 1 1.1 20 I
Figure 2-15 Use of a User-Specified Curve
− Current flows which are greater than the largest current value entered will not lead
to a reduction of the tripping time below the time associated with the largest current
value entered. The characteristic curve (see Figure 2-15) represents constant trip-
ping time for currents greater than the largest current value entered.
The time and current value pairs are entered at address 1231 to recreate the drop-
down curve. The following must be observed:
MofPU = 1 to 0.86 MofPU = 0.84 to 0.67 MofPU = 0.66 to 0.38 MofPU = 0.34 to 0.00
1.00 0.93 0,84 0,75 0.66 0.53 0.34 0.16
0.99 0.92 0.83 0.73 0.64 0.50 0.31 0.13
0.98 0.91 0.81 0.72 0.63 0.47 0.28 0.09
0.97 0.90 0.80 0.70 0.61 0.44 0.25 0.06
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 55
C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
0.96 0.89 0.78 0.69 0.59 0.41 0.22 0.03
0.95 0.88 0.77 0.67 0.56 0.38 0.19 0.00
0.94 0.86
a reduction of the reset time below the time associated with the smallest current val-
ue entered. The reset curve (see Figure 2-15) represents constant reset time for
currents smaller than the smallest current value entered
to an extension of the reset time beyond the time associated with the largest current
value entered. The reset curve (see Figure 2-15) represents constant reset time for
currents larger than the largest current value entered.
When using DIGSI® 4 to modify settings, a dialog box is available to enter up to twenty
pairs of values for a characteristic curve (see Figure 2-16).
Figure 2-16 Entry and Visualization of a User Specified Characteristic Curve in DIGSI® 4
In order to represent the curve graphically, the user should click on Characteris-
tic. The pre-entered curve will appear as shown in Figure 2-16.
The characteristic curve shown in the graph can be modified by placing the mouse cur-
sor over a point on the curve, holding down the left mouse button, and dragging the
data point to the desired new position. Releasing the mouse button will automatically
update the value in the value table.
The upper limits of the value ranges are shown by dotted lines at the top and right ex-
tremes of the coordinate system. If the position of a data point lies outside these limits,
the associated value will be set to “infinity”.
56 7SJ62/63/64 Manual
C53000-G1140-C147-1
2.2.2.4 Programming Settings for Time-Overcurrent Ground Protection
General The functions associated with time-overcurrent protection were established during
configuration of protective functions (Section 2.1.1) at address 0113 Charac.
Ground. If address 0113 was set equal to Definite Time, then only the settings
for the definite-time elements are available. Inverse characteristics may be available
in addition. The superimposed high-set stage 50N-2 is available in all these cases.
At address 1301 FCT 50N/51N, ground time-overcurrent protection may be switched
ON or OFF independent of the phase time-overcurrent protection.
Pickup values, time delays, and characteristic curves for ground protection are set
separately from the pickup values, time delays and characteristic curves associated
with phase protection. Because of this, relay coordination for ground faults is indepen-
dent of relay coordination for phase faults, and more sensitive settings can often be
applied to ground protection.
50N-2 Relay Ele- The pickup and delay of the 50N-2 relay element are set at addresses 1302 50N-2
ment PICKUP and 1303 50N-2 DELAY respectively. The same considerations apply for
these settings as did for 50-2 settings discussed earlier.
The delay set at address 1303 is in addition to the 50N-2 element’s pickup time. The
delay of the 50N-2 element may be set to ∞. The 50N-2 element will then pickup and
generate a message, but will never trip. If the 50N-2 element is not required at all, then
the pickup value should be set to ∞, thus preventing pickup, trip, and the generation
of a message.
50N-1 Relay Ele- The pickup value of the 50N-1 relay element (set at address 1304 50N-1 PICKUP)
ment should be set below the minimum anticipated ground fault current in the relay’s zone
of protection.
If the 7SJ62/63/64 relay is used to protect transformers or motors with large inrush cur-
rents, the energization stabilization feature may be used to prevent a false trip of the
50N-1 relay element. It can be enabled or disabled for both the phase current and the
ground current in address 2201 INRUSH REST.. The characteristic values of the in-
rush restraint are listed in Subsection 2.2.2.6.
The delay of the 50N-1 element is set at address 1305 50N-1 DELAY and should be
The delay set at address 1305 is in addition to the 50N-1 element’s pickup time. The
delay of the 50N-1 element may be set to ∞. The 50N-1 element will then pickup and
generate a message, but will never trip. If the 50N-1 element is not required at all, then
the pickup value should be set to ∞, thus preventing pickup, trip, and the generation
of a message.
Interaction with Au- When reclosing occurs, it is desirable to have high speed protection against temporary
tomatic Reclosing faults. If the fault still exists after the first reclose, the 50N-2 elements can be blocked
Equipment and the 50N-1 and/or 51N elements will provide time delay tripping. At address 1314A
50N-2 active, it can be specified whether or not the 50N-2 elements should be su-
pervised by the status of an internal or external automatic reclosing device. If address
1314A is set to With 79 Active, the 50N-2 elements will not operate unless auto-
matic reclosing is not blocked. If address 1314A is set to Always, the 50N-2 elements
will always operate.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 57
C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
The integrated automatic reclosing function of 7SJ62/63/64 also provides the option
to individually determine for each time overcurrent stage whether tripping or blocking
is to be carried out instantaneously or with time delay, unaffected by the AR (see Sub-
section 2.13.1.3).
2.2.2.5 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (51N)
51N Relay Element Setting TOC IEC in address 0113 Charac. Ground when configuring the protection
with IEC or ANSI functions (Subsection 2.1.1), also the parameters for the inverse characteristics are
Curves available. Set the desired IEC curve (Normal Inverse, Very Inverse, Extreme-
ly Inv. or Long Inverse) in address 1311 51 IEC CURVE. Setting TOC ANSI
in address 0113 Charac. Ground, specify the desired ANSI curve (Very Inverse,
Inverse, Short Inverse, Long Inverse, Moderately Inv., Extremely
Inv. or Definite Inv.) in address 1312 51 ANSI CURVE.
Pickup of the 51N relay element will occur for currents greater than or equal to 110 %
of the 51N pickup value, and may or may not occur for currents between 100 % and
110 % of the 51 element’s pickup value. Dropout of the 51N relay element occurs
when the current decreases to 95 % of the 51N element’s pickup value. If option Disk
Emulation in enabled in address 1310 51 Drop-out, the dropout is performed
according to the dropout characteristic as described in Subsection 2.2.1.2.
The pickup value of the 51N element is set at address 1307 51N PICKUP. As is the
case for the 50N-1 relay element, the pickup value of the 51N relay element should be
set below the minimum anticipated ground fault current in the relay’s zone of protec-
tion.
The 51N element time multiplication factor for an IEC curve is set at address 1308
51N TIME DIAL and in address 1309 51N TIME DIAL for an ANSI curve and
should be based on system coordination requirements.
The time multiplication factor may also be set to ∞. The 51N element will then pickup
and generate a message, but will never trip. If the 51N element is not required at all,
address 0113 should be set to Definite Time during protective function configura-
tion (see Section 2.1.1).
2.2.2.6 Inrush Restraint
Inrush restraint will only operate, and is only accessible, if enabled at address 0122
InrushRestraint during configuration of protective functions. If the function is not
required, address 0122 should be set to Disabled. In address 2201 INRUSH REST.
the function is switched ON or OFF jointly for the overcurrent stages 50-1 PICKUP,
51 PICKUP, 50N-1 PICKUP and 51N PICKUPON.
The inrush restraint is based on the evaluation of the 2nd harmonic present in the in-
rush current. Upon delivery from the factory, the device is programmed to initiate in-
rush restraint when the second harmonic component of the measured current exceeds
15 % of the total current. This value is identical for all phases and ground, and may be
modified at address 2202. Under normal circumstances, this setting will not need to
be changed. However, in special situations, this setting may be as low as 12 %.
The effective duration of the cross-blocking 2203 CROSS BLK TIMER can be set to
a value between 0 s (harmonic restraint active for each phase individually) and a max-
58 7SJ62/63/64 Manual
C53000-G1140-C147-1
imum of 180 s (harmonic restraint of a phase blocks also the other phases for the
specified duration).
The maximum current where inrush restraint can operate is set at address 2205 I
Max
2.2.3 Settings
In the list below, the setting ranges and default setting values for the pickup currents
are for a device with a nominal current rating IN = 1 A. For a nominal current rating IN
= 5 A, multiply the Setting Options values and Default Setting values by 5. Consider
the current transformer ratios when setting the device with primary values.
Note: Addresses to which the letter “A“ is attached can only be modified via the
DIGSI® 4 software at “Additional Settings“.

1201 FCT 50/51 ON ON 50, 51 Phase Time Overcurrent
OFF
1213A MANUAL CLOSE 50-2 instantaneously 50-2 instantane- Manual Close Mode
50 -1 instantaneously ously
51 instantaneously
Inactive
1301 FCT 50N/51N ON ON 50N, 51N Ground Time Overcur-
OFF rent
1313A MANUALCLOSE- 50N-2 instantaneously 50N-2 instantane- Manual Close Mode

MODE 50N-1 instantaneously ously
51N instantaneously
Inactive
2201 INRUSH REST. OFF OFF Inrush Restraint

ON
1202 50-2 PICKUP 0.10..35.00 A; ∞ 2.00 A 50-2 Pickup
1203 50-2 DELAY 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec 50-2 Time Delay
1204 50-1 PICKUP 0.10..35.00 A; ∞ 1.00 A 50-1 Pickup
1214A 50-2 active Always Always 50-2 active

with 79 active
1207 51 PICKUP 0.10..4.00 A 1.00 A 51 Pickup
1208 51 TIME DIAL 0.05..3.20 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec 51 Time Dial
1209 51 TIME DIAL 0.50..15.00; ∞ 5.00 51 Time Dial
1210 51 Drop-out Instantaneous Disk Emulation Drop-out characteristic

Disk Emulation
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 59
C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions

1211 51 IEC CURVE Normal Inverse Normal Inverse IEC Curve
Very Inverse
Extremely Inverse
Long Inverse
1212 51 ANSI CURVE Very Inverse Very Inverse ANSI Curve

Inverse
Short Inverse
Long Inverse
Moderately Inverse
Extremely Inverse
Definite Inverse
1230 51/51N 1.00..20.00 I / Ip; ∞ 51/51N

0.01..999.00 Time Dial
1231 MofPU Res T/Tp 0.05..0.95 I / Ip; ∞ Multiple of Pickup <-> T/Tp
0.01..999.00 Time Dial
1302 50N-2 PICKUP 0.05..35.00 A; ∞ 0.50 A 50N-2 Pickup
1303 50N-2 DELAY 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 0.10 sec 50N-2 Time Delay
1314A 50N-2 active Always Always 50N-2 active

with 79 Active
1307 51N PICKUP 0.05..4.00 A 0.20 A 51N Pickup
1308 51N TIME DIAL 0.05..3.20 sec; ∞ 0.20 sec 51N Time Dial
1309 51N TIME DIAL 0.50..15.00; ∞ 5.00 51N Time Dial
1310 51N RESET Instantaneous Disk Emulation Drop-Out Characteristic

Disk Emulation
1311 51N IEC CURVE Normal Inverse Normal Inverse IEC Curve
Very Inverse
Extremely Inverse
Long Inverse
1312 51N ANSI CURVE Very Inverse Very Inverse ANSI Curve
Inverse
Short Inverse
Long Inverse
Moderately Inverse
Extremely Inverse
Definite Inverse
1330 50N/51N 1.00..20.00 I / Ip; ∞ 50N/51N

0.01..999.00 Time Dial
1331 MofPU Res T/TEp 0.05..0.95 I / Ip; ∞ Multiple of Pickup <-> T/TEp
0.01..999.00 Time Dial
2202 2nd HARMONIC 10..45 % 15 % 2nd. harmonic in % of funda-

mental
2203 CROSS BLOCK NO NO Cross Block

YES
60 7SJ62/63/64 Manual
C53000-G1140-C147-1

2204 CROSS BLK TIMER 0.00..180.00 sec 0.00 sec Cross Block Time
2205 I Max 0.30..25.00 A 7.50 A Maximum Current for Inrush

Restraint
2.2.3.1 Information List

01761 50(N)/51(N) PU 50(N)/51(N) O/C PICKUP
01791 50(N)/51(N)TRIP 50(N)/51(N) TRIP
01704 >BLK 50/51 >BLOCK 50/51
01721 >BLOCK 50-2 >BLOCK 50-2
01722 >BLOCK 50-1 >BLOCK 50-1
01723 >BLOCK 51 >BLOCK 51
01751 50/51 PH OFF 50/51 O/C switched OFF
01752 50/51 PH BLK 50/51 O/C is BLOCKED
01753 50/51 PH ACT 50/51 O/C is ACTIVE
01762 50/51 Ph A PU 50/51 Phase A picked up
01763 50/51 Ph B PU 50/51 Phase B picked up
01764 50/51 Ph C PU 50/51 Phase C picked up
01800 50-2 picked up 50-2 picked up
01805 50-2 TRIP 50-2 TRIP
01815 50/51 TRIP 50/51 I> TRIP
01820 51 picked up 51 picked up
01825 51 TRIP 51 TRIP
01804 50-2 TimeOut 50-2 Time Out
01814 50-1 TimeOut 50-1 Time Out
01824 51 Time Out 51 Time Out
01852 50-2 BLOCKED 50-2 BLOCKED
01851 50-1 BLOCKED 50-1 BLOCKED
01855 51 BLOCKED 51 BLOCKED
01910 >INSTANT. 50-2 >50-2 instantaneously
01914 >INSTANT. 51 >51 instantaneously
01911 50-2 INSTANT. 50-2 instantaneously
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 61
C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions

01915 51 INSTANT. 51 instantaneously
01714 >BLK 50N/51N >BLOCK 50N/51N
01724 >BLOCK 50N-2 >BLOCK 50N-2
01725 >BLOCK 50N-1 >BLOCK 50N-1
01726 >BLOCK 51N >BLOCK 51N
01756 50N/51N OFF 50N/51N is OFF
01757 50N/51N BLK 50N/51N is BLOCKED
01758 50N/51N ACT 50N/51N is ACTIVE
01765 50N/51NPickedup 50N/51N picked up
01831 50N-2 picked up 50N-2 picked up
01833 50N-2 TRIP 50N-2 TRIP
01836 50N-1 TRIP 50N-1 TRIP
01837 51N picked up 51N picked up
01839 51N TRIP 51N TRIP
01832 50N-2 TimeOut 50N-2 Time Out
01835 50N-1 TimeOut 50N-1 Time Out
01838 51N TimeOut 51N Time Out
01854 50N-2 BLOCKED 50N-2 BLOCKED
01853 50N-1 BLOCKED 50N-1 BLOCKED
01856 51N BLOCKED 51N BLOCKED
01916 >INSTANT. 50N-2 >50N-2 instantaneously
01983 >INSTANT. 51N >51N instantaneously
01917 50N-2 INSTANT. 50N-2 instantaneously
01984 51N INSTANT. 51N instantaneously
07563 >BLOCK InRushPh >BLOCK InRush Phase
01840 PhA InrushBlk Phase A trip blocked by inrush detection
01841 PhB InrushBlk Phase B trip blocked by inrush detection
01842 PhC InrushBlk Phase C trip blocked by inrush detection
01843 INRUSH X-BLK Cross blk: PhX blocked PhY
07551 50-1 InRushPU 50-1 InRush picked up
07552 50N-1 InRushPU 50N-1 InRush picked up
62 7SJ62/63/64 Manual
C53000-G1140-C147-1

07553 51 InRushPU 51 InRush picked up
07554 51N InRushPU 51N InRush picked up
07556 InRush OFF InRush OFF
07557 InRushPhBLOCKED InRush Phase BLOCKED
07558 InRush Gnd BLK InRush Ground BLOCKED
07561 67-TOC InRushPU 67-TOC InRush picked up
07562 67N-TOCInRushPU 67N-TOC InRush picked up
07565 Ia InRush PU Phase A InRush picked up
07566 Ib InRush PU Phase B InRush picked up
07567 Ic InRush PU Phase C InRush picked up
07564 Gnd InRush PU Ground InRush picked up
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 63
C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
2.3 Directional Overcurrent Protection (67, 67N)
General The 7SJ62/63/64 features directional overcurrent protection. Therefore, this device
can be applied to systems where proper protection depends on knowing both the mag-
nitude of the fault current and the direction of energy flow to the fault location. Direc-
tional overcurrent protection requires that the device be connected to both current
transformers and voltage transformers. The time-overcurrent protection (non-direc-
tional) described in Section 2.2 may operate as overlapping back-up protection or may
be disabled. Additionally, the user may select between directional overcurrent protec-
tion and non-directional overcurrent protection on a relay element by relay element ba-
sis.
To better understand the benefits of directional overcurrent protection, consider the
parallel transformers shown in Figure 2-17. These transformers are designated as I
and II and are supplied from a single source. For a fault internal to Transformer I, some
of the fault current will flow from Bus A through Transformer I to the fault while the re-
maining fault current flows from Bus A through Transformer II and Bus B to the fault.
In order to avoid tripping out Bus B for this fault, the load side relays protecting Trans-
former II must coordinate with the load side relays protecting Transformer I. Likewise,
for a fault internal to Transformer II, some of the fault current will flow from Bus A
through Transformer II to the fault while the remaining fault current flows from Bus A
through Transformer I and Bus B to the fault. In order to avoid tripping out Bus B for
this fault, the load side relays protecting Transformer I must coordinate with the load
side relays protecting Transformer II. If the load side relays on Transformer I and
Transformer II are conventional overcurrent elements, it is clearly impossible for the
load side relays on Transformer I and Transformer II to coordinate properly with each
other for both faults internal to Transformer I and Transformer II.
By employing directional overcurrent relays as the load side relays protecting Trans-
formers I and II, coordination between the relays is no longer necessary since the load
side relays on Transformer I will only detect faults internal to Transformer I and the
load side relays on Transformer II will only detect fault internal to Transformer II. It is
important to note that the directional overcurrent relays must be polarized toward the
faults they are to protect, which does not necessarily correspond to the direction of
normal power flow.
For the same reasons discussed above, directional overcurrent protection is also used
to protect transmission lines and distribution feeders operated in a loop configuration
or supplied from two directions, as shown in Figure 2-18.
Phase and ground directional overcurrent protection may be turned on and off inde-
pendently. Directional overcurrent relay elements are available with a wide array of di-
rectional curves and characteristic time-current curves.
There are four definite time (Instantaneous elements with optional timers) and two in-
verse time directional overcurrent elements in the device. The definite time (Instanta-
neous) directional elements include two phase elements and two ground elements.
The definite time directional phase elements are designated 67-2 and 67-1 whereas
the definite time directional ground elements are designated 67N-2 and 67N-1. The
inverse time directional elements include a directional phase element designated as
67-TOC and a directional ground element designated as 67N-TOC.
64 7SJ62/63/64 Manual
C53000-G1140-C147-1
Directional Overcurrent Protection (67, 67N)
A B
I
Direction of
Load Flow II
Time-Overcurrent Protection
Directional Overcurrent Protection
Figure 2-17 Overcurrent Protection for Parallel Transformers
t
G G
Time-Overcurrent Protection
Directional Overcurrent Protection
Figure 2-18 Transmission Lines with Sources at Each End
Depending on the setting of parameter 0613A 50N/51N/67N w.the ground current

stage can operate either with measured values Ignd or with the values 3I0 calculated
from the three phase currents. Devices featuring a sensitive ground current input,
however, generally use the calculated quantity 3I0.
All directional overcurrent elements, inverse and definite time, enabled in the device
may be blocked via an external signal to the binary inputs of the device or via auto-
matic reclosure (cyclically). Removal of the external signal to the binary input will re-
enable these elements. Also, a feature described as Manual Close Mode can be con-
figured to improve fault clearing times associated with Switch-on-to-Fault Conditions.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 65
C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
Under this situation, the time delay may be defeated for one of the three directional
overcurrent phase elements and one of the three directional overcurrent ground ele-
ments via an impulse from the external control switch, thus resulting in high speed trip-
ping. This impulse is prolonged by a period of 300 ms. The directional phase and
ground elements utilized for high speed tripping in this situation are selected at ad-
dresses 1513 and 1613 respectively.
Pickup and delay settings may be quickly adjusted to system requirements via dynam-
ic setting swapping (see Section 2.4).
Tripping by the 67-1, 67-TOC, 67N-1, and 67N-TOC elements may be blocked for in-
rush conditions by utilizing the inrush restraint feature.
Table 2-6 gives an overview of the interconnection to other functions of 7SJ62/63/64.
Table 2-6 Interconnection to other functions

Directional Time Connection to Manual Dynamic Cold- Inrush
Overcurrent Automatic CLOSE Load Pickup Restraint
Protection Stages Reclosing
67-1 • • • •
67-2 • • •
67-TOC • • • •
67N-1 • • • •
67N-2 • • •
67N-TOC • • • •
2.3.1 Description of Directional Overcurrent Protection
2.3.1.1 Definite Time, Directional Overcurrent Protection
67-2, 67N-2 The 67-2 and 67N-2 directional overcurrent elements, phase and ground currents are
compared separately with the pickup values of the 67-2 and 67N-2 relay elements.
Currents in the set direction above the pickup values are detected and recorded within
the device. After the user-configured time delay has elapsed, a trip signal is issued.
The dropout value of the definite time, directional overcurrent elements is roughly
equal to 95% of the pickup value for currents greater than or equal to 30% of the nom-
inal current of the device.
These stages can be blocked by the automatic reclosure feature.
Figure 2-20 shows by way of example the logic diagram for the 67-2 relay element.
66 7SJ62/63/64 Manual
C53000-G1140-C147-1
Inactive
„1“ 67-TOC instant.
67-1 instant.
67-2 instant.
&
Manual Close
79 AR 67-2 inst. or
FNo. 14501
>INSTANT. 67-2.
67-2 Ph A PU FNo. 02642

or 67-2 picked up
&
1503 67-2 DELAY or FNo. 02649
& T 0 or 67-2 TRIP
A or FNo. 02647
B 67-2 Time Out
C
Measurement
Pickup-/Tripping Logic
79 AR 67-2 blk FNo. 02655

>BLOCK 67-2
FNo. 02604 FNo. 02652
>BLK 67/67-TOC 67 BLOCKED
1501 FCT 67/67-TOC or FNo. 02651
OFF
67/67-TOC OFF
„1“ ON
If parameter MANUALCLOSEMODE is set to 50-2 instant. and manual close detec-

tion applies, the pick-up is tripped instantaneously, also for blocking of the stage via
binary input. The same applies to 79 AR 67-2 inst. and the binary input for in-
stantaneous tripping.
67-1, 67N-1 The 67-1 and 67N-1 directional overcurrent elements, phase and ground currents are
compared separately with the pickup values of the 67-1 and 67N-1 relay elements.
Currents in the set direction above the pickup values are detected and recorded within
the device. After the user-configured time delay has elapsed, a trip signal is issued.
element time delay elapses.
Different messages are recorded and displayed appear depending on whether tripping
takes place or the time delay expires without tripping.
The dropout value of the definite time, directional overcurrent elements is roughly
equal to 95% of the pickup value for currents greater than or equal to 30% of the nom-
inal current of the device.
These stages can be blocked by the automatic reclosure feature.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 67
C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
Figure 2-20 shows by way of example the logic diagram for the 67-1 relay element.
Inactive
„1“ 67-TOC instant.
67-1 instant.
67-2 instant.
&
Manual Close
79 AR 67-1 inst. or
FNo. 14503 Inrush Recognition 67-1 (see Figure 2-12)
>INSTANT. 67-1
FNo. 07559
Aφ 67-1 PU & 67-1 InRushPU
or
FNo. 02660
&
& 67-1 picked up
1505 67-1 DELAY or FNo. 02665

& 67-1 TRIP
T 0 ≥1
&
or
FNo. 02664
67-1 Time Out
Direction Determination
FNo. 02628
Forward Phase A forward
Undefined
„1“ FNo. 02632
Reverse
A Phase A reverse
B
C
Measurement/Logic
79 AR 67-1 blk.
FNo. 02637
>BLOCK 67-1
FNo. 02604 FNo. 02652
1501 FCT 67N/67N-
or
FNo. 02651
OFF
67/67-TOC OFF
„1“ ON
2.3.1.2 Inverse Time, Directional Overcurrent Protection (67-TOC, 67N-TOC)
Inverse time, directional overcurrent protection, the 67-TOC and 67N-TOC relay ele-
ments may contain IEC characteristic curves or ANSI characteristic curves depending
on the model ordered. A user-specified curve may also be applied to the inverse time,
directional overcurrent relay elements. The curves and associated formulas are given
in Technical Specifications (Figures 4-1 to 4-6 in Section 4.3). During configuration of
the 67-TOC and 67N-TOC characteristic curves, the definite time directional relay el-
ements (67-2, 67-1, 67N-2, and 67N-1) are enabled (see Subsection 2.3.1.1).
68 7SJ62/63/64 Manual
C53000-G1140-C147-1
Pickup and Trip- Each phase and ground current is separately compared with the pickup values of the
ping 67-TOC and 67N-TOC relay elements. When the currents in the 67-TOC and 67N-
TOC relay elements exceed the corresponding pickup value by a factor of 1.1, the el-
ement picks up and a message is reported, if the current is in the set direction. If the
inrush restraint feature is being utilized, then the message reported is dependent on
whether or not an inrush condition exists. Pickup of a 67-TOC or 67N-TOC relay ele-
ment is based on the rms value of the fundamental harmonic. When the 67-TOC and
67N-TOC elements pickup, the time delay of the trip signal is calculated using an in-
tegrated measurement process. The calculated time delay is dependent on the actual
fault current flowing and the selected time-current characteristic curve. Once the time
delay elapses, a trip signal is issued.
element time delay elapses. The r.m.s. values of the fundamental waves are used for
the pickup.
The characteristic curves of the 67-TOC and 67N-TOC relay elements may be select-
ed independently of each other. In addition, pickup, time multipliers, and time dials for
the 67-TOC and 67N-TOC elements may be individually set.
Dropout For IEC or Dropout of an element using an IEC or ANSI curve occurs when the current decreases
ANSI Curves to about 95 % of the pickup value if instantaneous reset is selected, or 90 % of the
pickup value if disk emulation is selected. When instantaneous reset is selected, reset
of the element occurs without delay. When disk emulation is selected, reset occurs
just as it would for an electromechanical relay utilizing an induction disk.
For disk emulation, the reset process begins after fault current is interrupted. Reset
corresponds to the unwinding of an induction disk. A subsequent pickup of the relay
element prior to full reset will result in a reduced tripping time delay. The reduced trip-
ping time delay will be based on the degree to which the relay had reset when the sub-
sequent pickup occurred. When the current in the relay element is between 90 % and
95 % of the pickup value following dropout, neither disk movement in the tripping or
reset direction is simulated.
Disk emulation offers advantages when the inverse time, directional overcurrent relay
elements must be coordinated with conventional electromechanical overcurrent relays
located toward the source.
User Specified When user specified curves are utilized, the time-current characteristic curve may be
Curves defined point by point. Up to 20 pairs of values (current, time) may be entered. The
relay element then approximates the curve using linear interpolation.
When utilizing user specified time-current curves, the reset curve may be user speci-
fied as well. This is advantageous when the inverse time, directional overcurrent pro-
tection must be coordinated with conventional electromechanical overcurrent relays
located toward the source. If user specified reset curves are not utilized, the relay el-
ement drops out when current decreases to about 95% of the relay element’s pickup
value, and immediate reset takes place.
Figure 2-21 shows by way of example the logic diagram for the overcurrent stage 67-
TOC of the inverse directional time-overcurrent protection of the phase currents.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 69
C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
Inactive
„1“ 67-2 instant.
67-1 instant.
67-TOC instant.
Manual Close &
79 AR 67-TOC inst. or
FNo. 14506 Inrush Recognition 67-TOC (s. Figure 2-12)
>INSTANT 67-TOC
FNo. 07561
Aφ 67-TOC PU & 67-TOC InRushPU
or
FNo. 02670
& & 67-TOC pickedup
1508 51 TIME DIAL or FNo. 02675

& 67-TOC TRIP
or
&
or
FNo. 02674
67-TOC Time Out
Direction Determination
FNo. 02628
Forward Phase A forward
Undefined
„1“ FNo. 02632
Reverse
A Phase A reverse
B
C
Measurement/Logic
79 AR 67-TOC blk
FNo. 02669
FNo. 02622 or
>BLOCK 67-TOC 67-TOC BLOCKED
FNo. 02604 FNo. 02652

1501 FCT 67N/67N-TOC
or
FNo. 02651
OFF
67/67-TOC OFF
„1“ ON
Figure 2-21 Logic Diagram for the 67-TOC Relay Element
2.3.1.3 Determination of Direction
Determination of fault direction is performed independently for each phase element

and for the ground element.
Methods of For the a-phase directional elements, direction is determined by comparing Ia with Vbc
Determining at the relay location. For the b-phase and c-phase directional elements, direction is de-
Direction termined by comparing Ib with Vca and Ic with Vab at the relay location. For phase-to-
ground, phase-to-phase, and double phase-to-ground faults, sufficient voltage magni-
tude is available at the relay location to determine direction for all possible fault loca-
tions. For three-phase faults, stored voltage values are used to determine direction un-
less sufficient voltage magnitudes exists at the relay location. The stored voltage val-
ues correspond to the voltage magnitudes and angles during the last two cycles where
70 7SJ62/63/64 Manual
C53000-G1140-C147-1
sufficient voltage magnitude was available to determine direction. When sufficient volt-
age magnitude is not available to determine direction, direction is locked until sufficient
voltage returns. When closing into a three-phase fault, if voltage magnitude is not suf-
ficient to determine direction and no stored voltage values exist in the buffer, the relay
element will trip without regard to fault direction. In all other cases the voltage magni-
tude will be sufficient for determining the direction.
For the directional ground fault elements, direction is determined by comparing V0 with
I0. The current I0 may be obtained from a current transformer connected in the residual
path or may be calculated by the device from the three phase currents. The voltage
V0 may be calculated by the device from the three phase-to-ground voltages or the
voltage 3V0 may be obtained by connecting the secondary windings of the voltage
transformers in a broken delta configuration. If the magnitude of V0 or 3V0 is not suf-
ficient to determine direction, then the directional ground elements will not initiate a trip
signal. If the current I0 cannot be determined because only two current transformers
are utilized or the current transformers are connected in an open delta configuration,
then the directional ground elements will not be able to function.
Phase-to-ground faults are detected by the directional ground element, and may be
detected by the directional phase element associated with the faulted phase if the
magnitude of the fault current is sufficient. Phase-to-phase faults are detected by the
two directional phase elements associated with the faulted phases. Double phase-to-
ground faults are detected by the directional ground element, and may be detected by
the directional phase elements associated with the faulted phases if the magnitude of
the fault current flowing in the phase conductors is sufficient. Three-phase faults, of
course, are detected by all directional phase elements, but not by the directional
ground elements. As was stated earlier, in order for any ground fault to be detected by
a directional ground element, current transformers and voltage transformers must be
connected so as to supply sufficient magnitudes of zero sequence currents and volt-
age.
For a phase-to-ground fault, the voltage supplied to the directional phase element pro-
tecting the faulted phase is 90° out of phase with the phase-to-ground voltage existing
on the faulted phase at the relay location (see Figure 2-22). The device compensates
for this phase difference by adding 90° when the phase sequence is “abc” and sub-
tracting 90° when the phase sequence is “acb.” The resulting voltage is called the po-
larizing voltage. For phase-to-phase faults, the angles of the polarizing voltages asso-
ciated with the directional phase elements which protect the faulted phases can vary
based upon the location of the fault with respect to the device. The relationship be-
tween the polarizing voltage angle and the phase current angle for a phase-to-phase
fault is identical to the relationship between the polarizing voltage angle and the phase
current angle for a phase-to-ground fault only when the fault location and relay loca-
tion are identical.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 71
C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
VA
VA
VCA VAB
VC VB VC VB
UL2–L3 VBC
a) Phase to Ground Fault (a-g) b) Phase to Phase Fault (a-c)

Figure 2-22 Voltages Used for Direction Determination
Table 2-7 shows the assignment of voltage and current values for the determination of fault di-
rection for various types of short-circuit faults.
Table 2-7 Voltage and Current Values for the Determination of Fault Direction
A B C GROUND
Pick up Current Voltage Current Voltage Current Voltage Current Voltage
A Ia Vbc
B Ib Vca
C Ic Vab
G I0 V01)
A, G Ia Vbc I0 V01)
B, G Ib Vca I0 V01)
C, G Ic Vab I0 V01)
A, B Ia Vbc Ib Vca
B, C Ib Vca Ic Vab
C, A Ia Vbc Ic Vab
A, B, G Ia Vbc Ib Vca I0 V01)
B, C, G Ib Vca Ic Vab I0 V01)
C, A, G Ia Vbc Ic Vab I0 V01)
A, B, C Ia Vbc Ib Vca Ic Vab
A, B, C, G Ia Vbc Ib Vca Ic Vab I0 V01)
1) or 3 * V0= |Vag + Vbg + Vcg|, depending on type of connection for the voltages
The direction curve for the directional phase relay element is shown in Figure 2-23 in
a complex R-X diagram. The curve illustrates the operating direction of the relay in
terms of the impedance viewed by the directional phase relay element, that is, the ratio
72 7SJ62/63/64 Manual
C53000-G1140-C147-1
of the directional phase element polarizing voltage to the directional phase element
current. Line ‘a’ represents the directional limit line, and when the protective relay
views an impedance which lies on the same of the directional limit line as the shaded
area, the fault is assumed to be in the forward direction.
For a phase-to-phase fault, the actual directional limit line will deviate from the theo-
retical when the fault location is different than the relay location because the polarizing
voltage angle varies with fault location (see Figure 2-22b). For a b-to-c fault, the direc-
tional limit for the b-phase directional element rotates clockwise as the location be-
tween the relay and fault increases (dotted line ‘b’ in Figure 2-23). Likewise, the direc-
tional limit for the c-phase directional element rotates counterclockwise as the location
between the relay and fault increases (dotted line c in Figure 2-23). Rotation of the di-
rectional limit in this manner is irrelevant in practice, since the impedance viewed by
the relay either lies in the first or third quadrant of the R-X diagram.
jX
a
b
Torque Line
angle Impedance Z
c Forwards
R
Reserve
Torque angle limits
Figure 2-23 Torque angle limits
2.3.1.4 Reverse Interlocking for Looped Lines
Application The reverse interlocking principle may be applied to a group of transmission lines and
Example distribution feeders which operate in a looped configuration or which are supplied from
two directions. High speed protection is possible using reverse interlocking by having
the directional overcurrent elements block high speed non-directional overcurrent el-
ements as shown in Figure 2-24. This scheme is feasible when the lengths of the lines
are not too great and when pilot wires are available for signal transfer.
For each line, a separate data transfer path is required to facilitate signal transmission
in each direction. These transfer paths carry the blocking signals to the opposite end
of the lines. In addition, at each line terminal, two directional overcurrent elements
must be employed, one polarized to operate for faults in the forward direction (toward
the line) and one polarized to operate for faults in the reverse direction. If a line is en-
ergized, but open at one end, an interruption of the transfer path is noted and reported
with a delay.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 73
C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
During a line fault, the directional overcurrent element that detects faults in the forward
(line) direction will block the high speed operation of the non-directional overcurrent
elements in the reverse direction. The non-directional relays that are blocked are gen-
erally located at the same substation. In addition, a message is generated regarding
the fault direction and transmitted to the relays located in the reverse direction. During
a fault in the reverse direction, the directional overcurrent element that detects faults
in the reverse direction will block the high-speed operation of the non-directional over-
current element at the opposite end of the line. The relay at the opposite end of the
line is generally located at a different substation, thus blocking is accomplished via the
pilot wires. In addition, a message is generated regarding the fault direction and trans-
mitted to the relay located at the opposite end of the line.
G 52 52 52 52 52 52 G
7SJ6* 7SJ6* 7SJ6* 7SJ6* 7SJ6* 7SJ6*
50-1 50-1 50-1 50-1 50-1 50-1
52
7SJ6*
50-1
− Blocking
50-1 − Non-directional Ele-
52 ment
7SJ6* − Directional Element
50-1
Figure 2-24 Reverse Interlocking Using Directional Elements
forwards
Phase A forward
Pickup of 50-1 A φ Direction deter-
mination Phase A reverse
Phase A reverse
forwards
Ground forward
Pickup of 50N-1 Direction deter-
mination Ground reverse
Ground reverse
Figure 2-25 Logic Diagram for Generation of Fault Direction Signals
The directional overcurrent elements can be coordinated with each other to provide
time delayed backup protection for the reverse interlocking scheme.
Figure 2-25 shows the logic diagram for the generation of fault direction signals.
74 7SJ62/63/64 Manual
C53000-G1140-C147-1
2.3.2 Programming Directional Overcurrent Settings
In contrast to the main functions of non-directional phase and ground overcurrent pro-
tection, all other protective functions are disabled upon device delivery. The accom-
panying addresses appear in the overview of setting groups only when the functions
are configured as present (Section 2.1.1). The functions may be enabled by selecting
a time characteristic(i.e. Definite, ANSI, or User-Defined) during configuration.
When selecting the directional time-overcurrent protection in DIGSI® 4 a dialog box
appears with several tabs for setting individual parameters. Depending on the func-
tional scope specified during configuration of the protective functions in addresses
0115 67/67-TOC and 0116 67N/67N-TOC the number of tabs can vary.
2.3.2.1 General
Phase Current If address 0115 67/67-TOC was set to Definite Time, then only the settings for
Stages the definite-time elements are available. Selecting TOC IEC or TOC ANSI the inverse
characteristics will be available in addition. The superimposed directional stages 67-2
and 67-1 apply in all these cases.
At address 1501 FCT 67/67-TOC, directional phase overcurrent protection may be
switched ON or OFF.
Ground Current At address 1601 FCT 67N/67N-TOC, directional ground time-overcurrent protection
Stage may be switched ON or OFF independent of the directional phase time-overcurrent pro-
tection.
Depending on the parameter 0613A 50N/51N/67N w., the device can either oper-
ate using measured values Ignd or the quantities 3I0 calculated from the three phase
currents. Devices featuring a sensitive ground current input, however, generally use
the calculated value 3I0.
with directional phase protection. Because of this, relay coordination for ground faults
is independent of relay coordination for phase faults, and more sensitive settings can
often be applied to directional ground protection.
Manual Close Mode When a circuit breaker is closed into a faulted line, a high speed trip by the circuit
(Phase, Ground) breaker is often desired. The manual closing feature is designed to remove the delay
from one of the directional overcurrent elements when a circuit breaker is manually
closed into a fault. The time delay may be bypassed via an impulse from the external
control switch, thus resulting in high speed tripping. This impulse is prolonged by a pe-
riod of 300 ms. Address 1513A MANUALCLOSEMODE can be set such that the delay is
defeated for the 67-2 element, the 67-1 element, the 67-TOC element, or none of the
elements. Accordingly, address 1613A MANUALCLOSEMODE is considered for the
ground path address. Defeating the delay on just one of the three elements (phase
and ground) allows control over what level of fault current is required to initiate high
speed tripping of a circuit breaker that is closed into a fault.
External Control If the manual closing signal is not from a 7SJ62/63/64, that is, neither via the built-in
Switch operator interface nor via a series interface, but, rather, directly from a control ac-
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 75
C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
knowledgment switch, this signal must be passed to a 7SJ62/63/64 binary input, and
configured accordingly so that the element selected for high speed tripping will be ef-
fective.
Internal control The manual closing information must be routed via CFC (interlocking task-level) using
function the CMD_Information block, if the internal control function is used (see Figure 2-26).
“IN: Control Device “OUT: P. System Data 2

52 Breaker CF_D12” >Manual Close SP”
Figure 2-26 Example for manual close feature using the internal control function
Direction Limit Line At address 1515A Normal Load, the directional limit line may be set as
and Directional Inductive(135×), Resistive (90×), or Capacitive(45×) (see Figure 2-27).
Orientation As a rule, the option Inductive(135×) is used since power system elements are
inductive by nature.
The directional orientation may be established at address 1516 67N Direction. Di-
rectional overcurrent protection normally operates in the direction of the facility to be
protected (line, transformer, etc.). If the device is properly connected in accordance
with one of the circuit diagrams in Appendix A3, this is the Forward direction.
jX jX jX
R R R
INDUCTIVE (135°) RESISTIVE (90°) CAPACITIVE (45°)
Figure 2-27 Definition of the Directional Limit Line (addresses 1515A and 1516)
If the voltage used to determine fault direction drops below the minimum value, record-
ed voltage values are available from a buffer based on the last two cycles of sufficient
voltage. If recorded voltage is not available due to closing in on a fault, tripping will take
place without directional determination.
Direction Line Limit At address 1615A Normal Load, the directional limit line may be set as
and Direction Ori- Inductive(135×), Resistive (90×), or Capacitive(45×) (see Figure 2-27).
entation (Ground) As a rule, the option Inductive(135×) is used since power system elements are
inductive by nature.
The directional orientation may be established at address 1616 67N Direction. Di-
rectional overcurrent protection normally operates in the direction of the facility to be
protected (line, transformer, etc.). If the device is properly connected in accordance
with one of the circuit diagrams in Appendix A.3, this is the Forward direction.
76 7SJ62/63/64 Manual
C53000-G1140-C147-1
jX jX jX
R R R
INDUCTIVE (135°) RESISTIVE (90°) CAPACITIVE (45°)
Figure 2-28 Definition of the Directional Limit Line (addresses 1615A and 1616)
If the voltage used to determine fault direction drops below the minimum value, record-
ed voltage values are available from a buffer based on the last two cycles of sufficient
voltage. If recorded voltage is not available due to closing in on a fault, a tripping will
not occur.
Inrush Restraint When applying the protection device to transformers where high inrush currents are
to be expected, 7SJ62/63/64 can make use of an inrush restraint function for the di-
rectional overcurrent stages 50-1 PICKUP, 51 PICKUP, 50N-1 PICKUP and 51N
PICKUP together with the non-directional overcurrent stages. The inrush restraint op-
tion is enabled or disabled at 2201 INRUSH REST. (at the parameters for the non-
directional time overcurrent protection) Subsection 2.2.2.6 shows the characteristic
values of the inrush restraint feature.
2.3.2.2 Definite-Time, Directional Overcurrent Protection (67-2, 67-1)
67-2 Relay Element The pickup and delay of the 67-2 relay element are set at addresses 1502 67-2
PICKUP and 1503 67-2 DELAY respectively. In setting the pickup and delay of the
67-2 element, the same considerations apply as did for the determining the pickup and
delay of the 50-2 element in Subsection 2.2.2.1.
should be set to ∞ thus preventing pickup, trip, and the generation of a message.
67-1 Relay Element The pickup value of the 67-1 relay element (set at address 1504 67-1 PICKUP)
should be set above the maximum anticipated load current. Pickup due to overload
should never occur since the 50-1 relay element is designed only for fault protection.
For this reason, a setting equal to 120 % of the expected peak load is recommended
for line protection, and a setting equal to 140 % of the expected peak load is recom-
mended for transformers and motors.
rents, the inrush restraint feature may be used to prevent a false trip of the 67-1 relay
dress block 22 (see Subsection 2.9.2).
The delay of the 67-1 element is set at address 1505 67-1 DELAY and should be
based on system coordination requirements. The delay for directional elements is usu-
ally set shorter than the delay for non-directional elements since the non-directional
elements overlap the directional elements as backup protection.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 77
C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
For parallel transformers supplied from a single source (see Figure 2-17), the delay of
the directional elements located on the load side of the transformers may be set to
zero if desired.
should be set to ∞ thus preventing pickup, trip, and the generation of a message.
Interaction with When reclosing occurs, it is desirable to have high speed protection against temporary
Automatic faults. If the fault still exists after the first reclose, the 67-2 elements can be blocked
Reclosing and the 67-1 elements will provide time delay tripping. At address 1514A 67 active,
Equipment it can be specified whether or not the 67-2 elements should be supervised by the sta-
tus of an internal or external automatic reclosing device. If address 1514A is set to
With 79 Active, the 67-2 elements will not operate unless automatic reclosing is
not blocked. If address 1514A is set to Always, the 67-2 elements will always oper-
ate.
Die integrierte Wiedereinschaltautomatik im 7SJ62/63/64 bietet außerdem die Mög-
lichkeit, für jede der gerichteten Überstromzeitschutzstufen getrennt festzulegen, ob
unverzögert, unbeeinflusst von der AWE mit der eingestellten Zeit ausgelöst oder blo-
ckiert werden soll (siehe Abschnitt 2.13.1.3).
2.3.2.3 Inverse-Time Directional Overcurrent Protection (67-TOC)
67-TOC Relay Having set TOC IEC or TOC ANSI in address 0115 67/67-TOC when configuring
Element With IEC or the protective functions (Subsection 2.1.1), the parameters for the inverse character-
ANSI Curves istics will also be available.
Pickup of the 67-TOC relay element will occur for currents greater than or equal to
110% of the 67-TOC element’s pickup value, and may or may not occur for currents
between 100% and 110% of the 67-TOC element’s pickup value. Dropout of the 67-
TOC relay element occurs when the current decreases to 95 % of the 67-TOC ele-
ment’s pickup value.
The pickup of the 67-TOC element is set at address 1507 67/67-TOC. As is the case
for the 67-1 relay element, the pickup value of the 67-TOC relay element should be
set above the maximum anticipated load current. Pickup due to overload should never
occur since the 67-TOC relay element is designed only for fault protection. For this
reason, a setting equal to 120 % of the expected peak load is recommended for line
protection, and a setting equal to 140 % of the expected peak load is recommended
for transformers and motors.
The 67-TOC element time multiplication factor for an IEC curve is set at address 1508
67 TIME DIAL and in address 1509 51c TIME DIAL for an ANSI curve and should
be based on system coordination requirements.
The time multiplication factor may be set to ∞. The 67-TOC element will then pickup
and generate a message, but will never trip. If the 67-TOC element is not required at
all, address 0115 should be set to Definite Time during protective function con-
figuration (see Section 2.1.1).
If Disk Emulation is selected at address 1510 67-TOC Drop-out, then reset
occurs according to the reset curve as described in Subsection 2.2.1.2.
78 7SJ62/63/64 Manual
C53000-G1140-C147-1
If address 0115 67/67-TOC was set to TOC IEC, you can specify the desired IEC
curve (Normal Inverse, Very Inverse, Extremely Inv. or Long Inverse)
in address 1511 51N IEC CURVE. Having selected TOC ANSI in address 0115 67/
67-TOC, you can specify the desired ANSI curve (Very Inverse, Inverse, Short
Inverse, Long Inverse, Moderately Inv., Extremely Inv. oder Definite
Inv.) in address 1512 51N ANSI CURVE.
User Specified If address 0115 67/67-TOC was set to User Defined PU or User def. Reset
Curves during configuration of the user-specified curve option, a maximum of 20 value pairs
(current and time) may be entered at address 1530 67 to represent the time-current
characteristic curve associated with the 67-TOC element. This option allows point-by-
point entry of any desired curve.
If address 0115 was set to User def. Reset during configuration of the user-spec-
ified curve option, additional value pairs (current and reset time) may be entered at ad-
dress 1531 MofPU Res T/Tp to represent the reset curve associated with the 67-
TOC element.
tings. Therefore, it is recommended that addresses 1507 and 1508 be initially set to
1.00 to simplify the calculation of these ratios. Once the curve is entered, the settings
at addresses 1507 and 1508 may be modified if necessary.
When entering a user-specified curve, the following must be observed:
− The value pairs should be entered in increasing sequence. As few as 10 pairs of
numbers may be entered at the user’s option. Each unused pair must then be
marked as unused by entering “∞“for the time and current values. It is important to
view the curve to ensure that it is clear and constant.

1.00 1.50 2.00 3.50 5.00 6.50 8.00 15.00
1.06 1.56 2.25 3.75 5.25 6.75 9.00 16.00
1.13 1.63 2.50 4.00 5.50 7.00 10.00 17.00
1.19 1.69 2.75 4.25 5.75 7.25 11.00 18.00
1.25 1.75 3.00 4.50 6.00 7.50 12.00 19.00
1.31 1.81 3.25 4.75 6.25 7.75 13.00 20.00
1.38 1.88 14.00
1.44 1.94
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 79
C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
ue entered. The reset curve (see Figure 2-29 right) represents constant reset time
for currents smaller than the smallest current value entered.
value entered. The reset curve (see Figure 2-29 right) represents constant reset
time for currents larger than the largest current value entered.
The time and current value pairs are entered at address 1531 to recreate the drop-
down curve. The following must be observed:
t Reset Curve Characteristic Curve


0.05 0.9 1 1.1 20 I
Figure 2-29 Use of a User-Specified Curve
The current values entered should be those from Table 2-9, along with the matching
times. Other values for MofPU are changed to the nearest adjacent value although this
is not indicated.
1.00 0.93 0.84 0.75 0.66 0.53 0.34 0.16
0.99 0.92 0.83 0.73 0.64 0.50 0.31 0.13
0.98 0.91 0.81 0.72 0.63 0.47 0.28 0.09
0.97 0.90 0.80 0.70 0.61 0.44 0.25 0.06
0.96 0.89 0.78 0.69 0.59 0.41 0.22 0.03
0.95 0.88 0.77 0.67 0.56 0.38 0.19 0.00
0.94 0.86
value entered. The reset curve (see Figure 2-29) represents constant reset time for
currents larger than the largest current value entered.
80 7SJ62/63/64 Manual
C53000-G1140-C147-1
ue entered. The reset curve (see Figure 2-29) represents constant reset time for
currents smaller than the smallest current value entered.
2.3.2.4 Programming Settings for Directional Overcurrent Ground Protection
General The functions associated with time-overcurrent protection were established during
configuration of protective functions (Section 2.1.1) at address 0116 67N/67N-TOC.
If address 0116 was set to Definite Time, then only the settings for the definite-
time elements are available. Select 67N/67N-TOC = TOC IEC or = TOC ANSI to have
available inverse characteristics in addition. The superimposed directional high-set
stage 67N-2 is available in all these cases.
At address 1601 FCT 67N/67N-TOC, directional ground time-overcurrent protection
may be switched ON or OFF independent of the directional phase time-overcurrent pro-
tection.
with directional phase protection. Because of this, relay coordination for ground faults
is independent of relay coordination for phase faults, and more sensitive settings can
often be applied to directional ground protection.
67N-2 Relay The pickup and delay of the 67N-2 relay element are set at addresses 1602 67N-2
Element PICKUP and 1603 67N-2 DELAY respectively. The same considerations apply for
these settings as did for 67-2 settings discussed earlier.
The delay set at address 1603 is in addition to the 67N-2 pickup time. The delay of
the 67N-2 element may be set to ∞. The 67N-2 element will then pickup and generate
a message, but will never trip. If the 67N-2 element is not required at all, then the pick-
up value should be set to ∞, thus preventing pickup, trip, and the generation of a mes-
sage.
67N-1 Relay The pickup value of the 67N-1 relay element (set at address 1604 67N-1 PICKUP)
Element should be set below the minimum anticipated ground fault current in the relay zone of
protection.
rents, the inrush restraint feature may be used to prevent a false trip of the 67N-1 relay
dress block 22 (at the parameters for the non-directional time overcurrent protection,
see Subsection 2.2.2.6).
The delay of the 67N-1 element is set at address 1605 67N-1 DELAY and should be
The delay set at address 1605 is in addition to the 67N-1 pickup time. The delay of
the 67N-1 element may be set to ∞. The 67N-1 element will then pickup and generate
a message, but will never trip. If the 67N-1 element is not required at all, then the pick-
up value 67N-1 PICKUP should be set to ∞ thus preventing pickup, trip, and the gen-
eration of a message.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 81
C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
2.3.2.5 Inverse-Time Directional Overcurrent Protection (67N-TOC)
67N-TOC with IEC Having set TOC IEC in address 0116 67N/67N-TOC when configuring the protec-
or ANSI Curves tive functions (Section 2.1.1), the parameters for the inverse characteristics will also
be available. Specify in address 1611 67N-TOC IEC the desired IEC curve (Normal
Inverse, Very Inverse, Extremely Inv. or Long Inverse). If you have set
TOC ANSI at address 0116 67N/67N-TOC, you can specify the desired ANSI curve
(Very Inverse, Inverse, Short Inverse, Long Inverse, Moderately
Inv., Extremely Inv. or Definite Inv.) in address 1612 67N-TOC ANSI.
Pickup of the 67N-TOC relay element will occur for currents greater than or equal to
110% of the 67N-TOC element’s pickup value, and may or may not occur for currents
between 100% and 110% of the 67N-TOC element’s pickup value. Dropout of the 51N
relay element occurs when the current decreases to 95% of the 67N-TOC element’s
pickup value. If Disk Emulation is selected at address 1610 67N-TOC RESET,
then reset occurs according to the reset curve as described in Subsection 2.3.1.2.
The pickup value of the 67N-TOC element is set at address 1607 67N-TOC PICKUP.
The corresponding time dial for an IEC curve is set at address 1608 67N-TOC T-
DIAL and for an ANSI curve at address 1609 67 TIME DIAL and should be based
on system coordination requirements. As is the case for the 67N-1 relay element, the
pickup value of the 67N-TOC relay element should be set below the minimum antici-
pated ground fault current in the relay zone of protection.
The time multiplication factor may also be set to ∞. The 67N-TOC element will then
pickup and generate a message, but will never trip. If the 67N-TOC element is not re-
quired at all, address 0116 should be set to Definite Time during protective func-
tion configuration (see Section 2.1.1).
User Specified If address 0116 67N/67N-TOC was set to User Defined PU or User def. Reset
Curves during configuration of the user-specified curve option, a maximum of 20 value pairs
(current and time) may be entered at address 1630 M.of PU TD to represent the
time-current characteristic curve associated with the 67N-TOC element. This option
allows point-by-point entry of any desired curve.
If address 0116 was set to User def. Reset during configuration of the user-spec-
ified curve option, additional value pairs (current and reset time) may be entered at ad-
dress 1631 I/IEp Rf T/TEp to represent the reset curve associated with the 67N-
TOC element.
tings. Therefore, it is recommended that addresses 1607 67N-TOC PICKUP and
1608 67N-TOC T-DIAL be initially set to 1.00 to simplify the calculation of these
ratios. Once the curve is entered, the settings at addresses 1607 and 1608 may be
modified if necessary.
When entering user specified curve data, the same instructions apply as in Subsection
2.3.2.3 for the phase elements.
82 7SJ62/63/64 Manual
C53000-G1140-C147-1
2.3.3 Settings
are for a device with a nominal current rating IN = 1 A. For a nominal current rating
IN = 5 A, multiply the Setting Options values and Default Setting values by 5. Consider
Note: Addresses to which the letter “A“ is attached can only be modified via the
DIGSI® 4 software at “Additional Settings“.

1501 FCT 67/67-TOC OFF OFF 67, 67-TOC Phase Time Over-
ON current
1513A MANUALCLOSE- 67-2 instantaneously 67-2 instantane- Manual Close Mode

MODE 67-1 instantaneously ously
67-TOC instantaneously
Inactive
1515A Normal Load Inductive (135°) Inductive (135°) Normal Load (Torque angle of
Resistive (90°) dir. fct)
Capacitive(45°)
1516 67 Direction Forward Forward Phase Direction

Reverse
1601 FCT 67N/67N-TOC OFF OFF 67N, 67N-TOC Ground Time

ON Overcurrent
1613A MANUALCLOSE- 67N-2 instantaneously 67N-2 instantane- Manual Close Mode

MODE 67N-1 instantaneously ously
67N-TOC instantaneously
Inactive
1615A Normal Load Inductive (135°) Inductive (135°) Normal Load (Torque angle of
Resistive (90°) dir. fct)
Capacitive(45°)
1616 67N Direction Forward Forward Ground Direction

Reverse
1502 67-2 PICKUP 0.10..35.00 A; ∞ 2.00 A 67-2 Pickup
1504 67-1 PICKUP 0.10..35.00 A; ∞ 1.00 A 67-1 Pickup
1505 67-1 DELAY 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec 67-1Time Delay
1514A 67 active with 79 active always 67 active

always
1507 67-TOC PICKUP 0.10..4.00 A 1.00 A 67-TOC Pickup
1508 67 TIME DIAL 0.05..3.20 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec 67-TOC Time Dial
1509 67 TIME DIAL 0.50..15.00; ∞ 5.00 67-TOC Time Dial
1510 67-TOC Drop-out Instantaneous Disk Emulation Drop-Out Characteristic

Disk Emulation
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 83
C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions

1511 67- IEC CURVE Normal Inverse Normal Inverse IEC Curve
Very Inverse
Extremely Inverse
Long Inverse
1512 67- ANSI CURVE Very Inverse Very Inverse ANSI Curve
Inverse
Short Inverse
Long Inverse
Moderately Inverse
Extremely Inverse
Definite Inverse
1530 67 1.00..20.00 I / Ip; ∞ 67

0.01..999.00 Time Dial
1531 MofPU Res T/Tp 0.05..0.95 I / Ip; ∞ Multiple of Pickup <-> T/Tp
0.01..999.00 Time Dial
1614A 67N active always always 67N active

with 79 active
1607 67N-TOC PICKUP 0.05..4.00 A 0.20 A 67N-TOC Pickup
1608 67N-TOC T-DIAL 0.05..3.20 sec; ∞ 0.20 sec 67N-TOC Time Dial
1609 67N-TOC T-DIAL 0.50..15.00; ∞ 5.00 67N-TOC Time Dial
1610 67N-TOC RESET Instantaneous Disk Emulation Drop-Out Characteristic

Disk Emulation
1611 67N-TOC IEC Normal Inverse Normal Inverse IEC Curve

Very Inverse
Extremely Inverse
Long Inverse
1612 67N-TOC ANSI Very Inverse Very Inverse ANSI Curve

Inverse
Short Inverse
Long Inverse
Moderately Inverse
Extremely Inverse
Definite Inverse
1630 M.of PU TD 1.00..20.00 I / Ip; ∞ Multiples of PU Time-Dial

0.01..999.00 Time Dial
1631 I/IEp Rf T/TEp 0.05..0.95 I / Ip; ∞ 67N TOC

0.01..999.00 Time Dial
2.3.3.1 Information List for Directional Ground Overcurrent Protection
84 7SJ62/63/64 Manual
C53000-G1140-C147-1

02691 67/67N pickedup 67/67N picked up
02696 67/67N TRIP 67/67N TRIP
02604 >BLK 67/67-TOC >BLOCK 67/67-TOC
02615 >BLOCK 67-2 >BLOCK 67-2
02621 >BLOCK 67-1 >BLOCK 67-1
02622 >BLOCK 67-TOC >BLOCK 67-TOC
02651 67/67-TOC OFF 67/67-TOC switched OFF
02652 67 BLOCKED 67/67-TOC is BLOCKED
02653 67 ACTIVE 67/67-TOC is ACTIVE
02649 67-2 TRIP 67-2 TRIP
02665 67-1 TRIP 67-1 TRIP
02670 67-TOC pickedup 67-TOC picked up
02675 67-TOC TRIP 67-TOC TRIP
02692 67 A picked up 67/67-TOC Phase A picked up
02693 67 B picked up 67/67-TOC Phase B picked up
02694 67 C picked up 67/67-TOC Phase C picked up
02647 67-2 Time Out 67-2 Time Out
02664 67-1 Time Out 67-1 Time Out
02674 67-TOC Time Out 67-TOC Time Out
02628 Phase A forward Phase A forward
02629 Phase B forward Phase B forward
02630 Phase C forward Phase C forward
02632 Phase A reverse Phase A reverse
02633 Phase B reverse Phase B reverse
02634 Phase C reverse Phase C reverse
02637 67-1 BLOCKED 67-1 is BLOCKED
02655 67-2 BLOCKED 67-2 is BLOCKED
02669 67-TOC BLOCKED 67-TOC is BLOCKED
14505 >INSTANT 67-TOC >67-TOC instantaneously
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 85
C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions

14506 67-TOC INSTANT. 67-TOC instantaneously
02614 >BLK 67N/67NTOC >BLOCK 67N/67N-TOC
02616 >BLOCK 67N-2 >BLOCK 67N-2
02623 >BLOCK 67N-1 >BLOCK 67N-1
02624 >BLOCK 67N-TOC >BLOCK 67N-TOC
02656 67N OFF 67N/67N-TOC switched OFF
02657 67N BLOCKED 67N/67N-TOC is BLOCKED
02658 67N ACTIVE 67N/67N-TOC is ACTIVE
02679 67N-2 TRIP 67-2 TRIP
02683 67N-1 TRIP 67N-1 TRIP
02684 67N-TOCPickedup 67N-TOC picked up
02686 67N-TOC TRIP 67N-TOC TRIP
02695 67N picked up 67N/67N-TOC picked up
02648 67N-2 Time Out 67N-2 Time Out
02682 67N-1 Time Out 67N-1 Time Out
02685 67N-TOC TimeOut 67N-TOC Time Out
02636 Ground reverse Ground reverse
02635 Ground forward Ground forward
02668 67N-2 BLOCKED 67N-2 is BLOCKED
02659 67N-1 BLOCKED 67N-1 is BLOCKED
02677 67N-TOC BLOCKED 67N-TOC is BLOCKED
14511 >INST. 67N-TOC >67N-TOC instantaneously
14512 67N-TOC INSTANT 67N-TOC instantaneously
86 7SJ62/63/64 Manual
C53000-G1140-C147-1
Dynamic Cold Load Pick-Up Function (50c, 50Nc, 51Nc, 67c, 67Nc)
2.4 Dynamic Cold Load Pick-Up Function (50c, 50Nc, 51Nc, 67c, 67Nc)
General With the dynamic cold load pickup feature, it is possible to dynamically increase the
pickup values of the directional and non-directional overcurrent relay elements when
dynamic cold load pickup conditions are anticipated (i.e. after a long period of zero
voltage). By allowing pickup settings to increase dynamically, it is not necessary to in-
corporate dynamic cold load capability in the normal pickup settings, and directional
and non-directional overcurrent protection may be set more sensitive.
As a further option the pickup thresholds can be modified in dependence of an auto-
matic reclosure function that is ready or not ready.
Note:
Dynamic Cold Load Pickup is in addition to the 4 setting groups (A to D), which are
configured separately.
It is possible to change pickup thresholds and delay times.
2.4.1 Description of Dynamic Cold Load Pick-Up Function
Effect When using the dynamic cold load pick-up function, there are two primary methods
used by the device to determine if the protected equipment is de-energized:
• Via a binary input, an auxiliary contact in the circuit breaker can be used to deter-
mine if the circuit breaker is open or closed. If the circuit breaker is open, the equip-
ment will be considered de-energized. If this method is chosen, address 1702
Start Condition should be set to Breaker Contact.
• The current flow monitoring threshold (Subsection ) may be used to determine if the
equipment is de-energized. If this method is chosen, address 1702 should be set
to No Current.
If the device determines the protected equipment is de-energized via one of the meth-
ods above, a time CB Open Time is started and after its expiration the increased
thresholds take effect.
In addition, switching between parameters can be tripped by two further signals:
• By signal “79M Auto Reclosing ready“ of the internal automatic reclosure function
(address 1702 Start Condition = 79 ready). Thus the protection thresholds
and the tripping times can be changed if automatic reclosure is ready for tripping
(see also Section 2.13).
• Irrespective of the setting of parameter 1702 Start Condition the release for
the cold load pickup can always be granted via the binary input “>ACTIVATE CLP“.
Figure 2-31 shows the logic diagram for dynamic cold load pick-up function.
When the auxiliary contact or current criterion detects that the system is de-energized,
i.e. the circuit breaker is open, the CB open time (CB Open Time) starts. As soon as
the time period expired, the greater thresholds become enabled.
When the protected equipment is re-energized (i.e. the device receives input via a bi-
nary input that the circuit breaker is closed or the current flowing through the circuit
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 87
C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
breaker increases above the current flow monitoring threshold set at address 0212
BkrClosed I MIN), a second time delay referred to as the Active Time is initiated.
Once the Active Time elapses, the pickup values of the relay elements return to
their normal settings. The Active Time is set at address 1704 and controls how long
dynamic cold load pick-up settings remain in place once the equipment is re-ener-
gized. Upon re-energizing of the equipment, if the measured current values are below
the normal pickup settings, an alternative time delay referred to as the Stop Time is
also initiated. As in the case with the Active Time, once the Stop Time elapses,
the pickup values of relay elements change from the dynamic cold load pickup values
to their normal settings. The Stop Time is set at address 1705 and controls how long
dynamic cold load pick-up settings remain in place given that measured currents are
below the normal pickup settings. This Stop Time is typically set very short since the
actual measurement of currents indicates dynamic cold load conditions will not inad-
vertently pickup the relay elements. To defeat the Stop Time from switching the relay
element pickup settings back to normal, it may be set to ∞ or blocked via a binary input.
If a relay element picks up while the dynamic settings are enabled, elapse of the Ac-
tive Time or Stop Time will not restore the normal pickup settings until drop out
of the relay element occurs based on the dynamic settings.
When the dynamic setting values have taken effect via the binary input “>ACTIVATE
CLP“ or the signal “79M Auto Reclosing ready” and this cause drops out, the “normal”
settings are restored immediately, even if a pick up is to follow.
If the dynamic cold load pick-up function is blocked via a binary input, all triggered tim-
ers will be immediately reset and all normal settings will be restored. If blocking occurs
during an on-going fault with dynamic cold load pick-up functions enabled, the timers
of all directional and non-directional overcurrent relay elements will be stopped, and
then restarted based on their normal duration.
During power up of the protective relay with an open circuit breaker, the time delay set
at address 1703 CB Open Time is started, and is processed using the normal set-
tings. Therefore, when the circuit breaker is closed, the normal settings are effective.
Figure 2-30 shows a timing diagram, Figure 2-31 describes the logic for cold load pick-
up function.
88 7SJ62/63/64 Manual
C53000-G1140-C147-1
Breaker
Closed
Open
CB Open Time
Address 1703
“CB open“ “CB open“
Active Time
Address 1704
“Active Time“
Possible shorter
Operating State CLP, due to
“Stop Time“
“CLP“ setting active
“normal setting active“
Stop Time
Address 1705
“Stop Time“
“Normal“
PickUp Levels
Pickup
Dropout
increased power consumption Trip, if increased

after long outage power demand is
present after “Ac-
tive Time“ expired
Figure 2-30 Cold Load Pickup Timing Sequence
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 89
C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
FNo. 01730 FNo. 01995

>BLOCK CLP CLP BLOCKED
FNo. 01996
1701 COLDLOAD PICKUP or
or CLP running
In
FNo. 01994
Aus
„1“ CLP OFF
52a Configured
or
52b Configured &
Measurement/Logic
FNo. 01732
>ACTIVATE CLP
FNo. 01997
79 ready or Dyn set. ACTIVE
&
Processing of the
FNo. 04601 cold load pick-up
settings in the overcurrent
>52-a elements
1703 CB Open Time
FNo. 04602
or
& Circuit-
>52-b Breaker open T 0
or
1702 Start Condition
79 ready
Breaker Contact
„1“
No Current S Q
&
& R
0212 BkrClosed I MIN
Max. of
Ι<
Ia, Ib, Ic
1704 Active Time
Dynamic Pickup
T 0
Exceeding one of the dynamic cold pick-up thresholds of
the directional or non-directional overcurrent elements
(Address blocks 18 to 21)
Exceeding one of the „normal“ pick-up thresholds of the di- 1705 Stop Time or
rectional or non-directional overcurrent elements
Normal Pickup T 0
&
FNo. 01731
>BLK CLP stpTim
Figure 2-31 Logic Diagram for Dynamic Cold Load Pickup Feature
2.4.2 Programming Settings
2.4.2.1 General
Dynamic cold load Pickup feature can only be enabled if address 0117 Coldload
Pickup was set to Enabled during configuration of protective functions. If the func-
90 7SJ62/63/64 Manual
C53000-G1140-C147-1
tion is not required, address 0117 should be set to Disabled. In address 1701
Coldload Pickup can be set ON or OFF.
Depending on the start conditions for the cold load pickup function address 1702
Start Condition is set to either No Current, Breaker Contact or to 79
ready. Naturally, the option Breaker Contact can only be selected if the device
receives an information on the position of the circuit breaker via at least one binary in-
put. The option 79 ready modifies dynamically the pickup thresholds of the direction-
al and non-directional time overcurrent protection when the automatic reclosing fea-
ture is ready. For controlling the cold load pickup the automatic reclosing function pro-
vides the internal signal “79M Auto Reclosing ready”. It is always active when auto re-
closure is available, activated, unblocked and ready for a further cycle (see also side
title “Controlling Directional/Non-Directional Overcurrent Protection Stages via Cold
Load Pickup“ in Subsection 2.13.2).
Time Delays There are no specific procedures on how to set the time delays at addresses 1703 CB
Open Time, 1704 Active Time and 1705 Stop Time. These time delays must
be based on the specific loading characteristics of the equipment being protected, and
should be selected to allow the brief overloads associated with dynamic cold load con-
ditions.
2.4.2.2 Non-Directional Phase Elements
The dynamic pickup values and time delays associated with non-directional overcur-
rent phase protection are set at address block 18.
The dynamic pickup and delay settings for the 50-2 element are set at addresses
1801 50c-2 PICKUP and 1802 50c-2 DELAY respectively; the dynamic pickup and
delay settings for the 50-1 element are set at addresses 1803 50c-1 PICKUP and
1804 50c-1 DELAY respectively; and the pickup, time multiplier (for IEC curves), and
time dial (for ANSI curves) settings for the 51 element are set at addresses 1805 51c
PICKUP, 1806, and 1807 respectively (51c TIME DIAL).
2.4.2.3 Non-Directional Ground Elements
The dynamic pickup values and time delays associated with non-directional overcur-
rent ground protection are set at address block 19.
The dynamic pickup and delay settings for the 50N-2 element are set at addresses
1901 50Nc-2 PICKUP and 1902 50Nc-2 DELAY respectively; the dynamic pickup
and delay settings for the 50N-1 element are set at addresses 1903 50Nc-1 PICKUP
and 1904 50Nc-1 DELAY respectively; and the pickup, time multiplier (for IEC
curves), and time dial (for ANSI curves) settings for the 51N element are set at ad-
dresses 1905 51Nc PICKUP, 1906, and 1907 respectively (51c TIME DIAL).
2.4.2.4 Directional Phase Elements
The dynamic pickup values and time delays associated with directional overcurrent
phase protection are set at address block 20.
The dynamic pickup and delay settings for the 67-2 element are set at addresses
2001 67c-2 PICKUP and 2002 67c-2 DELAY respectively; the dynamic pickup and
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 91
C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
delay settings for the 67-1 element are set at addresses 2003 67c-1 PICKUP and
2004 67c-1 DELAY respectively; and the pickup, time multiplier (for IEC curves), and
time dial (for ANSI curves) settings for the 67-TOC element are set at addresses 2005
67c-TOC PICKUP, 2006, and 2006 respectively (67c-TOC T-DIAL).
2.4.2.5 Directional Ground Element
The dynamic pickup values and time delays associated with directional overcurrent
ground protection are set at address block 21.
The dynamic pickup and delay settings for the 67N-2 element are set at addresses
2101 50Nc-2 PICKUP and 2102 67Nc-2 DELAY respectively; the dynamic pickup
and delay settings for the 67N-1 element are set at addresses 2103 67Nc-1 PICKUP
and 2104 67Nc-1 DELAY respectively; and the pickup, time multiplier (for IEC
curves), and time dial (for ANSI curves) settings for the 67N-TOC element are set at
addresses 2105 67Nc-TOC PICKUP, 2106, and 2107 respectively (67Nc-TOC T-
DIAL).
2.4.2.6 Settings for Dynamic Cold Load Adjustments
are for an equipment with a nominal current rating IN = 1 A. For a nominal current rat-
ing IN = 5 A, multiply the Setting Options values and Default Setting values by 5. Con-
sider the current transformer ratios when setting the equipment with primary values.

1701 COLDLOAD PIK- OFF OFF Cold-Load-Pickup Function
KUP ON
1702 Start Condition No Current No Current Start Condition

Breaker Contact
79M Auto Reclosing ready
1703 CB Open Time 0..21600 sec 3600 sec Circuit Breaker OPEN Time
1704 Active Time 1..21600 sec 3600 sec Active Time
1705 Stop Time 1..600 sec; ∞ 600 sec Stop Time
1801 50c-2 PICKUP 0.10..35.00 A; ∞ 10.00 A 50c-2 Pickup
1802 50c-2 DELAY 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec 50c-2 Time Delay
1805 51c PICKUP 0.10..4.00 A; ∞ 1.50 A 51c Pickup
1806 51c TIME DIAL 0.05..3.20 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec 51c Time dial
1807 51c TIME DIAL 0.50..15.00; ∞ 5.00 51c Time dial
1901 50Nc-2 PICKUP 0.05..35.00 A; ∞ 7.00 A 50Nc-2 Pickup
1902 50Nc-2 DELAY 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec 50Nc-2 Time Delay
92 7SJ62/63/64 Manual
C53000-G1140-C147-1

1905 51Nc PICKUP 0.10..4.00 A; ∞ 1.00 A 51Nc Pickup
1906 51Nc T-DIAL 0.05..3.20 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec 51Nc Time Dial
1907 51Nc T-DIAL 0.50..15.00; ∞ 5.00 51Nc Time Dial
2005 67c-TOC PICKUP 0.10..4.00 A; ∞ 1.50 A 67c Pickup
2006 67c-TOC T-DIAL 0.05..3.20 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec 67c Time Dial
2007 67c-TOC T-DIAL 0.50..15.00; ∞ 5.00 67c Time Dial
2105 67Nc-TOC PICKUP 0.05..4.00 A; ∞ 1.00 A 67Nc-TOC Pickup
2106 67Nc-TOC T-DIAL 0.05..3.20 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec 67Nc-TOC Time Dial
2107 67Nc-TOC T-DIAL 0.50..15.00; ∞ 5.00 67Nc-TOC Time Dial
2.4.2.7 Information List for Dynamic Cold Load Setting Adjustments

01730 >BLOCK CLP >BLOCK Cold-Load-Pickup
01731 >BLK CLP stpTim >BLOCK Cold-Load-Pickup stop timer
01732 >ACTIVATE CLP >ACTIVATE Cold-Load-Pickup
01994 CLP OFF Cold-Load-Pickup switched OFF
01995 CLP BLOCKED Cold-Load-Pickup is BLOCKED
01996 CLP running Cold-Load-Pickup is RUNNING
01997 Dyn set. ACTIVE Dynamic settings are ACTIVE
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 93
C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
2.5 Voltage Protection (27, 59)
General Voltage protection has the function to protect electrical equipment against undervolt-
age and overvoltage. Both operational states are unfavorable as undervoltage may
cause for example stability problems and overvoltage may lead to insulation problems.
2.5.1 Description of Voltage Protection
2.5.1.1 Measurement Principle
VT Connection The voltages supplied to the device may correspond to the three phase–to–ground
voltages, or two phase-to-phase voltages and the displacement voltage, depending on
how the voltage transformers are connected. 7SJ64 provides the option to detect
three phase-ground voltages and the ground voltage in addition. The connection
mode has been specified during the configuration in address 0213 VT Connection.
Overvoltage protection requires the phase–phase voltages and if necessary they are
calculated from the phase-earth voltages. In case of phase-phase connection two volt-
ages are measured and the third is calculated.
Undervoltage protection relies on the positive-sequence component of the phase-to-
phase voltages.
The option between phase–ground and phase–phase voltage allows voltage asym-
metries (e.g. caused by a ground fault) to be taken into account (phase–ground) or left
unconsidered (phase–phase).
Current The primary voltage transformers are arranged, depending on the system, either on
Supervision the supply side or the load side of the associated circuit breaker. These different ar-
rangements lead to different behavior of the voltage protection function when a fault
occurs. When a circuit breaker is opened, full voltage remains on the supply side while
the load side voltage becomes zero. Opening the circuit breaker when voltage trans-
formers are located on the load side of the circuit breaker causes the undervoltage
protection to remain picked up. Therefore, the flow of current through the circuit break-
er can be used as an additional criteria for pickup of undervoltage protection. When
current supervision is active, for undervoltage pickup to occur, the current through the
circuit breaker must exceed a minimum current level which corresponds to the current
flow monitoring setting at address 0212 BkrClosed I MIN. The circuit breaker is
tripped, when the current decreases below the current flow monitoring setting, and un-
dervoltage protection will drop out.
Note:
If current supervision is turned off under address 5120A CURRENT SUPERV., the un-
dervoltage function will pick up without 3 phase voltage applied. The device cannot be
programmed if in pickup. Apply 3 phase voltage or block the voltage protection to con-
tinue with programming! Moreover you have the option of setting a flag via device op-
eration for blocking the voltage protection. This initiates the reset of the pickup and
device parameterization can be resumed.
94 7SJ62/63/64 Manual
C53000-G1140-C147-1
Voltage Protection (27, 59)
Preparation of Mea- Using a Fourier Analysis, the fundamental harmonic component of the three phase-to-
sured Data phase voltages are filtered out and passed along for further processing. For undervolt-
age protection, the positive sequence components of the phase-to-phase voltages are
evaluated, while for overvoltage protection, the largest of the three phase-to-phase
voltages is evaluated.
2.5.1.2 Overvoltage Protection (59)
Application The overvoltage protection has the task of preventing insulation failure by protecting
against abnormally high voltage levels.
Abnormally high voltages often occur in low loaded, long distance transmission lines,
in islanded systems when generator voltage regulation fails, or after full load shutdown
of a generator from the system.
Function Overvoltage protection consists of two definite time elements designated 59-2 and 59-
1. The pickup and delay settings of each element are individually adjustable. The fun-
damental harmonic of the largest phase–to–phase voltages is provided to the over-
voltage protection elements. When an adjustable setting is exceeded, the 59 element
pickups, and after an adjustable time delay elapses, initiates a trip signal. The 59 ele-
ment is a definite time element in that the time delay is not a function of the voltage
magnitude.
Figure 2-32 shows the logic diagram of the overvoltage protection element.
5007 59-2 DELAY
5006 59-2 PICKUP FNo. 06573

T 0
& 59-2 TRIP
U>>
FNo. 06571
59-2 picked up
5004 59-1 DELAY
5002 59-1 PICKUP FNo. 06570

T 0
& 59-1 TRIP
U>
FNo. 06568
59-1 picked up
Measurement/Logic
FNo. 234.210
27, 59 blk
Tagging BLK. 27, 59 FNo. 06566
FNo. 06513 or 59 BLOCKED

>BLOCK 59-1
or
5001 FCT 59
FNo. 06565
OFF 59 OFF
„1“ ON FNo. 06567
Alarm Only & 59 ACTIVE
Figure 2-32 Logic Diagram of the Overvoltage Protection
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 95
C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
2.5.1.3 Undervoltage Protection (27)
Application Undervoltage protection detects and reports abnormally low voltage conditions, some
of which could be related to system stability problems (voltage collapse, etc.). Under-
voltage protection is generally used for load shedding and loss of phase purposes.
Function Undervoltage protection consists of two definite time elements designated 27-2 and
27-1. The pickup and delay settings of each element are individually adjustable. For
undervoltage protection, the positive sequence components of the phase-to-phase
voltages are evaluated. The 27 element is a definite time element in that the time delay
is not a function of the voltage magnitude.
With the 27-1 element, the ratio of drop out voltage to pickup voltage (27-1 DOUT
RATIO) is settable as well.
The undervoltage protection will not be blocked when the permissible frequency range
of fN = ± 10 % (45 Hz to 55 Hz at fN = 50 Hz) is left. This ensures that the protective
function is preserved even when it is applied as motor protection in context with decel-
erating motors. However, the r.m.s. value of the positive-sequence component of the
voltages is evaluated too small for strongly deviating frequencies so that the device
tends to exhibit unwanted operation. If application cases are anticipated who leave the
frequency range of fN ± 10 %, the current criterion will not return a correct result. The
current criterion must be deactivated.
Figure 2-33 shows a typical voltage profile during a fault for source side connection of
the voltage transformers. Because full voltage is present after the circuit breaker is
opened, current supervision is unnecessary.
After the voltage has decreased below the pickup setting of the 27-1 element, the 27-
1 time delay is initiated, after which, the 27-1 element is used to block reclosing. As
long as the voltage remains below the drop out setting, reclosing is blocked. When the
voltage increases above the drop out level, the 27-1 element drops out and allows re-
closing of the circuit breaker.
96 7SJ62/63/64 Manual
C53000-G1140-C147-1
27-1
Pickup 27-1
Tripping Drop Out Reclosing
V(t) Signal Signal
Vn
Drop Out Setting
27-1 DO
Pickup Setting
27-1 PU
27-1 Delay Tmin com

Pickup
Drop out
t
Reclosing
Blocked
Tmin com=Minimum Command Line
Figure 2-33 Typical Fault Profile for Source Side Connection of the Voltage Transformer
(without current supervision)
Figure 2-34 shows a fault profile for a load side connection of the voltage transformers.
When the circuit breaker is open, the voltage disappears and the 27-1 element picks
up and times out. When the current drops below the current flow monitoring setting at
address 0212 BkrClosed I MIN (i.e. the current criterion is no longer met) the 27-
1 element will drop out even though the voltage remains below the pick-up setting of
the 27-1 element.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 97
C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
27-1 Tripping Closing 27-1

Pickup Signal Signal Drop Out
V(t) V<
Vn
27-1 DO Drop Out Setting
Pickup Setting
27-1 PU
I(t)
In
Current Flow
Monitoring Setting
Addr. 0212
t
27 Delay TMIN COM 40 ms

Pickup
Drop Out
t
27-1 Pickup
t
Current Criterion Met Current Criterion Met

t
Pickup = 27-1 Pickup and Current Criterion Met
Tmin com = Minimum Command Line
Figure 2-34 Typical Fault Profile for Load Side Connection of the Voltage Transformers
(with current supervision)
The instant after a circuit breaker is closed, the load side voltage begins to increase
and current begins to flow through the circuit breaker. To ensure that the 27-1 element
does not pickup, the element remains dropped out for a short period of time (about
40ms) until both the current flowing through the circuit breaker and the load side volt-
age stabilize. It is important to understand, however, that if a low voltage condition ex-
ists on the load after the circuit breaker is closed (i.e. a fault exists on the load side of
the circuit breaker), pickup of the 27-1 element will be delayed by 40 ms.
Figure 2-35 shows the logic diagram for the undervoltage protection.
98 7SJ62/63/64 Manual
C53000-G1140-C147-1
5120A CURRENT SUPERV.

OFF
„1“ ON
or
I>
or 40 ms
FNo. 06505
>27 I SUPRVSN 5106 27-1 DELAY
5102 27-1 PICKUP T 0 FNo. 06539

& 27-1 TRIP
&
U> FNo. 06534
& 27-1 PU CS
FNo. 06506 FNo. 06533
>BLOCK 27-1 & 27-1 picked up
5112 27-2 DELAY
T 0 FNo. 06540
5110 27-2 PICKUP
& 27-2 TRIP
&
U<< FNo. 06538
& 27-2 PU CS
FNo. 06508 FNo. 06537

>BLOCK 27-2 & 27-2 picked up
Measurement/Logic
FNo. 06509
>FAIL:FEEDER VT
FNo. 06510 FNo. 06531
>FAIL: BUS VT or 27 BLOCKED
FNo. 06503
>BLOCK 27 or
FNo. 234.2100
Tagging BLK. 27, 59 27, 59 blk
5101 FCT 27
FNo. 06530
OFF 27 OFF
„1“
ON FNo. 06532
& 27 ACTIVE
Alarm Only
Figure 2-35 Logic Diagram for Undervoltage Protection
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 99
C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
Voltage protection is only in effect and accessible if address 0150 27/59 is set to
Enabled during configuration of protective functions. If the voltage protection function
is not needed, address 0150 should be set to Disabled.
All setting values are based on phase-to-phase voltages. The setting ranges depend
on the type of voltage transformer connection utilized (specified at address 0213 VT
Connection). For voltage transformers connected in a grounded-wye configuration,
higher setting values may be used because the voltage inputs are subjected only to
phase-to-ground voltage levels.
2.5.2.1 Voltage Protection – General
Undervoltage protection can be turned ON, OFF, or set to Alarm Only at address
5101 FCT 27. When undervoltage protection is turned ON, tripping by the undervolt-
age elements is allowed.
Overvoltage protection can be turned ON, OFF, or set to Alarm Only at address 5001
FCT 59. When address 5001 is set to ON, tripping by the overvoltage element is al-
lowed.
2.5.2.2 Undervoltage Protection
Pickup Values There are not clear cut procedures for setting the pickup values of the undervoltage
relay elements. However, because the undervoltage protection function is primarily in-
tended to protect induction machines from voltage dips and to prevent stability prob-
lems, the pickup values will usually be between 60% and 85% of the nominal voltage.
The time delay settings should be selected to prevent voltage dips from causing un-
stable conditions, however, the time delay should be long enough to avoid tripping due
to momentary voltage dips.
Undervoltage protection includes two definite time elements. The pickup value of the
27-2 element is set at either address 5110 or 5111 27-2 PICKUP (depending on the
voltage transformer connection) while the time delay is set at address 5112 27-2
DELAY. The pickup of the 27-2 element is typically set low while the time delay is set
short, thus this element is used for fast protection against severe undervoltage condi-
tions. The pickup value of the 27-1 element is set at either address 5102 or 5103 27-
1 PICKUP (depending on the voltage transformer connection) while the time delay is
set at address 5106 27-1 DELAY. The pickup of the 27-1 element is typically set high
while the time delay is set long, thus this element is used for slower protection against
less severe undervoltage conditions. Setting the 27-2 and 27-1 relay elements in this
matter allows the undervoltage protection function to closely follow the stability behav-
ior of the system.
Dropout Setting While the drop out setting on the 27-2 element is set permanently to 105% of the pick-
up setting, the drop out setting on the 27-1 element can be set at address 5105A 27-
1 DOUT RATIO as a multiple of the pickup setting. However, the following limitations
are to be observed:
100 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
(Address 5105A) x (Address 5103) cannot exceed 130 V when address 0213 = Vab,
Vbc, VGnd.
(Address 5105A) x (Address 5102) cannot exceed 225 V when address 0213 = Van,
Vbn, Vcn.
Note:
If a setting has a value of greater than 130 V or 225 V results for the drop out setting,
the drop out setting will be automatically limited. No error message occurs.
Current The 27-2 and 27-1 elements can be supervised by the current flow monitoring setting
Supervision (BkrClosed I MIN) entered at address 0212. If address 5120A CURRENT SUPERV. is
switched on, then the 27-2 and 27-1 elements will not pickup until the current flowing
through the circuit breaker exceeds the setting entered at address 0212 (typically set
very sensitive). In other words the sustained pickup of the 27-2 and 27-1 elements is
dependent on the circuit breaker being closed, as determined by “BkrClosed I
MIN.” A benefit of current supervision is that the feature prevents an immediate gen-
eral-pickup of the device that would otherwise be caused by the 27 elements when the
device is powered-up without voltage being present.
Note: When switching off the CURRENT SUPERV. setting under Address 5120A, the
device immediately picks up if voltage is not present and the undervoltage protection
is switched on. The device cannot be programmed if in pickup. Apply 3 phase voltage
to continue with programming or block voltage protection! The blocking can be initiat-
ed via device operation in DIGSI® 4 and via communication from the control center by
means of a tagging command. This causes the reset of the pickup and parameteriza-
tion can be resumed.
The 50 element “BkrClosed I MIN” is used in other protective functions as well,

including breaker failure protection, overload protection, and start inhibit for motors.
2.5.2.3 Overvoltage Protection
Pickup Values The overvoltage protection relies on phase-phase voltages. Accordingly, the pickup
values, too, must always be considered phase–to–phase voltages. The overvoltage
protection is designed in two stages. Thus, the lower threshold (address 5002 or
5003, 59-1 PICKUP can be assigned a long delay time (depending on whether
phase-ground or phase-phase voltages are connected) (address 5004, 59-1 DELAY)
and the upper threshold (address 5005 or 5006, 59-2 PICKUP) can be assigned a
short delay time (address 5007, 59-2 DELAY). There are not clear cut procedures on
how to set the pickup value of the overvoltage element. However, because the over-
voltage function is primarily intended to prevent insulation damage, the pickup of the
overvoltage element 59-1 PICKUP should be set between 110 % and 115 % of nom-
inal voltage, and the pickup of the overvoltage element 59-2 PICKUP should be set
about 130 % of nominal voltage. Depending on the type of voltage transformer con-
nection utilized, the pickup value may be entered at address 5002 and 5005 (used
when voltage transformers are connected in a grounded-wye configuration) or 5003
and 5006 (used when voltage transformers are not connected in a grounded-wye
configuration). The time delays of the overvoltage elements are entered at addresses
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 101

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
5004 59-1 DELAY and 5007 59-2 DELAY and should be selected to allow the brief
voltage spikes that are generated during switching operations.
2.5.2.4 Settings for Voltage Protection

5101 FCT 27 OFF OFF 27 Undervoltage Protection
ON
Alarm Only
5001 FCT 59 OFF OFF 59 Overvoltage Protection

ON
Alarm Only
5102 27-1 PICKUP 10..210 V 75 V 27-1 Pickup
5103 27-1 PICKUP 10..120 V 75 V 27-1 Pickup
5105A 27-1 DOUT RATIO 1.05..3.00 1.20 27-1 Drop out Ratio
5110 27-2 PICKUP 10..210 V 70 V 27-2 Pickup
5111 27-2 PICKUP 10..120 V 70 V 27-2 Pickup
5120A CURRENT OFF ON Current Supervision

SUPERV. ON
5002 59-1 PICKUP 40..260 V 110 V 59-1 Pickup
5003 59-1 PICKUP 40..130 V 110 V 59-1 Pickup
5006 59-2 PICKUP 40..130 V 120 V 59-2 Pickup
5005 59-2 PICKUP 40..260 V 120 V 59-2 Pickup
2.5.2.5 Information List for Voltage Protection

06503 >BLOCK 27 >BLOCK 27 undervoltage protection
06505 >27 I SUPRVSN >27-Switch current supervision ON
06506 >BLOCK 27-1 >BLOCK 27-1 Undervoltage protection
06508 >BLOCK 27-2 >BLOCK 27-2 Undervoltage protection
06530 27 OFF 27 Undervoltage protection switched OFF
102 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1

06531 27 BLOCKED 27 Undervoltage protection is BLOCKED
06532 27 ACTIVE 27 Undervoltage protection is ACTIVE
06533 27-1 picked up 27-1 Undervoltage picked up
06534 27-1 PU CS 27-1 Undervoltage PICKUP w/curr. superv
06537 27-2 picked up 27-2 Undervoltage picked up
06538 27-2 PU CS 27-2 Undervoltage PICKUP w/curr. superv
06539 27-1 TRIP 27-1 Undervoltage TRIP
06540 27-2 TRIP 27-2 Undervoltage TRIP
06513 >BLOCK 59-1 >BLOCK 59-1 overvoltage protection
06565 59 OFF 59-Overvoltage protection switched OFF
06566 59 BLOCKED 59-Overvoltage protection is BLOCKED
06567 59 ACTIVE 59-Overvoltage protection is ACTIVE
06568 59-1 picked up 59 picked up
06570 59-1 TRIP 59 TRIP
06571 59-2 picked up 59-2 Overvoltage V>> picked up
06573 59-2 TRIP 59-2 Overvoltage V>> TRIP
234.2 27, 59 blk 27, 59 blocked via operation

100
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 103

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
2.6 Negative Sequence Protection (46)
General Negative sequence protection detects unbalanced loads on the system. In addition, it
may be used to detect interruptions, faults, and polarity problems with current trans-
formers. It is particularly useful in detecting phase-to-ground, phase-to-phase, and
double phase-to-ground faults with magnitudes lower than the maximum load current.
Use with Motors The application of negative sequence protection to motors has a special significance.
The negative sequence currents associated with unbalanced loads create counter-ro-
tating fields in three-phase induction motors, which act on the rotor at double frequen-
cy. Eddy currents are induced at the rotor surface, and local overheating of the rotor
begins to take place. In addition, the threat of thermal overload exists when the motor
is supplied by unbalanced system voltages. Because the motor represents a small im-
pedance to negative sequence voltages, small voltage imbalances can lead to large
negative sequence currents.
2.6.1 Description of Negative Sequence Protection
2.6.1.1 Determination of Unbalanced Load
The negative sequence protection feature of the 7SJ62/63/64 relay uses filtering to
dissect the phase currents into their symmetrical components. The negative-phase
sequence system is evaluated by these components, i.e. the inverse current I2. If the
largest of the three phase currents is at least 10% of the nominal device current, and
all phase currents are less than four (4) times the nominal device current, then the
negative sequence current is fed into three time-overcurrent relay elements, two of
which are definite time (see Figure 2-36) and one of which contains an inverse time
characteristic (see Figure 2-37).
Refer to phase rotation via binary input section 2.1.3 and 2.18.
2.6.1.2 Definite Time Elements (46-1, 46-2)
The two definite time elements are designated 46-2 and 46-1. Each of the two definite
time elements will generate a message and initiate a time delay when picked up. Once
either time delay elapses, a trip signal is initiated. Figure 2-36 illustrates the definite
time characteristic when the 46-1 element is set with a more sensitive pickup value
while the 46-2 element is set with a shorter tripping delay.
104 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Negative Sequence Protection (46)
Tripping Area
46-1
46-2
46-1 46-2
I2
Figure 2-36 Definite Time Characteristic for Negative Sequence Protection
2.6.1.3 Inverse Time Element (46-TOC)
The inverse time element is designated 46-TOC and can operate with IEC or ANSI
characteristic tripping curves depending on the model ordered. The curves and asso-
ciated formulas are given in the Technical Specifications (Figures 4-7 to 4-9 in Section
4.8). When programming the inverse time curve, the definite time elements are avail-
able (see Subsection 2.6.1.2).
Pickup and When the negative sequence current exceeds the pickup setting of the 46-TOC ele-
Tripping ment by 110%, the element picks up, generates a message, and initiates time delayed
tripping based on the selected characteristic curve. Once the corresponding time in-
terval on the curve elapses, a tripping signal is initiated. The characteristic curve is il-
lustrated in Figure 2-37.
Drop Out for IEC When IEC curves are used, the 46-TOC element drops out when the negative se-
Curves quence current decreases to 95 % of the pickup setting. The time delay resets imme-
diately in anticipation of another pickup.
Drop Out for ANSI When ANSI curves are used, the 46-TOC element may drop out immediately when
Curves the negative sequence current decreases to 95 % of the pickup setting, or disk emu-
lation may be used to simulate the unwinding of an electromechanical induction disc.
If disk emulation is selected, the drop out begins when the current decreases to 90 %
of the pickup value, and reset proceeds in accordance with the selected reset curve.
When the negative sequence current is between 90 % and 95 % of the pickup setting,
neither forward nor reverse movement of the disk is simulated. When the negative se-
quence current falls below 5 % of the pickup value, disk emulation is terminated and
immediate reset takes place. Figure 2-37 illustrates the overall tripping characteristic.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 105

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
t Negative Sequence
Warning Level
46-1
Tripping area
Thermal
Protection
Severe Imbalance
Protection
46-2
46-1 46-2
I2
1.1 x I2P
Figure 2-37 Inverse Time Characteristic for Negative Sequence Protection
FNo. 05166
46-TOC pickedup
4006 46 IEC CURVE
0140 46
4008 46-TOC PICKUP 4010 46-TOC TIMEDIAL
TOC IEC
I2p
I2 Definite Time
FNo. 05165
46-1 picked up
4003 46-1 DELAY
4002 46-1 PICKUP
T 0 FNo. 05170
I2> or 46 TRIP
4010 46-2 PICKUP 4005 46-2 DELAY
T 0
I2>>
FNo. 05159
46-2 picked up
Measurement/Logic
FNo. 05143 FNo. 05152
>BLOCK 46 46 BLOCKED
FNo. 05153
or or 46 ACTIVE
4001 FCT 46
FNo. 05151
OFF
46 OFF
„1“
ON
Figure 2-38 Logic Diagram for Negative Sequence Protection
106 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Disk emulation offers advantages when the negative sequence protection must be co-
ordinated with conventional source side relays.
Logic Figure 2-38 shows the logic diagram for negative sequence protection. The protection
may be blocked via a binary input. This resets pick-ups and time steps and clears
measured values.
When the negative sequence protection criteria are no longer satisfied (i.e. all phase
currents drop below 10 % of the nominal relay current or at least one phase current is
greater than four (4) times the nominal device current, the tripping time delay is imme-
diately reset.
2.6.2.1 General
Negative sequence protection is configured at address 0140 46. If only the definite
time elements are desired, address 0140 should be set to Definite Time. If both
definite time and inverse time elements are to be used, address 0140 should be set
to TOC IEC or TOC ANSI, and if negative sequence protection is not needed, address
0140 should be set to Disabled.
Negative sequence protection is switched ON or OFF at address 4001 FCT 46.
The default pickup settings and delay settings of the negative sequence time-overcur-
rent relay elements are generally sufficient for most applications. If the device is used
to protect a motor, and data is available from the manufacturer regarding the allowable
long-term load imbalance and the allowable load imbalance per unit of time, this data
should be used as the basis for selecting the pickup and delay settings. In this situa-
tion, it is important to ensure that the values given by the manufacturer represent the
primary values for the motor. For example, if the long-term allowable thermal inverse
current (with respect to the nominal motor current) is given, this value is used to cal-
culate the settings for the negative sequence time-overcurrent element. For this situ-
ation:
I 2perm prim I CT sec

Pickup Setting I 2 = æ ----------------------------ö ⋅ I NMotor ⋅ -------------------
è I NMotor ø I CT prim
where I2 perm prim Permissible Thermal Inverse Current of the Motor

IN Motor Nominal Motor Current
ICT sec Secondary Nominal Current of the Current Transformer
ICT prim Primary Nominal Current of the Current Transformer
2.6.2.2 Definite Time Elements
The pickup and delay settings associated with the 46-1 element are set at addresses
4002 46-1 PICKUP and 4003 46-1 DELAY respectively while the pickup and delay
settings for the 46-2 element are set at address 4004 46-2 PICKUP and 4005 46-
2 DELAY respectively. Typically the 46-1 element is set with a lower pickup value and
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 107

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
higher time delay than the 46-2 element. This allows the 46-1 element to act as an
alarm while the 46-2 element will initiate fast tripping for severe imbalances.
If the 46-2 element is used for fast tripping against severe imbalances, the pickup val-
ue should be set at 60 % of the nominal phase current. This will ensure pickup for the
complete loss of one phase. On the other hand, because the loss of a phase could be
interpreted as a phase-to-phase fault, the time delay of this element should be coor-
dinated with fault protection relays. The magnitude of the negative sequence current
with respect to the phase current when one phase is out of service is given as follows:
1
I 2 = ------- ⋅ I = 0.58 ⋅ I
3
Examples:
Motor: IN Motor = 545A

I2 long-term prim / IN Motor = 0.11 long-term
I2 short-term prim /IN Motor = 0.55 for Tmax = 1s
Current CT = 600A/1A
Transformers
Set Value 46-1 Address 4002 = 0.11 · 545A · (1/600A) = 0.10A

Set Value 46-2 Address 4004 = 0.55 · 545A · (1/600A) = 0.50A
This ensures
When protecting a feeder, negative sequence protection may serve to identify low
magnitude unsymmetrical faults below the pickup values of the directional and non-
directional overcurrent elements. To detect load magnitude faults, the pickup value of
the negative sequence time-overcurrent elements must be set below the following:
− a phase-to-phase fault (I) results in the following negative sequence current:
1
I 2 = ------- ⋅ I = 0.58 ⋅ I
3
− a phase-to-ground fault (I) corresponds to the following negative sequence current:
1
I 2 = --- ⋅ I = 0.33 ⋅ I
3
To prevent false operations for fault in other zones of protection, the time delay should
be coordinated with other fault protection relays in the system.
For a transformer, negative sequence protection may be used as sensitive protection
for low magnitude phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase faults. In particular, this ap-
plication is well suited for delta-wye transformers where low side phase-to-ground
faults do not generate high side zero sequence currents.
The relationship between negative sequence currents and total fault current for phase-
to-phase faults and phase-to-ground faults are valid for the transformer as long as the
turns ratio is taken into consideration.
108 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Consider a transformer with the following data:

Transformer Base Rating 16 MVA
Nominal High Side Voltage VHS = 110 kV
Nominal Low Side Voltage VLS = 20 kV
Transformer Connection Delta-Grounded Wye
High Side CT Ratio CTR = 100 A / 1 A
The following faults may be detected at the lower-voltage side:

If the pickup setting (PU) of the device on the high side is set to 0.1 A, then a phase-
to-ground fault current of
I = (1/0.33) * CTR * PU * VHS / VLS =
3 * 100 * 0.1 A * 110 kV / 20 kV = 165 A
and a phase-to-phase fault current of
I = (1/0.58) * CTR * PU * VHS / VLS =
1.732 * 100 * 0.1 A * 110 kV / 20 kV = 95 A
can be detected at the low side. These faults correspond to 36 % and 20 % of the base
transformer rating respectively. It is important to note that load current is not taken into
account in this simplified example.
As it cannot be recognized reliably on which side the thus detected fault is located, the
delay time must be coordinated with other relays in the system to prevent false oper-
ation for faults in other zones of protection.
2.6.2.3 Inverse Time Element 46-TOC
IEC Curves If the 46-TOC element is employed, a characteristic tripping curve should be selected
to coordinate with the thermal overload curve representing the protected equipment
(e.g. induction motor, etc.). The curve should be selected at address 4006 46 IEC
CURVE. The characteristic tripping curves, and the formulas on which they are based,
are given in the Technical Specifications, Section 4.8.
The 46-TOC element picks up when the negative sequence input current exceeds
110% of the pickup settings and drops out when he negative sequence current de-
creases to 95 % of the pickup setting. The pickup settings is entered at address 4008
46-TOC PICKUP.
The associated time multiplier is entered at address 4010 46-TOC TIMEDIAL.
The time multiplier may also be set to ∞ thus allowing the element to pickup and gen-
erate a message, but never to trip. If the inverse time element is not required at all,
address 0140 should be set to Definite Time during configuration of protective
functions (Section Configuration of Functions, 2.1.1).
ANSI Curves If the 46-TOC element is employed, a characteristic tripping curve should be selected
to coordinate with the thermal overload curve representing the protected equipment
(e.g. induction motor, etc.). The curve should be selected at address 4007 46 ANSI
CURVE. The characteristic tripping curves, and the formulas on which they are based,
are given in the Technical Specifications, Section 4.8.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 109

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
The 46-TOC element picks up when the negative sequence input current exceeds
110 % of the pickup settings and drops out when the negative sequence current de-
creases to 95 % of the pickup setting. The pickup settings is entered at address 4008
46-TOC PICKUP. If Disk Emulation was selected at address 4011 46-TOC RE-
SET, reset will occur in accordance with the reset curve as described in Subsection
2.6.1.3. The associated time dial is entered at address 4009 46-TOC TIMEDIAL.
The time may also be set to ∞ thus allowing the element to pickup and generate a
message, but never to trip. If the inverse time element is not required at all, address
0140 should be set to Definite Time during configuration of protective functions
(Section 2.1.1).
2.6.2.4 Settings for Negative Sequence (Phase Balance) Current Protection
are for a device with a nominal current rating IN = 1 A. For a nominal current rating IN
= 5 A, multiply the Setting Options values and Default Setting values by 5. Consider

4001 FCT 46 OFF OFF 46 Negative Sequence Protec-
ON tion
4002 46-1 PICKUP 0.10..3.00 A 0.10 A 46-1 Pickup
4004 46-2 PICKUP 0.10..3.00 A 0.50 A 46-2 Pickup
4006 46 IEC CURVE Normal Inverse Extremely Inverse IEC Curve

Very Inverse
Extremely Inverse
4007 46 ANSI CURVE Extremely Inverse Extremely Inverse ANSI Curve

Inverse
Moderately Inverse
Very Inverse
4008 46-TOC PICKUP 0.10..2.00 A 0.90 A 46-TOC Pickup
4009 46-TOC TIMEDIAL 0.50..15.00; ∞ 5.00 46-TOC Time Dial
4011 46-TOC RESET Instantaneous Instantaneous 46-TOC Drop Out

Disk Emulation
4010 46-TOC TIMEDIAL 0.05..3.20 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec 46-TOC Time Dial
110 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
2.6.2.5 Information List for Negative Sequence Current Protection

05151 46 OFF 46 switched OFF
05152 46 BLOCKED 46 is BLOCKED
05153 46 ACTIVE 46 is ACTIVE
05170 46 TRIP 46 TRIP
05171 46 Dsk pickedup 46 Disk emulation picked up
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 111

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
2.7 Motor Protection (Motor Starting Protection, 48 and Start Inhibit for
Motors, 66/68)
2.7.1 Description of Motor Starting Protection
General When the 7SJ62/63/64 relay is used to protect a motor, the starting time monitoring
feature supplements the overload protection described in Section 2.9 by protecting the
motor against the potential damage that might result from frequent starting or extend-
ed starting durations. In particular, rotor-critical high-voltage motors can quickly be
heated above their thermal limits when multiple starting attempts occur in a short pe-
riod of time. If the durations of these starting attempts are lengthened by excessive
voltage surges during motor starting, by excessive load moments, or by blocked rotor
conditions, a tripping signal will be initiated by the device.
Motor starting protection consists of two time-overcurrent tripping characteristics initi-
ated by the motor starting recognition setting entered at address 1107 I MOTOR
START. One characteristic is definite time while the other one is inverse time. When
the motor phase currents exceed the setting entered at address 1107, time delayed
tripping will be initiated. To gain a better understanding of how to set the motor starting
recognition setting at address 1107, refer to side title “Recognition of Running Condi-
tion” in Subsections 2.1.6 and 2.9.2.2.
Inverse Time-Over- The inverse time-overcurrent characteristic is designed to operate only when the rotor
current Character- is not blocked. When the phase currents exceed the motor starting recognition setting
istic entered at address 1107, time delayed tripping via the inverse time characteristic is
initiated. The inverse time characteristic allows motor starting protection to adjust for
those situations where high starting voltages result in decreased starting currents. The
tripping time is calculated based on the following formula:
IA 2
t TRIP = æ -----ö ⋅ t Amax where I> IMOT START
è Iø
where tTRIP – Actual tripping time for flowing current I

tA max – Tripping time for nominal start-up current IA (set at address 4103)
I – Current actually flowing (measurement value)
IA – Nominal starting current of the motor (set at address 4102)
IMOT START – Pickup value for recognition of motor starting (set at address 1107)
112 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Motor Protection (Motor Starting Protection, 48 and Start Inhibit for Motors, 66/68)
tTRIP
[s]
tA max
IMOT START IA
I
Figure 2-39 Inverse Time Characteristic Tripping Curve for Motor Starting Current
Therefore, if the starting current I actually measured is smaller (or larger) than the
nominal starting current IA entered at address 4102 STARTUP CURRENT, the actual
tripping time ttrip is lengthened (or shortened) accordingly. See Figure 2-39.
Definite Time During motor starting, the definite time characteristic is designed to initiate a trip if the
Overcurrent Trip- motor starting time exceeds the maximum allowable blocked rotor time. The device
ping Characteristic can detect a blocked rotor condition via a binary input („>Rotor locked“) from an
(Blocked Rotor external rpm-counter. If the current in any of the phases exceeds the motor starting
Time) recognition setting entered at address 1107, and if a blocked rotor conditions is de-
tected via a binary input, a motor starting condition is assumed, and time delayed trip-
ping via the definite time characteristic will be initiated (based on the maximum allow-
able blocked rotor time).
It is important to note that message generation does not occur unless a trip is initiated.
Furthermore, when a blocked rotor condition is detected via a binary input, and the
definite time characteristic times out, immediate tripping will take place regardless of
whether the blocked rotor condition was detected before or after the definite time char-
acteristic timed out.
Logic Motor starting protection may be switched on or off at address 4101 48. In addition,
motor starting protection may be blocked via a binary input, at which time pickup mes-
sages and time delays will be reset. Figure 2-40 illustrates the logic for motor starting
protection. A pick up does not create a fault record. Fault recording is not started until
a trip command has been issued. When the function drops out the starting time, the
blocked rotor time and the annunciations are reset and the fault recording is terminat-
ed.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 113

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
Fault Cond.
FNo. 06823
Pickup Aφ
or START-SUP pu
4102 STARTUP CURRENT
or
4103 STARTUP TIME
FNo. 06821
or
or START-SUP TRIP
4104 LOCK ROTOR TIME R

FNo. 06822
T 0 or & S Q Rotor locked
Aφ
Measurement/Logic
FNo. 06805
>Rotor locked
FNo. 06801 FNo. 06812
>BLK START-SUP START-SUP BLK
4101 FCT 48/66 FNo. 06813
or or START-SUP ACT
ON
„1“ OFF FNo. 06811
START-SUP OFF
Figure 2-40 Logic Diagram for Motor Starting Protection
2.7.2 Description of Start Inhibit for Motor
General The rotor temperature of a motor generally remains well below its maximum allowable
temperature during normal operation and even during severe loading conditions. How-
ever, during motor starting, the rotor can heat up quickly. If multiple starting attempts
are made in a short duration of time, the rotor could suffer thermal damage. Therefore,
the 7SJ62/63/64 motor start blocking feature is available. A motor start blocking signal
is initiated when the relay projects rotor temperature will exceed the maximum allow-
able rotor temperature, and blocking continues until the calculated rotor temperature
decreases below the reset level. To block starting, the blocking signal must be con-
nected to a binary output whose contact is inserted in the motor starting circuit.
Determining Because the rotor current cannot be measured directly, the stator current must be
Excessive Rotor used to generate a thermal profile of the rotor. The excessive rotor temperature is cal-
Temperature culated using the highest of the three phase currents. The thermal limit values for the
rotor winding are based on manufacturer’s data regarding the nominal starting current,
maximum permissible starting time, and the number of starts permitted from cold and
warm conditions. From this data, the device performs the necessary calculations to
establish the thermal rotor profile and issues a blocking signal until the thermal rotor
profile decreases below the restarting limit.
114 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
ΘL Cool-down with τ·kτ–RUNNING
Maximum Allowable Rotor Temperature
Temperature Curve @: Cool-down with

Rotor Cage Bar Upper Side Limit τ·kτ–STOP
Rotor Cage Bar Lower Side Limit Restarting
Thermal
Profile
1st 2nd 3rd

t
Start Start Start
Motor Started Equilibri- Motor Started Equilibri- Motor Started Equilibri-
um Time um Time um Time
Current
LS I >
t
Figure 2-41 Temperature Curve at the Rotor and the Thermal Profile during Repeated Start-
ing Attempt
Although the heat distribution at the rotor brushes can range widely during motor start-
ing, the different maximum temperatures in the rotor do not necessarily affect motor
start blocking (see Figure 2-41). It is much more important to establish a thermal pro-
file, after a complete motor start, that is appropriate for the protection of the motor’s
thermal condition. Figure 2-41 shows, as an example, the heating processes during
repeated motor starts (three starts from cold operating condition), as well as the ther-
mal reproduction by the protective relay.
Restarting Limit If the rotor temperature has exceeded the restarting limit, the motor cannot be restart-
ed. When the rotor temperature goes below the restarting limit, that is, when exactly
one start becomes possible without exceeding the excessive rotor temperature limit,
the blocking signal is terminated.
Therefore the restarting temperature related to trip temperature is expressed as:
Θ Restart n cold – 1 ncold 2 3 4

-------------------- = --------------------- ΘRestart/ΘTrip
Θ Trip n cold 50 % 66,7 % 75 %
The restarting limit ΘRestart/ΘTrip is displayed as operational measured value in the

“thermal measured values”. The value changes only if the number of admissible cold
restarts ncold alters and is indicated in % and without decimal positions.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 115

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
Restarting Times When giving the maximum allowable cold and warm starting attempts, the motor man-
ufacturer assumes the motor is not restarted immediately after motor shutdown. This
assumption is made because the distribution of heat in the rotor, is very different im-
mediately after motor shutdown. Only after a certain heat equilibrium time has passed
can a new starting attempt be made.
Equilibrium Time The device can allow for the equilibrium time via a programmable time interval entered
at address 4304 T Equal. Each time the motor is shutdown, the timer starts, and the
calculated thermal profile of the rotor does not change until this timer elapses. Once
the time interval entered at address 4304 elapses, the device assumes equilibrium
has taken place in the rotor, and the thermal profile begins to update. A time of zero
can be entered at address 4304 at the option of the user. Then the thermal model with
the corresponding time constant (rotor time constant ∗ extension factor) cools down.
During the equilibrium time the motor cannot be restarted. As soon as the temperature
sinks below the restarting threshold, the next restarting attempt can be made.
Minimum Inhibit Regardless of thermal profiles, some motor manufacturers require a minimum inhibit
Time time after the maximum number of permissible starting attempts has been exceeded.
The total duration of the inhibit signal depends on which of the times T MIN INIHBIT or
TRESTART is longer.
Total Time Treclose The entire time that must elapse before motor starting can resume is equal to the equi-
until release of re- librium time entered at address 4304 and the amount of time, calculated via the ther-
close blocking mal model, that it takes for the rotor temperature to decrease to the reset temperature
level. If the calculated excessive temperature of the rotor is above the restarting limit
when the motor is shut down, the minimum inhibit time will be started together with the
equilibrium time. Thus the total inhibit time Treclose can become equal to the minimum
inhibit time if it is longer than the sum of the two first mentioned times:
T reclose = T Equal + T Restart for TMIN INHIBIT < TEqual+ TRESTART
T reclose = T MIN INHIBIT for TMIN INHIBIT ≥ TEqual + TRESTART, if the

calculated excessive temperature > re-
starting limit
The operational measured value Treclose (visible in the “thermal measured values”) is
the remaining time until the next restart is permissible. When the rotor overtempera-
ture is below the restarting limit and thus the next restarting attempt is permitted, the
operational measured value for the waiting time Treclose has reached zero.
Extension of Time In order to properly account for the reduced heat exchange when a self-ventilated mo-
Constants tor is stopped, the cooling time constants can be increased relative to the time con-
stants for a running machine with the factor Kt at STOP (address 4308). A stopped
motor is defined by current below an adjustable current flow monitoring threshold
BkrClosed I MIN, assuming that the motor idle current is greater than this thresh-
old. The pickup threshold BkrClosed I MIN also effects the thermal overload pro-
tection function (see Section 2.9).
While the motor is running, the heating of the thermal profile is modelled with the time
constant τL calculated from the motor ratings and the cool-down calculated with the
116 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
time constant τL ⋅ Kt at RUNNING (address 4309). In this way, the protection caters
to the requirements in case of a slow cool-down (slow temperature equilibrium).
For the calculation of the restarting time TRESTART the following holds:
Θ pre ⋅ n cold
T RESTART = k τat STOP ⋅ τ L ⋅ ln ----------------------------- at Stop
n cold – 1
Θ pre ⋅ n cold
T RESTART = k τat RUNNING ⋅ τ L ⋅ ln ----------------------------- at Running
n cold – 1
with kτ at STOP – extension factor for the time constant =

Kt at STOP, address 4308
kτ at RUNNING – extension factor for the time constant =
Kt at RUNNING, address 4309
τL – rotor time constant, calculated internally:
τL = ta ⋅ (ncold – nwarm) ⋅ ΙSTARTUP2 with ta = startup time in s
ΙSTARTUP = startup current in pu
Θpre – thermal replica the instant the motor stops (depends on the
operational status)
Behavior in Case of Depending on the setting of parameter 0235A ATEX100 in Power System Data 1 (see
Power Supply Subsection 2.1.3) the value of the thermal replica will be reset to zero if power supply
Failure voltage fails (ATEX100 = NO) or if it is buffered cyclically in a “non-transient” buffer
storage (ATEX100 = YES) that is preserved in the event of a supply voltage failure. In
the latter case, the thermal replica uses the buffered values for its calculation and
adapts it to the operational conditions. The first option is set by default. For further in-
formation please refer to the “Device Description on the Protection of Explosion-Pro-
tected Motors of Protection Type Increased-Safety e” (Order No. C53000-B1174-
C157).
Emergency Start If, under emergency conditions, motor starting in excess of the maximum allowable ro-
tor temperature must take place, the motor start blocking signal can be terminated via
a binary input (“>66 emer.start“), thus allowing a new starting attempt.The thermal
rotor profile continues to function, however, the maximum allowable rotor temperature
will be exceeded. No motor shutdown will be initiated by motor start blocking, but the
calculated excessive temperature of the rotor can be observed for risk assessment.
Blocking/Logic The restarting limit does not feature a pickup annunciation and neither a fault record-
ing is initiated. If the motor start blocking function is blocked via binary input “>BLOCK
66” or switched off, the thermal profile of the excessive rotor temperature and the equi-
librium time are reset, and any existing motor start blocking signal is terminated.
Via a binary input (“>66 RM th.repl.”) the thermal replica can be reset indepen-
dently. This may be useful for testing and commissioning, and after a power supply
voltage failure.
Figure 2-42 shows the logic diagram of the start inhibit for motors function.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 117

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
Ia
Ib
Ic
Imax 4309 Kt at RUNNING
kτRUNNING x τ
4302 STARTUP CURRENT
4308 Kt at STOP
4303 STARTUP TIME
kτSTOP x τ 4306 MAX.WARM STARTS

CB closed 4307 #COLD-#WARM
= Motor is running
0212 CB Cl 4304 T Equal
S Q ΘL(t) Calculator
or T 0
R ΘL = 0
or
&
ΘL(t) > ΘRES
4310 T MIN. INHIBIT
S Q T 0
R
&
FNo. 04827
FNo. 04823 & 66 TRIP
>66 emer.start
Measurement/Logic
FNo. 04828
>66 RM th.repl. FNo. 04829
or 66 RM th.repl.
FNo. 04822 FNo. 04825
>BLOCK 66 66 BLOCKED
FNo. 04826
or or 66 ACTIVE
4301 FCT 66
FNo. 04824
OFF
66 OFF
„1“ ON
Figure 2-42 Logic Diagram of the Start Inhibit for Motors Function
2.7.3.1 General
Motor starting protection is only effective and accessible if address 0141 48 was set
to Enabled during configuration of protective function. If the motor starting protection
118 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
feature is not required, address 0141 should be set to Disabled. The function may
switched ON or OFF at address 4101 48.
The motor start inhibit function is only in effect and accessible if address 0143 66
#of Starts is set to Enabled during configuration of protective functions. If the
function is not needed, then Disabled is set. The function can be turned ON or OFF
under address 4301 FCT 66.
2.7.3.2 Motor Starting Protection (48)
Under normal conditions the values of the startup current are entered at address 4102
STARTUP CURRENT and those of the startup time at address 4103 STARTUP TIME.
At all times this enables timely tripping if the value I2 t calculated in the protection de-
vice is exceeded.
If the startup time is longer than the permissible blocked rotor time, an external rpm-
counter can initiate the definite-time tripping characteristic via binary input
(“>Rotor locked“). A locked rotor leads to a loss of ventilation and therefore to a
reduced thermal load capacity of the machine. For this reason the motor starting time
supervision is to issue a tripping command before reaching the thermal tripping char-
acteristic valid for normal operation.
A current above the current threshold is interpreted as motor startup. Consequently,
this value must be selected such that under all load and voltage conditions during mo-
tor startup the actual startup current safely exceeds the setting, but stays below the
setting in case of permissible, momentary overload.
Example: Motor with the following data:
Nominal Voltage V N = 6600 V
Nominal Current IG = 126 A
Start-Up Current ISTARTUP = 624 A
Long-Term Current Rating IMAX = 135 A
Start-Up Duration for ISTARTUP TSTA MAX = 8.5 sec
CT Ratio IN CT prim / IN CT sec 200 A / 1 A
The setting for Address 4102 STARTUP CURRENT is calculated as follows:

I STARTUP 624 A
I STARTUP-sec = ------------------------ ⋅ I N CT sec = --------------- ⋅ I A = 3.12 A
I N CT prim 200 A
For reduced voltage, the start-up current is also reduced almost linearly. At 80% nom-
inal voltage, the start-up current in this example is reduced to
0.8 * I.STARTUP = 2.5 A.
The setting at address 1107 I MOTOR START must lie above the maximum load cur-
rent and below the minimum start-up current. If no other influencing factors are
present (peak loads), the value set at address 1107 may be a median value:
135 A
Based on the Long-Term Current Rating: --------------- = 0.68 ⋅ I N CT sec
200 A
2.5 I N + 0.68 I N
I STARTUP-SEC = ---------------------------------------- ≈ 1.6 ⋅ INCT sec
2
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 119

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
For ratios deviating from nominal conditions, the motor tripping time changes:,
I STARTUP 2
T TRIP = æ ------------------------ö ⋅ T STARTUP
è I ø
At 80 % of nominal voltage (which corresponds to 80 % of nominal starting current),

the tripping time is:
2
T TRIP = æ ----------------------------ö ⋅ 8.5 s = 13.3 s
624 A
è 0.8 ⋅ 624 Aø
After the definite time characteristic times out (4104 LOCK ROTOR TIME), the blocked
rotor binary input becomes effective and initiates a tripping signal. If the time delay as-
sociated with the definite time characteristic is set such that at normal startup the bi-
nary input “>Rotor locked” (06805) is blocked during the delay time LOCK ROTOR
TIME, a shorter delay time of the tripping command can be realized than for unblocked
startup.
Note:
Overload protection characteristic curves are effective during motor starting condi-
tions, however, thermal dissipation during motor starting is constant. The setting at
address 1107 (I MOTOR START) limits the working range of the overload protection
to larger current values.
2.7.3.3 Start Inhibit for Motors (66, 86)
Many of the variables needed to calculate the rotor temperature are supplied by the
motor manufacturer. Among these variables are the starting current, the nominal mo-
tor current, the maximum allowable starting time T START MAX (address 4303), the
number of allowable starts from cold conditions (ncold), and the number of allowable
starts from warm conditions (nwarm).
The starting current is entered at address 4302 IStart/IMOTnom, expressed as a
multiple of nominal motor current. In contrast, the nominal motor current is entered as
a secondary value, directly in amperes, at address 4305 I MOTOR NOMINAL. The
number of warm starts allowed is entered at address 4306 MAX.WARM STARTS and
the difference between the number of allowable cold and warm starts is entered at ad-
dress 4307 #COLD-#WARM.
For motors without separate ventilation, the reduced cooling at motor stop can be ac-
counted for by entering the factor Kt at STOP at address 4308. As soon as the cur-
rent no longer exceeds the current flow monitoring setting entered at address 0212
BkrClosed I MIN, the time constant is increased by the kτ factor.
If no difference between the time constants is to be used (e.g. externally-ventilated
motors), then the factor Kt at STOP should be set to 1.
Cool-down with running motor is influenced by the extension factor 4309 Kt at RUN-
NING. This factor considers that motor running under load and a stopped motor do not
cool down at the same speed. It becomes effective as soon as the current exceeds
the value set at address 0212 BkrClosed I MIN. With Kt at RUNNING = 1 the
heating and the cooling time constant are the same at operating conditions
(I > BkrClosed I MIN).
120 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Example: Motor with the following data:
Nominal Voltage VN = 6600 V

Nominal Current IN = 126 A
Starting Current IStart= 624 A
Starting Duration @ IStart TANL max = 8.5 s
Allowable Starts with Cold Motor ncold= 3
Allowable Starts with Warm Motor nwarm= 2
Current Transformer Ratio 200 A/1 A
The following settings are derived from these data:

624 A
I START ⁄ I N = --------------- = 4.95
126 A
126 A
I N = --------------- = 0.62 ⋅ I NCTsec
200 A
The following settings are made:

IStart/IMOTnom = 4.9
I MOTOR NOMINAL = 0.6 AT START MAX=8.5 s
MAX.WARM STARTS= 2
#COLD-#WARM = 1
For the rotor temperature equilibrium time, (address 4304) a setting time of approx. T
Equal = 1 min has proven to be a good value. The value for the minimum inhibit time
4310 T MIN. INHIBIT depends on the requirements made by the motor manufac-
turer, or by the system conditions. It must in any case be higher than 4304 T Equal.
In this example, a value has been chosen that reflects the thermal profile (T MIN.
INHIBIT = 6.0 min).
The motor manufacturer's, or system requirements determine also the extension fac-
tor for the time constant during cool-down, especially with the motor stopped. Where
no other specifications are made, the following settings are recommended:
Kt at STOP = 5 und Kt at RUNNING = 2.
For a proper functioning, it is also important that the CT values and the threshold cur-
rent for distinction between stopped and running motor (address 0212 BkrClosed
I MIN, recommended setting ≈ 0.1 ⋅ I/IN Motor) have been set correctly. An overview
of the parameters and their default settings is given in the tables at the end of this sec-
tion and in the Appendix.
Temperature For a better understanding of the above considerations several possible operating
Behavior during states in two different operating areas will be discussed in the following paragraph.
Changing The examples use the settings indicated above. 3 cold and 2 warm startup attempts
Operating States have resulted in a restart limit of 66.7 %:
A. Below the thermal restarting limit
1.A normal startup brings the machine into a temperature range below the thermal
restarting limit and the machine is stopped. The stop launches the equilibrium
time 4304 T Equal and generates the message “66 TRIP“. The equilibrium
time expires and the message “66 TRIP“ is cleared. During the time T Equal
the thermal model remains “frozen“ (see Figure 2-43, to the left).
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 121

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
2.A normal startup brings the machine into a temperature range below the thermal
restarting limit, the machine is stopped and is started by an emergency startup
without expiration of the equilibrium time. The equilibrium time is shed and the
thermal model is released and “66 TRIP“ is reported cleared (see Figure 2-43,
to the right).
Temperature
p.u.
1.0 Example A.1 Example A.2
Emergency startup
0.8
Restarting
0.6
0.4
0.2
0
t
66 TRIP
Current t
BkrClosed
I MIN
t
Figure 2-43 Startups according to examples A.1 and A.2
B. Above the thermal restarting limit:

1.A startup brings the machine from load operation into a temperature range far
above the thermal restarting limit and the machine is stopped. The minimum in-
hibit time and the equilibrium time are started and “66 TRIP“ is reported. The
temperature cool-down below the restarting limit takes longer than 4310 T
MIN. INHIBIT and 4304 T Equal, so that the time passing until the temper-
ature falls below the temperature limit is the decisive factor for clearing the mes-
sage “66 TRIP“. The thermal model remains “frozen” while the minimum inhibit
time expires (see Figure 2-44, to the left).
122 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
2.A startup brings the machine from load operation into a temperature range just
above the thermal restarting limit and the machine is stopped. The minimum in-
hibit time and the equilibrium time are started and “66 TRIP“ is reported. Al-
though the temperature soon falls below the restarting limit, the blocking “66
TRIP“ is preserved until the equilibrium time and the minimum inhibit time have
expired (see Figure 2-44, to the right).
Temperature
p.u. Example B.1 Example B.2
T Equal
1.0 T MIN. INHIBIT T Equal
T MIN. INHIBIT
0.8
Restarting
0.6
0.4
0.2
0
t
66 TRIP
t
Current
BkrClosed
I MIN
t
Figure 2-44 Startups according to examples B.1 and B.2
2.7.3.4 Settings
In the list below, the setting range and default setting value for the current-based set-
ting are for a device with a nominal current rating IN = 1 A. For a nominal current rating
IN = 5 A, multiply the Setting Options values and Default Setting value by 5. Consider
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 123

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions

1107 I MOTOR START 0.60..10.00 A 2.50 A Motor Start Current (Block 49,
Start 48)

4101 FCT 48/66 OFF OFF 48 / 66 Motor (Startup Monitor/
ON Counter)
4301 FCT 66 OFF OFF 66 Startup Counter for Motors

ON
4102 STARTUP CUR- 1.00..16.00 A 5.00 A Startup Current

RENT
4103 STARTUP TIME 1.0..180.0 sec 10.0 sec Startup Time
4104 LOCK ROTOR 0.5..120.0 sec; ∞ 2.0 sec Permissible Locked Rotor Time
TIME
4302 IStart/IMOTnom 3.0..10.0 4.9 I Start / I Motor nominal
4303 T START MAX 3..320 sec 10 sec Maximum Permissible Starting

Time
4304 T Equal 0.0..320.0 min 1.0 min Temperature Equalizaton Time
4305 I MOTOR NOMINAL 0.20..1.20 A 1.00 A Rated Motor Current
4306 MAX.WARM 1..4 2 Maximum Number of Warm

STARTS Starts
4307 #COLD-#WARM 1..2 1 Number of Cold Starts - Warm

Starts
4308 Kτ at STOP 0.2..100.0 5.0 Extension of Time Constant at

Stop
4309 Kτ at RUNNING 0.2..100.0 2.0 Extension of Time Constant at

Running
4310 T MIN. INHIBIT 0.2..120.0 min 6.0 min Minimum Restart Inhibit Time
2.7.3.5 Information

06801 >BLK START-SUP >BLOCK Startup Supervision
06805 >Rotor locked >Rotor locked
06811 START-SUP OFF Startup supervision OFF
06812 START-SUP BLK Startup supervision is BLOCKED
06813 START-SUP ACT Startup supervision is ACTIVE
06821 START-SUP TRIP Startup supervision TRIP
124 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1

06822 Rotor locked Rotor locked
06823 START-SUP pu Startup supervision Pickup
04822 >BLOCK 66 >BLOCK Motor Startup counter
04823 >66 emer.start >Emergency start
04828 >66 RM th.repl. >66 Reset thermal memory
04824 66 OFF 66 Motor start protection OFF
04825 66 BLOCKED 66 Motor start protection BLOCKED
04826 66 ACTIVE 66 Motor start protection ACTIVE
04827 66 TRIP 66 Motor start protection TRIP
04829 66 RM th.repl. 66 Reset thermal memory
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 125

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
2.8 Frequency Protection (81 O/U)
2.8.1 Description of Frequency Protection
General The frequency protection function detects abnormally high and low frequencies in the
system. If the frequency lies outside the allowable range, appropriate actions are ini-
tiated, such as load shedding or separating a generator from the system.
A decrease in system frequency occurs when the system experiences an increase in
the real power demand, or when a malfunction occurs with a generator governor or
automatic generation control (AGC) system.
An increase in system frequency occurs when large blocks of load are removed from
the system, or again when a malfunction occurs with a generator governor or AGC
system.
The frequency is detected from the phase–to–phase voltages Va-b applying at the de-
vice. If the amplitude of this voltage is too small, one of the other phase–to–phase volt-
ages is used instead.
Through the use of filters and repeated measurements, the frequency evaluation is
free from harmonic influences and very accurate.
Underfrequency Frequency protection consists of four frequency elements. Any given frequency ele-
and Overfrequency ment can be set to pickup for either overfrequency or underfrequency conditions. Each
Protection element can be independently set, and utilized to perform different functions within the
system. The setting decides on the purpose of the individual frequency stage. For the
f4 frequency stage, the user can specify independently of the parameterized limit val-
ue if this stage shall function as decrease or increase stage. For this reason, it can also
be used for special applications, if, for example, the user desires a signalization in
case of a frequency overrange being below the nominal frequency.
Operating Ranges The frequency can be determined as long as at least one of the phase–to–phase volt-
ages is present and of sufficient magnitude. If the measurement voltage drops below
a settable value Vmin, then frequency protection is blocked. For elements used in an
underfrequency protection mode, as soon as the frequency of the measured voltage
decreases below the setting, the element picks up and remain picked up until the sys-
tem frequency increases above the setting. For elements used in an overfrequency
protection mode, as soon as the frequency of the measured voltage increases above
the setting, the element picks up and remains picked up until the frequency decreases
below the setting.
Logic Each frequency element has an associated settable time delay. When a frequency el-
ement picks up and the time delay elapses, a trip signal is generated. When a frequen-
cy elements drops out, the control signal (tripping or alarm signal) is immediately ter-
minated, but not before the minimum command duration 0210A TMin TRIP CMD
has elapsed. Each of the four frequency elements can be blocked individually by bi-
nary inputs. Figure 2-45 shows the logic diagram for the frequency protection function.
The 81 element is a definite time element in that the time delay is not a function of the
frequency magnitude.
126 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Frequency Protection (81 O/U)
5403 81-1 PICKUP

>BLOCK 81-1 81-1 picked up
FNo. 05206 FNo. 05232
& 5405 81-1 DELAY
5402 Vmin
f> T 0
V > Vmin 81-1 TRIP
U1 f<
FNo. 05236
f
Measurement/Logic
FNo. 05214
or 81 Under V Blk
5401 FCT 81 O/U
ON
„1“ FNo. 05211
OFF 81 OFF
FNo. 05213
or or 81 ACTIVE
FNo. 05203 FNo. 05212
>BLOCK 81O/U 81 BLOCKED
Figure 2-45 Logic Diagram of the Frequency Protection
2.8.2.1 General
The frequency protection will only be effective and accessible if address 0154 81 O/
U is set to Enabled during configuration of protective functions. If the frequency pro-
tection function is not required, then address 0154 should be set to Disabled. The
function can be turned ON or OFF at address 5401 FCT 81 O/U.
Minimum Voltage The minimum voltage is set at address 5402 Vmin. If the phase–to–phase voltage is
less than this value, the frequency protection is blocked.
2.8.2.2 Frequency Protection Settings
Pickup Values The nominal system frequency is programmed in POWER SYSTEM DATA 1 and the
pickup settings for each of the frequency elements should be set higher than nominal
frequency if the element is to be used for overfrequency protection or lower than the
nominal frequency if the element is to be used for underfrequency protection.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 127

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
Note:
If the element is not required, the frequency setting should be set equal to the nominal
frequency, in which case the element becomes inactive.
If underfrequency protection is used for load shedding purpose, then the frequency
settings relative to other feeder relays are generally based on the priority of the cus-
tomers served by the protective relay. The actual settings of the underfrequency ele-
ments must be based on network stability requirements.
For 60 Hz systems, the frequency pickup settings for elements one (1) through four
(4) are entered at addresses 5404, 5407, 5410, and 5413 respectively.
For 50 Hz systems, the frequency pickup settings for elements one (1) through four
(4) are entered at addresses 5403, 5406, 5409, and 5412 respectively.
Delays The time delays (Definite Time) entered at addresses 5405, 5408, 5411, and 5414,
allow the device to prioritize or order corrective actions based on the degree to which
the actual system frequency departs (upward or downward) from the nominal system
frequency.
2.8.2.3 Settings for Frequency Protection
For 60 Hz systems:
Addr. LCD-Text Setting Options Default Setting Comments

5401 FCT 81 O/U OFF OFF 81 Over/Under
ON Frequency Protection
5402 Vmin 10 .. 150 V 65 V Minimum required
voltage for operation
5404 81–1 PICKUP 55.50 .. 64.50 Hz 59.50 Hz 81-1 Pickup
5405 81–1 DELAY 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; ∞ 60.00 sec 81-1 Time Delay
5411 81–3 DELAY 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; ∞ 3.00 sec 81-3 Time delay
For 50 Hz systems:

5401 FCT 81 O/U OFF OFF 81 Over/Under
ON Frequency Protection
128 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Frequency Protection (81 O/U)

5402 Vmin 10 .. 150 V 65 V Minimum required
voltage for operation
2.8.2.4 Information List for Frequency Protectio

05203 >BLOCK 81O/U >BLOCK 81O/U
05206 >BLOCK 81-1 >BLOCK 81-1
05207 >BLOCK 81-2 >BLOCK 81-2
05208 >BLOCK 81-3 >BLOCK 81-3
05209 >BLOCK 81-4 >BLOCK 81-4
05211 81 OFF 81 OFF
05212 81 BLOCKED 81 BLOCKED
05213 81 ACTIVE 81 ACTIVE
05214 81 Under V Blk 81 Under Voltage Block
05236 81-1 TRIP 81-1 TRIP
05237 81-2 TRIP 81-2 TRIP
05238 81-3 TRIP 81-3 TRIP
05239 81-4 TRIP 81-4 TRIP
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 129

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
2.9 Thermal Overload Protection (49)
2.9.1 Description of Thermal Overload Protection
General The thermal overload protection feature of the 7SJ62/63/64 is designed to prevent
overloads from damaging the protected equipment.
The device is capable of projecting excessive operating temperatures for the protect-
ed equipment in accordance with a single-body thermal model, based on the following
differential equation:
I 2
-------- + ------- ⋅ Θ = ------- ⋅ æ æ -------------ö + Θ uö
dΘ 1 1
dt τ th τ th è è k ⋅ I Nø ø
where Θ – Actual operating temperature expressed as a percent of the

operating temperature corresponding to the maximum permissible
operating current (k*IN)
τth – Thermal time constant for the heating of the equipment being
protected
I – Operating current expressed as a percentage of the maximum
permissible operating current (k*IN)
k – k–factor indicating the maximum permissible constant phase
current referred to the nominal current of the protected object
IN – Nominal current of the protected object
ϑ u – 40°C
Θ u = --------------------------
2
k ⋅ ϑN
where ϑu – Measured ambient or coolant temperature

ϑN – Temperature at nominal current
If the ambient or coolant temperature is not measured, a constant value of ϑu = 40°C

is assumed so that Θu = 0.
The thermal overload protection feature models a heat image of the equipment being
protected. Both the previous history of an overload and the heat loss to the environ-
ment are taken into account.
Thermal overload protection calculates the operating temperature of the protected
equipment as a percent of the maximum allowable operating temperature. When the
calculated operating temperature reaches a settable percentage (49 Q ALARM) of the
maximum allowable operating temperature, a warning message is issued to allow time
for the load reduction measures to take place. When the calculated operating temper-
ature reaches 100 % of the maximum allowable operating temperature, a trip signal is
initiated to de-energize the overloaded equipment. Initiation of a trip signal is based on
the phase with the highest calculated temperature.
The maximum thermally-permissible continuous current Imax is described as a multiple
of the nominal current IN:
130 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Thermal Overload Protection (49)
Imax = k × IN
For thermal overload protection to calculate operating temperature as a percent of
maximum allowable operating temperature, it is necessary to enter the k factor setting
(49 K-FACTOR), the time constant setting τth (TIME CONSTANT) and the warning
temperature level Θ (49 Q ALARM) in percent of the trip temperature ΘTRIP.
Thermal overload protection also features a current warning element (I ALARM) in ad-
dition to the temperature warning stage. The current warning element may report an
overload current prematurely, even if the calculated operating temperature has not yet
attained the warning or tripping levels.
Coolant The device can account for external temperatures. Depending on the type of applica-
Temperature tion, this may be a coolant or ambient temperature. The temperature can be measured
(Ambient via a temperature detection unit (RTD-box). For this purpose, the required tempera-
Temperature) ture detector is connected to detector input 1 of the first RTD-box. If incorrect temper-
ature values are measured or there are disturbances between the RTD-box and the
device, an alarm will be issued and the standard temperature of ϑu = 40° C is used for
calculation with the ambient temperature detection simply being ignored.
For the detection of coolant temperature, the maximum permissible current Imax is in-
fluenced by the difference between the coolant and the standard temperature of
40° C. If the ambient or coolant temperature is low, the protected object can be
charged higher than it is when the temperature is high.
Extension of Time When using the device to protect motors, the varying thermal behaviors associated
Constants with cycling the motor on and off may be correctly evaluated. Under a cycling condi-
tion, a motor without external cooling losses heat more slowly, and a longer thermal
time constant must be used. For a motor that is cycled on and off, the 7SJ62/63/64
increases the time constant τth by a programmable factor (kτ factor). The motor is con-
sidered off the motor currents drop below a programmable minimum current setting
(BkrClosed I MIN, refer to “Current Flow Monitoring” in Subsection 2.1.3). For ex-
ternally-cooled motors, cables, and transformers, the Kt-FACTOR = 1.
Blocking The thermal overload protection feature may be reset via a binary input
(“>RES 49 Image”). The current-induced overtermperature value is reset to zero.
The same is accomplished via the binary input (“>BLOCK 49 O/L”); in that case the
overload protection is blocked completely, including the current warning stage.
When motors must be started for emergency reasons, operating temperatures above
the maximum permissible operating temperatures can be allowed by blocking the trip-
ping signal via a binary input (“>EmergencyStart”). Since the calculated operating
temperature may be higher than the maximum allowable operating temperature after
drop out of the binary input has taken place, the thermal overload protection function
features a programmable run-on time interval (T EMERGENCY) which is started when
the binary input drops out. Tripping will be defeated until this time interval elapses. On
a final note, the binary input used for emergency starting affects only the tripping sig-
nal. There is no effect on the fault condition protocol nor does the thermal image reset.
Behavior in Case of Depending on the setting in address 0235A ATEX100 of Power System Data 1 (see
Power Supply Subsection 2.1.3) the value of the thermal replica is either reset to zero (ATEX100 =
Failure NO) if the power supply voltage fails, or cyclically buffered in a non-volatile memory
(ATEX100 = YES) until the power supply voltage is back again. In the latter case, the
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 131

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
thermal replica uses the stored value for calculation and matches it to the operating
conditions. The first option is the default setting. For further information, please refer
to “Device Description on the Protection of Explosion-Protected Motors of Protection
Type Increased-Safety e” (Order No. C53000-B1174-C157).
Figure 2-46 shows the logic diagram for thermal overload protection.
132 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
4205 I ALARM 4202 49 K-FACTOR
FNo. 01515
Ic
Ib or 49 O/L I Alarm
Ia I>
1 æ 2 ö 4204 49 Q ALARM
-------- + -------- ⋅ Θ = -------- ⋅ ç æ --------------ö + Θ ÷
dΘ 1 I
dt τ τ è k ⋅ I ø u
th th è N ø FNo. 01516
Aφ τth Θu Θ = 0
Θ> 49 Ο/Λ Θ Αλαρµ
Θmax
Θ = const.
FNo. 01517
CB closed
100 % 49 Winding O/L
Θ>
I>
&
4203 TIME CONSTANT

4207A Kt-FACTOR FNo. 01521
49 Th O/L TRIP
τth = Kτ ⋅ Time Constant
τth = Time Constant
1107 I MOTOR START
I>
0142 FCT 49
Disabled
Θu = 0° C
No ambient temp
With amb. temp.
Θu
Measurement/
(RTD-box) Logic
FNo. 01580
>RES 49 Image FNo. 01581
or 49 Image res.
FNo. 01503 FNo. 01512

>BLOCK 49 O/L 49 O/L BLOCK
FNo. 01513
4201 FCT 49 or 49 O/L ACTIVE
&
FNo. 01511
OFF
49 O / L OFF
„1“ ON
Alarm Only
4208A T EMERGENCY
FNo. 01507
0 T
>EmergencyStart
or
Figure 2-46 Logic Diagram for Thermal Overload Protection
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 133

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
2.9.2.1 General
Thermal overload protection is only effective and accessible if address 0142 49 was
set to No ambient temp or With amb. temp. during configuration of protective
functions. If the thermal overload protection is not required, address 0142 49 should
be set to Disabled.
Transformers and cable are prone to damage by overloads which last for an extended
period of time. For this reason, fault protection elements such as the directional and
non-directional overcurrent elements should not be used to protect against overload.
The short time delays associated with fault protection elements do not allow sufficient
time for the orderly curtailment of load by operating personnel. In addition, fault pro-
tection elements set to trip for overload will not allow short-duration, non-damaging
overloads – a practice which is often required in real operating situations.
The 7SJ62/63/64 protective relay features an thermal overload protective function with
a thermal tripping characteristic curve which may be adapted to the overload tolerance
of the equipment being protected.
Thermal overload protection may be switched ON or OFF or Alarm Only at address
4201 FCT 49. If switched ON, tripping is also possible.
2.9.2.2 Overload Settings
k–Factor The nominal device current is used as a basis for overload detection. The program-
mable 49 K-FACTOR (set at address 4202) is calculated as the ratio of the thermally-
permissible continuous current Imax to the nominal device current IN:
I max
k = -----------
IN
The thermally-permissible continuous current for the equipment being protected is

known from manufacturer’s specifications. The thermal overload function is normally
not applicable to aerial lines since the actual current capability of aerial lines is depen-
dent on factors that are generally unknown (e.g. wind speed, ambient temperature,
etc.). For cables, the permissible continuous current is dependent on the cross-sec-
tion, insulating material, design, and the cable routing, among other things. It may be
taken from pertinent tables, or is specified by the cable manufacturer. If no specifica-
tions are available, a value of 1.1 times the nominal current rating is assumed.
When determining the nominal current rating of the protected equipment, it is impor-
tant to relate this current to the nominal current rating of the device. For example, the
maximum permissible continuous current for a motor and the nominal current rating of
the motor are given in primary amperes.
For the k factor to be set based on the nominal device current, the following equation
must be used:
I max prim I NMotor
Set the 49 K-FACTOR k = --------------------- ⋅ ------------------------
I NMotor I N CT prim
134 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
where Imax prim Maximum permissible continuous motor current in primary

amperes
IN Motor Nominal motor current in primary amperes
IN CT prim Current transformer primary nominal current
Example: Motor and current transformer with the following data:

Permissible Continuous Current: Imax prim= 1.2 · IN
Motor Nominal Current IN Motor = 1100 A
Current Transformer Ratio 1200 A/1 A
1100 A
Set the 49 K-FACTOR = 1.2 ⋅ ------------------- = 1.1
1200 A
Time Constant τth The thermal overload protection element tracks excessive temperature progression,
employing a thermal differential equation whose solution is an exponential function.
The TIME CONSTANT τth (set at address 4203) is used in the calculation to determine
the operating temperature. This is expressed as a maximum allowable operating tem-
perature.
For cable protection, the heat-gain time constant τth is determined by cable specifica-
tions and by the cable environment. If no time-constant specification is available, it
may be determined from the short-term load capability of the cable. The 1-sec current
(i.e. the maximum current permissible for a one-second period of time), is often known
or available from tables. Then, the time constant may be calculated from the formula:
1 I 1 sec 2
Set Value τ th (min) = ------ × ---------------------
-
60 I
max Prim
If the short-term load capability is given for an interval other than one sec, the corre-
sponding short-term current is used in the above formula instead of the 1-sec current,
and the result is multiplied times the given duration. For example, if the 0.5-second
current rating is known,
0.5 I 0.5 sec 2
et Value τ th (min) = -------- × ---------------------
-
60 I
max Prim
It is important to note, however, that the longer the effective duration, the less accurate
the result.
Example:
Cable and current transformer with the following data:

Continuous permissible current Imax = 500 A @ 40 oC
Maximum current for 1 sec I1s = 45 * Imax = 22.5 kA
Current transformer 600 A / 1 A
The k factor and time constant are calculated as follows:
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 135

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
I max 500 A
k = ----------- = --------------- = 0.833
IN 600 A
I 1s
τ min = ------ ⋅ æ -----------ö = ------ ⋅ 45 = 33.75 min
1 1 2
60 I maxøè 60
The settings are: 49 K-FACTOR (Address 4202)= 0.83

TIME CONSTANT = 33.7 min
Warning Tempera- By setting the thermal warning level 49 Q ALARM at address 4204, a warning mes-
ture Level sage can be issued prior to tripping, thus allowing time for load curtailment procedures
to be implemented. This warning level simultaneously represents the dropout level for
the tripping signal. In other words, the tripping signal is interrupted only when the cal-
culated operating temperature falls below the warning level, thus allowing the protect-
ed equipment to be placed back into service.
The thermal warning level is given in % of the tripping temperature level (maximum
allowable operating temperature).
A current warning level is also available (I ALARM 4205). The setting at address 4205
corresponds to secondary amperes, of course, and should be set equal to, or slightly
less than, permissible continuous current (k * INsec). The current warning level may be
used in lieu of the thermal warning level by setting the thermal warning level to 100 %.
Extension of Time The time constant programmed at address 4203 is valid for a running motor. For cy-
Constants cling motors without external cooling, the motor loses heat more slowly. For a cycling
motor, the 7SJ62/63/64 takes the reduced heat loss into account by increasing the
time constant τth by a programmable factor (Kt-FACTOR, set at address 4207A).
Motor stop is detected if the current falls below the threshold value BkrClosed I
MIN of the current flow monitoring (see side title “Current Flow Monitoring” in Subsec-
tion 2.1.3) assuming that the motor idle current is greater than this threshold. The pick-
up threshold BkrClosed I MIN affects also the following protection functions: volt-
age protection, breaker failure protection and restart inhibit for motors.
If no distinguishing of the time constants is necessary (e.g. externally-cooled motors,
cables, transformers, etc.) the Kt-FACTOR is set at 1 (Default Setting value).
Emergency The drop-out time T EMERGENCY to be entered at address 4208A must ensure that
Starting after an emergency startup and after dropout of the binary input “>EmergencyStart“
the trip command is blocked until the thermal replica is below the dropout threshold
again.
Ambient or Coolant The indications specified up to now are sufficient for a temperature rise replica. The
Temperature ambient or coolant temperature, however, can also be processed. This has to be com-
municated to the device as digitalized measured value via the interface. During con-
figuration the parameter 0142 49 must be set to With amb. temp.
If the ambient temperature detection is used, the user must be aware that the 49 K-
FACTOR to be set refers to an ambient temperature of ϑu = 40 °C, i.e. it corresponds
to the maximum permissible current at a temperature of 40 °C.
136 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
All calculations are performed with standardized quantities. The ambient temperature
must also be standardized. The temperature with nominal current is used as standard-
ized quantity. If the nominal current deviates from the nominal CT current, the temper-
ature must be adapted according to the following formula. In address 4209 or 4210
49 TEMP. RISE I the temperature adapted to the nominal transformer current is
set. This setting value is used as standardized quantity for the ambient temperature
input.
I NprimCT 2
ϑ N sec = ϑ NMach ⋅ æ -----------------------ö
è I NMach ø
mit ϑN sec – Machine temperature with secondary nominal current = setting at

the 7SJ62/63/64 relay (address 4209 or 4210)
ϑNMach – Machine temperature with nominal machine current
INprim CT – Primary rated current of the current transformers
INMach – Rated current of the machine
If the temperature input is used, the trip times change if the coolant temperature devi-
ates from the internal reference temperature of 40 °C. The following formula can be
used to calculate the trip time:
I ö 2 ϑ u – 40 °C æ I vor ö 2
æ ------------ + --------------------------- – ------------
è k ⋅ I Nø 2 è k ⋅ I Nø
k ⋅ ϑN
t = τ th ⋅ ln ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
I ö 2 ϑ u – 40 °C
æ ------------ + --------------------------- – 1
è k ⋅ I Nø 2
k ⋅ ϑN
mit τth – TIME CONSTANT (Adresse 4203)

k – 49 K-FACTOR (Adresse 4202)
IN – Nominal device current
I – Actually flowing secondary current
Ipre – Previous load current
ϑN – Temperature with nominal current IN (Address 4209 49 TEMP. RISE I)
ϑu – Coolant temperature input
(scaling with address 4209 or 4210)
Example:
Machine: INMach = 483 A
ImaxMach = 1.15 IN at ΘK = 40 °C
ϑNMach = 93° C Temperature at INMach
τth = 600 s (thermal time constant of the machine)
Current Transformer Ratio: 500 A/1 A
483 A (to be set in address 4202)
K-FAKTOR = 1.15 ⋅ --------------- ≈ 1.11
500 A
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 137

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
500 2 (to be set in address 4209

ϑ Nsec = 93° C ⋅ æ ----------ö ≈ 100° C or 4210 49 TEMP. RISE
è 483ø
I)
Motor Starting To ascertain whether or not a motor is starting, the motor currents are compared with
Recognition the setting I MOTOR START at address 1107. If the motor currents exceed the setting
at address 1107, a motor starting condition is assumed. Information on how to set ad-
dress 1107 is given under “Recognition of Running Condition (only for motors)” in
Subsections 2.1.6 and 2.7.3.
2.9.2.3 Settings for Thermal Overload Protection
In the list below, the setting range and default setting value for I ALARM is for a device
with a nominal current rating IN = 1 A. For a nominal current rating IN = 5 A, multiply
the Setting Options values and Default Setting value by 5. Consider the current trans-
former ratios when setting the device with primary values.

4201 FCT 49 OFF OFF 49 Thermal overload protection
ON
Alarm Only
4202 49 K-FACTOR 0.10..4.00 1.10 49 K-Factor
4203 TIME CONSTANT 1.0..999.9 min 100.0 min Time Constant
4204 49 Θ ALARM 50..100 % 90 % 49 Thermal Alarm Stage
4205 I ALARM 0.10..4.00 A 1.00 A Current Overload Alarm Setpoint
4207A Kτ-FACTOR 1.0..10.0 1.0 Kt-FACTOR when motor stops

4208A T EMERGENCY 10..15000 sec 100 sec Emergency time
4209 49 TEMP. RISE I 40..200 °C 100 °C 49 Temperature rise at rated

sec. curr.
4210 49 TEMP. RISE I 104..392 °F 212 °F 49 Temperature rise at rated

sec. curr.
138 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
2.9.2.4 Information List for Thermal Overload Protection

01503 >BLOCK 49 O/L >BLOCK 49 Overload Protection
01507 >EmergencyStart >Emergency start of motors
01580 >RES 49 Image >49 Reset of Thermal Overload Image
01511 49 O / L OFF 49 Overload Protection is OFF
01512 49 O/L BLOCK 49 Overload Protection is BLOCKED
01513 49 O/L ACTIVE 49 Overload Protection is ACTIVE
01515 49 O/L I Alarm 49 Overload Current Alarm (I alarm)
01516 49 O/L Θ Alarm 49 Overload Alarm! Near Thermal Trip
01517 49 Winding O/L 49 Winding Overload
01521 49 Th O/L TRIP 49 Thermal Overload TRIP
01581 49 Image res. 49 Thermal Overload Image reset
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 139

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
2.10 Monitoring Functions
The device is equipped with extensive monitoring capabilities - both for hardware and
software. In addition, the measured values are also constantly monitored for plausibil-
ity, therefore, the current transformer and voltage transformer circuits are largely inte-
grated into the monitoring. It is also possible to implement trip and closing circuit mon-
itoring, using appropriate binary inputs as available.
2.10.1 Description of Measured Values Monitoring
2.10.1.1 Hardware Monitoring
The device is monitored from the measurement inputs to the binary outputs. Monitor-
ing checks the hardware for malfunctions and disallowed conditions.
Auxiliary and The processor voltage of 5 V DC is monitored, and if the voltage decreases below the
Reference Voltages minimum value, the device is removed from operation. When the normal voltage re-
turns, the processor system is restarted.
Removal of or switching off the supply voltage removes the device from operation and
a message is immediately generated by a dead contact. Brief voltage interruptions of
less than 50 ms do not disturb the readiness of the device (for nominal auxiliary volt-
age ≥ 110 V DC).
The processor monitors the offset and reference voltage of the AD (analog-digital)
converter. The protection is suspended if the voltages deviate outside an allowable
range, and lengthy deviations are reported.
Buffer Battery The buffer battery, which ensures the operation of the internal clock and the storage
of counters and messages if the auxiliary voltage fails, is periodically checked for
charge status. If it is less than an allowed minimum voltage, then the “Fail Battery”
message is issued.
The internal battery of 7SJ64 is switched off automatically by the clock module when
the device has been disconnected from the auxiliary voltage for a period of 1 to 2 days
meaning that clock management will be discontinued. The memory containing the
messages and fault data is however preserved.
Memory The working memory (RAM) is tested when the system is started up. If a malfunction
Components occurs then, the starting sequence is interrupted and an LED blinks. During operation,
the memory is checked using its checksum.
For the program memory, the cross sum is formed periodically and compared to the
stored program cross sum.
For the settings memory, the cross sum is formed periodically and compared to the
cross sum that is freshly generated each time the setting process takes place.
If a malfunction occurs, the processor system is restarted.
140 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Monitoring Functions
Probing Probing and the synchronization between the internal buffer components are con-
stantly monitored. If any deviations cannot be removed by renewed synchronization,
then the processor system is restarted.
Measurement Value Up to four input currents are measured by the device. Three of the currents corre-
Collection – Cur- spond to phase currents and the fourth current corresponds to the neutral or ground
rents current measured from a separate current transformer. If all four currents inputs are
connected, their digitized sum must be zero.
Faults in the current circuit are recognized if
IF = |ia+ib+ic+(kN⋅ig) | > S I THRESHOLD ⋅ IN + S I FACTOR ⋅ Imax
The factor kN takes into account a possible difference in the neutral current transform-
er ratio (e.g. toroidal current transformer see addresses 0217, 0218, 0204 and
0205):
Ignd-CT PRIM ⁄ Ignd-CT SEC

k N = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CT PRIMARY ⁄ CT SECONDARY
S I THRESHOLD and S I FACTOR are programmable settings. The component S

I FACTOR ⋅ Imax takes into account the allowable error of the input transformer, which
can be especially large when high fault current levels are present (Figure 2-47). The
dropout ratio is about 97%.
This malfunction is reported as “Failure S I”.
IF
IN
Increase:
Σ I FACTOR
Σ I THRESHOLD
Imax
IN
Figure 2-47 Current Sum Monitoring
2.10.1.2 Software Monitoring
Watchdog For continuous monitoring of the program sequences, a time monitor is provided in the
hardware (hardware watchdog) that runs upon failure of the processor or an internal
program, and causes a complete restart of the processor system.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 141

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
An additional software watchdog ensures that malfunctions during the processing of

programs are discovered. This also initiates a restart of the processor system.
To the extent such a malfunction is not cleared by the restart, an additional restart at-
tempt is begun. After three unsuccessful restarts within a 30 second window of time,
the device automatically removes itself from service and the red “Error” LED lights up.
The readiness relay opens and indicates “device malfunction” with its normal contact.
2.10.1.3 Monitoring of External Current Transformer Circuits
Interruptions or short circuits in the secondary circuits of the current transformers or

voltage transformers, as well as faults in the connections (important for start-up!), are
detected and reported by the device. The measured quantities are periodically
checked in the background for this purpose, as long as no system fault is present.
Current Symmetry During normal system operation (i.e. the absence of a short-circuit fault), symmetry
among the input currents is expected. This symmetry is checked by the device, using
a quantity monitor. The smallest phase current is compared to the largest phase cur-
rent, and asymmetry is recognized if:
|Imin|/|Imax| < BAL. FACTOR I, as long as Imax /IN > BALANCE I LIMIT / IN
where Imax is the largest of the three phase currents and Imin is the smallest. The sym-
metry factor BAL. FACTOR I represents the allowable asymmetry of the phase cur-
rents while the limit value BALANCE I LIMIT is the lower limit of the operating range
of this monitoring (see Figure 2-48). Both settings are adjustable, and the dropout ratio
is about 97 %.
This malfunction is reported as “Fail I balance”.
Imin
IN
Increase:
BAL.FACTOR I
BALANCE I LIMIT
Imax
IN
Figure 2-48 current Symmetry Monitoring
Voltage Symmetry During normal system operation (i.e. the absence of a short-circuit fault), symmetry
among the input voltages is expected. Because the phase-to-phase voltages are in-
sensitive to ground connections, the phase-to-phase voltages are used for the sym-
metry monitoring. If the device is connected to the phase-to-ground voltages, then the
phase-to-phase voltages are calculated accordingly, whereas if the device is connect-
ed to phase-to-phase voltages and the displacement voltage, then the third phase-to-
phase voltage is calculated accordingly. From the phase-to-phase voltages, the small-
142 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
est and largest phase-to-ground voltages are calculated and compared to check for
symmetry. Asymmetry is recognized if:
|Vmin|/|Vmax| < BAL. FACTOR V, as long as |Vmax| > BALANCE V-LIMIT
where Vmax is the largest of the three phase-to-ground voltages and Vmin is the small-
est. The symmetry factor BAL. FACTOR V is the measure for the asymmetry of the
conductor voltages; the limit value BALANCE V-LIMIT is the lower limit of the oper-
ating range of this monitoring (see Figure 2-49). Both settings are adjustable. The
dropout ratio is about 97 %.
This malfunction is reported as “Fail V balance”.
vmin
V
Increase:
BAL.FACTOR V
BALANCE V–LIMIT
Vmax
V
Figure 2-49 Voltage Symmetry Monitoring
Current and Volt- To detect swapped phase connections in the voltage and current input circuits, the
age Rotation phase sequence of the phase-to-phase measured voltages and the phase currents
are checked by the monitoring.
Direction measurement with normal voltages, path selection for fault location, and
negative sequence detection all assume a phase sequence of “abc”. The phase se-
quence of the phase-to-ground voltages is verified by ensuring the following
Va leads Vb leads Vc leads Va
Likewise, the phase sequence of the phase currents is verified by ensuring the follow-
ing
Ia leads Ib leads Ic leads Ia
Verification of the voltage rotation occurs when each measured voltage is at least
| Vc |, |Vb |, | Va| > 40V / √3.
Verification of the current rotation occurs when each measured current is at least
|Ia|, |Ib|, |Ic| > 0.5 IN.
For abnormal phase sequences, the messages “Fail Ph. Seq. V” or “Fail Ph.
Seq. I” are issued, along with the switching of this message “Fail Ph. Seq.”.
For applications in which an opposite phase sequence is expected, the protective re-
lay should be adjusted via a binary input or a programmable setting. If the phase se-
quence is changed in the relay, phases ‘b’ and ‘c’ internal to the relay are reversed,
and the positive and negative sequence currents are thereby exchanged (see also
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 143

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
Section 2.18). The phase- related messages, malfunction values, and measured val-
ues are not affected by this.
2.10.1.4 Description of Fuse-Failure-Monitor
Single-Phase Mea- In the event of a loss of measured voltage on one phase (typically due to a short circuit
surement Voltage or broken conductor in the voltage transformer secondary circuit), the device will false-
Loss or Fuse Fail- ly detect zero voltage. False detection of zero voltage can cause problems with the
ure Monitoring directional overcurrent protection and the undervoltage protection.
If fuses are used instead of a secondary miniature circuit breaker with connected aux-
iliary contacts, then the fuse failure monitoring can detect problems in the voltage
transformer secondary circuit. If phase-to-phase voltages and the displacement volt-
age are supplied to the system, then the fuse failure monitor is masked. Of course,
supervision of the miniature circuit breaker and the fuse failure monitor can be used
at the same time.
If zero sequence voltage occurs, without a ground current being measured at the
same time, the device concludes that an unsymmetrical fault has occurred in the volt-
age transformer secondary circuit. The processing of the displacement voltage pro-
cessing of the sensitive ground fault detection and the undervoltage protection func-
tions are blocked.
Note:
For ungrounded systems or systems which generate small amounts of ground fault
current, fuse failure monitoring must not be used!
2.10.2 Programming Settings for Measured Values Monitoring
2.10.2.1 General
Measured value monitoring can be turned ON or OFF at address 8101 MEASURE. SU-
PERV.
The fuse–failure monitor can be set ON or OFF at address 5301 FUSE FAIL MON.
Note:
For ungrounded systems or systems which generate small amounts of ground fault
current, fuse failure monitoring must not be used!
2.10.2.2 Measured Values Monitoring
The sensitivity of measured value monitor can be modified. Default values are set at
the factory, which are sufficient in most cases. If especially high operating asymmetry
in the currents and/or voltages is to be expected for the application, or if it becomes
144 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
apparent during operation that certain monitoring functions activate sporadically, then
the setting should be less sensitive.
Address 8102 BALANCE V-LIMIT determines the limit voltage (Phase-to-Phase),
above which the voltage symmetry monitor is effective (see also Figure 2-49). Address
8103 BAL. FACTOR V is the associated symmetry factor; that is, the slope of the
symmetry characteristic curve (Figure 2-49).
Address 8104 BALANCE I LIMIT determines the limit current, above which the cur-
rent symmetry monitor is effective (see also Figure 2-48). Address 8105 BAL. FAC-
TOR I is the associated symmetry factor; that is, the slope of the symmetry charac-
teristic curve (Figure 2-48).
Address 8106 S I THRESHOLD determines the limit current, above which the current
sum monitor (see Figure 2-47) is activated (absolute portion, only relative to IN). The
relative portion (relative to the maximum conductor current) for activating the current
sum monitor (Figure 2-47) is set at address 8107 S I FACTOR.
Note:
Current sum monitoring is only in effect if the ground current for the line to be protect-
ed is connected.
Note:
The connections of the ground paths and their adaption factors were set when config-
uring the general station data. These settings must be correct for the measured values
monitoring to function properly.
2.10.2.3 Fuse-Failure-Monitor
Note:
The settings for the fuse failure monitor (address 5302 FUSE FAIL 3Vo) are to be
selected so that reliable activation occurs if a phase voltage fails, but not such that
false activation occurs during ground faults in a grounded network. The value entered
at address 5302 should be based on the settings entered in P.SYSTEM DATA1 re-
garding the voltage transformer connections. Address 5303 FUSE FAIL RESID
must be set below the smallest anticipated ground fault current. Fuse failure monitor-
ing can be turned off completely at address 5301 FUSE FAIL MON..
2.10.2.4 Settings for Measured Values Monitoring
In the list below, the setting ranges and default setting values for current-based set-
tings are for a device with a nominal current rating IN = 1 A. For a nominal current rat-
ing IN = 5 A, multiply the Setting Options values and Default Setting values by 5. Con-
sider the current transformer ratios when setting the device with primary values.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 145

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions

8101 MEASURE. OFF ON Measurement Supervision
SUPERV ON
5301 FUSE FAIL MON. ON OFF Fuse Fail Monitor

OFF
8102 BALANCE V-LIMIT 10..100 V 50 V Voltage Threshold for Balance

Monitoring
8103 BAL. FACTOR V 0.58..0.90 0.75 Balance Factor for Voltage

Monitor
8104 BALANCE I LIMIT 0.10..1.00 A 0.50 A Current Threshold for Balance

Monitoring
8105 BAL. FACTOR I 0.10..0.90 0.50 Balance Factor for Current Moni-
tor
8106 Σ I THRESHOLD 0.05..2.00 A; ∞ 0.10 A Summated Current Monitoring

Threshold
8107 Σ I FACTOR 0.00..0.95 0.10 Summated Current Monitoring
Factor
5302 FUSE FAIL 3Vo 10..100 V 30 V Zero Sequence Voltage
5303 FUSE FAIL RESID 0.10..1.00 A 0.10 A Residual Current
2.10.2.5 Information List for Measured Values Monitoring

00162 Failure Σ I Failure: Current Summation
00163 Fail I balance Failure: Current Balance
00167 Fail V balance Failure: Voltage Balance
00161 Fail I Superv. Failure: General Current Supervision
00171 Fail Ph. Seq. Failure: Phase Sequence
00176 Fail Ph. Seq. V Failure: Phase Sequence Voltage
00175 Fail Ph. Seq. I Failure: Phase Sequence Current
00197 MeasSup OFF Measurement Supervision is switched OFF
06509 >FAIL:FEEDER VT >Failure: Feeder VT
06510 >FAIL: BUS VT >Failure: Busbar VT
06575 VT Fuse Failure Voltage Transformer Fuse Failure
146 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
2.10.3 Description of Trip Circuit Monitor (74TC)
The 7SJ62/63/64 are equipped with an integrated trip circuit monitor. Depending on
the number of available binary inputs, monitoring with one or two binary inputs can be
selected. If the configuration of the binary inputs needed for this does not match the
selected monitoring type, then a message to this effect is sent (“74TC ProgFail”).
When using two binary inputs, malfunctions in the trip circuit can be detected under all
circuit breaker conditions. When only one binary input is used, malfunctions in the cir-
cuit breaker itself cannot be detected.
Monitoring with When using two binary inputs, these are connected according to Figure 2-50, parallel
Two Binary Inputs to the associated trip contact on one side, and parallel to the circuit breaker auxiliary
contacts on the other.
A condition for the use of trip circuit monitoring is that the control voltage for the circuit
breaker is greater than the sum of the minimum voltage drops of both binary inputs
(VSt > 2 ⋅ VBImin). Since at least 19 V are needed for each binary input, the monitor can
only be used with a system control voltage of over 38 V.
VSt
V+ 7SJ62/63/64
F# 06852
VBI1 >74TC trip rel.
7SJ62/63/64
F# 06853
RTC
>74TC brk rel.
Legend:
RTC — Trip Contact
52 — Circuit Breaker
VBI2
52TC — Circuit Breaker Trip Coil
52TC 52a 52b 52a — Circuit Breaker Auxiliary Contact
52 (closed when 52 is closed)
52b — Circuit Breaker Auxiliary Contact
(closed when 52 is open)
VSt — Control Voltage
VBI1 — Input Voltage for 1st Binary Input
VBI2 — Input Voltage for 2nd Binary Input
V–
Note: The above diagram refers to a closed circuit
breaker position
Figure 2-50 Principle of Trip Circuit Monitor with Two Binary Inputs
Monitoring with binary inputs not only detects interruptions in the trip circuit and loss
of control voltage, it also monitors the response of the circuit breaker using the position
of the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts.
Depending on the conditions of the trip contact and the circuit breaker, the binary in-
puts are activated (logical condition “H” in Table 2-10), or not activated (logical condi-
tion “L”).
Even for healthy trip circuits the condition that both binary inputs are not actuated (“L”)
is possible during a short transition period (trip contact is closed, but the circuit breaker
has not yet opened.) A continuous state of this condition is only possible when the trip
circuit has been interrupted, a short-circuit exists in the trip circuit, a loss of battery
voltage occurs, or malfunctions occur with the circuit breaker mechanism.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 147

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
Table 2-10 Condition Table for Binary Inputs, Depending on RTC and CB Position
No. Relay Trip Circuit 52a Contact 52b Contact BI 1 BI2

Contact Breaker
1 Open Closed Closed Open H L
2 Open Open Open Closed H H
3 1) Closed Closed Closed Open L L
4 1) Closed Open Open Closed L H
1) Trip Circuit is faulty

The conditions of the two binary inputs are checked periodically. A check takes place
about every 600 ms. If three consecutive conditional checks detect an abnormality (af-
ter 1.8 s), an annunciation is reported (see Figure 2-51). This is used to avoid the an-
nunciation for brief transition periods. When the fault in the trip circuit has been
cleared, the annunciation is automatically reset.
F# 06852
>74TC trip rel. F# 06865
F# 06853 & > n FAIL: Trip cir.
>74TC brk rel.
n . ..... Number of Condition Checks (= 3)
(Measurement Repetition Occurs every 600 ms)
Figure 2-51 Logic Diagram for Trip Circuit Monitoring with Two Binary Inputs
Monitoring with The binary input is connected according to figure 2-52 in parallel with the associated
One Binary Input trip contact. The circuit breaker auxiliary contact 52-b is connected in series with a
high-ohm resistor R.
The control voltage for the circuit breaker should be about two times the value of the
minimum voltage drop at the binary input (VSt > 2 ⋅ VBImin). Since the minimum voltage
to activate a binary input is 19 V, a DC voltage supply of 38 V or higher is required.
148 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
VSt
V+ 7SJ62/63/64
F# 06852
VBI >74TC trip rel.
7SJ62/63/64
RTC
Legend:
RTC — Trip Contact
52 — Circuit Breaker
52TC — Circuit Breaker Trip Coil
52a — Circuit Breaker Auxiliary Contact
R (closed when 52 is closed)
52b — Circuit Breaker Auxiliary Contact
(closed when 52 is open)
52TC 52a 52b VSt — Control Voltage
52 VBI — Input Voltage for Binary Input
Note: The above diagram refers to a closed circuit

breaker position
V–
Figure 2-52 Principle of Trip Circuit Monitoring with One Binary Input
During normal operation, the binary input is activated (logical condition “H”) when the
trip contact is open and the trip circuit is intact, because the monitoring circuit is closed
by either the 52a circuit breaker auxiliary contact (if the circuit breaker is closed) or
through the replacement resistor R by the 52b circuit breaker auxiliary contact. Only
as long as the trip contact is closed, the binary input is short circuited and thereby de-
activated (logical condition “L”).
If the binary input is continuously de-activated during operation, this leads to the con-
clusion, there is an interruption in the trip circuit or loss of control voltage.
The trip circuit monitor does not operate during system faults. A momentary closed
tripping contact does not lead to a failure message. If, however, tripping contacts from
other devices operate in parallel with the trip circuit, then the failure annunciation must
be delayed (see also Figure 2-53). The conditions of the binary input are, therefore,
checked 500 times before an annunciation is sent. A condition check takes place
about every 600 ms, so trip circuit monitoring is only activated during an actual mal-
function of the trip circuit (after 300 s). After the malfunction in the trip circuit is cleared,
the failure annunciation is reset automatically.
F# 06852
>74TC trip rel. F# 06865
& > n FAIL: Trip cir.
52a Contact
n.. .....Number of Condition Checks (= 500)
(Measurement Repetition Occurs every 600 ms)
Figure 2-53 Logic Diagram for Trip Circuit Monitoring with One Binary Input
Figure 2-54 shows the logic diagram for the message that can be generated by the trip
circuit monitor, depending on the control settings and binary inputs.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 149

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
0182 74 Trip Ct Supv

Disabled
2 Binary Inputs
„1“
1 Binary Input
or
&
F# 06864
F#. 06852 & 74TC ProgFail
Configured
>74TC trip rel.
F# 06853 &
Configured
>74TC brk rel.
F# 06861
74TC OFF
8201 FCT 74TC
F# 06865
OFF S Q & Function FAIL: Trip cir.
„1“
ON R
F# 06863
74TC ACTIVE
F# 06851 F# 06862
>BLOCK 74TC 74TC BLOCKED
Figure 2-54 Message Logic for the Trip Circuit Monitor
2.10.4 Programming Settings for Trip Circuit Monitor
Trip circuit monitoring is only in effect and accessible if address 0182 was set to either
2 Binary Inputs or to 1 Binary Input, and the appropriate number of binary
inputs have been masked for this purpose (refer Subsection 2.1.1). Trip circuit moni-
toring can be turned ON and OFF at address 8201 FCT 74TC. If the masking of the
required binary inputs does not match the selected monitoring type, then a message
to this effect is generated (“74TC ProgFail”). If the trip circuit monitor is not to be
used at all, then address 0182 should be set to Disabled. Further settings are not
needed. The message of a trip circuit interruption is delayed by a fixed amount of time.
For two binary inputs, the delay is about 2 seconds, and for one binary input, the delay
is about 300 s. This ensures that, for the longest possible duration of a trip signal, a
false malfunction message will not be generated.
Monitoring with NOTE: When using only one binary input (BI) for the trip circuit monitor, some mal-
One Binary Input functions, such as interruption of the trip circuit or loss of battery voltage, can indeed
be detected, but malfunctions with closed trip contacts cannot. Therefore, the mea-
surement must take place over a period of time that bridges the longest possible du-
ration of a closed trip contact. This is ensured by the fixed number of measurement
repetitions and the time between the condition checks.
When using only one binary input, a resistor R is inserted into the circuit on the system
side, instead of the missing second binary input. Through appropriate sizing of the re-
sistor and depending on the system relationship, a lower control voltage can often be
sufficient. The resistor R is inserted into the circuit of the 52b circuit breaker auxiliary
contact, to facilitate the detection of a malfunction when the 52a circuit breaker auxil-
iary contact open and the trip contact has dropped out (see Figure 2-52). This resistor
must be sized such that the circuit breaker trip coil is no longer energized when the
150 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
circuit breaker is open (which means 52a is open and 52b is closed). The binary input
should still be picked up when the trip contact is simultaneously opened.
This results in an upper limit for the resistance dimension, Rmax, and a lower limit Rmin,
from which the optimal value of the arithmetic mean should be selected:
R max + R min
R = ---------------------------------
2
In order that the minimum voltage for controlling the binary input is ensured, Rmax is
derived as:
V St – V BI min
R max = æ ---------------------------------ö – R CBTC
è I BI (High) ø
So the circuit breaker trip coil does not remain energized in the above case, Rmin is
derived as:
V St – V CBTC (LOW)
R min = R CBTC ⋅ æ -------------------------------------------------ö
è V CBTC (LOW) ø
IBI (HIGH) Constant Current with BI on

VBI min Minimum Control Voltage for BI (=19 V for delivery setting for nominal voltage of 24/
48/60 V;
=88 V for delivery setting for nominal voltage of 110/125/220/250 V)
VST Control Voltage for Trip Circuit
RCBTC DC Resistance of Circuit Breaker Trip Coil
VCBTC (LOW) Maximum Voltage on the Circuit Breaker Trip Coil that does not lead to Tripping
If the calculation results that Rmax < Rmin, then the calculation must be repeated, with
the next lowest pickup threshold VBI min, and this threshold must be implemented in
the device using plug-in bridges (see Subsection 8.1.3).
For the power consumption of the resistance:

V St 2
P R = I ⋅ R = æ ----------------------------ö ⋅ R
2
è R + R CBTCø
Example:
IBI (HIGH) 1.8 mA (from SIPROTEC® 7SJ62/63/64)
UBI min 19 V for delivery setting for nominal voltage 24/48/60 V (from SIPROTEC®7SJ62/63/64)
88 V or delivery setting for nominal voltage 110/125/220/250 V) (from SIPROTEC® 7SJ62/
63/64)
VST 110 V (from system / release circuit)
RCBTC 500 Ω (from system / release circuit)
VCBTC (LOW) 2 V (from system / release circuit)
R max = æ ----------------------------------ö – 500 Ω = 50.1 kΩ

110 V – 19 V
è 1.8 mA ø
R min = 500 Ω ⋅ æ ------------------------------ö = 27 kΩ

110 V – 2 V
è 2V ø
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 151

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
R max + R min
R = -------------------------------- = 38.6 kΩ
2
The closest standard value of 39 kΩ is selected; the power is:

2
P R = æ ----------------------------------------ö ⋅ 39 kΩ
110 V
è 39 kΩ + 0.5 kΩø
P R ≥ 0.3 W
2.10.4.1 Setting for Trip Circuit Monitor

8201 FCT 74TC ON ON 74TC TRIP Circuit Supervision
OFF
2.10.4.2 Information

06851 >BLOCK 74TC >BLOCK 74TC
06853 >74TC brk rel. >74TC Trip circuit superv.: bkr relay
06852 >74TC trip rel. >74TC Trip circuit superv.: trip relay
06861 74TC OFF 74TC Trip circuit supervision OFF
06862 74TC BLOCKED 74TC Trip circuit supervision is BLOCKED
06863 74TC ACTIVE 74TC Trip circuit supervision is ACTIVE
06864 74TC ProgFail 74TC blocked. Bin. input is not set
06865 FAIL: Trip cir. 74TC Failure Trip Circuit
2.10.5 Malfunction Responses of the Monitoring Functions
Depending on the type of malfunction discovered, an annunciation is sent, a restart of

the processor system is initiated, or the device is taken out of service. after three un-
successful restart attempts. The live status contact operates to indicate the device is
malfunctioning. Also, the red LED “ERROR” lights up on the front cover, if the internal
auxiliary voltage is present, and the green “RUN” LED goes out. If the internal power
supply fails, then all LEDs are dark. Table 2-11 shows a summary of the monitoring
functions and the malfunction responses of the relay.
152 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Table 2-11 Summary of the Device Malfunction Responses
Monitoring Possible Cause Malfunction Re- Message Output

sponse
AC/DC Supply External (aux. Voltage) Device shutdown All LEDs dark Live status contact
Voltage Loss Internal (power supply) de-energized
Internal Supply Internal (power supply) Device shutdown LED “ERROR” Live status contact
Voltages Ribbon cable de-energized2)
disconnected
Battery Internal battery Annunciation “Fail Battery”

discharged (FNo. 00177)
Hardware Internal (processor Restart attempt 1) LED “ERROR” Live status contact
Watchdog failure) de-energized2)
Software Internal Restart attempt 1) LED “ERROR” Live status contact

Watchdog (program sequence) de-energized2)
ROM Internal (Hardware) Restart attempt 1) LED “ERROR” Live status contact
de-energized2)
RAM Internal (Hardware) Detection during LED blinks

boot sequence Live status contact
de-energized2)
Detection during LED “ERROR
operation:
Restart attempt 1)
Settings Internal (Hardware) Restart attempt 1) LED “ERROR” Live status contact
de-energized2)
Analogue data Internal (Hardware) Device shutdown LED “ERROR” Live status contact
acquisition de-energized2)
Current CT Error) Message „Failure S I“ as masked

Summation (FNo. 00162)
Current CT Error Message „Fail I balance“ as masked

Symmetry (FNo. 00163)
Voltage VT Error Message „Fail Ph. Seq. V“ as masked

Symmetry (FNo. 00167)
1
) After three unsuccessful restart attempts, the device will go out of service.
2
) Protection and control function are blocked, HMI might be still accessible.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 153

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
Table 2-11 Summary of the Device Malfunction Responses
Monitoring Possible Cause Malfunction Re- Message Output

sponse
Voltage Phase External (connections or Message „Fail V balance“ as masked

Sequence power system) (FNo. 00176)
Current Phase External (connections or Message „Fail Ph. Seq. I“ as masked

Sequence power system) (FNo. 00175)
Fuse–Failure– External (VTs, fuses, or Message „VT Fuse Failure“ as masked

Monitor control cable) (FNo. 06575)
Trip Circuit External (open trip coil or Message „FAIL: Trip cir.“ as masked
Monitoring blown fuses) (FNo. 06865)
1) After three unsuccessful restart attempts, the device will go out of service.
2
) Protection and control function are blocked, HMI might be still accessible.
2.10.6 Group Alarms
Certain messages of the monitoring functions are already combined to group alarms.
Table 2-12 shows an overview of these group alarms an their composition.
Table 2-12 Group alarms
Group alarm Composed of

FNo Designation FNo Designation
161 Fail I Superv. 0162 Failure S I
0163 Fail I balance
160 Alarm Sum Event 0162 Failure S I
0163 Fail I balance
0167 Fail V balance
0175 Fail Ph. Seq. I
0176 Fail Ph. Seq. V
0171 Fail Ph. Seq.
140 Error Sum Alarm 0178 I/O-BG gestört
0183 .. 0189 Störung BG 1 .. 7
0144 Error 5V
0145 Error 0V
0146 Error -5V
0147 Error PwrSupply
0177 Fail Battery
154 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Sensitive Ground Fault Detection (64, 50Ns, 67Ns)
2.11 Sensitive Ground Fault Detection (64, 50Ns, 67Ns)
General Sensitive ground fault detection may be used in isolated or compensated systems to
detect ground faults. In solidly or low-resistance grounded systems, sensitive ground
fault detection is used to detect high impedance ground faults.
For this protection function, the relay’s fourth current input must be equipped with a
sensitive input transformer (see Ordering Data in Annex A.1). Because of its high sen-
sitivity, ground fault detection is not suited for detection of high magnitude ground
faults (over about 1.6 A at the sensitive ground fault detection relay terminals). The
directional and non-directional overcurrent protection functions are preferred for this
application (Sections 2.2 and ).
2.11.1 Description of Sensitive Ground Fault Detection
2.11.1.1 Voltage Element
The voltage element of sensitive ground fault detection relies on the zero sequence or
displacement voltage V0 or 3V0. Additionally the faulty phase is determined. The dis-
placement voltage V0 can be directly applied to the device, or the summary voltage
3V0 can be calculated by the device based on the three phase-to-ground voltages. In
the latter case, the three voltage inputs must be connected to voltage transformers in
a grounded-wye configuration (see Subsection 2.1.3, address 0213 VT Connec-
tion). If the device is only with phase-to-phase voltages, it is not possible to calculate
a displacement voltage from them. In this case the direction cannot be determined.
If the displacement voltage is directly applied to the device, then V0 is the voltage at
the device terminals. It is not affected by the voltage adjustment factor set at address
0206A Vph / Vdelta.
If the displacement voltage is calculated, then:
3V0 = Va + Vb + Vc
The displacement voltage is used both to detect a ground fault and to determine direc-
tion, in accordance with Subsection 2.11.1.3. When the voltage element pickups, a
preset time delay must elapse before detection of the displacement voltage is report-
ed. This time delay is preset at the factory to 1 second and may be modified at address
3111 T-DELAY Pickup. After the time delay set at address 3111 has elapsed, a sec-
ond time interval may be started, after which the voltage element may initiate a trip sig-
nal. This second time interval is set at address 3112 64-1 DELAY. It is important to
reiterate that the total tripping time consists of the displacement voltage measurement
time (about 60 ms) plus the Pickup Time delay (set at address 3111) plus the tripping
delay (set at address 3112).
Determination of After the voltage element pickups due to detection of a displacement voltage, the
the Grounded grounded phase is identified, if possible. To do this, the individual phase-to-ground
Phase voltages are measured. Of course, this is only possible if three phase-to-ground volt-
ages are obtained from voltage transformers connected in a grounded-wye configura-
tion. If the voltage magnitude for any given phase is below the setting value entered
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 155

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
at address 3106 VPH MIN, that phase is detected as the grounded phase as long as
the voltage magnitudes of the other two phases are simultaneously above the setting
value entered at address 3107 VPH MAX.
Figure 2-55 shows the logic for determining the grounded phase.
3106 VPH MIN 3107 VPH MAX
V< V>
Va
V< F# 01272
& Sens. Gnd Ph A
V>
Vb F# 01273
V< Sens. Gnd Ph B
&
V>
F# 01274
Vc & Sens. Gnd Ph C
V<
V>
From
Figure Ground fault
2-59
Figure 2-55 Detection of the grounded phase
2.11.1.2 Current Elements
The current elements associated with sensitive ground fault detection typically operate
for low magnitudes of zero sequence current. They are typically applied in systems
where ground fault currents are limited by neutral resistors.
There are two current elements used for sensitive ground fault protection. A definite
time element similar to the 50N-2 or 67N-2 elements is used, as well as an element
that may be operated with either a fixed time delay (similar to the 50N-1 and 67N-1
elements) or with a user defined curve (similar to the 51N and 67N-TOC elements).
Each of the elements may be directional or non-directional.
2.11.1.3 Determination of Direction
Curves When determining the sensitive ground fault direction it is not the current value that is
crucial but the part of the current which is perpendicular to a settable directional char-
acteristic (axis of symmetry). As a prerequisite for determining the direction, the dis-
placement voltage V0 must be exceeded as well as a configurable current part influ-
encing the direction (active or reactive component).
Figure 2-56 illustrates the directional characteristic of the sensitive ground fault detec-
tion function using a complex vector diagram in which the displacement voltage V0 is
the reference magnitude. Address 3125 is set to COS PHI, therefore, the current
3I0real is calculated and compared with the value set at address 3123 RELEASE
DIRECT.. The directional limit lines are perpendicular to 3I0real.
156 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
TYPE
M E OF
S SMEASUREMENT
A R T = C=O COS
S P PHI
HI
V0 UE 3I0Real (resistive)
Forward
3I0
I E dir
E G ER. { 3I0
IEE Setting
3I0reactive (capacitive)
Reverse
3I0 dir. = Value Set at Address 3123

P PHI
H I CORRECTION
K O R R E K =T 0.0
O
UR = 0,0°
Figure 2-56 Directional Lines for cos-ϕ Measurement
The directional limit lines may be rotated by a correction angle set at address 3124
PHI CORRECTION up to ±45°. Therefore, it is possible to increase sensitivity in the
resistive-inductive range with a rotation of –45°, or in the resistive-capacitive range
with a rotation of +45° (see Figure 2-57). If the sin-ϕ method is used, the directional
limit lines would be rotated by 90°.
If address 3124 PHI CORRECTION is set other than 0°, the angle of the directional
limit line is determined from the sum of the real and reactive components of zero se-
quence power.
TYPE TYPE
M EOF
S SMEASUREMENT
AR T = c o=s COS PHI
M E SOFS AR
MEASUREMENT
T = co s = COS
P H IPHI P HI
3I0realV0 3I0real V0
I EEw UE I EEw UE
Forward
Forward
IE E
3I0dir
IE E 3I0dir
}
G ER
GER
}
3I0reactive
I EEb (capacitive
(kapazitiv) ) I3I0
EE
3I0
IE E
induktiv 3I0reactive
I EEb (kapazitiv) Inductive
induktiv
Inductive (capacitive )
Reverse Reverse
PHI CORRECTION = +45.0° PHI CORRECTION = -45.0°

P H I K O R R E K T U R = +4 5 , 0 ° PHI K ORR EKT UR= -4 5,0 °
3I0
IEE dir.
GER = Value FREIGABE
= Einstellwert Set at Address
RICHT.3123
Figure 2-57 Directional Lines for cos-ϕ Measurement
Method of The calculation algorithm filters the measured values so that it is highly accurate and
Directional insensitive to higher harmonics (particularly the 3rd and 5th harmonics – which are of-
Measurement ten present in zero sequence currents).
Both the zero sequence or displacement voltage (V0 or 3V0) and the zero sequence
current (3I0) are used to determine direction to a fault or grounded connection. Before
the determination of direction is initiated, the voltage element (and possibly the current
element) must be picked up and a programmable component of 3I0 must exceed a
programmable setting (address 3123 RELEASE DIRECT.). The programmable com-
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 157

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
ponent of 3I0 compared to address 3123 depends on the setting at address 3125
MEAS. METHOD. Address 3125 establishes the directional measurement method that
will be used.
If address 3125 is set to COS j, then the component of 3I0 that is in phase with the
displacement voltage is compared to the setting at address 3123. This current is des-
ignated 3I0real, and if larger than the setting at address 3123, directional determination
is initiated. Once directional determination is initiated, the current 3I0real and the dis-
placement voltage V0 (or 3V0) are used to calculate the real component of the zero
sequence power supplied to the fault. Both in a grounded system and in an unground-
ed system, a ground fault actually supplies zero sequence real power to the rest of the
system. Therefore, if the calculated zero sequence real power supplied to the fault is
negative (P0<0), the fault is considered in the direction of the protected equipment (for-
ward direction). If the calculated zero sequence real power supplied to the fault is pos-
itive (P0>0), then the fault is considered to be in the opposite direction (reverse direc-
tion). This method is typically used to determine the direction of high impedance faults
in a grounded system.
If address 3125 is set to SIN j, then the component of 3I0 that is 90° out of phase
with the displacement voltage is compared to the setting at address 3123. This current
is designated 3I0 reactive, and if larger than the setting at address 3123, directional de-
termination is initiated. Once directional determination is initiated, the current
3I0reactive and the displacement voltage V0 (or 3V0) are used to calculate the reactive
component of the zero sequence power supplied to the fault. Both in a grounded sys-
tem and in an ungrounded system, a ground fault actually supplies zero sequence re-
active power to the rest of the system. Therefore, if the calculated zero sequence re-
active power supplied to the fault is negative (Q0 <0), the fault is considered in the di-
rection of the protected equipment (forward direction). If the calculated zero sequence
reactive power supplied to the fault is positive (Q0 >0), then the fault is considered to
be in the opposite direction (reverse direction). This method it typically used to deter-
mine the direction of ground connections in an ungrounded system.
Implementation In an ungrounded system, the reactive component of the current should be used to
Instructions determine the direction. In a grounded system, the real component of the current
should be used to determine the direction. Therefore, in an ungrounded system, ad-
dress 3125 should be set for SIN j measurement whereas in a grounded system,
address 3125 should be set for COS j measurement.
Logic Figure 2-58 illustrates the condition logic for the sensitive ground fault pickup. Ground
fault pickup may be switched ON or OFF, or into Alarm Only condition at address
3101 Sens. Gnd Fault. When ground fault protection is ON, tripping is possible. In
mode Alarm Only ground faults are recorded in a separate log file for ground faults.
The pickup of the displacement voltage V0 starts the ground fault recording. As the
pickup of the V0 stage drops out, fault recording is terminated.
The entire function may be blocked via a binary input. Switching off or blocking means
the measurement logic (shown in Figure 2-59) is deactivated, therefore, time delays
and messages are reset.
All stages can be blocked individually via binary inputs. In this case pickups as well as
direction and grounded phase will still be reported, however, tripping does not take
place since the time stages are blocked.
158 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
F# 01207 F# 01230
>BLK 50Ns/67Ns Sens. Gnd block
3101 Sens. Gnd Fault
Alarm Only Alarm Only

„1“ ON to Figure
OFF 2-59
or Reset Measurement Logic
F# 01211
50Ns/67Ns OFF
F# 01212
& 50Ns/67Ns ACT
Figure 2-58 Activation of Sensitive Ground Fault Detection
Generation of a tripping message, for both current elements, is dependent on the di-
rection selection for each element. If the element is set to non-directional and pa-
rameter PU CRITERIA = Vgnd OR INs, a pickup message is generated as soon as
the current threshold is exceeded, irrespective of the status of the V0 stage. If, howev-
er, the setting of parameter PU CRITERIA is Vgnd AND INs, the V0 stage must have
picked up also for non-directional mode.
But, if a direction is programmed, the current element must be picked up and the di-
rection determination results must be present to generate a message. Once again, a
condition for valid direction determination is that the voltage element be picked up as
well.
Based on the setting at address 3130 PU CRITERIA, the generation of a fault condi-
tion message can be dependent on either the pickup of both the voltage and current
elements (AND function), or a pickup of at least one of those two elements (OR func-
tion). The former may be advantageous if the pickup setting of the voltage element
was chosen to be very low.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 159

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
3130 PU CRITERIA
Vgnd AND INs

„1“ Vgnd OR INs
Ground fault
To Figure
3111 T-DELAY Pickup 2-55
V0-Element & F# 01215
T 0
V0
V0 >
or 64 Pickup
3115 67Ns-2 DIRECT.

3112 64-1 DELAY
Non-Directional
F# 01217
„1“ Forward/ Reverse or &
T 0
64 TRIP
=
3126 RESET DELAY
F# 01276
T 0 SensGnd Forward
Direction
3122 67Ns-1 DIRECT. Determination F# 01277
SensGnd Reverse
Forward/ Reverse =
or F# 01278
„1“ Non-Directional SensGnd undef.
or F# 01221
50Ns-2 Pickup
50Ns-2
3114 50Ns-2 DELAY
INS 50Ns-2 & & F# 01223
T 0
& 50Ns-2 TRIP
0131 Sens. Gnd Fault 50Ns-1 F# 01224
50Ns-1 Pickup
50Ns-1 &
Definite Time &
3118 50Ns-1 DELAY
User Defined PU 51Ns & F# 01226
T 0
& & 50Ns-1 TRIP
F# 01227
51Ns Pickup
3120 51Ns TIME DIAL

F# 01229
& 51Ns TRIP
Measurement Logic
F# 01201
>BLOCK 64
F# 01202
>BLOCK 50Ns-2
F# 01203
>BLOCK 50Ns-1
F# 01204
>BLOCK 51Ns
From Alarm Only

Figure
2-58 Reset Measuring Device
Figure 2-59 Logic Diagram for Sensitive Ground Fault Detection
2.11.1.4 Location of Ground Connections
Application Directional determination may often be used to locate a grounded connection. In radial
Example systems, locating the ground connection is relatively simple. Since all feeders from a
160 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
common bus (Figure 2-60) deliver a capacitive charging current, practically the same
ground connection current is available at the relay location of a faulted feeder in an
ungrounded system. In a looped system, the relay locations of the faulted line receive
the maximum ground connection current. “Forward” is reported at both ends only for
the faulted line (Figure 2-61), However, the other directional indicators in the system
may also be of help, if not missing due to insufficient ground current.
Figure 2-60 Location of a Ground Fault in a Radial System
Figure 2-61 Location of Ground Connection based on Direction Indicators in a Looped Sys-
tem
2.11.2.1 General Settings
During configuration of protective functions, address 0131 Sens. Gnd Fault

should be set to Definite Time if the inverse characteristic is not required, User
Defined PU if both a definite time and inverse time characteristic are required, and
Disabled if the function is not required at all.
Also, during configuration, address 0213 VT Connection determines how the volt-
age transformers are connected (phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase), and addresses
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 161

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
0206A Vph / Vdelta, 0217 and 0218 (primary and secondary rated transformer
current in the ground path) must be set correctly.
Sensitive ground fault detection may be switched ON, OFF, or to Alarm Only, at ad-
dress 3101 Sens. Gnd Fault. If sensitive ground fault protection is switched ON,
both tripping and message reporting is possible.
The ground fault is detected and reported only when the displacement voltage has ap-
plied for at least the time T-DELAY Pickup (address 3111).
Address 3130 PU CRITERIA specifies whether ground fault detection is enabled only
for pickups of V0 and INs (Vgnd AND INs) or as soon as one of the two have picked
up (Vgnd OR INs).
Current Elements, The two time-overcurrent elements are set at addresses 3113 through 3120. Each of
General these elements may be directional or non-directional. These elements operate from
the zero sequence current. They typically operate, therefore, only in grounded sys-
tems (solid or low resistance), or for motors connected to an ungrounded bus where
the entire system capacitance supplies zero sequence current to the motor ground
connection, but the ground current in the ground connection is insignificant because
of the low motor capacitance.
2.11.2.2 Definite Current Stage (50Ns-2, 50Ns-1)
50Ns–2 Element The 50Ns-2 element pickup and delay settings are entered at addresses 3113 50Ns-
2 PICKUP and 3114 50Ns-2 DELAY respectively. Pickup and time out of the 50Ns-
2 element can result just in the generation of a message, or in both the generation of
a message and tripping. The latter is only possible if address 3101 is set to ON.
50Ns-1 / 51Ns If configured as Definite Time at address 0131, the 50Ns-1 element will be en-
Element abled. The pickup and delay settings for the 50Ns-1 element are at addresses 3117
50Ns-1 PICKUP and 3118 50Ns-1 DELAY respectively.
2.11.2.3 Inverse Current Stage (51Ns)
51Ns Element The inverse tripping characteristic 51Ns is mainly determined by addresses 3119 and
3120 (address 0131 Sens. Gnd Fault = User Defined PU).
User Defined If a user defined curve is configured at address 0131, it should be noted that the de-
Curve vice will not necessarily pickup until the current exceeds 110 % of the pickup value, as
is standard for inverse curves.
Entry of the value pair (current and time) is a multiple of the settings at addresses
3119 51Ns PICKUP and 3120 51Ns TIME DIAL. Therefore, it is recommended that
addresses be initially set to 1.00 for simplicity. Once the curve has been entered, the
settings at addresses 3119 and 3120 can be modified if desired.
As delivered, The default settings for all current values is ∞. They are, therefore, not
enabled — and no pickup or tripping of these protective functions will occur.
Up to 20 pairs of values (current and time) may be entered at address 3131 M.of PU
TD. The device then approximates the curve, using linear interpolation.
162 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
The following must be observed:

− The value pairs should be entered in increasing sequence. If desired, fewer than 20
pairs may be entered. In most cases, about 10 pairs is sufficient to define the curve
accurately. Each unused pair must then be marked as unused by entering “∞” as
the limit value. The user must ensure the value pairs produce a clear and constant
curve.
− The current values entered should be those from Table 2-13, along with the match-
ing times. Other values for MofPU are changed to the nearest adjacent value al-
though this is not indicated.

1.00 1.50 2.00 3.50 5.00 6.50 8.00 15.00
1.06 1.56 2.25 3.75 5.25 6.75 9.00 16.00
1.13 1.63 2.50 4.00 5.50 7.00 10.00 17.00
1.19 1.69 2.75 4.25 5.75 7.25 11.00 18.00
1.25 1.75 3.00 4.50 6.00 7.50 12.00 19.00
1.31 1.81 3.25 4.75 6.25 7.75 13.00 20.00
1.38 1.88 14.00
1.44 1.94
− Current flows less than the smallest current value entered will not lead to an exten-
sion of the tripping time. The pickup curve (see Figure 2-62) continues, from the
smallest current point parallel to the current axis.
− Current flows greater than the highest current value entered will not lead to an ab-
breviation of the tripping time. The pickup curve (see Figure 2-62) continues, from
the largest current point parallel to the current axis.
T/Tp
Pickup Curve
1 1.1 20
I/Ip
Figure 2-62 Use of a User Defined Curve
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 163

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
2.11.2.4 Phase-to-Ground Voltage
Determination of The phase connected to ground may be identified in an ungrounded system, if the de-
the Phase with a vice is supplied by three voltage transformers connected in a grounded-wye configu-
Ground Connection ration. The phase whose voltage lies below the minimum voltage setting at address
3106 VPH MIN is identified as the phase connected to ground as long as the other
two phase voltages simultaneously exceed the maximum voltage setting at address
3107 VPH MAX. The setting at address 3106 must be set less than the minimum al-
lowable phase-to-ground voltage. A typical setting for this address would be 40 V. The
maximum voltage setting at address 3107 must be greater than the minimum allow-
able phase-to-ground voltage, but less than the minimum phase-to-phase voltage. For
VN = 100 V, approximately 75 V is a typical setting. These settings have no signifi-
cance in a grounded system.
Displacement Volt- The pickup due to displacement voltage is set at address 3109 64-1 VGND if V0 is
age V0 or 3V0 measured or address 3110 64-1 VGND if 3V0 is calculated. Pickup of the voltage el-
ement is a condition for initiation of directional determination. Depending on the setting
at 0213 VT Connection, only the applicable limit value at address 3109 or 3110 is
accessible. That is, if two phase-to-phase voltages and the displacement voltage V0
are supplied to the device, the measured displacement voltage is used directly for
ground fault recognition. The limit value for V0 is programmed at address 3109, where
a more sensitive setting can be made. If three phase-to-ground voltages are connect-
ed to the device, the displacement voltage 3V0 is calculated from the three phase-to-
ground voltages, and address 3110 is where the voltage element pickup is set. The
ground connection is first detected and reported when the displacement voltage has
existed for the entire time delay set at address 3111 T-DELAY Pickup.
With regard to an ungrounded system, nearly the entire displacement voltage appears
at the device terminals, therefore the pickup setting is not critical, and typically lies be-
tween 30 V and 60 V (address 3109) or 50 V and 100 V (address 3110). Large fault
resistances may require higher sensitivity (i.e. a lower pickup setting).
With regard to a grounded system, a more sensitive (lower) pickup value may be set,
but it must be above the maximum anticipated displacement voltage during normal
(unbalanced) system operation.
Trip Time Delay Pickup of just the voltage element may initiate time delayed tripping depending on the
setting at address 3130 PU CRITERIA (address 3101 Sens. Gnd Fault = ON) and
moreover address 3130 PU CRITERIA is configured Vgnd OR INs. The tripping
delay is then set at address 3112 64-1 DELAY. It is important to note that the total
tripping time consists of the displacement voltage measurement time (about 50 ms)
plus the pickup time delay (address 3111) plus the tripping time delay (address 3112).
2.11.2.5 Direction
Directional Addresses 3115 to 3126 are for direction determination.

Characteristic
The direction the definite high-set stage 67Ns-2 may be set at address 3115 67Ns-2
DIRECT. as Forward, Reverse or Non-Directional.
164 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
The direction of the definite high-set stage 67Ns-1 or of the inverse characteristic may
be set at address 3122 67Ns-1 DIRECT. as Forward, Reverse or Non-Direc-
tional.
The current setting at address 3123 RELEASE DIRECT. supervises the initiation of
directional determination, and is based on the current components which are perpen-
dicular to the directional limit lines. The position of the directional limit lines themselves
are based on the settings entered at address 3124 PHI CORRECTION and 3125
MEAS. METHOD.
When address 3124 PHI CORRECTION is set to 0.0°, the following apply to address
3125:
− Address 3125 = COS j: the real component of the zero sequence current with re-
spect to the displacement voltage (the component of 3I0 in phase with V0 or 3V0) is
evaluated by the setting at address 3123 (see Figure 2-56);
− Address 3125 = SIN j: the reactive (capacitive) component of the zero sequence
current with respect to the displacement voltage (the component of 3I0 that leads
V0 or 3V0 by 90°) is evaluated by the setting at address 3123 (see Figure 2-63).
TYPE OF MEASUREMENT = SIN PHI

3I0real V0
Forward
3I0
3I0 Inductive
3I0reactive
dir
(capacitive)
Reverse
3I0dir=
Set at Addr.
3123
PHI CORRECTION = 0,0°

Figure 2-63 Directional Line for sin ϕ Measurement
− The directional line, in this respect, may be rotated within the range ± 45° — as
shown in Figure 2-57.
Ungrounded In an ungrounded system, no zero sequence fault current exists, therefore, the zero
System sequence charging current must be used for directional determination. As is the case
with the zero sequence fault current, the zero sequence charging current will also lead
the zero sequence voltage for a fault in the forward direction. A setting equal to about
half of this current should be selected at address 3123. The measurement time se-
lected at address 3125 should be SIN j.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 165

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
Grounded System In a grounded system, address 3123 should be set below the minimum anticipated
ground fault current. It is important to note that only the current components that are
perpendicular to the directional limit lines defined at addresses 3124 and 3125 will be
evaluated. COS j is the type of measurement used, and the correction angle is set to
–45°, since the ground fault current is typically resistive-inductive (right portion of Fig-
ure 2-57).
Electrical Motors One may set the value COS j for the measurement type and use a correction angle
of +45° for electrical motors supplied from a common bus in an ungrounded system,
since the ground connection current is often composed of an overlap of the capacitive
ground current from the system and the resistive current of the load resistance (Figure
2-57, left section).
General The following is valid for determination of direction during ground faults: The minimum
current for directional determination entered at address 3123 RELEASE DIRECT.
must be set as high as possible so as not to be a false limit of the device during the
flow of asymmetrical currents in the system.
If direction determination is used in conjunction with one of the current elements dis-
cussed above (50Ns-1 PICKUP or 51Ns PICKUP), a value for address 3123 is only
significant if it is less than or equal to the current element pickup value.
A corresponding message (reverse, forward, or undefined) is issued upon direction
determination. To avoid chatter for this message resulting from sharply-varying ground
connection currents, a dropout delay RESET DELAY, entered at address 3126, is ini-
tiated when directional determination drops out, and the message is held for this peri-
od of time.
2.11.2.6 Current Transformer
Angular Error Addresses 3102 through 3105 only apply to compensated systems which utilize Pe-
Compensation tersen coils. Since the utilization of compensated systems is primarily limited to Euro-
pean practices, a detailed explanation of these settings is beyond the scope of this
particular instruction manual. In the rare event that this protective relay is utilized in a
compensated system, the reader should contact Siemens Power T&D for more infor-
mation regarding application of the 7SJ62/63/64 relay in a compensated system.
2.11.2.7 Settings for Sensitive Ground Fault Detection
The current-based setting ranges and Default Setting values are independent of the
nominal current rating of the device. The sensitive ground fault detection measures
the current at a special, sensitive input. In general, current-based settings can be en-
tered in primary terms with consideration given to the ratio of the applicable current
transformer. However, problems related to the resolution of the pickup currents can
occur when very small settings and small primary currents are involved. The user is
therefore encouraged to enter settings for the sensitive ground fault detection in sec-
ondary terms.
166 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1

3101 Sens. Gnd Fault OFF OFF Sensitive Ground Fault
ON
Alarm Only
3111 T-DELAY Pickup 0.04..320.00 sec; ∞ 1.00 sec Time-DELAY Pickup
3130 PU CRITERIA Vgnd OR INs Vgnd OR INs Sensitive Ground Fault PICKUP
Vgnd AND INs criteria
3113 50Ns-2 PICKUP 0.001..1.500 A 0.300 A 50Ns-2 Pickup, sensitive
0.05..35.00 A 10.00 A 50Ns-2 Pickup, IEN = 1 A
0.25..175.00 A 50.00 A 50Ns-2 Pickup, IEN = 5 A
3114 50Ns-2 DELAY 0.00..320.00 sec; ∞ 1.00 sec 50Ns-2 Time Delay
3117 50Ns-1 PICKUP 0.001..1.500 A 0.100 A 50Ns-1 Pickup, sensitive
0.05..35.00 A 2.00 A 50Ns-1 Pickup, IEN = 1 A
0.25..175.00 A 10.00 50Ns-1 Pickup, IEN = 5 A
3118 50Ns-1 DELAY 0.00..320.00 sec; ∞ 2.00 sec 50Ns-1 Time delay
3119 51Ns PICKUP 0.001..1.400 A 0.100 A 51Ns Pickup, sensitive
0.05..4.00 A 1.00 A 51Ns Pickup, IEN = 1 A
0.25..20.00 A 5.00 A 51Ns Pickup, IEN = 5 A

3120 51Ns TIME DIAL 0.10..4.00 sec; ∞ 1.00 sec 51Ns Time Dial
3131 M.of PU TD 1.00..20.00 Multiple of Multiples of PU Time-Dial

Pikkup; ∞
0.01..999.00 Time Dial
3106 VPH MIN 10..100 V 40 V L-Gnd Voltage of Faulted Phase

Vph Min
3107 VPH MAX 10..100 V 75 V L-Gnd Voltage of Unfaulted

Phase Vph Max
3109 64-1 VGND 1.8..130.0 V 40.0 V 64-1 Ground Displacement Volt-

age
3110 64-1 VGND 10.0..225.0 V 70.0 V 64-1 Ground Displacement Volt-

age
3115 67Ns-2 DIRECT. Forward Forward 67Ns-2 Direction

Reverse
Non-Directional
3122 67Ns-1 DIRECT. Forward Forward 67Ns-1 Direction

Reverse
Non-Directional
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 167

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions

3123 RELEASE DIRECT. 0.001..1.200 A 0.010 A Release directional element ,
sensitive
0.05..30.00 A 0.50 A Release directional element,

IEN = 1 A
0.25..150.00 A 2.50 A Release directional element,

IEN = 5 A
3124 PHI CORRECTION -45.0..45.0 ° 0.0 ° Correction Angle for Dir. Determi-
nation
3125 MEAS. METHOD COS Phi COS Phi Measurement method for Direc-
SIN phi tion
3126 RESET DELAY 0..60 sec 1 sec Reset Delay
3102 CT Err. I1 0.001..1.600 A 0.050 A Current I1 for CT Angle Error,

sensitive
0.05..35.00 A 1.00 A Current I1 for CT Angle Error,

IEN = 1 A

IEN = 5 A
3103 CT Err. F1 0.0..5.0 ° 0.0 ° CT Angle Error at I1
3104 CT Err. I2 0.001..1.600 A 1.000 A Current I2 for CT Angle Error,

sensitive

IEN = 1 A

IEN = 5 A
3105 CT Err. F2 0.0..5.0 ° 0.0 ° CT Angle Error at I2
2.11.2.8 Information List for Sensitive Ground Fault Detection

01202 >BLOCK 50Ns-2 >BLOCK 50Ns-2
01203 >BLOCK 50Ns-1 >BLOCK 50Ns-1
01204 >BLOCK 51Ns >BLOCK 51Ns
01207 >BLK 50Ns/67Ns >BLOCK 50Ns/67Ns
01211 50Ns/67Ns OFF 50Ns/67Ns is OFF
01212 50Ns/67Ns ACT 50Ns/67Ns is ACTIVE
01215 64 Pickup 64 displacement voltage pick up
01217 64 TRIP 64 displacement voltage element TRIP
168 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1

01221 50Ns-2 Pickup 50Ns-2 Pickup
01223 50Ns-2 TRIP 50Ns-2 TRIP
01226 50Ns-1 TRIP 50Ns-1 TRIP
01227 51Ns Pickup 51Ns picked up
01229 51Ns TRIP 51Ns TRIP
01230 Sens. Gnd block Sensitive ground fault detection BLOCKED
01272 Sens. Gnd Ph A Sensitive Ground fault picked up in Ph A
01273 Sens. Gnd Ph B Sensitive Ground fault picked up in Ph B
01274 Sens. Gnd Ph C Sensitive Ground fault picked up in Ph C
01276 SensGnd Forward Sensitive Gnd fault in forward direction
01277 SensGnd Reverse Sensitive Gnd fault in reverse direction
01278 SensGnd undef. Sensitive Gnd fault direction undefined
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 169

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
2.12 Intermittent Ground Fault Protection
General Intermittent ground faults can occur in cables due to poor insulation or water ingress
in cable joints. Often such faults disappear automatically to strike again after some
time. They can last between a few milliseconds and several seconds. This is why such
faults are not detected at all or not selectively by the ordinary time overcurrent protec-
tion. If pulse durations are extremely short, not all protection devices in a short-circuit
path may pick up; selective tripping is thus not ensured.
Due to the time delay of the overcurrent protection function such faults are too short
to initiate shutdown of the faulted cable. Only when they have become permanent can
such ground faults be removed selectively by the short-circuit protection.
But such intermittent ground faults already bear the risk of causing thermal damage to
equipment. This is why the 7SJ62/63/64 device features a protective function that is
able to detect such intermittent ground faults and accumulates their duration. If within
a certain time their sum reaches a configurable value, the thermal load capacity has
been achieved. If the ground faults are distributed over a long period of time or if the
ground fault goes off and does not re-ignite after some time, the eqiupment under load
is expected to cool down. Tripping is not necessary in this case.
2.12.1 Functional Description
The intermittent ground fault can either be detected via the ground current input I4 (IN
or INs) or it is calculated from the sum of the three phase currents (3I0). Unlike the
overcurrent protection which uses the fundamental wave, the intermittent ground fault
protection creates the r.m.s. value of this current and compares it to a configurable
threshold Iie>. This method accounts for high harmonic contents (up to 400 Hz) and
for the direct component since both factors contribute to the thermal load. Exceeding
the threshold value Iie> initiates a pickup message (“IIE Fault det“, see Figure
2-64). The pickups are also counted; as soon as the counter content has reached the
value of parameter Nos.det., the message “Intermitt.EF“ is issued. A stabilized
pickup is obtained by prolonging the pickup message “IIE Fault det“ by a settable
time T-det.ext. This stabilization is especially important for coordination with exist-
ing static or electromechanical relays.
The duration of the stabilized pickups “IIE stab.Flt“ is summed up in an integrator
T-sum det. If the accumulated pickup time reaches a configurable threshold value,
a corresponding message is generated (“IEF Tsum exp.“) and tripping takes place,
however, only while a ground fault is present (message “IEF Trip“). The trip com-
mand is maintaned during the entire minimum tripping time specified for the device,
even if the ground fault is of short duration. After completion of the tripping command
all memories are reset and the protection resumes normal condition.
The (much longer) resetting time T-reset (message “IEF Tres run.“) is launched
simultaneously with T-sum det. when a ground fault occurs. Unlike T-sum det.
each new ground fault resets this time to its initial value and it expires anew. If T-re-
set expires and no new ground fault is recorded during that time, all memories are
reset and the protection resumes normal position. T-reset thus determines the time
during which the next ground fault must occur to be processed yet as intermittent
ground fault in connection with the previous fault. A ground fault that occurs later will
be considered a new fault event.
170 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Intermittent Ground Fault Protection
The message “IIE Fault det“ will be entered in the fault log and reported to the
system interface only until the message “Intermitt.EF“ is issued. This prevents a
burst of messages. If the message is allocated to an LED or a relay, this limitation does
not apply. This is accomplished by doubling the message (message numbers 06924,
06926).
Interaction with Automatic reclosure is not an effective measure against intermittent ground faults as
Automatic the function only trips after repeated detection of a fault or after expiration of the sum-
Reclosure mation monitoring time T-sum det. and besides its basic design is to prevent ther-
mal overload. For these reasons the intermittent ground fault protection is not imple-
mented as starting feature of the automatic reclosing function.
Interaction with A pickup that is present when the time delay TRIP-Timer has expired is interpreted
Breaker Failure by the breaker failure protection as a criterion for a tripping failure. Since permanent
Protection pickup is not ensured after a tripping command of the intermittent ground fault protec-
tion, cooperation with the breaker failure protection is not reasonable. Therefore, this
function is not activated by the intermittent ground fault protection.
Logic Diagram Figure 2-64 shows the logic diagram of the intermittent ground fault protection.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 171

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
FNo. 06932
IEF TRIP
& Nos.IIE=
FNo. 06931
Iie/In=
FNo. 06927
3306 Nos.det. Intermitt.EF
Counter
Reset Counter a FNo. 06926
reset a≤b
b
& IIE Fault det
(for log)
count
3302 Iie> 3303 T-det.ext.
FNo. 06925
or IIE stab.Flt
FNo. 06924
IIE Fault det
(for LED/Relays)
3305 T-reset
3304 T-sum det. FNo. 06928
IEF Tsum exp.
Integrator
res
Gen.Trip
or res & S FNo. 06930
or IEF Trip
Reset Counter & R
IEF Trip
0210A TMin TRIP CMD
Gen. Trip
IEF Trip
FNo. 06929
IEF Tres run.
Measurement / Logic
FNo. 06903 FNo. 06922
>IEF block IEF blocked
FNo. 06923
or or IEF enabled
3301 INTERM.EF
FNo. 06921
OFF IEF OFF
„1“ ON
Figure 2-64 Logic diagram of the protection for intermittent ground fault – Principle
Fault Logging A fault event and thus fault logging is initated when the Interm. E/F detection stage Iie>
first picks up. The message “IIE Fault det“ is issued and entered in the fault log
(and reported to the system interface) so often until the number of pickups “IIE
Fault det“ has reached the value set for parameter “Nos.det.“. When this hap-
pens, the message “Intermitt.EF“ is issued and “IIE Fault det“ is blocked for
the fault log and the system interface. This method accounts for the fact that the In-
term. E/F detection stage Iie> may also pick up for a normal short-circuit. In this case
the pickup does not launch the alarm “Intermitt.EF“.
Intermittent ground faults may cause other time overcurrent stages to pick up (e.g. 50-
1, 50N-1, 50Ns-1) and produce a burst of messages. To avoid overflow of the fault log
such messages are not entered anymore in the fault log after detection of an intermit-
172 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
tent ground fault (message ”Intermitt.EF”) unless they cause a tripping command.
If an intermittent ground fault has been detected, the following pickup messages of the
time overcurrent protection will still be reported without restraint (see table 2-14):
Table 2-14 Unrestricted messages
FNo. Function Description

07553 51 InRushPU 51 InRush picked up
07554 51N InRushPU 51N InRush picked up
07561 67-TOC InRushPU 67-TOC InRush picked up
07562 67N-TOCInRushPU 67N-TOC InRush picked up
07565 Ia InRush PU Phase A InRush picked up
07566 Ib InRush PU Phase B InRush picked up
07567 Ic InRush PU Phase C InRush picked up
07564 Gnd InRush PU Ground InRush picked up
Table 2-15 shows all messages subject to a restraint mechanism avoiding a message
burst during an intermittent ground fault:
Table 2-15 Buffered messages

01761 50(N)/51(N) PU 50(N)/51(N) O/C PICKUP
01762 50/51 Ph A PU 50/51 Phase A picked up
01763 50/51 Ph B PU 50/51 Phase B picked up
01764 50/51 Ph C PU 50/51 Phase C picked up
01820 51 picked up 51 picked up
01765 50N/51NPickedup 50N/51N picked up
01837 51N picked up 51N picked up
02691 67/67N pickedup 67/67N picked up
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 173

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
Table 2-15 Buffered messages

02692 67 A picked up 67/67-TOC Phase A picked up
02693 67 B picked up 67/67-TOC Phase B picked up
02694 67 C picked up 67/67-TOC Phase C picked up
02684 67N-TOCPickedup 67N-TOC picked up
02695 67N picked up 67N/67N-TOC picked up
01215 64 Pickup 64 displacement voltage pick up
01227 51Ns Pickup 51Ns picked up
06823 START-SUP pu Startup supervision Pickup
Before they are entered in the fault log (event buffer) and transmitted to the system
interface or CFC, the messages of table 2-15 are buffered (starting with the first pickup
message received after “Intermitt.EF” was signalled). The buffering does not ap-
ply for signalling to relays and LEDs as it is required by time-graded protection sys-
tems for reverse interlocking. The intermediate buffer can store a maxium of two sta-
tus changes (the most recent ones) for each message.
Buffered messages are signalled to the fault log, CFC and to the system interface with
the original time flag only when a TRIP command is initiated by a protective function
other than the intermittent ground fault protection. This ascertains that a pickup, al-
though delayed, is always signalled in association with each TRIP command.
All pickup messages which usually do not occur during an intermittent ground fault are
not affected by this mechanism. Among others this includes the pickup and TRIP com-
mands of the following protective functions:
• Breaker failure protection,
• Overload protection,
• Frequency protection and
• Voltage protection.
The pickup signals of these functions will still be logged immediately. A TRIP com-
mand of one of these protective functions will cause the buffered messages to be
cleared since no connection exists between tripping function and buffered message.
A fault event is cleared when the time T-reset has expired or the TRIP command
“IEF Trip“ has been terminated.
174 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Terminating a fault event for the intermittent ground fault protection thus is a special
case since it is the time T-reset that keeps the fault event opened and not the pick-
up.
2.12.2 Functional Settings
General Protection against intermittent ground faults can only take effect and is only accessible
if the current to be evaluated (with Ignd, with 3I0 or with Ignd,sens.) was
configured in address 0133 INTERM.EF. If the function is not needed, it is set to Dis-
abled.
In address 3301 INTERM.EF you can switch the function to ON or OFF.
The pickup threshold (r.m.s. value) is set in address 3302 Iie>. A rather sensitive
setting is possible to respond also to short ground faults since the pickup time shortens
as the excess current increases. The setting range depends on the selection of the
current to be evaluated at address 0133 INTERM.EF.
The pickup time can be prolonged at address 3303 T-det.ext.. This pickup stabi-
lization is especially important for the coordination with existing analog or electrome-
chanical overcurrent relays. The time T-det.ext. can also be disabled (T-
det.ext. = 0).
The stabilized pickup starts the counter Tsum. This counter is stopped but not reset as
the picked up function drops out. Basing on the last counter content the counter re-
sumes metering when the stabilized function picks up next. This sum of individual
pickup times, which are to initiate tripping, is set at address 3304 T-sum det. It
serves as selectivity criterion for coordinating the relays of one busbar run and is com-
parable to the time grading of the time overcurrent protection. The relay in the radial
network which is closest to the intermittent fault and picks up, is set to the shortest
summation time T-sum det. (see Figure 2-65).
7SJ62/63/64 7SJ62/63/64 7SJ62/63/64

7SJ511 7SJ511 7SJ511
1.5s 1.0s 0.5s
Pick up Pick up No Pick up
IN
Figure 2-65 Example of the setting of the time stage T-sum det.
The reset time T-reset, after which the summation is reset in healthy operation and
the protection resumes normal status, is configured at address 3305.
Address 3306 Nos.det. specifies the number of pickups after which a ground fault
is considered intermittent.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 175

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
2.12.2.1 Settings of the Intermittent Ground Fault Protection

3301 INTERM.EF OFF OFF Intermittent earth fault protection
ON
3302 Iie> 0.05..35.00 A 1.00 A Pick-up value of interm. E/F stage,

IN measured
0.05..35.00 A 1.00 A Pick-up value of interm. E/F stage,

3I0 calculated
0.050..1.500 A 1.000 A Pick-up value of interm. E/F stage,

INs measured
3303 T-det.ext. 0.00..10.00 sec 0.10 sec Detection extension time

3304 T-sum det. 0.00..100.00 sec 20.00 sec Sum of detection times
3305 T-reset 1..600 sec 300 sec Reset time
3306 Nos.det. 2..10 3 No. of det. for start of int. E/F prot
2.12.2.2 Information List of the Intermittent Ground Fault Protection

06903 >IEF block >block interm. E/F prot.
06923 IEF enabled Interm. E/F prot. is active
06921 IEF OFF Interm. E/F prot. is switched off
06922 IEF blocked Interm. E/F prot. is blocked
06924 IIE Fault det Interm. E/F detection stage Iie>
06926 IIE Fault det Interm. E/F detection stage Iie>
06925 IIE stab.Flt Interm. E/F stab detection
06927 Intermitt.EF Interm. E/F detected
06930 IEF Trip Interm. E/F: trip
06928 IEF Tsum exp. Counter of det. times elapsed
06929 IEF Tres run. Interm. E/F: reset time running
06932 Nos.IIE= No. of detections by stage Iie>=
06931 Iie/In= Max RMS current value of fault =
176 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Automatic Reclosing System (79M)
2.13 Automatic Reclosing System (79M)
2.13.1 Description of Automatic Reclosing System
2.13.1.1 General
From experience, the majority of faults associated with overhead distribution feeders
are temporary in nature. Therefore, to maximize service availability, it is desirable to
employ a system that will close the circuit breaker shortly after it is tripped. This is ac-
complished in the 7SJ62/63/64 relay via the automatic reclosing system.
When using the automatic reclosing system, if the fault still exists after the circuit
breaker has been reclosed, then the protective elements will re-trip the circuit breaker.
Depending on the number of reclosing attempts programmed for the automatic reclos-
ing system (up to nine are possible), the circuit breaker will either be reclosed again,
or will remain open.
The automatic reclosure system can also operate in interaction with the integrated
synchronizing function or with an external synchrocheck.
Figure 2-66 shows an example of a timing diagram for a successful second reclosure.
Pick up T-Action T-Action
Trip
Command
open
Breaker closed
Status 52-a T AUS-SVS
Dead Time 1 Dead Time 2

Dead Time
Reclose
Command Tmax Close CMD.
Reset Time Reset Time
79 i. progress
79 1st cycle
79 2nd cycle
Reclosing
Successful
Starting cycle Cycle 1 Cycle 2
1st cycle finished

Figure 2-66 Timing Diagram for a Second Successful Reclosure
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 177

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
Figure 2-67 shows an example of a timing diagram for two unsuccessful reclosing
shots, with no additional reclosing of the circuit breaker.
Trip
Command
open
closed
Breaker Status
52-a
Dead Time 1 Dead Time 2

Dead Time
Cancel with a new Cancel with a new
Trip Command Trip Command
Reclose
Command
Reset Time
Reclosing Successful
79 DynBlock
79 Lockout
Starting cycle Cycle 1 Cycle 2

Figure 2-67 Timing Diagram showing Two Unsuccessful Reclosing Shots (no additional reclosing of the circuit breaker)
The automatic reclosing function can also be initiated by an external protection relay.
For this application, an output contact from the tripping relay must be wired to a binary
input of the 7SJ62/63/64 relay. It is also possible to allow the 7SJ62/63/64 relay to
work in conjunction with an external reclosing device.
The trip commands initated by the automatic reclosure function are counted. A statis-
tical counter is available for this purpose for the first and all subsequent reclosing com-
mands.
The automatic reclosing function is typically utilized only in situations where the occur-
rence of temporary faults is anticipated. Therefore, the automatic reclosing system is
not applied when the 7SJ62/63/64 relay is used to protect generators, motors, trans-
formers, and cables.
2.13.1.2 Program Execution
Initiation Initiation of the automatic reclosing function can be caused by internal protective func-
tions or externally using a binary input. The automatic reclosing system can be pro-
178 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
grammed such that any of the elements of table 2-16 can initiate (Starts 79), not
initiate (No influence), or block reclosing (Stops 79).:
Table 2-16 79 start

Non-directional start Directional start Start other
50-1 67-1 sens Ground Flt(50Ns, 51Ns)
50N-1 67N-1 46
50-2 67-2 BINARY INPUT
50N-2 67N-2
51 67 TOC
51N 67N TOC
If an element initiates reclosing, the appropriate reclosing program is executed.

The binary input messages 02715 “>Start 79 Gnd“ and 02716 “>Start 79 Ph“
for starting an automatic reclosure program can also be activated via CFC (fast PLC
task processing). Automatic reclosure can thus be initiated via any messages (e.g.
protective pickup) if address 7164 BINARY INPUT is set to Starts 79.
Operating Time The operatng time serves for monitoring the time between a general device pickup
and the trip command of a protective function configured as starter. The operating time
is launched when pickup of any function is detected, irrespective of whether this func-
tion interacts with the automatic reclosure program or not. If a protective function con-
figured as starter initiates a trip command during the operating time, the automatic re-
closure program is started. Trip commands of a protective function configured as start-
er occurring in the time between expiration of the operating time and dropout of the
general device pickup cause the dynamic blocking of the automatic reclosing program.
Trip commands of protective functions which are not configured as starter do not affect
the operative time.
If the automatic reclosure program interacts with an external protection device, the
general device pickup for start of the operating time is communicated to the automatic
reclosing program via binary input 02711 “>79 Start“.
Reclosing Depending on the type of fault, two different reclosing programs can be used. The fol-
Programs lowing applies:
• The single phase fault (ground fault) reclosing program applies if a phase-to-ground
fault is detected. Therefore, the ground fault reclosing program is executed only
when the elements associated with a specific phase and/or ground pick up. This
program can also be started via a binary input.
• The multiple phase fault (phase fault program) reclosing program applies to all other
cases. That is, when elements associated with two or more phases pickup, with or
without the pickup of ground elements, the phase reclosing program is executed. In
addition, when automatic reclosing is initiated by other functions, such as negative
sequence elements, the program is started. Like the ground fault reclosing pro-
gram, this program can be started via a binary input as well.
The reclosure program evaluates only elements that pick up as elements dropping out
may corrupt the result if they drop out at differen times when opening the circuit break-
er. Therefore, the ground fault reclosure program is executed only when the elements
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 179

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
associated with one particular phase pick up until the circuit breaker is opened; all oth-
ers will initate the phase fault program.
For each of the programs, up to 9 reclosing attempts can be separately programmed.
The open breaker times preceding the first four reclosing attempts can be indepen-
dently set, however, the open breaker times preceding the fifth through the ninth re-
closing attempts will correspond to the open breaker time that precedes the fourth re-
closing attempt.
Reclosing Before For the automatic reclosure sequence to be successful, faults on any part of the line
Selectivity must be cleared from the feeding line end(s) within the same – shortest possible –
time. Usually, therefore, an instantaneous protection element is set to operate before
an automatic reclosure. In addition, when two or more reclosing attempts are antici-
pated, high speed tripping should be allowed. To begin with, high speed tripping min-
imizes the impact fault current might have on the system. Second, high speed tripping
prevents the operation of load side fuses for temporary faults. Prior to the final reclos-
ing attempt, however, high speed tripping should be defeated to prevent a feeder lock-
out from occurring due to faults beyond load side protective devices.
Single-Shot When a trip signal is programmed to initiate the automatic reclosing system, the ap-
Reclosing propriate automatic reclosing program will be executed. Once the circuit breaker has
opened, the programmable dead time interval is started (see also side title “Reclosing
Programs“). Once the dead time interval has elapsed, a closing signal is issued to re-
close the circuit breaker. A blocking time interval TIME RESTRAINT is started at the
same time. If a new fault occurs before the blocking time elapses, the automatic re-
closing system is dynamically blocked causing the final tripping of the circuit breaker.
The dead time can be set individually for each of the two reclosing programs.
Criteria for opening the circuit breaker may either be the auxiliary contacts of the circuit
breaker or the dropout of the general device pickup if auxiliary contacts are not con-
figured.
If the fault is cleared (successful reclosing attempt), the blocking time expires and au-
tomatic reclosing is reset in anticipation of a future fault.
If the fault is not cleared (unsuccessful reclosing attempt), then a final tripping signal
is initiated by one or more protective elements.
Multi-Shot The 7SJ62/63/64 relay can be programmed to initiate up to nine (9) reclosing at-
Reclosing tempts. The number of reclosing attempts can be set differently for the phase fault re-
closing program and the ground fault reclosing program. The first dead time interval
precedes, in principle, the first reclosing attempt. If the first reclosing attempt is unsuc-
cessful, the blocking time interval is reset and the second dead time interval begins.
At the end of the second open breaker interval, a second reclosing attempt is initiated.
This cycle can be repeated until the allowable number of reclosing attempts pro-
grammed have been made.
The dead time intervals preceding the first four (4) reclosing attempts can be set dif-
ferently for each of the two reclosing programs. The dead time intervals preceding the
fifth (5) through the ninth (9) reclosing attempts will be equal to the dead time interval
that precedes the fourth (4) reclosing attempt.
If one of the reclosing attempts is successful, the blocking time expires and the auto-
matic reclosing system is reset.
180 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
If none of the reclosing attempts is successful, then a final circuit breaker trip will take
place after the last allowable reclosing attempt has been made.
After the final circuit breaker trip, the automatic reclosing system is dynamically
blocked (see below).
Blocking Time The function of the blocking time has already been described in the paragraphs at side
title “Single-/Multi-Shot Reclosing”. The blocking time can be prolonged when the fol-
lowing conditions are fulfilled.
The time TMax CLOSE CMD defines the maximum time during which a close com-
mand applies. If a new trip command occurs before this time has run out, the close
command will be terminated. If the time TMax CLOSE CMD is set higher than the block-
ing time TIME RESTRAINT, the blocking time will be extended after expiry to the re-
maining close command duration.
Likewise, a pickup from a protective function that is set to initiate the automatic reclos-
ing system will lead to an extension of the blocking time!
Static Blocking Static blocking means that the automatic reclosing system is not ready to initiate re-
closing, and cannot initiate reclosing as long as the blocking signal is present. When
static blocking takes place, a corresponding message is generated (“79 is NOT
ready“). The static blocking signal is also used internally to block the protection ele-
ments that are only supposed to work when reclosing is enabled (see also side title
“Reclosing Before Selectivity“ further above).
The automatic reclosing system is statically blocked for one or more of the following:
− A blocking signal (FNo. 02703 “>BLOCK 79”) is present at a binary input, if the au-
tomatic reclosing system is not initiated (associated message: “>BLOCK 79“).
− A signal (FNo. 02730 “>CB Ready”) indicating the circuit breaker is ready disap-
pears from a binary input, if the automatic reclosing system is not initiated (associ-
ated message “>CB Ready“).
− The number of allowable reclosing attempts set for both reclosing programs is zero
(associated message: “ 79 no cycle“).
− No protective functions (parameters 7150 to 7163) or binary inputs are set to ini-
tiate the automatic reclosing system (associated message:” 79 no starter“).
− The circuit breaker position is reported as being “open” and no trip command ap-
plies (associated message: “ 79 BLK: CB open“). This presumes that 7SJ62/63/
64 be informed on the condition of the trip contact via the auxiliary contacts of the
circuit breaker.
Dynamic blocking/ Dynamic blocking of the automatic reclosure program occurs in those cases where the
lock out reclosure program is active and one of the conditions for blocking is fulfilled. The dy-
namic blocking is signalled by the message “79 DynBlock“. The dynamic blocking
function is associated with the configurable lock-out time SAFETY 79 ready. This
lock-out time is usually started by a blocking condition that has been fulfilled. After the
lock-out time has elapsed the device checks whether or not the blocking condition can
be reset. If the blocking condition is still present or if a new blocking condition is ful-
filled, the lock-out time is restarted. If, however, the blocking condition no longer holds
after the lock-out time has elapsed, the dynamic blocking will be reset.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 181

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
Dynamic blocking/lock out is initiated if:

− The maximum number of reclosure attempts has been achieved. If a trip command
now occurs within the lock-out time, the automatic reclosure program will be
blocked dynamically, (indicated by “ 79 Max. No. Cyc“)
− The protection function has detected a three-phase fault and the device is pro-
grammed (3Pol.PICKUP BLK) not to reclose into three-phase faults, (indicated by
“79 BLK:3ph p.u. “).
− the operating time has elapsed without a TRIP command being issued, each TRIP
command that occurs after the operating time has expired and before the picked-
up element drops out, will initiate the dynamic blocking (indicated by “79 Tact ex-
pired“).
− A protective function trips which is to block the automatic reclosure function (as con-
figured). This applies irrespective of the status of the automatic reclosure system
(started / not started) if a TRIP command of a blocking element occurs (indicated
by “79 BLK by trip “).
− The circuit breaker failure function is initiated.
− The circuit breaker does not trip within the configured time T-Start MONITOR af-
ter a trip command was issued thus leading to the assumption that the circuit break-
er has failed. (The breaker failure monitoring is primarily intented for VSI purposes.
VSI safety checks are often conducted with the circuit breaker disconnected. The
breaker failure monitoring prevents unexpected reclosing after the circuit breaker
has been reconnected, indiciated by “79 T-Start Exp“).
− The circuit breaker is not ready after the breaker monitoring time has elapsed, pro-
vided that the circuit breaker check has been activated (address 7113 CHECK CB?
= Chk each cycle, indicated by “79 T-CBreadyExp“),
− The circuit breaker is not ready after maximum extension of the dead time Max.
DEAD EXT.. The monitoring of the circuit breaker status and the synchrocheck may
cause undesired extension of the dead time. To prevent the automatic reclosure
system from assuming an undefined state, the extension of the dead time is moni-
tored. The extension time is started when the regular dead time has elapsed. When
it has elapsed, the automatic reclosure function is blocked dynamically and the lock-
out time launched. The automatic reclosure system resumes normal state when the
lock-out time has elapsed and new blocking conditions do not apply (indicated by
“79 TdeadMax Exp“) .
− Manual closing has been detected (externally) and parameter BLOCK MC Dur. (T
≠ 0) was set such that the automatic reclosing system responds to manual closing,
− Via a correspondingly marshalled binary input (FNo. 02703 “>BLOCK 79“). If the
blocking takes places while the automatic recloser is in normal state, the latter will
be blocked statically (“79 is NOT ready“). The blocking is terminated immedi-
ately when the binary input has been cleared and the automatic reclosure function
resumes normal state. If the automatic reclosure function is already running when
the blocking arrives, the dynamic blocking takes effect (“79 DynBlock“). In this
case the activation of the binary input starts the lock-out time SAFETY 79 ready.
Upon its expiration the device checks if the binary input is still activated. This the
case, the automatic reclosure program changes from dynamic blocking to static
blocking. If the binary input is no longer active when the time has elapsed and if no
new blocking conditions apply, the automatic reclosure system resumes normal
state.
182 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Circuit Breaker The detection of the actual circuit breaker position is necessary for the correct func-
Status tionality of the auto reclose function. The breaker position can be detected via the
breaker contacts and the binary inputs 04602 “>52-b“ and 04601 “>52-a“. The
method to be used depends on the masking of the binary inputs: “>52-a” (FNo.
04601) and “>52-b” (FNo. 04602). The following applies:
• If binary input 04601 „>52-a“ and binary input 04602 „>52-b“ are used, the auto-
matic reclosure function can detect whether the circuit breaker is open, closed or in
intermediate position.
If the circuit breaker is open or in intermediate position without a trip command be-
ing present, the automatic reclosure function is blocked dynamically if it is already
running. If the automatic reclosure system is in normal state, it will be blocked stat-
ically. When checking whether a trip command applies, all trip commands of the de-
vice are taken into account irrespective of whether the function acts as starting or
blocking element on behalf of the automic reclosure program.
• If binary input 04601”>52-a“ alone is allocated, the circuit breaker is considered
open while the binary input is not active.
If the binary input becomes inactive while no trip command of (any) function applies,
the automatic reclosure system will be blocked. The blocking will be of static nature
if the automatic reclosure system is in normal state at this time. If the automatic re-
closing system is already running, the blocking will be a dynamic one.
The dead time is started if the binary input becomes inactive following the trip com-
mand of a starting element. An intermediate position of the circuit breaker cannot
be detected for this type of allocation.
• If binary input 04602 “>52-b“ alone is allocated, the circuit breaker is considered
open while the binary input is active.
If the binary input becomes active while no trip command of (any) function applies,
the automatic reclosure system will be blocked dynamically provided it is already
running. Otherwise the blocking will be a static one.
The dead time is started if the binary input becomes active following the trip com-
mand of a starting element. An intermediate position of the circuit breaker cannot
be detected for this type of allocation.
• If neither binary input 04602 “>52-b“ nor 04601 “>52-a“ are allocated, the auto-
matic reclosure program cannot detect the position of the circuit breaker. In this
case, the automatic reclosure system will be controlled exclusively via pickups and
trip commands. Monitoring for “52-b without TRIP” and starting the dead time in de-
pendence of the circuit breaker feedback is not possible in this case.
Circuit Breaker The ability of a circuit breaker to reclose and re-trip if necessary can be monitored by
Monitoring the 7SJ62/63/64 relay.
A precondition for a reclosing attempt, following a trip command initiated by a protec-
tive relay element and subsequent initiation of the automatic reclosing function, is that
the circuit breaker is ready for at least one TRIP-CLOSE-TRIP cycle. The readiness
of the circuit breaker is monitored by the device using a binary input (“>CB Ready”).
In the case where this signal from the breaker mechanism is not available, the circuit
breaker monitoring feature should be disabled, otherwise reclosing attempts will re-
main blocked.
− When multiple reclosing attempts are programmed, it is a good idea to monitor the
circuit breaker condition prior to each reclosing attempt as well, since operation of,
for example, pneumatically controlled circuit breakers will result in reduced air pres-
sure. A reclosing attempt will be blocked until the binary input, configured with the
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 183

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
function 02730,indicates that the circuit breaker is ready to complete another

CLOSE-TRIP cycle.
− The recovery time of the circuit breaker can be monitored by the 7SJ62/63/64 relay.
The monitoring time CB TIME OUT expires for as long as the circuit breaker does
not indicate that it is ready via binary input “>CB Ready“ (FNo. 02730). Meaning
that as the binary input “>CB Ready“ is cleared, the monitoring time CB TIME OUT
is started. If the binary input returns before the monitoring time has elapsed, the
monitoring time will be cancelled and the reclosure process is continued. If the mon-
itoring time runs longer than the dead time, the dead time will be extended accord-
ingly. If the monitoring time elapses before the circuit breaker signals its readiness,
the automatic reclosure function will be blocked dynamically.
Interaction with the synchronizing function may cause the dead time to extend inad-
missibly. To prevent the automatic reclosure function from remaining in an undefined
state, dead time extension is monitored. The maximum extension of the dead time can
be set at Max. DEAD EXT..
The monitoring time Max. DEAD EXT. is started when the regular dead time has
elapsed. If the synchronizing function responds before the time has elapsed, the mon-
itoring time will be stopped and the close command generated. If the time expires be-
fore the synchronizing function reacts, the automatic reclosure function will be blocked
dynamically.
Please make sure that the above mentioned time is not shorter than the monitoring
time CB TIME OUT.
The time 7114 T-Start MONITOR serves for monitoring the response of the auto-
matic reclosure function to a breaker failure. It is activated by a trip command arriving
before or during a reclosing operation and marks the time that passes between trip-
ping and opening of the circuit breaker. If the time elapses, the device assumes a
breaker failure and the automatic reclosure function is blocked dynamically. If param-
eter T-Start MONITOR is set to ∞, the start monitoring is disabled.
2.13.1.3 Controlling Protective Stages
Depending on the reclosing cycle it is possible to control stages of the directional and
non-directional overcurrent protection by means of the automatic reclosure system.
Protective stage control implies that,
1. time overcurrent stages may trip instantaneously depending on the automatic re-
closure cycle (T = 0), they may remain unaffected by the auto reclosing function
AR (T = T) or may be blocked (T = ∞).
2. time overcurrent stages can be influenced via the cold load pickup function (see
Section 2.4) regarding thresholds and trip time delays depending on whether the
automatic reclosure system is ready or not.
Control of the overcurrent protection stages takes effect by releasing the cycle marked
by the corresponding parameter. The cycle zone release is indicated by the messages
“79 1.CycZoneRel“ through “79 4.CycZoneRel“. If the automatic reclosure sys-
tem is in normal state, the settings for the starting cycle apply. Consequently, their set-
tings always take effect when the automatic reclosure system assumes normal state.
The settings are released for each following cycle by issuing the close command and
starting the blocking time. Following a successfull auto reclosing operation (blocking
time elapsed) or when reset after blocking, the automatic reclosure system assumes
184 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
normal state. Control of the protection is again assumed by the parameters for the
starting cycle.
Figure 2-68 shows an example of protection stages control
Pick up
T=0 T=0
Trip
Command
open
Breaker closed
Status 52-a
Dead Time
Reclose
Command
Reset Time
79 1.CycZoneRel
79 2.CycZoneRel
79 3.CycZoneRel
Time delay T=0 T=0 T=∞ T=0
50-2, 50N-2
79 1stCyc.
79 1stCyc.
Starting-
Starting cycle Cycle 1 Cycle 2 cycle
Figure 2-68 Control of protection stages for two-fold, successful auto reclosure
Example:
Before the first reclosure faults are to be eliminated quickly applying stages 50-2 or
50N-2. Fast fault termination thus has priority over selectivity aspects as the reclosing
action aims at maintaining normal system operation. If the fault prevails, a second trip-
ping is to take place instantaneously and a second reclosure.
After the second reclosure, however, stages 50-2 or 50N-2 are to be blocked so the
fault can be eliminated applying stages 50-1 or 50N-1 according to the network’s time
grading schedule giving priority to selectivity concerns.
Addresses 7202 bef.1.Cy:50-2, 7214 bef.2.Cy:50-2 and 7203
bef.1.Cy:50N-2 and 7215 bef.2.Cy:50N-2 are set to instant. T=0 so
these stages are active after the first reclosure. To the contrary, addresses 7226
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 185

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
bef.3.Cy:50-2 and 7227 bef.3.Cy:50N-2 are set to blocked T=• causing

stages 50-2 and 50N-2 to be blocked after the second reclosure. The back-up stages
e.g., 50-1 and 50N-1 must obviously not be blocked (addresses 7200, 7201, 7212,
7213, 7224 and 7225).
The blocking applies only after reclosure according to the settings address. Hence, it
is possible to specify again other conditions for a third reclosure.
The blocking conditions are also valid for the zone sequence coordination, provided it
is available and activated (address 7140, see also Subsection 2.13.1.4, “Zone Se-
quence Coordination1)“).
2.13.1.4 Zone Sequence Coordination1)
It is the task of the zone sequence coordination to harmonize the automatic reclosure
function of this device with that of another device that is part of the same power sys-
tem. It is a complementary function to the automatic reclosure program and allows for
example to perform group reclosing operations in radial systems. In case of multiple
reclosures, groups may also be in nested arrangement and further high-voltage fuses
can be overgraded or undergraded.
Zone sequencing works by blocking certain protective functions depending on the re-
close cylce. This is implemented by the protective stages control (see Subsection
2.13.1.3).
As a special feature, changing from one reclosing cycle to the next is possible without
trip command only via pickup/dropout of stage 50-1 or 50N-1.
Figure 2-69 shows an example of how zone sequencing and protection of load side
fuses is possible in a radial distribution system. Consider the relays protecting Feeder
#3 and the busbar. Assume that the relay protecting Feeder #3 is programmed for one
reclosing attempt and that the busbar relay does not utilize reclosing.
For fault F1 at Tap Line #2, the 50-2 elements associated with both the Feeder #3 re-
lay and the busbar relay pickup. The time delay of the 50-2 element protecting Feeder
#3 is set so that the Feeder #3 circuit breaker will clear the fault before the fuse at Tap
Line #2 is damaged. After the first reclosing attempt, if the fault was cleared, normal
service is restored to all customers (including the customers served by Tap Line #2).
If after the first reclosing attempt, the fault continues to exist, the 50-2 element at Feed-
er #3 is blocked, and the fuse operates to clear the fault. If the fuse fails to clear the
fault, then the 50-1 element protecting Feeder #3 will initiate a delayed trip signal (0.4
seconds), thus serving as backup protection for the fuse.
Assume protection requirement require that the 50-2 element at the busbar relay be
set with a delay of 0.4 seconds as well. When the fault first appears at F1, the 50-2
element at the bus relay picks up, but drops out when the 50-2 element at Feeder #3
trips the circuit breaker. Upon reclosing, if the fault still remains, the 50-2 element as-
sociated with the bus relay picks up again, however, the fuse operates to clear the
fault, thus resulting in a drop out of the 50-2 element at the busbar relay. Had the fault
been on Feeder #3, however, the 50-2 element associated with the busbar relay would
have initiated a trip (simultaneously with the trip initiated by the Feeder #3 50-1 ele-
ment) after reclosing had occurred. All three feeders supplied by the bus would have
1)not
applicable for version 7SJ62/63/64**–**A**–
186 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
been cut off from the incoming supply for a fault that should have locked out Feeder
#3 only.
To prevent this from happening, zone sequencing is switched on at the bus relay (See
AR setting dress 7140). With zone sequencing in operation, the bus relay counts the
number of times a fault is interrupted. For the first fault, the 50-2 element at the bus is
allowed to trip. If the fault is at F1 or on Feeder #3, the 50-2 element protecting Feeder
#3 will initiate a high speed trip, thus causing the 50-2 element at the bus relay to drop
out.
Bus Supply
50-2 0.4 s
7SJ62/63/ 50-1 0.9 s F2
50-2 0.0 s
7SJ62/63/ 7SJ62/63/ 7SJ62/63/ 50-1 0.4 s
Tap Line 1
Tap Line 2
F1
Feeder 1 Feeder 2 Feeder 3
Figure 2-69 Illustration of Zone Sequencing and the Protection of Load Side Fuses
For the second fault, the 50-2 element at the bus relay must be blocked because the
50-2 element at Feeder #3 is blocked, and a permanent fault on Feeder #3 could result
in an inadvertent trip by the 50-2 element protecting the bus. Because zone sequenc-
ing is switched on at the bus relay, the bus relay counts the number of faults, and after
the first fault, blocks the 50-2 element from tripping. Therefore, for a permanent fault
on Feeder #3, the 50-2 element at the bus would have been blocked after the reclosing
attempt, and the 50-1 element at Feeder #3 would have tripped the circuit breaker in
0.4 seconds. Had the 50-1 element failed to clear the fault, the 50-1 element at the bus
relay, which is set for 0.9 seconds, would serve as backup protection.
For the bus fault F2, the 50-2 element at the bus would have cleared the fault in 0.4
seconds. The 50-1 element at the bus serves to backup the 50-2 element. Had zone
sequencing not been available, the 50-2 element at the bus relay could not have been
set to clear the bus fault in 0.4 seconds without causing coordination problems be-
tween the bus relay and the Feeder #3 relay. On a final note, zone sequencing is only
effective at the bus relay when all three feeders utilize high speed tripping prior to the
first reclosing attempt.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 187

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
The internal automatic reclosure system will only be effective and accessible if ad-
dress 0171 79 Auto Recl. is set to Enabled during configuration or protective
functions. If the automatic reclosing function is not required, then address 0171
should be set to Disabled. The function can be turned ON or OFF at address 7101
FCT 79.
If no automatic reclosures are performed on the feeder for which the 7SJ62/63/64 re-
lay is used (e.g. cables, tranformers, motors, etc.), the automatic reclosure function is
disabled by configuration. The automatic reclosure function will then have absolutely
no effect i.e., 7SJ62/63/64 will not process the automatic reclosure function. No mes-
sages exist for this purpose and binary inputs for the automatic reclosure function are
ignored. All parameters of block 71 are inaccessible and insignificant.
Blocking Duration Parameter 7103 BLOCK MC Dur. defines the reaction of the automatic reclosure
for Manual-CLOSE function when a manual closing signal is detected. The parameter can be set to spec-
Detection ify how long the auto reclose function will be blocked dynamically in case of an exter-
nal manual close-command being detected via binary input (00356 “>Manual
Close“). If the setting is 0, the automatic reclosure system will not respond to a man-
ual close-signal.
Blocking Time and The blocking time set at address 7105 TIME RESTRAINT defines the time that must
Dynamic Blocking elapse, after a successful reclosing attempt, before the automatic reclosing function is
reset, in preparation of a new fault. If a protective element picks up before the blocking
time elapses, the reclosing cycle is continues. If a protective trip occurred after the last
allowable reclosing attempt was made, then together with the trip command the feeder
is locked out. If a protective element picks up after the blocking time has elapsed, then
a new reclosing cycle is initiated.
In general, address 7105 should be set for only a few seconds. In areas with frequent
thunderstorms, a shorter blocking time may be necessary to avoid feeder lockout due
to sequential lightning strikes.
A longer blocking time should be chosen if there is no possibility to monitor the circuit
breaker ready status (see below) during multiple reclosing. In this case, the blocking
time should be longer than the time required for the circuit breaker mechanism to be
ready.
If a dynamic blocking/lock out of the automatic reclosing system was initiated, then re-
closing functions remain blocked until the cause of the blocking has been cleared.
Subsection 2.13.1 gives further information on this topic, see side title “Dynamic
Blocking“. The dynamic blocking is associated to the configurable blocking time
SAFETY 79 ready. It is usually started by a blocking condition that has picked up.
Circuit Breaker Reclosing after a short-circuit tripping presupposes that the circuit breaker is ready for
Monitoring at least one TRIP-CLOSE-TRIP cycle at the time when the reclosing function is initi-
ated (i.e. at the beginning of a trip command):
The ready-state of the circuit breaker is signalled to the device via the binary input
“>CB Ready“ (FNo. 02730).
188 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
− It is possible to check the status of the circuit breaker before each reclosure or to
disable this option (address 7113, CHECK CB?):
− CHECK CB? = No check, deactivates the circuit breaker check,
− CHECK CB? = Chk each cycle, to verify the circuit breaker status before each
reclosing command.
− Checking the status of the circuit breaker is usually recommended. Should the
breaker not provide such a signal, you can disable the circuit breaker check at ad-
dress 7113 CHECK CB? to No check, as otherwise auto reclosure would be im-
possible.
− The status monitoring time CB TIME OUT can be configured at address 7115 if the
circuit breaker check was enabled at address 7113. This time is set slightly higher
than the maximum recovery time of the circuit breaker following reclosure. If the cir-
cuit breaker is not ready after the time has expired, reclosing is omitted and dynam-
ic blocking is initiated thus locking the auto reclose function.
Time Max. DEAD EXT. serves for monitoring the dead time extension. The extension
can be initiated by the circuit breaker monitoring time CB TIME OUT and by the syn-
chronizing function.
The monitoring time Max. DEAD EXT. is started after the configured dead time has
elapsed.
This time must not be shorter than CB TIME OUT. When using the monitoring time CB
TIME OUT, the time Max. DEAD EXT. should be set to a value ≥ CB TIME OUT.
If the auto reclose system is operated with a (internal or external) synchronizing func-
tion, Max. DEAD EXT. assures that the auto reclose system does not remain in un-
defined state when the synchronizing function fails to check back.
If the synchronization is used as synchrocheck (for synchronous systems), the moni-
toring time may be configured rather short e.g., to some seconds. In this case the syn-
chronizing function merely checks the synchronism of the power systems. If synchro-
nism prevails it switches in instantaneously, otherwise it will not.
If the synchronization is used for synchronous/asynchronous networks, the monitoring
time must grant sufficient time for determining the time for switching in. This depends
on the frequency slip of the two subnetworks. A monitoring time of 100s should be suf-
ficient to account for most applications for asynchronous networks.
Generally, the monitoring time should be longer than the maximum duration of the
synchronization process (parameter 6x12).
The breaker failure monitoring time 7114 T-Start MONITOR determines the time
between tripping (closing the trip contact) and opening the circuit breaker (checkback
of the CB auxiliary contacts). This time is started each time a tripping operation takes
place. When it has elapsed, the device assumes breaker failure and blocks the auto
reclose system dynamically.
Operating Time The operating time monitors the time between pickup and trip command of a protec-
tive function configured as starter while the auto reclose system is ready but not yet
running. A trip command issued by a protective function configured as starter occuring
within the operating time will start the automatic reclosing function. If this time differs
from the setting value of T-ACTION (addresse7117), the automatic reclosing system
will be blocked dynamically.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 189

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
The trip time of inverse tripping characteristics is considerably determined by the fault
location or fault resistance. The operative time prevents reclosing in case of far remote
faults with long tripping time. Trip commands of a protective function that is not con-
figured as starter do not affect the operative time.
Number of The number of reclosing attempts can be set separately for the programs “Phase“ (ad-
Reclosing Attempts dress 7136, # OF RECL. PH) and “Ground“ (address 7135, # OF RECL. GND).
The exact definition of the programs is described in Subsection 2.13.1 at side title “Re-
closing Programs“.
Close Command: Address 7137 Cmd.via control can be set to either generate directly the close
Direct or via command via the automatic reclosing function (setting Cmd.via control = none)
Control or have the closing initated by the control function. The setting list for parameter 7137
is created dynamically in dependence of the masked switchgear components. If one
of the switchgear components is selected, usually the circuit breaker 52 Breaker,
reclosure is accomplished via control. In this case, the automatic reclosing function
does not create a close command but issues a close request. This request is forward-
ed to the control which then assumes the switching. Thus, the properties defined for
the switchgear component such as interlocking and command times apply for. Hence,
it is possible that the close command will not be carried out due to an applying inter-
locking condition.
If this behavior is not desired, the auto reclose function can also generate the close
command “79 Close“ directly which must be marshalled to contact.
Connection to The auto reclose function can interact with the internal synchronizing function of the
Internal 7SJ64 relay. For this purpose, one of the four synchronization groups must be select-
Synchrocheck ed at address 7138 Internal SYNC thus specifying the synchronization conditions
(only 7SJ64) for automatic reclosing. Moreover, the close command must be issued via control.
Therefore, address 7137 Cmd.via control must be set to select the appropriate
switchgear component, usually the circuit breaker 52 Breaker. Synchronous reclos-
ing via the close command “79 Close“ is not possible.
If interaction with the internal synchronization is not desired, address 7138 must be
set to none.
Auto Reclosing Parameter 7139 External SYNC can be set to determine that the auto reclose func-
with External tion operates with external synchrocheck. External synchronization is possible if the
Synchrocheck parameter is set to YES and 7SJ64 is linked to the external synchrocheck via the mes-
sage 02865 “79 Sync.Request“ and the binary input “>Sync.release“.
2.13.2.2 Configuration
Initiation and At addresses 7150 to 7164 (see table 2-16), reclosing can be initiated or blocked for
Blocking of Reclos- various types of protective elements. They constitute the interconnection between pro-
ing by Protective tective elements and auto reclose function. Each address designates a protective
Functions function together with its ANSI synonym e.g., 50-2 for the high-set stage of the non-
directional time overcurrent protection (address 7152). The setting options have the
following meaning:
190 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
− Starts 79 The protective element initiates the automatic reclosure via its
trip command;
− No influence the protective element does not start the automatic reclosure,
it may however be initated by other functions;
− Stops 79 the protective element blocks the automatic reclosure, neither
can it be started by other functions; a dynamic blocking is initi-
ated.
2.13.2.3 First Reclosing Attempt
Open Breaker The dead time preceding the first reclosing attempt is set at address 7127 DEADTIME
Times 1: PH for the multiple phase fault reclosing program and at address 7128 DEADTIME
1: G for the single phase fault reclosing program. The time defined by this parameter
is started when the circuit breaker opens (if auxiliary contacts are allocated) or when
the pickup drops out following the trip command of a starter. The exact definition of the
programs is described in Subsection 2.13.1 at “Reclosing Programs“. The dead time
should be set long enough to allow a temporary fault to clear (0.9 to 1.5 seconds) un-
less stability is a concern, in which case faster times may be required (typically 0.3 to
0.6 seconds). In radial networks prolonged idle times are usually permitted.
Cyclic Control of Addresses 7200 to 7211 allow cyclic control of the various protective functions by the
Protective automatic reclosing function. Thus protective stages can be blocked selectively,
Functions via switched instantaneously or according to the configured delay times. The following op-
Automatic tions are available:
Reclosure
− Set value T=T The protective stage is delayed as configured i.e., the auto re-
close function does not effect this stage;
− instant. T=0 The protective stage becomes instantaneous if the auto re-
close function is ready to perform the mentioned cycle;
− blocked T=• The protective stage is blocked if the auto reclose function
reaches the cycle defined in the parameter.
2.13.2.4 Second to Fourth Reclosuring Attempt
Open Breaker If more than one reclosing cycle was set, you can now configure the individual reclos-
Times ing settings for the 2nd to 4th cycle. The same options are available as for the first cy-
cle.
For the 2nd cycle:
Address 7129 DEADTIME 2: PH Dead time for the second (2nd) reclosing
attempt (multiple phase recl. program)
Address 7130 DEADTIME 2: G Dead time for the second (2nd) reclosing
attempt (single phase recl. program)
Addresses7212 through 7223 Cyclic control of the various
protective functions before the 2nd
reclosing attempt
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 191

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
For the 3rd cycle:

Address 7131 DEADTIME 3: PH Dead time for the second (3rd) reclosing
Address 7132 DEADTIME 3: G Dead time for the second (3rd) reclosing
Addresses7224 through 7235 Cyclic control of the various protective
functions before the third reclosing
attempt
For the 4th cycle:
Address 7133 DEADTIME 4: PH Dead time for the second (4th) reclosing
Address 7134 DEADTIME 4: G Dead time for the second (4th) reclosing
Addresses7236 through 7247 Cyclic control of the various protective
functions before the fourth reclosuring
attempt
2.13.2.5 Fifth to Ninth Reclosing Attempt
If more than four cycles are configured, the dead times preceding the fifth (5th) through
the ninth (9th) reclosing attempts are equal to the open breaker time which precedes
the fourth (4th) reclosing attempt.
2.13.2.6 Blocking
Blocking Three- Regardless of which reclosing program is executed, automatic reclosing can be
Phase Faults blocked for trips following three-phase faults at address 7165 3Pol.PICKUP BLK.
The pickup of all three phases for a specific phase element is the criterion required for
three-phase fault blocking.
Blocking of auto re- The auto reclose function can be blocked, if control commands are issued. The control
close via internal information must be routed via CFC (interlocking task-level) using the
control CMD_Information block (see Figure 2-70).
“IN: Control Device “OUT: >BLOCK 79”

52 Breaker CF_D12”
Figure 2-70 Blocking of the auto reclose function using the internal control function
192 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
2.13.2.7 Zone Sequencing1)
At address 7140, ZONE SEQ.COORD., the zone sequencing feature can be turned ON
or OFF.
If multiple reclosures are performed and the zone sequencing function is deactivated,
only those reclosing cycles are counted which the device has conducted after a trip
command. With the zone sequencing function switched on, an additional sequence
counter also counts such auto reclosures which (in radial systems) are carried out by
relays connected on load side. This presupposes that the pickup of the 50-1/50N-1–
stages drops out without a trip command being issued by a protective function initiat-
ing the auto reclose function. The parameters at addresses 7200 through 7247 (see
paragraph below at “Initiation and Blocking of Reclosing by Protective Functions“ and
“Controlling Directional/Non-Directional Overcurrent Protection Stages via Cold Load
Pickup“ can thus be set to determine which protective stages are active or blocked
during what dead time cycles.
In the example shown in Figure 2-69 (Subsection 2.13.1.4), the zone sequencing
would be initated at the bus relay. Moreover, the 50-2 stages would have to be blocked
after the second reclosure i.e., address 7214 bef.2.Cy:50-2 set to blocked T=•.
The zone sequencing of the feeder relays is switched off but the 50-2 stages must also
be blocked here after the second reclosing attempt. Moreover, it must be ensured that
the 50-2 stages start the automatic reclosing function: address 7152 50-2 set to
Starts 79.
2.13.2.8 Controlling Directional/Non-Directional Overcurrent Protection Stages via Cold Load Pickup
The cold load pickup function is another possibility to control the protection via the au-
tomatic reclosing system (see also Section 2.4). This function provides the address
1702 Start Condition. It determines the starting conditions for the increased set-
ting values of current and time of the cold load pickup to apply for directional and non-
directional overcurrent protection.
If address 1702 Start Condition = 79 ready, the directional and non-directional
overcurrent protection always employ the increased setting values if the automatic re-
closing system is ready. The auto reclosing function provides the signal “79 ready”
for controlling the cold load pickup. The signal “79 ready“ is always active if the auto
reclosing system is available, active, unblocked and ready for another cycle. Control
via the cold load pickup function is non-cyclic.
Since control via cold load pickup and cyclic control via auto reclosing system can run
simultaneously, the directional and non-directional overcurrent protection must coor-
dinate the input values of the two interfaces. In this context the cyclic auto reclosing
control has the priority and thus overwrites the release of the cold load pickup function.
If the protective stages are controlled via the automatic reclosing function, changing
the control variables (e.g. by blocking) has no effect on stages that are already run-
ning. The stages in question are continued.
1)Not
applicable for version 7SJ62/63/64**–**A**–
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 193

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
2.13.2.9 Settings for Automatic Reclosing
The setting options of address 7137 Cmd.via control are generated dynamically
according to the current configuration.
Address 7138 Internal SYNC is only available for 7SJ64.

7101 FCT 79 OFF OFF 79 Auto-Reclose Function
ON
7103 BLOCK MC Dur. 0.50..320.00 sec; 0 1.00 sec AR blocking duration after
manual close
7105 TIME RESTRAINT 0.50..320.00 sec 3.00 sec 79 Auto Reclosing reset time
7108 SAFETY 79 ready 0.01..320.00 sec 0.50 sec Safety Time until 79 is ready
7113 CHECK CB? No check No check Check circuit breaker before

Check each cycle AR?
7114 T-Start MONITOR 0.01..320.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec AR start-signal monitoring time
7115 CB TIME OUT 0.10..320.00 sec 3.00 sec Circuit Breaker (CB) Supervision
Time
7116 Max. DEAD EXT. 0.50..1800.00 sec; ∞ 100.00 sec Maximum dead time extension
7117 T-ACTION 0.01..320.00 sec; ∞ 0.20 sec Action time
7135 # OF RECL. GND 0..9 1 Number of Reclosing Cycles

Ground
7136 # OF RECL. PH 0..9 1 Number of Reclosing Cycles

Phase
7137 Cmd.via control Close command via control

device
7138 Internal SYNC Internal 25 synchronisation
7139 External SYNC YES NO External 25 synchronisation

NO
7140 ZONE OFF OFF ZSC - Zone sequence coordina-

SEQ.COORD. ON tion
7165 3Pol.PICKUP BLK YES NO 3 Pole Pickup blocks 79

NO
7150 50-1 No influence No influence 50-1

Starts 79
Stops 79
7151 50N-1 No influence No influence 50N-1

Starts 79
Stops 79

Starts 79
Stops 79
194 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1

Starts 79
Stops 79
7154 51 No influence No influence 51

Starts 79
Stops 79
7155 51N No influence No influence 51N

Starts 79
Stops 79

Starts 79
Stops 79

Starts 79
Stops 79

Starts 79
Stops 79

Starts 79
Stops 79
7160 67 TOC No influence No influence 67 TOC

Starts 79
Stops 79
7161 67N TOC No influence No influence 67N TOC

Starts 79
Stops 79
7162 sens Ground Flt No influence No influence (Sensitive) Ground Fault

Starts 79
Stops 79
7163 46 No influence No influence 46

Starts 79
Stops 79
7164 BINARY INPUT No influence No influence Binary Input

Starts 79
Stops 79
7127 DEADTIME 1: PH 0.01..320.00 sec 0.50 sec Dead Time 1: Phase Fault
7128 DEADTIME 1: G 0.01..320.00 sec 0.50 sec Dead Time 1: Ground Fault
7200 bef.1.Cy:50-1 Set value, T=T Set value, T=T before 1. Cycle: 50-1
instantaneous, T= 0
blocked, T= infinite
7201 bef.1.Cy:50N-1 Set value, T=T Set value, T=T before 1. Cycle: 50N-1
instantaneous, T= 0
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 195

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions

instantaneous, T= 0
instantaneous, T= 0
7204 bef.1.Cy:51 Set value, T=T Set value, T=T before 1. Cycle: 51
instantaneous, T= 0
7205 bef.1.Cy:51N Set value, T=T Set value, T=T before 1. Cycle: 51N
instantaneous, T= 0
instantaneous, T= 0
instantaneous, T= 0
instantaneous, T= 0
instantaneous, T= 0
7210 bef.1.Cy:67 TOC Set value, T=T Set value, T=T before 1. Cycle: 67 TOC
instantaneous, T= 0
7211 bef.1.Cy:67NTOC Set value, T=T Set value, T=T before 1. Cycle: 67N TOC
instantaneous, T= 0
instantaneous, T= 0
instantaneous, T= 0
instantaneous, T= 0
instantaneous, T= 0
196 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1

instantaneous, T= 0
instantaneous, T= 0
instantaneous, T= 0
instantaneous, T= 0
instantaneous, T= 0
instantaneous, T= 0
instantaneous, T= 0
instantaneous, T= 0
instantaneous, T= 0
instantaneous, T= 0
instantaneous, T= 0
instantaneous, T= 0
instantaneous, T= 0
instantaneous, T= 0
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 197

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions

instantaneous, T= 0
instantaneous, T= 0
instantaneous, T= 0
instantaneous, T= 0
instantaneous, T= 0
instantaneous, T= 0
instantaneous, T= 0
instantaneous, T= 0
instantaneous, T= 0
instantaneous, T= 0
instantaneous, T= 0
instantaneous, T= 0
instantaneous, T= 0
instantaneous, T= 0
198 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1

instantaneous, T= 0
instantaneous, T= 0
instantaneous, T= 0
instantaneous, T= 0
2.13.2.10Information List for Automatic Reclosing

02701 >79 ON >79 ON
02702 >79 OFF >79 OFF
02730 >CB Ready >Circuit breaker READY for reclosing
02715 >Start 79 Gnd >Start 79 Ground program
02716 >Start 79 Ph >Start 79 Phase program
02722 >ZSC ON >Switch zone sequence coordination ON
02723 >ZSC OFF >Switch zone sequence coordination OFF
02781 79 OFF 79 Auto recloser is switched OFF
02782 79 ON 79 Auto recloser is switched ON
02784 79 is NOT ready 79 Auto recloser is NOT ready
02785 79 DynBlock 79 - Auto-reclose is dynamically BLOCKED
02801 79 in progress 79 - in progress
02851 79 Close 79 - Close command
02862 79 Successful 79 - cycle successful
02863 79 Lockout 79 - Lockout
02878 79 L-N Sequence 79-A/R single phase reclosing sequence
02879 79 L-L Sequence 79-A/R multi-phase reclosing sequence
02883 ZSC active Zone Sequencing is active
02884 ZSC ON Zone sequence coordination switched ON
02885 ZSC OFF Zone sequence coordination switched OFF
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 199

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions

00127 79 ON/OFF 79 ON/OFF (via system port)
02788 79 T-CBreadyExp 79: CB ready monitoring window expired
02810 79 TdeadMax Exp 79: Maximum dead time expired
02889 79 1.CycZoneRel 79 1st cycle zone extension release
02890 79 2.CycZoneRel 79 2nd cycle zone extension release
02891 79 3.CycZoneRel 79 3rd cycle zone extension release
02892 79 4.CycZoneRel 79 4th cycle zone extension release
02809 79 T-Start Exp 79: Start-signal monitoring time expired
02865 79 Sync.Request 79: Synchro-check request
02844 79 1stCyc. run. 79 1st cycle running
02845 79 2ndCyc. run. 79 2nd cycle running
02846 79 3rdCyc. run. 79 3rd cycle running
02847 79 4thCyc. run. 79 4th or higher cycle running
02731 >Sync.release >AR: Sync. release from ext. sync.-check
02711 >79 Start >79 External start of internal A/R
02808 79 BLK: CB open 79: CB open with no trip
02823 79 no starter 79: no starter configured
02824 79 no cycle 79: no cycle configured
02827 79 BLK by trip 79: blocking due to trip
02828 79 BLK:3ph p.u. 79: blocking due to 3-phase pickup
02829 79 Tact expired 79: action time expired before trip
02830 79 Max. No. Cyc 79: max. no. of cycles exceeded
02899 79 CloseRequest 79: Close request to Control Function
200 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Fault Location
2.14 Fault Location
Measurement of the distance to a short-circuit fault is an important feature of the

7SJ62/63/64 relay allowing faster determination of the fault location. Fault location is
only possible if the device is connected to both current and voltage transformers.
2.14.1 Description of Fault Location
Initiation Fault location is initiated if the directional or non-directional overcurrent relay elements
have initiated a trip signal. Once initiated, the fault locator determines the valid mea-
surement loop and measurement window. Sampled pairs of values of short circuit cur-
rent and short circuit voltage, are stored in a buffer, and made available for the imped-
ance calculations R (Resistance) and X (Reactance). Measurement quantity filtering
and the number of impedance calculations automatically adjust to the number of rele-
vant measurement value pairs stored in the buffer.
Fault location can also be initiated using a binary input as long as a directional or non-
directional overcurrent relay element has picked up. This feature allows fault location
calculations to proceed even if another protective relay (load side relay, etc.) cleared
the fault, (e.g. the internal time-overcurrent elements did not trip).
Measurement The evaluation of the measured quantities takes place after the fault has been has
Process been isolated and cleared. At least three result pairs of R and X are calculated from
the stored and filtered measured quantities in accordance with the line equations. If
fewer than three pairs of R and X are calculated, then the fault location feature will
generate no information. Average and standard deviations are calculated from the re-
sult pairs. After eliminating “questionable results”, which are recognized via a large
variance from the standard deviation, average values are calculated once again for X.
This average is the fault reactance, and is proportional to the fault distance.
Path Selection Using the pickup of the overcurrent time elements (directional or non-directional), the
valid measurement paths for the calculation of fault reactance’s are selected. The fault
reactance’s can, of course, only be calculated for phase-to-ground paths if the device
is connected to three current transformers connected in a grounded-wye configuration
and three voltage transformers connected in a grounded-wye configuration.
Table 2-17 shows the assignment of the evaluated paths to the possible pickup sce-
narios of the protective elements given that the device is supplied from three voltage
transformers connected in a grounded-wye configuration. If the voltage transformers
are connected in an open delta configuration, then Table 2-18 applies. Of course, no
phase-to-ground paths can be measured in this case.
In addition, paths are not available for further calculation if one of the two currents in
a path are less than 10% of the other current in that path, or if any currents in the path
are less than 10% of the nominal device current.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 201

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
Table 2-17 Selection of Paths to be Reported for Wye-Connected Voltage Transformers
Pickup Possible Paths Evaluated Paths Notes
A A–G, A–B, C–A A–G or If only one phase is

A–G and least L–L picked up, then only the
appropriate phase-to-
B B–G, A–B, B–C B–G or ground path is displayed.
B–G and least L–L If the reactance’s of one
or both φ-φ paths are less
than the φ-G reactance,
C C–G, C–A, B–C C–G or then the φ-φ path with the
C–G and least L–L least reactance is also
displayed.
G A–G, B–G, C–G least L–G Only the φ-G path with
the least reactance is dis-
played.
A, G A–G A–G
B, G B–G B–G The appropriate phase-

to-ground path is dis-
played
C, G C–G C–G
A, B A–B, A–G, B–G A–B or The appropriate φ-φ path

A–B and A–G and B–G is always displayed; if the
reactance differential be-
B, C B–C, B–G, C–G B–C or tween the φ-G paths is
B–C and B–G and C–G larger than 15% of the
larger φ-G path, then both
A, C C–A, A–G, C–G C–A or φ-G paths are also dis-
C–A and A–G and C–G played.
A, B, G A–B, A–G, B–G A–B or The appropriate φ-φ path

A–B and A–G and B–G is always displayed; if the
reactance differential be-
B, C, G B–C, B–G, C–G B–C or tween the φ-G paths is
B–C and B–G and C–G larger than 15% of the
larger φ-G path, then both
A, C, G C–A, A–G, C–G C–A or φ-G paths are also dis-
C–A and A–G and C–G played.
A, B, C A–B, B–C, C–A Least φ-φ path

Only the least φ-φ path is
displayed.
A, B, C, G A–B, B–C, C–A Least φ-φ path
202 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Fault Location
Table 2-18 Selection of Paths to be Reported for Open-Delta Connected Voltage Transform-
ers
Pickup Possible Paths Evaluated Paths Notes
A A–B, C–A Least φ − φ

The least φ-φ path is dis-
B A–B, B–C Least φ − φ played.
C C–A, B–C Least φ − φ
A, B A–B A–B
B, C B–C B–C The appropriate φ-φ path is

displayed.
A, C C–A C–A
A, B, C A–B, B–C, C–A Least φ-φ path The least φ-φ path is dis-
played.
Result As results of the fault location, the following results are displayed or obtained using
DIGSI® 4:
− One or more short circuit paths from which the fault reactance was derived.
− One or more reactance’s per phase in Ω secondary.
− The fault distances, proportional to the reactance’s, in km or miles of line, converted
on the basis of the line’s predetermined reactance (entered at address 1105 or
1106, see Subsection 2.1.6).
Note: The distance result, in miles or kilometers, can only be accurate for homogenous
line sections. If the line is made up of several sections with different reactance’s, then
the reactance derived by the fault location can be evaluated for a separate calculation
of the fault distance. For transformers and motors, only the reactance result, not the
distance result, is significant.
2.14.2 Setting The Functional Parameters
General The calculation of fault distance will only take place if address 0180 Fault Locator
is set to Enabled. If the fault locating function is not needed, then address 0180
should be set to Disabled.
Initiation Normally the fault location calculation is started when a protective element initiates a
trip signal (8001 START = TRIP). However, address 8001 START is set to Pickup,
fault location can be initiated just by the pickup of a protective element. Irrespective of
this fact, calculation of the fault location can be started externally via binary input
(FNo. 01106, “>Start Flt. Loc“).
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 203

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
Line Constants To calculate the fault distance in miles or kilometers, the device needs the per distance
reactance of the line in Ω/mile or Ω/kilometer, expressed as a secondary quantity.
These values were entered during setting of the general protection data under ad-
dress 1105 or 1106 (see Subsection 2.1.6).
2.14.2.1 Settings for Fault Locator

8001 START Pickup Pickup Start fault locator with
TRIP
2.14.2.2 Information List for Fault Location

01106 >Start Flt. Loc >Start Fault Locator
01118 Xsec = Flt Locator: secondary REACTANCE
01119 dist = Flt Locator: Distance to fault
01123 FL Loop AG Fault Locator Loop AG
01124 FL Loop BG Fault Locator Loop BG
01125 FL Loop CG Fault Locator Loop CG
01126 FL Loop AB Fault Locator Loop AB
01127 FL Loop BC Fault Locator Loop BC
01128 FL Loop CA Fault Locator Loop CA
01132 Flt.Loc.invalid Fault location invalid
204 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Breaker Failure Protection (50BF)
2.15 Breaker Failure Protection (50BF)
2.15.1 Description of Breaker Failure Protection
General The breaker failure protection function monitors the reaction of a circuit breaker to a
trip signal. To determine if the circuit breaker has properly opened in response to a trip
signal, one of the following methods is used to ascertain the status of the circuit break-
er:
• The current flow through the circuit breaker.
• The position of a circuit breaker auxiliary contact.
If after a programmable time delay, the circuit breaker has not opened, a breaker fail-
ure trip signal issued, and all adjacent circuit breakers that represent sources to the
fault can be tripped (see Figure 2-71, as an example).
52 52 52
52 Breaker Failure Protection

Schalterversagerschutz
BF Ttrip 0
I>IMIN &
Protective Trip
Schutzfunktion
Function Trip BF
Figure 2-71 Functional Principle of the Breaker Failure Protection Function
Initiation The breaker failure protection function can be initiated by two different sources:
• Internal protective function of the 7SJ62/63/64,
• External trip signals via binary inputs („>50BF ext SRC“).
For each of the two sources, a unique pickup message is generated, a unique time
delay is initiated, and a unique tripping signal is generated. The setting values for
breaker failure pickup and delay apply to both sources.
Criteria The criteria used to determine if the circuit breaker has operated is selectable and
should depend on the protective function that initiated the breaker failure function. If
voltage protection initiated breaker failure protection, fault current may or may not be
flowing through the circuit breaker, therefore, current flow through the circuit breaker
is not a reliable indication as to whether the circuit breaker operated properly. In this
case, the position of the breaker auxiliary contact should be used to determine if the
circuit breaker properly operated. For protective functions that operate in response to
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 205

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
currents (e.g. directional and non-directional overcurrent protection, etc.), both the
current flow through the circuit breaker and the position of the circuit breaker auxiliary
contact can be used to determine if the circuit breaker properly operated. However,
operation of a circuit breaker auxiliary contact does not always mean that the circuit
breaker successfully cleared the fault current, therefore, the device can be pro-
grammed such that only the current flow criterion is used to determine breaker status.
The current criterion is met if at least one of the three phase currents exceeds the cur-
rent flow monitoring setting entered at address 0212 BkrClosed I MIN (see Sub-
section 2.1.3.4, “Current Flow Monitoring”). This pickup threshold is also used by other
protective functions.
Evaluation of the circuit breaker auxiliary contact depends on the type of contact(s),
and how they are connected to the binary inputs:
• Both “a” and “b” type auxiliary contacts are connected.
• Only an “a” type auxiliary contact is connected.
• Only a “b” type auxiliary contact is connected.
• No auxiliary contact is connected.
The circuit breaker condition can be detected prior to the initiation of a trip signal, de-
pending on the configuration of binary inputs and auxiliary contacts. After a trip com-
mand has been issued it is the aim to detect whether the circuit breaker is open or in
intermediate postion by means of the checkbacks of its auxiliary contacts. This infor-
mation can be used to properly operate the breaker failure function.
Logic If breaker failure is initiated, an alarm message is generated (“50BF int Pickup” or
“50BF ext Pickup”), and the breaker failure timer is started. Once the time delay
elapses, a breaker failure trip signal is issued (“50BF TRIP”). The trip signal can be
configured to one of the output relays.
Figure 2-72 shows the logic diagram for the breaker failure protection scheme. It is
possible to turn the entire breaker failure protection function on or off, or it can be
blocked dynamically via binary inputs.
If one of the criteria (current value, breaker auxiliary contacts) that led to pickup of the
breaker failure scheme is no longer met during the time delay elapses, then breaker
failure timer drops out and no trip signals are issued.
To protect against nuisance tripping due to excessive contact bounce, a stabilization
of the binary inputs for external trip signals takes place. This external signal must be
present during the entire period of the delay time, otherwise the timer is reset and no
tripping signal is issued.
206 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
7004 Chk BRK CONTACT

OFF
„1“ ON
Evaluation No auxiliary contact

>Configured 52-b
of Aux. Cont. is configured Release
>Configured 52-a or
Interm. position
FNo. 04602
>52-b
CB closed
FNo. 04601
>52-a
Internal Source
FNo. 01456
64 TRIP
50BF int Pickup
27 TRIP or 7005 TRIP-Timer
S Q &
59 TRIP T
FNo. 01480
0
R Q or 50BF int TRIP
General TRIP &

&
0212 BkrCl I MIN
Max. of
Ia, Ib, Ic
Ι>
External Source
FNo. 01457
50BF ext Pickup
7005 TRIP-Timer
FNo. 01431 FNo. 01481
T 0
>50BF ext SRC & 50BF ext TRIP
&
0212 BkrCl I MIN

Max. of
Ia, Ib, Ic
Ι>
FNo. 01471
or 50BF TRIP
Measurement/Logic
FNo. 01403
FNo. 01452
>BLOCK 50BF 50BF BLOCK
FNo. 01453
7001 FCT 50BF
or or 50BF ACTIVE
ON FNo. 01451
„1“ OFF 50BF OFF
Figure 2-72 Logic Diagram for the Breaker Failure Protection
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 207

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
General The breaker failure protection function is only effective and available if address 0170
50BF is set to Enabled. If the breaker failure function is not required, then address
0170 should be set to Disabled. The function can be turned ON or OFF under ad-
dress 7001 FCT 50BF.
Criteria Address 7004 Chk BRK CONTACT establishes whether or not a breaker auxiliary con-
tact is used, via a binary input, to detect the position of a circuit breaker. If address
7004 is set to ON, then both the current flow through the circuit breaker and the posi-
tion of the circuit breaker auxiliary contact are used to ascertain the position of the cir-
cuit breaker. This is important if the current is smaller than the configured current
threshold (BkrClosed I MIN, address 0212) despite closed circuit breaker. The lat-
ter may apply if protective tripping was caused by a voltage measurement (e.g. 59, 27,
64). If these protective functions issue a trip command, the criteria for current and aux-
iliary contacts are linked by a logical OR operation. Without the auxiliary contact crite-
rion the circuit breaker failure protection would not be able to take effect in this case.
If address 7004 is set to OFF, only the current flow through the circuit breaker is used
to indicate the position of the circuit breaker.
The current flow monitoring setting programmed at address 0212 BkrClosed I MIN
applies to all three phases, and should be selected such that it is at least 10 % below
the smallest fault current the circuit breaker would interrupt when responding to trip
signals initiated by protective relays. The setting at address 0212 should not be set
too low, otherwise, the danger exists that equalization processes in the current trans-
former secondary circuit could lead to extended drop out times under conditions of ex-
tremely high current to be switched off. In addition, it should be noted that other pro-
tection functions depend on the current flow monitoring settings as well (e.g. voltage
protection, overload protection, and restarting block for motors).
Time Delay The breaker failure time delay setting is entered at address 7005 TRIP-Timer. This
setting should be based on the circuit breaker interrupting time plus the dropout time
of the current flow monitoring element plus a safety margin. Figure 2-73 illustrates the
timing of a typical breaker failure scenario.
Fault Occurs
Normal Fault Clearing Time

Current Flow
Trip. Monitoring Safety
Time Breaker Interrupting Time Drop Out Time Time
Breaker Failure
Pickup
Backup Breaker
Breaker Failure Time Delay Interruption Time
TRIP–Timer (address 7005) (approx.)
Total Fault Clearing Time for Breaker Failure Condition
Figure 2-73 Time Chart for Typical Breaker Failure Operation
208 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
2.15.2.1 Settings for Breaker Failure Protection

7001 FCT 50BF OFF OFF 50BF Breaker Failure Protection
ON
7004 Chk BRK CON- OFF OFF Check Breaker contacts

TACT ON
7005 TRIP-Timer 0.06..60.00 sec; ∞ 0.25 sec TRIP-Timer
2.15.2.2 Information List for Breaker Failure Protection

01403 >BLOCK 50BF >BLOCK 50BF
01431 >50BF ext SRC >50BF initiated externally
01451 50BF OFF 50BF is switched OFF
01452 50BF BLOCK 50BF is BLOCKED
01453 50BF ACTIVE 50BF is ACTIVE
01456 50BF int Pickup 50BF (internal) PICKUP
01457 50BF ext Pickup 50BF (external) PICKUP
01471 50BF TRIP 50BF TRIP
01480 50BF int TRIP 50BF (internal) TRIP
01481 50BF ext TRIP 50BF (external) TRIP
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 209

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
2.16 Synchronism and Voltage Check (7SJ64 only)
General When connecting two components of a power system, the synchronizing feature ver-
ifies that the start does not endanger the stabilty of the power system. Typical appli-
cations are for example the synchronization of a feeder and a busbar (see Figure 2-
74) or the synchronization of two busbar sections via bus coupler (see Figure 2-75).
The configuration decides whether the synchronism check is carried out only for auto-
matic reclosing or only for circuit breaker control or both. It is also possible to specify
different release criteria for automatic close or control close. Synchronous connection
is always accomplished via the integrated control.
For comparing the two voltages the synchronizing functions takes the reference volt-
age V1 and an additional voltage to be connected U2. The reference voltage U1 is con-
nected to the multi-phase system. The voltage to be synchronized U2 is assigned to
the single-phase connection and may be any phase-ground or phase-phase voltage.
Busbar
1
7SJ64
V2
V4
Va
3 V1 Vb
Vc
Ý
Infeed
Figure 2-74 Infeed
If a transformer is switched between the two VT’s (Figure 2-74), its vector group can
be adapted in the 7SJ64 relay so that external adaptors are not required.
The synchronizing feature of 7SJ64 usually cooperates with the integrated automatic
reclosing system and the control function. It is also possible to employ an external au-
tomatic reclosing system. In such a case signal exchange between the devices is ac-
complished via binary inputs and outputs.
210 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Synchronism and Voltage Check (7SJ64 only)
Busbar 1
Busbar 2
7SJ64
1
3
V2
V4
Va
V1 Vb
Vc
Figure 2-75 Bus coupler
Operating Modes The synchronizing function can be operated in two modes:

• Synchrocheck
• Synchron/Asynchron
Synchronous power systems exhibit small differences regarding phase angle and volt-
age modulus. The operating time of the circuit breaker doesn’t have to be taken into
account. The SYNCHROCHECK mode is used which corresponds to the classic synch-
rocheck function.
To the contrary, asynchronous systems include bigger differences and the time win-
dow for switching on is passed more quickly. It is reasonable to consider the operating
time of the circuit breaker. The ASYN/SYNCHRON mode is used.
Functional The synchronizing function only opperates if it receives a measurement request. This
Sequence request may be issued by the control, the automatic reclosing function or externally
via binary input e.g., from an external automatic reclosing system.
The measurement request initiates the measurement (message “25x meas.“; with
x = 1..4, according to the function group). Depending on the selected operating mode,
the configured release conditions are then checked (see side titles “Synchrocheck“ /
„Synchronous/ Asynchronous“).
Each condition is indicated explicitely ( messages “25 Vdiff ok“, “25 fdiff ok“,
“25 adiff ok“); also those conditions that are not fulfilled if, for example, voltage
differences (messages “25 V2>V1”, “25 V2<V1”), frequency differences (messages
“25 f2>f1”, “25 f2<f1”) or angle differences (messages “25 a2>a1”, “25 a2<a1”) are
outside the threshold values. For these messages to be sent, both voltages must lie
within the operating range of the synchronizing function (see side title “Operating
Range”).
These conditions met, the synchronizing function issues a release signal for closing
the relay (“25 CloseRelease“). This release signal is generally processed by the
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 211

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
control which issues the actual close command for controlling the circuit breaker (see
also side title “Interaction with the Control”).
Measuring the synchronism conditions can be confined to the a maximum monitoring
time T-SYN. DURATION. If the conditions are not fulfilled during T-SYN. DURATION,
the release is cancelled (message “25 MonTimeExc“). A new synchronization can
only be performed if a new measurement request is received.
Operating Range The operating range of the synchronizing function is defined by the configured voltage
thresholds Vmin and Vmax, and the fixed frequency band fN ± 3 Hz.
If measurement is started and one or both voltages are outside the operating range,
or one voltage leaves the permissible range, corresponding messages indicate this
behavior (“25 f1>>“, “25 f1<<“, “25 V1>>“, “25 V1<<“, etc.).
Synchrocheck Synchrocheck verifies the synchronism before connecting the two system compo-
nents and cancels the connecting process if parameters for synchronism lie outside
the configured thresholds.
Before a release is granted, the following conditions are checked:
− Is the reference voltage V1 above the value Vmin but below the maximum voltage
Vmax?
− Is the voltage V2 to be synchronized above the setting value Vmin but below the
maximum voltage Vmax?
− Is the voltage difference V2 – V1 within the permitted threshold dV ASYN V2>V1?
− Is the voltage difference V1 – V2 within the permitted threshold dV ASYN V2<V1?
− Are the two frequencies f1 and f2 within the permitted operating range fN ± 3 Hz?
− Is the frequency difference f2 – f1 within the permitted threshold df ASYN f2>f1?
− Is the frequency difference f1 – f2 within the permitted threshold df ASYN f2<f1?
− Is the angle difference ϕ2 – ϕ1 within the permitted threshold da SYNC a2> a1?
− Is the angle difference ϕ1 – ϕ2 within the permitted thresholdda SYNC a2< a1?
Synchronous/ The operating mode “Synchronous/Asynchronous“ uses the frequency slip of the two
Asynchronous power systems (parameter F SYNCHRON) to determine whether the to power systems
are asynchronous to each other (“Switching under Asynchronous System Conditions“)
or synchronous (“Switching under Synchronous System Conditions“). If they are asyn-
chronous, the time window for switching is passed relatively quickly. Therefore, it is
reasonable to take into account the operating time of the circuit breaker. Thus the de-
vice can issue the On command at a time where asynchronous conditions prevail.
When the poles make contact the conditions will be synchronous.
It is thus possible to generally account for the operating time of the circuit breaker i.e.,
also with synchronous conditions prevailing.
Switching under Switching under synchronous conditions means that the On command will be released
Synchronous Sys- as soon as the characteristic data (voltage difference, angle difference) are within the
tem Conditions thresholds specified by configuration.
212 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Before granting a release for closing under synchronous conditions, the following con-
ditions are checked:
− Is the reference voltage V1 above the setting value Vmin but below the maximum
voltage Vmax?
− Is the frequency difference smaller than the configured threshold frequency differ-
ence F SYNCHRON which defines the transition from synchronous to asynchronous
systems.
− Is the angle difference ϕ2 – ϕ1 within the permitted threshold da SYNC a2> a1?
− Is the angle difference ϕ1 – ϕ2 within the permitted threshold da SYNC a2< a1?
All synchronism conditions fulfilled, the message “25 Synchron” is issued.
Switching under For switching under asynchronous system conditions the device determines the time
Asynchronous for issuing the On command from the angle difference and the frequency difference
System Conditions such that the voltages (of busbar and feeder) are identical the instant the poles make
contact. For this purpose the device must be informed on the operating time of the cir-
cuit breaker for closing.
Before granting a release for closing, the following conditions are checked:
− Is the reference voltage V1 above the setting value Vmin but below the maximum
voltage Vmax?
− Is the frequeny difference f2 – f1 within the permitted threshold df ASYN f2>f1?
− Is the frequeny difference f1 – f2 within the permitted threshold df ASYN f2<f1?
When the check has been terminated successfully, the device determines the next
synchronizing time from the angle difference and the frequency difference. The On
command is issued at synchronization time minus operating time of the circuit breaker.
De-energized Connecting two components of a power system is also possible if at least one of the
Switching components is de-energized. Besides release under synchronous conditions, the fol-
lowing additional release conditions can be selected for the check:
− SYNC V1>V2< = Release of the condition that component V1 is energized
and component V2 is de-energized.
− SYNC V1<V2> = Release of the condition stating that component V1 is de-
energized and component V2 is energized.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 213

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
− SYNC V1<V2< = Release of the condition stating that component V1 and

component V2 are de-energized.
Each of these conditions can be enabled or disabled individually; combinations are
also possible (e.g., release if SYNC V1>V2< or SYNC V1<V2> are fulfilled).
The release conditions can be configured individually either for automatic reclosing or
for manual closing. You can for example allow manual closing for synchronism or for
de-energized feeder whereas before an automatic reclosing operation, checking only
de-energized conditions at one feeder terminal and afterwards only synchronism at
the other.
The threshold below which a power system component is considered as de-energized
is defined by parameter V<. If the measured voltage exceeds the threshold V>, it is
energized.
Before granting a release for connecting the energized component V1 and the off-cir-
cuit component V2, the following conditions are checked:
− Is the reference voltage V1 above thesetting value Vmin and V> but below the max-
imum voltage Vmax?
− Is the voltage to be synchronized V2 below the threshold V<?
− Is the frequeny f1 within the permitted operating range fN ± 3 Hz?
After successful termination of the check the release is granted.
Switching the de-energized component 1 to the energized component 2 or connecting
the de-energized component 1 to the equally de-energized component 2 the condi-
tions to be fulfilled are the same.
The associated messages indicating the release via the corresponding condition are
as follows: “25 V1< V2>”, “25 V1> V2<” and “25 V1< V2<”.
Via binary input “>25 V1>V2<”, “>25 V1<V2>” and “>25 V1<V2<” release condi-
tions can be issued externally provided the synchronization is controlled externally.
Parameter TSUP VOLTAGE (address 6x11A) can be set to configure a monitoring time
which requires above stated release conditions to be at least fulfilled for de-energized
connection before switching is allowed.
Direct Command/ Parameter Direct CO can be set to grant a release without performing any checks.
Blocking In this case switching is released by activating the allocated binary input “>25direct
CO”. It is obviously not reasonable to combine Direct CO with other release condi-
tions.
Blocking the entire synchronizing function is possible via the binary input “>BLK 25
CLOSE”. This status is indicated via “25 CLOSE BLK”.
SYNC Function The 7SJ64 relay comprises 4 synchronizing function groups (Function group 1 to 4)
Groups which each contain all setting parameters for one synchronizer. This includes the
switchgear component for which the synchronization settings are to be applied. If no
switchgear component is unambiguously identified here, the synchronizing function
may be used as external synchronizing feature which must be triggered by binary in-
put messages. Allocation of switchgear component and function group is accom-
plished using one of the binary inputs “>25-1 act” to “>25-4 act”.
214 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Selecting one SYNC function group several times, causes output of error message
(“25 FG-Error”).
Interaction with the Basically, the synchronizing feature interacts with the device control. The switchgear
Control component to be synchronized is selected via a parameter. If an On-command is is-
sued, the control accounts for the fact that the switchgear component requires syn-
chronization. The control sends a measurement request (“>25 Measu. Only”) to the
synchronizing function which is then started. Having completed the check, the syn-
chronizing function issues the release message (“25 CloseRelease“) to which the
control responds by terminating the switching operation positively or negatively (see
Figure 2-76).
Close command
(Remote / Local) Synchronizing function
SYNC–FG1
Meas. request Q0
Control
Release
SYNC–FG2
Switchgear
component SYNC–FG3
Q0 SYNC–FG4
Figure 2-76 Interaction of control and synchronizing function
Interaction with IThe automatic reclosing function can also interact with the synchronizing function.
Automatic They are linked via the device control. The selection is made via parameters of the au-
Reclosing tomatic reclosing function. Thereby you can determine which switch is activated and
which function group (FG) is used. If no function group is entered, the close command
of the auto reclose function is carried out in unsychronized form. Equally, the com-
mand “79 Close” (message 02851) allows only unsynchronized switching.
If the circuit breaker Q0 is configured as switching component, a close command of
the automatic reclosing function will address this breaker and assign it a close com-
mand which will be processed by the control. As this breaker requires synchronization,
the control launches the synchronizing function and awaits release. The configured
conditions fulfilled, the release is granted and the control issues the close command
(see Figure 2-77).
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 215

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
79 /
SYNC FG2 → Q0 Synchronizing function
SYNC–FG1
Control Meas. request
SYNC–FG2
AWE → Q0
Release
“79 Close”
(always asyn-
chronized) SYNC–FG3
Switchgear SYNC–FG4
component Q0
Figure 2-77 Connection of the automatic reclosing function to the synchronizing function
Interaction with As another option the synchronizing function can be activated via external measure-
External Control ment request. The synchronizing function can be started via binary input using a mea-
surement request (“>25 Measu. Only” or “>25 Start” and “>25 Stop”).
After the synchronizing function has completed the check, issues a release message
(“25 CloseRelease“, see Figure 2-78).
Synchronizing function 7SJ64
SYNC–FG1
ext. measurement request Q0
(via:
“>25 Measu. Only” or
“>25 Start” and
“>25 Stop”)
SYNC–FG2
SYNC–FG3
Release
SYNC–FG4
(“25 CloseRelease”)
Figure 2-78 Interaction of synchronizing functionand external control
Measured Values The measured values of the synchronizing function are displayed in separate boxes
for primary and secondary measured values and percentages. The measured values
216 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
are displayed and updated only while a synchronizing function is being called. The fol-
lowing values are displayed:
− value of the reference voltage V1
− value of the voltage to be synchronized V2
− Frequency values f1 and f2
− Differences of voltage, frequency and angle.
The models featuring a four-line display have a preset default display which shows the
above mentioned measured values comprised on one display (see Figure A-75 of the
Appendix A.4.5).
2.16.2 Functional Settings
General The synchronizing function is only included in the 7SJ64 relay with its 4 voltage inputs.
While setting the power system data (see Subsection 2.1.3) the device was already
provided with data relevant for the measured values and the operating principle of the
synchronizing function. This concerns the following parameters:
0202 Vnom PRIMARY primary nominal voltage of the voltage transformers V1
(phase-to-phase) in kV;
0203 Vnom SECONDARY secondary nominal voltage of the voltage transformers
V1 (phase-to-phase) in V;
0213 VT Connection determines how voltage transformers are connected;
0214 Rated Frequency the operating range of the synchronizing function refers
to the rated frequency of the power system (fN ± 3 Hz);
The synchronizing function can only operate if enabled under at least one of the ad-
dresses 0161 25 Function 1 through 0164 25 Function 4 during configura-
tion of the functional scope (see Subsection 2.1.1). The operating mode can be pre-
selected: ASYN/SYNCHRON means that switching will take place under synchronous
and asynchronous conditions. SYNCHROCHECK corresponds to the classic synchro-
check function. If not required, this function is set to Disabled. A synchronizing func-
tion group thus rendered ineffective is hidden at the menu item Synchronization,
all others are shown.
Only the corresponding messages of Function Group 1 are pre-allocated for IEC
60870–5–103 (VDEW). If other function groups (2 to 4) are configured and if their mes-
sages are to be disposed of via VDEW, the must first be configured to the the system
interface.
Selecting one of the displayed SYNC function groups in DIGSI® 4 opens a dialog box
with the tabs “General”, “Power System Data”, “Asynchronous Conditions”, “Synchro-
nous Conditions” and “Synchrocheck” in which the individual settings for synchroniza-
tion can be made. For SYNC function group x the following holds:
The general thresholds for the synchronizing function are set at addresses 6x01
through 6x12.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 217

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
Address 6x01 Synchronizing X can be set to switch the entire synchronous func-
tion group x ON or OFF. If switched off, the synchronous check does not verify the syn-
chronizing conditions and release is not granted.
Address 6x02 SyncCB is used to select the switchgear component to which the syn-
chronizing settings will be applied. Select the option none to use the function as ex-
ternal synchronizing feature. It will then be triggered via binary input messages.
Addresses 6x03 Vmin and 6x04 Vmax set the upper and lower limits for the request
band for voltages V1 or V2 and thus determine the operating range for the synchro-
nizing function. If the values leave this band, a message will be output.
Address 6x05 V< indicates the voltage threshold below which the feeder or the bus-
bar can safely be considered switched off (for checking a de-energized feeder or bus-
bar).
Address 6x06 V> indicates the voltage threshold above which the feeder or busbar
can safely be considered energized (for checking an energized feeder or busbar). It
must be set below the anticipated operational undervoltage.
The setting for the mentioned voltage values is made secondary in volts. When using
the PC and DIGSI® 4 for configuration, these values can also be entered as primary
values. Depending on the connection of the voltages these are phase-ground voltages
or phase-phase voltages.
Addresses 6x07 to 6x10 are set to specify the release conditions for the closing
check:
6x07 SYNC V1<V2> = Component V1 must be de-energized, component
V2 must be energized (connection to reference without
voltage, dead line);
6x08 SYNC V1>V2< = Component V1 must be energized, component
V2 must be de-energized (connection to feeder without
voltage, dead bus);
6x09 SYNC V1<V2< = Both V1 and V2 must be without voltage (connection
reference and feeder without voltage, dead bus/dead
bus);
6x10A Direct CO = Command is released without checks.
The possible release conditions are independent of each other and can be combined.
Parameter TSUP VOLTAGE (address 6x11A) can be used to set a monitoring time
which requires above mentioned additional release conditions to be fulfilled at least
before release is granted for switching without voltage The preset value of 0.1 s ac-
counts for transient responses and can be applied without modification.
Release via synchronous check can be limited to a configurable synchronous moni-
toring time T-SYN. DURATION (address 6x12). The configured conditions must be
fulfilled within this time or release is not granted and the synchronizing function is
shed. If this time is set to ∞, the conditions will be checked until they are fulfilled.
218 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
2.16.2.2 Power System Data
The power system data for the synchronizing function are set at addresses 6x20
through 6x25.
The circuit breaker closing time T-CB close at address 6x20 is required if the device
is to close also under asynchronous system conditions, no matter whether for manual
closing, for automatic reclosing after three-pole tripping, or for both. The device will
then calculate the time for the close command such that the voltages are synchronous
the instant the breaker poles make contact. Please note this includes the operating
time of the breaker and also the pickup time of an auxiliary relay that may be connect-
ed on line side.
The parameter Balancing V1/V2 (adress 6x21) can be set to account for different
CT ratios of the two parts of the power system (see example in Figure 2-79).
If a transformer is located between the system parts to be synchronized, its vector
group can be accounted for by angle adjustment so that no external adjusting mea-
sures are required. Parameter ANGLE ADJUSTM. (address 6x22A) is used to this
end.
• The phase angle from V1 to V2 is evaluated positively.
Example (see also Figure 2-79):

Busbar 400 kV primary
100 Vsecondary
Feeder 220 kVprimary
110 Vsecondary
Transformer 400 kV/220 kV
Vector group Dy(n) 5
The transformer vector group is defined from the high side to the low side. In the ex-
ample, the reference voltage transformers (V1) are the ones of the transformer high
side of i.e., the angle 5 x 30° (according to vector group) that is 150°:
Address 6x22A: ANGLE ADJUSTM. = 150°.
The reference voltage transformers supply 100 V secondary for primary operation at
nominal value while the feeder transformer supplies 110 V secondary. Therefore, this
difference must be balanced:
Address 6x21: Balancing V1/V2 = 100 V/110 V = 0.91.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 219

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
L1
L2
Feeder
220 kV
L3
Dy5
220 kV
400 kV/220 kV
110 V
(any voltage)
U2
400 kV/100 V
UL1
UL2 U1 VT Connection = Van,Vbn,Vcn,VSy

UL3 CONNECTIONof V2 = A-B
ANGLE ADJUSTM. = 150°
Balancing V1/V2 = 0.91
A B C
Busbar
400 kV
Figure 2-79 Busbar voltage measured via transformer
Connections 7SJ64 provides three voltage inputs for connection of the voltage V1 and one voltage
input for voltage V2 (see Figure 2-80 and Figure 2-79). According to definition, the
three-phase voltage is the reference voltage V1. To compare the three-phase voltage
V1 and the voltage V2 correctly with each other, the device must be informed on the
connection type of the voltage V2. Address CONNECTIONof V2 assumes this task
(parameter 6x23).
7SJ64
R15 va
R17 Vb
Voltage V1
R18 Vc
R16
R13 V4
Voltage V2
R14
Figure 2-80 Connection of V1 and V2 at device
For the device to perform the internal conversion to primary values, the primary rated
transformer voltage of the measured quantity V2 must be entered via parameter 6x25
VT Vn2, primary if a transformer is located between the system parts to be syn-
chronized.
220 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
2.16.2.3 Asynchronous Conditions
The synchronizing function 7SJ64 can issue a close command also for asynchronous
power systems such that, considering the circuit breaker operating time (address
6x20), the power systems are coupled when the phases are equal.
Parameters 6x30 dV ASYN V2>V1 and 6x31 dV ASYN V2<V1 can be set to adjust
the permissible voltage differences asymmetrically.
Parameters 6x32 df ASYN f2>f1 and 6x33 df ASYN f2<f1 limit the operating
range for asynchronous switching. These two parameters enable an asymmetrical
switching range to be set.
2.16.2.4 Synchronous Conditions
Address 6x40 SYNC PERMIS. activates or deactivate the connection under synchro-
nous system conditions (YES) or (NO).
Address 6x41 F SYNCHRON is an automatic threshold between synchronous and
asynchronous switching. If the frequency difference is below the specified threshold,
the power systems are considered synchronous and the conditions for synchronous
switching apply. If it is above the threshold, the switching is asynchronous and the an-
ticipated in-phase time is calculated.
Address 6x42 dV SYNC V2>V1 and 6x43 dV SYNC V2<V1 can be used to set the
permissible voltage differences asymmetrically.
Address 6x44 da SYNC a2> a1 and 6x45 da SYNC a2< a1 confine the operating
range for synchronous switching. These two parameters allow an asymmetrical
switching range to be configured (see Figure 2-81).
Moreover, the release time delay T SYNC-DELAY (address 6x46) can be set for which
all synchronous conditions must at least be fulfilled for the closing command to be gen-
erated after expiration of this time.
Im
Frequency difference < Parameter 6x41
6x42 dV SYNC V2>V1

6x44 da SYNC a2> a1
6x43 dV SYNC V2<V1
Switch-on range
U1
U2 Re
6x45 da SYNC a2< a1
Figure 2-81 Switching under synchronous system conditions
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 221

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
U
6x42 dV SYNC V2>V1
6x30 dV ASYN V2>V1

asynchronous operating range
synchronous operating range
6x41 F SYNCHRON
6x33 df ASYN f2<f1

6x32 df ASYN f2>f1
6x31 dV ASYN V2<V1
6x43 dV SYNC V2<V1
Figure 2-82 Operating range under synchronous and asynchronous conditions for voltage
(V) and frequency (f)
2.16.2.5 Synchrocheck
Address 6x50 dV SYNCHK V2>V1 and 6x51 dV SYNCHK V2<V1 can be used to
configure the permitted voltage difference also asymmetrically. The availability of two
parameters enables an asymmetrical switch-on range to be set.
Address 6x52 df SYNCHK f2>f1 and 6x53 df SYNCHK f2<f1 determine the
permissible frequency differences. The availability of two parameters enables an
asymmetrical switch-on range to be set.
Addresses 6x54 da SYNCHK a2>a1 and 6x55 da SYNCHK a2<a1 confine the
operating range for synchronous switching. The availability of two parameters enables
an asymmetrical switch-on range to be set.
2.16.3 Settings

6x01 Synchronizing ON OFF Synchronizing Function
OFF
6x02 SyncCB Synchronizable circuit breaker
6x03 Vmin 20..125 V 90 V Minimum voltage limit: Vmin
6x04 Vmax 20..140 V 110 V Maximum voltage limit: Vmax
6x05 V< 1..60 V 5V Threshold V1, V2 without

voltage
6x06 V> 20..140 V 80 V Threshold V1, V2 with voltage
222 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1

6x07 SYNC V1<V2> YES NO ON-Command at V1< and V2>
NO
6x08 SYNC V1>V2< YES NO ON-Command at V1> and V2<

NO
6x09 SYNC V1<V2< YES NO ON-Command at V1< and V2>

NO
6x10A Direct CO YES NO Direct ON-Command

NO
6x11A TSUP VOLTAGE 0.0..60.0 sec 0.1 sec Supervision time of V1>;V2> or
V1<;V2<
6x12 T-SYN. DURATION 0.01..1200.00 sec; ∞ 30.00 sec Maximum duration of Synchroni-
zation
6x20 T-CB close 0.01..0.60 sec 0.06 sec Closing (operating) time of CB
6x21 Balancing V1/V2 0.50..2.00 1.00 Balancing factor V1/V2

6x22A ANGLE ADJUSTM. 0..360 ° 0° Angle adjustment (transformer)
6x23 CONNECTIONof V2 A-G A-B Connection of V2

B-G
C-G
A-B
B-C
C-A
6x25 VT Vn2, primary 0.10..800.00 kV 12.00 kV VT nominal voltage V2, primary
6x30 dV ASYN V2>V1 0.5..40.0 V 2.0 V Maximum voltage difference

V2>V1
6x31 dV ASYN V2<V1 0.5..40.0 V 2.0 V Maximum voltage difference

V2<V1
6x32 df ASYN f2>f1 0.01..2.00 Hz 0.10 Hz Maximum frequency difference

f2>f1
6x33 df ASYN f2<f1 0.01..2.00 Hz 0.10 Hz Maximum frequency difference

f2<f1
6x40 SYNC PERMIS. YES YES Switching at synchronous condi-

NO tions
6x41 F SYNCHRON 0.01..0.04 Hz 0.01 Hz Frequency threshold ASYN <-->

SYN
6x42 dV SYNC V2>V1 0.5..40.0 V 5.0 V Maximum voltage difference

V2>V1
6x43 dV SYNC V2<V1 0.5..40.0 V 5.0 V Maximum voltage difference

V2<V1
6x44 dα SYNC α2> α1 2..80 ° 10 ° Maximum angle difference

alpha2>alpha1
6x45 dα SYNC α2< α1 2..80 ° 10 ° Maximum angle difference

alpha2<alpha1
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 223

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions

6x46 T SYNC-DELAY 0.00..60.00 sec 0.00 sec Release delay at synchronous
conditions
6x50 dV SYNCHK V2>V1 0.5..40.0 V 5.0 V Maximum voltage difference

V2>V1
6x51 dV SYNCHK V2<V1 0.5..40.0 V 5.0 V Maximum voltage difference

V2<V1
6x52 df SYNCHK f2>f1 0.01..2.00 Hz 0.10 Hz Maximum frequency difference

f2>f1
6x53 df SYNCHK f2<f1 0.01..2.00 Hz 0.10 Hz Maximum frequency difference

f2<f1
6x54 dα SYNCHK α2>α1 2..80 ° 10 ° Maximum angle difference

alpha2>alpha1
6x55 dα SYNCHK α2<α1 2..80 ° 10 ° Maximum angle difference

alpha2<alpha1
2.16.4 List of Information
The following table lists the alarms of SYNC function group 1. Alarms of function
groups 2 to 4 are nearly the same, only their group number is different.

170.0001 >25-1 act >25-group 1 activate
170.2008 >BLK 25-1 >BLOCK 25-group 1
170.2102 >BLK 25 CLOSE >BLOCK 25 CLOSE command
170.2009 >25direct CO >25 Direct Command output
170.0043 >25 Measu. Only >25 Sync. Measurement Only
170.2011 >25 Start >25 Start of synchronization
170.2012 >25 Stop >25 Stop of synchronization
170.2013 >25 V1>V2< >25 Switch to V1> and V2<
170.2014 >25 V1<V2> >25 Switch to V1< and V2>
170.2015 >25 V1<V2< >25 Switch to V1< and V2<
170.2007 25 Measu. req. 25 Sync. Measuring request of Control
170.0049 25 CloseRelease 25 Sync. Release of CLOSE Command
170.0050 25 Sync. Error 25 Synchronization Error
170.2022 25-1 meas. 25-group 1: measurement in progress
170.0051 25-1 BLOCK 25-group 1 is BLOCKED
224 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1

170.2103 25 CLOSE BLK 25 CLOSE command is BLOCKED
170.2101 25-1 OFF Sync-group 1 is switched OFF
170.2025 25 MonTimeExc 25 Monitoring time exceeded
170.2026 25 Synchron 25 Synchronization conditions okay
170.2027 25 V1< V2> 25 Condition V1<V2> fulfilled
170.2028 25 V1> V2< 25 Condition V1>V2< fulfilled
170.2029 25 V1< V2< 25 Condition V1<V2< fulfilled
170.2030 25 Vdiff ok 25 Voltage difference (Vdiff) okay
170.2031 25 fdiff ok 25 Frequency difference (fdiff) okay
170.2032 25 αdiff ok 25 Angle difference (alphadiff) okay
170.2033 25 f1>> 25 Frequency f1 > fmax permissible
170.2034 25 f1<< 25 Frequency f1 < fmin permissible
170.2035 25 f2>> 25 Frequency f2 > fmax permissible
170.2036 25 f2<< 25 Frequency f2 < fmin permissible
170.2037 25 V1>> 25 Voltage V1 > Umax permissible
170.2038 25 V1<< 25 Voltage V1 < Umin permissible
170.2039 25 V2>> 25 Voltage V2 > Umax permissible
170.2040 25 V2<< 25 Voltage V2 < Umin permissible
170.2090 25 V2>V1 25 Vdiff too large (V2>V1)
170.2091 25 V2<V1 25 Vdiff too large (V2<V1)
170.2092 25 f2>f1 25 fdiff too large (f2>f1)
170.2093 25 f2<f1 25 fdiff too large (f2<f1)
170.2094 25 α2>α1 25 alphadiff too large (a2>a1)
170.2095 25 α2<α1 25 alphadiff too large (a2<a1)
170.2096 25 FG-Error 25 Multiple selection of func-groups
170.2097 25 Set-Error 25 Setting error
170.2050 V1 = V1 =
170.2051 f1 = f1 =
170.2052 V2 = V2 =
170.2053 f2 = f2 =
170.2054 dV = dV =
170.2055 df = df =
170.2056 dα = dalpha =
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 225

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
2.17 Temperature Detection via RTD-boxes
Up to two temperature detection units (RTD-boxes) with 12 measuring sensors in total

can be applied for temperature detection and are recognized by the device. In partic-
ular they enable the thermal status of motors, generators and transformers to be mon-
itored. Rotating machines are additionally monitored for a violation of the bearing tem-
perature thresolds. The temperatures are measured in different locations of the pro-
tected object by employing temperature sensors (RTD = Resistance Temperature De-
tector) and are transmitted to the device via one or two RTD-boxes 7XV566.
Interaction with the The ambient temperature or coolant temperature can be transmitted to the overload
Overload protection of the device via the RTD-box. The temperature detector required for this
Protection purpose must be connected to the detector input 1 of the first RTD-box (corresponds
to RTD 1).
RTD-box 7XV56 The RTD-box 7XV566 is an external unit which is mounted on the top-hat rail. It fea-
tures 6 temperature detectors and one RS485 interface for communication with the
protection device. The RTD-box detects the coolant temperature of each measuring
point from the resistance value of the temperature detectors (Pt100, Ni100 or Ni120)
connected via a two- or three-wire lines and converts it to a digital value. The digital
values are held available at a serial port.
Communication The protection device can employ up to two RTD-boxes via its service port (port C),
with the Protection 7SJ64 also via the additional port (port D).
Device
A maximum of 12 temperature detectors is thus available. For greater distances to the
protection device the communication via fibre optic cables is recommend. Possible
communication structures are shown in Appendix A.3.4.
Processing The transmitted non-linearized temperature values are converted to a temperature in

Temperatures degree Celsius or Fahrenheit. The conversion depends on the temperature sensor
used.
For each temperature detector two thresholds decision can be performed which are
available for further processing. The user can make the corresponding allocations in
the configuration matrix.
An alarm is issued for each temperature sensor in the event of a short-circuit or inter-
ruption in the sensor circuit.
Figure 2-83 shows the logic diagram of the temperature processing.
The manual supplied with the RTD-box contains a connections diagram and dimen-
sioned drawing.
226 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Temperature Detection via RTD-boxes
9011A RTD 1 TYPE 9013 RTD 1 STAGE 1
Non-linear- Temperature
ized values RTD 1 St.1 p.up
calculation
FNo. 14112
9015 RTD 1 STAGE 2
RTD 1 St.2 p.up

FNo. 14113
Moni-
toring Fail: RTD 1
FNo. 14111
≥1 Fail: RTD
FNo. 14101
Fail: RTD-Box 1
FNo. 00264
Figure 2-83 Logic diagram of the temperature processing for the RTD-box 1
2.17.2 Configuration Notes
General Temperature detection is only effective and accessible if this function was allocated to
an interface during configuration of the protective functions (Subsection 2.1.1). At ad-
dress 0190 RTD-BOX INPUT the RTD-box(es) is allocated to the interface at which
it will be operated (e.g. port C). The number of sensor inputs and the communication
mode were set at address 0191 RTD CONNECTION. The temperature unit (°C or °F)
was set in the Power System Data 1 at address 0276 TEMP. UNIT.
Device Settings The settings are the same for each input and are here shown at the example of mea-
suring input 1.
Set the type of temperature detector for RTD1 (temperature sensor for measuring
point 1) at address 9011A RTD 1 TYPE. You can choose between Pt 100 W, Ni
120 W and Ni 100 W. If no temperature detector is available for RTD1, set RTD 1
TYPE = Not connected. This setting is only possible via DIGSI® 4 at “Additional
Settings“.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 227

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
The mounting location of RTD1 is set at address 9012A RTD 1 LOCATION. You can
choose between Oil, Ambient, Winding, Bearing and Other. This setting is only
possible via DIGSI® 4 at “Additional Settings“.
Furthermore, you can set an alarm temperature and a tripping temperature. Depend-
ingn on the temperature unit selected in Power System Data (section below address
0276 TEMP. UNIT), you can enter the alarm temperature at address 9013 RTD 1
STAGE 1 in degree Celsius (°C) or in degree Fahrenheit (°F) at address 9014 RTD
1 STAGE 1. The tripping temperature is set at address 9015 RTD 1 STAGE 2 in
degree Celsius (°C) or degree Fahrenheit (°F) at address 9016 RTD 1 STAGE 2.
The settings for the all other connected temperature detectors are made accordingly
(see Settings 2.17.2.1).
RTD-box If temperature detectors are used with two-wire connection, the line resistance (for
Settings short-circuited temperature detector) must be measured and adjusted. For this pur-
pose, select mode 6 in the RTD-box and enter the resistance value for the correspond-
ing temperature detector (range 0 to 50.6 Ω). If a 3-wire connection is used, no further
settings are required to this end.
A baudrate of 9600 bits/s ensures communication. Parity is even. The factory setting
of the bus number 0. Modifications at the RTD-box can be made in mode 7. The fol-
lowing convention applies:
Table 2-19 Setting the bus address at the RTD-box
Mode Number of RTD-boxes Address

simplex 1 0
half duplex 1 1
1st RTD-box: 1
half duplex 2
2nd RTD-box: 2
Further information is provided in the operating manual of the RTD-box.
Processing The RTD-box is visible in DIGSI® 4 as part of the 7SJ62/63/64 relays i.e., messages
Measured Values and measured values are displayed in the configuration matrix besides the internal
and Messages functions and like them they can be masked and processed. Messages and measured
values can thus be forwarded to the integrated user-defined logic (CFC) and intercon-
nected as desired.
If it is desired that a message should appear in the event buffer, a cross must be en-
tered in the intersecting box of column/row.
228 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
2.17.2.1 Settings

9011A RTD 1 TYPE not connected Pt 100 Ohm RTD 1: Type
Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm
9012A RTD 1 LOCATION Oil Oil RTD 1: Location

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
9013 RTD 1 STAGE 1 -50..250 °C; ∞ 100 °C RTD 1: Temperature Stage 1

Pickup
9014 RTD 1 STAGE 1 -58..482 °F; ∞ 212 °F RTD 1: Temperature Stage 1

Pickup

Pickup

Pickup
9021A RTD 2 TYPE not connected not connected RTD 2: Type

Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm
9022A RTD 2 LOCATION Oil Other RTD 2: Location

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other

Pickup

Pickup

Pickup

Pickup

Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 229

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions

Pickup

Pickup

Pickup

Pickup

Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other

Pickup

Pickup

Pickup

Pickup

Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
Pickup

Pickup

Pickup

Pickup

Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm
230 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other

Pickup

Pickup

Pickup

Pickup

Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other

Pickup

Pickup

Pickup

Pickup

Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other

Pickup

Pickup

Pickup
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 231

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions

Pickup

Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other

Pickup

Pickup

Pickup

Pickup
9101A RTD10 TYPE not connected not connected RTD10: Type

Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm
9102A RTD10 LOCATION Oil Other RTD10: Location

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
9103 RTD10 STAGE 1 -50..250 °C; ∞ 100 °C RTD10: Temperature Stage 1

Pickup
9104 RTD10 STAGE 1 -58..482 °F; ∞ 212 °F RTD10: Temperature Stage 1

Pickup

Pickup

Pickup

Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other

Pickup
232 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1

Pickup

Pickup

Pickup

Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other

Pickup

Pickup

Pickup

Pickup
2.17.2.2 List of Information
Note: Further alarms regarding thresholds of the individual temperature detectors are available at the RTD-box
for output via relay contacts.

00264 Fail: RTD-Box 1 Failure: RTD-Box 1
14101 Fail: RTD Fail: RTD (broken wire/shorted)
14111 Fail: RTD 1 Fail: RTD 1 (broken wire/shorted)
14112 RTD 1 St.1 p.up RTD 1 Temperature stage 1 picked up
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 233

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions

00267 Fail: RTD-Box 2 Failure: RTD-Box 2
14201 Fail: RTD10 Fail: RTD10 (broken wire/shorted)
14202 RTD10 St.1 p.up RTD10 Temperature stage 1 picked up
234 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Phase Rotation
2.18 Phase Rotation
2.18.1 Description of Phase Rotation
General Various functions of the 7SJ62/63/64 only function correctly if the phase rotation of the
voltages and currents is known. Among these functions are negative sequence pro-
tection, undervoltage protection (based only on positive sequence voltages), direc-
tional overcurrent protection, and measurement quantity monitors. A phase rotation is
implemented in the 7SJ62/63/64 device using binary inputs and settings, thus making
it possible for all protective and monitoring functions to operate correctly when the
phase rotation is reversed.
If an “acb” phase rotationphase rotation is normal, the appropriate setting should be
entered at address 0209. (See Subsection 2.1.3).
If the phase rotation can change during operation (e.g. the direction of a motor must
be routinely changed), then a changeover signal at the input masked for this purpose
is sufficient to inform the protective relay of the phase rotation changeover.
Logic As stated before, the phase rotation is always established at address 0209 PHASE
SEQ.. The binary input (FNo. 05145, “>Reverse Rot.”) sets the phase rotation for
the opposite of the setting at 0209, via the exclusive-OR function (see Figure 2-84).
FNo. 05145
>Reverse Rot.. FNo. 05147
XOR Rotation ABC
0209 PHASE SEQ. FNo. 05148
Rotation ACB
„1“ A B C Opposite Phase Sequence
„0“ A C B
To The Protective Functions
Figure 2-84 Message Logic for the phase rotation Changeover
Influence on Pro- The swapping of phases directly impacts the calculation of positive and negative se-
tective Functions quence quantities, as well as phase-to-phase voltages via the subtraction of one
phase-to-ground voltage from another. Therefore, this function is vital so that phase
detection messages, fault values, and operating measurement values are not falsified.
As stated before, this function influences the negative sequence protection function,
directional overcurrent protection function, and some of the monitoring functions (see
Subsection 2.10.1.3) that issue messages if the required and calculated phase rota-
tions do not match.
The normal phase sequence is set at 0209 PHASE SEQ. (see Subsection 2.1.3).
If, on the system side, phase rotation are made temporarily, then these are communi-
cated to the protective device using the binary input “>Reverse Rot.”, FNo. 05145.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 235

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
2.19 Protection Function Logic
The function logic is the heart of the device. It coordinates the sequence of both the
protective and auxiliary functions, processes functional decisions, and processes data
received from the system. In particular, the function logic is responsible for the follow-
ing:
• Processing Measurement and Detection Logic
• Processing Tripping Logic
2.19.1 Pickup Logic for the Entire Device
General Device The pickup signals for all protective functions in the device are connected via an “OR”
Pickup and function, and lead to the general device pickup. General device pickup is initiated by
Dropout the first function to pickup, and general device drop out occurs when the last function
drops out. A corresponding message indicating that general device pickup has oc-
curred is reported.
General device pickup is a precondition for a series of internal and external functions
that occur subsequently. The following are among the internal functions controlled by
general device pickup:
• Start of Trip Log: From general device pickup to general device drop out, all fault
messages are entered in the trip log.
• Initialization of Oscillographic Records: The storage and maintenance of oscillo-
graphic values can also be made dependent on the general device pickup.
External functions can be controlled by general device pickup, using an output con-
tact. Examples are:
• Restarting devices
• Starting of additional devices, or similar
2.19.2 Tripping Logic of the Entire Device
2.19.2.1 Description
General Trip The tripping signals for all protective functions are connected by “OR” and generate a
message indicating that the device has initiated a trip signal.
This message can be configured to an LED or binary output, just as the individual trip-
ping messages can.
Terminating the • All trip signals from a protection function hold the 00511 “Relay TRIP” function,
Tripping Signal and start the minimum trip signal duration timer (set at address 210A TMin TRIP
CMD, see Figure 2-85). This trip signal duration timer ensures the trip signal is trans-
236 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Protection Function Logic
mitted to the circuit breaker for a sufficient amount of time, even if the function which
issued the trip signal drops out quickly. The trip signal is only terminated after all
protection functions drop out AND the minimum trip signal duration expires.
• Finally, it is possible to latch the trip signal until it is manually reset (lockout func-
tion). The reset takes place either by pressing the LED reset key or by activating an
appropriately masked binary input. A precondition, of course, is that the circuit
breaker trip coil – as usual – remains energized at the circuit breaker as long as the
trip signal is present, and that the trip coil current is interrupted by the auxiliary con-
tacts of the circuit breaker.
Protective
FNo. 000511
Functions
From
Trip S Q Relay TRIP

R
0210A TMin TRIP CMD

&
Lockout–Function
(Output Relay Stored) S Q
Lockout Reset
R
(Using LED–Reset)
Figure 2-85 Terminating the Trip Signal
2.19.2.2 Programming Settings for Tripping Logic
Trip Signal Dura- The setting of the minimum trip signal duration at address 0210A TMin TRIP CMD
tion was already discussed in Subsection 2.1.3. This time is valid for all protective func-
tions that can initiate trip signals, as well as for trip signals that are initiated using the
device function controller.
Addr. Setting Setting Options Default Setting Comment

210 TMin TRIP CMD 0.01 ~ 32.00 s 0.15 s Minimum Trip Command Duration
2.19.3 Statistical Counters
2.19.3.1 Description
Number of Trips The number of trips initiated by the 7SJ62/63/64 is counted, as long as the position of
the circuit breaker is monitored via breaker auxiliary contacts and binary inputs. For
this purpose it is necessary to allocate the internal pulse counter “Number of TRIPs“
to a binary input in the configuration matrix which is controlled by the TRIP position of
the circuit breaker. The pulse count “Number of TRIPs“ can be found in the “Statistics“
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 237

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
group if the option “Measured and metered values only” was enabled in the configu-
ration matrix.
Number of The number of reclosing commands initiated by the automatic reclosing function is
Automatic summed up in separate counters for the 1st and ≥ 2nd cycle.
Reclosing
Commands
Fault Current Furthermore, the fault current in each pole of the circuit breaker is determined for each
trip signal. The fault current is indicated in the fault messages and is added to previ-
ously stored fault current values in the statistic-counters to maintain an accumulation
of fault currents, per pole, experienced by the breaker over time.
Operating hours The operating hours under load are also stored (the current value in at least one phase
is larger than the limit value set under address 0212 BkrClosed I MIN). The
counter and memory levels are secured against loss of auxiliary voltage.
2.19.3.2 Reading/Setting/Resetting
SIPROTEC® 4–System Manual describes how to read out the statistical counters via
the device front panel or DIGSI® 4. Setting or resetting of the statistical counters listed
above takes place under the menu item ANNUNCIATION → STATISTIC by overwrit-
ing the counter values shown.
238 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Auxiliary Functions
2.20 Auxiliary Functions
The auxiliary functions of the 7SJ62/63/64 relay include:

G Message Processing
G Measurements
G Waveform Capture
G Commissioning Aids
2.20.1 Message Processing
After the occurrence of a system fault, data regarding the response of the protective
relay and the measured quantities should be saved for future analysis. For this reason
message processing is done in three ways:
• LED Display and Binary Outputs (Output Relays)
• Information via Display Field or Personal Computer
• Information to a Control Center
LED Display and Bi- Important events and conditions are displayed, using LEDs on the front panel of the
nary Outputs (Out- relay. The relay also contains output relays for remote signaling. All LEDs and binary
put Relays) outputs indicating specific messages can be freely configured. The relay is delivered
with a default setting. The SIPROTEC® 4 System Manual gives a detailed description
of the configuration procedure. The Appendix of this manual deals in detail with the
delivery status and the allocation options.
The output relays and the LEDs can be operated in a latched or unlatched mode (in-
dividually settable for each one).
The latched conditions are protected against loss of the auxiliary voltage. They are re-
established after restart of the device. However they can be reset as follows:
− On site by pressing the LED key on the relay.
− Remotely using a binary input configured for that purpose.
− Using one of the serial interfaces.
− Automatically at the beginning of a new pickup.
Condition messages should not be stored. Also, they cannot be reset until the criterion
to be reported is cleared. This applies to messages from monitoring functions, or sim-
ilar.
A green LED (“RUN”) displays operational readiness of the relay, and cannot be reset.
It goes out if the self-check feature of the microprocessor recognizes an abnormal oc-
currence, or if the auxiliary voltage is lost.
When auxiliary voltage is present, but the relay has an internal malfunction, then the
red LED (“ERROR”) lights up and the processor blocks the relay.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 239

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
Fault Information Events and conditions can be read out on the display on the front cover of the relay.
Display or Personal Using the front PC interface or the rear service interface, a personal computer can be
Computer connected, to which the information can be sent.
The relay is equipped with several event buffers, for operational messages, circuit
breaker statistics, etc., which are protected against loss of the auxiliary voltage by a
buffer battery. These messages can be retrieved, at any time, using the operating key-
pad in the display field, or transferred to a personal computer, using the serial operat-
ing interface. Readout of messages during operation is described in detail in the
SIPROTEC® 4–System Manual.
Division of The messages are categorized as follows:

Messages
• Event Log: These are message that can occur during the operation of the device.
They include information about the status of device functions, measurement data,
system data, recording of control commands, and similar information.
• Trip Log: Fault messages are message from the last 8 network faults that were pro-
cessed by the device.
• Sensitive Ground Fault Log: Ground fault messages, if the device has sensitive
ground fault detection.
• Statistics: These values include a counter for the trip commands initiated by the de-
vice, accumulated currents interrupted by the individual poles of the circuit breaker,
and the operating hours of the network or equipment being protected.
A complete list of all message and output functions that can be generated by the de-
vice, with the associated information number (FNo), can be found in the Appendix.
The lists also indicate where each message can be sent. The lists are based on a
SIPROTEC® 4 device with the maximum number of functions. If functions are not
present in the specific version of the device, or if they are set as “Disabled” in Device
Configuration, then the associated messages cannot appear.
2.20.1.1 Event Log (Operating messages)
The Event Log contains operating messages that the device generates during opera-
tion. All operating messages are stored in the Annunciation Logs. Up to 200 operat-
ing messages are recorded in chronological order in the device. New messages are
added at the end of the list. If the memory has been exceeded, then the oldest mes-
sage is written-over for each new message.
2.20.1.2 Trip Log (Fault messages)
After a short-circuit fault on the system, for example, important information about the
progression of the fault can be retrieved, such as the pickup of a protective element or
the initiation of a trip signal. The time the initial occurrence of the short-circuit fault oc-
curred is accurately provided via the system clock. Time progression of the short-cir-
cuit fault is reported based on the moment of pickup, so that the duration, until the trip
signal is issued and interrupted, is available. The time resolution used for reporting is
1 ms.
240 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Auxiliary Functions
Spontaneous The spontaneous messages that can be viewed on the device front serve to display
messages the most important data about a fault. For devices featuring a four-line text display the
messages appear automatically in the display, after a general pickup of the device, in
the sequence shown in Figure 2-86.
If the device features a grahpical display, these messages will only occur if spontane-
ous fault messages were set at address 0611 unlike the default setting.
50–1 picked up Protective Function that picked up first;

50–1 TRIP Protective Function that dropped out last;
T – Pickup= 320ms Running time from general pickup to dropout;
T – OFF = 197ms Running time from general pickup to the first trip command
Figure 2-86 Display of Spontaneous Messages in the HMI – Example
Retrieved The messages for the last eight network faults can be retrieved. The definition of a net-
messages work fault is such that the time period from fault detection up to final clearing of the
disturbance is considered to be one network fault. If auto-reclosing occurs, then the
network fault ends after the last reclosing shot, which means after a successful reclos-
ing or lockout. Therefore the entire clearing process, including all reclosing shots, oc-
cupies only one fault record. Within a network fault, several indications can occur
(from the first pickup of a protective function to the last dropout of a protective func-
tion). These indications are recorded.
In total 600 indications can be recorded. Oldest data are erased for newest data when
the buffer is full.
2.20.1.3 Ground Fault Messages
For devices with sensitive ground fault detection, special ground fault records are
available. Messages are provided if the protection is set for “Alarm Only” in Address
3101, and the ground fault remains long enough for the time delay T-DELAY Pickup
to expire.
Up to 15 messages can be recorded for the last 3 faults.
2.20.1.4 General Interrogation
The general interrogation which can be retrieved via DIGSI® 4 enables the current sta-
tus of the SIPROTEC® device to be read out. All messages requiring general interro-
gation are displayed with their present value.
2.20.1.5 Spontaneous Messages
The spontaneous annunciations that can be displayed via DIGSI® 4 are refreshed im-
mediately, an event or status change occur.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 241

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
2.20.1.6 Statistics
The messages in statistics are counters for the accumulation of interrupted current by
each of the breaker poles, the number of trips issued by the device to the breaker, and
the operating hours of the breaker and protected equipment. The interrupted currents
are in primary terms.
Statistics can be viewed on the LCD of the device, or on a PC running DIGSI® 4 and
connected to the operating or service interface.
A password is not required to read statistics; however, a password is required to
change or delete the statistics.
Transmitting If the device features a serial system port, stored information can be transmitted to a
Information to a central control and storage unit. Transmission is possible via different transmission
Control Center protocols.
2.20.2 Measurements
Display of A series of measured values and the values derived from them are constantly avail-
Measured Values able for call up on site, or for data transfer (See table 2-20, as well as the following list).
A precondition for correctly displaying the primary and percentage values is complete
and correct entry of the nominal values for the voltage transformers, current transform-
ers, and protected equipment, in accordance with Subsections 2.1.3 and 2.1.6. Table
2-20 shows the formulas which are the basis for the conversion from secondary values
into primary values and percentages.
Tabelle 2-20 Conversion formula between secondary values and primary/percentage values
Measured Value Second Primary %
ary
IA, IB, IC, ISEC.
I1, I2 CT PRIMARY I prim.
------------------------------------------- ⋅ I SEC. --------------------------------------
CT SECONDARY FullScaleCurr.
IN = 3⋅I0 IN SEC.
(calculated) CT PRIMARY I N prim.
------------------------------------------- ⋅ I N SEC. --------------------------------------
CT SECONDARY FullScaleCurr.
IN = measured IN SEC.
value of the Ignd – CT PRIM I N prim.
-------------------------------------------- ⋅ I N SEC. --------------------------------------
I4 input Ignd – CT SEC FullScaleCurr.
INs INs SEC.

(Irms Ignd – CT PRIM I Ns prim.
-------------------------------------------- ⋅ I Ns SEC. --------------------------------------
Ireal, Ignd – CT SEC FullScaleCurr.
Ireactive)
242 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Auxiliary Functions
Tabelle 2-20 Conversion formula between secondary values and primary/percentage values
Measured Value Second Primary %
ary
VA, VB, VC, Vφg SEC.
V0, V1, V2, Vnom PRIMARY V prim.
-------------------------------------------------- ⋅ V φg SEC. -----------------------------------------------------
Vsynchr. Vnom SECONDARY FullScaleVolt. ⁄ ( 3 )
VA-B, VB-C, VC-A Vφφ SEC.
Vnom PRIMARY V prim.
-------------------------------------------------- ⋅ V φφ SEC. ------------------------------------
Vnom SECONDARY FullScaleVolt.
VN VN SEC.
Vnom PRIMARY V prim.
Vph ⁄ Vdelta ⋅ -------------------------------------------------- ⋅ V N SEC. ------------------------------------------------
Vnom SECONDARY 3 ⋅ FullScaleVolt.
P, Q, S no secondary values
(P and Q phase- Power
prim.
separated) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3 ⋅ (FullScaleVolt.) ⋅ (FullScaleCurr.)
Power factor cos ϕ cos ϕ cos ϕ · 100 in %

(phase-separat-
ed)
Frequency f in Hz f in Hz
f in Hz
----------------- ⋅ 100
f Nenn
Parameter Adresse Parameter Adresse

Vnom PRIMARY 0202 Ignd-CT PRIM 0217
Vnom SECONDARY 0203 Ignd-CT SEC 0218
CT PRIMARY 0204 FullScaleVolt. 1101
CT SECONDARY 0205 FullScaleCurr. 1102
Vph / Vdelta 0206A
Depending on the type of device ordered and the device connections, some of the op-
erating measured values listed below may not be available. The phase-to-ground volt-
ages are either measured directly, if the voltage inputs are connected phase-to-
ground, or they are calculated from the phase-to-phase voltages Vab and Vbc and the
displacement voltage V0.
The displacement voltage is either measured directly or calculated from the phase-to-
ground voltages:
Vgn = 3V0/(Vph / Vdelta) with:

3V0 = (Va + Vb + Vc)
Vph/Vdelta = Transformation adjustment for ground
input voltage (setting 0206A)
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 243

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
The ground current IG is either measured directly or calculated from the conductor cur-
rents:
3 ⋅ I0 mit 3I0 = (Ia + Ib + Ic)
I G = ----------------------------------- Ignd-CT = Parameter 0217 or 0218
I gnd-CT ⁄ ( CT )
CT = Parameter 0204 or 0205
In addition, the following may be available:

− Minimum and maximum values for the three phase currents Ix; the three phase-
to-ground voltages Vxg; the three phase-to-phase voltages Vxy; the positive se-
quence components I1 and V1; the displacement voltage V0; the thermal measured
values of the overload protection Θ/ΘTrip; the real power P, reactive power Q, and
apparent power S; the frequency; and the power factor cos ϕ; primary values. In-
cluded are the date and time they were last updated.
− The long-term averages of the three phase currents Ix; the positive sequence
components I1 for the three phase currents; and the real power P, reactive power
Q, and apparent power S; in primary values. The period of time for averaging is se-
lectable.
− Minimum and maximum values for the above mentioned long-term averages,
including the date and time they were last updated, in primary values.
− Real and reactive energy flow (including direction of flow) in kWh, MWh, or GWh
primary; or in kVArh, MVArh, or GVArh primary. The measured-value resolution can
be configured.
− Θ/ΘTrip overload protection value for stator in % of the trip initiating excessive
temperature,
− Θ/ΘTrip thermal measured value of the restart inhibit (rotor winding),
− ΘRESTART restarting limit of the restart inhibit
− ΘRTD 1 to ΘRTD 12 temperature values at the RTD-boxes.
The measured values are updated at a period of ≥ 0.3 s and ≤ 1 s.

The minimum and maximum values are listed with the date and time of the latest up-
date. Using binary inputs or a SCADA interface, the maximum and minimum values
can be reset. In addition, the reset can also take place cyclically, beginning with a pre-
selected point in time.
For the long-term averages mentioned above, the length of the time window for aver-
aging and the frequency with which it is updated can be set. The associated minimum
and maximum values can be reset, using binary inputs or by using the integrated con-
trol panel in the DIGSI® 4 operating program.
Transfer of Measured values can be retrieved by SCADA, or through DIGSI® 4.

Measured Values
Set points To recognize extraordinary operational conditions, warning levels can be pro-
grammed. When a programmed limit value is exceeded (or fallen below), a message
244 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Auxiliary Functions
is generated that can be masked to both output relays and LEDs. In contrast to the
actual protective functions, such as time-overcurrent protection or overload protection,
this monitoring program may becomes lower.
Ex works, the following individual limit value levels are configured:
− Exceeding a preset maximum average current in Phase A
− Exceeding a preset maximum average current in Phase B
− Exceeding a preset maximum average current in Phase C
− Exceeding a preset maximum average positive sequence current
− Exceeding a preset maximum average real power
− Exceeding a preset maximum average reactive power
− Exceeding a preset maximum average apparent power
− Exceeding a preset temperature
− Falling below a preset pressure
− Falling below a preset current in any phase
− Falling below a preset power factor
2.20.3 Commissioning Aids
2.20.3.1 Test Messages to the SCADA Interface during Test Operation
If the SIPROTEC®4 device is connected to a central or main computer system via the
SCADA interface, then the information that is transmitted can be influenced. This is
only possible with some of the protocols available (see Table “Protocol-dependent
functions” in the Appendix).
Depending on the type of protocol, all messages and measured values transferred to
the central control system can be identified with an added message “test operation”-
bit while the device is being tested onsite (test mode). This identification prevents the
messages from being incorrectly interpreted as resulting from an actual power system
disturbance or event. As another option, all messages and measured values normally
transferred via the SCADA interface can be blocked during the testing (block data
transmission).
Data transmission block can be accomplished by controlling binary inputs, by using
the operating panel on the device, or with a PC and DIGSI® 4 via the operator inter-
face.
The activation and deactivation of the test mode and transmission block is described
in detail in the SIPROTEC® 4 System Manual.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 245

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
2.20.3.2 Testing System Ports
If the device features a system port and uses it to communicate with the control center,
the DIGSI® 4 device operation can be used to test if messages are transmitted cor-
rectly.
A dialog box shows the display texts of all messages which were allocated to the sys-
tem interface in the configuration matrix. In another column of the dialog box you can
specify a value for the messages you intend to test (e.g. ON/OFF). Having entered
password no. 6 (for hardware test menus) a message can then be generated. The as-
sociated message will be issued and can then be retrieved in the operational annun-
ciations of the SIPROTEC® device and also in the control center of the station.
A detailed description of the procedure is given in Subsection 3.3.2.
2.20.3.3 Checking the Binary Inputs and Outputs
The binary inputs, outputs, and LEDs of a SIPROTEC®4 device can be individually
and precisely controlled in DIGSI® 4. This feature can be used, for example, to verify
control wiring from the device to substation equipment (operational checks), during
start-up.
A dialog box shows all binary inputs and outputs and LEDs of the device with their
present status. The operating equipment, commands, or messages that are config-
ured (masked) to the hardware components are displayed also. After entering pass-
word no. 6 (for hardware test menus), you can switch to the opposite status in another
column of the dialog box. You can energize every single output relay to check the wir-
ing between 7SJ62/63/64 and the system without having to create the alarm allocated
to it.
Subsection 3.3.3 gives a detailed description of the procedure.
2.20.3.4 Triggering Oscillographic Recordings
At the end of commissioning, an investigation of the stability of the protection during

closing operations. For this, closing test should be carried out. Oscillographic event
recordings obtain the maximum information about the behavior of the 7SJ62/63/64.
Along with the capability of storing waveform data and SER information for faults, the
7SJ62/63/64 also has the capability of capturing the same data when commands are
given to the device via the service program DIGSI® 4, the serial interface, or a binary
input. For the latter, the binary input must be masked with event 4,
“>Trig.Wave.Cap.”. Triggering for the oscillographic recording then occurs when
the input is energized. An auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker or primary switch may
be used to control the binary input for triggering.
An oscillographic recording that is externally triggered (that is, without a protective el-
ement pickup or device trip) is processed by the device as a normal oscillographic re-
cording with the exception that data are not given in the Trip Log for the event. The
externally triggered record has a number for establishing a sequence.
Subsection 3.3.15 gives a detailed description of the procedure.
246 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Auxiliary Functions
Average Calcula- The selection of the time period for measured value averaging is set at address 8301
tion DMD Interval. The first number specifies the averaging time window in minutes
while the second number gives the frequency of updates within the time window. A set-
ting of 15 Min., 3 Subs, for example, means that time average generation occurs
for all measured values that arrive within 15 minutes, and that output is updated three
times during the 15 minute window, or every 15/3 = 5 minutes.
The point in time where averaging begins (On The Hour, 15 After Hour, 30
After Hour or 45 After Hour) is set at address 8302 DMD Sync.Time. If the
settings for averaging are changed, then the measured values stored in the buffer are
deleted, and new results for the average calculation are only available after the set
time period has passed.
Minimum and The tracking of minimum and maximum values can be reset automatically at a pro-
Maximum Values grammable point in time. To select this feature, address 8311 MinMax cycRESET
should be set to YES. The point in time when reset is to take place (the minute of the
day in which reset will take place) is set at address 8312 MiMa RESET TIME. The
reset cycle in days is entered at address 8313 MiMa RESETCYCLE, and the beginning
date of the cyclical process, from the time of the setting procedure (in days), is entered
at address 8314 MinMaxRES.START.
Limit Values Phase currents and the averages of the currents and powers can be monitored. These
are stationary monitors that cannot be used as pre-warning levels by time-overcurrent
protection, for example. The percentages are relative to the nominal device quantities.
Furthermore, it is possible to monitor the power factor, and connected 20 mA values
(if any).
The settings are entered under MEASUREMENT in the sub-menu SET POINTS(MV) by
overwriting the existing values.
Power Meter Parameter 8315 MeterResolution can be used to maximize the resolution of the
metered energy values by Factor 10 or Factor 100 compared to the Standard
setting.
2.20.4.1 Settings for Auxiliary Functions
Demand Measure-
ment Setup

8301 DMD Interval 15 Min per., 1 Sub 60 Min per., 1 Sub. Demand Calculation Intervals
15 Min per., 3 Subs
15 Min per., 15 Subs
30 Min per., 1 Sub.
60 Min per., 1 Sub.
60 Min per., 10 Subs
5 Min per., 5 Subs
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 247

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions

8302 DMD Sync.Time On the Hour On the Hour Demand Synchronization Time
15 Min. after Hour
30 Min. after Hour
45 Min. after Hour
Min/Max Measure-
ment Setup

8311 MinMax cycRESET NO YES Automatic Cyclic Reset Function
YES
8312 MiMa RESET TIME 0..1439 min 0 min MinMax Reset Timer
8313 MiMa RESET- 1..365 day(s) 7 day(s) MinMax Reset Cycle Period
CYCLE
8314 MinMax- 1..365 Days 1 Days MinMax Start Reset Cycle in

RES.START
Energy

8315 MeterResolution Standard Standard Meter resolution
Resolution Factor 10
Resolution Factor 100
2.20.4.2 Information List for Auxiliary Functions
Demand meter

00963 Ia dmd= I A demand
00964 Ib dmd= I B demand
00965 Ic dmd= I C demand
00833 I1 dmd= I1 (positive sequence) Demand
00834 P dmd = Active Power Demand
00835 Q dmd = Reactive Power Demand
00836 S dmd = Apparent Power Demand
248 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Auxiliary Functions
Min/Max meter

00395 >I MinMax Reset >I MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
00396 >I1 MiMaReset >I1 MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
00403 >Idmd MiMaReset >Idmd MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
00412 > Θ MiMa Reset >Theta MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
00851 Ia Min= Ia Min
00852 Ia Max= Ia Max
00853 Ib Min= Ib Min
00854 Ib Max= Ib Max
00855 Ic Min= Ic Min
00856 Ic Max= Ic Max
00857 I1 Min= I1 (positive sequence) Minimum
00858 I1 Max= I1 (positive sequence) Maximum
00837 IAdmdMin I A Demand Minimum
00838 IAdmdMax I A Demand Maximum
00839 IBdmdMin I B Demand Minimum
00840 IBdmdMax I B Demand Maximum
00841 ICdmdMin I C Demand Minimum
00842 ICdmdMax I C Demand Maximum
00843 I1dmdMin I1 (positive sequence) Demand Minimum
00844 I1dmdMax I1 (positive sequence) Demand Maximum
01059 Θ /ΘTrpMin= Overload Meter Min
01058 Θ /ΘTrpMax= Overload Meter Max
00397 >V MiMaReset >V MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
00398 >VphphMiMaRes >Vphph MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
00399 >V1 MiMa Reset >V1 MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
00400 >P MiMa Reset >P MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
00401 >S MiMa Reset >S MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
00402 >Q MiMa Reset >Q MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
00404 >Pdmd MiMaReset >Pdmd MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
00405 >Qdmd MiMaReset >Qdmd MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
00406 >Sdmd MiMaReset >Sdmd MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
00407 >Frq MiMa Reset >Frq. MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
00408 >PF MiMaReset >Power Factor MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 249

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions

00859 Va-nMin= Va-n Min
00860 Va-nMax= Va-n Max
00861 Vb-nMin= Vb-n Min
00862 Vb-nMax= Vb-n Max
00863 Vc-nMin= Vc-n Min
00864 Vc-nMax= Vc-n Max
00865 Va-bMin= Va-b Min
00867 Va-bMax= Va-b Max
00868 Vb-cMin= Vb-c Min
00869 Vb-cMax= Vb-c Max
00870 Vc-aMin= Vc-a Min
00871 Vc-aMax= Vc-a Max
00872 Vn Min = V neutral Min
00873 Vn Max = V neutral Max
00874 V1 Min = V1 (positive sequence) Voltage Minimum
00875 V1 Max = V1 (positive sequence) Voltage Maximum
00876 Pmin= Active Power Minimum
00877 Pmax= Active Power Maximum
00878 Qmin= Reactive Power Minimum
00879 Qmax= Reactive Power Maximum
00880 Smin= Apparent Power Minimum
00881 Smax= Apparent Power Maximum
00882 fmin= Frequency Minimum
00883 fmax= Frequency Maximum
00885 PF Min= Power Factor Minimum
00884 PF Max= Power Factor Maximum
00845 PdMin= Active Power Demand Minimum
00846 PdMax= Active Power Demand Maximum
00847 QdMin= Reactive Power Minimum
00848 QdMax= Reactive Power Maximum
00849 SdMin= Apparent Power Minimum
00850 SdMax= Apparent Power Maximum
250 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Auxiliary Functions
Set Points

---- I Admd> I A dmd>
---- I Bdmd> I B dmd>
---- I Cdmd> I C dmd>
---- I1dmd> I1dmd>
00273 SP. I A dmd> Set Point Phase A dmd>
00274 SP. I B dmd> Set Point Phase B dmd>
00275 SP. I C dmd> Set Point Phase C dmd>
00276 SP. I1dmd> Set Point positive sequence I1dmd>
---- |Pdmd|> |Pdmd|>
---- |Qdmd|> |Qdmd|>
---- |Sdmd|> |Sdmd|>
00277 SP. |Pdmd|> Set Point |Pdmd|>
00278 SP. |Qdmd|> Set Point |Qdmd|>
00279 SP. |Sdmd|> Set Point |Sdmd|>
---- Press< Pressure<
---- Temp> Temp>

00270 SP. Pressure< Set Point Pressure<
00271 SP. Temp> Set Point Temp>
00284 SP. 37-1 alarm Set Point 37-1 Undercurrent alarm
---- 37-1 37-1 under current
---- |PF|< |Power Factor|<
00285 SP. PF(55)alarm Set Point 55 Power factor alarm
Energy

00924 WpForward Wp Forward
00925 WqForward Wq Forward
00928 WpReverse Wp Reverse
00929 WqReverse Wq Reverse
00888 Wp(puls) Pulsed Energy Wp (active)
00889 Wq(puls) Pulsed Energy Wq (reactive)
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 251

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
2.21 Breaker Control
General In addition to the protective functions described thus far, a Control command process
is integrated in the SIPROTEC® 7SJ62/63/64 to coordinate the operation of circuit
breakers and other equipment in the power system. Control commands can originate
from four command sources:
− Local operation using the keypad on the local user interface of the device
− Local or remote operation using DIGSI® 4
− Remote operation using the SCADA Interface (via IEC, Profibus)
− Automatic functions (e.g., using a binary input)
The device supports the operation of circuit breakers/switchgear. The number of
switchgear devices to be controlled is, basically, limited by the number of binary inputs
and outputs present. High security against inadvertent device operations can be en-
sured if interlocking checks are enabled. A standard set of optional interlocking checks
is provided for each command issued to circuit breakers/switchgear.
Devices with integrated or detached operator panel can control switchgear via the op-
erator panel of the device. Depending on the type of operator panel (text display or
graphic display) the procedure is slightly different:
Operating Using Control commands can be initiated using the keypad on the local user interface of the
the Keypad with relay. Using the navigation keys , , , , the CONTROL menu can be accessed
Text Display and the circuit breaker/switchgear to be operated can be selected. After entering a
password, a new window is displayed in which multiple control actions (close, open,
cancel) are available and can be selected using the and keys. Next a security
check takes place. After the security check is completed, the ENTER key must be
pressed again to carry out the command. If the ENTER key is not pressed within one
minute, the selection is cancelled. Cancellation via the ESC key is possible at any time
before the control command is issued.
Operation Using Commands can be initiated using the keypad on the local user interface of the relay.
the Keypad with For this purpose, there are three independent keys located below the graphic display.
Graphic Display Pressing the CTRL key causes the Control Display to appear in the LCD. The other two
control keys OPEN and CLOSE then become active, and control of switching devices be-
comes possible. The LCD must be changed back to the default display for other, non-
control, operational modes.
The navigation keys , , , are used to select the desired device in the Con-
trol Display. The CLOSE key or the OPEN key is then pressed to convey the intended con-
trol command. After pressing the appropriate key, the selected device in the Control
Display begins to blink in the targeted-position, and a message to confirm the control
command is given. The ENTER key is pressed to confirm. Next a security check takes
place. After the security check is complete, the ENTER key must be pressed again to car-
ry out the control command. If the ENTER key is not pressed within one minute, the se-
lection is cancelled. Cancellation via the ESC key is possible at any time before the con-
trol command is issued.
After a successful switching operation, the Control Display shows the new position of
the device, and the message “Control Executed” is given at the bottom of the dis-
252 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Breaker Control
play. For control commands with feedback, the message “Swgr. Feedback OK” is
briefly displayed.
If the selected control command is not accepted, because an interlocking condition is
not met, then an error message appears in the display. The message indicates why
the command was not accepted (see also SIPROTEC® 4–System Manual). This mes-
sage must be acknowledged with ENTER before any further control commands can be
issued.
Operation using The procedure for issuing control commands using the DIGSI® 4 program is described
DIGSI® 4 in the SIPROTEC® 4–System Manual (Control of Switchgear).
Operation using the Commands can be issued remotely via the SCADA interface as well. Please check
SCADA Interface MLFB order number to ensure that your individual relay has a SCADA interface mod-
ule that supports this. Please refer to specific protocol documents for a complete list
of supported commands (see SIPROTEC® 4–System Manual).
2.21.1 Types of Commands
Two (2) types of commands can be processed within the device:

− Control commands
− Internal / pseudo commands
Control Commands Control commands operate (OPEN/CLOSE) binary outputs. Examples are:
− Commands (e.g. operation of circuit breakers, etc.)
− Step Commands (e.g. raising and lowering transformer LTCs)
− Set-point Commands with configurable time settings (Petersen coils)
Internal / pseudo These commands do not directly operate binary outputs. They serve to initiate internal
Commands functions, simulate changes of state, or to acknowledge changes of state.
− Marking/Tagging commands are used to manually overwrite or set status functions
normally controlled by binary inputs.
− Additionally, Tagging commands are issued to establish internal settings, such as
switching authority (remote vs. local), parameter set changeover, data transmission
block to the SCADA interface, and measured value set-points.
− Acknowledgment and resetting commands for setting and resetting internal buffers.
− Status Information commands:
• Controlling activation of binary input status
• Binary Output Blocking
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 253

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
2.21.2 Steps in the Command Sequence
Safety mechanisms in the command sequence ensure that a command can only be
released after a thorough check of preset criteria has been successfully concluded.
Standard Interlocking checks are provided for each individual control command. Ad-
ditionally, user-defined interlocking conditions can be programmed separately for
each command. The actual execution of the command is also monitored afterwards.
The entire sequence of a command is described briefly in the following:
Check Sequence • Command Entry (e.g. using the keypad on the local user interface of the device)
− Check Password → Access Rights
− Check Switching Mode (interlocking activated/deactivated) → Selection of Deac-
tivated Interlocking Recognition
• User configurable Interlocking checks that can be selected for each command
− Switching Authority (local, remote)
− Device Position (scheduled vs. actual comparison)
− Zone Controlled/Field Interlocking/ (logic using CFC)
− System Interlocking (centrally, using SCADA system or substation controller)
− Double Operation (interlocking against parallel switching operation)
− Protection Blocking (blocking of switching operations by protective functions)
• Fixed Command Checks
− Internal process time (software watch dog which checks the time for processing
the control action between initiation of the control and final close of the relay con-
tact. After 1 second the control action will be aborted).
− Setting Modification in Process (if setting modification is in process, commands
are denied or delayed)
− Equipment not Present at Output (If a circuit breaker or other operable equipment
is not configured to a binary output, then the command is denied)
− Output Block (if an output block has been programmed for the circuit breaker,
and is active at the moment the command is processed, then the command is
denied)
− Component Hardware Malfunction
− Command in Progress (only one command can be processed at a time for one
circuit breaker or switch)
− 1-of-n-check (for schemes with multiple assignments, such as common ground,
whether a command has already been initiated for the affected output relay is
checked).
Monitoring the − Interruption of a Command because of a Cancel Command

Command
− Running Time Monitor (feedback message monitoring time)
Execution
254 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Breaker Control
2.21.3 Interlocking
The interlocking checks are divided into:

• System Interlocking: checked by a central control system such as SCADA or sub-
station controller
• Zone Controlled/Bay Interlocking: checked in the device
System interlocking relies on the system data base in the substation or central control
system. Circuit breakers (or other equipment) that require system interlocking in a
central control system (Substation Controller) must be configured in their specific com-
mands object properties box for the specific control device. Interlocking conditions can
be selected.
Zone Controlled/Bay Interlocking relies on the status of the circuit breaker and other
switches that are connected to the relay. The extent of the interlocking checks is de-
termined by the configuration of the relay.
For all commands, operation with interlocking (normal mode) or without interlocking
(test mode) can be selected:
− for Local commands, by activation of “Normal/Test“-key switch ,
− for automatic commands, via command processing by CFC,
− for local / remote commands, using an additional interlocking disable command, via
Profibus.
2.21.3.1 Interlocked/Non-Interlocked Switching
The command checks that can be selected for the 7SJ62/63/64 relay are also referred
to as “standard interlocking”. These checks can be activated (interlocked) or deacti-
vated (non interlocked).
Deactivated interlock switching means the configured interlocking conditions are not
checked in the relay.
Interlocked switching means that all configured interlocking conditions are checked
within the command processing. If a condition could not be fulfilled, the command will
be rejected by a message with a minus added to it (e.g. “CO-”), immediately followed
by an operation response information. Table 2-21 shows some types of commands
and messages. For the device the messages designated with *) are displayed in the
event logs, for DIGSI® 4 they appear in spontaneous messages.
Table 2-21 types of command and messages

Type of command Abbrev. Message
Control issued CO CO+/–
Manual tagging (positive / negative) MT MT+/–
Input blocking IB IB+/– *)
Output blocking OB OB+/– *)
Control abortion CA CA+/–
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 255

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
The “plus” appearing in the message is a confirmation of the command execution: the
command execution was as expected, in other words positive. The “minus” is a neg-
ative confirmation, the command was rejected. Figure 2-87 shows the messages re-
lating to command execution and operation response information for a successful op-
eration of the circuit breaker.
The check of interlocking can be programmed separately for all switching devices and
tags that were set with a tagging command. Other internal commands such as manual
entry or abort are not checked, i.e. carried out independent of the interlocking.
EVENT LOG
---------------------
19.06.01 11:52:05,625
Q0 CO+ close
19.06.01 11:52:06,134
Q0 FB+ close
Figure 2-87 Example of a message when closing the circuit breaker Q0
Standard Interlock- The following is a list of Standard Interlocking Conditions that can be selected for each
ing Defaults controllable device. All of these are enabled as a default.
(fixed programming)
• Device Status Check (scheduled = actual): the switching command is rejected, and
an error message is displayed, if the circuit breaker is already in the scheduled (de-
sired) position. (If this check is enabled, then it works whether interlocking, e.g.
zone controlled, is activated or deactivated.) This condition is checked in both inter-
locked and non-interlocked status modes.
• System Interlocking/Substation Controlled: To check the system interlocking, a lo-
cal command is transmitted to the central unit with Switch Authority = LOCAL. A
switching device that is subject to system interlocking cannot be switched by
DIGSI® 4.
• Zone Controlled/Bay Interlocking: All devices controlled by this relay can be inter-
locked by the CFC logic.
• Blocked by protection: A CLOSE-command is rejected as soon as one of the pro-
tective elements in the relay picks up. The OPEN-command, in contrast, can always
be executed. Please be aware, activation of thermal overload protection elements
or sensitive ground fault detection can create and maintain a fault condition status,
and can therefore block CLOSE commands. If the interlocking “Blocking by
protection” is removed, consider that the restart blocking for motors will also be
disabled, and a CLOSE command to the motor would be possible. Restarting would
then have to be interlocked some other way. One method would be to use a specific
interlocking in the CFC logic.
• Double Operation Block: parallel switching operations are interlocked against one
another; while one command is processed, a second cannot be carried out.
• Switch Authority LOCAL: When this interlocking check is enabled in the Object
Properties dialog box, the status of Switching authority is checked prior to issuing a
control command. If this particular setting is selected, a control command from the
user interface of the device is only allowed if the Key Switch (for devices without key
switch via configuration) is set to LOCAL .
256 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Breaker Control
• Switch Authority DIGSI: Switching commands can be issued locally or remotely via
DIGSI. As part of the safety features, the device will check the DIGSI configuration
file in regard to the virtual device number to ensure that the correct configuration file
is used. DIGSI must have the same virtual device number. It is important that one
file can not be reused with multiple relays. But it is possible to copy the file and use
the new file with another relay.
• Switch Authority REMOTE: When this interlocking check is enabled in the Object
Properties dialog box, the status of Switching authority is checked prior to issuing a
control command. If this particular setting is selected a control command from a re-
mote DIGSI connection or via the SCADA interface is only allowed if the Key Switch
(for devices without key switch via configuration) is set to REMOTE.
An overview for processing the interlocking conditions in the relay is shown by Figure
2-88.
.
Device with Source Switching Authority Switching Mode

of Command =
On/Off
LOCAL
& Local
1
SAS REMOTE ),
Local &
DIGSI
AUTO
&
Remote &
Switching Authority
(Local/Remote)
& DIGSI
Switching Authority DIGSI

DIGSI or
Remote
&
Switching Mode Non-Interlocked

Local
or SCHEDULED=ACT .y/n
&
Switching Mode
Remote
Interlocked
&
or
SCHEDULED=ACT.y/n
System Interlocking y/n Command
Field Interlocking y/n or
Output
feedback Indication Protection Blocking y/n to Relay
On/Off Double Oper. Block y/n
SW. Auth. LOCA> y/n
Protection Blocking
Sw. Auth. REMOTEy/n
52 Close
52 Open
Event
Condition
1)
Source REMOTE also includes SAS. Command using substation controller.
REMOTE Command using remote source such as SCADA through controller to device.
Figure 2-88 Standard Interlocking Arrangements
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 257

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
Figure 2-89 shows the configuration of the interlocking conditions using DIGSI® 4.
Figure 2-89 DIGSI® 4–Dialogue box: Object properties for a command (configuration of the
interlocking conditions)
For devices with operator panel the display shows the configured interlocking reasons.
They are marked by letters explained in the following table 2-22.
Table 2-22 Interlocking commands
Interlocking commands Abbrev. Message

Control authorization L L
System interlock S S
Zone controlled Z Z
Target state = present state P P
(check switch position)
Block by protection B B
258 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Breaker Control
Figure 2-90 shows all interlocking conditions (which usually appear in the display of
the device) for three switchgear items with the relevant abbreviations explained in
table 2-22. All parametrized interlocking conditions are indicated
(see Figure 2-90).
Interlocking 01/03
--------------------
Q0 Close/Open S – Z P B
Figure 2-90 Example of configured interlocking conditions
Control Logic using For Zone Controlled (field interlocking), control logic can be developed, using the
CFC CFC. Via specific release conditions the information “released” or “bay interlocked”
are available.
Switching Switching authority configures the relay to perform Local/Remote Supervisory func-
Authority (for tions. Note, that only one source can have authority at a time. The following switching
devices with authority ranges are defined in the following priority sequence:
operator panel)
− LOCAL (commands are issued from the relay keyboard)
− DIGSI® 4
− REMOTE (commands are issued from SCADA)
The devices in housing of size 1/2 or 1/1 are equipped with key switches on the front
panel. The top switch is reserved for switching authority between “Local” and “Re-
mote” mode. The switching authority condition LOCAL allows commands from the user
interface of the relay, but not remote or DIGSI commands. The position “Remote“ en-
ables remote control.
For devices in housing of size 1/3 the switching authority can be changed between
“Remote” and “Local” in the operator panel after having entered the password or by
means of CFC also via binary input and function key.
The switching authority condition DIGSI allows commands to be initiated using
DIGSI® 4. Commands are allowed for both a remote and a local DIGSI® 4 connection.
Configuration Programming:
1. Specific Device (e.g., switching device): Switching authority LOCAL (check for
commands initiated Locally via keypad):
y/n
2. Specific Device (e.g., switching device): Switching authority REMOTE (check for
SAS, REMOTE, or DIGSI commands:
y/n
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 259

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
In detail, the following interlocking logic is derived when using default configuration
settings:
Current Switching Switching Command issued Lo- Command issued from Command issued from
Authority Status Authority cally SAS or SCADA DIGSI
DIGSI
LOCAL Not checked Allowed Interlocked - switching Interlocked - DIGSI not
authority LOCAL
*2 checked
LOCAL checked Allowed Interlocked - switching Interlocked - switching

*2 *2
authority LOCAL authority LOCAL
REMOTE Not checked Interlocked - switching Allowed Interlocked - DIGSI not

authority REMOTE
*1 checked
REMOTE checked Interlocked - switching Interlocked -switching Allowed
*1 *2
authority DIGSI authority DIGSI
*1
) By-passes Interlock if Configuration for: “switching authority LOCAL (check for Local status): is not
marked.
*2
) By-passes Interlock if Configuration for: “switch authority REMOTE (check for CLOSE, REMOTE, or
DIGSI status): is not marked
SC = source of command
SC = AUTO SICAM: Commands that are initiated internally (command processing in
the CFC) are not subject to switching authority and are therefore always allowed.
Switching The dongle cable sets the switching authority of the device to “Remote”. The specifi-
Authority (for cations of the previous section apply.
devices without
operator panel)
Switching Mode There are three modes:

(for devices with
− Local
operator panel)
− Remote
− Auto
The switching mode determines whether selected interlocking conditions will be acti-
vated or deactivated at the time of the switching operation.
The following switching modes are defined:

− Local commands (SC = LOCAL)
− interlocked, or
− non-interlocked switching.
The devices in housings of size 1/2 or 1/1 are equipped with key switches on the front
panel. The bottom switch is reserved for switching mode. The “Normal” position allows
interlocked switching while the “Interlocking OFF” position allows non-interlocked
switching. For devices in housings of size1/3 the switching authority can be changed
between “Interlocked” and “Non-interlocked” in the operator panel after having entered
the password or by means of CFC also via binary input and function key.
260 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Breaker Control
− Remote or DIGSI® 4 commands (SC = SAS, REMOTE, or DIGSI)

− interlocked, or
− non-interlocked switching. Here, deactivation of interlocking is accomplished via
a separate command. The position of the key-switch is irrelevant.
− Auto: For commands from CFC (SC = AUTO SICAM), the notes in the CFC hand-
book should be referred to (e.g. component: BOOL to command)
Switching Mode The dongle cable sets the switching authority of the device to “Interlocked”. The spec-
(for devices without ifications of the previous section apply.
operator panel)
Zone Controlled/ Zone Controlled (field interlocking) includes the verification that predetermined switch-
Field Interlocking gear position conditions are satisfied to prevent switching errors as well as verification
of the state of other mechanical interlocking such as High Voltage compartment doors
etc.
Interlocking conditions can be programmed separately, for each switching device, for
device control CLOSE and/or OPEN. Processing of the status of the release condition
for an operation switching device can be based on information acquired:
− directly, using a single point or double point indication (binary inputs), key-switch,
or internal indication (marking), or
− with logic using CFC.
When a switching command is initiated, the actual status of all relevant switching de-
vices is scanned cyclically.
Substation Control- Substation Controller (System interlocking) involves switchgear conditions of other
ler (System Inter- bays evaluated by a central control system.
locking)
Double Operation Parallel switching operations are interlocked. When this function is enabled only one
control can be issued at a time. All control objects are checked prior to issuing a com-
mand.
Blocked by Protec- When configured, the pickup of Protective elements blocks switching operations, con-
tion figurable separately for both closing and tripping commands. Operations in progress
will also be aborted by the pickup of a protective element.
Device Position For switching commands, a check takes place whether the selected switching device
(Scheduled = Actu- is already in the scheduled/desired position (Open/Closed; scheduled/actual compar-
al) ison). This means, if a circuit breaker is already in the CLOSED position and an at-
tempt is made to issue a closing command, the command will be refused, with the op-
erating message “scheduled condition equals actual condition”. If the circuit breaker/
switchgear device is in the intermediate position, then this check is not performed.
Bypassing Bypassing configured interlocks at the time of the switching action happens device-
Interlocks internal via interlocking recognition in the command job or globally via so-called
switching modes.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 261

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
G VQ=ORT
− The switching modes “interlocked“ or “non-interlocked“ can be set via the key
switch. The position “Test“ corresponds to non-interlocked switching and serves the
special purpose of unlocking the standard interlocks.
G REMOTE and DIGSI® 4
− Commands issued by SICAM® or DIGSI® 4 are unlocked via global switching mode
REMOTE. A separate job order must be sent for the unlocking. The unlocking ap-
plies only for one switching operation and for command caused by the same
source.
− Job order: command to object “switching mode REMOTE”, ON
− Job order: switching command to “switching device”
G Derived command via CFC (automatic command, SC=Auto SICAM):
− Behavior is determined in the CFC block (“Bool to command“) via configuration
2.21.4 Recording and acknowledgement of commands
During the processing of the commands, independent of the further message routing
and processing, command and process feedback information are sent to the message
processing centre. These messages contain message cause indication. The messag-
es are entered in the event list.
Acknowledgement All messages which relate to commands that were issued from the device front “Com-
of commands to the mand Issued = Local” are transformed into a corresponding response and shown in
device front the display of the device. A listing of possible operating messages and their meaning
is given in the SIPROTEC®4 System Manual.
Acknowledgement The messages which relate to commands with the origin “Command Issued = Local/
of commands to Remote/DIGSI” must be send independent of the routing (configuration on the serial
- Local digital interface) to the initiating point.
- Remote
The acknowledgement of commands is therefore not executed by a response indica-
- Digsi
tion as it is done with the local command but by ordinary command and feedback in-
formation recording.
Monitoring of The processing of commands monitors the command execution and timing of feed-
feedback back information for all commands. At the same time the command is sent, the moni-
information toring time is started (monitoring of the command execution). This time controls
whether the device achieves the required final result within the monitoring time. The
monitoring time is stopped as soon as the feedback information arrives. If no feedback
information arrives, a response “Timeout command monitoring time” appears
and the process is terminated.
Commands and information feedback are also recorded in the event list. Normally the
execution of a command is terminated as soon as the feedback information (FB+) of
the relevant switchgear arrives or, in case of commands without process feedback in-
formation, the command output resets.
262 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Breaker Control
The “plus” appearing in a feedback information confirms that the command was suc-
cessful, the command was as expected, in other words positive. The “minus” is a neg-
ative confirmation and means that the command was not fulfilled as expected.
Command Output The command types needed for tripping and closing of the switchgear or for raising
and Switching and lowering of transformer taps are described in the SIPROTEC®4–System Manual.
Relays
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 263

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Functions
264 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147-1
Installation and Commissioning 3
This section is primarily for personnel who are experienced in installing, testing, and
commissioning protective and control systems, and are familiar with applicable safety
rules, safety regulations, and the operation of a power system.
Installation of the 7SJ62/63/64 is described in this section. Connections for the device
are discussed. Hardware modifications that might be needed in certain cases are ex-
plained. Connection verifications required before the device is put in service are also
given. Commissioning tests are provided. Some of the tests require the protected line
or equipment to carry load. Preparation for the initial energization of the device is cov-
ered.
3.1 Installation and Connections 266

3.2 Checking Connections 318
3.3 Commissioning 323
3.4 Final Preparation of the Device 344
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 265

C53000-G1140-C147–1
Installation and Commissioning
3.1 Installation and Connections
Warning!
Trouble free and safe use of this SIPROTEC® 4 device depends on proper transport,
storage, installation, and application of the device according to the warnings in this in-
struction manual.
Of particular importance are the general installation and safety regulations for work in
a high-voltage environment (for example, ANSI, IEC, EN, DIN, or other national and
international regulations.) These regulations must be observed. Failure to observe
these precautions can result in death, personal injury, or severe damage of property.
Requirements The rated device data is checked as recommended in the SIPROTEC® 4 System
Manual. The compliance these data is verified with the power system data.
3.1.1 Installation
Panel Flush The device housing can be 1/3, 1/2 or Full size depending on the version. For the 1/3
Mounting and 1/2 size housing, there are four covers and four holes, as shown in Figures 3-1
and 3-2). There are six covers and six holes for the full size housing, as indicated in
Figure 3-3.
G Remove the 4 covers located at the corners of the front cover, for size 1/1 the 2 ad-
ditional covers located centrally at the top and bottom, reveal the 4 respectively 6
slots in the mounting flange.
G Insert the device into the panel cut-out and fasten it with four or six screws. For the
dimensions refer to Figure 4-11 to 4-13 in Section 4.23.
G Replace the four or six covers.
G Connect the ground on the rear plate of the device to the protective ground of the
panel. Use at least one M4 screw for the device ground. The cross-sectional area
of the ground wire must be greater than or equal to the cross-sectional area of any
other control conductor connected to the device. Furthermore, the cross-section of
the ground wire must be at least 2.5 mm2.
G Connect the plug terminals and/or the screwed terminals on the rear side of the de-
vice according to the wiring diagram for the panel.
When using forked lugs or directly connecting wires to screwed terminals, the
screws must be tightened so that the heads are even with the terminal block before
the lugs or wires are inserted.
A ring lug must be centred in the connection chamber so that the screw thread fits
in the hole of the lug.
SIPROTEC® 4 System Manual has pertinent information regarding wire size, lugs,
bending radii (optical cables), etc.
266 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
Installation and Connections
Elongated
Holes SIEMENS
RUN ERROR
SIPROTEC
7SJ62
MAIN MENU 01/05
Annunciation 1
Measurement 2
MENU
LED ESC ENTER
Annunciation F1 7 8 9
Meas. Val. F2 4 5 6
Trip log
F3 1 2 3
F4 0 +/-
Figure 3-1 Panel mounting of a 7SJ62 or a 7SJ640 with a four-line display (housing
size 1/3) as an example
Elongated
Holes SIEMENS SIPROTEC
RUN ERROR 7SJ641
Schlossplatz
MENU
1000 A
21 kV
LED CTRL ESC ENTER
Local
Remote
Meas. Val. F2 4 5 6
Trip log
F3 1 2 3
Interlocking
OFF
F4 0 +/-
Normal
Figure3-2 Panel mounting of a 7SJ632 or 7SJ641 with graphic display (housing size 1/2)
as an example
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 267

C53000-G1140-C147–1
Elongated SIEMENS SIPROTEC

Holes RUN ERROR 7SJ645
Default Display
MENU
1000 A
21 kV
Fault Location With F4
LED CTRL ESC ENTER
Local Annunciation
Meas. Values F2 4 5 6
Remote Meas. Val
Trip Log
Trip log F3 1 2 3
Interlocking
OFF
F4 0 +/-
Normal
Figure 3-3 Panel mounting of a 7SJ635 or 7SJ645 with graphic display (housing size 1/1) as an example
Rack Mounting and In housing sizes 1/3 (Figure 3-4) and 1/2 (Figure 3-5) there are 4 covers and 4 securing
Cubicle Mounting slots, with the housing size 1/1 (Figure 3-6) there are 6 covers and 6 securing slots
available.
To install the device in a frame or cubicle, two mounting brackets are required. The
ordering codes are stated in Appendix A, Section A.1.
G Loosely screw the two mounting brackets in the rack with four screws.
G Remove the 4 covers at the corners of the front cover, for size 1/1 the 2 covers lo-
cated centrally at the top and bottom also have to be removed. The 4 respectively.
6 slots in the mounting flange are revealed and can be accessed.
G Fasten the device to the mounting brackets with four or six screws.
G Replace the four or six covers.
G Tighten the mounting brackets to the rack using eight screws.
rack. Use at least one M4 screw for the device ground. The cross-sectional area of
the ground wire must be greater than or equal to the cross-sectional area of any oth-
er control conductor connected to the device. Furthermore, the cross-section of the
ground wire must be at least 2.5 mm2.
268 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
Mounting bracket
SIEMENS SIPROTEC
RUN ERROR 7SJ640
MAIN MENU 01/04
Annunciation 1
Measurement 2
MENU
LED ESC ENTER
Meas. Val. F2 4 5 6
Trip log F3 1 2 3
F4 0 +/-
Mounting bracket
Figure 3-4 Installing a 7SJ62 or 7SJ640 in a rack or cubicle (housing size 1/3 of 19 inch rack) as an example
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 269

C53000-G1140-C147–1
Mounting bracket
SIEMENS SIPROTEC
RUN ERROR 7SJ641
MENU
1000 A
21 kV
LED CTRL ESC ENTER
Local
Meas. Val. F2 4 5 6
Remote
Trip log F3 1 2 3
Interlocking
OFF
F4 0 +/-
Normal
Mounting bracket
270 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
SIEMENS SIPROTEC
RUN ERROR 7SJ645
MENU
1000 A
21 kV
LED CTRL ESC ENTER
Local
Meas. Val. F2 4 5 6
Remote
Trip log-
F3 1 2 3
Interlocking
OFF
F4 0 +/-
Normal
G Connect the plug terminals and/or the screwed terminals on the rear side of the de-
vice according to the wiring diagram for the rack.
When using forked lugs or directly connecting wires to screwed terminals, the
screws must be tightened so that the heads are even with the terminal block before
the lugs or wires are inserted.
A ring lug must be centred in the connection chamber so that the screw thread fits
in the hole of the lug.
bending radii, etc.
Panel Surface G Secure the device to the panel with four screws. For dimensions refer to Figure
Mounting 4-14 to 4-16 in Section 4.23.
G Connect the ground of the device to the protective ground of the panel. The cross-
sectional area of the ground wire must be greater than or equal to the cross-sec-
tional area of any other control conductor connected to the device. Furthermore, the
cross-section of the ground wire must be at least 2.5 mm2.
G Connect solid, low-impedance operational grounding (cross-sectional area ≥
2.5 mm2) to the grounding surface on the side. Use at least one M4 screw for the
device ground.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 271

C53000-G1140-C147–1
G Connections according to the circuit diagram via screw terminals, connections for
optical fibres and electrical communication modules via the inclined housings.
bending radii, etc.
Mounting with For mounting the device proceed as follows:

Detached Operator
G Fasten device of housing size 1/2 with 6 screws and device of housing size 1/1 with
Panel
10 screws. For dimensions see Section 4.23, Figure 4-17 and 4-18.
panel. Using at least one M4 screw. The cross-sectional area of the ground wire
must be equal to the cross-sectional area of any other control conductor connected
to the device. The cross-section of the ground wire must be at least 2.5 mm2.
G Connections are realized via the plug terminals or screw terminals on the rear side
of the device according to the circuit diagram.
When using forked lugs for direct connections or screw terminal, the screws, before
having inserted the lugs and wires, must be tightened in such a way that the screw
heads are even with the terminal block.
A ring lug must be centred in the connection chamber, in such a way that the screw
thread fits in the hole of the lug. SIPROTEC® 4 System Manual has pertinent infor-
mation regarding wire size, lugs, bending radii, etc.
G For mounting the detached operator panel please observe the following:
G The removal of the 4 covers located at the corners of the front cover reveal 4 elon-
gated holes in the mounting bracket.
G Insert the operator panel into the panel cut-out and fasten with four screws. For di-
mensions refer to Figure 4-17 and 4-18 in Section 4.23.
G Mount the four covers.
G Connect the ground on the rear plate of the operator control element to the protec-
tive ground of the panel using at least one M4 screw. The cross-sectional area of
the ground wire must be equal to the cross-sectional area of any other control con-
ductor connected to the device. The cross-section of the ground wire must be at
least 2.5 mm2.
Caution!
Do never pull or plug the connector between the device and the detached operator
panel while the device is alive!
G Connect the operator panel to the device. Furthermore, plug the 68-pin connector
of the cable belonging to the operator panel into the corresponding connection at
the rear side of the device (see SIPROTEC® 4 System Manual).
Mounting without For mounting the device proceed as follows:

Operator Panel
G Fasten device of housing size 1/2 with 6 screws and device of housing size 1/1 with
10 screws. For dimensions see Section 4.23, Figure 4-17 and 4-18.
panel. Using at least one M4 screw. The cross-sectional area of the ground wire
272 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
must be equal to the cross-sectional area of any other control conductor connected
to the device. The cross-section of the ground wire must be at least 2.5 mm2.
G Connections are realized via the plug terminals or screw terminals on the rear side
of the device according to the circuit diagram.
When using forked lugs for direct connections or screw terminal, the screws, before
having inserted the lugs and wires, must be tightened in such a way that the screw
heads are even with the terminal block.
A ring lug must be centred in the connection chamber, in such a way that the screw
thread fits in the hole of the lug. SIPROTEC® 4–System Manual has pertinent infor-
mation regarding wire size, lugs, bending radii, etc.
G For mounting the D-subminiature connector of the dongle cable please observe the
following:
G Plug the 9-pin connector of the dongle cable with the connecting parts into the con-
trol panel or the cubicle door according to Figure 3-7. For dimensions refer to Figure
4-20 in Section 4.23.
G Plug the 68-pin connector of the cable into the corresponding connection at the rear
side of the device.
Caution!
Do never pull or plug the Dongle–cable while the device is alive! Without the cable the
device is not ready for operation!
The connector of the dongle cable at the device must always be plugged during
operation!
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 273

C53000-G1140-C147–1
c b a c b a c b a
1 1 1 UH+
2 2 UH- 2
3 3 3
4 4 4
c 5 5 5
6 6 6
7 7
F 7
c
8 8 8
9 9
c
K 9
10 10 10
c 11 11 11
12 12a b c 12
13 a b c
c 13
14 14
c 15 15
16 16
c 17 17
18 18
a b c a b c
c b a
1
2 1
2 D C
3
Ch1
4 5
3
6
J 7
6 5 8
9
10
B A
8 11
7
12
Ch1
a b c
Control panel or
cubicle door
Figure3-7 Plugging the D-subminiature connector of the dongle cable into the control panel
or cubicle door (housing size 1/2 as an example).
274 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
3.1.2 Connections
Elementary diagrams for device family 7SJ62/63/64 are shown in Appendix A, Section
A.2. Anschlussbeispiele für die Strom- und Spannungswandlerkreise befinden sich im
Anhang A.3. Connection examples for current and voltage transformer circuits are
provided in Appendix A, Section A.3. It must be checked that the setting configuration
of the Power System Data 1 (P.System Data 1), Section , corresponds with
the connections to the device.
3.1.2.1 Connection Examples for 7SJ62
Currents The Figures A-45 to A-49 show examples of the current transformer connection op-
tions for the model 7SJ62.
Voltages The Figures A-50 to A-54 show examples of the voltage transformer connection op-
tions.
The device can either be connected with three phase–ground voltages as shown in
Figure A-50 (address 0213 VT Connection = Van, Vbn, Vcn), or with two phase–
phase voltages and 3V0 (also called the displacement voltage) from open delta VTs
as shown in Figure A-51(address 0213 VT Connection = Vab, Vbc, VGnd). For
the latter, only the phase–phase voltages can be connected as shown in Figures A-52
and A-53 (open delta VTs), or only 3V0 can be connected as illustrated in Figure A-54.
In the device settings the appropriate voltage connection must be entered under Ad-
dress 0213, VT Connection, in P.System Data1.
The maximum continuous voltage rating of a 7SJ62 is 170 V. For the first case above
(phase-ground voltage connections), phase-phase voltages of up to [√3 · 170V] =
294 V can be continuously applied. For the second case, the steady state phase-
phase voltages connected to the device must be 170 V or less.
tions.
The device can either be connected with three phase–ground voltages as shown in
Figure A-59 (address 0213 VT Connection = Van, Vbn, Vcn), or with two phase–
phase voltages and 3V0 (also called the displacement voltage) from open delta VTs
as shown in Figure A-60 (address 0213 VT Connection = Vab, Vbc, VGnd). For
the latter, only the phase–phase voltages can be connected as shown in Figure (open
delta VTs), or only 3V0 can be connected as illustrated in Figure A-62. In the device
settings the appropriate voltage connection must be entered under Address 0213, VT
Connection, in P.System Data1.
(phase-ground voltage connections), phase-phase voltages of up to [√3 · 170V] =
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 275

C53000-G1140-C147–1
294 V can be continuously applied. For the second case, the steady state phase-
tions.
For the normal connection as shown in Figure A-66 the 4th voltage measuring input
U4 is not used. The other three voltage measuring inputs are supplied with the phase-
ground voltages. Correspondingly the address 0213 must be set to VT Connection
= Van, Vbn, Vcn. The factor in address 0205A Vph / Vdelta must however be
set to 1.73 (this factor is used internally for the conversion of measurement and fault
recording values).
Figure A-67 shows an example of the additional connection of an e–n winding of the
set of voltage transformers. Address 0213 must in this case be set to VT
Connection = Van,Vbn,Vcn,VGn. The factor in address 0206A Vph / Vdelta is
dependent on the ratio of the e–n winding. Notes may be referred to in Subsection at
“Tranformation Ratio“.
Also Figure A-68 shows an example of a connection of the e–n winding of a set of volt-
age transformers, in this case, however of a central set of transformers at a busbar.
For more information refer to the previous paragraph.
Figure A-69 shows an example of the connection of a different voltage, in this case the
busbar voltage (for Synchronization). For synchronization address 0213 must be set
to VT Connection = Van,Vbn,Vcn,VSy. The factor address 6X21 Balancing
V1/V2 is always equal to 1 unless the feederside VT and busbarside VT have a dif-
ferent transformation ratio. The factor in address 0206A Vph / Vdelta must be 1.73
(this factor is used internally for the conversion of measurement and fault recording
values).
The device can be also connected with two phase–phase voltages and 3V0 (also
called the displacement voltage) from open delta VTs as shown in Figure A-70 (ad-
dress 0213 VT Connection = Vab, Vbc, VGnd). For the latter, only the phase–
phase voltages can be connected or only 3V0 can be connected.
(phase–ground voltage connections), phase–phase voltages of up to [√3 · 170V] =
294 V can be continuously applied. For the second case, the steady state phase–
3.1.2.4 General Connections for 7SJ62/63/64
Binary Inputs and The configuration of the binary in and outputs, i.e. the individual adaptation to the plant
Outputs conditions, is described in the SIPROTEC® 4 System Manual. The connections to the
plant are dependent on this actual configuration. The presettings of the device are list-
ed in Appendix A, Section A.4. Check also if the labelling corresponds to the allocated
message functions.
276 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
Changing Setting If binary inputs are used to switch setting groups, note:
Groups with Binary
• Two binary inputs must be dedicated to the purpose of changing setting groups
Inputs
when four groups are to be switched. One binary input must be set for “>Set
Group Bit 0”, the other input for “>Set Group Bit 1”. If either of these input
functions is not assigned, then it is considered as not controlled.
• To control two setting groups, one binary input set for “>Set Group Bit 0” is
sufficient since the binary input “>Set Group Bit 1”, which is not assigned, is
considered to be not controlled.
• The status of the signals controlling the binary inputs to activate a particular setting
group must remain constant as long as that particular group is to remain active.
Table 3-1 shows the relationship between “>Set Group Bit 0”, “>Set Group Bit
1”, and the setting groups A to D. Principal connection diagrams for the two binary in-
puts are illustrated in Figure 3-8. The figure illustrates an example in which both Set
Group Bits 0 and 1 are configured to be controlled (actuated) when the associated bi-
nary input is energized (high).
Table 3-1 Setting group selection with binary inputs — example
Binary Input Events

>Set Group Bit 0 >Set Group Bit 1 Active Group
no no Group A
yes no Group B
no yes Group C
yes yes Group D
no = not energized
yes = energized
Selector switch for

setting group
A
B FNo 7
L+ L– >Set Group Bit 0
C
D Binary input set for: 7
“>Set Group Bit 0”, High
A 7SJ62/63/64
B
L+ C FNo 8
L– >Set Group Bit 1
D
Binary input set for: 8
”>Set Group Bit 1”, High
Figure3-8 Connection diagram (example) for setting group switching with binary inputs
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 277

C53000-G1140-C147–1
Trip Circuit It must be noted that two binary inputs or one binary input and one bypass resistor R
Supervision must be connected in series. The pick-up threshold of the binary inputs must therefore
be substantially below half the rated control DC voltage.
If two binary inputs are used for the trip circuit supervision, these binary inputs must
be potential free i.o.w. not be commoned with each other or with another binary input.
If one binary input is used, a bypass resistor R must be employed (refer to Figure
3-9). This resistor R is connected in series with the second circuit breaker auxiliary
contact (Aux2), to also allow the detection of a trip circuit failure when the circuit break-
er auxiliary contact 1 (Aux1) is open, and the command relay contact has reset. The
value of this resistor must be such that in the circuit breaker open condition (therefore
Aux1 is open and Aux2 is closed) the circuit breaker trip coil (TC) is no longer picked
up and binary input (BI1) is still picked up if the command relay contact is open.
UCTR
L+ 7SJ62/63/64
UBI >RTC Status

7SJ62/63/64
RTC
Legend:
RTC — Relay Tripping Contact
R CB — Circuit Breaker
TC — Circuit Breaker Trip Coil
Aux1 — Circuit Breaker Auxiliary Contact
(Closed when CB is Closed)
TC Aux1 Aux2 Aux2 — Circuit Breaker Auxiliary Contact
CB (Closed when CB is Open)
R — bypass Resistor
UCTR — Control Voltage (Trip Voltage)
UBI — Input Voltage for Binary Input
L–
Figure 3-9 Trip circuit supervision with one binary input
This results in an upper limit for the resistance dimension, Rmax, and a lower limit Rmin,
from which the optimal value of the arithmetic mean should be selected.
R max + R min
R = ---------------------------------
2
To ensure the minimum voltage for the control of the binary input, Rmax is derived as:
U CRT – U BI min
R max = æ --------------------------------------ö – R CBTC
è I BI (High) ø
So the circuit breaker trip coil does not remain energized in the above case, Rmin is
derived as:
U CTR – U TC (LOW)
R min = R TC ⋅ æ -----------------------------------------------ö
è U TC (LOW) ø
IBI (HIGH) Constant current with BI on (= 1,7 mA)

UBI min Minimum control voltage for BI
=19 V for delivery setting for nominal voltage of 24/48/60 V;
=73 V for delivery setting for nominal voltage of 110/125/220/250 V;
278 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
UCTR Control voltage for trip circuit

RCBTC DC resistance of circuit breaker trip coil
UCBTC (LOW) Maximum voltage on the circuit breaker trip coil that does not lead to tripping
If the calculation results that Rmax < Rmin, then the calculation must be repeated, with
the next lowest switching threshold UBI min, and this threshold must be implemented
in the relay using plug-in bridges (see Sub-section 3.1.3).
For the power consumption of the resistance:
U CTR 2
P R = I ⋅ R = æ ----------------------------ö ⋅ R
2
è R + R CBTCø
Example:
IBI (HIGH) 1.8 mA (from SIPROTEC® 7SJ62/63/64)
UBI min 19 V for delivery setting for nominal voltage 24/48/60 V
73 V or delivery setting for nominal voltage 110/125/220/250 V
UCTR 110 V (from system / release circuit)
RCBTC 500 Ω (from system / release circuit)
UCBTC (LOW) 2 V (from system / release circuit)
R max = æ ---------------------------------ö – 500Ω

110 V - 19 V
R max = 50.1 kΩ
è 1.8 mΑ ø
R min = 500Ω ⋅ æè ------------------------------öø

110 V - 2 V
R min = 27 kΩ
2V
R max + R min
R = -------------------------------- = 38.6 kΩ
2
The closest standard value of 39 kΩ is selected; the power is:
2
P R = æ ----------------------------------------ö ⋅ 39 kΩ
110 V
è 39 kΩ + 0.5 kΩø P R ≥ 0.3 W
3.1.3 Hardware Modifications
3.1.3.1 General
Hardware modifications might be necessary or desired. For example, a change of the

pick-up threshold for some of the binary inputs might be advantageous in certain ap-
plications. Terminating resistors might be required for the communication bus. In ei-
ther case, hardware modifications are needed. The modifications are done with jump-
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 279

C53000-G1140-C147–1
ers on the printed circuit boards inside the device. Follow the procedure described in
Subsection 3.1.3, whenever hardware modifications are done.
Since the design of the modules differs, detailed information on hardware adaption is
listed separately for each of the three device types 7SJ62, 7SJ63 and 7SJ64.
Power Supply There are different ranges for the power supply voltage of the various power supplies.
Voltage Refer to the data for the 7SJ62/63/64 ordering numbers in Section A.1 of the Appen-
dix. The power supplies of the different variants are largely interchangeable by modi-
fying the position of the jumpers. Jumper settings determine the rating. The assign-
ment of these jumpers to the supply voltages is described in Subsubsections 3.1.3.3
to 3.1.3.5, separately for 7SJ62, 7SJ63 and 7SJ64. When the relays are delivered,
these jumpers are set according to the name-plate sticker. Generally, they need not
be altered.
Life Contact The life contacts of the devices are changeover contacts. In 7SJ62 all three connec-
tions are conducted to device terminals. In case of 7SJ63 and 7SJ64 the NC contact
or the NO contact can be connected to the device connections via a plug-in jumper
(X40). The assignment of the plug-in jumper to the type of contact and the location of
the jumper is described in Subsubsections 3.1.3.4 and 3.1.3.5 for the models 7SJ63
and 7SJ64.
Nominal Currents The input transformers of the devices are set to a nominal current of 1 A or 5 A with
jumpers. The position of the jumpers are set according to the name-plate sticker. The
assignment of the jumpers to the nominal rate and the arrangement of the jumpers is
described in 3.1.3.3 to 3.1.3.5, separately for 7SJ62, 7SJ63 and 7SJ64.
All jumpers must be set for the same nominal current, i.e. a jumper (X61 to X63) one
jumper for each input transformer and additionally one jumper X 60.
Jumper X64 for the ground path is set to 1 A or 5 A (depending on the ordered variant)
for the models with normal 1/5-A transformer irrespective of the other jumper posi-
tions.
Jumper X64 is omitted for models featuring a sensitive ground fault input for the setting
range from 0.001 to 1.500 A.
Note:
If nominal current ratings are changed exceptionally, then the new ratings must be
registered in addresses 0205 CT SECONDARY/ 0218 Ignd-CT SEC in the Power
System Data 1 (P.System Data 1) (see Subsection 2.1.3).
Control Voltages When the device is delivered from the factory, the binary inputs are set to operate with
for Binary Inputs a voltage that corresponds to the rated DC voltage of the power supply. In general, to
optimize the operation of the inputs, the pick-up voltage of the inputs should be set to
most closely match the actual control voltage being used. Each binary input has a
pick-up voltage that can be independently adjusted; therefore, each input can be set
according to the function performed.
A jumper position is changed to adjust the pick-up voltage of a binary input. The phys-
ical arrangement of the binary input jumpers in relation to the pick-up voltages is de-
scribed in 3.1.3.3 to 3.1.3.5 separately for 7SJ62, 7SJ63 and 7SJ64.
280 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
Note:
If the 7SJ62/63/64 performs trip circuit monitoring, two binary inputs, or one binary in-
put and a resistor, are connected in series. The pick-up voltage of these inputs must
be less than half of the nominal DC voltage of the trip circuit.
Type of Contact for Input and output boards can contain relays of which the contact can be set as normally
Binary Outputs closed or normally open contact. Therefore it is necessary to rearrange a jumper. Sub-
sections 3.1.3.3 to 3.1.3.5 describe separately for 7SJ62, 7SJ63 and 7SJ64 to which
relays on which modules this applies.
Replacing Only serial interfaces of devices for panel and cubicle flush mounting as well as of
Interfaces mounting devices with detached operator panel or without operator panel are replace-
able. For more details on this matter refer to Subsubsection 3.1.3.6, “Replacing Inter-
faces”.
Configuring When the device is delivered from the factory, the serial interfaces are matched to the
RS232/RS485 ordered version according to the 11th and 12th figure of the ordering code of the de-
vice (or to the additional information of the ordering code). The configuration is deter-
mined by jumpers on the interface modules (“RS232/RS485” in Subsection 3.1.3.6).
Termination of If the device is equipped with a serial RS485 port or Profibus, they must be terminated
Serial Interfaces with resistors at the last device on the bus to ensure reliable data transmission. For
this purpose, the printed circuit board of the central processor unit CPU and the RS485
or Profibus interface module are provided with terminating resistors that can be con-
nected to the system by means of jumpers. It is important to use only 1 of the options.
The position of the jumpers on the printed circuit board of the corresponding central
processor unit CPU is described in Subsubsections 3.1.3.3 to 3.1.3.5, see “Processor
Board CPU” and the position of the jumpers on the interface modules in Subsubsec-
tion 3.1.3.6, see „RS485/RS232“ und „Profibus (FMS/DP) DNP3.0/Modbus“. Both
jumpers must always be plugged in the same way.
As delivered from the factory, the resistors are switched out.
Spare Parts Spare parts can be the battery that provides for storage of the data in the battery-buff-
ered RAM in case of a power failure, and the miniature fuse of the internal power sup-
ply. Their physical location is shown in Figures 3-16, 3-17, 3-19, 3-20 and 3-23. The
ratings of the fuse are printed on the board next the fuse itself. When exchanging the
fuse, please observe the hints given in the SIPROTEC®4 System Manual in the chap-
ter “Maintenance”.
3.1.3.2 Disassembly of the Device
Important!
It is assumed for the following steps that the the device is not operative.
To perform work on the printed circuit boards, such as checking or moving switching
elements or exchanging modules, proceed as follows:
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 281

C53000-G1140-C147–1
Caution!
Jumper-setting changes that affect nominal values of the device render the ordering
number and the corresponding nominal values on the nameplate sticker invalid. If
such changes are necessary, the changes should be clearly and fully noted on the de-
vice. Self adhesive stickers are available that can be used as replacement name-
plates.
o Prepare area of work. Provide a grounded mat for protecting components subject to
damage from electrostatic discharges (ESD). The following equipment is needed:
− screwdriver with a 5 to 6 mm wide tip,
− 1 Philips screwdriver,
− 4.5 mm socket or nut driver.
o Unfasten the screw-posts of the D-subminiature connector on the back panel at loca-
tion “A” and “C” (7SJ64). This activity does not apply if the device is for surface mount-
ing.
o If there are additional interfaces on location “B” , “C” and “D” next to the interfaces at
location “A” to “C” (7SJ64), remove the screws located diagonally to the interfaces.
This activity is not necessary if the device is for surface mounting.
o Remove the four or six caps on the front cover and loosen the screws that become
accessible.
o Carefully take off the front cover. The front cover is connected to the CPU board with
a short ribbon-cable. With device versions with a detached operator panel it is possible
to remove the front cover of the device right after having unscrewed all screws.
Caution!
Electrostatic discharges through the connections of the components, wiring, plugs,
and jumpers must be avoided. Wearing a grounded wrist strap is preferred. Otherwise,
first touch a grounded metal part.
o Disconnect the ribbon cable between the front cover and the CPU board () at the
front cover side. To disconnect the cable, push up the top latch of the plug connector
and push down the bottom latch of the plug connector. Carefully draw out the plug con-
nector.
This action does not apply to the device version with detached operator panel. How-
ever, on the central processor unit CPU () the 7-pole plug connector X16 behind the
D-subminiture connector and the plug connector of the ribbon cable (connected to the
68pole plug connector on the rear side) must be removed.
q Disconnect the ribbon cables between the CPU unit () and the input/output printed
circuit boards (depending on the version () to ()).
q Remove the boards and set them on the grounded mat to protect them from ESD dam-
age. A greater effort is required to withdraw the CPU board, especially in versions of
the device for surface-mounting, because of the communication connectors.
282 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
7SJ62 Installation and Connections
q Check the jumpers according to Figures 3-16 to 3-27 and the following information
Change or remove the jumpers as necessary.
The order of the boards for the individual device types and housings is shown in Fig-
ures 3-10 to 3-15.
Module Figure 3-10 shows the arrangement of the modules for 7SJ62.
Arrangement of
7SJ62
1 Processor printed circuit board A–CPU

2 Input/output printed circuit board A–I/O–2
Slot 5 Slot 19
1 2
BI1 to BI4 to Binary inputs (BI)
BI3 BI11
Figure3-10 Front view of 7SJ62 after removal of the front cover (simplified and scaled
down
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 283

C53000-G1140-C147–1
Installation and Commissioning 7SJ63
Module Arrange- Figure 3-11shows the arrangement of the modules for 7SJ63 with housing size 1/2 and
ment of 7SJ63 Figure 3-12 for the housing size 1/1.
1 Processor printed circuit board B–CPU

2 Input/output printed circuit board B–I/O-1
3 Input/output printed circuit board B–I/O-2
Slot 5 Slot 19 Slot 33
1 2 7SJ631
BI1 to BI21 to Binary inputs (BI)
BI7 BI24
1 3 2 7SJ632 and 7SJ633
BI1 to BI8 to BI21 to Binary inputs (BI)
BI7 BI20 BI24
Figure 3-11 Front view of the 7SJ63 with housing size 1/2 after removal of the front cover (simplified and scaled down)
284 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
Prozessorbaugruppe
1 Processor p. c. b. B–CPU
1 42 1 42 2 Input/output p. c. b. B–I/O-1
3 Input/output p. c. b. B–I/O-2
Slot 5 Slot 33 Slot 5 Slot 33
1 3 3 2
BI1 to BI8 to BI25 to BI21 to Binary Inputs (BI)

BI7 BI20 BI37 BI24
Figure 3-12 Front view of 7SJ635 and 7SJ636 with housing size 1/2 after removal of the front cover (simplified and
scaled down)
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 285

C53000-G1140-C147–1
Module Figure 3-13 shows the arrangement of the modules for 7SJ64 with housing size 1/3
Arrangement of and Figure 3-14 for the housing size 1/2 and Figure 3-15 for the housing size 1/1.
7SJ64
1 Processor printed circuit board C–CPU–2

2 Input/output printed circuit board C–I/O–11
Slot 5 Slot 19
1 2 7SJ640
BI1 to BI6 and Binary inputs (BI)
BI5 BI7
Figure3-13 Front view of device of housing size 1/3 after removal of the front cover
(simplified and scaled down)
286 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
1 Processor p. c. b. C–CPU–2
2 Input/output p. c. b. C–I/O–11
3 Input/output p. c. b. B–I/O–2
Slot 5 Slot 19 Slot 33

1 4 2 7SJ641
BI1 to BI8 to BI6 and Binary inputs (BI)
BI5 BI15 BI7
1 3 2 7SJ642
BI1 to BI8 to BI6 and Binary inputs (BI)
BI5 BI20 BI7
Figure3-14 Front view of 7SJ64 with housing size 1/2 after removal of the front cover
(simplified and scaled down)
1 Processor p. c. b. C–CPU–2
1 42 1 42
3 Input/output p. c. b. B–I/O–2
Slot 5 Slot 33 Slot 19 Slot 33

1 3 3 2 7SJ645
BI1 to BI8 to BI21 to BI6 and Binary Inputs (BI)
BI5 BI20 BI33 BI7
Figure 3-15 Front view of 7SJ645 with housing size 1/1 after removal of the front cover (simplified and scaled down).
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 287

C53000-G1140-C147–1
3.1.3.3 Jumper Settings on Printed Circuit Boards of 7SJ62
Processor Board There are two different releases available of the A–CPU board. Figure 3-16 shows the
A–CPU for layout of the printed circuit board for the A–CPU board up to the release 7SJ62.../DD,
7SJ62.../DD Figure 3-17 for devices of the release 7SJ62.../EE.
The set nominal voltage of the integrated current supply is checked according to Table
3-2 and the selected operating voltage of the binary inputs BI1 to BI3 to Table 3-3. The
location and ratings of the miniature fuse (F1) and of the buffer battery (G1) are shown
in Figure 3-16.
F1
X51
3 21
X53
3
2
1
X21
4 3
X23
2
H L
L
1
X52
H
X22
Front Cable Binder

Operator Time Syn-
Panel chronization
Lithium–Battery 3 V/1 Ah,
(Port A)
+ – Typ CR 1/2 AA
Battery
G1
Figure3-16 Processor printed circuit board A–CPU for 7SJ62.../DD with jumper settings
required for the module configuration
288 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
Power Supply
Table 3-2 Factory Jumper Settings for the nominal voltage of the integrated Power Supply
on the A–CPU for 7SJ62.../DD
Jumper Nominal Voltage

60/110/125 VDC 110/125/220/250 DC 24/48 VDC 230 VAC
115 VAC
X51 1–2 2–3

Jumpers X51 through X53
X52 1–2 and 3–4 2–3
are not used
X53 1–2 2–3
Can be inter-changed Not changeable
Pickup Voltages
of BI1 to BI3
Table 3-3 Factory Jumper Settings for the Pickup Voltages of the Binary Inputs BI1
through BI3 on the A–CPU for 7SJ62.../DD
Binary Input Jumper 19 VDC 88 VDC

Pickup1) Pickup2)
BI1 X21 L H
BI2 X22 L H
BI3 X23 L H
1
) Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 24 VDC to 125 VDC.
2
) Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 110 VDC to 220 VDC and AC 115/230 V
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 289

C53000-G1140-C147–1
Processor Board The set nominal voltage of the integrated current supply is checked according to Table
A–CPU for 3-4, the selected operating voltage of the binary inputs BI1 to BI3 according to Table
7SJ62.../EE 3-5 and the contact mode of the binary outputs BO1 and BO2 according to Table 3-6.
The location and ratings of the miniature fuse (F1) and of the buffer battery (G1) are
shown in Figure 3-17.
T 2,0H250V Fuse
X51
F1
3 21
1
2
X41
3
1
2
X42
3
X53
3
2
1
X21
4 3
L H L H
X23
2
1
L H
X52
X22
Front
Cable binder
operator Time Syn-
panel chronization
(Port A)
+ –
Battery
G1
Figure 3-17 Processor printed circuit board A–CPU for 7SJ62.../EE with jumper settings required for the
module configuration
290 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
Power Supply
Table 3-4 Factory Jumper Settings for the nominal voltage of the integrated Power Supply
on the A–CPU for 7SJ62.../EE
Nominal Voltage
Jumper
24 to 48 VDC 60 to125 VDC 110 to 250 VDC, 115 to 230 VAC
X51 none 1–2 2–3
X52 none 1–2 and 3–4 2–3
X53 none 1–2 2–3
Pickup Voltages
of BI1 to BI3
through BI3 on the A–CPU for 7SJ62.../EE
Binary Input Jumper 19 VDC 88 VDC

Pickup1) Pickup2)
BI1 X21 L H
BI2 X22 L H
BI3 X23 L H
1
) Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 24 VDC to 125 VDC.
2
) Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 110 VDC to 220 VDC and AC 115/230 V
Contact Mode for

BO1 and BO2
Table 3-6 Jumper setting for the Contact Mode of the binary outputs BO1 und BO2 on the
processor printed circuit board A–CPU for 7SJ62.../EE
Open in the quiescent Closed in the quiescent Presetting

BO Jumper state
state
BO1 X41 1–2 2–3 1–2
BO2 X42 1–2 2–3 1–2
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 291

C53000-G1140-C147–1
Input/Output Board The layout of the printed circuit board for the input/output board A–I/O–2 is illustrated
A–I/O–2 in Figure 3-18. The set nominal currents of the current input transformers and the se-
lected operating voltage of the binary inputs BI4 to BI11 according to Table 3-7 are
checked.
Jumpers X60 to X63 must all be set to the same rated current, i.e. one jumper (X61 to
X63) for each input transformer of the phase currents and in addition the common
jumper X60.
Jumper X64 determines the rated current for the input IE and may thus have a setting
that deviates from that of the phase currents. There is no jumper X64 for the version
with sensitive earth current input.
H
X23
LH
X24
L
H
X25
L H
X21
LH
X22
L H
X26
LH
X27 X28
LH L
5A 1A
X60
5A 1A
X62
5A 1A
T2 T1
X61
5A 1A
T3 T4
X63
5A 1A
X64
Figure3-18 The input/output board A-I/O–2 with the jumpers necessary for the setting
check
292 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
Pickup Voltages
of BI4 to BI11
Table 3-7 Jumper settings of the control voltages of the binary inputs BI4 to BI11 on the
input/output board A–I/O–2
Binary Inputs Jumper 19 VDC 88 VDC

Pick-up 1) Pick-up 2)
BI4 X21 L H
BI5 X22 L H
BI6 X23 L H
BI7 X24 L H
BI8 X25 L H
BI9 X26 L H
BI10 X27 L H
BI11 X28 L H
1
) Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 24 VDC to 125 VDC
2
) Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 110 VDC to 250 VDC and 115/230 VAC
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 293

C53000-G1140-C147–1
3.1.3.4 Switching Elements on the Printed Circuit Boards of 7SJ63
Processor Board There exist two different releases of the B–CPU board with a different arrangement
B–CPU for and setting of the jumpers. Figure 3-19 depicts the layout of the printed circuit board
7SJ63.../DD for the B-CPU board for devices up to the release 7SJ63.../DD, Figure 3-20 for devices
of release .../EE and higher.
For devices up to release 7SJ63.../DD check the provided nominal voltage of the inte-
grated power supply according to Table 3-8, the quiescent state of the life contact ac-
cording to Table 3-12 and the selected pickup voltages of the binary inputs BI1 through
BI7 according to Table 3-13. The location and ratings of the miniature fuse (F1) and
of the buffer battery (G1) are shown in Figure 3-19.
3
2
1
X51
1
2
3
X40
F1
3
2
1
X53
X21
L H
X22
L H
X23 X24 X25
L H L H L H
X52
4 3
2
X27
L
X26
1
L H
H
Front Cable Binder

Operator Time Syn-
Panel chronization
(Port A)
+ – Typ CR 1/2 AA
Battery
G1
Figure 3-19 Processor printed circuit board B–CPU for 7SJ63.../DDwith jumper settings required for the module
configuration
294 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
Power Supply There is no 230-V AC power supply available for 7SJ63.../DD.
Table 3-8 Factory Jumper Settings for the Nominal Voltage of the integrated Power Sup-
ply on B–CPU for 7SJ63.../DD

60/110/125 VDC 110/125/220/250 VDC 24/48 VDC
115 VAC
X51 1-2 2-3 Jumpers X51 through

X53 are not used
X52 1-2 and 3-4 2-3
X53 1-2 2-3
Can be inter-changed Not changeable
Live Status Contact
Table 3-9 Jumper Setting for Live Status Contact-Type brought out to device terminals,
on B–CPU for 7SJ63.../DD
Jumper Normally Open Contact Normally Closed Contact Factory Set

X40 1-2 2-3 2-3
Pickup Voltages
of BI1 to BI7
through BI7 on the CPU Board
Binary Input Jumper 19 VDC 88 VDC Pickup2)

Pickup1)
BI1 X21 L H
BI2 X22 L H
BI3 X23 L H
BI4 X24 L H
BI5 X25 L H
BI6 X26 L H
BI7 X27 L H
1
2
) Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 110 VDC to 250 VDC and 115 VAC
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 295

C53000-G1140-C147–1
Processor Board For devices of release 7SJ63.../EE and higher check the provided nominal voltage of
B–CPU for the integrated power supply according to Table 3-11, the quiescent state of the life
7SJ63.../EE contact according to Table 3-12 and the selected pickup voltages of the binary inputs
BI1 through BI7 according to Table 3-13. The location and ratings of the miniature fuse
(F1) and of the buffer battery (G1) are shown in Figure 3-20.
3
2
X51
1
2
3
1
X40
F1
3
2
1
X53
H
L
X23
X26
H
L
H L
X25
X21 X22 X24
4 3
H
L
X52
H
L
2
1
H
L
H L
X27
Front
Operator Cable Binder
Time Syn-
Panel chronization
Lithium–Battery 3 V/1 Ah, (Port A)
+ – Typ CR 1/2 AA
Battery
G1
Figure 3-20 Processor printed circuit board B–CPU for 7SJ63.../EE with jumper settings required for the module
configuration
296 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
Power Supply There is a 230-V AC power supply available for 7SJ63.../EE.
Table 3-11 Jumper settings for the nominal voltage of the integrated power supply on the
processor printed circuit board B–CPU for 7SJ63.../EE

60/110/125 VDC 220/250 VDC 24/48 VDC
115/230 VAC
X51 1–2 2–3 1–2
X52 1–2 and 3–4 2–3 none
X53 1–2 2–3 none
Live Status Contact
Table 3-12 Jumper setting for the quiescent state of the life contact on the
processor printed circuit board B–CPU for 7SJ63.../EE
Jumper Open in the quiescent state Closed in the quiescent state Presetting
X40 1–2 2–3 2–3
Pickup Voltages
of BI1 to BI7
through BI7 on the CPU Board for 7SJ63.../EE
Binary Input Jumper 19 VDC 88 VDC Pickup2)

Pickup1)
BI1 X21 L H
BI2 X22 L H
BI3 X23 L H
BI4 X24 L H
BI5 X25 L H
BI6 X26 L H
BI7 X27 L H
1) Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 24 VDC to 125 VDC
2
) Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 110 VDC to 250 VDC and 115/230 VAC
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 297

C53000-G1140-C147–1
Input/Output Board The layout of the printed circuit board for the input/output board B–I/O–1 is illustrated
B–I/O–1 in Figure 3-21. The set nominal currents of the current input transformers and the se-
lected operating voltage of the binary inputs BI21 to BI24 according to Table 3-14 are
checked.
The jumpers X60 to X63 must all be set to the same rated current, i.e. one jumper (X61
to X63) for each input transformer of the phase currents and in addition the common
jumper X60.
The jumper X64 determines the rated current for the input IE and may thus have a set-
ting that deviates from that of the phase currents. There is no jumper X64 for the ver-
sion with sensitive earth current input.
1A 5A
X60
H
X24
X23
X22
X21
L
L
X62
X61
5A 1A 5A 1A
T2 T1
X73 AD2
X72 AD1
X71 AD0
H L
T3 T4
X63
X64
5A 1A 5A 1A
Figure3-21Input/output module B–I/O-1 with representation of the jumper settings required for
the module configuration
298 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
Pickup Voltages
of BI21 to BI24
Table 3-14 Factory jumper settings for the Pickup Voltages of the binary inputs
BI21 through BI24 on the B–I/O-1 board
Binary Input Jumper 19 VDC Pickup1) 88 VDC Pickup2)
BI21 X21 L H
BI22 X22 L H
BI23 X23 L H
BI24 X24 L H
1) Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 24 VDC to 125 VDC.
2
) Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 110 VDC to 220 VDC and 115/230 VAC.
Bus address Jumpers X71, X72 and X73 on the B– I/O-1 board serve to set up the bus address.
The jumpers must not be changed. Table 3-15 shows the factory settings for the jump-
ers.
Table 3-15 Factory Settings for Jumpers X71, X72, and X73 on the B–I/O-1 Board
Jumper 1/ Size and Full Size Housing

2
X71 L
X72 H
X73 L
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 299

C53000-G1140-C147–1
B–I/O–2 in Figure 3-22. Check the selected pickup voltages of the binary inputs BI8 through
BI20, and BI25 through BI37, according to Table 3-16.
The assignment of the binary inputs to the printed circuit board is shown in Figures 3-
11 and 3-12.
X22
123
3 21
X24
X21
123
3 21
X26
X23
123
3 21
X28
X25
123
3 21
X29
X27
123
X30
123
X31
123
X32
123
X33
123
X73 X72 X71
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
Figure3-22Jumpers on the B–I/O-2 Board for the Binary Inputs BI8 through BI20, and BI25
through BI37. (Jumpers X71, X72 and X73 apply to 1/2 size housing)
300 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
Pickup Voltages
of BI8 to BI20
Table 3-16 Factory jumper settings for the Pickup Voltages of the binary inputs BI8
through BI20 and BI25 through BI37on the B–I/O-2 board
Binary Input Jumper 19 VDC Pickup1) 88 VDC Pickup2)
BI8 BI25 X21 1-2 2-3
BI9 BI26 X22 1-2 2-3
BI10 BI27 X23 1-2 2-3
BI11 BI28 X24 1-2 2-3
BI12 BI29 X25 1-2 2-3
BI13 BI30 X26 1-2 2-3
BI14 BI31 X27 1-2 2-3
BI15 BI32 X28 1-2 2-3
BI16 BI33 X29 1-2 2-3
BI17 BI34 X30 1-2 2-3
BI18 BI35 X31 1-2 2-3
BI19 BI36 X32 1-2 2-3
BI20 BI37 X33 1-2 2-3
1) Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 24 VDC to 125 VDC.
2
) Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 110 VDC to 220 VDC and 115/230 VAC.
Bus address Jumpers X71, X72 and X73 on the B–I/O-2 board serve to set up the bus address. The
jumpers must not be changed. Table 3-17 shows the factory settings for the jumpers.
Table 3-17 Factory Settings for Jumpers X71, X72, and X73 on the B–I/O-2 Board
Jumper 1
/2 Size Housing Full Size Housing
Slot 33 Slot 5
X71 2-3 1-2 1-2
X72 1-2 2-3 1-2
X73 1-2 2-3 2-3
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 301

C53000-G1140-C147–1
3.1.3.5 Switching Elements on the Printed Circuit Boards of 7SJ64
Processor Board The layout of the printed circuit board of the processor printed circuit board C-CPU-2
C-CPU-2 is illustrated in Figure 3-23.
The set nominal voltage of the integrated current supply is checked according to Table
3-18, the quiescent state of the life contact according to Table 3-19 and the selected
operating voltage of the binary inputs BI1 to BI5 according to Table 3-20 and the inte-
grated interface RS232 / RS485 according to Table 3-21 to 3-23. The location and rat-
ings of the miniature fuse (F1) and of the buffer battery (G1) are shown in Figure 3-23.
3
2
1
X51
F1 Fuse
24/48V DC T4H250V
60-250V DC/115 V AC T2H250V
X40
1
3
X53
2
1
2
3
1
2
X55
4
2
4
2
X22
X21
3
1
3
1
X52
3 4
2
1
4
2
4
2
4
2
X25
X23
3
1
3
1
3
1
X24
X104
X106
1
2
3
X107
X111
X110 Service
321 321
X108 Port
321
1
2
3
3 2 1 X103
(Port C)
X105
X90
123
X109
Front Cable Binder

Operator Time Syn-
Panel chronization
(Port A)
+ – Typ CR 1/2 AA
Battery
G1
Figure3-23Processor printed circuit board C-CPU-2 with jumper settings required for the
module configuration
302 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
Power Supply
Table 3-18 Jumper settings for the nominal voltage of the integrated power supply on the
processor printed circuit board C-CPU-2

24 to 48 VDC 60 to 125 VDC 110 to 250 VDC,
115 VAC
X51 none 1–2 2–3
X52 none 1–2 and 3–4 2–3
X53 none 1–2 2–3
X55 none none 1–2
Live Status Contact
Table 3-19 Jumper setting for the quiescent state of the life contact on the
Jumper Open in the quiescent state Closed in the quiescent state Presetting
X40 1–2 2–3 2–3
Pickup Voltages
of BI1 to BI5
Table 3-20 Jumper settings of the control voltages of the binary inputs BI1 to BI5 on the
Binary Inputs Jumper 19 VDC Pickup1) 88 VDC Pickup2)

BI1 X21 1–2 (L) 2–3 (H)
BI2 X22 1–2 (L)) 2–3 (H)
BI3 X23 1–2 (L)) 2–3 (H)
BI4 X24 1–2 (L) 2–3 (H)
BI5 X25 1–2 (L) 2–3 (H)
1
2
Port C By repositioning jumpers the service interface (port C) can either be operated as
RS232/RS485 RS232 port or as RS485 port.
The jumpers X105 to X110 must be plugged in the same way!
Table 3-21 Jumper settings of the integrated interface RS232/RS485 on the processor
printed circuit board C-CPU-2
Jumper RS232 RS485

X103 and X104 1–2 1–2
X105 to X110 1–2 2–3
The jumpers are preset at the factory according to the configuration ordered.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 303

C53000-G1140-C147–1
CTS With jumper X111, CTS is activated which is necessary for the communication with
the modem.
Table 3-22 Jumper setting of CTS (Clear-To-Send) on the processor printed circuit
board C-CPU-2
Jumper /CTS of interface RS232 /CTS controlled by /RTS

X111 1–2 2–3 *)
*) Presetting
Jumper setting 2–3: the connection to the modem is usually done with star coupler
or optical fibre converter. Therefore the modem control signal according to RS232
standard DIN 66020 is not available. Modem signals are not required since communi-
cation to SIPROTEC® devices is always carried out in the half duplex mode. Use con-
netion cable with ordering number 7XV5100–4.
Jumper setting 1–2: this setting makes the modem signal available, i. e. for a direct
RS232-connection between the SIPROTEC® device and the modem this setting can
be selected optionally. We recommend to use a standard RS232 modem connection
cable (converter 9-pole on 25-pole).
Note: For a direct connection to DIGSI® 4 with interface RS232 jumper X111 must be
plugged in position 2–3.
Terminating Resis- If there are no external matching resistors in the system, the last devices on a
tors RS485-bus must be configured via jumpers X103 and X104.
Table 3-23 Jumper setting of matching resistors of the interface RS485 on the processor
printed circuit board C–CPU–2
Jumper Matching resistor Matching resistor Presetting

closed open
X103 2–3 1–2 1–2
X104 2–3 1–2 1–2
Note: Both jumpers must always be plugged in the same way!
Currently no function is assigned to the jumper X90. The presetting is 1-2.
The terminating resistors can also be connected externally (e.g. to the connection
module). In this case, the terminating resistors located on the RS485 interface module
or the resistors located directly on the processor circuit board C–CPU–2 must be dis-
connected.
304 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
+5 V
390 Ω
A/A´
220 Ω
B/B´
390 Ω
Figure3-24 Termination of the RS 485 interface (external)
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 305

C53000-G1140-C147–1
Input/Output Board The layout of the printed circuit board for the input/output board C-I/O–11 is illustrated
C–I/O–11 in Figure 3-25.
The set nominal currents of the current input transformer are checked on the input/out-
put board C–I/O–11. The jumpers X60 to X63 must all be set to the same rated cur-
rent, i.e. one jumper (X61 to X63) for each input transformer of the phase currents and
in addition the joint jumper X60.
The jumper X64 determines the rated current for the input IE and may thus have a set-
ting that deviates from that of the phase currents.
There is no jumper X64 for the version with sensitive earth current input.
For normal earth current inputs the jumper X65 is plugged in position “IE” and for sen-
sitive earth current inputs in position “IEE”.
L MH
X21
1
LMH
X60 X22
3
2
1
5A
1A
1A 5A
1 2 3
X61
T10 T9
X62
X73 X72 X71
(AD2)
1A 5A
1
2
3
1 2 3
(AD1)
1
2
3
(AD0)
L
H
X63
T11 T8
1A 5A
1 2 3
X64
X65
IEE IE
1A 5A
1 2 3
Figure3-25 The input/output board C-I/O–11 with the jumpers necessary for the control of
settings
306 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
Pickup Voltages Table 3-24 Jumper setting of control voltages of the binary inputs BI6 and BI7 on the
of BI6 and BI 7 binary input/output boards C– I/O–11

BI6 X21 L M
BI7 X22 L M
1
2) Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 110 VDC to 220 VDC and 115 VAC
Bus Address The jumpers X71, X72 and X73 on the input/output board C–I/O–11 are for setting the
bus address and must not be changed. Table 3-25 lists the jumper presettings.
Mounting location:
for housing size 1/3 in Figure 3-13, slot 19,
for housing size 1/2 in Figure 3-14, slot 33,
for housing size 1/1 in Figure 3-15, slot 33 right.
.
Table 3-25 Jumper setting of printed circuit board addresses of binary input/output
boards C-I/O-11
Jumper Presetting
X71 1–2 (H)
X72 1–2 (H)
X73 2–3 (L)
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 307

C53000-G1140-C147–1
B–I/O–2 in Figure 3-26.
Check for control voltages of binary inputs:
BI8 to BI20 (for housing size 1/2) according to Table 3-26.
BI8 to BI33 (for housing size 1/1) according to Table 3-27.
The assignment of the binary inputs to the printed circuit board is shown in Figures
3-14 and 3-15.
X22
123
321
X24
X21
123
3 21
X26
X23
123
321
X28
X25
123
321
X29
X27
123
X30
123
X31
123
X32
123
X33
123
X73 X72 X71
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
Figure3-26 The input/output board B–I/O–2 with the jumpers necessary for the setting
check
308 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
Pickup Voltages Check for control voltages of binary inputs BI8 to BI20 (for housing size 1/2) according
of BI8 to BI20 to Table 3-26.
Table 3-26 Jumper setting of control voltages of the binary inputs BI8 and BI20 on the
binary input/output boards B–I/O–2 for version 7SJ642–... (Size 1/2)
Binary inputs 19 VDC Pickup1) 88 VDC Pickup2)
Jumper
Slot 19
BI8 X21 1–2 2–3
BI9 X22 1–2 2–3
BI10 X23 1–2 2–3
BI11 X24 1–2 2–3
BI12 X25 1–2 2–3
BI13 X26 1–2 2–3
BI14 X27 1–2 2–3
BI15 X28 1–2 2–3
BI16 X29 1–2 2–3
BI17 X30 1–2 2–3
BI18 X31 1–2 2–3
BI19 X32 1–2 2–3
BI20 X33 1–2 2–3
1
Pickup Voltages Check for control voltages of binary inputs BI8 to BI20 (for housing size 1/1) according
of BI8 to BI33 to Table 3-27.
Table 3-27 Jumper setting of control voltages of the binary inputs BI8 and BI20 on the
binary input/output boards B–I/O–2 for version 7SJ645–... (Size 1/1)
Binary inputs
Jumper 19 VDC Pickup1) 88 VDC Pickup2)
Slot 33 left Slot 19 right
BI8 BI21 X21 1–2 2–3
BI9 BI22 X22 1–2 2–3
BI10 BI23 X23 1–2 2–3
BI11 BI24 X24 1–2 2–3
BI12 BI25 X25 1–2 2–3
BI13 BI26 X26 1–2 2–3
BI14 BI27 X27 1–2 2–3
BI15 BI28 X28 1–2 2–3
BI16 BI29 X29 1–2 2–3
BI17 BI30 X30 1–2 2–3
BI18 BI31 X31 1–2 2–3
BI19 BI32 X32 1–2 2–3
BI20 BI33 X33 1–2 2–3
1
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 309

C53000-G1140-C147–1
Bus address Jumpers X71, X72 and X73 on the input/output board B–I/O–2 are for setting the bus
address and must not be changed. Table 3-28 and 3-29 lists the jumper presettings.
The mounting locations are shown in Figures 3-14 and 3-15.
Table 3-28 Jumper setting of printed circuit board addresses of the binary input/output
boards B– I/O–2 for housing size 1/2
Mounting
Jumper location
Slot 19
X71 1–2
X72 2–3
X73 1–2
Tabelle 3-29 Jumper setting of printed circuit board addresses of the binary input/output
boards B– I/O–2 for housing size 1/1
Mounting location
Jumper
Slot 19 right Slot 33 left
X71 1–2 2–3
X72 2–3 1–2
X73 1–2 1–2
310 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
Input/Output Board The layout of the printed circuit board for the input/output board C-I/O–1 is illustrated
C–I/O–1 in Figure 3-27.
The selected operating voltage of the binary inputs BI8 to BI15 is checked according
to Table 3-30.
The contacts of the output relay BO6 can be changed from normally open to normally
closed operation. The selected contact mode is checked according to Table 3-32.
The mounting locations are shown in Figure 3-14.
X40
1
2
3
X22
X21
LMH
X24
X23
LMH
X26
X25
LMH
X28
X27
LMH
X30
X29
X73 (AD2)
LMH
X72 (AD1)
X71 (AD0)
X32
X31
H L
LMH
X34
X33
LMH
X36
X35
LMH
Figure3-27 The input/output board C–I/O–1 with the jumpers necessary for the control of
settings
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 311

C53000-G1140-C147–1
Pickup Voltages
of BI8 to BI 15
Table 3-30 Jumper settings for the Pick-up Voltages of the binary inputs BI8 to BI15 on the
input/output board C–I/O–11 for 7SJ641 (housing size 1/2)

BI8 X21/X22 L M
BI9 X23/X24 L M
BI10 X25/X26 L M
BI11 X27/X28 L M
BI12 X29/X30 L M
BI13 X31/X32 L M
BI14 X33/X34 L M
BI15 X35/X36 L M
1
2
Contact mode For the version 7SJ641∗– the contacts of binary output BO6 can be changed from nor-
mally open to normally closed operation. Table 3-31 shows the jumper settings for the
contact mode.
Table 3-31 Jumper setting for the contact mode of output BO6 on the input/output board
C– I/O–1
Device version Open in quiescent Closed in quiescent state

for Jumper (NC) Presetting
7SJ641∗– state (NO)
BO6 X40 1–2 2–3 1–2
Bus address The jumpers X71, X72 and X73 on the input/output board C–I/O–1 are for setting the
bus address and must not be changed. Table 3-32 lists the jumper presettings.
The mounting location of the PCB is illustrated in Figure 3-14.
Table 3-32 Jumper setting of printed circuit board addresses of binary input/output
boards C–I/O–1 for 7SJ641
Jumper Presetting
X71 H
X72 L
X73 H
312 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
3.1.3.6 Interface Modules
Exchanging Inter- The interface modules are located on the processor printed circuit boards CPU ( in
face Modules Figure 3-10 to 3-15) of the devices 7SJ62/63/64. Figure 3-28 shows the printed circuit
board and the modules.
Mounting Location
(Rear Side of Housing)
Service interface (7SJ62/63) Port C (7SJ62/63)

additional port (7SJ64) Port D (7SJ64)
System interface Port B
Figure3-28 Processor printed circuit board CPU with interface modules
Please note the following:

G Only interface modules of devices with panel flush mounting and cubicle mounting
as well as of mounting devices with detached operator panel or without operator
panel can be exchanged. Interface modules of devices in surface mounting hous-
ings with double-level terminals must be exchanged in our manufacturing centre.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 313

C53000-G1140-C147–1
• Use only interface modules that can be ordered in our facilities

(see also Appendix A, Section A.1.1).
• You may have to ensure the termination of the ports featuring bus capability accord-
ing to the marging heading “Termination“.
Table 3-33 Exchangeable interface modules
Interface Mounting Location/Port Exchange Modules

RS232
RS485
Optical 820 nm
Profibus FMS RS485
Profibus FMS Double Ring
System Interface Profibus FMS Single Ring

B
(7SJ62/63/64) Profibus DP RS485
Profibus DP Double Ring
Modbus RS485
Modbus 820 nm
DNP 3.0 RS485
Optical DNP 3.0 820 nm
RS232
DIGSI® 4/Modem Inter-
face/RTD-Box C RS485
(7SJ62/63)1)
Optical 820 nm
Additional Interface / RS485
RTD-Box D
(7SJ64) Optical 820 nm
1
) for 7SJ64 the Port C / service port is fix, it is not a plug-in module
For the order numbers of the exchangeable modules please refer to Subsection A.1.6
Accessories in the Appendix.
RS232/RS485 The interface RS232 can be modified to interface RS485 and vice versa, according to
Figure 3-30.
Figure 3-28 shows the printed circuit board C–CPU and the interface modules.
Figure 3-29 shows the location of the jumpers of interface RS232 on the interface
module.
Terminating resistors are not required. They are disconnected.
314 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
1 2 3
X3
8X
1 X6
2 X7
3 X4
Terminating Resistors X12 X5
Jumper disconnected 1 2 3 1 2 3
1
X11
2
X3 1–2 *) 3
X10
X4 1–2 *) 1 2 3 1
2
3
X13
*) Default Setting
C53207-
A324-B180
Figure 3-29 Location of the jumpers for configuration of RS232
CTS With jumper X11, CTS is activated which is necessary for the communication with the
modem.
Tabelle 3-34 Jumper setting of CTS (Clear-To-Send) on the interface module
Jumper /CTS from interface RS232 /CTS triggered by /RTS

X11 1–2 2–3 *)
*) Default Setting
Jumper setting 2–3: the connection to the modem is usually done with star coupler
or optical fibre converter. Therefore the modem control signal according to RS232
standard DIN 66020 is not available. Modem signals are not required since communi-
cation to SIPROTEC® devices is always carried out in the half duplex mode. Use con-
netion cable with ordering number 7XV5100–4.
Jumper setting 1–2: this setting makes the modem signal available, i. e. for a direct
RS232-connection between the SIPROTEC® device and the modem this setting can
be selected optionally. We recommend to use a standard RS232 modem connection
cable (converter 9-pole on 25-pole).
Note: For a direct connection to DIGSI® 4 with interface RS232 jumper X11 must be
plugged in position 2–3.
RS485/RS232 Interface RS485 can be modified to interface RS232 and vice versa, according to Fig-
ure 3-29.
Termination Busbar capable interfaces require a termination at the last device of the bus, i.e. ter-
minating resistors must be connected. For 7SJ62/63/64 this applies to the variant with
interface RS485 or Profibus.
The terminating resistors are located on the corresponding interface module that is
mounted to the processor input/output board CPU ( in Figure 3-10 to 3-15).
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 315

C53000-G1140-C147–1
The module for interface RS485 is illustrated in Figure 3-30, the module for Profibus
(FMS and DP) and DNP3.0 and Modbus in Figure 3-31.
With default setting, jumpers are plugged in such a way that terminating resistors are
disconnected.
For the configuration of the terminating resistors both jumpers have to be plugged in
the same way.
1 2 3
X3
8X
1 X6
2 X7
3 X4
Terminating Resistors X12 X5
Jumper 1 2 3 1 2 3
connected disconnected 1
X11
2
3
X3 2–3 1–2 *) X10
1 2 3 1
X4 2–3 1–2 *) 2
3
X13
*) Default Setting
C53207-
A324-B180
Figure3-30 Location of jumpers for the configuration of terminating resistors of interface

RS485
Profibus (FMS/DP)
DNP3.0/Modbus
C53207-A322- 2 3 4
B100
B101
Terminating Resistors
Jump- 3 2 1
connected disconnected X4
er
X3 1–2 2–3 *) 3 2 1
X3
X4 1–2 2–3 *)
*)Default
Setting
Figure 3-31 Location of jumpers for the configuration of terminating resistors at the interface Profibus (FMS and DP),
DNP3.0 and Modbus
The terminating resistors can also be connected externally (e.g. to the connection
module) as illustrated in Figure 3-24. In this case, the terminating resistors located on
the interface module must be disconnected.
316 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
3.1.3.7 Reassembly of Device
To reassemble the device, proceed as follows:

q Carefully insert the boards into the case. The installation locations of the boards are
shown in Figure 3-10 to 3-15.
For the model of the device designed for surface mounting, use the metal lever to in-
sert the processor circuit board CPU board. The installation is easier with the lever.
o First plug the plug connectors of the ribbon cable into the input/output boards I/O and
then onto the processor module CPU. Be careful to not bend any of the connecting
pins! Do not use force!
o Insert the plug connector of the ribbon cable between the processor module
CPU and the front cover into the socket of the front cover.
For the version with detached operator panel the latter is to be ignored. Instead the
plug connector of the ribbon cable connected to a 68pole plug connector on the rear
side of the device must be plugged into the plug connector of the processor circuit
board CPU. The 7-pole plug connector X16 connected to the ribbon cable must be
plugged behind the D-subminiature female connector. Since the connection is protect-
Press the latches of the plug connectors together.
o Replace the front cover and secure to the housing with the screws.
o Replace the covers.
o Re-fasten the interfaces on the rear of the device housing.
This activity is not necessary if the device is designed for surface mounting.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 317

C53000-G1140-C147–1
3.2 Checking Connections
3.2.1 Data Connections
The following tables list the pin-assignments for the various serial interfaces of the de-
vice and the time synchronization interface. The position of the connections can be
seen in Figure 3-32.
RS232 RS485
5 1 1
RS232-LWL
9 6 6
6 9 9
1 5 5
P-Slave
Oprerating Interface AME
front side Time Synchronization
Serial System Interfaces and Service Interface
rear side rear side
Figure3-32 9 pin D-subminiature Connector
PC Operating When the recommended communication cable is used, correct connection between
Interface at Front the SIPROTEC® device and the PC is automatically ensured. See the Appendix, Sub-
section A.1 for an ordering description of the cable.
Service Check the data connection if the service (port C) is used to communicate with the de-
Port vice via fix wiring or a modem. If the service port is used as input for one or two ther-
moboxes, verify the interconnection according to one of the connection examples giv-
en in the Appendix A.3.4.
System (SCADA) When a serial interface of the device is connected to a central substation control sys-
Interface tem, the data connection must be checked. A visual check of the transmit channel and
the receive channel is important. Each connection is dedicated to one transmission di-
rection. The data output of one device must be connected to the data input of the other
device, and vice versa.
The data cable connections are designated in sympathy with DIN 66020 and ISO
2110 (see also Table 3-35):
− TxD data transmit
− RxD data receive
− RTS request to send
− CTS clear to send
− DGND signal/chassis ground
318 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
Checking Connections
The cable shield is to be grounded at both ends so that potential differences cannot
cause circulating currents to flow along the shield. In areas of extremely strong EMC
interferences, the interference immunity factor can be improved by leading the ground
wire in a separate shielded pair of strands.
Additional Interface The additional interface available only for 7SJ64 (port D) serves for signal injection of
(only7SJ64) one or two thermoboxes. The interconnection according to one of the connection ex-
amples in Appendix (A.3.4) must be checked.
.
Table 3-35 Installation of the D-Subminiature Port

Pin No. PC Interface RS 232 RS 485 Profibus FMS Slave, RS 485 Modbus, RS485
at Front Profibus DP Slave, RS485 DNP3.0, RS485
1 Shield (with shield ends electrically connected)
2 RxD RxD – – –
3 TxD TxD A/A’ (RxD/TxD–N) B/B’ (RxD/TxD–P) A
4 – – – CNTR–A (TTL) RTS (TTL Pegel)
5 GND GND C/C’ (GND) C/C’ (GND) GND1
6 – – – + 5 V voltage supply VCC1
(max. load < 100 mA)
7 RTS RTS –*) –*) –
8 CTS CTS B/B’ (RxD/TxD–P) A/A’ (RxD/TxD–N) B
9 – – – – –
*) Pin 7 also can carry the RS 232 RTS signal to an RS 485 interface. Pin 7 must therefore
not be connected!
Termination The RS485 interface is capable of half-duplex service with the signals A/A' and B/B'
with a common relative potential C/C' (DGND). Verify that only the last device on the
bus has the terminating resistors connected, and that the other devices on the bus do
not. The jumpers for the terminating resistors are on the interface module RS485
(Figure 3-30) or on the Profibus module RS485 (Figure 3-31) or for 7SJ64 also directly
on C–CPU–2 (see Figure 3-23 and Table 3-23). The terminating resistors can also be
connected externally (e.g. to the connection module) as illustrated in Figure 3-24. In
this case, the terminating resistors located on the RS485 or the Profibus interface
module or directly on the printed circuit board of the C–CPU–2 board of 7SJ64 must
be disconnected.
If the bus is extended, make sure again that only the last device on the bus has the
terminating resistors switched-in, and that all other devices on the bus do not.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 319

C53000-G1140-C147–1
Time Either 5-VDC-, 12-VDC- or 24-VDC- time synchronization signals can be processed if
Synchronization the connections are made as indicated in Table 3-36.
Interface
Table 3-36 Pin-assignments for the D-subminiature port of the Time Synchronization
Interface
Pin- Designation Signal Meaning
No.
1 P24_TSIG Input 24 V
2 P5_TSIG Input 5 V
3 M_TSIG Return Line
4 –*) –*)
5 Shield Shield Potential
6 – –
7 P12_TSIG Input 12 V
8 P_TSYNC*) Input 24 V*)
9 Shield Shield Potential
*) assigned, but not available
Optical Fibers Signals transmitted via optical fibers are unaffected by interference. The fibers guar-
antee electrical isolation between the connections. Transmit and receive connections
are shown with the symbols for transmit and for receive.
The normal setting for the optical fiber interface is”Light off.” If this setting is to be
changed, use the operating program DIGSI® 4, as described in the SIPROTEC® 4–
System Manual.
Warning!
Laser injection! Do not look directly into the fibre-optic elements!
Temperature If one or two 7XV566 temperature meters are connected, check their connections to
Meter (Thermobox) the ports (port C or D).
Verify also the termination: the terminating resistors must be connected to 7SJ62/63/
64 (see Subsection 3.1.3.6 at “Termination“.
For further information refer to the operating manual of 7XV566. Check the transmis-
sion settings at the temperature meter. Besides the baudrate and the parity observe
also the bus number.
• For connection of one 7XV566 thermobox:
Bus number = 0 (to be set at 7XV566)
• For connection of two 7XV566 thermoboxes:
Bus number = 1 for the 1st thermobox (to be set at 7XV566 for RTD1 to 6),
Bus number = 2 for the 2nd thermobox (to be set at 7XV566 for RTD7 to 12).
Please observe that the detector input 1 (RTD1) of the 1st thermobox is reserved for
the input of the ambient temperature/coolant temperature for the overload protection.
320 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
Checking Connections
3.2.2 Checking Power Plant Connections
Warning!
The following procedures are carried out with dangerous voltages present. Therefore,
only qualified people who are familiar with and adhere to the safety procedures and
precautionary measures shall perform the procedures.
Caution!
Operating the device on a battery charger without a connected battery can lead to un-
usually high voltages and consequently, the destruction of the device. For limit values
see Sub-section 4.2.1 under Technical Data.
If an undervoltage element (27) is enabled and ON and the current supervision of the
27 element is OFF, then the 27 element will immediately trip when voltage is removed
from the device. This will prevent the user from being able to set the device or perform
other actions. To avoid this possible problem, current supervision must be set ON or
the voltage protection must be blocked. This can be accomplished via the operation
(see note in Subsection 2.5.2.2).
Before the device is energized for the first time, the device should be in the final oper-
ating environment for at least 2 hours to equalize the temperature, to minimize humid-
ity and avoid condensation. Connection are checked with the device at its final loca-
tion. The plant must first be switched off and grounded.
o Protective switches (e.g. test switches, fuses, or miniature circuit breakers) for the
power supply and the measured voltages must be opened.
o Check the continuity of all current and voltage transformer connections against the
system and connection diagrams:
G Are the current transformers grounded properly?
G Are the polarities of the current transformers the same?
G Is the phase relationship of the current transformers correct?
G Are the voltage transformers grounded properly?
G Are the polarities of the voltage transformers correct?
G Is the phase relationship of the voltage transformers correct?
G Is the polarity for current input I4 correct (if used), also refer to Subsection 3.1.2,
“Currents“?
G Is the polarity for voltage input U4 correct (only 7SJ64 and if used, e.g. with broken
delta winding or busbar voltage), cf. also Subsection 3.1.2.3 “Connection Examples
for 7SJ64“.
o Check the functions of all test switches that may be installed for the purposes of sec-
ondary testing and isolation of the device. Of particular importance are test switches
in current transformer circuits. Be sure these switches short-circuit the current trans-
formers when they are in the test mode (open).
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 321

C53000-G1140-C147–1
o The short-circuit feature of the current circuits of the device are to be checked. An
ohmmeter or other test equipment for checking continuity is needed.
G Remove the front panel of the device (see Figure 3-10 to 3-15).
G Remove the ribbon cable connected to the I/O board with the measured current and
measured voltage inputs (on the front side it is the right printed circuit board, for
housing size 1/3, see Figure 3-10 [slot 19], for housing size 1/2 see Figure 3-11 or
3-14 [slot 33], for housing size 1/1 see Figure 3-12 or 3-15 [slot 33 right]). Further-
more, remove the printed circuit board so that there is no more contact anymore
with the plug-in terminal.
G At the terminals of the device, check continuity for each pair of terminals that re-
ceives current from the CTs.
G Firmly re-insert the I/O board. Carefully connect the ribbon cable. Do not bend any
connector pins! Do not use force!
G Check continuity for each of the current terminal-pairs again.
G Attach the front panel and tighten the screws.
o Connect an ammeter in the supply circuit of the power supply. A range of about 1 A
for the meter is appropriate.
o Close the protective switches to apply voltage to the power supply. The measured
steady state current should be insignificant. Transient movement of the ammeter
merely indicates the charging current of capacitors.
o Check the polarity and magnitude of the voltage at the device terminals.
o Remove the voltage from the power supply by opening the protective switches.
o Disconnect the measuring test equipment; restore the normal power supply connec-
tions.
o Apply voltage to the power supply.
o Close the protective switches for the voltage transformers.
o Verify that the voltage phase rotation at the device terminals is correct. Note that the
device can be set for ABC rotation or ACB rotation under Address 0209 PHASE
SEQ.in P.System Data1.
o Open the protective switches for the voltage transformers and the power supply.
o Check the trip and close circuits to the power system circuit breakers and the other
primary equipment that is to be controlled by the 7SJ62/63/64.
o Verify that the control wiring to and from other devices is correct.
o Check the signalling connections.
o Close the protective switches to apply voltage to the power supply.
322 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
Commissioning
3.3 Commissioning
Warning!
When operating an electrical device, certain parts of the device inevitably have dan-
gerous voltages. Severe personal injury or property damage can result if the device is
not handled properly.
Only qualified people shall work on and around this device after becoming thoroughly
familiar with all warnings and safety notices in this instruction manual as well as with
the applicable safety steps, safety regulations, and precautionary measures.
The main points to observe are:
• The device is to be grounded to the substation ground before any other connections
are made.
• Hazardous voltages can exist in the power supply and at the connections to current
transformers, voltage transformers, and test circuits.
• Hazardous voltages can be present in the device even after the power supply volt-
age has been removed, i.e. capacitors can still be charged.
• After removing voltage from the power supply, wait a minimum of 10 seconds be-
fore re-energizing the power supply. This wait allows the initial conditions to be firm-
ly established before the device is re-energized.
• The limit values given in Technical Data (Chapter 10) must not be exceeded, neither
during testing nor during commissioning.
When testing the device with secondary test equipment, make sure that no other mea-
surement quantities are connected and that the trip and close commands to the circuit
breakers and other primary switches are disconnected from the device unless ex-
pressly stated.
DANGER!
Current transformer secondary circuits must be short-circuited before the cur-
rent leads to the device are disconnected!
If test switches are installed that automatically short-circuit the current transformer cir-
cuits, opening these test switches (placing them in the "Test" position) is sufficient pro-
vided the short-circuit function has been previously tested.
For the commissioning switching operations have to be carried out. A prerequisite for
the prescribed tests is that these switching operations can be executed without dan-
ger. They are accordingly not meant for operational checks.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 323

C53000-G1140-C147–1
Warning!
Primary test may only be carried out by qualified personnel, who are familiar with the
commissioning of protection systems, the operation of the plant and the safety rules
and regulations (switching, earthing, etc.).
3.3.1 Testing mode and transmission blocking
If the SIPROTEC®4 device is connected to a central or main computer system via the
SCADA interface, then the information that is transmitted can be influenced. This is
only possible with some of the protocols availabel (see Table “Protocol-dependent
functions” in the Appendix).
If Test mode is set ON, then a message sent by the device to the main system has
an additional test bit. This bit allows the message to be recognized as resulting from
testing and not an actual fault or power system event.
If DataStop is set ON, transmission to the SCADA is blocked.
Both of these features should be checked. The procedures for setting Test mode and
DataStop are described in the SIPROTEC® 4 System Manual. Note that when
DIGSI® 4 is being used, the program must be in the Online operating mode for the
test features to be used.
3.3.2 Checking the System (SCADA) Interface
Preliminary Provided that the device is equipped with a system (SCADA) interface that is used for
Remarks the communication with a substation, it is possible to test via the DIGSI® 4 operational
function if messages are transmitted correctly. Do not apply this test function in the
real operating mode of the device.
DANGER!
The transmission and reception of messages via the system (SCADA) interface
by means of the testing mode is the real exchange of information between the
SIPROTEC®4 device and the substation. Connected equipment such as circuit
breakers or disconnectors can be operated as a result of these actions!
Note:
After termination of this test, the device will reboot. All annunciation buffers are
erased. If required, these buffers should be extracted with DIGSI® 4 prior to the test.
324 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
Commissioning
The system interface test is carried out Online using DIGSI® 4:

G Double-click on the Online directory to open the required dialogue box.
G Click on Test and the functional options appear on the right side of the window.
G Double-click on Testing Messages for System Interface shown in the list
view. The dialogue box Testing System Interface opens (refer to 3-33).
Structure of the In the column Indication, all message texts that were configured for the system in-
Dialogue Box terface in the matrix will then appear. In the column Status Scheduled the user has
to define the value for the messages to be tested. Depending on the type of message
different entering fields are available (e.g. message ON / message OFF). By double-
clicking onto one of the fields the required value can be selected from the list.
Figure 3-33 Dialog Box: Generate indications
Changing the Clicking for the first time onto one of the field in column Action you will be asked for
Operating State password n° 6 (for hardware test menus). Having entered the correct password mes-
sages can be issued. To do so, click on Send. The corresponding message is issued
and can be read out either from the event log of the SIPROTEC®4 - device or from the
substation.
As long as the windows is open, further tests can be performed.
Test in Message For all information that is transmitted to the central station the following is tested in
Direction Status Scheduled:
G Make sure that each checking process is carried out carefully without causing any
danger (see above and refer to DANGER!)
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 325

C53000-G1140-C147–1
G Click on Send and check whether the transmitted information reaches the central
station and shows the desired reaction.
Exiting the Test To end the System Interface Test, click on Close. The device is briefly out of service
Mode while the start-up routine is executed. The dialogue box closes.
Test in Command The information beginning with “>” is transmitted towards the device. This kind of in-
Direction formation must be indicated by the central station. Check whether the reaction is cor-
rect.
f
3.3.3 Checking the Binary Inputs and Outputs
Preliminary Notes The binary inputs, outputs, and LEDs of a SIPROTEC®4 device can be individually
and precisely controlled using DIGSI® 4. This feature is used to verify control wiring
from the device to plant equipment during commissioning. This test feature shall not
be used while the device is in service on a live system.
DANGER!
Changing the status of a binary input or output using the test feature of DIGSI® 4
results in an actual and immediate corresponding change in the SIPROTEC® de-
vice. Connected equipment such as circuit breakers or disconnectors will be
operated as a result of these actions!
Note: After termination of the hardware test, the device will reboot. Thereby, all annun-
ciation buffers are erased. If required, these buffers should be extracted with DIGSI® 4
prior to the test.
The hardware test can be done using DIGSI® 4 in the online operating mode:
G Open the Online directory by double-clicking; the operating functions for the de-
vice appear.
G Click on Test; the function selection appears in the right half of the screen.
G Double-click in the list view on Hardware Test. The dialogue box of the same
name opens (see Figure 3-34).
326 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
Commissioning
Figure3-34 Dialogue box for hardware test — example
Structure of the The dialogue box is divided into three groups: BI for binary inputs, REL for output
Test Dialogue Box relays, and LED for light-emitting diodes. Each of these groups is associated with an
appropriately marked switching area. By double-clicking in an area, components with-
in the associated group can be turned on or off.
In the Status column, the present (physical) state of the hardware component is
displayed. The binary inputs and outputs are indicated by an open or closed switch
symbol, the LEDs by a dark or illuminated LED symbol.
The possible intended condition of a hardware component is indicated with clear text
under the Scheduled column, which is next to the Status column. The intended
condition offered for a component is always the opposite of the present state.
The right-most column indicates the commands or messages that are configured
(masked) to the hardware components.
Changing the To change the condition of a hardware component, click on the associated switching
Hardware field in the Scheduled column.
Conditions
Password No. 6 (if activated during configuration) will be requested before the first
hardware modification is allowed. After entry of the correct password a condition
change will be executed.
Further condition changes remain possible while the dialog box is open.
Test of the Binary Each individual output relay can be energized allowing a check of the wiring between
Outputs the output relay of the 7SJ62/63/64 and the plant, without having to generate the mes-
sage that is assigned to the relay. As soon as the first change of state for any one of
the output relays is initiated, all output relays are separated from the internal device
functions, and can only be operated by the hardware test function. This implies that a
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 327

C53000-G1140-C147–1
switching signal to an output relay from e.g. a protection function or control command
cannot be executed.
G Ensured that the switching of the output relay can be executed without danger (see
above under DANGER!).
G Each output relay must be tested via the corresponding Scheduled–cell in the di-
alog box.
G The test sequence must be terminated (refer to margin heading “Exiting the Proce-
dure”), to avoid the initiation of inadvertent switching operations by further tests.
Test of the Binary To test the wiring between the plant and the binary inputs of the 7SJ62/63/64 the con-
Inputs dition in the plant which initiates the binary input must be generated and the response
of the device checked.
To do this, the dialogue box Hardware Test must again be opened to view the phys-
ical state of the binary inputs. The password is not yet required.
G Each state in the plant which causes a binary input to pick up must be generated.
G The response of the device must be checked in the Status–column of the dialogue
box. To do this, the dialogue box must be updated. The options may be found below
under the margin heading “Updating the Display”.
If however the effect of a binary input must be checked without carrying out any switch-
ing in the plant, it is possible to trigger individual binary inputs with the hardware test
function. As soon as the first state change of any binary input is triggered and the
password nr. 6 has been entered, all binary inputs are separated from the plant and
can only be activated via the hardware test function.
G Terminate the test sequence (see above under the margin heading „Exiting the Pro-
cedure“).
Test of the LED’s The LED’s may be tested in a similar manner to the other input/output components.
As soon as the first state change of any LED has been triggered, all LEDs are sepa-
rated from the internal device functionality and can only be controlled via the hardware
test frunction. This implies that no LED can be switched on anymore by e.g. a protec-
tion function or operation of the LED reset key.
Updating the When the dialog box Hardware Test is opened, the present conditions of the hard-
Display ware components at that moment are read in and displayed. An update occurs:
− for each harware component, if a command to change the condition is successfully
performed,
− for all hardware components if the Update button is clicked,
− for all hardware components with cyclical updating if the Automatic Update
(20sec) field is marked.
Exiting the To end the hardware test, click on Close. The dialog box closes. The device becomes
Procedure unavailable for a brief start-up period immediately after this. Then all hardware com-
ponents are returned to the operating conditions determined by the plant settings.
328 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
Commissioning
3.3.4 Tests for the Circuit Breaker Failure Protection
If the device provides a breaker failure protection and if this is used, the integration of
this protection function in the system must be tested under practical conditions.
Due to the variety of application options and the available system configurations, it is
not possible to make a detailed description of the necessary tests. It is important to
consider the local conditions and the protection and plant drawings.
It is advised to isolate the circuit breaker of the tested feeder at both sides, i.e. to keep
the busbar isolator and the line isolator open, in order to ensure operation of the break-
er without risk.
Caution!
Also for tests on the local circuit breaker of the feeder a trip command to the surround-
ing circuit breakers can be issued for the busbar. Therefore the tripping of the sur-
rounding circuit breakers (busbar) must be deactivated, e. g. by switching off the cor-
responding control voltages.Nevertheless ensure that trip remains possible in case of
a real primary fault if parts of the power plant are in service.
The trip command of the tested Multi-Functional Protective Relay is made ineffective
so that the local breaker can be tripped only by the breaker failure protection function
of 7SJ62/63/64.
Although the following lists do not claim to be complete it may also contain points
which are to be ignored in the current application.
Circuit Breaker If the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts are connected to the device, these provide an
Auxiliary Contacts essential input to the functionality of the breaker failure protection. Make sure the
correct assignment has been checked (Section 3.3.3).
External Start If the breaker failure protection can also be started by external protection devices, the
Conditions external start conditions should be checked.
In order for the breaker failure protection to be started, a current must flow at least via
the monitored phase. This may be a secondary injected current.
G Starting by trip command of the external protection:
binary input functions “>50BF ext SRC“ (FNo 01431) (in spontaneous or fault
messages).
G After every start, the message “50BF ext Pickup“ (FNo 01457) must appear in
the spontaneous or fault messages.
G After time expiration TRIP-Timer (address 7005) tripping command of the circuit
breaker failure protection.
Switch off test current.
If BF start is possible without current flow:
G To close the circuit breaker to be monitored to both sides with the disconnector
switches open.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 329

C53000-G1140-C147–1
G BF start by trip command of the external protection without current flow:

binary input functions “>50BF ext SRC“ (FNo 01431) ((in spontaneous or fault
messages).
G After every start, the message “50BF ext Pickup“ (FNo 01457) must appear in
the spontaneous or fault messages.
G After time expiration TRIP-Timer (address 7005) tripping command of the circuit
breaker failure protection.
Opening the circuit breaker again.
Busbar tripping For testing the distribution of the trip commands in the substation in the case of break-
er failures it is important to check that the trip commands to the surrounding circuit
breakers is correct.
The surrounding circuit breakers are all those which need to trip when the feeder cir-
cuit breaker fails. These are therefore the circuit breakers of all feeders which feed the
busbar or busbar section to which the feeder with the fault is connected.
A general detailed test guide cannot be specified because the layout of the surround-
ing circuit breakers largely depends on the switchgear topology.
In particular with multiple busbars the trip distribution logic for the surrounding circuit
breakers must be checked. Here it should be checked for every busbar section that all
circuit breakers which are connected to the same busbar section as the feeder circuit
breaker under observation are tripped, and no other breakers.
Tripping of the If the trip command of the circuit breaker failure protection must also trip the circuit
Remote End breaker at the remote end of the feeder under observation, the transmission channel
for this remote trip must also be checked.
Termination All temporary measures taken for testing must be undone, e.g. especially switching
states, interrupted trip commands, changes to setting values or individually switched
off protection functions.
3.3.5 Testing User-Defined Functions
A 7SJ62/63/64 has a vast capability for allowing functions to be defined by the user,
especially with the CFC logic. Any special function or logic added to the device must
be checked.
Naturally, general test procedures cannot be given. Rather, the configuration of these
user-defined functions and the necessary associated conditions must be known and
verified. Of particular importance are the possible interlocking conditions of the circuit
breakers and other primary switching devices. They must be considered and tested.
330 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
Commissioning
3.3.6 Current, Voltage, and Phase Rotation Testing

Load Current The connections of the current and voltage transformers are tested using primary
≥ [10% IN] quantities. Secondary load current of at least 10 % of the nominal current of the device
is necessary. With proper connections of the measuring circuits, none of the mea-
sured-values supervision elements in the device should pick up. If an element detects
a problem, the relevant condition can be viewed in the Event Log. If current summation
errors occur, then check the matching factors. See Subsection ).
Messages from the symmetry monitoring could occur because there actually are
asymmetrical conditions in the network. If these asymmetrical conditions are normal
service conditions, the corresponding monitoring functions should be made less sen-
sitive. See Subsection 2.10.2).
Current and Currents and voltages can be seen in the display field on the front of the device under
Voltage Values Measurement. The quantities can also be viewed under Measurement in the
DIGSI® 4 window. The currents and voltages displayed by the device can be com-
pared to the quantities measured by an independent source.
If the measured values are not plausible, the connection must be checked and correct-
ed after the line has been isolated and the current transformer circuits have been
short-circuited. The measurements must then be repeated.
Phase Rotation The phase rotation must correspond to the configured phase rotation, in general a
clockwise phase rotation. If the system has an anti-clockwise phase rotation, this must
have been considered when the power system data was set (address 0209 PHASE
SEQ., refer to Subsection ). If the phase rotation is incorrect, the alarm “Fail Ph.
Seq.“ (FNo 00171) is generated. The measured value phase allocation must be
checked and corrected, if required, after the line has been isolated and current trans-
formers have been short-circuited. The phase rotation check must then be repeated.
Voltage The VT mcb of the feeder must be opened. The measured voltages in the operational
Transformer measured values appear with a value close to zero (small measured voltages are of
Miniature Circuit no consequence).
Breaker (VT mcb)
Check in the spontaneous messages that the VT mcb trip was entered (message
“>FAIL:FEEDER VT ON“ in the spontaneous messages). Beforehand it has to be as-
sured that the position of the VT mcb is connected to the device via a binary input.
Close the VT mcb: The above messages appear under the spontaneous messages
as “OFF”, i.e. “>FAIL:FEEDER VT OFF“.
If one of the events does not appear, the connection and routing of these signals
must be checked.
If the “ON“–state and “OFF“–state are swapped, the contact type (H–active or L–active)
must be checked and remedied.
7SJ64 only If a busbar voltage is used (for synchronism check) and the assigned VT mcb is con-
nected to the device, the following function must also be checked:
If the VT mcb is open the message “>FAIL: BUS VT ON“ appears, if it is closed the
message “>FAIL: BUS VT OFF“ is displayed.
Switch off the protected power line.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 331

C53000-G1140-C147–1
3.3.7 Testing the Reverse Interlocking Scheme (if applicable)
This testing causes trip contacts of the 7SJ62/63/64 to close. If tripping of the relevant
circuit breakers and primary interrupting devices is to be avoided, the 7SJ62/63/64 trip
contacts must be isolated. Proper backup relaying should exist.
An operational check of the reverse interlocking scheme might cause tripping by the
protective relays that block the 7SJ62/63/64 (depending on the procedure used). If the
blocking relays will trip, the trip contacts that control primary interrupting devices must
be isolated if the devices are not to be operated. Again, proper backup relaying should
exist.
Simple methods of testing and operational checking a reverse interlocking scheme are
illustrated with an example. In this example, the 50-2 element and the 50N-2 element
of the 7SJ62/63/64 are employed in a reverse interlocking scheme that provides bus
protection in a radial distribution system with three feeders. The tripping of both ele-
ments is blocked when Binary Input 1 is energized. The input mask is [>BLOCK 50-
2 (H) or >BLOCK 50N-2 (H)]. The elements have slight time delays to provide co-
ordination with the blocking protective relays. The blocking relays are the three feeder
relays. Each feeder relay has a blocking contact programmed to close when the 51
element or 51N element picks up. The three contacts are connected in parallel to apply
control voltage to Binary Input 1 when any one of them closes.
An actual scheme might employ elements and binary inputs other than those given in
the example. The binary inputs could also be set to block tripping when the inputs are
de-energized. The blocking devices might be configured differently as well. In any
case, testing and operationally checking a reverse interlocking scheme are typically
simple. The procedures below can be adapted as needed.
Caution!
During testing, observe the current ratings of the inputs given in Technical Data, Sub-
section 4.1.1. Allow a cool-down period if the continuous ratings are exceeded.
With the 7SJ62/63/64 isolated from the current transformers and tripping circuits, in-
ject test current into any one phase current input and the ground current input. Slowly
ramp-up the current until the pickup values of 50-2 and 50N-2 are found (monitor con-
tacts or LEDs). Slowly decrease the current until the dropout values are found. Verify
that the pickup and dropout values are as expected.
The time delays of the elements can be measured with a timer set to start on the ap-
plication of current and stop on the closure of the trip contact masked to close when
either 50-2 or 50N-2 trips. Test one element at a time. For either element, first set the
time delay for 0.00 second. Suddenly apply current greater than the pickup value.
Record the time. Repeat the test with the time delay included. The difference between
the results provides an estimate of the time delay. Be sure the time delays are as ex-
pected.
The tripping block can be verified by manually applying voltage to Binary Input 1, and
injecting a test current above the pickup of the element under consideration, for a time
period much longer than the time delay setting.
To operationally check the scheme, current can be simultaneously injected into the
7SJ62/63/64 and one of the feeder relays. The feeder relay must be isolated from cur-
rent transformers and trip circuits of primary equipment. Proper backup relaying
332 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
Commissioning
should be available. The magnitude of the test current must be high enough to pickup
both the feeder blocking element and the 7SJ62/63/64 tripping element. (The blocking
element could be less sensitive in secondary terms.) Suddenly apply the current and
verify that 50-2 and 50N-2 are blocked. Suddenly remove the current and verify that
50-2 and 50N-2 do not trip. If the blocking element has an equal or higher sensitivity
than the tripping element, then tests in which the current is slowly decreased can be
done to verify that there are no element dropout-miscoordinations.
Repeat the testing for each blocking device.
Restore the current and tripping circuits of the 7SJ62/63/64 and the feeder relays.
3.3.8 Directional Checks with Load Current
Load Current The connections of the current and voltage transformers are checked using load cur-
≥ 10 % IN rent on the protected line. The secondary load current must be at least 0.10 · IN. The
load current should be in-phase or lagging the voltage (resistive or resistive-inductive
load). The direction of the load current must be known. If there is a doubt, network
loops should be opened or other action taken to guarantee the direction of the load
current. The line remains energized during this directional test.
DThe direction can be derived directly from the operational measured values. Initially
the correlation of the measured load direction with the actual direction of load flow is
checked. In this case the normal situation is assumed whereby the forward direction
(measuring direction) extends from the busbar towards the line (Figure 3-35).
P positive, if active power flows into the line,
P negative, if active power flows towards the busbar,
Q positive, if reactive power flows into the line,
Q negative, if reactive power flows toward the busbar.
P Positive Real Power in

the Direction of the Line
SLoad = Apparent Power

Phasor
jQ
Negative Reactive Power Positive Reactive Power
Figure 3-35 Apparent Power
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 333

C53000-G1140-C147–1
The power measurement provides an initial indication as to whether the measured val-
ues have the correct polarity. If both the active power as well as the reactive power
have the wrong sign, the polarity in addresse 0201 CT Starpoint must be checked
and rectified.
However, energy metering itself is not able to detect all connection errors. For this rea-
son, directional messages should be generated by means of the directional overcur-
rent protection. The 67-TOC element is used to generate directional messages. The
pickup threshold of 67-TOC, approximately [1.1 · Address 1507 67-TOC PICKUP],
must be reduced so that the available load current causes a continuous pickup of the
element. The direction reported in the messages, such as “Phase A forward“ or
„Phase A reverse“ must correspond to the actual power flow. While performing this
test and interpreting the results, be careful that the “Forward” direction of 67-TOC is
in the direction of the line (or object to be protected). This is not necessarily identical
with the direction of the normal network current flow or the load current flow for this
test. For all three phases, the corresponding power flow directional messages must be
reported properly.
If all directions are incorrect, then there is conflict between the polarity of the current
transformers and the polarity set under Address 0201 CT Starpoint, in P.System
Data1. The polarity of the current transformers must be determined and properly set
in the 7SJ62/63/64 according to Subsection 2.1.3. If the directional data are diverse,
then individual phases in the current or voltage connections are interchanged, or the
phase sequence is not correct. The connections must be checked and corrected. Fi-
nally the phase is again de-energized.
Note! Set the pickup values that have been changed for testing back to the valid set-
tings!
3.3.9 Polarity check for the voltage input U4 (only 7SJ64)
Depending on the application of the voltage measuring input U4 of a 7SJ64, a polarity

check may be necessary. If no measuring voltage is connected to this input, this sub-
section is irrelevant.
If the input U4 is used for measuring the displacement voltage Uen (power system data
1 address 0213 VT Connection = Van,Vbn,Vcn,VGn or Vab, Vbc, VGnd), the
polarity is checked together with the measured current test according to Subsection
3.3.11.
Only for Synchro- If the input U4 is used for measuring a voltage for synchronism check (power system
nism Check in data 1 address 0213 VT Connection = Van,Vbn,Vcn,VSy , observe the following:
7SJ64
• The single-phase voltage U2 to be synchronized must be connected to the input U4;
• The polarity must be checked as follows using the synchronism check function:
The device must be equipped with the synchronism and voltage check. For verifying
the synchrocheck function at address 016x, SYNC Funktion x must be configured
to SYNCHROCHECK (refer to Subsection 2.1.1).
The voltage U2 to be synchronized must be specified correctly under address 6X23
CONNECTIONof V2 (refer to Subsection 2.16.2).
334 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
Commissioning
If a transformer is located between the measuring points of reference voltage U1 and

the voltage to be synchronized U2, the angle must correspond to the phase rotation
through which the vector group of the transformer as seen from the feeder in the di-
rection of the busbar rotates the voltage. For this purpose an angle corresponding to
the transformer vector group is entered in address 6X22 ANGLE ADJUSTM. An ex-
ample is shown in Subsection 2.16.2 gegeben.
If necessary different transformation ratios of the voltage transformers on the busbar
and the feeder may have to be considered under address ON under address 6X01
Synchronizing X.
A further aid for checking in the connection are the messages 170.2090 “25 V2>V1“,
170.2091 “25 V2<V1“, 170.2094 “25 a2>a1“ and 170.2095 “25 a2<a1“ in the
spontaneous annunciations.
G Circuit breaker is open. The feeder is isolated (zero voltage). The VTmcbs of both
voltage transformer circuits must be closed.
G The program Direct CO = YES (address 6X10A) must be set for the synchro-
check; the other programs (addresses 6X07 to 6X09) are set to NO.
G A request for synchro-check is initiated via binary input (FNo. 170.0043 “>25
Measu. Only“). The synchro-check must give close release (message “25 Clos-
eRelease“, FNr 170.0049). If not, check all relevant parameters again (synchro-
check configured and switched on correctly, see sections 2.1.1 and 2.16.2).
G Set address 6X10 Direct CO to NO.
G Then the circuit breaker is closed while the line isolator is open (see Figure 3-36).
Both voltage transformers therefore measure the same voltage.
G The program SYNC-Funktionsgruppe X = ASYN/SYNCHRON (Adresse 016X) is
set.
G A request for synchro-check measurement is initiated via binary input (FNo.
170.0043 “>25 Measu. Only“). The synchro-check must give close release
(message “25 CloseRelease“, FNo 170.0049).
Busbar
U2
U4
7SJ64
U1
Ý
Injection
Figure3-36 Measuring voltages for synchro-check
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 335

C53000-G1140-C147–1
G If not, first check whether one of the aforenamed messages 170.2090 „25 V2>V1“
or 170.2091 „25 V2<V1“ or 170.2094 „25 a2>a1“ or 170.2095 „25 a2<a1“ is
available in the spontaneous messages.
The messages „25 V2>V1“ or „25 V2<V1“ indicates that the magnitude (ratio) ad-
aptation is incorrect. Check address 6X21 Balancing V1/V2 and recalculate the
adaptation factor.
The messages „25 a2>a1“ or „25 a2<a1“ indicates that the phase relation of the
busbar voltage does not match the setting under address 6X23 CONNECTIONof
V2 (see Subsection 2.16.2.2). When measuring across a power transformer, ad-
dress 6X22 ANGLE ADJUSTM. must also be checked; this must adapt the vector
group (see Subsection 2.16.2.2). If these are correct, there is probably a reverse
polarity of the voltage transformer terminals U1.
G For the synchro-check the program SYNC V1>V2< = YES (address 6X08) and
SYNC Funktion X = ASYN/SYNCHRON (address 016X) is set.
G Open the VT mcb of the busbar voltage.
G A request for synchro-check measurement is initiated via binary input (FNo.
170.0043 “>25 Measu. Only“). There is no close release. If there is, the VT mcb
for the busbar voltage is not allocated. Check whether this is the required state, al-
ternatively check the binary input “>FAIL: BUS VT“ if necessary (FNo 06510).
G Close the VT mcb of the busbar voltage is to be closed again.
G Open the circuit breaker.
G The program SYNC V1<V2> = YES (address 6X07) and SYNC V1>V2< = NO (ad-
dress 6X08) is set for the synchro-check.
G A request measurement for synchro-check is initiated via binary input (FNo.
170.0043 “>25 Measu. Only“). The synchronism check must release closing
(message “25 CloseRelease“, FNo 170.0049). If not, check all voltage connec-
tions and the corresponding parameters again carefully as described in Subsection
2.16.2.
G Open the VT mcb of the feeder voltage.
G Via binary input (FNo. 170.0043 „>25 Measu. Only“) initiate the measuring re-
quest. No close release is given.
G Close the VT mcb of the busbar voltage again.
Addresses 6X07 to 6X10 must be restored as they were changed for the test. If the
routing of the LEDs or signal relays was changed for the test, this must also be re-
stored.
3.3.10 Ground Fault Check in a Non-Grounded System
The ground fault check is only necessary if the device is connected to an isolated or
resonant-grounded system and the ground fault detection is applied. The device must
therefore be provided with the ground fault detection function according to its ordering
336 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
Commissioning
code (position 15 in ordering code: D or B or F or H). Furthermore, address 0131

Sens. Gnd Fault = Enabled must have been preset during configuration to enable
this function (according to Subsction 2.1.1). If none of this is the case, Subsection
3.3.10 is not relevant.
The primary check serves to find out the correct polarity of the transformer connec-
tions for the determination of the earth fault direction.
DANGER!
Primary measurements must only be carried out on disconnected and grounded
equipment of the power system. Danger to life exists even on disconnected
equipment because of capacitive coupling from other energized equipment of
the power system!
Using the primary earth fault method a most reliable test result is guaranteed. There-
fore please proceed as follows:
G Isolate the line and earth it on both ends. During the whole testing procedure the
line must be open at the remote end.
G Make a test connection between a single phase and ground. On overhead lines it
can be connected anywhere, however, it must be located behind the current trans-
formers (looking from the busbar of the feeder to be checked). Cables are earthed
on the remote end (sealing end).
G Remove the protective earthing of the line.
G Connect a circuit breaker to the line end that is to be checked.
G Check the direction indication (LED if allocated)
G The faulty phase (FNo 01272 for L1 or 01273 for L2 or 01274 for L3) and the di-
rection of the line, i.e. “SensGnd Forward“ (FNo 01276) must be displayed in the
earth fault protocol.
G The active and reactive components of the earth current are also displayed. The re-
active current (“INs Reac“, FNo 000702) is the most relevant for isolated systems,
for resonant-earthed systems it is the active current (“INs Real“, FNo 000701). If
the display shows the message “SensGnd Reverse“ (FNo 01277), either the cur-
rent or voltage transformer terminals are swopped in the neutral path. In case the
message “SensGnd undef.“ (FNo 01278) appears the earth current may be too
low.
G Deenergize and earth the line.
The check is then finished.
3.3.11 Polarity Check for the Current Measuring Input IN
If the standard connection of the device is used whereby the current measuring input
IN is connected in the star-point of the set of current transformers (refer also to the con-
nection circuit diagrams in the Appendix A.3, Figure A-45, A-55, then the correct po-
larity of the earth current path in general will result automatically.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 337

C53000-G1140-C147–1
If however the current IN is derived from a separate summation CT (e.g. a core bal-
ance CT, see Section A.3, Figure A-47, A-57, A-64) an additional polarity check with
this current is necessary.
If the device is provided with the sensitive current measuring input IN and it is connect-
ed to an isolated or resonant-grounded system, the polarity check for IN was already
carried out with the earth fault check according to 3.3.10. Then this Subsection 3.3.11
can be ignored.
Otherwise the test is done with a disconnected trip circuit and primary load current. It
must be noted that during all simulations that do not exactly correspond with situations
that may occur in practice, the non-symmetry of measured values may cause the
measured value monitoring to pick up. This must therefore be ignored during such
tests.
DANGER!
Working on measurement transformers requires the highest precautions!
Short-circuit current transformers before any current connections to the device
are opened!
Directional Testing The check can either be carried out with function “directional ground fault protection”
for a Grounded Net- (address 0116) or function “ground fault detection” (address 0131), which can be op-
work erated as additional short-circuit protection.
In the following the check is described using the “directional ground fault protection”
function (address 0116) as an example.
To establish 3V0 (a displacement voltage), the connection of one VT winding is re-
moved from the device. In Figure 3-37, the open delta VTs are modified so that only
Vb and Vc are connected to the inputs Ve-n of the device. Alternatively, Va from the
wye-VTs can be disconnected. If no connection for VNs (Ve-n connection) is foreseen,
the secondary side of the corresponding phase can be disconnected as shown in Fig-
ure 3-38. The device receives only the current from the phase where the associated
voltage connection at the device is missing. If the line current is in-phase or lagging
the voltage (resistive or resistive-inductive load), the same current-voltage relation-
ships exist for the device in this test simulation as during a phase-ground fault in the
direction of the line.
At least one stage of the ground fault protection must be set to be directional. The pick-
up threshold of this stages must be below the load current flowing on the line; if nec-
essary the pick-up threshold must be reduced. The parameters that have been
changed must be noted.
After switching the line on and off again, the direction indication must be checked: in
the fault messages the messages “67N picked up“ and „Ground forward“ must
at least be present. If the directional pick up is not present, either the earth current con-
nection or the displacement voltage connection is incorrect. If the wrong direction is
indicated, either the direction of load flow is from the line toward the busbar or the
earth current path has a swapped polarity. In the latter case, the connection must be
rectified after the line has been isolated and the current transformers short-circuited.
In the event that the pick-up alarms were not even generated, the measured earth (re-
sidual) current or the displacement voltage evolved may be too small. This can be che-
cked by means of the operational measured values.
338 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
Commissioning
Attention! If parameters were changed for this test, they must be returned to their
original state after completion of the test!
A
Bus
B
C
e
n
Ve Vn
Ia Ia'
Ib Ib'
Ic Ic'
IN IN'
7SJ62/63/64
Line
Figure 3-37 Polarity Testing for IN, Example with Current Transformers Configured in a
Holmgreen-Connection (VTs with Broken Delta Connection — e-n Winding)
A
Bus
B
C
Va Vb Vc Vn
Ia Ia'
Ib Ib'
Ic I c'
IN IN'
7SJ62/63/64
Line
Figure 3-38 Polarity Testing for IN, Example with Current Transformers Configured in a
Holmgreen-Connection (VTs Wye-Connected)
3.3.12 Checking the Temperature Measurement via RTD-Box
After the termination of the RS485 port and the setting of the bus address have been
verified according to Subsection 3.2.1, the measured temperature values and thresh-
olds can be checked.
If temperature sensors are used with 2-phase connection you must first determine the
line resistance for the temperature detector being short-circuited. Select mode 6 at the
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 339

C53000-G1140-C147–1
RTD-Box and enter the resistance value you have determined for the corresponding
sensor (range: 0 to 50.6 Ω) to the RTD-Box.
When using the preset 3-phase connection for the temperature detectors no further
entry must be made.
For checking the measured temperature values the temperature detectors are re-
placed by settable resistances (e.g. precision resistance decade) and the correct as-
signment of the resistance value and the displayed temperature for 2 or 3 temperature
values from table 3-37 are verified.
Table 3-37 Assignment of temperature and resistance of the detectors
Temperature in °C Ni 100 Ni 120 Pt 100

DIN 43760 DIN 34760 IEC 751
–50 74,255 89,106 80,3062819
–40 79,1311726 94,9574071 84,270652
–30 84,1457706 100,974925 88,2216568
–20 89,2964487 107,155738 92,1598984
–10 94,581528 113,497834 96,085879
0 100 120 100
10 105,551528 126,661834 103,902525
20 111,236449 133,483738 107,7935
30 117,055771 140,466925 111,672925
40 123,011173 147,613407 115,5408
50 129,105 154,926 119,397125
60 135,340259 162,408311 123,2419
70 141,720613 170,064735 127,075125
80 148,250369 177,900442 130,8968
90 154,934473 185,921368 134,706925
100 161,7785 194,1342 138,5055
110 168,788637 202,546364 142,292525
120 175,971673 211,166007 146,068
130 183,334982 220,001979 149,831925
140 190,88651 229,063812 153,5843
150 198,63475 238,3617 157,325125
160 206,58873 247,906476 161,0544
170 214,757989 257,709587 164,772125
180 223,152552 267,783063 168,4783
190 231,782912 278,139495 172,172925
200 240,66 288,792 175,856
210 249,79516 299,754192 179,527525
220 259,200121 311,040145 183,1875
230 268,886968 322,664362 186,835925
240 278,868111 334,641733 190,4728
250 289,15625 346,9875 194,098125
340 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
Commissioning
Temperature thresholds that are configured in the protection device can be checked
by slowly approaching the resistance value.
3.3.13 Measuring the operating time of the circuit breaker (only 7SJ64)
Only for If the device 7SJ64 is equipped with the function for synchronism and voltage check
Synchronism and it is applied, it is necessary — under asynchronous system conditions — that the
Check operating time of the circuit breaker is measured and set correctly when closing. If the
synchronism check function is not used or only for closing under synchronous system
conditions, this subsection is irrelevant.
For measuring the operating time a setup as shown in figure 3-39. The timer is set to
1 s and a graduation of 1 ms.
The circuit breaker is closed manually. At the same time the timer is started. After clos-
ing the poles of the circuit breaker, the voltage UFeeder appears and the timer is
stopped. The time displayed by the timer is the real circuit breaker closing time.
If the timer is not stopped due to an unfavourable closing moment, the attempt will be
repeated.
It is particularly favourable to calculate the mean from several (3 to 5) successful
switching attempts.
Set the calculated time under address 6X20 as T-CB close (under power system
data 2). Select the next lower adjustable value.
Busbar
UBusbar
Start
L+ Close
Timer
L–
Stop
UFeeder
Feeder
Figure3-39 Measuring the circuit breaker closing time
3.3.14 Switching Check for the Configured Operating Devices
Control by Local If the configured operating devices were not switched sufficiently in the hardware test
Command already described (Subsection 3.3.3), all configured switching devices must be
switched on and off from the device via the integrated control element. The feedback
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 341

C53000-G1140-C147–1
information of the circuit breaker position injected via binary inputs is read out at the
device and compared with the actual breaker position. For devices with graphic dis-
play this is easy to do with the control display.
The switching procedure is described in the SIPROTEC® 4–System Manual. The
switching authority must be set in correspondence with the source of commands used.
The switching mode can be selected from interlocked and non-interlocked switching.
Please take note that non-interlocked switching can be a safety hazard.
Control by Protec- Tripping of the primary equipment by protective elements can be verified if desired.
tive Function However, be fully aware that such testing can result in closing of the circuit breaker by
the reclosing element in the 7SJ62/63/64 or an external reclosing device. If circuit
breaker closing is to be avoided, be sure the closing is defeated before the test is per-
formed. If reclosing is desired, select an element in the 7SJ62/63/64 that initiates re-
closing, and test the control by tripping this element in the testing. To avoid a trip-close-
trip event, be sure the protective element is dropped out before the close occurs.
DANGER!
A successfully started test cycle can lead to the closing of the circuit breaker!
Control from a Re- If the device is connected to a remote substation via a system (SCADA) interface, the
mote Control Cen- corresponding switching tests may also be checked from the substation. Please also
tre take into consideration that the switching authority is set in correspondence with the
source of commands used.
3.3.15 Triggering Oscillographic Recordings
At the end of commissioning, an investigation of switching operations of the circuit

breaker(s) or primary switching device(s), under load conditions, should be done to
assure the stability of the protection during the dynamic processes. Oscillographic re-
cordings obtain the maximum information about the behaviour of the 7SJ62/63/64.
Requirements Along with the capability of recording waveform data during system faults, the 7SJ62/
63/64 also has the capability of capturing the same data when commands are given
to the device via the service program DIGSI® 4, the serial interfaces, or a binary input.
For the latter, the binary input must be assigned to the function “>Trig.Wave.Cap.”
(FNo 00004). Triggering for the oscillographic recording then occurs when the input is
energized. For example, an auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker or control switch
may be used to control the binary input for triggering.
An oscillographic recording that is externally triggered (that is, without a protective el-
ement pick-up or device trip) is processed by the device as a normal fault recording
with the exception that data are not given in the fault messages (trip log). The exter-
nally triggered record has a number for establishing a sequence.
342 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
Commissioning
Triggering with To trigger oscillographic recording with DIGSI® 4, click on Test in the left part of the
DIGSI® 4 window. Double click the entry Test Wave Form in the list in the right part of the win-
dow to trigger the recording. See Figure 3-40.
Figure 3-40 Triggering oscillographic recording with DIGSI® 4
A report is given in the bottom left region of the screen. In addition, message segments
concerning the progress of the procedure are displayed.
The SIGRA® program or the Comtrade Viewer program is required to view and ana-
lyse the oscillographic data.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 343

C53000-G1140-C147–1
3.4 Final Preparation of the Device
Tighten the used screws at the terminals; those ones not being used should be slightly
fastened. Ensure all pin connectors are properly inserted.
Caution!
Do not use force! The tightening torques must not be exceeded as the threads and
terminal chambers may otherwise be damaged!
Verify that all service settings are correct. This is a crucial step because some
setting changes might have been made during commissioning. The protective
settings under device configuration, input/output configuration are especially impor-
tant (Section 2.1.1) as well as the power system data, and activated Groups A through
D (if applicable). All desired elements and functions must be set ON. See Chapter 2.
Keep a copy of all of the in-service settings on a PC.
Check the internal clock of the device. If necessary, set the clock or synchronize the
clock if it is not automatically synchronized. For assistance, refer to the SIPROTEC®
4 System Manual.
The Annunciation memory buffers should be cleared, particularly the Event Log and
Trip Log. Future information will then only apply for actual system events and faults.
To clear the buffers, press MAIN MENU → Annunciation → Set/Reset. The num-
bers in the switching statistics should be reset to the values that were existing prior to
the testing, or to values in accordance with the user's practices. Set the statistics by
pressing MAIN MENU → Annunciation → Statistic. Refer to the SIPROTEC® 4
System Manual if more information is needed.
Press the ESC key, several times if necessary, to return to the default display.
Clear the LEDs on the front panel by pressing the LED key. Any output relays that were
picked up prior to clearing the LEDs are reset when the clearing action is performed.
Future indications of the LEDs will then apply only for actual events or faults. Pressing
the LED key also serves as a test for the LEDs because they should all light when the
button is pushed. Any LEDs that are lit after the clearing attempt are displaying actual
conditions.
The green “RUN” LED must be on. The red “ERROR” LED must not be lit.
Close the protective switches. If test switches are available, then these must be in the
operating position.
The device is now ready for operation.
344 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
Technical Data 4
This chapter provides the technical data of the SIPROTEC® 4 7SJ62/63/64 devices
and the individual functions of the devices, including the limiting values that under no
circumstances may be exceeded. The electrical and functional data for devices
equipped with all options are followed by the mechanical data with dimensional draw-
ings.
4.1 General Device Data 346

4.2 Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (50 and 50N Elements) 359
4.3 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (51 and 51N Elements) 360
4.4 Directional Time Overcurrent Protection (67 and 67N Elements) 370
4.5 Inrush Restraint 371
4.6 Dynamic Cold Load Pick-up Function (50c, 50Nc, 51Nc, 67c, 67Nc) 371
4.7 Voltage Protection (27 and 59) 372
4.8 Negative Sequence Protection (46) 373
4.9 Motor Starting Protection (48) 379
4.10 Start Inhibit for Motors (66/68) 380
4.11 Frequency Protection (81 Over-Frequency and Under-Frequency) 381
4.12 Thermal Overload Protection (49) 382
4.13 Sensitive Ground Fault Detection (64, 50Ns, 67Ns) 384
4.14 Intermittent Ground Fault Protection 387
4.15 Automatic Reclosing System (79M) 388
4.16 Fault Location 389
4.17 Breaker Failure Protection (50BF) 389
4.18 Synchronism and Voltage Check (25) (7SJ64 only) 390
4.19 RTD-Boxes for Temperature Detection 391
4.20 User Defined Functions with CFC 392
4.21 Additional Functions 395
4.22 Breaker Control 399
4.23 Dimensions 400
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 345

C53000–G1140–C147–1
Technical Data
4.1 General Device Data
4.1.1 Analog Inputs
Nominal Frequency fN 50 Hz or 60 Hz (adjustable)
Current Inputs Nominal Current IN 1 A or 5 A

Ground Current, SensitiveINs ≤ 1.6 A1)
Burden per Phase and Ground Path
– At IN = 1 A approx. 0.05 VA
– At IN = 5 A approx. 0.3 VA
– Sensitive Ground Fault Detection 1 A approx. 0.05 VA
AC Current Overload Capability
– Thermal (rms) 100 · IN < 1 s
30 · IN < 10 s
4 · IN continuous
– Dynamic (current pulse) 250 · IN for 0.5 cycle
AC Current Overload Capability for Sensitive Ground Fault Detection INs1)
– Thermal (rms) 300 A < 1 s
100 A < 10 s
15 A continuous
– dynamic (impulse) 750 A for 0.5 cycle
Voltage Inputs Secondary Nominal Voltage 100 V to 225 V AC

Measuring Range 0 V to 170 V AC
Burden at 100 V approx. 0.3 VA
AC Voltage Input Overload Capacity
– Thermal (rms) 230 V continuous
Measuring Trans- Input Current 0 mA DC to 20 mA DC

ducer Inputs Input Resistance 10 Ω
(7SJ63 only) Burden 5.8 mW at 24 mA
1
) only in versions with input for sensitive ground fault detection (ordering data see Ap-
pendix A.1)
4.1.2 Power Supply
Direct Voltage Voltage Supply Via Integrated Converter

Nominal Power Supply Direct Voltage UH DC 24/48 VDC 60/110/125 VDC
Permissible Voltage Ranges 19 to 58 VDC 48 to 150 V DC
Nominal Power Supply Direct Voltage UH DC 110/125/220/250 VDC

Permissible Voltage Ranges 88 to 300 V DC
346 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000–G1140–C147–1
General Device Data
Permissible AC Ripple Voltage, peak to peak ≤15 % of the power supply voltage
to IEC 60255–11
Power Consumption Quiescent Energized

7SJ621, 7SJ622 approx. 4 W approx. 7 W
7SJ631 approx. 4 W approx. 10 W
7SJ632, 7SJ633 approx. 5,5 W approx. 16 W
7SJ635, 7SJ636 approx. 7 W approx. 20 W
7SJ640 approx. 5 W approx. 7,5 W
Bridging Time for Failure/Short Circuit ≥ 50 ms at U ≥ 110 VDC

to IEC 60255–11 ≥ 20 ms at U ≥ 24 VDC
Alternative Voltage Voltage Supply via Integrated Converter
Nominal Power Supply Alternating Voltage 115 VAC 230 VAC*)

UH AC
Permissible Voltage Ranges 92 to 132 VAC 184 to 265 VAC*)
*) 7SJ62 and 7SJ63 only

Power Consumption Quiescent Energized
7SJ621, 7SJ622 approx. 3 VA approx. 9 VA
7SJ631 approx. 3 VA approx. 12 VA
7SJ640 approx. 6.5 VA approx. 12.5 VA
7SJ645 approx. 6.5 VA approx. 21 VA
Bridging Time for Failure/Short Circuit ≥ 200 ms
4.1.3 Binary Inputs and Outputs
Binary Inputs Number

7SJ621*– 8 (configurable)
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 347

C53000–G1140–C147–1
Technical Data
Nominal Voltage Range 24 VDC to 250 VDC, bipolar
Device Binary Inputs

7SJ62 --- BI 1 ... BI 11
7SJ63 BI 1....6; BI 8....19 BI 7; BI 20....24
BI 25....36 BI 37
7SJ640 --- BI 1...7
7SJ641 --- BI 1...15
7SJ642 BI 8...19 BI 1...7; BI 20
7SJ645 BI 8...19; BI 21...32 BI 1...7; BI 20; BI 33
Current Consumption, Energized approx. 0.9 mA approx. 1.8 mA
(independent of the control voltage)
Pickup Times approx. 9 ms approx. 4 ms
Switching Thresholds adjustable voltage range with jumpers

– For Nominal Voltages 24/48/60 VDC UPU ≥ 19 VDC
and 60/110/125 VDC UDO ≤ 14 VDC
– For Nom. Voltages 110/125 VDC UPU ≥ 88 VDC
and 220/250 VDC UDO ≤ 66 VDC
and 115/230 VAC
Maximum Permissible Voltage 300 VDC
Impulse Filter on Input 220 nF Coupling Capacitor at 220 V with
recovery time > 60 ms
Output Relays Output Relay for Commands/Annunciations1) (see also General Diagrams in
High-duty relays (motor control)2 Appendix A.2)
Number and Information acc. to the order variant (allocatable):

Values in ( ): up to release .../DD
Order Variant NO NO/NC (switch High-duty

Contact selectable) relay
7SJ621∗– 6 (8) 3 (1) –
7SJ622∗– 4 (6) 3 (1) –
7SJ631∗– 8 1 –
7SJ632∗– 11 1 4
7SJ633∗– 11 1 4
7SJ635∗– 14 1 8
7SJ636∗– 14 1 8
348 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000–G1140–C147–1
General Device Data
Order Variant NO NO/NC (switch High-duty

Contact selectable) relay
7SJ640∗– 5 1 –
7SJ641∗– 12 2 –
7SJ642∗– 8 1 4
7SJ645∗– 11 1 8
Switching Capability MAKE 1000 W/VA 1) –
BREAK 30 W/VA –
40 W resistive –
25 W/VA at L/R ≤ 50 ms –
Switching Voltage 250 V 250 V
Permissible Current per Contact / 5 A continous
Max. inrush peak 30 A ≤ 0,5 s 30 A ≤ 0,5 s
Permissible Current per Contact 5 A continous –
and Total Current on common path 30 A for 0,5 s –
Switching Capability for 28 V to 250 V – 1000 W 2)
for 30 s for 24 V – 500 W
Permissible relative closing time – 1%
Operating time, approx.. 8 ms 8 ms –
1) UL–listed with the following nominal value:

120 V ac Pilot duty, B300
240 V ac Pilot duty, B300
240 V ac 5 A General Purpose
24 V dc 5 A General Purpose
48 V dc 0.8 A General Purpose
240 V dc 0.1 A General Purpose
120 V ac 1/6 hp (4.4 FLA)
240 V ac 1/2 hp (4.9 FLA)
2) UL–listed with the following nominal value:
240 V dc 1.6 FLA
120 V dc 3.2 FLA
60 V dc 5.5 FLA
4.1.4 Communications Interfaces
PC Front Interface – Connection front panel, non-isolated, RS 232,

9-pin DSUB port for connecting a personal
computer
– Operation with DIGSI® 4
– Transmission Speed min. 4800 Baud; max. 38400 Baud
for 7SJ63/64: max. 115 200 Baud
Factory Setting: 38400 Baud; Parity: 8E1
– Maximum Distance of Transmission 15 meters / 50 feet
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 349

C53000–G1140–C147–1
Technical Data
Rear Service–/Mo- – Connection isolated interface for data transfer

dem– Interface
– Operation with DIGSI® 4
– Transmission Speed min. 4800 Bd, max. 38400 Baud
for 7SJ63/64: max. 115 200 Baud
Factory Setting: 38400 Bd
RS232/RS485 RS232/RS485 depends on order code
– Connection for flush mounted case rear panel, mounting location “C“
9 pin DSUB port
for panel-surface on the case bottom
mounted case shielded data cable
– Test Voltage 500 V AC
RS232
RS485
– Maximum Distance of Transmission 1 km / 3280 feet / 0.62 mile
Fibre Optical Link1)
– Connector Type ST–Connector
with flush-mounted case rear panel, mounting location “C“
with panel surface- at FO housing
mounted case on the case bottom
– Optical Wavelength λ = 820 nm
– Laser Class 1 Under EN 60825–1/ –2 using glass fiber 50/125 µm or
using glass fiber 62.5/125 µm
– Optical Link Signal Attenuation max. 8 dB, with glass fiber 62.5/125 µm
– Channel Distance max. 1.5 km (0.95 miles)
– Character Idle State selectable: factory setting “Light off”
1
) not for 7SJ64
Additional Port – Connection isolated interface for data transfer

(only 7SJ64) with RTD-boxes
– Transmission Speed min. 4800 Bd, max. 115 200 Baud
RS485
– Connection for Flush Mounted Case rear panel, installation location “D“
9 pin DSUB Port RS 485
for panel surface- at the housing on the case bottom
mounted case shielded data cable
Fibre Optical Link

with flush-mounted case rear panel, mounting location “D“
350 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000–G1140–C147–1
General Device Data
with panel surface- at housing

System (SCADA) IEC 60870–5–103

Interface (optional)
RS232/RS485/ floating interface for data transfer
depends on order code to a master terminal
RS232
– Connection for flush mounted case rear panel, mounting location “B“
9 pin DSUB port
mounted case
– Transmission Speed min. 4800 Bd, max. 38400 Bd
RS485
– Connection for Flush Mounted Case rear panel, installation location “B“
mounted case
– Transmission Speed min. 4800 Bd, max. 38400 Bd
Fibre Optical Link
with flush-mounted case rear panel, mounting location “B“
with panel surface- at housing
PROFIBUS RS485 (FMS and DP)
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 351

C53000–G1140–C147–1
Technical Data
for panel surface- at the housing on the

mounted case case bottom
– Transmission Speed up to 1.5 M Baud
– Maximum Distance of Transmission 1 km / 3280 feet / 0.62 mile at≤ 93.75 kBd
500 m /1640 feet /0.31 mile at≤ 187.5 kBd
200 m / 660 feet at ≤ 1.5 MBd
Profibus (FMS and DP)
Fibre Optical Link
– Connector type integrated ST connector for OWG
direct access; for FMS single ring or
twin ring, depending on order
for DP only double ring
For Flush-Mounted Case rear panel, mounting location “B“
For Panel Surface- at the housing
Mounted Case on the case bottom
– Transmission Speed up to 1.5 M Baud
recommended: > 500 k Baud with normal casing
≤ 57600 Bd with detached operator panel
– Laser class 1 Under EN 60825–1/ –2 using glass fiber 50/125 µm or
DNP3.0 / MODBUS RS485
9 pin DSUB Port
for panel surface- at the housing on the
mounted case case bottom
– Test Voltage 500 V; 50 Hz
– Transmission Speed max. 19200 Bd
DNP3.0 / MODBUS Fibre Optical Link
– Connector Type ST–Connector transmitter/receiver
– Connection with flush-mounted case rear panel, mounting location “B“
with panel surface- at the housing
– Transmission Speed max. 19200 Bd
352 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000–G1140–C147–1
General Device Data
Clock – Time Synchronization DCF77/IRIG B–Signal

– Connection For Flush-mounted Case rear panel, mounting location “A“
9 - pin DSUB port
For Panel Surface- at the double-deck terminal on
Mounted Case the case bottom
– Signal Rated Voltage selectable 5 V, 12 V or 24 V
– Signal Levels and Burdens:
Rated Signal Voltage
5V 12 V 24 V
VIHigh 6.0 V 15.8 V 31 V
VILow 1.0 V at IILow = 0.25 mA 1.4 V at IILow = 0.25 mA 1.9 V at IILow = 0.25 mA
IIHigh 4.5 mA to 9.4 mA 4.5 mA to 9.3 mA 4.5 mA to 8.7 mA
RI 890 Ω at VI = 4 V 1930 Ω at VI = 8.7 V 3780 Ω at VI = 17 V
640 Ω at VI = 6 V 1700 Ω at VI = 15.8 V 3560 Ω at VI = 31 V
4.1.5 Electrical Tests
Specifications Standards: IEC 60255 (Product Standards)

ANSI/IEEEC37.90.0,.C37.90.0.1,
C37.90.0.2
UL 508
DIN 57 435 Part 303
See also standards for individual tests
Insulation Tests Standards: IEC 60255–5, IEC 60870–2–1

– High Voltage Test (routine test) 2.5 kV (rms) AC
All circuits except power supply,
Binary Inputs, and
Communications Interface
– High Voltage Test (routine test) 3.5 kVDC
only power supply and binary inputs
– High Voltage Test (routine test) 500 V (rms) AC
Only Isolated Communications
and Time Synchronization Interfaces
– Impulse Voltage Test (type test) 5 kV (peak): 1.2/50 µs: 0.5 Ws: 3 positive
All Circuits Except Communications and 3 negative impulses in intervals of 5 s
and Time Synchronization Interfaces,
Class III
EMC Tests for Im- Standards: IEC 60255–6 and –22, (Product standards)
munity (Type Tests) EN 50082–2 (Generic standard)
DIN 57 435 Part 303 ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1
and C37.90.2
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 353

C53000–G1140–C147–1
Technical Data
– High Frequency Test 2.5 kV (Peak): 1 MHz: τ = 15 µs;

IEC 60255–22–1, Class III 400 Surges per s: Test Duration 2 s
and VDE 0435 Part 303, Class III Ri=200 Ω
– Electrostatic Discharge 8 kV contact discharge: 15 kV air-
IEC 60255–22–2 Class IV discharge, both polarities:150 pF:Ri=330 Ω
and IEC 61000–4–2, Class IV
– Irradiation with HF Field, 10 V/m: 27 MHz to 500 MHz
non-modulated
IEC 60255–22–3 (Report) Class III
– Irradiation with HF Field, 10 V/m: 80 MHz to1000 MHz: 80 % AM:
amplitude modulated 1 kHz
IEC 61000–4–3, Class III
– Irradiation with HF Field, 10 V/m: 900 MHz: repetition frequency
Pulse Modulated 200 Hz: duty cycle of 50 %
IEC 61000–4–3/ENV 50204, Class III
– Fast Transient Disturbance Variables/ 4 kV: 5/50 ns: 5 kHz: Burst length = 15 ms;
Burst IEC 60255–22–4 and repetition rate 300 ms: both polarities:
IEC 61000-4-4, Class IV Ri = 50 Ω: Test Duration 1 min
– High Energy Surge Voltages
(SURGE), IEC 61000–4–5
Installation Class 3
Power Supply common mode: 2 kV: 12 Ω: 9 µF
diff. mode: 1 kV: 2 Ω: 18 µF
Measuring Inputs, Binary Inputs common mode: 2 kV: 42 Ω: 0.5 µF
and Relay Outputs diff. mode: 1 kV: 42 Ω: 0.5 µF
– Line Conducted HF, amplitude module.10 V: 150 kHz to 80 MHz: 80 % AM: 1 kHz
IEC 61000–4–6, Class III
– Power System Frequency Magnetic 30 A/m continuous: 300 A/m for 3 s: 50 Hz
Field IEC 61000–4–8, Class IV 0.5 mT: 50 Hz
IEC 60255–6
– Oscillatory Surge Withstand Capability 2.5 to 3 kV (Peak Value): 1MHz to 1.5 MHz
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 damped wave: 50 surges per s:
duration 2 s: Ri = 150 Ω to 200 Ω
– Fast Transient Surge Withstand Cap. 4 kV to 5 kV: 10/150 ns: 50 Pulse per s;
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 both polarities: Duration 2 s: Ri = 80 Ω
– Radiated Electromagnetic Interference 35 V/m: 25 MHz to 1000 MHz
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2 amplitude and pulse modulated
– Damped Oscillations 2.5 kV (Peak Value), polarity alternating
similar to IEC 60694–4–12, 100 kHz, 1 MHz, 10 MHz and 50 MHz,
IEC 61000–4–12 Ri = 200 Ω
EMC Tests For Standard: EN 50081–1 (Generic Standard)

Noise Emission
– Radio Noise Voltage to Lines, 150 kHz to 30 MHz
(type test)
Only Power Supply Voltage Limit Class B
IEC–CISPR 22
– Radio Noise Field Strength 30 MHz to 1000 MHz
IEC–CISPR 22 Limit Class B
354 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000–G1140–C147–1
General Device Data
– Harmonic Currents Device is to be assigned Class D

on the Network Lead at 230 VAC*) (applies only for devices with > 50 VA
IEC 61000–3–2 power consumption)
– Voltage Variations Limits are observed
and Flicker on the Network Lead
at 230 VAC*)
IEC 61000–3–3
*) for 7SJ62 and 7SJ63
4.1.6 Mechanical Stress Tests
Vibration and Standards: IEC 60255–21 and IEC 60068

Shock Stress Dur-
– Vibration Sinusoidal
ing Operation
IEC 60255–21–1, Class 2 10 Hz to 60 Hz: ±0.075 mm Amplitude;
IEC 60068–2–6 60 Hz to 150 Hz: 1 g acceleration
frequency sweep rate 1 Octave/min
20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes.
– Shock Half-sine shaped
IEC 60255–21–2, Class 1 acceleration 5 g, duration 11 ms,
IEC 60068–2–27 3 shocks in each direction of
3 orthogonal axes
– Seismic Vibration Sinusoidal
IEC 60255–21–3, Class 1 1 Hz to 8 Hz ± 3.5 mm Amplitude
IEC 60068–3–3 (horizontal axis)
1 Hz to 8 Hz: ± 1.5 mm Amplitude
(Vertical axis)
8 Hz to 35 Hz: 1 g acceleration
(horizontale axis)
8 Hz to 35 Hz: 0.5 g acceleration
(Vertical axis)
Frequency Sweep Rate1 Octave/min
1 cycle in 3 orthogonal axes
Vibration and Standards: IEC 60255–21 and IEC 60068–2

Shock Stress Dur-
– Vibration Sinusoidal
ing Transport
IEC 60255–21–1, Class 2 5 Hz to 8 Hz: ±7.5 mm Amplitude;
IEC 60068–2–6 8 Hz to 150 Hz: 2 g acceleration
Frequency sweep rate1 Octave/min
20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes.
– Shock Half-sine shaped
IEC 60255–21–2, Class1 Acceleration 15 g, duration 11 ms,
3 orthogonal axes.
– Continuous Shock Half-sine shaped
IEC 60255–21–2, Class 1 Acceleration 10 g, duration 16 ms,
3 orthogonal axes.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 355

C53000–G1140–C147–1
Technical Data
4.1.7 Climatic Stress Tests
Ambient Tempera- – Type tested (acc. IEC60086–2–1 – 13°F to +185°F or –25 °C to +85 °C
tures1) and –2, Test Bd, for 16 h)
– Limiting temporary (transient)
operating temperature – 4°F to +158°F or –20 °C to +70 °C
– Recommended permanent operating +23°F to +131°F or –5 °C to +55 °C
temperature (acc. IEC 60255–6)
Visibility of display may be impaired at
+131°F (or +55 °C) and above
– Limiting temperatures for storage –13°F to +131°F or –25 °C to +55 °C

– Limiting temperatures for transport –13°F to +158°F or –25 °C to +70 °C
STORE AND TRANSPORT THE DEVICE WITH FACTORY PACKAGING.
1
) UL–certified (Standard 508, Industrial Control Equipment):
– Limiting temperatures for normal operation
(output relays not energized) 23°F to +158°F or –5 °C to +70 °C
– Limiting temperatures with max. load
(max. cont. permissible energization
of inputs and outputs) for 7SJ62 23°F to +131°F or –5 °C to +55 °C
for 7SJ63/64 23°F to +104°F or –5 °C to +40 °
Humidity Permissible Humidity Mean value per year ≤75% relative

humidity, on 56 days of the year up to 93%
relative humidity.
CONDENSATION MUST BE AVOIDED
Siemens recommends that all devices be installed such that they are not exposed to
direct sunlight, nor subject to large fluctuations in temperature that may cause conden-
sation to occur.
4.1.8 Service Conditions
The protective device is designed for use in an industrial environment and an electrical
utility environment. Proper installation procedures should be followed to ensure elec-
tromagnetic compatibility (EMC). In addition, the following are recommended:
• All contacts and relays that operate in the same cubicle, cabinet, or relay panel as
the numerical protective device should, as a rule, be equipped with suitable surge
suppression components.
• For substations with operating voltages of 100 kV and above, all external cables
should be shielded with a conductive shield grounded at both ends. The shield must
be capable of carrying the fault currents that could occur. For substations with lower
operating voltages, no special measures are normally required.
356 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000–G1140–C147–1
General Device Data
• Do not withdraw or insert individual modules while the protective device is ener-
gized. When handling the modules or the device outside of the case, standards for
components sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD) must be observed. The mod-
ules and device are not endangered when inserted into the case.
4.1.9 Certifications
UL listing UL recognition
7SJ62∗∗–∗B∗∗∗–∗∗∗∗ 7SJ62∗∗–∗D∗∗∗–∗∗∗∗
7SJ62∗∗–∗E∗∗∗–∗∗∗∗
7SJ63∗∗–∗B∗∗∗–∗∗∗∗ 7SJ63∗∗–∗A∗∗∗–∗∗∗∗
7SJ63∗∗–∗C∗∗∗–∗∗∗∗ 7SJ63∗∗–∗D∗∗∗–∗∗∗∗
Models with Models with
7SJ63∗∗–∗E∗∗∗–∗∗∗∗ threaded termi- plug–in termi-
nals nals
7SJ64∗∗–∗B∗∗∗–∗∗∗∗1) 7SJ64∗∗–∗A∗∗∗–∗∗∗∗1)
7SJ64∗∗–∗C∗∗∗–∗∗∗∗1) 7SJ64∗∗–∗D∗∗∗–∗∗∗∗1)
7SJ64∗∗–∗E∗∗∗–∗∗∗∗1) 7SJ64∗∗–∗G∗∗∗–∗∗∗∗1)
7SJ64∗∗–∗F∗∗∗–∗∗∗∗1)
1)
in preparation (April 2002)
4.1.10 Construction
Case 7XP20
UL–certification conditions: “For use on a Flat Surface of a Type 1
Enclosure”
Dimensions see dimensional drawings, Section 4.23
Variant Case Size Weight (mass)

7SJ62∗∗–∗B in surface mounting housing 1/ 9.9 pounds (4,5 kg)
3
7SJ62∗∗–∗D/E in flush mounting housing 1/

3 8.8 pounds (4 kg)
7SJ631/2/3∗–∗B in surface mounting housing 1/
2 16.5 pounds (7,5 kg)
7SJ635/6∗–∗B in surface mounting housing 1/
1 33 pounds (15 kg)
7SJ631/2/3∗–∗D/E in flush mounting housing 1/
2 14.3 pounds (6,5 kg)
7SJ63/5/6∗–∗D/E in flush mounting housing 1/
1 28.6 pounds (13 kg)
1/
7SJ631/2/3∗–∗A/C in housing for detached operator panel 2 17.6 pounds (8 kg)
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 357

C53000–G1140–C147–1
Technical Data
Variant Case Size Weight (mass)

1
7SJ63/5/6∗–∗A/C in housing for detached operator panel /1 33 pounds (15 kg)
7SJ631/2/3∗–∗F/G in housing without operator panel 1
/2 17.6 pounds (8 kg)
7SJ63/5/6∗–∗F/G in housing without operator panel 1
/1 33 pounds (15 kg)
1
7SJ640∗–∗B in surface mounting housing /3 17.6 pounds (8 kg)
7SJ641/2∗–∗B in surface mounting housing 1
/2 24.3 pounds (11 kg)
7SJ645∗–∗B in surface mounting housing 1
/1 33 pounds (15 kg)
1
7SJ641/2∗–∗A/C in housing for detached operator panel /2 17.6 pounds (8 kg)
7SJ645∗–∗A/C in housing for detached operator panel 1
/1 26.4 pounds (12 kg)
7SJ641/2∗–∗F/G in housing without operator panel 1/
2 17.6 pounds (8 kg)
1/
7SJ645∗–∗F/G in housing without operator panel 1 26.4 pounds (12kg)
7SJ640∗–∗D/E in flush mounting housing 1
/3 11.0 pounds (5 kg)
7SJ641/2∗–∗D/E in flush mounting housing 1/
2 13.2 pounds (6 kg)
1/
7SJ645∗–∗D/E in flush mounting housing 1 22.0 pounds (10 kg)
Detached operator panel 5.5 pounds (2,5 kg)
International Protection Under IEC 60529

– for the equipment
in the surface mounted case IP 51
in the flush mounted case and in model
with the offsett operating element
Front IP 51
Back IP 50
– For personal protection IP 2x Terminals covered with cap
358 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000–G1140–C147–1
Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (50 and 50N Elements)
4.2 Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (50 and 50N Elements)
Pickup and Time Pickup Current 50–1 (phases) 0.50 A to 175.00 A1)(increments 0.05 A)1)
Delay Ranges/ or ∞ (ineffective, no pickup)
Resolutions
Pickup Current 50N–1 (ground)0.25 A to 175.00 A1)(increments 0.05 A)1)
or ∞ (ineffective, no pickup)
Pickup Current 50–2 (phases) 0.50 A to 175.00 A1)(increments 0.05 A)1)
Pickup Current 50N–2 (ground)0.25 A to 175.00 A1)(increments 0.05 A)1)
Delay Times T 50–1, 50–2, 0.00 s to 60.00 s (increments 0.01 s)
50N–1, 50N–2 or ∞ (does not expire)
The set times are pure delay times.
Inherent Operating Pickup times without delay (T) or inrush stabilization. With inrush stabilization add
Times 10 ms
50–1, 50–2, 50N–1, 50N–2
– Current = 2 x Pickup Value approx. 30 ms
– Current = 10x Pickup Value approx. 25 ms
Dropout Times
50–1, 50–2, 50N–1, 50N–2 approx. 40 ms
Dropout Dropout/Pickup (ratio) approx. 0.95 for I/IN ≥ 0.3
Tolerances Pickup Current 50–1, 50–2,

50N–1, 50N–2 2 % of setting value or 50 mA1)
Delay Times T 1 % of setting value or 10 ms
Influencing Vari- Power supply direct voltage in range

ables for Pickup 0.8 ≤ VPS/ VPS nominal ≤ 1.15 1%
Temperatur in range
23º F ≤ ϑamb ≤ 131º F 0.06% /10º F
Frequency in range
0.95 ≤ f/fN ≤ 1.05 1%
Frequency in range
f < 55 Hz or f > 65 Hz function is blocked
Harmonic currents
– Up to 10 % 3. Harmonic 1%
1)
For IN = 1 A, divide all limits and increments by 5.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 359

C53000–G1140–C147–1
Technical Data
4.3 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (51 and 51N Elements)
Pickup and Time Pickup Current 51 0.50 A to 20.00 A1) (Increments 0.05 A)1)
Multiplier Ranges/
Pickup Current 51N 0.25 A to 20.00 A1) (Increments 0.05 A)1)
Resolutions
Time Multipliers for Tp, TEp 0.05 s to 3.20 s (Increments 0.01 s)
Ip, IEp, IEC–Characteristics or ∞ (delay does not expire)
Time Multiplier for 51, 51N D 0.05 s to 15.00 s (Increments 0.01 s)
ANSI characteristics or ∞ (delay does not expire)
Trip Time Charac- As per IEC 60255-3, Section 3.5.2 or BS 142 (See also Figure 4-1 and 4-2)
teristics as per IEC 0.14
NORMAL INVERSE (Type A) t = ---------------------------------- ⋅ T p [s]
0.02
( I ⁄ Ip ) –1
13.5
VERY INVERESE (Type B) t = --------------------------- ⋅ T p [s]
1
( I ⁄ Ip ) – 1
80
EXTREMELY INV. (Type C) t = --------------------------- ⋅ T p [s]
2
( I ⁄ Ip ) – 1
120
LONG INVERSE (Type B) t = --------------------------- ⋅ T p [s]
1
( I ⁄ Ip ) – 1
For All Characteristics

t trip time in seconds
Tp setting value of the time multiplier
I fault current
Ip setting value of the pickup current
The trip times for I/Ip ≥ 20 are identical to those for I/Ip = 20.
Pickup threshold approx. 1.10 · Ip
1
) For IN = 1 A, divide all limits and increments by 5.
360 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000–G1140–C147–1
Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (51 and 51N Elements)
Reset Time Charac- As per IEC 60255–3, Section 3.5.2 or BS 142 (See also Figure 4-1 and 4-2))
teristic as per IEC 9.7
NORMAL INVERSE (Type A) t Reset = --------------------------- ⋅ T p
2
( I ⁄ Ip ) – 1
43.2
VERY INVERSE (Type B) t Reset = --------------------------- ⋅ T p
2
( I ⁄ Ip ) – 1
58.2
EXTREMELY INV. (Type C) t Reset = --------------------------- ⋅ T p
2
( I ⁄ Ip ) – 1
80
LONG INVERSE (Type B) t Reset = --------------------------- ⋅ T p
2
( I ⁄ Ip ) – 1
For all Characteristics

tRESET = Reset time in seconds
Tp = Setting value of the time multiplier
I = Fault Current
Ip = Setting value of the pickup current
Dropout IEC without Disk–Emulation approx. [1.05 · Ip setting value] for Ip/IN>0.3,
Dropout/Pickup (ratio) corresponds to approx. [0.95·pickup
threshold]
IEC with Disk Emulation approx. [0.90 · Ip setting value]
Dropout/Pickup (ratio)
Tolerances Pickup-, Dropout Thresholds Ip, IEp 2 % of setting value or 50 mA1)

Trip Time for 2 ≤ I/Ip ≤ 20 5 % of reference (calculated) value + 2 %
current tolerance, respectively 30 ms
Dropout Time for 0.05≤ I/Ip ≤ 0.90 5 % of reference (calculated) value + 2 %
Influencing Vari- Power Supply Direct Voltage in Range

ables 0.8 ≤ VPS/ VPS nominal ≤ 1.15 1%
Temperature in Range
23º F ≤ ϑamb ≤ 131º F 0.06% /10º F
Frequency in Range
0.95 ≤ f/fN ≤ 1.05 1 %, referring to reference time
Frequency in range
Harmonic currents
1
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 361

C53000–G1140–C147–1
Technical Data
Reset Time Operate Time

100 100
t [s] t [s]
Tp
3,2
3,2
30 30
20 1,6 20
10 0,8 10 Tp
3,2
5 0,4 5
3 3 1,6
0,2
2 2 0,8
0,1
1 1
0,4
0,05
0,5 0,5
0,2
0,3 0,3
0,2 0,2 0,1
0,1 0,05
0,1
0,05 0,05
0,05 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,5 0,7 1 1 2 3 5 7 10 20
I/Ip I/Ip
9, 7 0, 14
t = ------------------------------------ ⋅ T p [s]
Reset Normal inverse: t = ---------------------------- ⋅ T [s] Normal inverse:
0, 02
2 p
(Type A) ( I ⁄ Ip ) – 1 (Type A) (I ⁄ I ) –1
p
1000 1000
t [s] t [s] 500
500
Tp
300 300
200 3,2 200
100 1,6 100
50 0,8 50
30 30
0,4
20 20
0,2
10 10
0,1
5 5
3 0,05 3 Tp
2 2 3,2
1 1 1,6
0,5 0,5
0,8
0,3 0,3
0,2 0,4
0,1 0,1 0,2

0,05
0,05 0,05 0,1
0,05 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,5 0,7 1 1 2 3 5 10 20
I/Ip I/Ip
43, 2 13, 5
Reset Very inverse: t = ---------------------------- ⋅ T p [s] Very inverse: t = ---------------------------- ⋅ T [s]
2 1 p
(Type B) ( I ⁄ Ip ) – 1 (Type B) ( I ⁄ Ip ) – 1
Figure 4-1 Reset Time and Trip Time Characteristics Of The Inverse-time Overcurrent Protection, As Per IEC 60755–3
362 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000–G1140–C147–1

1000 1000
500 500
Tp
300 3,2 300
t [s] 200 t [s] 200
1,6
100 100
0,8
50 50
30 0,4 30
20 20
0,2
10 10
0,1
5 5
0,05
3 3
2 2
Tp
1 1
3,2
0,5 0,5
0,3 0,3 1,6
0,8
0,1 0,1
0,05 0,4
0,1 0,2
0,05 0,05
0,05 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,5 0,7 1 1 2 3 5 10 20
I/Ip I/Ip
58, 2 80
- ⋅ T p [s]
Reset Extremely inverse: t = --------------------------- Extremely inverse: t = ---------------------------- ⋅ T [s]
2 2 p
(Type C) (I ⁄ I ) – 1 (Type C) ( I ⁄ Ip ) – 1
p
1000 1000
t [s] TTpp t [s]
500
3,2 500
300
200 300
1,6
200
100 0,8
50 100
0,4
30
20 0,2 50
10 0,1 30 Tp
0,05 20 3,2
5
3
10 1,6
2
1 5 0,8
0,5 3
0,4
0,3 2
0,2
1
0,1
0,05 0,1
0,05 0,5
0,05 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,5 0,7 1 1 2 3 5 7 10 20
I/Ip I/Ip
80 120
Reset Long inverse: t = ---------------------------- ⋅ T p [s] Long inverse: t = ---------------------------- ⋅ T [s]
2 1 p
(Type B) (I ⁄ Ip ) – 1 (Type B) (I ⁄ Ip ) – 1
Figure 4-2 Reset Time and Trip Time Characteristics Of The Inverse-time Overcurrent Protection, As Per IEC 60755–3
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 363

C53000–G1140–C147–1
Technical Data
Trip Time Charac- As per ANSI/IEEE (see also Figures 4-3 to 4-6)
teristics as per
æ 8.9341 ö
ANSI INVERSE t = ç --------------------------------------- + 0.17966÷ ⋅ D [s]
2.0938
è ( I ⁄ Ip ) –1 ø
æ 0.2663 ö
SHORT INVERSE t = ç --------------------------------------- + 0.03393÷ ⋅ D [s]
1.2969
è ( I ⁄ Ip ) –1 ø
t = æ ------------------------ + 2.18592ö ⋅ D [s]

5.6143
LONG INVERSE è ( I ⁄ Ip ) – 1 ø
æ 0.0103 ö
MODERATELY INV. t = ç ---------------------------------- + 0.0228÷ ⋅ D [s]
0.02
è ( I ⁄ Ip ) –1 ø
æ 3.922 ö
VERY INVERSE t = ç --------------------------- + 0.0982÷ ⋅ D [s]
2
è ( I ⁄ Ip ) – 1 ø
æ 5.64 ö
EXTREMELY INVERSE t = ç --------------------------- + 0.02434÷ ⋅ D [s]
2
è ( I ⁄ Ip ) – 1 ø
æ 0.4797 ö
DEFINITE INVERSE t = ç --------------------------------------- + 0.21359÷ ⋅ D [s]
1.5625
è ( I ⁄ Ip ) –1 ø

t = Trip time in seconds
D = Setting value of the time multiplier
I = Fault Current
The trip times for I/Ip ≥ 20 are identical to those for I/Ip = 20.
Pickup Threshold approx. 1.10 · Ip
1
364 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000–G1140–C147–1
Reset Time Charac- As per ANSI/IEEE (see also Figures 4-3 to 4-6)
teristic as per ANSI æ ö
8.8
ANSI INVERSE t Reset = ç ---------------------------------------÷ ⋅ D [s]
2.0938
è ( I ⁄ Ip ) – 1ø
æ 0.831 ö
ANSI SHORT INVERSE t Reset = ç ---------------------------------------÷ ⋅ D [s]
1.2969
è ( I ⁄ Ip ) – 1ø
æ 12.9 ö
ANSI LONG INVERSE t Reset = ç ---------------------------÷ ⋅ D [s]
è ( I ⁄ I p ) 1 – 1ø
æ 0.97 ö
ANSI MODERATELY INV. t Reset = ç ---------------------------÷ ⋅ D [s]
è ( I ⁄ I p ) 2 – 1ø
æ 4.32 ö
ANSI VERY INVERSE t Reset = ç ---------------------------÷ ⋅ D [s]
è ( I ⁄ I p ) 2 – 1ø
æ 5.82 ö
ANSI EXTREMELY INV. t Reset = ç ---------------------------÷ ⋅ D [s]
è ( I ⁄ I p ) 2 – 1ø
æ 1.03940 ö
ANSI DEFINITE INV. t Reset = ç ---------------------------------------÷ ⋅ D [s]
è ( I ⁄ I p ) 1.5625 – 1ø

tRESET = Reset time in seconds
D = Setting value of the time multiplier
for 0.05 < (I/Ip) ≤ 0.90
I = Fault Current
Dropout ANSI without Disk–Emulation approx. [1.05 · Ip setting value] for Ip/IN>0.3,
Dropout/Pickup (ratio) corresponds to approx. [0.95·pickup
threshold]
ANSI with Disk Emulation approx. [0.90 · Ip setting value]
Dropout/Pickup (ratio)
Tolerances Pickup-, Dropout Thresholds Ip, IEp 2 % of setting value or 50 mA1)
Trip Time for 2 ≤ I/Ip ≤ 20 5 % of reference (calculated) value + 2 %
Dropout Time for 0.05≤ I/Ip ≤ 0.90 5 % of reference (calculated) value + 2 %
Influencing Vari- Power Supply Direct Voltage in Range
Temperature in Range
23º F ≤ ϑamb ≤ 131º F 0.06% /10º F
Frequency in Range
0.95 ≤ f/fN ≤ 1.05 1 %, referring to reference time
Frequency in range
1
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 365

C53000–G1140–C147–1
Technical Data

500 500
t [s] t [s]
D [s]
200 200
15
100 10
100
50 5
50
30 30
20 2
20
10 1 10
5 0.5
5 D [s]
3 3 15
2 2 10
1 1 5
0.5 0.5
2
0.3 0.3
0.2 0.2 1
0.1 0.1 0.5
0.05 0.05
0.05 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 1.0
1 2 3 5 10 20
I/Ip
I/Ip
æ ö æ ö
8.8 8.9341
RESET INVERSE t = ç -------------------------------------------÷ ⋅ D [s] INVERSE t = ç ------------------------------------------- + 0.17966÷ ⋅ D [s]
ç 2.0938 ÷ ç 2.0938 ÷
è (I ⁄ Ip ) – 1ø è ( I ⁄ Ip ) –1 ø
500 500
t [s] 200 t [s] 200
100 100
50 50
30 D [s] 30
20 20
15
10 10 10
5 5 5
3 3
2 2 2
1 1 1 D [s]
0.5 15
0.5 0.5
10
0.3 0.3
0.2 0.2 5
0.1 0.1
1 2
0.5
0.05 0.05
0.05 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 1.0 1 2 3 5 10 20
I/Ip I/Ip
æ ö æ ö
0.2663
RESET SHORT INVERSE
0.831
t = ç -------------------------------------------÷ ⋅ D [s] SHORT INVERSE t = ç ------------------------------------------- + 0.03393÷ ⋅ D[s]
ç 1.2969 ÷ ç 1.2969 ÷
è (I ⁄ I ) – 1ø è (I ⁄ Ip ) –1 ø
Figure 4-3 Reset Time and Trip Time Characteristics Of The Inverse-time Overcurrent Protection, As Per ANSI/IEEE
366 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000–G1140–C147–1

500 500
t [s] D [s] t [s]
15
200 10 200
100 5 100
D [s]
50 50
2 15
30 30
10
20 1 20
5
10 0.5 10
5 5 2
3 3
1
2 2
0.5
1 1
0.5 0.5
0.3 0.3
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
0.05 0.05
0.05 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 1.0 1 2 3 5 10 20
I/Ip I/Ip
æ ö æ 5.6143 ö
12.9
RESET LONG INVERSE t = ç ----------------------------÷ ⋅ D [s] LONG INVERSE t = ç ------------------------- + 2.18592÷ ⋅ D [s]
ç 1 ÷ è ( I ⁄ Ip ) – 1 ø
è ( I ⁄ I p ) – 1ø
500 500
t [s]
t [s] 200 200
100 100
50 50
30 D [s] 30
20 15 20
10 10
10
5
5 5 D [s]
3 3 15
2
2 2 10
1 1
1 5
0.5 0.5
0.5
0.3 2
0.3
0.2 0.2 1
0.1 0.1
0.5
0.05 0.05
0.05 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 1.0 1 2 3 5 10 20
I/Ip I/Ip
æ ö æ ö
0.0103
0.97
t = ç ----------------------------÷ ⋅ D [s] MODERATELY INVERSE t = ç ------------------------------------- + 0.0228÷ ⋅ D [s]
RESET MODERATELY INVERSE ç 2 ÷ ç 0.02 ÷
è ( I ⁄ I p ) – 1ø è (I ⁄ Ip ) –1 ø
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 367

C53000–G1140–C147–1
Technical Data

500 500
t [s]
t [s] 200 200

D [s]
100 100
15
50 10 50
30 5 30
20 20
10 2 10
1 5
5
3 3 D [s]
0.5
2 2
15
1 1 10
0.5 0.5 5
0.3 0.3
0.2 0.2 2
0.1 0.1 1
0.05 0.05 0.5

0.05 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 1.0 1 2 3 5 10 20
I/Ip I/Ip
æ ö æ ö
4.32 3.922
RESET VERY INVERSE t = ç ----------------------------÷ ⋅ D [s] VERY INVERSE t = çç ---------------------------- + 0.0982÷÷ ⋅ D [s]
ç 2 ÷ 2
è ( I ⁄ I p ) – 1ø è ( I ⁄ Ip ) – 1 ø
500 500
t [s]
t [s] 200 D [s] 200
15
100 100
10
50 50
30 5 30
20 20
2
10 10
1
5 5
3 0.5 3
2 2
1 1 D [s]
0.5 0.5 15
10
0.3 0.3
0.2 0.2 5
0.1 0.1
2
0,5 1
0.05 0.05
0.05 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 1.0 1 2 3 5 10 20
I/Ip I/Ip
æ ö æ ö
5.82 5.64
RESET EXTREMELY INVERSE t = ç ----------------------------÷ ⋅ D [s] EXTREMELY INVERSE t = çç ---------------------------- + 0.02434÷÷ ⋅ D [s]
ç 2 ÷ 2
è ( I ⁄ I p ) – 1ø è (I ⁄ Ip ) – 1 ø
368 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000–G1140–C147–1

500 500
t [s]
t [s] 200 200
100 100
50 50
D [s] 30
30
20 15 20
10
10 10
5
5 5 D [s]
3 3 15
2
2 2 10
1
1 1 5
0.5
0.5 0.5
2
0.3 0.3
0.2 0.2 1
0.1 0.1 0.5
0.05 0.05
0.05 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 1.0 1 2 3 5 10 20
I/Ip I/Ip
æ ö æ ö
1.0394 0.4797
RESET DEFINITE INVERSE t = ç -------------------------------------------÷ ⋅ D [s] DEFINITE INVERSE t = ç ------------------------------------------- + 0.21359÷ ⋅ D [s]
ç 1.5625 ÷ ç 1.5625 ÷
è (I ⁄ Ip ) – 1ø è (I ⁄ Ip ) –1 ø
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 369

C53000–G1140–C147–1
Technical Data
4.4 Directional Time Overcurrent Protection (67 and 67N Elements)
Overcurrent Ele- The same specifications and characteristics apply as for non-directional time overcur-
ments rent protection (see Sub-sections 4.2 and 4.3).
Determining Direc- Moreover, the following data apply for determining fault direction:
tion
For Phase Faults Polarization With short-circuit free voltages, with

voltage memory (memory duration is 2
cycles) for measurement voltages that are
too low.
Forward Range Can be set in 3 stages (3 protection areas):
Inductive 45° ± 86°
Resistive 0° ± 86°
Capacitive –45° ± 86°
(if short-circuit free voltage vertical to
short circuit voltage)
Directional Sensitivity Unlimited for one and two phase faults.
For three phase faults, dynamically unlimit-
ed, steady-state approx. 7V phase-to-
phase.
For Ground Faults Polarization With zero sequence quantities

Forward Range Can be set in 3 stages (3 protection areas)
Inductive 45° ± 84°
Resistive 0° ± 84°
Capacitive –45° ± 84°
Directional Sensitivity approx. 5 V displacement voltage, mea-
sured
approx. 12 V displacement voltage, cal-
culated
Inherent Operating Pickup times without intentional delay or inrush stabilization. With inrush stabilization,
Times add 10 ms.
67-1, 67-2, 67N-1, 67N-2
– Current = [2 x pickup] approx. 45 ms
– Current = [10 x pickkup] approx. 40 ms
Dropout Times
67-1, 67-2, 67N-1, 67N-2 approx. 40 ms
Tolerances Phase angle errors under reference conditions

– For phase faults and for ground faults ± 3° electrical
Influencing Vari- Frequency Influence

ables
– With no memory voltage approx. 1° in range 0.95 < f/fN < 1.05
– Function is blocked in frequency range f < 55 Hz or f > 65 Hz
370 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000–G1140–C147–1
Inrush Restraint
4.5 Inrush Restraint
Controlled Elements All 50, 50N, 51, 51N, 67, and 67N Elements
Adjustment Rang- Stabilization Factor I2f/I 10 % to 45 % (Increments 1 %)

es/ Resolution Second Harmonic
Function Limits Lower Function Limit at least one phase current ≥ 1.25 A1)
Crossblock Upper Function Limit, Adjustable 1.50 A to 125.00 A1)(Increments 0.05 A)1)
Crossblock Ia, Ib, Ic ON/OFF
1
4.6 Dynamic Cold Load Pick-up Function (50c, 50Nc, 51Nc, 67c, 67Nc)
Timed Changeover Controlled Elements Directional and non-directional time over-

of Settings current protective elements (separate
phase andground settings)
Initiation Criteria • Current Criteria“BkrClosed I MIN”
• Interrogation on the
circuit breaker position
• Automatic reclosing function ready
• Binary input
Timing 3 time levels (TCB Open, TActive, TStop)

Current Control Current threshold “BkrClosed I MIN”
(reset on current falling below threshold:
monitoring with timer)
Adjustment Rang- Current Control“BkrClosed I MIN” 0.20 A to 5.00 A1) (Increments 0.05 A)1 )
es/ Resolution
Time Until Changeover TCB Open 0 s to 21600 s (= 6 h) (Increments 1 s)
To Dynamic Settings
Period Dynamic TActive 4 s to 21600 s (= 6 h) (Increments 1 s)
Settings are Effective
After a Reclosure
Fast Reset Time TStop 1 s to 600 s (= 10 min) (Increments 1 s)
or ∞ (fast reset inactive)
Dynamic Settings of Pickup Adjustable within the same ranges 1)
Currents and Time Delays and with the same increments 1) as
or Time Multipliers the directional and non-directional time
overcurrent protection
1
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 371

C53000–G1140–C147–1
Technical Data
4.7 Voltage Protection (27 and 59)
Setting Ranges / Undervoltage 27-1, 27-2 Measurement Quantities:

Resolution PositiveSequence Voltages
- Pickup Voltage,(phase-ground volt.) 10 V to 210 V (Increments 1 V)
- Pickup Voltage, (phase-phase volt.) 10 V to 120 V (Increments 1 V)
Dropout Ratio for 27-1 r = 1.05 to 3.00 (Increments 0.01)
Dropout Ratio for 27-1 r · pickup max. 130 V for phase-phase voltages
max. 225 V for phase-ground voltage
Time Delays 27-Delay 0.00 s to 100.00 s (Increments 0.01 s)
or ∞ (does not expire)
Current Supervision ON/OFF
by 50 Element “BkrClosed I MIN” 0.20 A to 5.00 A1) (Increments 0.05 A)1)
Overvoltage 59-1, 59-2
- Pickup Voltage, (phase-ground volt.) 40 V to 225 V (Increments 1 V)
- Pickup Voltage, (phase-phase volt.) 40 V to 130 V (Increments 1 V)
Time Delays 59-Delay 0.00 s to 100.00 s (Increments 0.01 s)
The set time are pure delay times.
Inherent Operating Pickup Times

Times – Undervoltage 27-1, 27-2 approx. 50 ms
– Overvoltage 59-1, 59-2 approx. 50 ms
Dropout Times
– Undervoltage 27-1, 27-2 approx. 50 ms
– Overvoltage 59-1, 59-2 approx. 50 ms
Dropout Ratios – Dropout / Pickup (Voltage ratio) 27-2 1.05

– Dropout / Pickup (Voltage ratio) 59 0.95
Tolerances – Pickup Voltages 3% of set value, or 1V

– Time Delays T 1% of set value, or 10 ms
Influencing Vari- Power supply DC voltage (VDC) in range

Temperature in range
23º F ≤ ϑamb ≤ 131º F 0.3 % /10º F
Frequency in range
0.95 ≤ f/fN ≤ 1.05 1%
Frequency in range
f < 55 Hz or f > 65 Hz
27-1, 27-2 increased tolerances; overfunction possible
59-1, 59-2 function is blocked
Harmonics
- Up to 10% 3rd harmonic 1%
- Up to 10% 5th harmonic 1%
1)
For IN = 1A, divide the limits by 5.
372 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000–G1140–C147–1
4.8 Negative Sequence Protection (46)
4.8.1 Definite–Time Elements (46-1 and 46-2)
Pickup and Time Pickup Current 46-1 0.50 A to 15.00 A 1)(Increments 0.05 A) 1)
Delay Ranges/ or ∞ (ineffective, no pickup)
Resolutions
Pickup Current 46-2 0.50 A to 15.00 A 1)(Increments 0.05 A) 1)
Time Delays 46-1, 46-2 0.00 s to 60.00 s (Increments 0.01 s)
Functional Limits Lower Functional Limit at least one phase current > 0.5 A1)
Upper Functional Limit all phase currents ≤ 20 A1)
Inherent Operating Pickup Time approx. 35 ms

Times
Dropout Time approx. 35 ms
Dropout Dropout/Pickup (ratio) 46-1, 46-2 approx. 0.95 for I2/IN > 0.3
Tolerances Pickup Currents 46-1, 46-2 3% of set value or 50 mA1)

Time Delays 1% or 10 ms
Influencing Vari- Power Supply DC voltage in range

ables for Pickup- 0.8 ≤ VPS/ VPS nominal ≤ 1.15 1%
Pickup Currents Temperature in range
23º F ≤ ϑamb ≤ 131º F 0.06% /10º F
Frequency in range
0.95 ≤ f/fN ≤ 1.05 1%
Frequency in range
Harmonic currents
– Up to 10 % 3rd Harmonic 1%
– Up to 10 % 5th Harmonic 1%
4.8.2 Inverse–Time Elements (46-TOC)
Pickup and Time Pickup Current 46–TOC 0.50 A to 10.00 A1)(Increments 0.05 A)1)
Multiplier
Time Multiplier TI2p 0.05 s to 3.20 s (Increments 0.01 s)
(IEC) or ∞ (does not trip)
Time Multiplier DI2p 0.50 s to 15.00 s (Increments 0.01 s)
(ANSI) or ∞ (does not trip)
Functional Limits Lower Functional Limit at least one phase current > 0.5 A1)
Upper Functional Limit all phase currents ≤ 20 A1)
1
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 373

C53000–G1140–C147–1
Technical Data
Trip Time Charac- See also Figure4-7

teristics as per 0.14
IEC 60255–3 IEC NORMAL INVERSE t = ---------------------------------------- ⋅ T I2p [s]
0.02
( I 2 ⁄ I 2p ) –1
13.5
IEC VERY INVERSE t = --------------------------------- ⋅ T I2p [s]
1
( I 2 ⁄ I 2p ) – 1
80
IEC EXTREMELY INVERSE t = --------------------------------- ⋅ T I2p [s]
2
( I 2 ⁄ I 2p ) – 1
Where:
for 1.1 < (I2/I2p) ≤ 20 TI2p setting value of the time multiplier
I2 negative sequence currents
I2p setting value of the pickup current
Trip Time Charac- See also Figures4-8 and 4-9

teristics as per
ANSI
æ 8.9341 ö
ANSI INVERSE t = ç --------------------------------------------- + 0.17966÷ ⋅ D I2p [s]
è ( I 2 ⁄ I 2p ) 2.0938 – 1 ø
æ 0.0103 ö
ANSI MODERATELY t = ç ---------------------------------------- + 0.0228÷ ⋅ D I2p [s]
0.02
INVERSE è ( I 2 ⁄ I 2p ) –1 ø
æ 3.922 ö
ANSI VERY INVERSE t = ç --------------------------------- + 0.0982÷ ⋅ D I2p [s]
2
è ( I 2 ⁄ I 2p ) – 1 ø
æ 5.64 ö
ANSI EXTREMELY t = ç --------------------------------- + 0.02434÷ ⋅ D I2p [s]
2
INVERSE è ( I 2 ⁄ I 2p ) – 1 ø
Where:
DI2p setting value of the time multiplier
for 1.1 < (I2/I2p) ≤ 20 I2 negative sequence currents
The trip times for I2/I2p ≥ 20 are identical to those for I2/I2p= 20.
Pickup Threshold approx. 1.10 · I2p
Tolerances Pickup Current I2p 3% of set value or 50 mA1)

Time for 2 ≤ I2/I2p ≤ 20 5% of reference (calculated) value + 2 %
current tolerance, or 30 ms
1) For IN = 1 A, divide all limits and increments by 5.
374 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000–G1140–C147–1
Reset Time Charac- See Also Figures 4-8 and 4-9

teristics as per
ANSI
æ 8.8 ö
ANSI INVERSE t Reset = ç ---------------------------------------------÷ ⋅ D I2p [s]
2.0938
è ( I 2 ⁄ I 2p ) – 1ø
æ 0.97 ö
ANSI MODERATELY t Reset = ç ---------------------------------÷ ⋅ D I2p [s]
2
INVERSE è ( I 2 ⁄ I 2p ) – 1ø
æ 4.32 ö
ANSI VERY INVERSE t Reset = ç ---------------------------------÷ ⋅ D I2p [s]
2
è ( I 2 ⁄ I 2p ) – 1ø
æ 5.82 ö
ANSI EXTREMELY t Reset = ç ---------------------------------÷ ⋅ D I2p [s]
2
INVERSE è ( I 2 ⁄ I 2p ) – 1ø
Where:
tReset trip time in seconds
DI2p setting value of the time multiplier
for 0.05 < (I2/I2p) ≤ 0.90 I2 negative sequence currents
Dropout IEC and ANSI (without Disk Emulation) approx. 1.05 · I2p Setting Value, which
is approx. [0.95 · pickup threshold]
ANSI with Disk–Emulation approx. 0.90 · I2p Setting Value
Tolerances Reset Current I2p 2% of set value or 50 mA1)

Time for 0.05≤ I2/I2p ≤ 0.90 5% of reference (calculated) value + 2 %
current tolerance, minimum 30 ms
Influencing Vari- Power supply DC voltage in range

ables for Pickup 0.8 ≤ VPS/ VPS nominal ≤ 1.15 1%
Currents
23º F ≤ ϑamb ≤ 131º F 0.06% /10º F
Frequency in range
0.95 ≤ f/fN ≤ 1.05 1%
Frequency in range
Harmonic currents
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 375

C53000–G1140–C147–1
Technical Data
100 100
t [s] t [s]
30 30
20 20
10 TI2p 10
3.2
5 5
1.6 TI2p
3 3
2 3.2
0.8 2
1 1 1.6
0.4
0.5 0.5 0.8

0.2
0.3 0.3 0.4
0.2 0.1
0.2
0.2
0.1 0.05
0.1
0.1
0.05
0.05 0.05
1 2 3 5 7 10 20 1 2 3 5 10 20
I2/I2p I2/I2p
0.14 13.5
IEC NORMAL INVERSE: t = --------------------------------------------- ⋅ T t = ------------------------------------ ⋅ T
0.02 I2p [s] IEC VERY INVERSE:
1 I2p
[s]
(I ⁄ I ) –1 (I ⁄ I ) – 1
2 2p 2 2p
100
t [s]
20 t = Trip time in seconds

TI2p= Setting value of the time multiplier
10
I2 = Negative Sequence Current
I2p = Setting value of the pickup current
5
3
2
1 TI2p
3.2
0.5
0.3 1.6
0.2
0.8
0.1
0.4
0.05 0.1 0.2
0.05
1 2 3 5 10 20
I2/I2p
80
IEC EXTREMELY INVERSE: t = ------------------------------------ ⋅ T I2p [s]
2
( I2 ⁄ I2p ) – 1
Figure 4-7 Trip Time Characteristic Curves Of The Inverse-time Negative Sequence Element 46-TOC, per IEC 60255–3
376 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000–G1140–C147–1

500 500
t [s] t [s]
D [s]
200 200
15
100 10
100
50 5
50
30 30
20 2
20
10 1 10
5 0.5
5 D [s]
3 3 15
2 2 10
1 1 5
0.5 0.5
2
0.3 0.3
0.2 0.2 1
0.1 0.1 0.5
0.05 0.05
0.05 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 1.0
1 2 3 5 10 20
I/Ip
I/Ip
æ ö æ ö
8, 9341
t = çç ---------------------------------------------÷÷ ⋅ D [s] t = çç --------------------------------------------- + 0, 17966÷÷ ⋅ D [s]
8, 8
RESET INVERSE INVERSE
2, 0938 2, 0938
è ( I ⁄ Ip ) – 1ø è ( I ⁄ Ip ) –1 ø
500 500
t [s]
t [s] 200 200
100 100
50 50
30 D [s] 30
20 15 20
10 10
10
5
5 5 D [s]
3 3 15
2
2 2 10
1 1
1 5
0.5 0.5
0.5
0.3 2
0.3
0.2 0.2 1
0.1 0.1
0.5
0.05 0.05
0.05 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 1.0 1 2 3 5 10 20
I/Ip I/Ip
æ ö æ ö
0, 97 0, 0103
RESET MODERATELY INVERSE t = çç ----------------------------÷÷ ⋅ D [s] MODERATELY INVERSE t = çç -------------------------------------- + 0, 0228÷÷ ⋅ D [s]
2 0, 02
è ( I ⁄ I p ) – 1ø è (I ⁄ Ip ) –1 ø
Figure 4-8 Reset Time and Trip Time Characteristics Of The Inverse-time Negative Sequence Element, 46-TOC, ANSI
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 377

C53000–G1140–C147–1
Technical Data

500 500
t [s]
t [s] 200 200

D [s]
100 100
15
50 10 50
30 5 30
20 20
10 2 10
1 5
5
3 3 D [s]
0.5
2 2
15
1 1 10
0.5 0.5 5
0.3 0.3
0.2 0.2 2
0.1 0.1 1
0.05 0.05 0.5

0.05 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 1.0 1 2 3 5 10 20
I/Ip I/Ip
æ ö æ ö
3, 922
t = ç ----------------------------÷ ⋅ D t = ç ---------------------------- + 0, 0982÷ ⋅ D [s]
4,32
RESET VERY INVERSE [s] VERY INVERSE
ç 2 ÷ ç 2 ÷
è ( I ⁄ I p ) – 1ø è ( I ⁄ Ip ) – 1 ø
500 500
t [s]
t [s] 200 D [s] 200
15
100 100
10
50 50
30 5 30
20 20
2
10 10
1
5 5
3 0.5 3
2 2
1 1 D [s]
0.5 0.5 15
10
0.3 0.3
0.2 0.2 5
0.1 0.1
2
0.5 1
0.05 0.05
0.05 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 1.0 1 2 3 5 10 20
I/Ip I/Ip
æ ö æ ö
5, 82 5, 64
RESET EXTREMELY INVERSE t = çç ----------------------------÷÷ ⋅ D [s] EXTREMELY INVERSE t = çç ---------------------------- + 0, 02434÷÷ ⋅ D [s]
2 2
è ( I ⁄ I p ) – 1ø è (I ⁄ Ip ) – 1 ø
Figure 4-9 Reset Time and Trip Time Characteristics Of The Inverse-time Negative Sequence Element, 46-TOC, ANSI
378 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000–G1140–C147–1
Motor Starting Protection (48)
4.9 Motor Starting Protection (48)
Setting Ranges/In- Motor Starting Current ISTARTUP 5.00 A to 80.00 A1) (Increments 0.05 A)1)
crements
Pickup Threshold IMOTOR START 3.00 A to 50.00 A1)(Increments 0.05 A)1)
Permissible Starting Time TSTARTUP 1.0 to 180.0 s (Increments 0.1 s)
Permissible Locked Rotor Time TLOCKED-ROTOR 0.5 s to 120.0 s (Increments 0.1 s)
or ∞ (step is ineffective)
Trip Time Charac- Trip Time Characteristics I STARTUP 2

teristic t = æ ------------------------ö ⋅ T STARTUP
for Irms > IMOTOR START è I rms ø
Where: ISTARTUP Motor starting current setting.

Irms Actual current flowing.
IMOTOR START Pickup threshold setting,
used to detect motor startup.
t Trip time in seconds.
Dropout Ratio Irms/IMOTOR START approx. 0.95
Tolerance Pickup Threshold 2 % of set value, or 50 mA1)

Time Delay 5 % or 30 ms
Influencing Values Power supply DC voltage (VDC) in range

for Pickup Thresh- 0.8 ≤ VPS/ VPS nominal ≤ 1.15 1%
old
23º F ≤ ϑamb ≤ 131º F 0.3% /10º F
Frequency in range
0.95 ≤ f/fN ≤ 1.05 1%
Frequency in range
Harmonics
1
) for IN= 1 A, divide all limits by 5.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 379

C53000–G1140–C147–1
Technical Data
4.10 Start Inhibit for Motors (66/68)
Setting Ranges / Starting Current IStart/IMotor nom 3.0 to 10.0 (Increments 0.1)
Resolutions Relative to Nominal Motor Current
Nominal Motor Current IMotor nom 1.0 A to 6.0 A1) (Increments 0.5 A)1)
Maximum Permissible TStart Max 3 s to 320 s (Increments 1 s)
Starting Time
Temperature TEqual 0.0 min to 320.0 min (Increments 0.1 min)
Equalization Time
Minimum inhibit time TMIN. INHIBIT TIME0.2 min to 120.0 min (Increments 0.1 min)
Maximum Permissible nwarm 1 to 4 (Increments 1)
Number of Warm Starts
Difference between ncold - nwarm 1 to 2 (Increments 1)
Cold and Warm Starts
Extension K-Factor for kτat STOP 0.2 to 100.0 (Increments 0.1)
Cooling Simulations of
Rotor at Rest
Extension K-Factor for kτat RUNNING 0.2 to 100.0 (Increments 0.1)
Cooling Simulations of
Rotor in operation
Restarting Limit
n COLD – 1
Θ RESTART = Θ Rot.max.perm ⋅ ---------------------------
n COLD
Where:
ΘRestart Temperature limit below
which restarting is possible
ΘRot.max.permmaximum permissible motor

over-temperature (= 100 % in
operating measured value
ΘRot/ΘRot trip)
nCold Number of permissible

restarts from cold state
Influencing Values Power supply DC voltage (VDC) in range
0.8 ≤ VPS/ VPS nominal ≤ 1.15 1%
23º F ≤ ϑamb ≤ 131º F 0.3% /10º F
Frequency in range
0.95 ≤ f/fN ≤ 1.05 1%
Frequency in range
1) For IN = 1 A, divide all limits by 5.
380 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000–G1140–C147–1
Frequency Protection (81 Over-Frequency and Under-Frequency)
4.11 Frequency Protection (81 Over-Frequency and Under-Frequency)
Setting Ranges/ Number of Frequency Elements 4: each can be 81/O or 81/U

Resolutions
Pickup Frequency 81–1 to 81–4 45.50 Hz to 54.50 Hz (Increments 0.01 Hz)
@ fN = 50 Hz
81–1 to 81–4 55.50 Hz to 64.50 Hz(Increments 0.01 Hz)
@ fN = 60 Hz
Time Delay 81–1 to 81–4 0.00 s to 100.00 s (Increments 0.01 s)
Undervoltage Blocking Vmin 10 V to 150 V (Increments 1 V)
(V1 positive sequence voltage)
The set times are pure delay times.
Inherent Operating Pickup Times 81/O or 81/U approx. 150 ms

Times
Dropout Times 81/O or 81/U approx. 150 ms
Dropout Frequency ∆f = | Pickup Value – Dropout Value | approx. 20 mHz
Dropout Voltage Dropout Ratio for

Undervoltage Blocking(V / Vmin) approx. 1.05
Tolerances – Pickup Frequencies 81/O or 81U 10 mHz

– Undervoltage Blocking 3% of set value or 1 V
– Time Delays 81/O or 81/U 1% of set value or 10 ms

ables 0.8 ≤ VPS/ VPS nominal ≤ 1.15 0.1%
23º F ≤ ϑamb ≤ 131º F 0.06% /10º F
Frequency in range
Harmonics
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 381

C53000–G1140–C147–1
Technical Data
4.12 Thermal Overload Protection (49)
Setting Ranges/ K-Factor per IEC 60255-8 0.10 to 4.00 (Increments 0.01)
Resolutions
Time Constant τ 1.0 min to 999.9 min (Increments 0.1 min)
Thermal Alarm ΘAlarm/ΘTrip 50% to 100% of the trip temperature rise
(Θ ALARM) (Increments 1%)
Current Overload IAlarm 0.50 A to 20.00 A1) (Increments 0.05 A)1)
Alarm (I ALARM)
Extension K-Factor kt - Factor 1.0 to 10.0 relative to the time constant
when Machine Stopped for the machine running(Increments 0.1)
Emergency Time TEMERGENCY 10 s to 15000 s (Increments 1 s)

Rated overtemperature (for IN) 40 °C to 200 °C (Increments 1 °C)
104 °F to 392 °F (Increments 1 °F)
Trip Characteristic See also Figure 4-10

Curve I ö 2 æ I pre ö 2
æ ------------- – -------------
Trip Characteristic Curve è k ⋅ I Nø è k ⋅ I Nø
t = τ ⋅ ln ------------------------------------------------- [min]
for (I/ k · IN) ≤ 8 I ö2
æ ------------- –1
è k ⋅ I Nø
Where: t trip time in minutes

τ Temperature rise time constant
I Load current
Ipre Pre-load current
k Setting factor per VDE 0435
Part 3011 and IEC 60255–8,
(see also Figure 4-10)
IN Nominal current of the device
Dropout Relations Θ/Θtrip Drops out with ΘAlarm

Θ/ΘAlarm approx. 0.99
I/IAlarm approx. 0.97
Tolerances Referring to k · IN 2 % or 50 mA1);
2 % class per IEC 60 255–8
Thermal trip and alarm times 3 % or 1 s for I/(k ·IN) > 1.25;
3 % class per IEC 60 255–8
ables Referring to 0.8 ≤ VPS/ VPS nominal ≤ 1.15 1%
[k · IN] Temperature in range
23 °F≤ ϑamb ≤ 131 °F 0.3% /10º F
requency in range
0.95 ≤ f/fN ≤ 1.05 1%
Frequency in range
f < 55 Hz or f > 65 Hz increased tolerances
382 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000–G1140–C147–1
100 100
t [min] t [min]
50 Parameter: 50
Setting Value
of Time Con-
stant
30 30
τ [min]
20 20
1000
Parameter:
10 10 Setting Value
500 of Time Con-
stant
5 5 τ [min]
200 1000
3 3
2 2
100 500
1 1
50
200
0.5 0.5
20 100
0.3 0.3
0.2 0.2
10 50
0.1 0.1
5
20
1 2 1 2 5 10
0.05 0.05
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 12
I/k · IN I/k · IN
without pre-load: with 90 % pre-load:
2
I ö2
æ ------------- I ö 2 æ I pre ö
æ -------------
- - – ç --------------÷
èk ⋅ I ø èk ⋅ I ø è k ⋅ I Nø
N N
t = τ ⋅ ln -------------------------------- [min] t = τ ⋅ ln --------------------------------------------------- [min]
I ö2
æ ------------- I ö2
æ -------------
- –1
èk ⋅ I ø è k ⋅ I -ø – 1
N N
Figure 4-10 Trip Time Characteristic Curves For The Thermal Overload Protection (49)
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 383

C53000–G1140–C147–1
Technical Data
4.13 Sensitive Ground Fault Detection (64, 50Ns, 67Ns)
Displacement Volt- Displacement Voltage, Measured Ve> 1.8 V to 130.0 V (increments 0.1V)
age Element Char-
Displacement Voltage, Calculated 3VO>10.0 V to 225.0 V (increments 0.1V)
acteristics - For all
Types of Ground Pickup Delay Time TDelay Pickup 0.04 s to 320.00 s (increments 0.01 s)
Faults or ∞ (does not pickup)
Additional Trip Delay TDelay 0.10 s to 40000.00 s (increments 0.01 s)
or ∞ (ineffective)
Measuring time (Inherent Pickup Delay) approx. 60 ms
Dropout Value [0.95 · pickup value] or
[Pickup value – 0.6 V]
Measurement Tolerance
Ve> (measured): 3% of setting value, or 0.3 V
3V0> (calculated): 3% of setting value, or 3 V
Operating Time Tolerances 1 % of setting value, or 10 ms
The set times are pure delay times
Phase Detection Measuring Principle Voltage measurement (phase to ground)

for Ground Faults on
VPHASE MIN (ground fault phase) 10 V to 100 V (increments 1 V)
an Ungrounded Sys-
tem VPHASE MAX (healthy phases) 10 V to 100 V (increments 1 V)
Measurement Tolerance 3% of setting value, or 1 V
as per VDE 0435, Part 303
Ground Fault Pick- Definite Time Characteristic

up
for All Types of Pickup Current 50-Ns-1
Ground Faults for sensitive transformer 0.001 A to 1.500 A (increments 0.001 A)
for normal 1-A transformer 0.05 A to 35.00 A (increments 0.01 A)
Delay Time 50-Ns-1 0.00 s to 320.00 s (increments 0.01 s)
Pickup Current 50-Ns-2

for sensitive transformer 0.001 A to 1.500 A (increments 0.001 A)
Delay Time 50-Ns-2 0.00 s to 320.00 s (increments 0.01 s)
Inherent Pickup Time ≤ 60 ms (non-directional)

≤ 80 ms (directional)
Dropout/Pickup (ratio) approx. 0.95 for INs ≥ 50 mA
Measurement Tolerance 2 % of setting value or 1 mA
Operating Time Tolerance 1 % of setting value or 20 ms
384 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000–G1140–C147–1
User-defined Characteristic user-specified characteristic (defined

by maximum of 20 pairs of current–
trip time values)
Pickup Current 51 Ns
for sensitive transformer 0.001 A to 1.400 A (increments 0.001 A)
Time multiplier 51 Ns 0.10 to 4.00 (increments 0.01)
Pickup Threshold approx. 1.10 · INsp

Dropout Threshold approx. 1.05 · INsp for INsp > 50 mA
Operating Time Tolerance in the 7% of reference value for 2 ≤ I/INsp ≤ 20

Linear Range + 2% current tolerance, or 70 ms
Influencing Vari- Power supply direct voltage in range

Temperatur in range
23º F ≤ ϑamb ≤ 131º F 0.06% /10º F
Frequency in range
0.95 ≤ f/fN ≤ 1.05 1%
Frequency in range
Harmonic currents
Note: When using the sensitive transformer, the linear range of the measuring input
for the sensitive ground fault acquisition is from 0.001 A to 1.6 A. The function is how-
ever still preserved for greater currents.
The set times are pure delay times for the definite time characteristic.
Direction Determi- Direction Measurement

nation for All Types
– IG and VG measured (ground quantities)
of Ground Faults
– 3I0 and 3V0 calculated
Measuring Principle Real/reactive power measurement
Measuring Enable IRelease direct. element
(Current component
perpendicular (90º) to
Direction Phasor)
for sensitive transformer 0.001 A to 1.200 A (increments 0.001A)
for normal 1-A transformer 0.05 A to 30.00 A (increments 0.01A)
Dropout/Pickup (ratio) approx. 0.80
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 385

C53000–G1140–C147–1
Technical Data
Measuring Method cosϕ and sinϕ

Direction Phasor –45.0° to +45.0° (increments 0.1°)
Dropout Delay TReset Delay 1 s to 60 s (increments 1 s)
Angle correction for cable converter in 2 operating points F1/I1 and F2/I2:
(for resonant-grounded system)
Angle correction F1, F2 0.0° to 5.0° (increments 0.1°)

Currents I1, I2
for sensitive transformer 0.001 A to 1.600 A (increments 0.001A)
Angle Tolerance 3°
Note: Due to the high sensitivity the linear range of the measuring input IN with inte-
grated sensitive input transformer is from 0.001 A to 1.6 A. For currents greater than
1.6 A, correct directionality can no longer be guaranteed.
386 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000–G1140–C147–1
4.14 Intermittent Ground Fault Protection
Setting Ranges/ Pick-up value for IE IIE> 0.25 A to 175.00 A1) (increments 0.05 A)1)
Resolutions for 3I0 IIE> 0.25 A to 175.00 A1) (increments 0.05 A)1)
for IEE IIE> 0.050 A to 1.500 A (increments 0.001 A)
Pick-up prolongation time TV 0.00 s to 10.00 s (increments 0.01 s)

Earth fault accumulation time Tsum 0.00 s to 100.00 s (increments 0.01 s)
Reset time for accumulation Tres 1 s to 600 s (increments 1 s)
Number of pick-ups for intermittent 2 to 10 (increments 1)
earth fault
Inherent Operating Pickup Times

Times
– Current = 1.25 x Pickup Value approx. 30 ms
– Current ≥ 2 x Pickup Value approx. 22 ms
Drop-off Time (without prolongation time) approx. 22 ms
Tolerances Pickup Value IE> 3 % of setting value e.g. 50 mA1)

Times TV, Tsum, Tres 1 % of setting value or 10 ms

ables 0.8 ≤ VPS/ VPS nominal ≤ 1.15 0.1%
23º F ≤ ϑamb ≤ 131º F 0.06% /10º F
Frequency in range
f/fN < 55 Hz or > 65 Hz 1%
Frequency in range
1
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 387

C53000–G1140–C147–1
Technical Data
4.15 Automatic Reclosing System (79M)
Number of Reclosures 0 to 9 (for both phase and ground)

Shots 1 to 4 individually adjustable
For Phase Faults-Processing
79 Initiates: Selectable 50-1, 50-2, 51, 67-1, 67-2, 67-TOC,
46-1, 46-2, 46-TOC, Binary Inputs
For Ground Faults-Processing 50-1, 50-2, 51, 67-1, 67-2, 67-TOC,
79 Initiates: Selectable 50N-1, 50N-2, 51N, 67N-1, 67N-2,
67N-TOC, Sensitive Ground Fault
Protection, Binary Inputs
Blocking of 79 – Trip of protective elements for which
79 blocking is set.
– phase fault detected by a
protective element.
– binary input
Last trip command after the reclosing cycle
is complete (unsuccessful reclosing).
Trip command from the breaker failure
protection.
Opening the circuit breaker without 79
initiation.
External CLOSE Command
Dead Time 0.01 s to 320.00 s (Increments 0.01 s)
(Separate for phase and ground and individual for shots 1 to 4)
Extension of Dead Time Using binary input with time monitoring
Blocking duration after manual close 0.50 s to 320.00 s (Increments 0.01 s
Auto reclosing reset time 0.50 s to 320.00 s (Increments 0.01 s)
Safety time until 79 is ready 0.01 s to 320.00 s (Increments 0.01 s)
Start-signal monitoring time 0.01 s to 320.00 s (Increments 0.01 s)
or ∞
Circuit Breaker supervision time 0.10 s to 320.00 s (Increments 0.01 s)
Maximum dead time extension 0.50 s to 320.00 s (Increments 0.01 s)
or ∞
Action time 0.01 s to 320.00 s (Increments 0.01 s)
or ∞
The following protection functions can be influenced by the automatic reclosing func-
tion individually for the cycles 1 to 4 (setting value T=T/ instantaneous T=0/ blocked
T=infinite): 50-1, 50-2, 51, 67-1, 67-2, 67-TOC,
50N-1, 50N-2, 51N, 67N-1, 67N-2,
67N-TOC
Additional Functions Definitive Trip
Circuit breaker monitoring using, breaker
auxiliary contacts
Synchronous closing (optionally with
integrated or external synchrocheck)
388 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000–G1140–C147–1
Fault Location
4.16 Fault Location
Units of Distance Measurement Secondary Ω,

Miles or km of line length 2)
Trigger Trip command, Pickup of an Element,
Dropout of an Element, or
External command via binary input
Reactance Setting (secondary)1) 0.001 to 1.243 Ω/km1) (Incr. 0.001 Ω/km)
Reactance Setting (secondary) 0.002 to 2.000 Ω/mile1)(Incr. 0.001 Ω/mile)

Measurement Tolerance per ≤ 2.5% line length (without infeed) or
VDE 0435 part 303 for 0.005 Ω1),
Sinusoidal Measurement Quantities 30º ≤ ϕk ≤ 90º and Vk / VN ≥ 0.1 and
Ik/IN≥ 0.1
1)
For IN = 1 A, multiply all values by 5; the increment is always 0.001.
2)
Homogeneous lines are assumed when the fault distance is given in miles or km.
4.17 Breaker Failure Protection (50BF)
Pickup and Time Pickup of 50 Element BkrClosed I MIN 0.20 A to 5.00 A 1) (Increments 0.05 A)1)
Delay Ranges/
Time Delay TRIP-Timer 0.06 s to 60.00 s (Increments 0.01 s)
Resolutions or ∞ (no trip)
Initiating Time Pickup Times (protection initiates)
- For Internal Start included in time delay
- Using Controls included in time delay
- For External Start included in time delay
Reset Time approx. 25 ms 2)
Tolerances Pickup Current BkrClosed I MIN 2% of set value, or 50 mA1)

Time Delay TRIP-Timer 1% or 20 ms
23º F ≤ ϑamb ≤ 131º F 0.06% /10º F
Frequency in range
0.95 ≤ f/fN ≤ 1.05 1%
Frequency in range
Harmonics
1
) For IN = 1A, divide all limits by 5.
2
) A further delay for the current may be caused by compensation in the CT secondary
circuit.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 389

C53000–G1140–C147–1
Technical Data
4.18 Synchronism and Voltage Check (25) (7SJ64 only)
Operating Modes – Synchrocheck

– Asynchron/Synchron
Additional Release • live-bus / dead line

Conditions • dead-bus / live-line
• dead-bus and dead-line
• bypassing
Voltages Maximum operating voltage Umax 20 V to 140 V (phase-to-phase)(Incr. 1 V)

Minimum operating voltage Umin 20 V to 125 V (phase-to-phase)(Incr. 1 V)
U< for dead-line / dead-bus check 1 V to 60 V (phase-to-phase) (Incr. 1 V)
U> for live-line/ live-bus check 20 V to 140 V (phase-to-phase)(Incr. 1 V)
Primary transformer rated voltage U2N 0.10 kV to 800.00 kV (Incr. 0.01 kV)
Tolerances 2 % of pick-up value or 2 V
Drop-off to pick-up ratios approx. 0.9 (U>) or 1.1 (U<)
∆U-Measurement Voltage difference 0.5 V to 40 V (phase-to-phase) (Incr. 1 V)

Tolerance 1V
∆f-Measurement ∆f-measurement (f2>f1; f2<f1) 0.01 Hz to 2.00 Hz (Incr. 0.01 Hz)

Tolerance 15 mHz
∆α−Measurement ∆α−measurement (α2>α1; α2<α1) 2° to 80° (Increments 1°)

Tolerance 2°
Maximum error angle 5° for ∆f ≤ 1 Hz
10° for ∆f > 1 Hz
Circuit-breaker Circuit-breaker operating time 0.01 s to 0.60 s (Incr. 0.01 s)

operating time
Threshold Threshold synchronous / 0.01 Hz to 0.04 Hz (Incr. 0,01 Hz)

ASYN ↔ SYN non-synchronous
Matching Vector group matching via angle 0° to 360° (Increments 1°)

Diff. voltage transformers U1/U2 0.50 to 2.00 (Incr. 0,01)
Times Minimum measuring time approx. 80 ms

Maximum duration TSYN DURATION 0.01 s to 1200.00 s; ∞ (Incr. 0.01 s)
of synchronization
Supervision time TSUP VOLTAGE 0.0 s to 60.0 s (Incr. 0,1 s)
Closing time of CB TCB close 0.00 s to 60.00 s (Incr. 0,01 s)
Tolerance of all timers 1 % of set value or 10 ms
Measured Values of Reference voltage U1

the Synchronizing in kV primary, in V secondary or in % VNom
Function - Range 10 % to 120 % VNom
- Tolerance*) ≤1 % of measured value or 0.5 % of VNom
*) for rated frequency
390 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000–G1140–C147–1
RTD-Boxes for Temperature Detection
Voltage to be synchronized U2
in kV primary, in V secondary or in % VNom
- Range 10 % to 120 % VNom
Frequency of U1 f1 in Hz
- Range fN ± 5 Hz
- Tolerance*) 20 mHz
Frequency of U2 f1 in Hz
- Range fN ± 5 Hz
Voltage difference (U2 – U1)
in kV primary, in V secondary or in % VNom
- Range 10 % to 120 % VNom
Frequency difference (f2 – f1) in mHz
- Range fN ± 5 Hz
Angle difference (α2 – α1) in °
- Range 0 ° to 180 °
- Tolerance*) 0.5 °
*) for rated frequency
4.19 RTD-Boxes for Temperature Detection
Temperature Connectable RTD-boxes 1 or 2

Detectors
Number of temperature detectors
per RTD-box max. 6
Type of measurement Pt 100 Ω or Ni 100 Ω or Ni 120 Ω
Mounting identification “Oil” or “Ambient” or “Winding” or
“Bearing” or “Other”
Thresholds for for each measuring point:

Indications
Stage 1 –50 °C to 250 °C (in increments of 1 °C)
–58 °F to 482 °F (in increments of 1 °F)
or ∞ (no indication)
Stage 2 –50 °C to 250 °C (in increments of 1 °C)
–58 °F to 482 °F (in increments of 1 °F)
or ∞ (no indication)
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 391

C53000–G1140–C147–1
Technical Data
4.20 User Defined Functions with CFC
Function Modules Function Modules and Task Levels:
Task Level
Function Modules Description MW_BEARB PLC1_BEARB PLC_BEARB SFS_BEARB
Meter Slow PLC Fast PLC Interlocking
processing
ABSVALUE Magnitude X – – –
Calculation
ADD Addition X X X X
AND AND-Gate – X X X
BOOL_TO_CO Boolean to – X X –
Control
(Conversion)
BOOL_TO_DI Boolean to – X X X
Double Point
(Conversion)
BOOL_TO_IC Boolean to – X X X
Internal Single
Point Indication
(Conversion)
BUILD_DI Create Double – X X X

Point Indication
CMD_CHAIN Switching – X X –
Sequence
CMD_INF Command – – – X
information
CONNECT Connection – X X X
D_FF D-Flipflop – X X X
D_FF_MEMO Status Memory X X X X

for Restart
DI_TO_BOOL Double Point – X X X

Indication to
Boolean
(Conversion)
DIV Division X X X X
DM_DECODE Decode Double X X X X

Point Indication
DYN_OR Dynamic Or X X X X
LIVE_ZERO Live-zero, non X – – –

linear Curve
LONG_TIMER Timer X X X X
(max. 1193 h)
392 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000–G1140–C147–1
User Defined Functions with CFC
Task Level
Function Modules Description MW_BEARB PLC1_BEARB PLC_BEARB SFS_BEARB
Meter Slow PLC Fast PLC Interlocking
processing
LOOP Feedback Loop – X – –
LOWER_SETPOINT Lower limit X – – –
MUL Multiplication X X X X
NAND NAND-Gate – X X X
NEG Negator – X X X
NOR NOR-Gate – X X X
OR OR-Gate – X X X
RS_FF RS-Flipflop – X X X
SQUARE_ROOT Root Extractor X X X X
SR_FF SR-Flipflop – X X X
SUB Subtraction X X X X
TIMER Timer – X X –
UPPER_SETPOINT Upper limit X – – –
X_OR XOR-Gate – X X X
ZERO_POINT Zero suppression X – – –
Limits Maximum number of TICKS in the task levels
Run-Time Level Limits in TICKS

7SJ62 7SJ63 7SJ64
MW_BEARB (Measured value processing) 2536 2536 10000
PLC1_BEARB (Slow PLC processing) 255 300 2000
PLC_BEARB (Fast PLC processing) 130 130 400

SFS_BEARB (Interlocking) 2173 2173 10000
TICKS required by the individual elements
Individual Element Amount of TICKS

Module, basic requirement 5
each input more than 3 inputs for generic modules 1
Connection to an input 6
Connection to an output signal 7
Additional for each configuration sheet 1
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 393

C53000–G1140–C147–1
Technical Data
Additonal limits for the following 4 CFC–blocks
Run-Time Level Maximum Number of Blocks in the

Sequence Levels Already Mentioned
LONG_TIMER TIMER CMD_CHAIN D_FF_MEMO
MW_BEARB ---- ----
PLC1_BEARB 18 50
9 20
PLC_BEARB
SFS_BEARB ---- -----
394 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000–G1140–C147–1
Additional Functions
4.21 Additional Functions
Operational Mea- Operating Measured Values for Currents in A or kA primary; in A secondary,

sured Values – Ia, Ib, Ic or in % of INom
- Range 10% to 200% INom
- Tolerance*) 1% of measure value or 0.5 % of INom
– IG and 3I0 in A or kA primary; in A secondary and
or in % of INom
– Positive sequence current I1 in A or kA primary; in A secondary,

or in % of INom
– Negative sequence current I2 in A or kA primary; in A secondary and
or in % of INom
Operating Measured Values in kV primary; in V secondary

for Voltages (phase-ground) or in % of VNom
– Va, Vb, Vc
- Range 10% to 120% VNom
- Tolerance*) 1% of measured value or 0.5 % of VNom
Operating Measured Values in kV primary; in V secondary
for Voltages (phase-phase) or in % of VNom
– Va-b, Vb-c, Vc-a, Vsyn
- Range 10% to 120% VNom
- Tolerance*) 1% of measured value or 0.5 % of VNom
– VGND and V0 in kV primary; in V secondary
or in % of VNom
– Positive sequence voltage V1 in kV primary; in V
– Negative sequence voltage V2 secondary or in % of VNom
Operating Measured Values
for Power in kVA (MVA or GVA) primary, and in
– S, Apparent Power % SNom
- Range 0% to 120% SNom
- Tolerance*) ≤ 2% SNom
for V/VNom and I/INom = 50% to 120%
with SNom = √3 · VNom · INom
– P, Real power (with sign, in kW (MW or GW) primary, and
total and phase-segregated) in % SNom
and |cos ϕ| = 0.707 to 1
– Q, Reactive power (with sign, in kVAr (MVAr or GVAr) primary and
total and phase-segregated) in % SNom
*) at f = fN
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 395

C53000–G1140–C147–1
Technical Data

and |sin ϕ| = 0.707 to 1
for Power Factor total and phase-segregated)
– cos ϕ
- Range -1 to 1
- Tolerance*) 5% for |cos ϕ| ≥ 0.707
for Frequency
– f in Hz (displayed with primary values)
- Range fN ± 5 Hz
Thermal Overload Protection Θ/Θ Trip
- Range 0% to 400%
- Tolerance*) 5% class accuracy per IEC 60255-8
Motor Restart Blocking ΘL/ΘL Trip
- Range 0% to 400%
- Tolerance*) 5% class accuracy per IEC 60255-8
Temperature limit ΘRESTART/ΘL aus in %
Time until release of reclose blocking
Treclose in min
Operating Measured Values for INs, INsa, INsr (total, active, and
Sensitive Ground Fault Protection reactive current)
in A or kA primary and in mA secondary
- Range 0 mA to 1600 mA
- Tolerance*) 2% of measure value or 1 mA
Operating Measured Values for
the Measurement Transducer (7SJ63 only)
- Operating Range 0 mA to 24 mA
- Accuracy Range 1 mA to 20 mA
- Tolerance 1.5% relative to nominal value of 20 mA
For Standard Usage of the Measurement Transducer for Pressure and Temperature
Monitoring:
Operating Measured Value Pressure in hPa
for Pressure
- Operating Range (pre-set) 0 hPa to 1200 hPa
Operating Measured Value Temperature in ºC
for Temperature
- Operating Range (pre-set) 0º C to 240º C
Measured values of the synchronizing
function (7SJ64) see Section 4.18
Measured values of the RTD-Box see Section 4.19 (RTD-Boxes)
*) at f = fN
396 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000–G1140–C147–1
Additional Functions
Long-Term Mean Time Window 5, 15, 30 or 60 minutes

Value
Frequency of Updates adjustable
Long-Term Means of
– Currents Ia dmd, Ib dmd, Ic dmd, I1 dmd in A (kA)
– Real Power Pdmd in W (kW, MW)
– Reactive Power Qdmd in VAr, (kVAr, MVAr)
– Apparent Power Sdmd in VA, (kVA, MVA)
Min/Max Report Report of Measured Values with date and time

Reset – Automatic Time of day adjustable (in minutes, 0 to
1439 min).
Time frame and starting time
adjustable (in days, 1 to 365 days, and ∞).
Reset – Manual Using binary input
Using keypad
Using communication
Min/Max Values for Current Ia, Ib, Ic, I1 (positive sequence)
Min/Max Values for Voltages Va-n, Vb-n, Vc-n, V1 (positive sequence)
Va-b, Vb-c, Vc-a, Vn
Min/Max Values for
Thermal Overload Protection Θ/ΘTrip
Min/Max Values for Power/ Other S, P, Q, cos ϕ, Frequency
Min/Max Values for Averages IAdmd, IBdmd, ICdmd, I1dmd
(positive sequence)
(LOG of Primary Values) Sdmd, Pdmd, Qdmd
Measured Values Current Asymmetry Imax/Imin > I - balance factor, for I > I - bal-
Supervision ance limit. Factor and limit are adjustable.
Voltage Asymmetry Vmax/Vmin > V - balance factor,for V > V -
balance limit. Factor and limit are
adjustable.
Current Sum | ia+ib+ic+[kn · in] | > I - sum
threshold value, adjustable.
kn = CTn ratio / CTphase ratio
Current Phase Sequence Clockwise (ABC)/ counter-clockwise (ACB)
Voltage Phase Sequence Clockwise (ABC)/ counter-clockwise (ACB)
Limit Value Monitor Ia > Limit value IA dmd>
Ib > Limit value IB dmd>
Ic > Limit value IC dmd>
I1 > Limit value I1 dmd>
IL < Limit value 37-1
cos ϕ < Lower limit value |cos ϕ|<
P > Limit value |Pdmd|>
Q > Limit value |Qdmd|>
S > Limit value Sdmd>
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 397

C53000–G1140–C147–1
Technical Data
Pressure < Lower limit value Press<

Temperature > Limit value Temp>
Trip Log Recording of indication of the last 8 power system faults

Recording of indication of the last 3 power system ground faults
Time Stamping Resolution for Event Log 1 ms
(Operational Messages)
Resolution for Trip Log (Fault Records) 1 ms
Time Deviation (Internal Clock) Maximum 0.01%
Buffer Battery Lithium Battery, 3 V / 1 Ah, type CR 1/2 AA
Self-discharging time > 5 years
Message “Fail Battery” if
battery charge is low
Waveform Capture Maximum 8 fault records saved

Memory maintained by buffer
battery in case of loss of power supply
Recording Time Total of 5 s
Pre-event and post-event recording
and memory time adjustable
Sampling Rate for 50 Hz 1 sample/1.25 ms (16 sam/cyc)
Sampling Rate for 60 Hz 1 sample/1.04 ms (16 sam/cyc)
Energy Counter Values for Energy Wp, Wq (real and reactive energy)
in kWh (MWh or GWh) and in kVARh
(MVARh or GVARh)
- Range 28 bit or 0 to 268435455 decimal for
IEC 60870-5-103 (VDEW protocol)
31 bit or 0 to 2147483647 decimal for
other protocols (other than VDEW)
- Tolerance*) 5% for I > 0.5 INom, V> 0.5 VNom and
|cos ϕ| ≥ 0.707
Statistics (Circuit Saved Number of Trips Up to 9 digits

Breaker)
Number of closing commands
of the automatic reclosing function Up to 9 decimal places separated
according to 1st and ≥ 2nd cycle
Accumulated Interrupted Current Up to 4 digits (kA) per pole
Operating Hours Operating Hours Range Up to 7 digits

Counter Criterion to Count Current exceeds an adjustable current
threshold (BkrClosed I MIN)
Trip Circuit Monitor With one or two binary inputs.

(74TC)
Commissioning Phase Rotation Field Check

Start-up Aids Operating Measured Values
Circuit Breaker / Switching Device Test
Creation of a Test Measurement Report
398 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000–G1140–C147–1
Breaker Control
Clock Time Synchronization IRIG-B/DCF77-signal

Binary signal
Communication
Operating Modes for Time Tracking
# Operating Mode Explanations

1 Internal Internal synchronization using RTC (pre-set)
2 IEC 60870–5–103 External synchronization using SCADA interface

(IEC 60870–5–103)
3 PROFIBUS FMS External synchronization using PROFIBUS interface
4 IRIG B Time signal External synchronization using IRIG B
5 DCF77 Time signal External synchronization using DCF 77
6 SIMEAS Time signal Sync. External synchronization using SIMEAS Sync. Box
Box
7 Pulse via binary input External synchronization with pulse via binary input
Setting Group Number of Available Setting Groups 4 (parameter group A, B, C and D)

Switchover of the-
Switchover Performed Using the keypad
Function Parame-
DIGSI® 4 using the front PC port
ters
with protocol via system (SCADA) interface
using binary input
4.22 Breaker Control
Number of Controlled Switching Depends on the number of binary Devices

Device (e.g. Circuit Breakers) inputs and outputs available
Interlocking Freely programmable interlocking
Messages (Feedback) Feedback messages; closed, open,
intermediate position
Control Commands Single command, double command
Operating Command to 1, 1 plus 1 common, or 2 contacts
Switching Device
Programmable Logic Controller PLC logic, graphic input tool
Local Control Control via menu control, assignment of
function keys
Remote Control Using communication interfaces
SCADA
DIGSI® 4 (e.g. via modem)
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 399

C53000–G1140–C147–1
Technical Data
4.23 Dimensions
Housing for Panel

Flush Mounting or
Cubicle Installation
(Size 1/3 x 19”)
29 30
29.5 172 (6.77) 34 29.5 172 (6.77) (1.14) (1.18)
(1.16) 150 (5.91)
(1.16) (1.34)
Mounting plate Mounting plate 145 (5.71)
F
R
266 (10.47)
244 (9.61)
266 (10.47)
244 (9.61)
D C
2 2
(0.08) (0.08) Q
B A
34
(1.34) 7SJ64
Side View (with screwed terminals) Side View (with plug-in terminals) Rear View
150 (5.91)
146 + 2 (5.75 + 0.07) 145 (5.71)
5 (0.19)
or M4 F
R
255.8 ± 0.3 (10.07± 0.01)
245 + 1 (9.64 +0.03 )
6 (0.24)
Dimensions in mm Q
B A
Values in brackets in inches
5.4 (0.21) 105 ± 0.5 (4.13 ± 0.01)

7.3 (0.28) 131.5 ± 0.3 (5.17 ± 0.01)
7SJ62
Panel Cut-Out Rear View
13.2 (0.51)
Figure 4-11 Dimensions 7SJ62 or 7SJ64 for panel flush mounting or cubicle installation (size 1/3 x 19”)
400 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000–G1140–C147–1
Dimensions
Housing for Panel

Flush Mounting or
(Size 1/2 x 19”)
29 30
172 (6.77) 34 172 (6.77) (1.14) (1.18) 225 (8.86)
29.5 29.5
220 (8.66)
(1.16) (1.34) (1.16)
Mounting plate Mounting plate
F
R K
266 (10.47)
244 (9.61)
266 (10.47)
244 (9.61)
2 2 D C
(0.08) (0.08)
Q J
B A
34
(1.34)
Side view (with screwed terminals) Side view (with plug-in terminals)
7SJ64
Rear view
221 +2 (8.70 +0.08 )

225 (8.86)
220 (8.66)
255.8 ± 0.3 (10.07 +0.01 )
245 + 1 (9.64 +0.04 )
5 (0.20) or M4
F
R K
Dimensions in mm
Values in brackets in inches C
6 (0.24) Q J
B A
(0.21)
5.4
180 ± 0.5 (7.09 ± 0.02 )

206.5 ± 0.3 (8.13 ± 0.01 )
13.2
(0.52) 7SJ63
Panel cut-out Rear view
7.3
(0.29)
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 401

C53000–G1140–C147–1
Technical Data
Housing for Panel

Flush Mounting or
(Size 1/1 x 19”)
29 30
29.5 172 (6.77) (1.14) (1.18)
29.5 172 (6.77) 34
(1.16) (1.34) (1.16)
266 (10.47)
244 (9.61)
266 (10.47)
244 (9.61)
Dimensions in mm
2 2
(0.08) (0.08)
34
(1.34)
Side view (with screwed terminals) Side view (with plug-in terminals)
446 +2 (17.56 +0.08)

450 (17.72)
445 (17.52)
6 (0.24)
255.8 ± 0.3 (10.07 ± 0.01)
5 (0.20)
or M4
245 + 1 (9.64 + 0.03)
F
R P K
5 (0.20) 5 (0.20)
6 (0.24) 6 (0.24)
or M4 or M4
D C 5 (0.20)
or M4 6 (0.24)
Q N J
B A
(0.21)
5.4
13.2
7SJ64 13.2 216.1 ± 0.3 (8.51 ± 0.01) (0.52)
Rear view (0.52)
425.5 ± 0.3 (16.75 ± 0.01) 13.2
450 (17.72) 7.3 (0.52)
445 (17.52) (0.29) panel cut -out
(view from the device front)
F
R L K
C
Q M J
B A
7SJ63
Rear view
402 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000–G1140–C147–1
Dimensions
Housing for Panel

Surface Mounting
(Size 1/3 x 19”)
165 (6.50)
144 (5.76) 10.5 (0.41) 260 (10.24)
31 45
29.5 (1.16)
46 60
150 (5.91)
280 (11.02)
320 (12.60)
344 (13.54)
266 (10.47)
25
1 15
9 30
(0.35)
16 72(2.83) 52 (2.05)
71 (2.80) Dimensions in mm
(0.98) Values in brackets in inches
Front view Side view
Figure 4-14 Dimensions 7SJ62 or 7SJ63 for panel surface mounting (size 1/3 x 19”)
Housing for Panel

Surface Mounting
(Size 1/2 x 19”)
240 (9.45)
219 (8.62) 10.5 260 (10.24)
(0.41)
51 75
29.5
76 100 (1.16)
266 (10.47)
225 (8.86)
280 (11.02)
320 (12.60)
344 (13.54)
(0.98)
25
1 25
9 26 50 72 52
(0.35) 71 (2.83) 2.05)
(2.80)
Front view Side view
Dimensions in mm
1/
Figure 4-15 Dimensions 7SJ63 or 7SJ64 for panel surface mounting (size 2 x 19”)
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 403

C53000–G1140–C147–1
Technical Data
Housing for Panel

Surface Mounting
(Size 1/1)
465 (18.31) 260 (10.24)

444 (17.48) 10.5
29.5
(0.41)
(1.16)
101 150
151 200
266 (10.47)
450 (17.72)
280 (11.02)
320 (12.60)
344 (13.54)
(0.98)
25
1 50 72 52
9 51 100 71 (2.83) 2.05)
(0.35) (2.80)
Side view
Front view
Dimensions in mm
Figure 4-16 Dimensions 7SJ63 or 7SJ64 for panel surface mounting (size 1/1 x 19”)
404 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000–G1140–C147–1
Dimensions
Housing for
Mounting with
Detached
Operator Panel
(Size 1/2 x 19”)
(1.14) (1.18) 225 (8.86)

220 (8.66)
209.5 (8.25) 34 (1.34) 209.5 (8.25) 29 30
F
R K
266 (10.47)
312.8 (12.31)
244 (9.61)
266 (10.47)
312.8 (12.31)
244 (9.61)
D C
Q J
B A
34
(1.34)
7SJ64
Rear view
Side view (with screw terminals) Side view (with plug-in terminals)
225 (8.86)
220 (8.66)
4.5 (0.18)
F
R K
300 ± 0.3 (11.81 ± 0.01)
C
Q J
Dimensions in mm B A
6.4 (0.25)
12.5 (0.49) 100 ± 0.3 (3.93 ± 0.11) 7SJ63
Rear view
200 ± 0.3 (7.87 ± 0.11)
Mounting Holes of
Mounting Plate
Figure 4-17 Dimensions 7SJ63 or 7SJ64 for mounting with detached operator panel (size 1/2 x 19”)
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 405

C53000–G1140–C147–1
Technical Data
Housing for Mount-

ing with Detached
Operator Panel
(Size 1/1 x 19”)
(1.14) (1.18)
Mounting Plate Mounting Plate
209.5 ( 8.25) 34 (1.34) 209.5 (8.25) 29 30
266 (10.47)
312.8 (12.31)
244 (9.61)
266 (10.47)
312.8 (12.31)
244 (9.61)
34 (1.34)
Side View (with Screw Terminals) Side View (with Screw Terminals)
450 (17.72)
445 (17.52)
4.5 (0.18)
F
R P K
300 ± 0.3 (11.81 ± 0.01)
D C
Q N J
B A
7SJ64 Rear View

6.4 (0.25)
25 100 ± 0.3 (3.94 ± 0.01)
200 ± 0.3 (7.87 ± 0.01)
300 ± 0.3 (11.81 ± 0.01)
F 400 ± 0.3 (15.75 ± 0.01)
R L K
Mounting Holes of Mounting Plate
C
Q M J
A
Dimensions in mm
B Values in brackets in inches
7SJ63 Rear View

Figure 4-18 Dimensions 7SJ63 or 7SJ64 for mounting with detached operator panel (size 1/1 x 19”)
406 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000–G1140–C147–1
Dimensions
Detached
Operator Panel
(1.16) (1.06) 68-pin Connection Cable

Mounting Plate to Device
29.5 27
Length 2.2 m (0.09) 225 (8.86)
220 (8.66)
246.2 (9.69)
266 (10.47)
2 (0.08)
Side View Rear View
221 + 2 (8.70 + 0.08)
5 (0.20)
or M4
255.8 ± 0.3 (10.07 ± 0.01)
247.2 + 1 (9.73 + 0.04)
6 (0.24)
180 ± 0.5 (7.07 ± 0.02)

4.3 (0.17)
206.5 ± 0.3 (8.13 ± 0.01)
13.2 (0.52)
Panel Cut-Out
7.3 (0.29)
Figure 4-19 Dimensions of a detached operator panel for a 7SJ63 or a 7SJ64 device
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 407

C53000–G1140–C147–1
Technical Data
D-Subminiature
Connector of the
Dongle Cable
(Panel or Cubicle
40 ± 0,2
Dimensions in mm
34 ± 1
Door Cutout)
4,5 oder M4
20 ± 1
Panel cutout or cubicle door cutout
Figure 4-20 Dimensioned drawing for the panel cutout or cubicle door cutout of the D-sub-
miniature connector of the dongle cable for 7SJ63 or 7SJ64 without integrated
operator panel n
408 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000–G1140–C147–1
Appendix A
This appendix is primarily a reference for the experienced user. This section provides
ordering information for the models of 7SJ62/63/64. General diagrams indicating the
terminal connections of the 7SJ62/63/64 models are included. Following the general
diagrams are diagrams that show the proper connections of the devices to primary
equipment in many typical power system configurations. Tables with all settings and
all information available in a 7SJ62/63/64 equipped with all options are provided. De-
fault settings are also given.
A.1 Ordering Information and Accessories 410

A.2 Elementary Diagrams 426
A.3 Connection Examples 470
A.4 Default Settings 494
A.5 Interoperability List 503
A.6 Protocol-dependent functions 505
A.7 Functions Overview 506
A.8 Settings 508
A.9 Overview of the masking features of the user defined information 541
A.10 Information List 545
A.11 Measured Values 582
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 409

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix 7SJ62
A.1 Ordering Information and Accessories
A.1.1 Ordering Information 7SJ62 V4.4 (present release .../EE and higher)
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
SIPROTEC 4 Multifunction Protection with Controls Order No. 7SJ62 _ _

Number of Binary Inputs and Outputs
8 Binary Inputs, 8 Binary Outputs, 1 Live Status Contact 1
Measuring Inputs (3 x V, 4 x I)
Iph = 1 A, Ie = 1 A (min. = 0.05 A); 15th position only with: C, E, G 1
Iph = 1 A, Ie = sensitive (min. = 0.001 A); 15th position only with: B, D, F, H 2
Power Supply, Binary Input Pickup Threshold Setting

24 to 48 VDC, Binary Input Threshold 19 VDC 2
110 to 250 VDC, 115/230 VAC, Binary Input Threshold 88 VDC 5
Construction
Surface-mounting case for panel, 2 tier terminals top/ bottom B
Flush-mounting case for panel/ cubicle, plug-in terminals (2/3 pin connector) D
Flush-mounting case for panel/ cubicle, screw-type terminals (direct connection/ ring lugs) E
Region-specific Default/ Language Settings and Function Versions
Region DE, 50 Hz, IEC, Language German (Language can be changed) A
Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, Language English (Language can be changed) B
Region US, 60 Hz, ANSI, Language American English (Language can be changed) C
Region FR, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, Language French (Language can be changed) D
Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, Language Spanish (Language can be changed) E
System interfaces (Port B)
No system interface 0
IEC Protocol, RS232 1
IEC Protocol, Optical 820 nm, ST-Connector 3
Profibus FMS Slave, RS485 4
Profibus FMS Slave, Optical, Single Ring, ST-Connector) 51)
Profibus FMS Slave, Optical, Double Ring, ST-Connector) 61)
For further interface options see Additional Information L 9
see Page 411
11
Additional Information L + L
System Interfaces (Device Rear)
Profibus DP Slave, RS485 0 A
Profibus DP Slave, 820 nm, Optical Double Ring, ST–Connector1) 0 B1)
Modbus RS485) 0 D
Modbus, 820 nm, Optical, ST–Connector2) 0 E2)
DNP3.0, RS485 0 G
DNP3.0, 820 nm, Optical, ST–Connector2) 0 H2)
1)
not available if “B“ is in position 9; if the optical interface is required, see the comment on page 422.
2) not available if “B“ is in position 9.
410 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
7SJ62 A.1 Ordering Information and Accessories
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
SIPROTEC 4 Multifunction Protection with Controls Order No. 7SJ62

_ _
DIGSI 4/Modem Interface (Device Rear, Port C)

No rear DIGSI 4 Interface 0
DIGSI 4/Modem, RS232 1
DIGSI 4/Modem/RTD-Box 3), RS485 2
DIGSI 4/Modem/RTD-Box 3), Optical 820 nm, ST-Connector 3
Measuring/Fault recording
with Fault recording 1
with Fault recording, with Average values, with Min/Max values 3
Functions
Designation ANSI no. Description
Basic Elements: Control
(included in all versions) 50/51 Time-overcurrent protection phase
50-1, 50-2, 51
50N/51N Time-overcurrent protection ground
50N-1, 50N-2, 51N
50N/51N Time-overcurrent protection ground via insensitive IEE-function:
50N-1, 50N-2, 51 N5)
49 Overload protection (with 2 time constants)
46 Negative sequence protection 46-1, 46-2, 46-TOC
50BF Circuit breaker failure protection
74TC Trip circuit monitoring
Cold-load pickup (Dynamic setting changes)50c-1, 50c-2, 50Nc-1, 50Nc-2, 51Nc
Inrush blocking
86 Lock out
V/f 27/59 Under/Overvoltage 59-1,59-2, 27-1, 27-2 F E
81O/U Under/Over frequency
Dir 67/67N Directional overcurrent protection for phase and ground F C
47 Phase Sequence Voltage
Dir V/f 67/67N Directional overcurrent protection for phase and ground F G
27/59 Under/Overvoltage 59-1, 59-2, 27-1, 27-2
Dir IEF 67/67N Directional overcurrent protection for phase and ground P C
Intermittent earth fault
Dir.earth-f. Dir IEF 67/67N Directional overcurrent protection for phase and ground F D4)
det. 47 Phase Sequence Voltage
67Ns Directional sensitive ground fault protection4)
64 Displacement voltage
Dir.earth-f. Dir 67/67N Directional overcurrent protection for phase and ground P D4)
67Ns Directional sensitive ground fault direction recording4)
Dir.earth-f. 67Ns Directional sensitive ground fault protection4) F B4)
det. 64 Displacement voltage
Dir.earth-f. Motor V/f 67Ns Directional sensitive ground fault protection4) H F4 )

37 Undercurrent monitoring
48 Motor starting time supervision
66/86 Motor start inhibit (66/68)
Dir.earth-f. Motor V/f 67/67N Directional overcurrent protection for phase and ground H H4)
see Page 412
Dir = Directional overcurrent protection

V/f = Voltage-/frequency protection
IEF = Intermittent earth fault protection
3) RTD-Box 7XV5662–*AD10 (see also the comment on page 422 and Section A.1.6, Accessories)
4
5
)for isolated/compensated networks, only for sensitive ground current transformer if 7th digit = 2, 6.
) only for non-sensitive ground current transformer if 7th digit = 1, 5, 7.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 411

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix 7SJ62
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
SIPROTEC 4 Multifunction Protection with Controls Order No. 7SJ62 _ _ _
Functions
continued from page 411
50-1, 50-2, 51
50N-1, 50N-2, 51N
50N-1, 50N-2, 51 N5)
Cold-load pickup (Dynamic setting changes:
50c-1, 50c-2, 50Nc-1, 50Nc-2, 51Nc
Inrush blocking
86 Lock out
Dir.earth-f. Motor Dir IEF V/f 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent, phase and ground R H4)
det. 47 Phase sequence
67Ns Directional sensitive ground fault detection4)
66/86 Motor start inhibit
27/59 Under-/overvoltage
81O/U Under-/overfrequency
Motor Dir V/f 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent, phase and ground H G
47 Phase sequence
Automatic Reclosing (79), Fault Locator

No 79, no Fault Locator 0
With 79 1
With Fault Locator 2
With 79 and Fault Locator 3
+Z X
with ATEX 100 approval (for the protection of explosion-protected motors
of the protection type increased safety “e”) 9 9

Notes:
4
) for isolated/compensated networks, only for sensitive ground current transformer if 7th digit = 2, 6.
5
412 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A.1.2 Ordering Information 7SJ62 V4.2 (releases to date until .../DD)
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Number of Binary Inputs and Outputs
Nominal Current
IN = 1 A 1
IN = 5 A 5
110 to 250 VDC, 115 VAC, Binary Input Threshold 88 VDC 5
Construction
Surface-mounting case for panel, 2 tier terminals top/ bottom B
Flush-mounting case for panel/ cubicle, plug-in terminals (2/3 pin connector) D
Flush-mounting case for panel/ cubicle, screw-type terminals (direct connection/ ring lugs) E
Region FR, 50/60Hz, IEC/ANSI, Language French (Language can be changed) D
Region DE, 50 Hz, IEC, Language German (Language cannot be changed) M
Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, Language English (Language cannot be changed) N
Region US, 60 Hz, ANSI, Language American English (Language cannot be changed) P
Region FR, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, Language French (Language cannot be changed) Q
Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, Language Spanish (Language canot be changed) R
System interfaces (Rear ports)
IEC Protocol, Optical 820 nm, ST-Connector 3
Profibus FMS Slave, Optical, Single Ring, ST-Connector1)) 51)
Profibus FMS Slave, Optical, Double Ring, ST-Connector1) 61)
DIGSI 4/Modem Interface (Rear Ports)
DIGSI 4, RS232 1
DIGSI 4, RS485 2
DIGSI 4, Optical 820 nm, ST-Connector 3
See Page 414
11
Modbus RS485) 0 D
DNP3.0, RS485 0 G
1) not available if “B“ is in position 9; if the optical interface is required, see the comment on page 422
2) not available if “B“ is in position 9.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 413

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix 7SJ62
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

_ _
DIGSI 4/Modem Interface (Device Rear)

DIGSI 4, RS232 1
DIGSI 4, RS485 2
with Fault recording 1
with Fault recording, with Average values, with Min/Max values 3
Functions
Basic Elements: Controls
(included in all versions) Time-overcurrent protection phase 50-1, 50-2, 51 and
Time-overcurrent protection ground 50N-1, 50N-2, 51N
Overload protection (with 2 time constants) 49
Negative sequence protection 46-1, 46-2, 46-TOC
Circuit breaker failure protection
Trip circuit monitoring
Inrush stabilization
Dynamic setting changes
Lock out 86
Basic Elements Plus: Under/Overvoltage 59-1, 27-1, 27-2 F E
Under/Over frequency 81
Basic Elements Plus: Directional overcurrent protection for phase and ground F C
67-1, 67-2, 67-TOC, 67-N-1, 67N-2, 67N-TOC
Basic Elements Plus: Directional overcurrent protection for phase and ground F G
67-1, 67-2, 67-TOC, 67-N-1, 67N-2, 67N-TOC
Under/Overvoltage 59-1, 27-1, 27-2
Basic Elements Plus: Directional overcurrent protection for phase and ground F D*)
67-1, 67-2, 67-TOC, 67-N-1, 67N-2, 67N-TOC
Ground fault direction recording
Displacement voltage
Basic Elements Plus: Sensitive ground fault protection 64, 50Ns, 67Ns-1, 67Ns-2 F B*)
Basic Elements Plus: Ground fault direction recording H F*)
Undercurrent monitoring
Motor starting time supervision
Motor start inhibit (66/68)
Basic Elements Plus: Directional overcurrent protection for phase and ground H H*)
67-1, 67-2, 67-TOC, 67-N-1, 67N-2, 67N-TOC
Basic Elements Plus: Directional overcurrent protection for phase and ground H G
67-1, 67-2, 67-TOC, 67-N-1, 67N-2, 67N-TOC
With 79 1
*)
Device is equipped with sensitive current transformer input in ground circuit
414 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A.1.3 Ordering Information 7SJ63 V4.4 (present release .../EE and higher)
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

_ _
Housing, Number of Binary Inputs and Outputs, Measuring Transducer Inputs

Housing 1/2 19”, 11 BI, 8 BO, 1 Live Status Contact 1
Housing 1/2 19”, 24 BI, 11 BO, 2 High-duty relays (4 Contacts), 1 Live Status Contact 2
Housing 1/2 19”, 20 BI, 11 BO, 2 MT, 2 High-duty relays (4 Contacts) 1 Live Status Contact 3
Housing 1/1 19”, 33 BI, 14 BO, 2 MT, 4 High-duty relays (8 Contacts), 1 Live Status Contact 6
Measuring Inputs (3 x U, 4 x I)
Iph = 1 A, Ie = 1 A (min. = 0.05 A); 15th position only with: A, C, E, G 1

110 to 250 VDC, 115/230 VAC, Binary Input Threshold 88 VDC 5
Construction
Surface-mounting case, plug-in terminals, detached operator panel A
Installation in a low-voltage compartment
Surface-mounting case for panel, 2 tier terminals top/bottom B
Surface-mounting case, screw-type terminals (ring lugs), detached operator panel C
Flush-mounting case for panel/cubicle, plug-in terminals (2/3 pin connector) D
Flush-mounting case for panel/cubicle, screw-type terminals (ring lugs) E
Surface-mounting case, screw-type terminals (ring lugs), without operator panel F
Surface-mounting case, plug-in terminals, without operator panel G

System Interface - Rear Port B
IEC-Protocol, RS232 1
IEC-Protocol, Optical, 820 nm, ST-Connector 3
Profibus FMS Slave, Optical, Single Ring, ST-Connector1) 51)
Profibus FMS Slave, Optical, Double Ring, ST-Connector 1) 61)
siehe Seite 416
11
Modbus RS485) 0 D
DNP3.0, RS485 0 G
DNP3.0, 820 nm, Optical, ST–Connector2) 0 H2))
1) not for “B“ at position 9; if the optical interface is required, see the comment on page 422.
2) not for “B“ at position 9.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 415

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix 7SJ63
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
IPROTEC 4 Multifunction Protection with Controls Order No. 7SJ63

_ _
DIGSI 4/Modem Interface (Device rear, Port C)

No DIGSI 4 Interface at the back 0
DIGSI 4, Modem, Electrical RS232 1
DIGSI 4, Modem, RTD-Box3), Electrical RS458 2
DIGSI 4, Modem, RTD-Box3), Optical 820 nm, ST-Connector 3
Slave pointer, Average values, Min/Max values, Fault recording 3
Functions
Basic Elements Controls
Included in all versions 50/51 Time-overcurrent protection phase 50-1, 50-2, 51 F A
50N/51N Time-overcurrent protection ground 50N-1, 50N-2, 51N
50N-1, 50N-2, 51 N5)
49 Overload protection (with 2 time constants) 49
Cold-load pickup (Dynamic setting changes)50c-1, 50c-2, 50Nc-1, 50Nc-2, 51Nc
86 Lock out
V/f 27/59 Over/Undervoltage 59-1, 59-2, 27-1, 27-2 F E
81O/U Over/Under frequency
Dir 67/67N Directional overcurrent time protection for phase and ground F C
47 Phase sequence
Dir V/f 67/67N Directional overcurrent time protection for phase and ground F G
47 Phase sequence
27/59 Over/Undervoltage 59-1, 59-2, 27-1, 27-2
Dir IEF 67/67N Directional overcurrent time protection for phase and ground P C
47 Phase sequence
Dir.earth.-f. Dir 67/67N Directional overcurrent time protection for phase and ground F D4)
det. 67Ns Directional sensitive ground fault detection4)
64 Displacement Voltage
Dir.earth.-f. Dir IEF 67/67N Directional overcurrent time protection for phase and ground P D4)
Dir.earth.-f. 67Ns Directional sensitive ground fault detection4) F B4)
det. 64 Displacement Voltage
Dir.earth.-f. Motor V/f 67Ns Directional sensitive ground fault detection4) H F4 )
Dir.earth.-f. Motor V/f 67/67N Directional overcurrent time protection for phase and ground H H4)
Motor 48 Motor starting time supervision
see page 417

3
) RTD-Box 7XV5662–*AD10 (see also comment on page 422 and Section A.1.6 Accessories).
4) for isolated/compensated networks, only for sensitive ground current transformer if 7th digit = 2, 6.
5
416 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Functions
Included in all versions 50/51 Time-overcurrent protection phase 50-1, 50-2, 51
50N/51N Time-overcurrent protection ground 50N-1, 50N-2, 51N
50N-1, 50N-2, 51 N5)
49 Overload protection (with 2 time constants) 49
Cold-load pickup (Dynamic setting changes):
50c-1, 50c-2, 50Nc-1, 50Nc-2, 51Nc
86 Lock out
Dir.earth-f. Dir 67/67N Directional overcurrent time protection for phase and ground R H4)
det. 67Ns Directional sensitive ground fault detection4)
Motor 48 Motor starting time supervision

With 79 1
Fault Locator 1) 2
With 79 and Fault Locator 1) 3
+Z X
with ATEX 100 approval (for the protection of explosion-protected motors

of the protection type increased safety “e”) 9 9

Notes:
4
) for isolated/compensated networks, only for sensitive ground current transformer if the 7th digit = 2, 6.
5
) only for non-sensitive ground current transformer if the 7th digit = 1, 5, 7.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 417

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix 7SJ63
A.1.4 Ordering Information 7SJ63 V4.2 (releases to date until .../DD)
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Housing, Number of Binary Inputs and Outputs, Measuring Transducer Inputs

Housing 1/2 19”, 11 BI, 8 BO, 1 Live Status Contact 1
Housing 1/2 19”, 20 BI, 11 BO, 2 MT, 2 High-duty relays (4 Contacts) 1 Live Status Contact 3
Housing 1/1 19”, 33 BI, 14 BO, 2 MT, 4 High-duty relays (8 Contacts), 1 Live Status Contact 6
Nominal Current
IN = 1 A 1
IN = 5 A 5
Construction
Region-Specific Default/Language Settings and Function Versions
Region US, 60 Hz, ANSI, Language Americal English (Language can be changed) C
Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, Language Spanish (Language can be changed E
Region DE, 50 Hz, IEC, Language German (Language cannot be changed) M
Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, Language English (Language cannot be changed) N
Region US, 60 Hz, ANSI, Language Americal English (Language cannot be changed) P
Region FR, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, Language French (Language cannot be changed) Q
Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, Language Spanish (Language cannot be changed) R
System Interface - Rear Ports
Profibus FMS Slave, Optical, Single Ring, ST-Connector1) 51)
See page 419
11
System Interfaces (device rear)
Modbus RS485) 0 D
DNP3.0, RS485 0 G
1) not for “B“ at position 9; if the optical interface is required, see the comment on page 422
2) cannot be delivered in connection with 9th digit “B“.
418 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

_ _
DIGSI 4/Modem Interface (Device rear)

No DIGSI 4 Interface at the back 0
DIGSI 4, Electrical RS232 1
DIGSI 4, Electrical RS458 2
Functions

Included in all versions 50/51 Time-overcurrent protection phase 50-1, 50-2, 51 and F A
50N/51N Time-overcurrent protection ground 50N-1, 50N-2, 51N,
49 Overload protection (with 2 time constants),
46 Negative sequence protection 46-1, 46-2, 46-TOC,
50BF Circuit breaker failure protection,
74 Trip circuit monitoring
Cold-load pickup (Dynamic setting changes) 50c-1, 50c-2, 50Nc-1, 50Nc-2, 51Nc
86 Lockout
V/f Over/Undervoltage 59-1, 27-1, 27-2 F E

Over/Under frequency 81
Dir 67/67N Directional overcurrent time protection for phase and ground F C
67-1,67-2,67-TOC, 67N-1, 67N-2, 67N-TOC
Dir V/f 67/67N Directional overcurrent time protection for phase and ground F G
67-1,67-2,67-TOC, 67N-1, 67N-2, 67N-TOC
Over/Under frequency 81
Over/Undervoltage 59-1, 27-1, 27-2
Dir.earth-f. Dir 67/67N Directional overcurrent time protection for phase and ground F D*)
det. 67-1,67-2,67-TOC, 67N-1, 67N-2, 67N-TOC
67Ns Directional sensitive ground fault protection 64, 50Ns, 67Ns-1, 67Ns-2
Dir.earth-f. 67Ns Directional sensitive ground fault protection 64, 50Ns, 67Ns-1, 67Ns-2 F B*)
Dir.earth-f. Motor V/f 67Ns Directional sensitive ground fault protection 64, 50Ns, 67Ns-1, 67Ns-2 H F*)
Dir.earth-f. Motor Dir V/f 67/67N Directional overcurrent time protection for phase and ground H H*)
det. 67-1,67-2,67-TOC, 67N-1, 67N-2, 67N-TOC
67Ns Directional sensitive ground fault protection 64, 50Ns, 67Ns-1, 67Ns-2
Motor Dir V/f 67/67N Directional overcurrent time protection for phase and ground H G
67-1,67-2,67-TOC, 67N-1, 67N-2, 67N-TOC
Motor 48 Motor starting time supervision H A


With 79 1
Fault Locator 2
*) Device is equipped with sensitive current transformer input in ground circuit.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 419

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix 7SJ64
A.1.5 Ordering Information 7SJ64 V4.4
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Housing, Number of Binary Inputs and Outputs

Housing 1/3 19”, 7 BI, 5 BO, 1 Live Status Contact; 9th position only with: B, D, E 0
Housing 1/2 19”, 15 BI, 13 BO, 1 Lifekontakt 1
Housing 1/1 19”, 33 BI, 11BO, 4 High-duty relays (8 Contacts), 1 Live Status Contact 5
Measuring Inputs (4 x U, 4 x I)
Iph = 1 A, Ie = sensitive (min. = 0,001 A); 15th position only with: B, D, F, H 2
Iph = 5 A, Ie = 5 A (min. = 0,25 A); 15th position only with: A, C, E, G 5
Iph = 5 A, Ie = sensitive (min. = 0,001 A); 15th position only with: B, D, F, H 6
Iph = 5 A, Ie = 1 A (min. = 0,05 A); 15th position only with: A, C, E, G 7
24 to 48 VDC, Binary Input Threshold 19 V DC 2
60 to 125 VDC, Binary Input Threshold 19 V DC 4
110 to 250 VDC, 115 VAC, Binary Input Threshold 88 V DC 5
Construction
Surface-mounting case, screw-type terminals (ring lugs), without operator panel F
Surface-mounting case, plug-in terminals, without operator panel G
System Interface - Rear Port B
Profibus FMS Slave, Optical, Single Ring, ST-Connector 1) 51)
see Page 421 bis 422
11
+ L 0
Additional Information L
Profibus DP Slave, RS485 A
Profibus DP Slave, 820 nm, Optical Double Ring, ST–Connector1) B1)
Modbus RS485) D
Modbus, 820 nm, Optical, ST–Connector2) E2)
DNP3.0, RS485 G
DNP3.0, 820 nm, Optical, ST–Connector2) H2)
1) cannot be delivered in connection with 9th digit “B“; if the optical interface is required, see the comment on page 422
2) cannot be delivered in connection with 9th digit “B“
420 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
_ _
DIGSI 4/Modem Interface (Port C)
DIGSI 4/Modem, electrical RS232 1
DIGSI 4/Modem, RTD-Box3), electrical RS485 2
For further interface options see Additional Information M 9
+ M
Additional Information M (Port C and Port D)
Port C: not installed 0
Port C: DIGSI 4/Modem, electrical RS232 1
Port C: DIGSI 4/Modem, RTD-Box3), electrical RS485 2
Port D: RTD-Box3), Optical 820 nm, ST–Connector A
Port D: RTD-Box3), electrical RS485 F
Functions
Basic Elements: Control F A
50-1, 50-2, 51
50N-1, 50N-2, 51N
50N-1, 50N-2, 51 N5)
50c-1, 50c-2, 50Nc-1, 50Nc-2, 51Nc
Inrush blocking
86 Lock out
V/f 27/59 Under/Overvoltage 59-1,59-2, 27-1, 27-2 F E

Dir 67/67N Directional overcurrent protection for phase and ground F C
Dir V/f 67/67N Directional overcurrent protection for phase and ground F G
Dir IEF 67/67N Directional overcurrent protection for phase and ground P C
Dir.earth-f. Dir 67/67N Directional overcurrent protection for phase and ground F D4)
Dir.earth-f. Dir IEF 67/67N Directional overcurrent protection for phase and ground P D4)
67Ns Directional sensitive ground fault direction recording4)
Dir.earth-f. 67Ns Directional sensitive ground fault protection4) F B 4)
Dir.earth-f. Motor V/f 67Ns Directional sensitive ground fault protection4) H F4 )

see page 422

3
) RTD-Box 7XV5662–*AD10 (see also comment on page 422 and Section A.1.6 Accessories).
4) for isolated/compensated networks, only for sensitive ground current transformer if 7th digit = 2, 6.
5
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 421

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix 7SJ64
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
_ _
Functions
Designation ANSI no.Description
(included in all versions) 50/51Time-overcurrent protection phase
50-1, 50-2, 51
50N/51NTime-overcurrent protection ground
50N-1, 50N-2, 51N
50N/51NTime-overcurrent5protection ground via insensitive IEE-function:
50N-1, 50N-2, 51N )
50c-1, 50c-2, 50Nc-1, 50Nc-2, 51Nc
Inrush blocking
86 Lock out
Dir.earth-f. Dir Motor V/f 67/67N Directional overcurrent protection for phase and ground H H4)
Dir.earth-f. Motor Dir IEF V/f 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent, phase and ground R H4)
Automatic Reclosing (79), Fault Locator, Synchronization

Without 0
With 79 1
With Synchronization 4
With Synchronization, 79 and Fault Locator 7
Notes:
4
) for isolated/compensated networks, only for sensitive ground current transformer if 7th digit = 2, 6.
5)only for non-sensitive ground current transformer if 7th digit = 1, 5, 7.
Comment (applies for all device versions 7SJ62/63/64)

1)
if the optical interface is required you must order the following: 11th digit = 4 (RS485)
and in addition:
for single ring: SIEMENS OLM 6GK1502–3AB10
for double ring: SIEMENS OLM 6GK1502–4AB10
The converter requires an operating voltage of 24 V DC. If the available operating voltage is
> 24 V DC the additional power supply 7XV5810–0BA00 is required.
3) if you want to run the RTD-Box at an optical interface, you need also the
RS485–FO–converter 7XV5650–0*A00 (see Accessories at A.1.6).
422 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A.1.6 Accessories
Interface Exchange interface modules

Modules
Name Order No.
RS232 C53207–A351–D641–1
RS485 C53207–A351–D642–1
Optical 820 nm C53207–A351–D643–1
Profibus FMS RS485 C53207–A351–D603–1
Profibus FMS double ring C53207–A351–D606–1
Profibus FMS single ring C53207–A351–D609–1
Profibus DP RS485 C53207–A351–D611–1
Profibus DP double ring C53207–A351–D613–1
Modbus RS485 C53207–A351–D621–1
Modbus 820 nm C53207–A351–D623–1
DNP 3.0 RS485 C53207–A351–D631–1
DNP 3.0 820 nm C53207–A351–D633–1
RTD-Box For up to 6 temperature measuring points (at most 2 devices can be connected to
7SJ62/63/64)
Name Order No.
RTD-Box, UN = 24 to 60 V AC/DC 7XV5662–2AD10–0000
RTD-Box, UN = 90 to 240 V AC/DC 7XV5662–5AD10–0000
RS485/Fibre Optic
Converter
RS485/Fibre Optic Converter Order No.
820 nm; FC–Connector 7XV5650–0AA00–
820 nm; ST–Connector 7XV5650–0BA00–
Terminal Block
Covering Caps
Covering cap for terminal block type Order No.
18-terminal voltage, 12-terminal current block C73334-A1-C31-1
12-terminal voltage, 8-terminal current block C73334-A1-C32-1
Short Circuit Links
Short circuit links for terminal type Order No.

Voltage terminal, 18-terminal, or 12-terminal C73334-A1-C34-1
Current terminal,12-terminal, or 8-terminal C73334-A1-C33-1
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 423

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix
Female Plugs
Connector Type Order No.

2-pin C73334-A1-C35-1
3-pin C73334-A1-C36-1
Mounting Rail for

19"-Racks
Name Order No.
Angle Strip (Mounting Rail) C73165-A63-C200-3
Battery
Lithium-Battery 3 V/1 Ah, Type CR 1/2 AA Order No

VARTA 6127 101 501
Interface Cable An interface cable is necessary for communication between the SIPROTEC device
and a PC. Requirements for the computer are Windows 95 or Windows NT4 and the
operating software DIGSI® 4.
Interface cable between PC or SIPROTEC device Order No.

Cable with 9-pin male/female connections 7XV5100-4
Operating Software Software for setting and operating SIPROTEC® 4 devices

DIGSI® 4
Operating Software DIGSI® 4 Order No.
DIGSI® 4, basic version with license for 10 7XS5400-0AA00

computers
DIGSI® 4, complete version with all option packages 7XS5402-0AA0
Graphical Analysis Software for graphical visualization, analysis, and evaluation of fault data. Option
Program SIGRA package of the complete version of DIGSI® 4
Graphical analysis program SIGRA® Order No.

Full version with license for 10 PCs 7XS5410-0AA0
Display Editor Software for creating basic and power system control pictures. Option package
of the complete version of DIGSI® 4
Display Editor 4 Order No.

424 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
Graphic Tools Graphical Software to aid in the setting of characteristic curves and provide zone dia-
grams for overcurrent and distance protective devices. Option package of the com-
plete version of DIGSI® 4.
Graphic Tools 4 Order No.
DIGSI REMOTE 4 Software for remotely operating protective devices via a modem (and possibly a star
connector) using DIGSI® 4. (Option package of the complete version of DIGSI® 4.
DIGSI REMOTE 4 Order No.

SIMATIC CFC 4 Graphical software for configuration of control interlocking conditions or creating addi-
tional logic functions in SIPROTEC 4 devices. Option package for the complete ver-
sion of DIGSI® 4.
SIMATIC CFC 4 Order No.

7SJ62/63/64 Manual 425

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix 7SJ62
A.2 Elementary Diagrams
A.2.1 Elementary Diagrams for 7SJ62
A.2.1.1 Housing for panel flush mounting or cubicle installation
7SJ621∗−∗D/E
Jumper: 1–2 NO
Q1 Ia F6 2–3 NC
BO1
Q2 F7 F6
BO1
Q3 Ib F8 F7
BO2 F8
Q4 F9 BO2
F9
Q5 Ic F10
BO3 beginning with
Q6 F11 release .../EE
Q7 I4 F12
BO4
Q8 F13
R14
Va R1
R16 BO5
R2
Vb BO6
R15 R3
R17 R4
Vc/VG BO7
R18 R6
BO8
F14 R5
BI1
F15 BI2 F3
Live Status
F16 F4
Contact
F17 F5
BI3
F18 + F1
Power (~)
R9 Supply F2
BI4
R10
Assignment of Pins of Interfaces, refer
BI5
to Table 3-35 and 3-36 in Subsection
Rear SCADA
R8 BI8 B
Port
R7
Rear Service
Port C
R11 BI6
Time
R12 BI7 Synchronization A
R13
Front PC Port
3.2.1
Ground at Back Interference suppression

capacitors at the
Wall of Housing relay contacts,
Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V
Figure A-1 Connection Diagram For 7SJ621∗–∗D/E (Panel Flush Mounted or Cubicle Mounted)
426 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
7SJ62 A.2 Elementary Diagrams
7SJ622∗−∗D/E
Jumper: 1–2 NO
2–3 NC
Q1 Ia F6
BO1 BO1 F6
Q2 F7 F7
Q3 Ib F8 BO2 F8
BO2 F9
Q4 F9
Q5 Ic F10 beginning with
BO3
Q6 F11 release .../EE
Q7 I4 F12
BO4
Q8 F13
R14
Va R1
R16 BO5
R3
Vb
R15 R4
BO7
R17 R5
Vc/VG
R18
F14 BI1
F15 BI2 F3
Live Status
F16 F4
Contact
F17 F5
BI3
F18 + F1
Power (~)
R9 Supply F2
BI4
R10
Assignment of Pins of Interfaces, refer
BI5 to Table 3-35 and 3-36 in Subsection
Rear SCADA
R11 BI6 Port B
R12 BI7
R8 BI8 Rear Service
Port C
R2 BI9
R6 BI10
Time
R7 BI11 Synchronization A
R13
Front PC Port
3.2.1

capacitors at the
Figure A-2 Connection Diagram For 7SJ622∗–∗D/E (Panel Flush Mounted or Cubicle Mounted)
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 427

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix 7SJ62
A.2.1.2 Panel Surface Mounting
7SJ621∗−∗B
Jumper: 1–2 NO
15 Ia 26 2–3 NC
BO1
30 25 BO1 F6
14 F7
Ib 9
BO2 BO2 F8
29 24 F9
13 Ic 35
BO3 beginning with
28 50 release .../EE
12 I4 34
BO4
27 49
45
Va 33
BO5
60 48
Vb BO6
44 32
43 31
Vc/VG BO7
59 46
BO8
58 47
BI1
42 BI2 52
57 Live Status 36
Contact 51
41 BI3
56 + 10 L+ (V+)
Power (~)
40 BI4 Supply 11 L– (V–)
55 BI5
39 BI8
54
38 BI6 Assignment of Pins

53 BI7 Front PC Port of Interface, refer to
37 Table 3-35 in Sub-
section 3.2.1
Ground at Side Interference suppression

capacitors at the
Figure A-3 Connection Diagram For 7SJ621∗–∗B (Panel Surface Mounted)
The connections for additional serial interfaces are taken from Figures A-5 or A-6.
428 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
7SJ622∗−∗B
Jumper: 1–2 NO
15 Ia 26 2–3 NC
BO1
30 25 BO1 F6
14 F7
Ib 9
BO2 F8
29 24 BO2
F9
13 Ic 34
BO3 beginning with
28 49 release .../EE
12 I4 33
BO4
27 48
45 Va 32
60 BO5
47
44 Vb
31
BO7
43 46
Vc/VG
59
58 BI1
42 BI2 51
Live Status
57 35
Contact
41 50
BI3
56 + 10 L+ (V+)
Power (~)
40 BI4 Supply 11 L– (V–)
55 BI5
39 BI6
54 BI7
38 BI8
53 BI9
Table 3-35 in Sub-
36 section 3.2.1
Ground at Side Interference suppression

Wall of Housing capacitors at the
relay contacts,
Figure A-4 Connection Diagram For 7SJ622∗–∗B (Panel Surface Mounted)
The connections for additional serial interfaces are taken from Figures A-5 or A-6.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 429

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix 7SJ62
7SJ62∗∗−∗B
(up to development
state ... /CC)
Channel B
Profibus
RS232 RS485
4 CTS B
Optical
Rear SCADA 5 RTS –
Port or
6 GND GND
Electrical
7 TxD A
8 RxD –
Channel C
RS232 RS485
19 CTS B
Optical
Rear Service 20 RTS –
Port or
21 GND GND
Electrical
22 TxD A
23 RxD –
17 IN 12 V
2 COMMON
Time
Synchronization 18 IN 5 V
3 IN 24 V
1 Shield
Figure A-5 Connection Diagram For 7SJ62∗∗–∗B up to release ... /CC (Panel Surface Mounted)
430 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
7SJ621/2∗−∗B
(beginning with
release
.../DD)
Rear SCADA Optical

Port or Channel B
Electrical elektrical RS232/RS485
Assignment of Pins
of Interface, refer to
Table 3-35 in Sub-
section 3.2.1
Rear Optical
Service Port or Channel C
17 IN 12 V
2 COMMON
Time
3 IN 24 V
1 Shield
Figure A-6 Connection Diagram For 7SJ621/2∗–∗B beginning with release .. /DD
(Panel Surface Mounted)
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 431

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix 7SJ63
7SJ631∗–∗D/E
Q1 F6
IA BO1
Q2 F8
BO2
Q3 F5
IB
Q4 F9
BO3
Q5 F7
IC
Q6
Q7 I4
Q8
R14
Va
R16
Vb
R15
R17
Vc/VG
R18
F10 BI1 R1
F11 BO11
BI2 R2
F12 BO12
BI3 R3
F13 BO13
BI4 R4
F15 BI5 R5
F16 BI6 BO14
R6
F14
R7
BO15 R8
F17 BI7
F18 1)
Live status F3 Jumper: 1–2 NO
contact F4 2–3 NC
Jumper1) (NO, NC)
+
Power F1
(~ )
supply - F2
and 3-36 in Subsection 3.2.1
Assignment of Pins of Inter-
Rear SCADA
B
faces, refer to Table 3-35
Port
Rear Service
Port C
Time
Synchronization A
R9 BI21
R10 BI22 Front PC Port
R11 BI23
R12 BI24
R13
Interference suppression
capacitors at the
Ground at Back
relay contacts,
Wall of Housing
Figure A-7 General diagram 7SJ631∗–∗D/E (panel flush mounting or cubicle installation)
432 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
7SJ632∗–∗D/E
Q1 F6
IA BO1
Q2 F8
BO2
Q3 F5
IB
Q4 F9
BO3
Q5 F7
IC
Q6 J1 (–)
Q7 J2 (+)
Q8
I4 *) J3
BO4
R14
Va J4
R16 BO5
Vb
R15 K18
BO6
R17
Vc/VG K17
R18 BO7
F10 BI1 J7
F11 BI2 BO8 J9
F12 BI3 BO9
J8
F13 BI4 J11
F15 BI5 BO10
J12
F16 BI6
F14 R1
BO11
R2
F17 BO12
BI7 BO13 R3
F18 R4
K1 BI8 R5
BO14
K2 R6
BI9
K3 R7
BI10 BO15
K4 BI11 R8
K6 BI12 1)
K7 Live status F3 Jumper: 1–2 NO
BI13 contact 1
K8 BI14
F4 2–3 NC
Jumper ) (NO, NC)
K9 BI15 +
K5 Power F1
(~ )
K10 supply - F2
BI16
K11 BI17
K12 BI18
K13 Rear SCADA

BI19 Port B
K14
K15 BI20 Rear Service
K16 Port/RTD-Box C
R9 BI21
R10 Time
BI22 Synchronization A
R11 BI23
R12 BI24
R13 Front PC Port

relay contacts,
*)
High-duty relays
capacitors
MP, 22 nF, 250 V
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 433

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix 7SJ63
7SJ633∗–∗D/E
Q1 F6
IA BO1
Q2 F8
BO2
Q3 F5
IB
Q4 F9
BO3
Q5 F7
IC
Q6 J1 (–)
Q7 J2 (+)
I4 *) J3
Q8 BO4
R14
Va J4
R16 BO5
Vb
R15 K18
BO6
R17 Vc/VG K17
R18 BO7
F10 BI1 J7
F11 BO8 J9
BI2
F12 BO9
BI3 J8
F13 BI4 J11
F15 BI5 BO10
J12
F16 BI6
F14 R1
BO11
R2
BO12
F17 BI7 R3
BO13
F18 R4
K1 R5
BI8 BO14
K2 R6
BI9
K3 R7
BI10 BO15
K4 R8
BI11
K6 1)
BI12 Live status F3 Jumper: 1–2 NO
K7 BI13 contact 1 F4 2–3 NC
K8 BI14 Jumper ) (NO, NC)
K9 BI15 +
K5 Power (~ )
F1
K10
supply - F2
BI16
K11 BI17
K12 BI18 Rear SCADA

K13 BI19 Port B

K14
Port C
K16
(+) R9
Transducer 1 Time
(–) R10 Synchronization A
(+) R11
Transducer 2
(–) R12 Front PC Port

relay contacts,
*)
High-duty relays
capacitors
MP, 22 nF, 250 V
434 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
7SJ635∗–∗D/E
Q1 IA F6
BO1
Q2 F8
BO2
Q3 IB F5
Q4 F9
BO3
Q5 IC F7
Q6 J1 (–)
Q7 J2 (+)
Q8
I4 *) J3
BO4
R14 )
Va J4 *High-duty relays
R16 BO5
Vb Interference suppression
R15 K18 capacitors
BO6
R17 MP, 22 nF, 250 V
Vc/VG K17
R18 BO7
F10 BI1 J7
F11 BI2 BO8 J9
F12 BI3 BO9
J8
F13 BI4
F15 J11
BI5 BO10
F16 J12
BI6
F14 R1
BO11
R2
F17 BO12
BI7 R3
F18 BO13
R4
K1 BI8 R5
BO14
K2 BI9 R6
K3 BI10 R7
BO15 R8
K4 BI11
K6 BI12 L1 (–)
K7 L2 (+)
K8
BI13 *) L3
BI14 BO16
K9 BI15
K5 L4
BO17
K10 BI16 M18
K11 BO18
BI17
K12 BI18 M17
K13 BO19
BI19
K14 L7
BO20 L9
K15 BI20 BO21
K16 L8
L11
R9 BO22
BI21 L12
R10 BI22 1
R11 BI23 Live status F3 ) Jumper: 1–2 NO
R12 BI24 contact 1 F4 2–3 NC
R13 Jumper ) (NO, NC)
M1 +
BI25 Power (~ )
F1
M2 BI26 supply -
M3 F2
BI27
M4 BI28
of Interfaces, refer to
Table 3-35 and 3-36
M6 Rear SCADA
Assignment of Pins
in Subsection 3.2.1
BI29 B
M7 Port
BI30
M8 BI31
M9 BI32 Rear Service
Port C
M5
M10 BI33 Time
M11 BI34 Synchronization A
M12 BI35
M13 BI36 Front PC Port
M14
M15 BI37 capacitors at the
M16 Ground at Back relay contacts,
Wall of Housing Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 435

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix 7SJ63
7SJ636∗–∗D/E
Q1 IA F6
BO1
Q2 F8
BO2
Q3 IB F5
Q4 F9
BO3
Q5 IC F7
Q6 J1 (–)
Q7 J2 (+)
Q8
I4 *) J3
BO4
R14
Va J4 *)
BO5 High-duty relays
R16
R15 K18 capacitors
BO6
R17 MP, 22 nF, 250 V
Vc/VG K17
R18 BO7
F10 BI1 J7
F11 BI2 BO8 J9
F12 BI3 BO9
J8
F13 BI4
F15 J11
BI5 BO10
F16 J12
BI6
F14 R1
BO11
R2
F17 BO12
BI7 BO13
R3
F18 R4
K1 BI8 R5
BO14
K2 BI9 R6
K3 BI10 R7
BO15
K4 BI11 R8
K6 BI12 L1 (–)
K7 L2 (+)
K8
BI13 *) L3
BI14 BO16
K9 BI15
K5 L4
BO17
K10 BI16 M18
K11 BO18
BI17
K12 BI18 M17
K13 BO19
BI19
K14 L7
BO20 L9
K15 BI20 BO21
K16 L8
L11
(+) R9 BO22
L12
Transducer 1
(–) R10
1)
(+) R11 Live status F3 Jumper: 1–2 NO
Transducer 2 contact 1 F4
(–) R12
Jumper ) (NO, NC)
2–3 NC
M1 BI25 +
F1
M2 Power (~ )
BI26 supply -
M3 F2
BI27
M4 BI28
Table 3-35 and 3-36
M6 Rear SCADA
Assignment of Pins
BI29
in Subsection 3.2.1
M7 Port B
BI30
M8 BI31
M5 Port C
M10 BI33
M11 Time
BI34 A
M12 Synchronization
BI35
M13 BI36
M14 Front PC Port
M15 BI37 capacitors at the
M16 Ground at Back relay contacts,
436 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A.2.2.2 Housing for panel surface mounting
7SJ631∗–∗B
25 76
IA BO1
50 77
BO2
24 51
IB
49 53
BO3
23 52
IC
48
22
I4
47
21 Va
20
Vb
46
19
Vc/VG
44
55 BI1
80 BI2
56 BI3
81 BI4
82 BI5
58 BI6
57 100
BO11
75
83 BO12
BI7 99
59 BO13
74
98
BO14
73
97
BO15 72
1)
Live status 54 Jumper: 1–2 NO
contact 1 79 2–3 NC
Jumper ) (NO, NC)
+
Power 15 L+ (V+)
(~ )
supply - 16 L– (V–)
Assignment of Pins
Front PC Port of Interface, refer to
96 BI21 Table 3-35 in Sub-
71 BI22 section 3.2.1
95 BI23
70 BI24
94
capacitors at the
Ground at Side relay contacts,
Figure A-12 General diagram 7SJ631∗–∗B (panel surface mounting)
For connections of the further interfaces, see figures A-15 or A-16.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 437

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix 7SJ63
7SJ632∗–∗B
25 76
IA BO1
50 77
BO2
24 51
IB
49 53
BO3
23 52
IC
48 11 (–)
22 36 (+)
47
I4 *) 10
BO4
21
Va 35
20 BO5
Vb
46 12
BO6
19
Vc/VG 37
44 BO7
55 BI1 14
80 BI2 BO8 39
56 BI3 BO9 40
81 BI4 13
82 BI5 BO10 38
58 BI6
57 100
BO11
75
83 BO12
BI7 99
59 BO13
74
84 BI8 98
BO14
60 73
BI9
85 97
BI10 BO15
61 BI11 72
62 BI12 1)
87 BI13 Live status 54 Jumper: 1–2 NO
63 contact 1 79 2–3 NC
BI14 Jumper ) (NO, NC)
88 BI15
86 +
15 L+ (V+)
Power (~ )
64 BI16 supply - 16 L– (V–)
89 BI17
65 BI18
90 BI19
66 Assignment of Pins
Front PC Port of Interface, refer to
91 BI20
96
section 3.2.1
BI21
71 BI22
95 BI23
70 Interference suppression
BI24 capacitors at the
94
relay contacts,
Ground at Side
Wall of Housing *)
High-duty relays
capacitors
MP, 22 nF, 250 V
For connections of the further interfaces see figures or A-16 .
438 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
7SJ633∗–∗B
25 76
IA BO1
50 77
BO2
24 51
IB
49 53
BO3
23 52
IC
48 11 (–)
22 36 (+)
47
I4 *) 10
BO4
21
Va 35
20 BO5
Vb
46 12
BO6
19 Vc/VG 37
44 BO7
55 BI1 14
80 BI2 BO8 39
56 BI3 BO9 40
81 BI4 13
82 BI5 BO10 38
58 BI6
57 100
BO11
75
83 BO12
BI7 99
59 BO13
74
84 BI8 98
BO14
60 73
BI9
85 97
BI10 BO15
61 BI11 72
62 BI12 1)
87 BI13 Live status 54 Jumper: 1–2 NO
63 contact 1 79 2–3 NC
88 BI15
86 +
Power (~ )
15 L+ (V+)
64 BI16 -
supply 16 L– (V–)
89 BI17
65 BI18
90 BI19
(+) 96 section 3.2.1
(–) 71 Transducer 1
(+) 95
(–) 70 Transducer 2
capacitors at the
relay contacts,
Ground at Side Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V
Wall of Housing
*)
High-duty relays
capacitors
MP, 22 nF, 250 V
For connections of the further interfaces see figures A-15 or A-16.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 439

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix 7SJ63
7SJ631/2/3∗–∗B
(up to release ... /DD)
Channel B
Profibus
RS232 RS485
4 CTS B
Optical 5 RTS –
Rear SCADA
Port or 6 GND GND
Electrical 7 TxD A
8 RxD –
9 Shield
Channel C
RS232 RS485
29 CTS B
Optical 30 RTS –
Rear Service
Port or 31 GND GND
Electrical 32 TxD A
33 RxD –
34 Shield
27 IN 12 V
2 COMMON
Time
3 IN 24 V
1 Shield
Figure A-15 General diagram 7SJ631/2/3∗–∗B up to release .../DD (panel surface mounting)
440 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
7SJ631/2/3∗−∗B
(beginning with
release ... /EE)
Rear SCADA Optical

Port or Channel B
Assignment of Pins
Table 3-35 in Sub-
section 3.2.1
Rear Optical
27 IN 12 V
2 COMMON
Time
3 IN 24 V
1 Shield
Figure A-16 Connection Diagram For 7SJ631/2/3∗–∗B beginning with release /EE
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 441

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix 7SJ63
7SJ635∗–∗B
50 IA 151
BO1
100 152
BO2
49 IB 101
99 103
BO3
48 IC 102
98 19 (–)
47 69 (+)
97
I4 *) 18
BO4
46
Va 68 *)
45 BO5 High-duty relays
96 20 capacitors
BO6
44 Vc/VG MP, 22 nF, 250 V
94 70
BO7
105 BI1 23
155 BI2 BO8 73
106 BI3 BO9
74
156 BI4
157 22
BI5 BO10
108 72
BI6
107 200
BO11
150
158 BO12
BI7 199
109 BO13
149
169 BI8 198
BO14
120 BI9 148
170 BI10 197
BO15
121 BI11 147
122 BI12 27 (–)
172 77 (+)
123
BI13 *) 26
BI14 BO16
173 BI15
171 76
BO17
124 BI16 28
174 BO18
BI17
125 BI18 78
175 BO19
BI19
126 31
BO20 81
176 BI20 BO21
127 30
29
196 BO22
BI21 79
146 BI22 1)
195 Live status 104 Jumper: 1–2 NO
BI23
145 contact 1 154 2–3 NC
194
177 +
BI25 Power (~ )
37 L+ (V+)
128 BI26 supply -
178 38 L– (V–)
BI27
129 BI28
BI29
180 Front PC Port of Interface, refer to
BI30
131 BI31 Table 3-35 in Sub-
181 BI32 section 3.2.1
179
132 BI33 Interference suppression
182 BI34 capacitors at the
133 BI35 relay contacts,
183 BI36 Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V
134
Ground at Side
184 BI37 Wall of Housing
135
442 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
7SJ636∗–∗B
50 IA 151
BO1
100 152
BO2
49 IB 101
99 103
BO3
48 102
IC
98 19 (–)
47 69 (+)
97
I4 *) 18
BO4
46 *)
Va 68 High-duty relays
45 BO5 Interference suppression
Vb
96 20 capacitors
BO6 MP, 22 nF, 250 V
44 Vc/VG
94 70
BO7
105 BI1 23
155 BI2 BO8 73
106 BI3 BO9
74
156 BI4
157 22
BI5 BO10
108 72
BI6
107 200
BO11
150
158 BO12
BI7 199
109 BO13
149
169 BI8 198
BO14
120 BI9 148
170 BI10 197
BO15
121 BI11 147
122 BI12 27 (–)
172 77 (+)
123
BI13 *) 26
BI14 BO16
173 BI15
171 76
BO17
124 BI16 28
174 BO18
BI17
125 BI18 78
175 BO19
BI19
126 31
BO20
81
176 BI20 BO21
127 30
29
BO22
(+) 196 79
Transducer 1
(–) 146 1)
(+) 195 contact 1 154
(–) 145
Transducer 2 2–3 NC
Jumper ) (NO, NC)
177 BI25 +
Power (~ )
37 L+ (V+)
128 BI26 supply - 38 L– (V–)
178 BI27
129 BI28
180 BI30 of Interface, refer to
131 Front PC Port
BI31 Table 3-35 in Sub-
181 BI32
179 section 3.2.1
132 BI33
182 BI34 Interference suppression
133 BI35 capacitors at the
183 BI36 relay contacts,
134 Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V
Ground at Side
184 BI37 Wall of Housing
135
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 443

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix 7SJ63
7SJ635/6∗–∗B
(up to release ... /DD)
Channel B
Profibus
RS232 RS485
4 CTS B
Optical 5 RTS –
Rear SCADA
Port or 6 GND GND
Electrical 7 TxD A
8 RxD –
9 Shield
Channel C
RS232 RS485
54 CTS B
Optical 55 RTS –
Rear Service
Port or 56 GND GND
Electrical 57 TxD A
58 RxD –
59 Shield
52 IN 12 V
2 COMMON
Time
3 IN 24 V
1 Shield
Figure A-19 General diagram 7SJ635/6∗–∗B up to release .../DD (panel surface mounting)
444 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
7SJ635/6∗−∗B
(beginning with
release .../EE)
Rear SCADA Optical

Port or Channel B
Assignment of Pins
Table 3-35 in Sub-
section 3.2.1
Rear Optical
52 IN 12 V
2 COMMON
Time
3 IN 24 V
1 Shield
Figure A-20 Connection Diagram For 7SJ635/6∗–∗B beginning with release /EE
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 445

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix 7SJ63
A.2.2.3 Devices With Detached Operation Unit
7SJ631∗–∗A/C
Q1 IA F6
BO1
Q2 F8
BO2
Q3 IB F5
Q4 F9
BO3
Q5 IC F7
Q6
Q7 I4
Q8
R14
Va
R16
Vb
R15
R17
Vc/VG
R18
F10 BI1
F11 BI2
F12 BI3
F13 BI4
F15 BI5
F16 R1
BI6 BO11
F14 R2
BO12
R3
F17 BO13
BI7 R4
F18 R5
BO14
R6
R7
BO15
R8
1) Jumper: 1–2 NO
Live status F3
contact 1 F4 2–3 NC
Jumper ) (NO, NC)
+
Power F1
(~ )
supply - F2
Table 3-35 and 3-36
Assignment of Pins
Rear SCADA
in Subsection 3.2.1
Port B
Rear Service
i
Port C
R9 BI21 Time
R10 BI22 Syncronization A
R11 BI23
R12 BI24
R13
Ground at Back
Wall of Housing
capacitors at the
Front PC Port Operation Ground at Back relay contacts,
unit Wall of Housing Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V
Figure A-21 General diagram 7SJ631∗–∗A/C (devices with separate operation unit)
446 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
7SJ632∗–∗A/C
Q1 IA F6
BO1
Q2 F8
BO2
Q3 IB F5
Q4 F9
BO3
Q5 IC F7
Q6 J1 (–)
Q7 J2 (+)
Q8
I4 *) J3
BO4
R14
Va J4
R16 BO5
Vb
R15 K18
BO6
R17 Vc/VG
R18 K17
BO7
F10 BI1 J7
F11 BI2 BO8 J9
F12 BI3 BO9
J8
F13 BI4
F15 J11
BI5 BO10
F16 J12
BI6
F14 R1
BO11
R2
F17 BO12
BI7 R3
F18 BO13
R4
K1 BI8 R5
BO14
K2 BI9 R6
K3 BI10 R7
BO15
K4 BI11 R8
K6 BI12 1)
K7 Live status F3 Jumper: 1–2 NO
BI13 contact 1
K8 BI14
F4 2–3 NC
Jumper ) (NO, NC)
K9 BI15 +
K5 Power (~)
F1
K10 supply - F2
BI16
K11 BI17
Table 3-35 and 3-36
K12
Assignment of Pins
in Subsection 3.2.1
BI18 Rear SCADA

K13 BI19 B
K14 Port

K16 Port C
R9 BI21
R10 Time
R11 BI23
R12 BI24
R13
Ground at Back
Wall of Housing Interference suppression
capacitors at the
Front PC Port Operation Ground at Back relay contacts,
unit Wall of Housing Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V
*)
High-duty relays
capacitors
MP, 22 nF, 250 V
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 447

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix 7SJ63
7SJ633∗–∗A/C
Q1 IA F6
BO1
Q2 F8
BO2
Q3 IB F5
Q4 F9
BO3
Q5 IC F7
Q6 J1 (–)
Q7 J2 (+)
Q8
I4 *) J3
BO4
R14
Va J4
R16 BO5
Vb
R15 K18
BO6
R17
Vc/VG K17
R18 BO7
F10 BI1 J7
F11 BI2 BO8 J9
F12 BI3 BO9
J8
F13 BI4
F15 J11
BI5 BO10
F16 J12
BI6
F14 R1
BO11
R2
F17 BO12
BI7 R3
F18 BO13
R4
K1 BI8 R5
BO14
K2 BI9 R6
K3 BI10 R7
BO15
K4 BI11 R8
K6 BI12 1)
Jumper: 1–2 NO
K7 Live status F3
BI13 contact 1 F4 2–3 NC
K9 BI15 +
K5 Power F1
(~ )
K10
supply - F2
BI16
K11 BI17
Table 3-35 and 3-36
K12
Assignment of Pins
in Subsection 3.2.1
BI18 Rear SCADA

K13 BI19 Port B
K14
K15 Rear Service
BI20 C
K16 Port
(+) R9
Transducer 1 Time
(+) R11
Transducer 2
(–) R12
Ground at Back
capacitors at the
relay contacts,
Front PC Port Operation Ground at Back Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V
unit Wall of Housing
*)
High-duty relays
capacitors
MP, 22 nF, 250 V
448 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
7SJ635∗–∗A/C
Q1 IA F6
BO1
Q2 F8
BO2
Q3 IB F5
Q4 F9
BO3
Q5 IC F7
Q6 J1 (–)
Q7 J2 (+)
Q8
I4 *) J3
BO4
R14
Va J4 *)
R16
R15 K18 capacitors
BO6
R17 Vc/VG MP, 22 nF, 250 V
R18 K17
BO7
F10 BI1 J7
F11 BI2 BO8 J9
F12 BI3 BO9
J8
F13 BI4
F15 J11
BI5 BO10
F16 J12
BI6
F14 R1
BO11
R2
F17 BO12
BI7 R3
F18 BO13
R4
K1 BI8 R5
BO14
K2 BI9 R6
K3 BI10 R7
BO15
K4 BI11 R8
K6 BI12 L1 (–)
K7 L2 (+)
K8
BI13 *) L3
BI14 BO16
K9 BI15
K5 L4
BO17
K10 BI16 M18
K11 BO18
BI17
K12 BI18 M17
K13 BO19
BI19
K14 L7
BO20
L9
K15 BI20 BO21
K16 L8
L11
R9 BO22
BI21 L12
R10 BI22
R11 1) Jumper: 1–2 NO
BI23 Live status F3
R13 Jumper ) (NO, NC)
M1 +
BI25 Power (~ )
F1
M2 BI26 -
supply F2
M3 BI27
M4
Table 3-35 and 3-36
BI28
Assignment of Pins
in Subsection 3.2.1
M6 BI29 Rear SCADA

Port B
M7 BI30
M8 BI31
Port C
M5
M10 BI33
M11 Time
M12 BI35
M13 BI36
M14 Interference suppression
Ground at Back capacitors at the
M15 BI37 Wall of Housing relay contacts,
M16 Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V
Front PC Port Operation Ground at Back

7SJ62/63/64 Manual 449

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix 7SJ63
7SJ636∗–∗A/C
Q1 IA F6
BO1
Q2 F8
BO2
Q3 IB F5
Q4 F9
BO3
Q5 IC F7
Q6 J1 (–)
Q7 J2 (+)
Q8
I4 *) J3
BO4
R14
Va J4 *)
R16
R15 K18 capacitors
BO6
R17 MP, 22 nF, 250 V
Vc/VG K17
R18 BO7
F10 BI1 J7
F11 BI2 BO8 J9
F12 BI3 BO9
J8
F13 BI4
F15 J11
BI5 BO10
F16 J12
BI6
F14 R1
BO11
R2
F17 BO12
BI7 R3
F18 BO13
R4
K1 BI8 R5
BO14
K2 BI9 R6
K3 BI10 R7
BO15 R8
K4 BI11
K6 BI12 L1 (–)
K7 L2 (+)
K8
BI13 *) L3
BI14 BO16
K9 BI15
K5 L4
BO17
K10 BI16 M18
K11 BO18
BI17
K12 BI18 M17
K13 BO19
BI19
K14 L7
BO20 L9
K15 BI20 BO21
K16 L8
L11
(+) R9 BO22
L12
Transducer 1
(–) R10
1) Jumper: 1–2 NO
(+) R11 Live status F3
Transducer 2 contact 1 F4
(–) R12 2–3 NC
Jumper ) (NO, NC)
M1 BI25 +
F1
M2 Power (~ )
BI26 supply -
M3 F2
BI27
M4
Table 3-35 and 3-36
BI28
Assignment of Pins
in Subsection 3.2.1
M6 BI29 Rear SCADA

M7 Port B
BI30
M8 BI31
M5 Port C
M10 BI33
M11 Time
M12 BI35
M13 BI36
M14 Ground at Back Interference suppression
M15 BI37 Wall of Housing capacitors at the
M16 relay contacts,
Front PC Port Operation Ground at Back
450 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A.2.2.4 Devices for panel surface mounting without Operation Unit
7SJ631∗–∗F/G
Q1 IA F6
BO1
Q2 F8
BO2
Q3 IB F5
Q4 F9
BO3
Q5 IC F7
Q6
Q7 I4
Q8
R14
Va
R16
Vb
R15
R17
Vc/VG
R18
F10 BI1
F11 BI2
F12 BI3
F13 BI4
F15 BI5
F16 R1
BI6 BO11
F14 R2
BO12
R3
F17 BO13
BI7 R4
F18 R5
BO14
R6
R7
BO15
R8
1) Jumper: 1–2 NO
Live status F3
Jumper ) (NO, NC)
+
Power F1
(~ )
supply - F2
Table 3-35 and 3-36
Assignment of Pins
Rear SCADA
in Subsection 3.2.1
Port B
Rear Service
i
Port C
R9 BI21 Time
R10 BI22 Syncronization A
R11 BI23
R12 BI24
R13
Ground at Back
Wall of Housing
PC Port capacitors at the
(to Panel or Door) relay contacts,
Figure A-26 General diagram 7SJ631∗–∗F/G (devices for panel surface mounting without operation unit)
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 451

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix 7SJ63
7SJ632∗–∗F/G
Q1 IA F6
BO1
Q2 F8
BO2
Q3 IB F5
Q4 F9
BO3
Q5 IC F7
Q6 J1 (–)
Q7 J2 (+)
Q8
I4 *) J3
BO4
R14
Va J4
R16 BO5
Vb
R15 K18
BO6
R17 Vc/VG
R18 K17
BO7
F10 BI1 J7
F11 BI2 BO8 J9
F12 BI3 BO9
J8
F13 BI4
F15 J11
BI5 BO10
F16 J12
BI6
F14 R1
BO11
R2
F17 BO12
BI7 R3
F18 BO13
R4
K1 BI8 R5
BO14
K2 BI9 R6
K3 BI10 R7
BO15
K4 BI11 R8
K6 BI12 1)
K7 BI13
K8 contact 1 F4 2–3 NC
K9 BI15 +
K5 Power (~ )
F1
K10 supply - F2
BI16
K11 BI17
Table 3-35 and 3-36
K12
Assignment of Pins
in Subsection 3.2.1
BI18 Rear SCADA

K13 BI19 B
K14 Port

K16 Port C
R9 BI21
R10 Time
R11 BI23
R12 BI24
R13
Ground at Back
capacitors at the
PC Port
relay contacts,
(to Panel or Door)
*)
High-duty relays
capacitors
MP, 22 nF, 250 V
452 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
7SJ633∗–∗F/G
Q1 IA F6
BO1
Q2 F8
BO2
Q3 IB F5
Q4 F9
BO3
Q5 IC F7
Q6 J1 (–)
Q7 J2 (+)
Q8
I4 *) J3
BO4
R14
Va J4
R16 BO5
Vb
R15 K18
BO6
R17
Vc/VG K17
R18 BO7
F10 BI1 J7
F11 BI2 BO8 J9
F12 BI3 BO9
J8
F13 BI4
F15 J11
BI5 BO10
F16 J12
BI6
F14 R1
BO11
R2
F17 BO12
BI7 R3
F18 BO13
R4
K1 BI8 R5
BO14
K2 BI9 R6
K3 BI10 R7
BO15
K4 BI11 R8
K6 BI12 1)
Jumper: 1–2 NO
K7 Live status F3
BI13 contact 1 F4 2–3 NC
K9 BI15 +
K5 Power F1
(~ )
K10
supply - F2
BI16
K11 BI17
Table 3-35 and 3-36
K12
Assignment of Pins
in Subsection 3.2.1
BI18 Rear SCADA
K13 BI19 Port B
K14
K15 Rear Service
BI20 C
K16 Port
(+) R9
Transducer 1 Time
(+) R11
Transducer 2
(–) R12
Ground at Back
capacitors at the
relay contacts,
PC Port Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V
(to Panel or Door)
*)
High-duty relays
capacitors
MP, 22 nF, 250 V
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 453

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix 7SJ63
7SJ635∗–∗F/G
Q1 IA F6
BO1
Q2 F8
BO2
Q3 IB F5
Q4 F9
BO3
Q5 IC F7
Q6 J1 (–)
Q7 J2 (+)
Q8
I4 *) J3
R14
BO4 *)
Va J4 High-duty relays
R16 BO5 Interference suppression
Vb capacitors
R15 K18
BO6 MP, 22 nF, 250 V
R17 Vc/VG
R18 K17
BO7
F10 BI1 J7
F11 BI2 BO8 J9
F12 BI3 BO9
J8
F13 BI4
F15 J11
BI5 BO10
F16 J12
BI6
F14 R1
BO11
R2
F17 BO12
BI7 R3
F18 BO13
R4
K1 BI8 R5
BO14
K2 BI9 R6
K3 BI10 R7
BO15
K4 BI11 R8
K6 BI12 L1 (–)
K7 L2 (+)
K8
BI13 *) L3
BI14 BO16
K9 BI15
K5 L4
BO17
K10 BI16 M18
K11 BO18
BI17
K12 BI18 M17
K13 BO19
BI19
K14 L7
BO20
L9
K15 BI20 BO21
K16 L8
L11
R9 BO22
BI21 L12
R10 BI22
R11 1)
BI23 Live status F3 Jumper: 1–2 NO
R13 Jumper )(NO, NC)
M1 +
BI25 Power (~ )
F1
M2 BI26 -
supply F2
M3 BI27
M4
Table 3-35 and 3-36
BI28
Assignment of Pins
in Subsection 3.2.1
M6 BI29 Rear SCADA

Port B
M7 BI30
M8 BI31
Port C
M5
M10 BI33
M11 Time
M12 BI35
M13 BI36
M14 Interference suppression
capacitors at the
M15 BI37 relay contacts,
M16 Ground at Back Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V
Wall of Housing
PC Port
(to Panel or Door)
454 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
7SJ636∗–∗F/G
Q1 IA F6
BO1
Q2 F8
BO2
Q3 IB F5
Q4 F9
BO3
Q5 IC F7
Q6 J1 (–)
Q7 J2 (+)
Q8
I4 *) J3
BO4
R14
Va J4 *)
R16 BO5 High-duty relays
R15 K18 capacitors
BO6
R17 MP, 22 nF, 250 V
Vc/VG K17
R18 BO7
F10 BI1 J7
F11 BI2 BO8 J9
F12 BI3 BO9
J8
F13 BI4
F15 J11
BI5 BO10
F16 J12
BI6
F14 R1
BO11
R2
F17 BO12
BI7 R3
F18 BO13
R4
K1 BI8 R5
BO14
K2 BI9 R6
K3 BI10 R7
BO15 R8
K4 BI11
K6 BI12 L1 (–)
K7 L2 (+)
K8
BI13 *) L3
BI14 BO16
K9 BI15
K5 L4
BO17
K10 BI16 M18
K11 BO18
BI17
K12 BI18 M17
K13 BO19
BI19
K14 L7
BO20 L9
K15 BI20 BO21
K16 L8
L11
(+) R9 BO22
L12
Transducer 1
(–) R10 1)
(+) R11 Live status F3 Jumper: 1–2 NO
Transducer 2 contact 1 F4 2–3 NC
(–) R12
Jumper ) (NO, NC)
M1 BI25 +
F1
M2 Power (~ )
BI26 supply -
M3 F2
BI27
M4
Table 3-35 and 3-36
BI28
Assignment of Pins
in Subsection 3.2.1
M6 BI29 Rear SCADA

M7 Port B
BI30
M8 BI31
M5 Port C
M10 BI33
M11 Time
M12 BI35
M13 BI36
M14
M15 Ground at Back
BI37 capacitors at the
M16 Wall of Housing
relay contacts,
PC Port
(to Panel or Door)
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 455

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix 7SJ64
7SJ640∗–∗D/E
Q1 IA
Q2 R1
BO1
Q3 R2
IB BO2
Q4 R3
BO3
Q5 R4
IC
Q6
Q7 R5
I4 BO4
Q8 R6
R15 Va R7
BO5
R8
R17 Vb
R18 Vc
R16
R13 V4
R14
F5 BI1
F6 BI2
F7 BI3
F8 BI4
F9 BI5
F10 1)
R9 BI6 Jumper ) (NO, NC)
R10 +
R11 Power (~ )
F1
BI7
R12 supply - F2
Assignment of Pins of Interfaces,
refer to Table 3-35 and 3-36 in
Additional Port D
Rear Service Port

C
Subsection 3.2.1
Rear SCADA Port B
Time Synchronization A
Front PC Port
Ground at Back
Wall of Housing
456 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
7SJ641∗–∗D/E
Q1 IA
Q2 BO1 R1
Q3 BO2 R2
IB
Q4 BO3 R3
Q5 R4
IC
Q6
Q7 BO4 R5
I4 R6
Q8
R15 Va BO5 R7
R8
R17 Vb
R18 Vc K3
R16 BO6
K4
R13 Jumper1) (NO, NC)
V4
R14
F5 BI1
F6 K6
BI2 BO7
F7 K7
BI3 BO8
F8 BO9 K8
BI4 K5
F9 BI5
F10
R9 BI6 K9
BO10
R10 K10
R11 K11
BI7 BO11
R12 K12
K13
BO12
K17 B8 K14
K18 K15
BO13
J1 K16
BI9
J2
J3 BI10 1) Jumper: 1–2 NO
J4 BI11 Live status F3
J6 BI12 contact 1 F4 2–3 NC
J5 Jumper ) (NO, NC)
+
J7 Power F1
BI13 (~ )
J8 supply - F2
J9 BI14
J10
J11 BI15 Additional Port D

J12
Rear Service Port
C
Subsection 3.2.1
Rear SCADA Port B
Front PC Port
Ground at Back
Wall of Housing
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 457

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix 7SJ64
7SJ642∗–∗D/E
Q1 IA
Q2 R1
BO1
Q3 R2
IB BO2
Q4 BO3 R3
Q5 R4
IC
Q6
Q7 R5
I4 BO4
Q8 R6
R15 Va R7
BO5
R8
R17 Vb
R18 Vc J1 (–)
R16 J2 (+)
R13 V4
*) J3
R14 BO6
F5 J4
BI1 BO7
F6 BI2 K18
F7 BI3 BO8
F8 BI4 K17
F9 BI5 BO9
F10
R9 J7
BI6 B10
R10 J9
B11
J8
R11 BI7
R12 J11
BO12
J12
K1 BI8
K2 BI9
K3 BI10 1)
K4 BI11 Live status F3
Jumper: 1–2 NO
K8 BI14 +
K9 Power (~ )
F1
BI15
K5 supply - F2
K10 BI16
K11 BI17
K12 BI18
K13 BI19 Additional Port D

K14
K15 BI20 Rear Service Port
K16 C
Subsection 3.2.1
Rear SCADA Port B
Front PC Port
)
*High-duty relays
Wall of Housing capacitors
MP, 22 nF, 250 V
458 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
7SJ645∗–∗D/E
Q1 IA
Q2 R1
BO1
Q3 R2
IB BO2
Q4 BO3 R3
Q5 R4
IC
Q6
Q7 R5
I4 BO4
Q8 R6
R15 Va R7
BO5
R8
R17 Vb
R18 Vc J1 (–)
R16 J2 (+)
R13 V4
*) J3
R14 BO6
F5 J4
BI1 BO7
F6 BI2 K18
F7 BI3 BO8
F8 BI4 K17
F9 BI5 BO9
F10
R9 J7
BI6 B10
R10 J9
B11
J8
R11 BI7
R12 J11
BO12
J12
K1 BI8
K2 BI9 N1 (–)
K3 BI10 ) N2 (+)
K4 BI11
* N3
K6 BO13
BI12
K7 BI13 N4
BO14
K8 BI14
K9 BI15 P18
BO15
K5
P17
K10 BO16
BI16
K11 BI17 N7
K12 BO17 N9
BI18 BO18
K13 BI19 N8
K14 N11
BO19
K15 N12
BI20
K16 1)
P1 BI21 contact 1 F4 2–3 NC
P2 BI22 Jumper ) (NO, NC)
P3 BI23 +
P4 Power (~ )
F1
BI24 -
P6 supply F2
BI25
P7 BI26
P8 BI27
P9 Additional Port D
BI28
P5
P10 BI29 Rear Service Port
C
P11 BI30
P12 BI31
P13
Subsection 3.2.1
BI32 Rear SCADA Port B

P14
P15 BI33 Time Synchronization A )
P16 *High-duty relays
Front PC Port capacitors
MP, 22 nF, 250 V
Ground at Back
Wall of Housing
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 459

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix 7SJ64
A.2.3.2 Housing for panel surface mounting
7SJ640∗–∗B
15 IA
30 43
BO1
14 58
IB BO2
29 42
BO3
13 57
IC
28
12 56
I4 BO4
27 41
45 Va 55
BO5
40
44 Vb
60 Vc
59
26 V4
25
1)
37 Live status 31 Jumper: 1–2 NO
BI1 contact 1
36 32 2–3 NC
35 BI3 +
34 BI4 Power (~ )
10 L+ (V+)
33 BI5 supply - 11 L– (V–)
52
54 BI6 Earthing
39
Terminal (16)
53 BI7
38 2 IN SYNC
17 IN 12 V
3 COM SYNC
Time
Synchronisation 18 COMMON
4 IN 5 V
19 IN 24 V
1 Screen
Interfaces, refer to Table
Additional Port D
3-35 and 3-36 in Sub-
Assignment of Pins of
Rear Service Port C

section 3.2.1
Rear SCADA Port B
Front PC Port
Ground at Back
Wall of Housing
460 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
7SJ641∗–∗B
25 IA
50 74
BO1
24 99
IB BO2
49 BO3 73
23 98
IC
48
22 97
I4 BO4
47 72
20 Va 96
BO5
71
19 Vb
44 Vc 90
45 BO6
65
21 Jumper1) (NO, NC)
V4
46
64
58 BO7
BI1 88
57 BO8
BI2 63 1)
56 BO9
89
Jumper: 1–2 NO
BI3
55 BI4 2–3 NC
54 BI5 87
83 BO10
62
95 BI6 86
70 BO11
61
94 BI7
69 85
BO12
60
43 84
B8 BO13
18 59
42 BI9
17 Live status 51
contact 1 52
41 BI10 Jumper ) (NO, NC)
40 BI11 +
14 Power (~ )
15 L+ (V+)
BI12 -
39 supply 16 L– (V–)
38 BI13
13 Earthing
Terminal (26)
37 BI14
12 2 IN SYNC
36 27 IN 12 V
BI15
11 3 COM SYNC
Time
Synchronisation 28 COMMON
4 IN 5 V
29 IN 24 V
1 Screen
Additional Port D
and 3-36 in Subsection
Rear Service Port C
Rear SCADA Port B

3.2.1
Front PC Port
Ground at Back
Wall of Housing
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 461

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix 7SJ64
7SJ642∗–∗B
25 IA
50 74
BO1
24 99
IB BO2
49 BO3 73
23 98
IC
48
22 97
I4 BO4
47 72
20 Va 96
BO5
71
19 Vb
44 Vc 12 (–)
45 37 (+)
21 V4
*) 11
46 BO6
58 36
BI1 BO7
57 BI2 38
56 BI3 BO8
55 BI4 13
54 BI5 BO9
83
95 18
BI6 B10
70 17
B11
42
94 BI7
69 14
BO12
39
66 BI8
65 BI9 1)
64 BI10
contact 1 52 2–3 NC
63 BI11 Jumper ) (NO, NC)
91 BI12 +
90 BI13 Power (~ )
15 L+ (V+)
89 BI14 supply - 16 L– (V–)
88 BI15
87
EarthingTerminal
62 BI16 Terminal (26)
61 BI17
60 BI18
86 BI19 2 IN SYNC
85 27 IN 12 V
84 BI20 3 COM SYNC
Time
59 Synchronisation 28 COMMON
4 IN 5 V
29 IN 24 V
1 Screen
Assignment of Pins of In-
terfaces, refer to Table
3-35 and 3-36 in Sub-
Additional Port D
Rear Service Port C

section 3.2.1
Rear SCADA Port B
Front PC Port
)
*High-duty relays
Ground at Back capacitors
Wall of Housing MP, 22 nF, 250 V
462 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
7SJ645∗–∗B
50 IA 149
BO1
100 199
BO2
49 IB BO3 148
99 198
48 IC 197
BO4
98 147
47 I4 196
BO5
97 146
Va 19 (–)
45
69 (+)
44 Vb *) 18
BO6
94 Vc
95 68
BO7
46 V4 70
96 BO8
108 BI1 20
107 BO9
BI2
106 BI3 23
105 BO10 22
BI4 BO11
104 BI5 72
158 21
BO12
195 BI6 71
145 34 (–)
84 (+)
194 BI7 *) 33
144 BO13
125 BI8 83
BO14
124 BI9
123 85
BI10 BO15
122 BI11 35
175 BI12 BO16
174 BI13 40
173 BI14 BO17 39
172 BI15 BO18
89
171
36
121 BO19
BI16 86
120 BI17 1)
119
BI18 contact 102
170 BI19 Jumper1) (NO, NC) 2–3 NC
169 +
Power (~ )
37 L+ (V+)
168 BI20 -
supply 38 L– (V–)
118
EarthingTerminal
140 BI21 Terminal (51)
139 BI22
138 2 IN SYNC
BI23
137 52 IN 12 V
BI24
190 BI25 3 COM SYNC
Time
189 BI26 Synchronisation 53 COMMON
188 BI27 4 IN 5 V
187 BI28 54 IN 24 V
186
1 Schirm
136 BI29
Assignment of Pins of In-
135 BI30 Additional Port D

terfaces, refer to Table
134
3-35 and 3-36 in Sub-
BI31
185 BI32 Rear Service Port
184 C
183 BI33
section 3.2.1
133 Rear SCADA Port B
Front PC Port )
*High-duty relays
Ground at Back capacitors
Wall of Housing MP, 22 nF, 250 V
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 463

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix 7SJ64
A.2.3.3 Housing for Mounting with Detached Operator Panel
7SJ641∗–∗A/C
Q1 IA
Q2 R1
BO1
Q3 R2
IB BO2
Q4 BO3 R3
Q5 R4
IC
Q6
Q7 R5
I4 BO4
Q8 R6
R15 Va R7
BO5
R8
R17 Vb
R18 Vc K3
R16 BO6
K4
V4
R14
F5 BI1
F6 K6
BI2 BO7
F7 K7
BI3 BO8
F8 BO9 K8
BI4 K5
F9 BI5
F10
1)
R9 BI6 K9 Jumper: 1–2 NO
BO10
R10 K10 2–3 NC
R11 K11
BI7 BO11
R12 K12
K13
BO12
K17 B8 K14
K18 K15
BO13
J1 K16
BI9
J2
J3 BI10
J6 BI12 contact 1 F4
+
J7 Power F1
BI13 (~ )
J8 supply - F2
J9 BI14
J10
Additional Port D
J11 BI15
J12
Rear Service Port C
Subsection 3.2.1
Rear SCADA Port B
Front PC Port
Earthing at the
Rear Wall
Front Serial Operator Earthing at the

Operating Interface Panel Rear Wall
Figure A-39 General diagram 7SJ641∗–∗A/C (panel surface mounting with detached operator panel)
464 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
7SJ642∗–∗A/C
Q1 IA
Q2 R1
BO1
Q3 R2
IB BO2
Q4 BO3 R3
Q5 R4
IC
Q6
Q7 R5
I4 BO4
Q8 R6
R15 Va R7
BO5
R8
R17 Vb
R18 Vc J1 (–)
R16 J2 (+)
R13 V4
*) J3
R14 BO6
F5 J4
BI1 BO7
F6 BI2 K18
F7 BI3 BO8
F8 BI4 K17
F9 BI5 BO9
F10
R9 J7
BI6 B10
R10 J9
B11
J8
R11 BI7
R12 J11
BO12
J12
K1 BI8
K2 BI9
K3 BI10
K4 BI11 1) Jumper: 1–2 NO
Live status F3
K8 BI14 +
K9 Power (~ )
F1
BI15
K5 supply - F2
K10 BI16
K11 BI17
K12 BI18

K14
K15 BI20 Rear Service Port C
K16
Subsection 3.2.1
Rear SCADA Port B
Front PC Port
)
*High-duty relays
Earthing at the Interference suppression
Rear Wall capacitors
MP, 22 nF, 250 V

7SJ62/63/64 Manual 465

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix 7SJ64
7SJ645∗–∗A/C
Q1 IA
Q2 R1
BO1
Q3 R2
IB BO2
Q4 BO3 R3
Q5 R4
IC R5
Q6 BO4
Q7 R6
I4
Q8 R7
BO5
R15 Va R8
R17 Vb J1 (–)
J2 (+)
R18 Vc *) J3
R16 BO6
R13 V4 J4
R14 BO7
F5 K18
BI1 BO8
F6 BI2 K17
F7 BI3 BO9
F8 BI4
F9 J7
BI5 B10
F10 J9
B11
R9 J8
BI6
R10 J11
BO12 J12
R11 BI7
R12 N1 (–)
) N2 (+)
K1 * N3
BI8 BO13
K2 BI9
K3 BI10 N4
BO14
K4 BI11
K6 P18
BI12 BO15
K7 BI13 P17
K8 BI14 BO16
K9 BI15
K5 N7
BO17 N9
K10 BI16 BO18
K11 N8
BI17
K12 BI18 N11
BO19
K13 BI19 N12
K14 1)
K16
+
P1 Power (~ )
F1
BI21
P2 BI22 supply - F2
P3
BI23
P4
BI24 Additional Port D

P6 BI25
P7 BI26
P8 BI27 Rear Service Port C
P9 BI28
P5
Subsection 3.2.1
P10 BI29 Rear SCADA Port B

P11 )
BI30 *High-duty relays
P12 BI31 Time Synchronization A Interference suppression
P13 BI32 capacitors
P14 MP, 22 nF, 250 V
P15 BI33 Front PC Port
P16
Earthing at the
Rear Wall

466 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A.2.3.4 Devices for panel surface mounting without Operator Panel
7SJ641∗–∗F/G
Q1 IA
Q2 R1
BO1
Q3 R2
IB BO2
Q4 BO3 R3
Q5 R4
IC
Q6
Q7 R5
I4 BO4
Q8 R6
R15 Va R7
BO5
R8
R17 Vb
R18 Vc K3
R16 BO6
K4
V4
R14
F5 BI1 1)
F6 BO7
K6 Jumper: 1–2 NO
BI2 K7
F7 BI3 BO8 2–3 NC
F8 BO9 K8
BI4 K5
F9 BI5
F10
R9 BI6 K9
BO10
R10 K10
R11 K11
BI7 BO11
R12 K12
K13
BO12
K17 B8 K14
K18 K15
BO13
J1 K16
BI9
J2
J3 BI10
J6 BI12 contact 1 F4
+
J7 Power F1
BI13 (~ )
J8 supply - F2
J9 BI14
J10
Additional Port D
J11 BI15
J12
Rear Service Port C
Subsection 3.2.1
Rear SCADA Port B
Front PC Port
Earthing at the
Rear Wall
Serial Operating Interface

(to panel or door)
Figure A-42 General diagram 7SJ641∗–∗F/G (panel surface mounting without operator panel)
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 467

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix 7SJ64
7SJ642∗–∗F/G
Q1 IA
Q2 R1
BO1
Q3 R2
IB BO2
Q4 BO3 R3
Q5 R4
IC
Q6
Q7 R5
I4 BO4
Q8 R6
R15 Va R7
BO5
R8
R17 Vb
R18 Vc J1 (–)
R16 J2 (+)
R13 V4
*) J3
R14 BO6
F5 J4
BI1 BO7
F6 BI2 K18
F7 BI3 BO8
F8 BI4 K17
F9 BI5 BO9
F10
R9 J7
BI6 B10
R10 J9
B11
J8
R11 BI7
R12 J11
BO12
J12
K1 BI8
K2 BI9
K3 BI10
K4 BI11 Live status F3 1)
K6
Jumper: 1–2 NO
BI12 contact 1 F4
K7 Jumper ) (NO, NC) 2–3 NC
BI13
K8 BI14 +
K9 Power (~ )
F1
BI15
K5 supply - F2
K10 BI16
K11 BI17
K12 BI18

K14
K15 BI20 Rear Service Port
K16 C
Subsection 3.2.1
Rear SCADA Port B
Front PC Port
)
*High-duty relays
Earthing at the Interference suppression
Rear Wall capacitors
MP, 22 nF, 250 V
(to panel or door)
468 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
7SJ645∗–∗F/G
Q1 IA
Q2 R1
BO1
Q3 R2
IB BO2
Q4 BO3 R3
Q5 R4
IC R5
Q6 BO4
Q7 R6
I4
Q8 R7
BO5
R15 Va R8
R17 Vb J1 (–)
J2 (+)
R18 Vc *) J3
R16 BO6
R13 V4 J4
R14 BO7
F5 K18
BI1 BO8
F6 BI2 K17
F7 BI3 BO9
F8 BI4
F9 J7
BI5 B10
F10 J9
B11
R9 J8
BI6
R10 J11
BO12 J12
R11 BI7
R12 N1 (–)
) N2 (+)
K1 * N3
BI8 BO13
K2 BI9
K3 BI10 N4
BO14
K4 BI11
K6 P18
BI12 BO15
K7 BI13 P17
K8 BI14 BO16
K9 BI15
K5 N7
BO17 N9
K10 BI16 BO18
K11 N8
BI17
K12 BI18 N11
BO19
K13 BI19 N12
K14 1)
K16
+
P1 Power (~ )
F1
BI21
P2 BI22 supply - F2
P3 BI23
P4 BI24
P6 Additional Port D
BI25
P7 BI26
P8 BI27
P9 Rear Service Port C
BI28
P5
P10
Subsection 3.2.1
BI29 Rear SCADA Port B

P11 BI30 )
P12 *High-duty relays
BI31
P13 Time Synchronization A Interference suppression
BI32
P14 capacitors
MP, 22 nF, 250 V
P15 BI33 Front PC Port
P16
Earthing at the
Rear Wall
(to panel or door)
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 469

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix 7SJ62
A.3 Connection Examples
A.3.1 Connection Examples for 7SJ62
Panel Surface Mounted

Flush-mounted/Cubicle
15 Q1 Ia Q2 30
14 Q3 Ib Q4 29
13 Q5 Ic Q6 28
L
l
K
k
12 Q7 I4 Q8 27
7SJ62
A B C
Figure A-45 Current connections to three current transformers with a starpoint connection for
ground current (Grounded-Wye Connection with residual 3I0 Neutral Current),
normal circuit layout – appropriate for all networks.

15 Q1 Ia Q2 30
14 Q3 Ib Q4 29
13 Q5 Ic Q6 28
L
l
k 12 Q7 I4 27
K Q8
7SJ62
A B C
Figure A-46 Current connections to two current transformers –- only for ungrounded or
compensated networks.
470 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
7SJ62 A.3 Connection Examples

15 Q1 Ia Q2 30
14 Q3 Ib Q4 29
13 Q5 Ic Q6 28
L
l
k
27 Q8 I4 Q7 12
K
7SJ62
A B C
L l
K k
Important! Cable shield grounding must be done on the cable side!

Note: Change of Address 0201 setting changes polarity of I4 Current
Input !
Figure A-47 Current connections to three current transformers and a core balance neutral
current transformer for ground current - preferred for effectively or low-resistance
grounded networks

15 Q1 Ia Q2 30
14 Q3 Ib Q4 29
13 Q5 Ic Q6 28
L
l
k I4
K 27 Q8 Q7 12
7SJ62
A B C
L l
K k

Input !
Figure A-48 Current connections to two current transformers and core balance neutral current
transformer for sensitive ground fault detection - only for ungrounded or
compensated networks
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 471

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix 7SJ62

15 Q1 Ia Q2 30
14 Q3 Ib Q4 29
13 Q5 Ic Q6 28
L
l
k 27 Q8 I4 Q7 12
K
7SJ62
A B C
L l
K k

Input !
Figure A-49 Current connections to three current transformers – core balance neutral current
transformers for sensitive ground fault detection.
B Busbar
C
A
B
a
b

45 R14 Va
44 R15 Vb
R16 60
Vc
43 R17 R18 59
15 Q1 Ia Q2 30
14 Q3 Ib Q4 29
13 Q5 Ic Q6 28
L
l
k I4
K 12 Q7 Q8 27
7SJ62
A B C
Figure A-50 Current and voltage connections to three current transformers and three voltage
transformers (phase-ground), normal circuit layout – appropriate for all networks.
472 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
B Busbar
C
A
B
da
dn
a
b

45 R14 Va-b
44 R15 Vc-b R16 60
59 R18 VG R17 43
15 Q1 Ia Q2 30
14 Q3 Ib Q4 29
13 Q5 Ic Q6 28
L
l
k 12 Q7 I4 Q8 27
K
7SJ62
A B C
Figure A-51 Current and voltage connections to three current transformers, two voltage
transformers (phase-phase) and open delta VT for V4, appropriate for all
networks.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 473

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix 7SJ62
B Busbar
C
A BA B
a ba b

Va-b
45 R14
Vc-b R16 60
44 R15
43 R17 R18 59
15 Q1 Ia Q2 30
14 Q3 Ib Q4 29
13 Q5 Ic Q6 28
L
l
12 Q7 I4 Q8
K
k 27
7SJ62
A B C
Figure A-52 Current and voltage connections to two current transformers and two voltage
transformers, for ungrounded or compensated networks, if no directional ground
protections is needed.
B Busbar
C If only 2 VTs are present
A BA B on system side, device
should be connected in
a ba b open delta, short unused
voltage input.
Va-b
45 R14
Vc-b R16 60
44 R15
43 R17 R18 59
15 Q1 Ia Q2 30
14 Q3 Ib Q4 29
13 Q5 Ic Q6 28
L
l
12 Q7 I4
K
k Q8 27
7SJ62
A B C
Figure A-53 Current and voltage connections to three current transformers with starpoint
connection (Grounded-Wye Connection with residual 3I0 Neutral Current), two
voltage transformers, for ungrounded or compensated networks; no directional
ground protection, since displacement voltage cannot be calculated
474 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
B Busbar
C
A
B
da
dn
Va-b
45 R14
44 R15 Vc-b
R16 60
VG
59 R18 R17 43
15 Q1 Ia Q2 30
14 Q3 Ib Q4 29
13 Q5 Ic Q6 28
L
l I4
27 Q8 Q7 12
7SJ62
k
K
A B C
l
Important! Cable shield grounding must be done on the
L
cable side!
Note: Change of Address 0201 setting changes po-
K k larity of I4 Current Input !
Figure A-54 Current and voltage connections to three current transformers, core balance neu-
tral current transformers and open delta voltage transformers, maximum preci-
sion for sensitive ground fault detection.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 475

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix 7SJ63

25 Q1 Ia Q2 50
24 Q3 Ib Q4 49
23 Q5 Ic Q6 48
L
l
k 22 Q7 I4 Q8 47
K
7SJ631/2/3
A B C Size 1/2

50 Q1 Ia Q2 100
49 Q3 Ib Q4 99
48 Q5 Ic Q6 98
L
l
k 47 Q7 I4 97
K Q8
7SJ635/6
A B C Size 1/1
Figure A-55 Current connections to three current transformers with a starpoint connection for
ground current(Grounded-Wye Connection with residual 3I0 Neutral Current), nor-
mal circuit layout – appropriate for all networks.
476 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1

25 Q1 Ia Q2 50
24 Q3 Ib Q4 49
23 Q5 Ic Q6 48
L
l
k 22 Q7 I4 47
K Q8
7SJ631/2/3
A B C Size 1/2

50 Q1 Ia Q2 100
49 Q3 Ib Q4 99
48 Q5 Ic Q6 98
L
l
k
47 Q7 I4 97
K Q8
7SJ635/6
A B C Size 1/1
Figure A-56 Current connections to two current transformers - only for ungrounded or com-
pensated networks.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 477

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix 7SJ63

25 Q1 Ia Q2 50
24 Q3 Ib Q4 49
23 Q5 Ic Q6 48
L
l
k
47 Q8 I4 Q7 22
K
7SJ631/2/3
A B C
L l
K k

Note: Change of Address 0201 setting changes polarity of 3I0 Current
Input !
Size 1/2

50 Q1 Ia Q2 100
49 Q3 Ib Q4 99
48 Q5 Ic Q6 98
L I4
l 97 Q8 Q7 47
K
k 7SJ635/6
A B C
L l

K k Note: Change of Address 0201 setting changes polarity of 3I0 Current
Input !
Size 1/1
Figure A-57 Current connections to three current transformers and a core balance neutral
current transformer for ground current – preferred for effectively or low-resistance
grounded networks
478 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1

25 Q1 Ia Q2 50
24 Q3 Ib Q4 49
23 Q5 Ic Q6 48
L
l
k
47 Q8 I4 Q7 22
K
7SJ631/2/3
A B C
L l
K k

Input !
Size 1/2

50 Q1 Ia Q2 100
49 Q3 Ib Q4 99
48 Q5 Ic Q6 98
L
l
k I4
K 97 Q8 Q7 47
7SJ635/6
A B C
L l
K k

Input !
Size 1/1
Figure A-58 Current connections to two current transformers and a core balance neutral cur-
rent transformer for sensitive ground fault detection – only for ungrounded or
compensated networks
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 479

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix 7SJ63
A
Busbar
B
C
A
B
a
b

21 R14 Va
Vb
46 R15 R16 20
Vc
19 R17 R18 44
25 Q1 Ia Q2 50
24 Q3 Ib Q4 49
23 Q5 Ic Q6 48
L
l
k I4
K 22 Q7 Q8 47
7SJ631/2/3
A B C Size 1/2
A
Busbar
B
C
A
B
a
b

46 R14 Va
96 R15 Vb
R16 45
Vc
44 R17 R18 94
50 Q1 Ia Q2 100
49 Q3 Ib Q4 99
48 Q5 Ic Q6 98
L
l
k I4
K 47 Q7 Q8 97
7SJ635/6
A B C Size 1/1
Figure A-59 Current and voltage connections to three current transformers and three voltage
transformers (phase-ground), normal circuit layout – appropriate for all networks.
480 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A
Busbar
B
C
A
B
da
dn
a
b

21 R14 Va-b
46 R15 Vc-b R16 20
44 R18 VG R17 19
25 Q1 Ia Q2 50
24 Q3 Ib Q4 49
23 Q5 Ic Q6 48
L
l
k
22 Q7 I4 Q8 47
K
7SJ631/2/3
A B C Size 1/2
A
Busbar
B
C
A
B
da
dn
a
b

46 R14 Va-b
96 R15 Vc-b R16 45
94 R18 VG R17 44
50 Q1 Ia Q2 100
49 Q3 Ib Q4 99
48 Q5 Ic Q6 98
L
l
k 47 Q7 I4 Q8 97
K
7SJ635/6
A B C Size 1/1
Figure A-60 Current and voltage connections to three current transformers, two voltage trans-
formers (phase-phase) and open delta VT for V4, appropriate for all networks.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 481

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix 7SJ63
A
Busbar
B
C
A BA B
a ba b

Va-b
21 R14
Vc-b R16 20
46 R15
19 R17 R18 44
25 Q1 Ia Q2 50
24 Q3 Ib Q4 49
23 Q5 Ic Q6 48
L
l
k 22 Q7 I4 Q8
K 47
7SJ631/2/3
A B C Size 1/2
A
Busbar
B
C
A BA B
a ba b

Va-b
46 R14
Vc-b R16 45
96 R15
44 R17 R18 94
50 Q1 Ia Q2 100
49 Q3 Ib Q4 99
48 Q5 Ic Q6 98
L
l
k 47 Q7 I4 Q8
K 97
7SJ635/6
A B C Size 1/1
Figure A-61 Current and voltage connections to two current transformers and two voltage
transformers, for ungrounded or compensated networks, if no directional ground
protections is needed.
482 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A
Busbar
B
C
A
B
da
dn

Va-b
21 R14
46 R15 Vc-b
R16 20
VG
44 R18 R17 19
25 Q1 Ia Q2 50
24 Q3 Ib Q4 49
L 23 Q5 Ic Q6 48
l
Change of Address 0201 setting changes polarity of INS Current

K
A B C I4
47 Q8 Q7 22

L l
7SJ631/2/3
K k
Size 1/2
A
Busbar
B
C
A
B
da
dn
46 R14 Va-b
Input !
96 R15 Vc-b
R16 45
VG
94 R18 R17 44
Note:
50 Q1 Ia Q2 100
49 Q3 Ib Q4 99
48 Q5 Ic Q6 98
L
l
k
K
A B C I4
97 Q8 Q7 47
l
7SJ635/6
L
K k Size 1/1
Figure A-62 Current and voltage connections to three current transformers, core balance neu-
tral current transformers and open delta voltage transformers, maximum preci-
sion for sensitive ground fault detection.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 483

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix 7SJ64
Current
Transformer
Connection
Examples Panel Surface Mounted
15 Q1 Ia Q2 30
14 Q3 Ib Q4 29
13 Q5 Ic Q6 28
P2
S2
S1 12 Q7 I4 Q8 27
P1
7SJ640
A B C Housing Size 1/3

(50) 25 Q1 Ia Q2 50 (100)
(49) 24 Q3 Ib Q4 49 (99)
(48) 23 Q5 Ic Q6 48 (98)
P2
S2
S1 (47) 22 Q7 I4 Q8 47 (97)
P1
7SJ641/2/(5)
A B C
Housing Size 1/2 (Figures in Brackets Relating to Size 1/1)
Figure A-63 Current connections to three current transformers with a star-point connection for
earth current (residual 3I0 neutral current), normal circuit layout — appropriate for
all networks
484 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1

15 Q1 Ia Q2 30
14 Q3 Ib Q4 29
13 Q5 Ic Q6 28
P2
S2
S1
27 Q8 I4 Q7 12
P1
7SJ640
A B C
P2 S2
P1 S1

Input !
Housing Size 1/3

(50) 25 Q1 Ia Q2 50 (100)
(49) 24 Q3 Ib Q4 49 (99)
(48) 23 Q5 Ic Q6 48 (98)
P2
S2
S1 I4
P1 (97) 47 Q8 Q7 22 (47)
7SJ641/2/(5)
A B C
P2 S2
P1 S1
Input !

Figure A-64 Current connections to three current transformers with separate earth current transformer
(summation current transformer or cable core balance current transformer)
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 485

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix 7SJ64

15 Q1 Ia Q2 30
14 Q3 Ib Q4 29
13 Q5 Ic Q6 28
P2
S2
S1
27 Q8 I4 Q7 12
P1
7SJ640
A B C
P2 S2
P1 S1

Input !
Housing Size 1/3

(50) 25 Q1 Ia Q2 50 (100)
(49) 24 Q3 Ib Q4 49 (99)
(48) 23 Q5 Ic Q6 48 (98)
P2
S2
P1
S1
(97) 47 Q8 I4 Q7 22 (47)
7SJ641/2/(5)
A B C
P2 S2
P1 S1
Input !
Figure A-65 Current connections to two current transformers with separate earth current
transformer (summation current transformer or cable core balance current
transformer)
486 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
Voltage
Transformer
Connection A
Examples B
C

Flush Mounted/Cubicle
Va
45 R15
A B
Vb
44 R17
Vc
60 R18
a b 59 R16
U4
26 R13
25 R14
7SJ640
Housing Size 1/3
B
C

Va
(45) 20 R15
A B Vb
(44) 19 R17
Vc
(94) 44 R18
a b (95) 45 R16
U4
(46) 21 R13
(96) 46 R14
7SJ641/2/(5)
Figure A-66 Voltage connections to three Wye-connected voltage transformers

(normal circuit layout)
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 487

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix 7SJ64
B
C

Ua
45 R15
A B Ub
44 R17
Uc
60 R18
da dn a b 59 R16
U4
26 R13
25 R14
7SJ640
Housing Size 1/3
B
C

Va
(45) 20 R15
A B Vb
(44) 19 R17
Vc
(94) 44 R18
da dn a b (95) 45 R16
V4
(46) 21 R13
(96) 46 R14
7SJ641/2/(5)
Figure A-67 Voltage connections to three Wye-connected voltage transformers with

additional open-delta windings (da–dn–winding)
488 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A
B
C
da
dn Panel Surface Mounted

Va
45 R15
A B Vb
44 R17
Vc
60 R18
a b 59 R16
V4
26 R13
25 R14
7SJ640
Housing Size 1/3
A
B
C
da
dn Panel Surface Mounted

Va
(45) 20 R15
A B Vb
(44) 19 R17
Vc
(94) 44 R18
a b (95) 45 R16
V4
(46) 21 R13
(96) 46 R14
7SJ641/2/(5)

additional open-delta windings (da–dn–winding) from the busbar
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 489

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix 7SJ64
A
B
C
(any voltage)
a
b Panel Surface Mounted

Va
45 R15
A B Vb
44 R17
Vc
60 R18
a b 59 R16
V4
26 R13
25 R14
7SJ640
Housing Size 1/3
B
C
(any voltage)
a

Va
(45) 20 R15
A B Vb
(44) 19 R17
Vc
(94) 44 R18
a b (95) 45 R16
V4
(46) 21 R13
(96) 46 R14
7SJ641/2/(5)
Figure A-69 Voltage connections to three Wye-connected voltage transformers and

additionally to any phase-to-phase voltage (for synchronism check for example)
490 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
B
C

Va-b
45 R15
A B Vb-c
44 R17
60 R18
da dn a b 59 R16
V4
26 R13
25 R14
7SJ640
Housing Size 1/3
B
C

Va-b
(45) 20 R15
A B Vb-c
(44) 19 R17
(94) 44 R18
da dn a b (95) 45 R16
V4
(46) 21 R13
(96) 46 R14
7SJ641/2/(5)

additional open-delta windings (da–dn–winding)
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 491

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix 7SJ64
B
C
(any desired voltage)

a

Va-b
A a 45 R15
Vc-b
44 R17
B b
A a 60 R18
b
59 R16
B
V4
26 R13
25 R14
7SJ640
Housing Size 1/3
A
B
C
(any desired voltage)

a

Ua-b
A a (45) 58 R15
Uc-b
(44) 57 R17
B b
A a
(94) 56 R18
B b
(95) 55 R16
U4
(46) 54 R13
(96) 83 R14
7SJ641/2/(5)
Figure A-71 VT circuits with 2 VTs and any desired voltage from the bus-bar VTs (phase–
phase)
492 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A.3 Connection Examples
A.3.4 Connection Examples for RTD-Box
A’ 7XV566
7XV5650 A A
Port C1) T1 FO/RS485 RTD-Box
7SJ62/63/64 B Bus number: 00
Converter B A’ and B’ jumpers for
the terminating resis-
B’ tors
A’ 7XV566
A A RTD-Box
7SJ62/63/64 Port C2) Bus number: 00
B A’ and B’ jumpers for
B the terminating resis-
B’ tors
*) for 7SJ64 optionally port C or D
Figure A-72 Simplex operation with one RTD-Box
above: optical design (1 FO); below: design with RS485
A’ 7XV566
R1 7XV5650 A A RTD-Box
7SJ62/63/64 Port C1) T1 FO/RS485 B Bus number: 01
Converter B A’ and B’ jumpers for
B’ the terminating resis-
tors
A’ 7XV566
A A RTD-Box
A’ and B’ jumpers for
B B the terminating resis-
B’ tors
*) for 7SJ64 optionally port C or D
Figure A-73 Half-duplex operation with one RTD-Box
above: optical design (2 FOs); below: design with RS485
R1 7XV5650 7XV566
A A
RTD-Box
7SJ62/63/64 1
Port C ) T1 FO/RS485 B
Converter B Busnummer: 01
A’ 7XV566
A RTD-Box
Bus number: 02
tors
7XV566
A A RTD-Box
B B
A’ 7XV566
A RTD-Box
Bus number: 02
1) for 7SJ64 port D
2) for 7SJ64 optionally port C or D tors
Figure A-74 Half-duplex operation with two RTD-Boxes

above: optical design (2 FOs); below: design with RS485
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 493

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix
A.4 Default Settings
A.4.1 LED Displays
The LED indication presettings which are preset in the device when it leaves the fac-
tory are summarised in Table A-1. Please take into consideration that LED8 to LED14
is not available in the devices in housings of size 1/3.
Table A-1 LED indication presettings

LED Descriptive Text Brief Text Message # Comments
LED 1 Relay Tripped Relay TRIP 511 One the protective functions initiated a trip.
LED 2 Pickup Phase A 50/51 Ph A PU 1762 Pickup by Aφ Element
67 A picked up 2692
LED 3 Pickup Phase B 50/51 Ph B PU 1763 Pickup by Bφ Element
67 B picked up 2693
LED 4 Pickup Phase C 50/51 Ph C PU 1764 Pickup by Cφ Element
67 C picked up 2694
LED 5 Pickup G 50N/51N Pickedup 1765 Pickup by Ground Element
67 N picked up 2695
LED 6 Measurement Failure ΣI 162 Monitoring Message
Failure Fail I balance 163
Fail V balance 167
Fail Ph. Seq. I 175
Fail Ph. Seq. V 176
LED 7 −−−−−−−−−−−−−−− −−−−−−−−−−−−−−− Not Configured
LED 8 Breaker OPENED Bkr OPENED Internal message made in CFC
LED 9 Cabinet door open >Door open Individual message coupled via BI
LED 10 Spring not charged >CB wait Individual message coupled via BI
LED 11 to 14 −−−−−−−−−−−−−−− −−−−−−−−−−−−−−− Not Configured
A.4.2 Binary Inputs
The presettings of the binary inputs are listed (dependent on the ordering variant) in
Tables A-2 to A-4.
494 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
Positions that are not indicated in the following tables have no presetting.
Table A-2 Binary input presettings for all devices and ordering variants
Binary Input LCD Text Function No. Remarks

BI1 >BLOCK 50-2 1721 Blocking the high-set stage of the over-
>BLOCK 50N-2 1724 current protection,
H–active
BI2 >Reset LED 0005 Reset of LED indicators,
H–active
BI3 >Light on ---- Switch on light for device display,
H–active
BI4 >52-b 4602 Circuit breaker open, H–active
BI5 >52-a 4601 Circuit breaker closed,
H–active
1
) only devices without power relays
2
) only devices with power relays
Table A-3 Further binary input presettings for 7SJ631*–

BI6 Disc.Swit. OPEN ---- Disconnector switch open
BI7 Disc.Swit. CLOSE ---- Disconnector switch closed
BI 21 GndSwit. OPEN ---- Ground switch open
BI 22 GndSwit. CLOSE ---- Ground switch closed
BI 23 >CB Ready ---- Spring charged
BI 24 >DoorClose ---- Door closed
(further) — — no presetting
Table A-4 Further binary input presettings for 7SJ632*–, 7SJ633*–, 7SJ635*– ,
7SJ636*–, 7SJ641*–, 7SJ642*– and 7SJ645*–

BI 6 Disc.Swit. OPEN ---- Disconnector switch open
BI 7 Disc.Swit. CLOSE ---- Disconnector switch closed
BI 8 GndSwit. OPEN ---- Ground switch open
BI 9 GndSwit. CLOSE ---- Ground switch closed
BI 11 >CB Ready ---- Spring charged
BI 12 >DoorClose ---- Door closed
(further) — — no presetting
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 495

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix
A.4.3 Binary Outputs
The presettings of the binary outputs are listed (dependent on the ordering variant) in
Tables A-5 to A-8. The Elementary Diagrams in Appendix A, A.2 show which binary
outputs can be used as accelerated binary outputs, i. e. suited for a fast command
tripping.
Positions that are not indicated in the following tables have no presetting.
Table A-5 Binary Output presetting for all ordering variants of 7SJ62 and 7SJ63
Binary LCD Text Function Remarks

Output No.
BO1 Relay TRIP 0511 Relay (general) TRIP command, un-
52Breaker OPEN ---- latched Relay TRIP
BO2 52Breaker CLOSE ---- Breaker CLOSE
79 Close 2851 Auto Reclosing Command
79 Close. 2851 Auto Reclosing Command
Table A-6 Further binary output presettings for 7SJ62**–

Output No.
BO4 Failure S I 0162
Fail I balance 0163
Fail V balance 0167 Monitoring
Fail Ph. Seq. V 0176
Fail Ph. Seq. I 0175
BO7 Relay PICKUP 0501 Relay (general) TRIP command, un-
latched
Tabelle A-7 Further binary output presettings for all 7SJ63**–

Output No.
BO11 GndSwit. OPEN ---- Ground switch open
BO12 GndSwit. CLOSE ---- Ground switch closed
BO13 Disc.Swit. OPEN ---- Disconnector switch open
BO14 Disc.Swit. CLOSE ---- Disconnector switch closed
BO15 Failure S I 0162
Fail I balance 0163
Fail V balance 0167 Monitoring
Fail Ph. Seq. V 0176
Fail Ph. Seq. I 0175
496 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
Tabelle A-8 Further binary output presettings for 7SJ632*–, 7SJ633*–, 7SJ635*– and
7SJ636*–

Output No.
BO10 Relay PICKUP 0501 Relay (general) PICKUP, unlatched
Tabelle A-9 Binary Output presetting for all ordering variants of 7SJ64**–

Output No.
BO3 Relay TRIP 0511 Relay (general) TRIP command, un-
52Breaker OPEN ---- latched Relay TRIP
79 Close 2851 Auto Reclosing Command
79 Close. 2851 Auto Reclosing Command
Table A-10 Further binary output presettings for 7SJ641*–, 7SJ642*– and 7SJ645*–

Output No.
BO1 GndSwit. OPEN ---- Ground switch open
BO2 GndSwit. CLOSE ---- Ground switch closed
BO10 Disc.Swit. OPEN ---- Disconnector switch open
BO11 Disc.Swit. CLOSE ---- Disconnector switch closed
A.4.4 Function Keys
Applies for all devices and ordered variants:
Function Keys Presetting
F1 Display of operational indications
F2 Display of the primary operational measured values
F3 Display of the fault indications of the last fault event
F4 No presetting
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 497

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix
A.4.5 Standard Default Display
Default Display of
the 4-Line Display 1 0.50kA 12 6.31kV S: 0.0MVA U12: 0kV
2 0.50kA 23 6.30kV P: 0.0MW IL2: 0A
3 0.50kA 31 6.29kV Q: 0.0MVAR
E 0.0A E 2V F: --- cosϕ: ---
[%] I ULE ULL I1:123.4A f: 50.01Hz

L1 78.4 99.6 99.5 U1:10.3kV cosϕ:0.85
L2 78.1 99.4 99.3 P: 1.1MW
L3 78.9 99.8 99.7 Q 0.2MVAR
L1 78.4A L1 78.4A MAX 81.2A

L2 78.1A L2 78.1A MAX 81.0A
L3 78.9A L3 78.9A MAX 81.9A
E 0.0A E 0.0A
U1=10.0kV dU= 0V
f1=50.11Hz df= 13mHz
U2=10.0kV dα=–0.013° only for 7SJ64
f1=50.02Hz
Figure A-75 Default display for 4-line display
Standard Default
Display of the [%] IL ULE ULL
Graphic Display L1 0.0 0.0 0.0
L2 0.0 0.0 0.0
L3 0.0 0.0 0.0
I U
12 0kV
23 0kV
31 0kV
L1 0A 0kV
L2 0A 0kV
L3 0A 0kV
E 0A 0kV
I-MIN I-MAX
L1 0A 0A
L2 0A 0A
L3 0A 0A
S: 0.0MVA
P: 0.0MW
Q: 0.0MVAR
F: ---
cosϕ: ---
Figure A-76 Default display of the graphic display
498 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A.4.6 Spontaneous Display Annunciations
Text Display The spontaneous annunciations that can be viewed on the device front serve to dis-
play the most important data about a fault. The in appear automatically in the display,
after a general pickup of the device, in the sequence shown in Figure A-77.
50–1 picked up Protective Function that picked up first;

50–1 TRIP Protective Function that dropped out last;
T – Pickup= 320ms Running time from general pickup to dropout;
T – OFF = 197ms Running time from general pickup to the first trip command
Figure A-77 Display of Spontaneous Annunciations in the HMI – Example
Graphic Display All devices featuring a graphic display allow you to select whether or not to view auto-
matically the most important fault data on the display after a general pick-up (see Sub-
section 2.20.1.2). The information corresponds to those of Figure A-77.
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 499

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix
A.4.7 Pre-Defined CFC Charts
Some CFC Charts are already supplied with the SIPROTEC® device.
Depending on the variant the following charts may be implemented:
Device and System The NEGATOR block assigns the input signal “DataStop“ directly to an output. This is
Logic not directly possible without the interconnection of this block.
IN: Device, General OUT: Control Device UnblockDT IntSP

>DataStop SP
OUT: Device, General Feeder gnd IntSP

IN: Control Device
GndSwit. DP
IN: Control Device,

52 Breaker DP
OUT: Device, General Brk OPENEDIntSP
IN: P.System Data 2
Relay TRIP OUT
Figure A-78 Device and System Logic
Set points Using modules on the running sequence “measured value processing”, a low current
monitor for the three phase currents is implemented. The output message is set high
as soon as one of the three phase currents falls below the set threshold:
IN: Set points 37-1 LV

IN: Measurement Ia = MV
OUT: Set points SP. 37-1

IN: Set points 37-1 LV alarm OUT
IN: Measurement Ib = MV
IN: Set points 37-1 LV

IN: Measurement Ic = MV
Figure A-79 Undercurrent monitoring (ANSI 37-1)
500 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
Blocks of the task level “MW_BEARB” (measured value processing) are used to im-
plement the overcurrent monitoring and the power monitoring.
IN: Set points I Admd> LV OUT: Set points SP. I A dmd> OUT
IN: Demand meter Ia dmd= MV
IN: Set points I Bdmd> LV OUT: Set points SP. I B dmd> OUT
IN: Demand meter Ib dmd= MV
IN: Set points I Cdmd> LV OUT: Set points SP. I C dmd> OUT
IN: Demand meter Ic dmd= MV
IN: Set points I1dmd> LV OUT: Set points SP. I1 dmd> OUT
IN: Demand meter I1 dmd= MV
Figure A-80 Overcurrent monitoring
IN: Set points |Pdmd|> LV OUT: Set points SP.

|Pdmd|> OUT
IN: Demand meter P dmd = MV
IN: Set points |Qdmd|> LV

OUT: Set points SP.
|Qdmd|> OUT
IN: Demand meter Q dmd = MV
OUT: Set points SP.

IN: Set points |Sdmd|> LV
|Sdmd|> OUT
IN: Demand meter S dmd = MV
IN: Set points |PF|< LU

OUT: Set points SP.
PF(55)alarm OUT
IN: Measurement PF = MV
Figure A-81 Power monitoring
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 501

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix
Interlocking Standard Interlocking for three switching devices
Worksheet 1:
Interlocking .15 X1
IN: Control Device 52Breaker DP Interlocking .14 X1
Interlocking .13 X1
IN: Control Device 52Breaker DP
Interlocking .15 X2
IN: Control Device Disc.Swit. DP
IN: Control Device Disc.Swit. DP Interlocking .14 X2

Interlocking .13 X3
IN: Control Device GndSwit. DP
Interlocking .15 X3
Interlocking .14 X3
IN: Control Device GndSwit. DP
OUT: Control Device 52 Close
IN: Process Data >CB ready SP IntSP
IN: Process Data >DoorClose SP
Worksheet 2 (continuation of Worksheet 1):
IN: Process Data >DoorClose SP OUT:Control Device 52 Open IntSP
Interlocking. 1 Y Annunciation OUT:Control Device Disc.Close IntSP

Interlocking. 8 Y
Interlocking. 5 Y Annunciation
Interlocking. 1 Y Annunciation OUT:Control Device Disc.Open IntSP

Interlocking. 8 Y
Interlocking. 10 Y
Interlocking. 1 Y Annunciation OUT: Control Device GndSw Cl. IntSP

Interlocking. 3 Y Annunciation OUT: Control Device GndSw Open IntSP
Interlocking. 10 Y
Figure A-82 Standard Interlocking For Circuit Breaker, Disconnector and Ground Switch
502 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A.5 Interoperability List
A.5 Interoperability List
1. Physical layer
1.1 Electrical interface
X EIA RS-485 X Number of loads for one equipment: 32
1.2 Optical interface
X Glass fibre F-SMA type connector
X Plastic fibre X BFOC/2,5 type connector
1.3 Transmission speed
X 9600 bit/s X 19200 bit/s
2. Link layer
There are no choices for the link layer
3. Application layer
3.1 Transmission mode for application data Mode 1 (least significant octet first) as defined in 4.10 of
IEC 60870-5-4
3.2 Common address of ASDU
X One common address of ADSU More than one common address of ASDU
(identical with station address)
3.3 Selection of standard information numbers in monitor direction
3.3.1 System functions in monitor direction
X 0 End of general interrogation X 0 Time synchronization
X 2 Reset FCB X 3 Reset CU
X 4 Start/restart X 5 Power on
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.4 see separate table in the device manual (Information List in the following section)
3.3.5
3.3.6
3.3.7 Measurands in monitor direction

144 Measurand I X 145 Measurands I, V
146 Measurand I, V, P, Q 147 Measurands IN, VEN
148 Measurands IL1,2,3, VL1,2,3, P, Q, f
3.3.8 Generic functions in monitor direction

240 Read headings of all defined groups 241 Read values of all entries of one group
243 Read directory of a single entry 244 Read value of a single entry
245 End of general interrogation generic 249 Write entry with confirmation
data
250 Write entry with execution 251 Write entry aborted
3.4 Selection of standard information numbers in control direction
3.4.1 System functions in control direction
X 0 Initiation of general interrogation X 0 Time synchronization
3.4.2 General commands in control direction
X 16 Auto-recloser on / off 17 Teleprotection on / off
X 18 Protection on / off X 19 LED reset
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 503

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix
X 23 Activate characteristic 1 X 24 Activate characteristic 2

X 25 Activate characteristic 3 X 26 Activate characteristic 4
3.4.3 Generic functions in control direction

240 Read headings of all defined groups 241 Read values of all entries of one group
243 Read directory of a single entry 244 Read value of a single entry
245 General interrogation of generic data 248 Write entry
249 Write entry with confirmation 250 Write entry with execution
251 Write entry abort
3.5 Basic application functions
X Test mode X Blocking of monitor direction
X Disturbance data Generic services
X Private data
3.6 Miscellaneous
Measurand max. value = rated value x

1.2 2.4
Current L1
Current L2 X
Current L3
Voltage L1-E
Voltage L2-E
Voltage L3-E
Voltage L1-L2 X
Active power P
Reactive power Q
Frequency f
504 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A.6 Protocol-dependent functions
A.6 Protocol-dependent functions
Protocol → IEC 60870–5–103 Profibus FMS Profibus DP DNP3.0 Modbus ASCII/ Additional
RTU interface
Function ß (optional)
Operational mea- Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

sured values
Metered values Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Fault recording Yes Yes No. Only via addi- No. Only via addi- No. Only via addi- Yes
tional service inter- tional service inter- tional service inter-
face face face
Remote relay setting No. Only via addi- Yes No. Only via addi- No. Only via addi- No. Only via addi- Yes
tional service inter- tional service inter- tional service inter- tional service inter-
face face face face
User-defined mes- Yes Yes Pre-defined “User- Pre-defined “User- Pre-defined “User- Yes
sages and switching defined messag- defined messag- defined messages”
objects es” in CFC es” in CFC in CFC
Time synchronization Via protocol; Via protocol; Via DCF77/IRIG B; Via protocol; Via DCF77/IRIG B; –
DCF77/IRIG B; DCF77/IRIG B; Interface; DCF77/IRIG B; Interface;
Interface; Interface; Binary input Interface; Binary input
Binary input Binary input Binary input
Messages with time Yes Yes No Yes No Yes

stamp
Commissioning aids
• Measured value Yes Yes No No No Yes
indication block-
ing
• Creating test mes- Yes Yes No No No Yes
sages
Physical mode Asynchronous Asynchronous Asynchronous Asynchronous Asynchronous –
Transmission mode Cyclically/Event Cyclically/ Cyclically Cyclically/Event Cyclically –

Event
Baudrate 4800 to 38400 Up to 1.5 Up to 1.5 MBaud 4800 to 19200 2400 to 19200 4800 to
MBaud 115200
Type RS232 RS485 RS485 RS485 RS485 RS232

RS485 Optical fibre Optical fibre Optical fibre Optical fibre RS485
Optical fibre Optical fi-
• Single ring • Double ring
bre
• Double ring
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 505

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix
A.7 Functions Overview
Note: Addresses may be missing depending on the type and the ordered variant

103 Grp Chge OPTION Disabled Disabled Setting Group Change Option
Enabled
104 OSC. FAULT REC. Disabled Disabled Oscillographic Fault Records

Enabled
112 Charac. Phase Disabled Definite Time only 50/51

Definite Time only
User Defined Pickup and Reset
Curve
113 Charac. Ground Disabled Definite Time only 50N/51N
Definite Time only
Curve
115 67/67-TOC Disabled Definite Time only 67, 67-TOC

Definite Time only
Curve
116 67N/67N-TOC Disabled Definite Time only 67N, 67N-TOC

Definite Time only
Curve
117 Coldload Pickup Disabled Disabled Cold Load Pickup

Enabled
122 InrushRestraint Disabled Disabled 2nd Harmonic Inrush Restraint

Enabled
131 Sens. Gnd Fault Disabled Disabled (sensitive) Ground fault

Definite Time only
133 INTERM.EF Disabled Disabled Intermittent earth fault protection

with Ignd (measured)
with 3I0 (calculated)
with Ignd,sensitive (measured)
506 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A.7 Functions Overview

140 46 Disabled Disabled 46 Negative Sequence Protec-
Time Overcurrent Curve ANSI tion
Definite Time only
141 48 Disabled Disabled 48 Startup Supervision of Motors

Enabled
142 49 Disabled Disabled 49 Thermal Overload Protection

Without ambient temperature
measurement
With ambient temperature mea-
surement
143 66 #of Starts Disabled Disabled 66 Startup Counter for Motors

Enabled
150 27/59 Disabled Disabled 27, 59 Under/Overvoltage Pro-

Enabled tection
154 81 O/U Disabled Disabled 81 Over/Underfrequency Protec-

Enabled tion

ASYN/SYNCHRON
SYNCHROCHECK

ASYN/SYNCHRON
SYNCHROCHECK

ASYN/SYNCHRON
SYNCHROCHECK

ASYN/SYNCHRON
SYNCHROCHECK
170 50BF Disabled Disabled 50BF Breaker Failure Protection

Enabled
171 79 Auto Recl. Disabled Disabled 79 Auto-Reclose Function

Enabled
180 Fault Locator Disabled Disabled Fault Locator

Enabled
182 74 Trip Ct Supv Disabled Disabled 74TC Trip Circuit Supervision

with 2 Binary Inputs
with 1 Binary Input
190 RTD-BOX INPUT Disabled Disabled External Temperature Input

Port C
Port D
191 RTD CONNECTION 6 RTD simplex operation 6 RTD simplex Ext. Temperature Input Connec-
6 RTD half duplex operation operation tion Type
12 RTD half duplex operation
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 507

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix
A.8 Settings
Note: The following table lists all data which are available in the maximum complement of the devices. Depen-
dent on the ordered model, only those data may be present which are valid for the individual version. In the list
below, the setting ranges and default setting values for the pickup currents are for a device with a nominal cur-
rent rating IN = 1 A. For a nominal current rating IN = 5 A, multiply the Setting Options values and Default Setting
values by 5. Consider the current transformer ratios when setting the device with primary values.
Addresses to which the letter “A“ is attached can only be modified by using the DIGSI® 4 software at “Further
Settings“.
Addr. Setting Title Function Setting Options Default Setting Comments

201 CT Starpoint Power System towards Line towards Line CT Starpoint
Data 1 towards Busbar
202 Vnom PRIMARY Power System 0.10..800.00 kV 12.00 kV Rated Primary Voltage
Data 1
203 Vnom SECON- Power System 100..225 V 100 V Rated Secondary Voltage
DARY Data 1 (L-L)
204 CT PRIMARY Power System 10..50000 A 100 A CT Rated Primary Current

Data 1
205 CT SECONDARY Power System 1A 1A CT Rated Secondary Cur-

Data 1 5A rent
206A Vph / Vdelta Power System 1.00..3.00 1.73 Matching ratio Phase-VT
Data 1 To Open-Delta-VT
209 PHASE SEQ. Power System ABC ABC Phase Sequence

Data 1 ACB
210A TMin TRIP CMD Power System 0.01..32.00 sec 0.15 sec Minimum TRIP Command
Data 1 Duration
211A TMax CLOSE CMD Power System 0.01..32.00 sec 1.00 sec Maximum Close Command
Data 1 Duration
212 BkrClosed I MIN Power System 0.04..1.00 A 0.04 A Closed Breaker Min. Cur-
Data 1 rent Threshold
213 VT Connection Power System Van, Vbn, Vcn Van, Vbn, Vcn VT Connection
Data 1 Vab, Vbc, VGnd
Van, Vbn, Vcn,
VGnd
Van, Vbn, Vcn,
VSyn
214 Rated Frequency Power System 50 Hz 50 Hz Rated Frequency

Data 1 60 Hz
215 Distance Unit Power System km km Distance measurement unit

Data 1 Miles
217 Ignd-CT PRIM Power System 1..50000 A 60 A Ignd-CT rated primary cur-
Data 1 rent
508 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A.8 Settings

218 Ignd-CT SEC Power System 1A 1A Ignd-CT rated secondary
Data 1 5A current
235A ATEX100 Power System NO NO Storage of th. Replicas w/o

Data 1 YES Power Supply
276 TEMP. UNIT Power System Degree Celsius Degree Celsius Unit of temparature measu-
Data 1 Degree Fahrenheit rement
302 CHANGE Change Group Group A Group A Change to Another Setting

Group B Group
Group C
Group D
Binary Input
Protocol
401 WAVEFORMTRIG- Oscillographic Save with Pickup Save with Pickup Waveform Capture
GER Fault Records Save with TRIP
Start with TRIP
402 WAVEFORM Oscillographic Fault event Fault event Scope of Waveform Data
DATA Fault Records Power System fault
403 MAX. LENGTH Oscillographic 0.30..5.00 sec 2.00 sec Max. length of a Waveform
Fault Records Capture Record
404 PRE. TRIG. TIME Oscillographic 0.05..0.50 sec 0.25 sec Captured Waveform Prior
Fault Records to Trigger
405 POST REC. TIME Oscillographic 0.05..0.50 sec 0.10 sec Captured Waveform after
Fault Records Event
406 BinIn CAPT.TIME Oscillographic 0.10..5.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec Capture Time via Binary
Fault Records Input
610 FltDisp.LED/LCD Device, Gene- Display Targets on Display Targets on Fault Display on LED / LCD
ral Settings every Pickup every Pickup
Display Targets on
TRIP only
611 Spont. FltDisp. Device, Gene- YES NO Spontaneous display of

ral Settings NO flt.annunciations
613A 50N/51N/67N w. Power System Ignd (measured) Ignd (measured) 50N/51N/67N Ground
Data 1 3I0 (calculated) Overcurrent with
1101 FullScaleVolt. Power System 0.10..800.00 kV 12.00 kV Measurem:FullScaleVol-

Data 2 tage(Equipm.rating)
1102 FullScaleCurr. Power System 10..50000 A 100 A Measurem:FullScaleCur-

Data 2 rent(Equipm.rating)
1103 RG/RL Ratio Power System -0.33..7.00 1.00 RG/RL - Ratio of Gnd to
Data 2 Line Resistance
1104 XG/XL Ratio Power System -0.33..7.00 1.00 XG/XL - Ratio of Gnd to
Data 2 Line Reactance
1105 x' Power System 0.010..10.000 Ohm / 1.000 Ohm / mile x' - Line Reactance per
Data 2 mile length unit
1106 x' Power System 0.005..6.215 Ohm / 0.620 Ohm / km x' - Line Reactance per
Data 2 km length unit
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 509

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix

1107 I MOTOR START Power System 0.60..10.00 A 2.50 A Motor Start Current (Block
Data 2 49, Start 48)
1201 FCT 50/51 50/51 Phase/ ON ON 50, 51 Phase Time Over-

Ground Over- OFF current
current
1202 50-2 PICKUP 50/51 Phase/ 0.10..35.00 A; ∞ 2.00 A 50-2 Pickup

Ground Over-
current
1203 50-2 DELAY 50/51 Phase/ 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec 50-2 Time Delay
Ground Over-
current
1204 50-1 PICKUP 50/51 Phase/ 0.10..35.00 A; ∞ 1.00 A 50-1 Pickup

Ground Over-
current
1205 50-1 DELAY 50/51 Phase/ 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec 50-1 Time Delay
Ground Over-
current
1207 51 PICKUP 50/51 Phase/ 0.10..4.00 A 1.00 A 51 Pickup

Ground Over-
current
1208 51 TIME DIAL 50/51 Phase/ 0.05..3.20 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec 51 Time Dial
Ground Over-
current
1209 51 TIME DIAL 50/51 Phase/ 0.50..15.00; ∞ 5.00 51 Time Dial

Ground Over-
current
1210 51 Drop-out 50/51 Phase/ Instantaneous Disk Emulation Drop-out characteristic

Ground Over- Disk Emulation
current
1211 51 IEC CURVE 50/51 Phase/ Normal Inverse Normal Inverse IEC Curve
Ground Over- Very Inverse
current Extremely Inverse
Long Inverse
1212 51 ANSI CURVE 50/51 Phase/ Very Inverse Very Inverse ANSI Curve
Ground Over- Inverse
current Short Inverse
Long Inverse
Moderately Inverse
Extremely Inverse
Definite Inverse
1213A MANUAL CLOSE 50/51 Phase/ 50-2 instantane- 50-2 instantane- Manual Close Mode
Ground Over- ously ously
current 50 -1 instantane-
ously
51 instantaneously
Inactive
510 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A.8 Settings

1214A 50-2 active 50/51 Phase/ Always Always 50-2 active
Ground Over- with 79 active
current
1230 51/51N 50/51 Phase/ 1.00..20.00 I / Ip; ∞ 51/51N

Ground Over- 0.01..999.00 Time
current Dial
1231 MofPU Res T/Tp 50/51 Phase/ 0.05..0.95 I / Ip; ∞ Multiple of Pickup <-> T/Tp
current Dial
1301 FCT 50N/51N 50/51 Phase/ ON ON 50N, 51N Ground Time

Ground Over- OFF Overcurrent
current
1302 50N-2 PICKUP 50/51 Phase/ 0.05..35.00 A; ∞ 0.50 A 50N-2 Pickup

Ground Over-
current
1303 50N-2 DELAY 50/51 Phase/ 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 0.10 sec 50N-2 Time Delay
Ground Over-
current
1304 50N-1 PICKUP 50/51 Phase/ 0.05..35.00 A; ∞ 0.20 A 50N-1 Pickup

Ground Over-
current
1305 50N-1 DELAY 50/51 Phase/ 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec 50N-1 Time Delay
Ground Over-
current
1307 51N PICKUP 50/51 Phase/ 0.05..4.00 A 0.20 A 51N Pickup

Ground Over-
current
1308 51N TIME DIAL 50/51 Phase/ 0.05..3.20 sec; ∞ 0.20 sec 51N Time Dial
Ground Over-
current
1309 51N TIME DIAL 50/51 Phase/ 0.50..15.00; ∞ 5.00 51N Time Dial
Ground Over-
current
1310 51N RESET 50/51 Phase/ Instantaneous Disk Emulation Drop-Out Characteristic
Ground Over- Disk Emulation
current
1311 51N IEC CURVE 50/51 Phase/ Normal Inverse Normal Inverse IEC Curve
Ground Over- Very Inverse
current Extremely Inverse
Long Inverse
1312 51N ANSI CURVE 50/51 Phase/ Very Inverse Very Inverse ANSI Curve
Ground Over- Inverse
current Short Inverse
Long Inverse
Moderately Inverse
Extremely Inverse
Definite Inverse
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 511

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix

1313A MANUALCLOSE- 50/51 Phase/ 50N-2 instantane- 50N-2 instantane- Manual Close Mode
MODE Ground Over- ously ously
current 50N-1 instantane-
ously
51N instantaneously
Inactive
1314A 50N-2 active 50/51 Phase/ Always Always 50N-2 active

Ground Over- with 79 Active
current
1330 50N/51N 50/51 Phase/ 1.00..20.00 I / Ip; ∞ 50N/51N

current Dial
1331 MofPU Res T/TEp 50/51 Phase/ 0.05..0.95 I / Ip; ∞ Multiple of Pickup <-> T/
Ground Over- 0.01..999.00 Time TEp
current Dial
1501 FCT 67/67-TOC 67 Directional OFF OFF 67, 67-TOC Phase Time
Phase/Ground ON Overcurrent
Overcurrent
1502 67-2 PICKUP 67 Directional 0.10..35.00 A; ∞ 2.00 A 67-2 Pickup

Phase/Ground
Overcurrent
1503 67-2 DELAY 67 Directional 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 0.10 sec 67-2 Time Delay
Phase/Ground
Overcurrent
1504 67-1 PICKUP 67 Directional 0.10..35.00 A; ∞ 1.00 A 67-1 Pickup

Phase/Ground
Overcurrent
1505 67-1 DELAY 67 Directional 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec 67-1Time Delay
Phase/Ground
Overcurrent
1507 67-TOC PICKUP 67 Directional 0.10..4.00 A 1.00 A 67-TOC Pickup

Phase/Ground
Overcurrent
1508 67 TIME DIAL 67 Directional 0.05..3.20 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec 67-TOC Time Dial
Phase/Ground
Overcurrent
1509 67 TIME DIAL 67 Directional 0.50..15.00; ∞ 5.00 67-TOC Time Dial

Phase/Ground
Overcurrent
1510 67-TOC Drop-out 67 Directional Instantaneous Disk Emulation Drop-Out Characteristic

Phase/Ground Disk Emulation
Overcurrent
1511 67- IEC CURVE 67 Directional Normal Inverse Normal Inverse IEC Curve
Phase/Ground Very Inverse
Overcurrent Extremely Inverse
Long Inverse
512 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A.8 Settings

1512 67- ANSI CURVE 67 Directional Very Inverse Very Inverse ANSI Curve
Phase/Ground Inverse
Overcurrent Short Inverse
Long Inverse
Moderately Inverse
Extremely Inverse
Definite Inverse
1513A MANUALCLOSE- 67 Directional 67-2 instantane- 67-2 instantane- Manual Close Mode
MODE Phase/Ground ously ously
Overcurrent 67-1 instantane-
ously
67-TOC instantane-
ously
Inactive
1514A 67 active 67 Directional with 79 active always 67 active

Phase/Ground always
Overcurrent
1515A Normal Load 67 Directional Inductive (135°) Inductive (135°) Normal Load (Torque angle
Phase/Ground Resistive (90°) of dir. fct)
Overcurrent Capacitive(45°)
1516 67 Direction 67 Directional Forward Forward Phase Direction

Phase/Ground Reverse
Overcurrent
1530 67 67 Directional 1.00..20.00 I / Ip; ∞ 67

Phase/Ground 0.01..999.00 Time
Overcurrent Dial
1531 MofPU Res T/Tp 67 Directional 0.05..0.95 I / Ip; ∞ Multiple of Pickup <-> T/Tp
Overcurrent Dial
1601 FCT 67N/67N-TOC 67 Directional OFF OFF 67N, 67N-TOC Ground

Phase/Ground ON Time Overcurrent
Overcurrent
1602 67N-2 PICKUP 67 Directional 0.05..35.00 A; ∞ 0.50 A 67N-2 Pickup

Phase/Ground
Overcurrent
1603 67N-2 DELAY 67 Directional 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 0.10 sec 67N-2 Time Delay
Phase/Ground
Overcurrent
1604 67N-1 PICKUP 67 Directional 0.05..35.00 A; ∞ 0.20 A 67N-1 Pickup

Phase/Ground
Overcurrent
1605 67N-1 DELAY 67 Directional 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec 67N-1 Time Delay
Phase/Ground
Overcurrent
1607 67N-TOC PICKUP 67 Directional 0.05..4.00 A 0.20 A 67N-TOC Pickup

Phase/Ground
Overcurrent
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 513

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix

1608 67N-TOC T-DIAL 67 Directional 0.05..3.20 sec; ∞ 0.20 sec 67N-TOC Time Dial
Phase/Ground
Overcurrent
1609 67N-TOC T-DIAL 67 Directional 0.50..15.00; ∞ 5.00 67N-TOC Time Dial

Phase/Ground
Overcurrent
1610 67N-TOC RESET 67 Directional Instantaneous Disk Emulation Drop-Out Characteristic

Phase/Ground Disk Emulation
Overcurrent
1611 67N-TOC IEC 67 Directional Normal Inverse Normal Inverse IEC Curve
Phase/Ground Very Inverse
Overcurrent Extremely Inverse
Long Inverse
1612 67N-TOC ANSI 67 Directional Very Inverse Very Inverse ANSI Curve
Phase/Ground Inverse
Overcurrent Short Inverse
Long Inverse
Moderately Inverse
Extremely Inverse
Definite Inverse
1613A MANUALCLOSE- 67 Directional 67N-2 instantane- 67N-2 instantane- Manual Close Mode
MODE Phase/Ground ously ously
Overcurrent 67N-1 instantane-
ously
67N-TOC instanta-
neously
Inactive
1614A 67N active 67 Directional always always 67N active

Phase/Ground with 79 active
Overcurrent
1615A Normal Load 67 Directional Inductive (135°) Inductive (135°) Normal Load (Torque angle
Phase/Ground Resistive (90°) of dir. fct)
Overcurrent Capacitive(45°)
1616 67N Direction 67 Directional Forward Forward Ground Direction

Phase/Ground Reverse
Overcurrent
1630 M.of PU TD 67 Directional 1.00..20.00 I / Ip; ∞ Multiples of PU Time-Dial

Overcurrent Dial
1631 I/IEp Rf T/TEp 67 Directional 0.05..0.95 I / Ip; ∞ 67N TOC

Overcurrent Dial
1701 COLDLOAD PIK- Cold Load Pik- OFF OFF Cold-Load-Pickup Function
KUP kup ON
1702 Start Condition Cold Load Pik- No Current No Current Start Condition
kup Breaker Contact
79M Auto Reclo-
sing ready
514 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A.8 Settings

1703 CB Open Time Cold Load Pik- 0..21600 sec 3600 sec Circuit Breaker OPEN Time
kup
1704 Active Time Cold Load Pik- 1..21600 sec 3600 sec Active Time
kup
1705 Stop Time Cold Load Pik- 1..600 sec; ∞ 600 sec Stop Time
kup
1801 50c-2 PICKUP Cold Load Pik- 0.10..35.00 A; ∞ 10.00 A 50c-2 Pickup
kup
1802 50c-2 DELAY Cold Load Pik- 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec 50c-2 Time Delay
kup
kup
kup
1805 51c PICKUP Cold Load Pik- 0.10..4.00 A; ∞ 1.50 A 51c Pickup
kup
1806 51c TIME DIAL Cold Load Pik- 0.05..3.20 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec 51c Time dial
kup
1807 51c TIME DIAL Cold Load Pik- 0.50..15.00; ∞ 5.00 51c Time dial
kup
1901 50Nc-2 PICKUP Cold Load Pik- 0.05..35.00 A; ∞ 7.00 A 50Nc-2 Pickup
kup
1902 50Nc-2 DELAY Cold Load Pik- 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec 50Nc-2 Time Delay
kup
kup
kup
1905 51Nc PICKUP Cold Load Pik- 0.10..4.00 A; ∞ 1.00 A 51Nc Pickup
kup
1906 51Nc T-DIAL Cold Load Pik- 0.05..3.20 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec 51Nc Time Dial
kup
1907 51Nc T-DIAL Cold Load Pik- 0.50..15.00; ∞ 5.00 51Nc Time Dial
kup
kup
kup
kup
kup
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 515

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix

2005 67c-TOC PICKUP Cold Load Pik- 0.10..4.00 A; ∞ 1.50 A 67c Pickup
kup
2006 67c-TOC T-DIAL Cold Load Pik- 0.05..3.20 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec 67c Time Dial
kup
2007 67c-TOC T-DIAL Cold Load Pik- 0.50..15.00; ∞ 5.00 67c Time Dial
kup
kup
kup
kup
kup
2105 67Nc-TOC PICKUP Cold Load Pik- 0.05..4.00 A; ∞ 1.00 A 67Nc-TOC Pickup
kup
2106 67Nc-TOC T-DIAL Cold Load Pik- 0.05..3.20 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec 67Nc-TOC Time Dial
kup
2107 67Nc-TOC T-DIAL Cold Load Pik- 0.50..15.00; ∞ 5.00 67Nc-TOC Time Dial
kup
2201 INRUSH REST. 50/51 Phase/ OFF OFF Inrush Restraint

Ground Over- ON
current
2202 2nd HARMONIC 50/51 Phase/ 10..45 % 15 % 2nd. harmonic in % of fun-

Ground Over- damental
current
2203 CROSS BLOCK 50/51 Phase/ NO NO Cross Block

Ground Over- YES
current
2204 CROSS BLK 50/51 Phase/ 0.00..180.00 sec 0.00 sec Cross Block Time
TIMER Ground Over-
current
2205 I Max 50/51 Phase/ 0.30..25.00 A 7.50 A Maximum Current for

Ground Over- Inrush Restraint
current
3101 Sens. Gnd Fault 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, OFF OFF (Sensitive) Ground Fault
67Ns (Sensi- ON
tive) Gnd Flt Alarm Only
3102 CT Err. I1 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, 0.001..1.600 A 0.050 A Current I1 for CT Angle
67Ns (Sensi- Error
tive) Gnd Flt
67Ns (Sensi- Error
tive) Gnd Flt
516 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A.8 Settings

3103 CT Err. F1 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, 0.0..5.0 ° 0.0 ° CT Angle Error at I1
67Ns (Sensi-
tive) Gnd Flt
67Ns (Sensi- Error
tive) Gnd Flt
67Ns (Sensi- Error
tive) Gnd Flt
3105 CT Err. F2 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, 0.0..5.0 ° 0.0 ° CT Angle Error at I2

67Ns (Sensi-
tive) Gnd Flt
3106 VPH MIN 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, 10..100 V 40 V L-Gnd Voltage of Faulted
67Ns (Sensi- Phase Vph Min
tive) Gnd Flt
3107 VPH MAX 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, 10..100 V 75 V L-Gnd Voltage of Unfaul-
67Ns (Sensi- ted Phase Vph Max
tive) Gnd Flt
3109 64-1 VGND 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, 1.8..130.0 V 40.0 V 64-1 Ground Displacement
67Ns (Sensi- Voltage
tive) Gnd Flt
3110 64-1 VGND 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, 10.0..225.0 V 70.0 V 64-1 Ground Displacement
67Ns (Sensi- Voltage
tive) Gnd Flt
3111 T-DELAY Pickup 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, 0.04..320.00 sec; ∞ 1.00 sec Time-DELAY Pickup
67Ns (Sensi-
tive) Gnd Flt
3112 64-1 DELAY 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, 0.10..40000.00 sec; 10.00 sec 64-1 Time Delay
67Ns (Sensi- ∞
tive) Gnd Flt
3113 50Ns-2 PICKUP 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, 0.001..1.500 A 0.300 A 50Ns-2 Pickup
67Ns (Sensi-
tive) Gnd Flt
67Ns (Sensi-
tive) Gnd Flt
3114 50Ns-2 DELAY 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, 0.00..320.00 sec; ∞ 1.00 sec 50Ns-2 Time Delay
67Ns (Sensi-
tive) Gnd Flt
3115 67Ns-2 DIRECT. 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, Forward Forward 67Ns-2 Direction
67Ns (Sensi- Reverse
tive) Gnd Flt Non-Directional
67Ns (Sensi-
tive) Gnd Flt
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 517

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix

67Ns (Sensi-
tive) Gnd Flt
3118 50Ns-1 DELAY 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, 0.00..320.00 sec; ∞ 2.00 sec 50Ns-1 Time delay
67Ns (Sensi-
tive) Gnd Flt
3119 51Ns PICKUP 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, 0.001..1.400 A 0.100 A 51Ns Pickup
67Ns (Sensi-
tive) Gnd Flt
3119 51Ns PICKUP 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, 0.05..4.00 A 1.00 A 51Ns Pickup
67Ns (Sensi-
tive) Gnd Flt
3120 51Ns TIME DIAL 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, 0.10..4.00 sec; ∞ 1.00 sec 51Ns Time Dial
67Ns (Sensi-
tive) Gnd Flt
3122 67Ns-1 DIRECT. 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, Forward Forward 67Ns-1 Direction
67Ns (Sensi- Reverse
tive) Gnd Flt Non-Directional
3123 RELEASE 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, 0.001..1.200 A 0.010 A Release directional ele-
DIRECT. 67Ns (Sensi- ment
tive) Gnd Flt
3123 RELEASE 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, 0.05..30.00 A 0.50 A Release directional ele-
DIRECT. 67Ns (Sensi- ment
tive) Gnd Flt
3124 PHI CORRECTION 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, -45.0..45.0 ° 0.0 ° Correction Angle for Dir.
67Ns (Sensi- Determination
tive) Gnd Flt
3125 MEAS. METHOD 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, COS Phi COS Phi Measurement method for
67Ns (Sensi- SIN phi Direction
tive) Gnd Flt
3126 RESET DELAY 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, 0..60 sec 1 sec Reset Delay
67Ns (Sensi-
tive) Gnd Flt
3130 PU CRITERIA 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, Vgnd OR INs Vgnd OR INs Sensitive Ground Fault
67Ns (Sensi- Vgnd AND INs PICKUP criteria
tive) Gnd Flt
3131 M.of PU TD 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, 1.00..20.00 Multiple Multiples of PU Time-Dial

67Ns (Sensi- of Pickup; ∞
tive) Gnd Flt 0.01..999.00 Time
Dial
3301 INTERM.EF Intermittent OFF OFF Intermittent earth fault pro-

Earth Fault ON tection
3302 Iie> Intermittent 0.05..35.00 A 1.00 A Pick-up value of interm. E/F

Earth Fault stage
Earth Fault stage
518 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A.8 Settings

Earth Fault stage
3303 T-det.ext. Intermittent 0.00..10.00 sec 0.10 sec Detection extension time
Earth Fault
3304 T-sum det. Intermittent 0.00..100.00 sec 20.00 sec Sum of detection times
Earth Fault
3305 T-reset Intermittent 1..600 sec 300 sec Reset time

Earth Fault
3306 Nos.det. Intermittent 2..10 3 No. of det. for start of int. E/

Earth Fault F prot
4001 FCT 46 46 Negative OFF OFF 46 Negative Sequence Pro-

Sequence ON tection
(Time Overcur-
rent)
4002 46-1 PICKUP 46 Negative 0.10..3.00 A 0.10 A 46-1 Pickup
Sequence
(Time Overcur-
rent)
4003 46-1 DELAY 46 Negative 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 1.50 sec 46-1 Time Delay
Sequence
(Time Overcur-
rent)
4004 46-2 PICKUP 46 Negative 0.10..3.00 A 0.50 A 46-2 Pickup

Sequence
(Time Overcur-
rent)
4005 46-2 DELAY 46 Negative 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 1.50 sec 46-2 Time Delay
Sequence
(Time Overcur-
rent)
4006 46 IEC CURVE 46 Negative Normal Inverse Extremely Inverse IEC Curve
Sequence Very Inverse
(Time Overcur- Extremely Inverse
rent)
4007 46 ANSI CURVE 46 Negative Extremely Inverse Extremely Inverse ANSI Curve
Sequence Inverse
(Time Overcur- Moderately Inverse
rent) Very Inverse
4008 46-TOC PICKUP 46 Negative 0.10..2.00 A 0.90 A 46-TOC Pickup

Sequence
(Time Overcur-
rent)
4009 46-TOC TIMEDIAL 46 Negative 0.50..15.00; ∞ 5.00 46-TOC Time Dial

Sequence
(Time Overcur-
rent)
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 519

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix

4010 46-TOC TIMEDIAL 46 Negative 0.05..3.20 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec 46-TOC Time Dial
Sequence
(Time Overcur-
rent)
4011 46-TOC RESET 46 Negative Instantaneous Instantaneous 46-TOC Drop Out

Sequence Disk Emulation
(Time Overcur-
rent)
4101 FCT 48/66 48/66 Motor OFF OFF 48 / 66 Motor (Startup

(Startup Moni- ON Monitor/Counter)
tor / Counter)
4102 STARTUP CUR- 48/66 Motor 1.00..16.00 A 5.00 A Startup Current

RENT (Startup Moni-
tor / Counter)
4103 STARTUP TIME 48/66 Motor 1.0..180.0 sec 10.0 sec Startup Time
(Startup Moni-
tor / Counter)
4104 LOCK ROTOR 48/66 Motor 0.5..120.0 sec; ∞ 2.0 sec Permissible Locked Rotor
TIME (Startup Moni- Time
tor / Counter)
4201 FCT 49 49 Thermal OFF OFF 49 Thermal overload pro-

Overload ON tection
Alarm Only
4202 49 K-FACTOR 49 Thermal 0.10..4.00 1.10 49 K-Factor

Overload
4203 TIME CONSTANT 49 Thermal 1.0..999.9 min 100.0 min Time Constant
Overload
4204 49 Θ ALARM 49 Thermal 50..100 % 90 % 49 Thermal Alarm Stage

Overload
4205 I ALARM 49 Thermal 0.10..4.00 A 1.00 A Current Overload Alarm

Overload Setpoint
4207A Kτ-FACTOR 49 Thermal 1.0..10.0 1.0 Kt-FACTOR when motor

Overload stops
4208A T EMERGENCY 49 Thermal 10..15000 sec 100 sec Emergency time

Overload
4209 49 TEMP. RISE I 49 Thermal 40..200 °C 100 °C 49 Temperature rise at

Overload rated sec. curr.
4210 49 TEMP. RISE I 49 Thermal 104..392 °F 212 °F 49 Temperature rise at

Overload rated sec. curr.
4301 FCT 66 48/66 Motor OFF OFF 66 Startup Counter for

(Startup Moni- ON Motors
tor / Counter)
4302 IStart/IMOTnom 48/66 Motor 3.0..10.0 4.9 I Start / I Motor nominal

(Startup Moni-
tor / Counter)
520 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A.8 Settings

4303 T START MAX 48/66 Motor 3..320 sec 10 sec Maximum Permissible Star-
(Startup Moni- ting Time
tor / Counter)
4304 T Equal 48/66 Motor 0.0..320.0 min 1.0 min Temperature Equalizaton
(Startup Moni- Time
tor / Counter)
4305 I MOTOR NOMI- 48/66 Motor 0.20..1.20 A 1.00 A Rated Motor Current
NAL (Startup Moni-
tor / Counter)
4306 MAX.WARM 48/66 Motor 1..4 2 Maximum Number of Warm

STARTS (Startup Moni- Starts
tor / Counter)
4307 #COLD-#WARM 48/66 Motor 1..2 1 Number of Cold Starts -

(Startup Moni- Warm Starts
tor / Counter)
4308 Kτ at STOP 48/66 Motor 0.2..100.0 5.0 Extension of Time Constant

(Startup Moni- at Stop
tor / Counter)
4309 Kτ at RUNNING 48/66 Motor 0.2..100.0 2.0 Extension of Time Constant

(Startup Moni- at Running
tor / Counter)
4310 T MIN. INHIBIT 48/66 Motor 0.2..120.0 min 6.0 min Minimum Restart Inhibit
(Startup Moni- Time
tor / Counter)
5001 FCT 59 27/59 Under/ OFF OFF 59 Overvoltage Protection

Over Voltage ON
Alarm Only
5002 59-1 PICKUP 27/59 Under/ 40..260 V 110 V 59-1 Pickup

Over Voltage

Over Voltage
5004 59-1 DELAY 27/59 Under/ 0.00..100.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec 59-1 Time Delay
Over Voltage

Over Voltage

Over Voltage
Over Voltage
5101 FCT 27 27/59 Under/ OFF OFF 27 Undervoltage Protection

Over Voltage ON
Alarm Only

Over Voltage
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 521

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix

Over Voltage
5105A 27-1 DOUT RATIO 27/59 Under/ 1.05..3.00 1.20 27-1 Drop out Ratio
Over Voltage
Over Voltage

Over Voltage

Over Voltage
Over Voltage
5120A CURRENT 27/59 Under/ OFF ON Current Supervision

SUPERV. Over Voltage ON
5301 FUSE FAIL MON. Measurement ON OFF Fuse Fail Monitor

Supervision OFF
5302 FUSE FAIL 3Vo Measurement 10..100 V 30 V Zero Sequence Voltage

Supervision
5303 FUSE FAIL RESID Measurement 0.10..1.00 A 0.10 A Residual Current

Supervision
5401 FCT 81 O/U 81 Over/Under OFF OFF 81 Over/Under Frequency

Frequency ON Protection
5402 Vmin 81 Over/Under 10..150 V 65 V Minimum required voltage

Frequency for operation
5403 81-1 PICKUP 81 Over/Under 45.50..54.50 Hz 49.50 Hz 81-1 Pickup

Frequency

Frequency
5405 81-1 DELAY 81 Over/Under 0.00..100.00 sec; ∞ 60.00 sec 81-1 Time Delay
Frequency

Frequency

Frequency
5408 81-2 DELAY 81 Over/Under 0.00..100.00 sec; ∞ 30.00 sec 81-2 Time Delay
Frequency

Frequency

Frequency
5411 81-3 DELAY 81 Over/Under 0.00..100.00 sec; ∞ 3.00 sec 81-3 Time delay
Frequency
522 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A.8 Settings

Frequency

Frequency
5414 81-4 DELAY 81 Over/Under 0.00..100.00 sec; ∞ 30.00 sec 81-4 Time delay
Frequency
6101 Synchronizing SYNC Function ON OFF Synchronizing Function

group 1 OFF
6102 SyncCB SYNC Function Synchronizable circuit

group 1 breaker
6103 Vmin SYNC Function 20..125 V 90 V Minimum voltage limit:

group 1 Vmin
6104 Vmax SYNC Function 20..140 V 110 V Maximum voltage limit:

group 1 Vmax
6105 V< SYNC Function 1..60 V 5V Threshold V1, V2 without

group 1 voltage
6106 V> SYNC Function 20..140 V 80 V Threshold V1, V2 with

group 1 voltage
6107 SYNC V1<V2> SYNC Function YES NO ON-Command at V1< and

group 1 NO V2>
6108 SYNC V1>V2< SYNC Function YES NO ON-Command at V1> and

group 1 NO V2<
6109 SYNC V1<V2< SYNC Function YES NO ON-Command at V1< and

group 1 NO V2>
6110A Direct CO SYNC Function YES NO Direct ON-Command

group 1 NO
6111A TSUP VOLTAGE SYNC Function 0.0..60.0 sec 0.1 sec Supervision time of
group 1 V1>;V2> or V1<;V2<
6112 T-SYN. DURATION SYNC Function 0.01..1200.00 sec; 30.00 sec Maximum duration of Syn-
group 1 ∞ chronization
6120 T-CB close SYNC Function 0.01..0.60 sec 0.06 sec Closing (operating) time of
group 1 CB
6121 Balancing V1/V2 SYNC Function 0.50..2.00 1.00 Balancing factor V1/V2
group 1
6122A ANGLE ADJUSTM. SYNC Function 0..360 ° 0° Angle adjustment (transfor-

group 1 mer)
6123 CONNECTIONof SYNC Function A-G A-B Connection of V2

V2 group 1 B-G
C-G
A-B
B-C
C-A
6125 VT Vn2, primary SYNC Function 0.10..800.00 kV 12.00 kV VT nominal voltage V2, pri-
group 1 mary
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 523

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix

6130 dV ASYN V2>V1 SYNC Function 0.5..40.0 V 2.0 V Maximum voltage diffe-
group 1 rence V2>V1
6131 dV ASYN V2<V1 SYNC Function 0.5..40.0 V 2.0 V Maximum voltage diffe-
group 1 rence V2<V1
6132 df ASYN f2>f1 SYNC Function 0.01..2.00 Hz 0.10 Hz Maximum frequency diffe-
group 1 rence f2>f1
6133 df ASYN f2<f1 SYNC Function 0.01..2.00 Hz 0.10 Hz Maximum frequency diffe-
group 1 rence f2<f1
6140 SYNC PERMIS. SYNC Function YES YES Switching at synchronous

group 1 NO conditions
6141 F SYNCHRON SYNC Function 0.01..0.04 Hz 0.01 Hz Frequency threshold ASYN

group 1 <--> SYN
6142 dV SYNC V2>V1 SYNC Function 0.5..40.0 V 5.0 V Maximum voltage diffe-
group 1 rence V2>V1
6143 dV SYNC V2<V1 SYNC Function 0.5..40.0 V 5.0 V Maximum voltage diffe-
group 1 rence V2<V1
6144 dα SYNC α2> α1 SYNC Function 2..80 ° 10 ° Maximum angle difference

group 1 alpha2>alpha1
6145 dα SYNC α2< α1 SYNC Function 2..80 ° 10 ° Maximum angle difference

group 1 alpha2<alpha1
6146 T SYNC-DELAY SYNC Function 0.00..60.00 sec 0.00 sec Release delay at synchro-
group 1 nous conditions
6150 dV SYNCHK SYNC Function 0.5..40.0 V 5.0 V Maximum voltage diffe-

V2>V1 group 1 rence V2>V1

V2<V1 group 1 rence V2<V1
6152 df SYNCHK f2>f1 SYNC Function 0.01..2.00 Hz 0.10 Hz Maximum frequency diffe-
group 1 rence f2>f1
6153 df SYNCHK f2<f1 SYNC Function 0.01..2.00 Hz 0.10 Hz Maximum frequency diffe-
group 1 rence f2<f1
6154 dα SYNCHK SYNC Function 2..80 ° 10 ° Maximum angle difference

α2>α1 group 1 alpha2>alpha1

α2<α1 group 1 alpha2<alpha1

group 2 OFF

group 2 breaker

group 2 Vmin

group 2 Vmax
524 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A.8 Settings

group 2 voltage

group 2 voltage

group 2 NO V2>

group 2 NO V2<

group 2 NO V2>

group 2 NO
group 2 CB
group 2

group 2 mer)

V2 group 2 B-G
C-G
A-B
B-C
C-A
group 2 mary
group 2 rence V2>V1
group 2 rence V2<V1
group 2 rence f2>f1
group 2 rence f2<f1


group 2 <--> SYN
group 2 rence V2>V1
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 525

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix

group 2 rence V2<V1




group 2 rence f2>f1
group 2 rence f2<f1



group 3 OFF

group 3 breaker

group 3 Vmin

group 3 Vmax

group 3 voltage

group 3 voltage

group 3 NO V2>

group 3 NO V2<

group 3 NO V2>

group 3 NO
526 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A.8 Settings

group 3 CB
group 3

group 3 mer)

V2 group 3 B-G
C-G
A-B
B-C
C-A
group 3 mary
group 3 rence V2>V1
group 3 rence V2<V1
group 3 rence f2>f1
group 3 rence f2<f1


group 3 <--> SYN
group 3 rence V2>V1
group 3 rence V2<V1




group 3 rence f2>f1
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 527

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix

group 3 rence f2<f1



group 4 OFF

group 4 breaker

group 4 Vmin

group 4 Vmax

group 4 voltage

group 4 voltage

group 4 NO V2>

group 4 NO V2<

group 4 NO V2>

group 4 NO
group 4 CB
group 4

group 4 mer)

V2 group 4 B-G
C-G
A-B
B-C
C-A
group 4 mary
528 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A.8 Settings

group 4 rence V2>V1
group 4 rence V2<V1
group 4 rence f2>f1
group 4 rence f2<f1


group 4 <--> SYN
group 4 rence V2>V1
group 4 rence V2<V1




group 4 rence f2>f1
group 4 rence f2<f1


7001 FCT 50BF 50BF Breaker OFF OFF 50BF Breaker Failure Pro-
Failure ON tection
7004 Chk BRK CON- 50BF Breaker OFF OFF Check Breaker contacts
TACT Failure ON
7005 TRIP-Timer 50BF Breaker 0.06..60.00 sec; ∞ 0.25 sec TRIP-Timer

Failure
7101 FCT 79 79M Auto OFF OFF 79 Auto-Reclose Function

Reclosing ON
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 529

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix

7103 BLOCK MC Dur. 79M Auto 0.50..320.00 sec; 0 1.00 sec AR blocking duration after
Reclosing manual close
7105 TIME RESTRAINT 79M Auto 0.50..320.00 sec 3.00 sec 79 Auto Reclosing reset
Reclosing time
7108 SAFETY 79 ready 79M Auto 0.01..320.00 sec 0.50 sec Safety Time until 79 is
Reclosing ready
7113 CHECK CB? 79M Auto No check No check Check circuit breaker
Reclosing Check each cycle before AR?
7114 T-Start MONITOR 79M Auto 0.01..320.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec AR start-signal monitoring
Reclosing time
7115 CB TIME OUT 79M Auto 0.10..320.00 sec 3.00 sec Circuit Breaker (CB) Super-
Reclosing vision Time
7116 Max. DEAD EXT. 79M Auto 0.50..1800.00 sec; 100.00 sec Maximum dead time exten-
Reclosing ∞ sion
7117 T-ACTION 79M Auto 0.01..320.00 sec; ∞ 0.20 sec Action time
Reclosing
7127 DEADTIME 1: PH 79M Auto 0.01..320.00 sec 0.50 sec Dead Time 1: Phase Fault
Reclosing
7128 DEADTIME 1: G 79M Auto 0.01..320.00 sec 0.50 sec Dead Time 1: Ground Fault
Reclosing
Reclosing
Reclosing
Reclosing
Reclosing
Reclosing
Reclosing
7135 # OF RECL. GND 79M Auto 0..9 1 Number of Reclosing

Reclosing Cycles Ground
7136 # OF RECL. PH 79M Auto 0..9 1 Number of Reclosing

Reclosing Cycles Phase
7137 Cmd.via control 79M Auto Close command via control

Reclosing device
7138 Internal SYNC 79M Auto Internal 25 synchronisation

Reclosing
7139 External SYNC 79M Auto YES NO External 25 synchronisation

Reclosing NO
530 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A.8 Settings

7140 ZONE 79M Auto OFF OFF ZSC - Zone sequence coor-
SEQ.COORD. Reclosing ON dination
7150 50-1 79M Auto No influence No influence 50-1

Reclosing Starts 79
Stops 79
7151 50N-1 79M Auto No influence No influence 50N-1

Reclosing Starts 79
Stops 79

Reclosing Starts 79
Stops 79

Reclosing Starts 79
Stops 79
7154 51 79M Auto No influence No influence 51

Reclosing Starts 79
Stops 79
7155 51N 79M Auto No influence No influence 51N

Reclosing Starts 79
Stops 79

Reclosing Starts 79
Stops 79

Reclosing Starts 79
Stops 79

Reclosing Starts 79
Stops 79

Reclosing Starts 79
Stops 79
7160 67 TOC 79M Auto No influence No influence 67 TOC

Reclosing Starts 79
Stops 79
7161 67N TOC 79M Auto No influence No influence 67N TOC

Reclosing Starts 79
Stops 79
7162 sens Ground Flt 79M Auto No influence No influence (Sensitive) Ground Fault
Reclosing Starts 79
Stops 79
7163 46 79M Auto No influence No influence 46

Reclosing Starts 79
Stops 79
7164 BINARY INPUT 79M Auto No influence No influence Binary Input

Reclosing Starts 79
Stops 79
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 531

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix

7165 3Pol.PICKUP BLK 79M Auto YES NO 3 Pole Pickup blocks 79
Reclosing NO
7200 bef.1.Cy:50-1 79M Auto Set value, T=T Set value, T=T before 1. Cycle: 50-1
Reclosing instantaneous, T= 0
7201 bef.1.Cy:50N-1 79M Auto Set value, T=T Set value, T=T before 1. Cycle: 50N-1
7204 bef.1.Cy:51 79M Auto Set value, T=T Set value, T=T before 1. Cycle: 51
7205 bef.1.Cy:51N 79M Auto Set value, T=T Set value, T=T before 1. Cycle: 51N
7210 bef.1.Cy:67 TOC 79M Auto Set value, T=T Set value, T=T before 1. Cycle: 67 TOC
7211 bef.1.Cy:67NTOC 79M Auto Set value, T=T Set value, T=T before 1. Cycle: 67N TOC
532 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A.8 Settings

7SJ62/63/64 Manual 533

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix

534 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A.8 Settings

8001 START Fault Locator Pickup Pickup Start fault locator with
TRIP
8101 MEASURE. Measurement OFF ON Measurement Supervision

SUPERV Supervision ON
8102 BALANCE V-LIMIT Measurement 10..100 V 50 V Voltage Threshold for

Supervision Balance Monitoring
8103 BAL. FACTOR V Measurement 0.58..0.90 0.75 Balance Factor for Voltage
Supervision Monitor
8104 BALANCE I LIMIT Measurement 0.10..1.00 A 0.50 A Current Threshold for

Supervision Balance Monitoring
8105 BAL. FACTOR I Measurement 0.10..0.90 0.50 Balance Factor for Current
Supervision Monitor
8106 Σ I THRESHOLD Measurement 0.05..2.00 A; ∞ 0.10 A Summated Current Monito-

Supervision ring Threshold
8107 Σ I FACTOR Measurement 0.00..0.95 0.10 Summated Current Monito-

Supervision ring Factor
8201 FCT 74TC 74TC Trip Cir- ON ON 74TC TRIP Circuit Supervi-
cuit Supervision OFF sion
8301 DMD Interval Demand Mea- 15 Min per., 1 Sub 60 Min per., 1 Sub. Demand Calculation Inter-
surement Setup 15 Min per., 3 Subs vals
15 Min per., 15
Subs
30 Min per., 1 Sub.
60 Min per., 1 Sub.
60 Min per., 10
Subs
5 Min per., 5 Subs
8302 DMD Sync.Time Demand Mea- On the Hour On the Hour Demand Synchronization
surement Setup 15 Min. after Hour Time
30 Min. after Hour
45 Min. after Hour
8311 MinMax cycRESET Min/Max Mea- NO YES Automatic Cyclic Reset
surement Setup YES Function
8312 MiMa RESET TIME Min/Max Mea- 0..1439 min 0 min MinMax Reset Timer
surement Setup
8313 MiMa RESET- Min/Max Mea- 1..365 day(s) 7 day(s) MinMax Reset Cycle Period
CYCLE surement Setup
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 535

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix

8314 MinMax- Min/Max Mea- 1..365 Days 1 Days MinMax Start Reset Cycle
RES.START surement Setup in
8315 MeterResolution Energy Standard Standard Meter resolution

Resolution Factor
10
Resolution Factor
100
9011A RTD 1 TYPE RTD-Box not connected Pt 100 Ohm RTD 1: Type
Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm
9012A RTD 1 LOCATION RTD-Box Oil Oil RTD 1: Location

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
9013 RTD 1 STAGE 1 RTD-Box -50..250 °C; ∞ 100 °C RTD 1: Temperature Stage
1 Pickup
9014 RTD 1 STAGE 1 RTD-Box -58..482 °F; ∞ 212 °F RTD 1: Temperature Stage
1 Pickup
2 Pickup
2 Pickup
9021A RTD 2 TYPE RTD-Box not connected not connected RTD 2: Type
Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm
9022A RTD 2 LOCATION RTD-Box Oil Other RTD 2: Location

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
1 Pickup
1 Pickup
2 Pickup
2 Pickup
Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm
536 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A.8 Settings

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
1 Pickup
1 Pickup
2 Pickup
2 Pickup
Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
1 Pickup
1 Pickup
2 Pickup
2 Pickup
Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
1 Pickup
1 Pickup
2 Pickup
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 537

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix

2 Pickup
Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
1 Pickup
1 Pickup
2 Pickup
2 Pickup
Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
1 Pickup
1 Pickup
2 Pickup
2 Pickup
Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
1 Pickup
538 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A.8 Settings

1 Pickup
2 Pickup
2 Pickup
Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
1 Pickup
1 Pickup
2 Pickup
2 Pickup
9101A RTD10 TYPE RTD-Box not connected not connected RTD10: Type
Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm
9102A RTD10 LOCATION RTD-Box Oil Other RTD10: Location

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
9103 RTD10 STAGE 1 RTD-Box -50..250 °C; ∞ 100 °C RTD10: Temperature

Stage 1 Pickup
9104 RTD10 STAGE 1 RTD-Box -58..482 °F; ∞ 212 °F RTD10: Temperature

Stage 1 Pickup

Stage 2 Pickup

Stage 2 Pickup
Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 539

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other

Stage 1 Pickup

Stage 1 Pickup

Stage 2 Pickup

Stage 2 Pickup
Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other

Stage 1 Pickup

Stage 1 Pickup

Stage 2 Pickup

Stage 2 Pickup
540 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A.9 Overview of the masking features of the user defined information
Type of Information Source Destination CFC Task level
Binary Outputs
Function Keys
Measurement
Binary Inputs
Interlocking
(slow)
PLC1
(fast)
CFC
CFC
LED
PLC
• Annunciation:
Single Point
– SP_Ev Single Point Indication Event – – – – – – – – – –
– SP Single Point Indication ON/OFF X – X X X X – X X –
– SP Single Point Indication Open/Close X – X X X X – X X –
Double Point
– DP Double Point Indication (Breaker indication “00” = X – X – – X X1) X X X2)
not valid/transmitted as “3”)
– DP_I Double Point Indication (Breaker indication “00” = X – X – – X X1) X X X2)
intermediate/transmitted as “0”)
Output Slow
– OUT Output Indication Event – – – – – – – – – –
– OUT Output Indication ON/OFF – – X X X X X 1) X X X2)
– OUT Output Indication Open/Close – – X X X X X1) X X X2)
Output Fast
– OUT Protection ON/OFF – – X X X X – X X X2)
– OUT Protection Open/Close – – X X X X – X X X2)
Tagging
– IntSP_ Ev Internal Single Point Indication Event – – – – – – – – – –
– IntSP Internal Single Point Indication ON/OFF – X X X X X X1) X X X2)
– IntSP Internal Single Point Indication Open/Close – X X X X X X1) X X X2)
– IntDP Internal Double Point Indication (Breaker indication – – X – – X X1) X X X2)
“00” = not valid/transmitted as “3”)
– IntDP_I Internal Double Point Indication (Breaker indication – – X – – X X1) X X X2)
“00” = intermediate/transmitted as “0”)
Tap Changer
– TxTap Transformer Tap Changer X – – – – – – – – –
• Control Commands without feedback:

Single Controls
– C_S ON/OFF – – X X – X – X X X
– C_S Open/Close – – X X – X – X X X
1)
Only for measurement setpoints (is processed cyclically every 600 ms); do not use for binary inputs.
2)
Only for commands (is triggered by commands only).
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 541

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix
Binary Outputs
Function Keys
Measurement
Binary Inputs
Interlocking
(slow)
PLC1
(fast)
CFC
CFC
LED
PLC
Single Controls negated
– C_SN ON/OFF – – X X – X – X X X
– C_SN Open/Close – – X X – X – X X X
Double Controls 1 Trip 1 Close
– C_D2 ON/OFF – – X X – X – X X X
– C_D2 Open/Close – – X X – X – X X X
– C_D2 Transformer Tap Changer – – X X – X – X X X
Double Controls 1 Trip 1 Close 1 Common
– C_D3 ON/OFF – – X X – X – X X X
– C_D4 ON/OFF – – X X – X – X X X
– C_D12 ON/OFF – – X X – X – X X X
Double Controls negated
– C_D2N ON/OFF – – X X – X – X X X
– C_D2N Open/Close – – X X – X – X X X
– C_D2N Transformer Tap Changer – – X X – X – X X X
1)
Only for measurement setpoints (is processed cyclically every 600 ms); do not use for binary inputs.
2
) Only for commands (is triggered by commands only).
542 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
Binary Outputs
Function Keys
Measurement
Binary Inputs
Interlocking
(slow)
PLC1
(fast)
CFC
CFC
LED
PLC
• Control Commands with feedback:
Single Controls
– CF_S Single Point Indication ON/OFF Control – – X X – X – X X X
– SP Feedback X – X X X X – X X X
– CF_S Single Point Indication Open/Close Control – – X X – X – X X X
– CF_S Double Point Indication (Breaker indication Control – – X X – X – X X X
– DP “00” = not valid/transmitted as “3”) Feedback X – X – – X – X X X
– CF_S Double Point Indication (Breaker indication Control – – X X – X – X X X
– DP_I “00” = intermediate/transmitted as “0”) Feedback X – X – – X – X X X
– CF_D2 Single Point Indication ON/OFF Control – – X X – X – X X X
– CF_D2 Single Point Indication Open/Close Control – – X X – X – X X X
– CF_D2 Double Point Indication (Breaker indication Control – – X X – X – X X X
– CF_D2 Transformer Tap Changer Control – – X X – X – X X X
– TxTap Feedback – – – – – – – – – –
Double Controls 1 Trip 1 Close 1 Common
– TxTap Feedback – – – – – – – – – –
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 543

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix
Binary Outputs
Function Keys
Measurement
Binary Inputs
Interlocking
(slow)
PLC1
(fast)
CFC
CFC
LED
PLC
– TxTap Feedback – – – – – – – – – –
– TxTap Feedback – – – – – – – – – –
Double Controls 1 Trip 1 Close negated
– CF_D2N Single Point Indication ON/OFF Control – – X X – X – X X X
– CF_D2N Single Point Indication Open/Close Control – – X X – X – X X X
– CF_D2N Double Point Indication (Breaker indication Control – – X X – X – X X X
– CF_D2N Double Point Indication (Breaker indication Control – – X X – X – X X X
– CF_D2N Transformer Tap Changer Control – – X X – X – X X X
– TxTap Feedback – – – – – – – – – –
• Measured Values:
– MV Measured Value – – – – – X X – – –
– MVU Measured Value, User Defined – – X – – – X – – –
– LV Limit Value – – – – – X X – – –
– LVU Limit Value, User Defined – – – – – X X – – –
• Metered Values:
– MVMV Metered Value of Measured Values – – – – – – – – – –
– PMV Pulse Metered Values X – – – – – – – – –
544 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A.10 Information List
NOTE: The following table lists all data which are available in the maximum complement of the device. Depen-
dent on the ordered model, only those data may be present which are valid for the individual version.
The symbol ’ > ’ indicates that the source of the indication is a binary input.
Indications for T103 are always reported ON / OFF if they are subject to general interrogation for
IEC 60870-5-103. If not, they are reported only as ON.
New user-defined indications or such newly allocated to IEC 60870-5-103 are set to ON / OFF and subjected
to general interrogation if the information type is not a spontaneous event (".._Ev").
In columns “Event Log”, “Trip Log” and “Ground Fault Log” the following applies:
UPPER CASE: ON/OFF definitely set, not allocatable
lower case: preset, allocatable
*: not preset, allocatable
<blank>: neither preset nor allocatable
O/O – ON / OFF DP – Double Point Indication

OUT – Output Indication C – Command without feedback
SP – Single Point Indication CF – Command with Feedback
IntSP – Internal Single Point Indication MV – Measured Value
SP_E – Spontaneous Event LV – Limit Value
v
F.No. Description Function Type of Log-Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103

Infor-
mation
Ground Fault Log On/Off
Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off
General Interrogation
Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
00003 >Synchronize Internal Real Time Device, General SP_Ev LED BI BO 135 48 1 GI
Clock (>Time Synch) Settings
00004 >Trigger Waveform Capture Oscillographic SP M LED BI BO 135 49 1 GI

(>Trig.Wave.Cap.) Fault Records
00005 >Reset LED (>Reset LED) Device, General SP LED BI BO 135 50 1 GI

Settings
00007 >Setting Group Select Bit 0 (>Set Change Group SP LED BI BO 135 51 1 GI
Group Bit0)
00008 >Setting Group Select Bit 1 (>Set Change Group SP LED BI BO 135 52 1 GI
Group Bit1)
00015 >Test mode (>Test mode) Device, General SP LED BI BO 135 53 1 GI

Settings
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 545

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix

Infor-
mation

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
00016 >Stop data transmission Device, General SP LED BI BO 135 54 1 GI
(>DataStop) Settings
00051 Device is Operational and Protec- Device, General OUT ON LED BO 135 81 1 GI
ting (Device OK) Settings OFF
00052 At Least 1 Protection Funct. is Device, General IntSP ON LED BO 160 18 1 GI

Active (ProtActive) Settings OFF
00055 Reset Device (Reset Device) Device, General OUT ON

Settings
00056 Initial Start of Device (Initial Start) Device, General OUT ON LED BO 160 5 1
Settings
00060 Reset LED (Reset LED) Device, General OUT_Ev ON LED BO 160 19 1
Settings
00067 Resume (Resume) Device, General OUT on * LED BO

Settings
00068 Clock Synchronization Error (Clock Device, General OUT on LED BO

SyncError) Settings off
00069 Daylight Saving Time (DayLightS- Device, General OUT ON LED BO

avTime) Settings OFF
00070 Setting calculation is running (Set- Device, General OUT ON LED BO 160 22 1 GI
tings Calc.) Settings OFF
00071 Settings Check (Settings Check) Device, General OUT LED BO

Settings
00072 Level-2 change (Level-2 change) Device, General OUT ON LED BO

Settings OFF
00073 Local setting change (Local Device, General OUT

change) Settings
00110 Event lost (Event Lost) Device, General OUT_Ev ON LED BO 135 130 1
Settings
00113 Flag Lost (Flag Lost) Device, General OUT ON M LED BO 135 136 1 GI
Settings
00125 Chatter ON (Chatter ON) Device, General OUT ON LED BO 135 145 1 GI
Settings OFF
00126 Protection ON/OFF (via system Power System IntSP ON LED BO

port) (ProtON/OFF) Data 2 OFF
00127 79 ON/OFF (via system port) (79 79M Auto Reclo- IntSP ON LED BO
ON/OFF) sing OFF
00140 Error with a summary alarm (Error Device, General OUT ON LED BO 160 47 1 GI
Sum Alarm) Settings OFF
00144 Error 5V (Error 5V) Device, General OUT ON LED BO

Settings OFF
00145 Error 0V (Error 0V) Device, General OUT ON LED BO

Settings OFF
546 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1

Infor-
mation

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
00146 Error -5V (Error -5V) Device, General OUT ON LED BO
Settings OFF
00147 Error Power Supply (Error Pwr- Device, General OUT ON LED BO
Supply) Settings OFF
00160 Alarm Summary Event (Alarm Sum Device, General OUT ON LED BO 160 46 1 GI
Event) Settings OFF
00161 Failure: General Current Supervi- Measurement OUT ON LED BO 160 32 1 GI

sion (Fail I Superv.) Supervision OFF
00162 Failure: Current Summation Measurement OUT ON LED BO 135 182 1 GI

(Failure Σ I) Supervision OFF
00163 Failure: Current Balance (Fail I Measurement OUT ON LED BO 135 183 1 GI
balance) Supervision OFF
00167 Failure: Voltage Balance (Fail V Measurement OUT ON LED BO 135 186 1 GI
balance) Supervision OFF
00171 Failure: Phase Sequence (Fail Ph. Measurement OUT ON LED BO 160 35 1 GI
Seq.) Supervision OFF
00175 Failure: Phase Sequence Current Measurement OUT ON LED BO 135 191 1 GI
(Fail Ph. Seq. I) Supervision OFF
00176 Failure: Phase Sequence Voltage Measurement OUT ON LED BO 135 192 1 GI
(Fail Ph. Seq. V) Supervision OFF
00177 Failure: Battery empty (Fail Bat- Device, General OUT ON LED BO
tery) Settings OFF
00178 I/O-Board Error (I/O-Board error) Device, General OUT ON LED BO

Settings OFF
00183 Error Board 1 (Error Board 1) Device, General OUT ON LED BO

Settings OFF

Settings OFF

Settings OFF

Settings OFF

Settings OFF

Settings OFF

Settings OFF
00197 Measurement Supervision is swit- Measurement OUT ON LED BO 135 197 1 GI

ched OFF (MeasSup OFF) Supervision OFF
00203 Waveform data deleted (Wave. Oscillographic OUT_Ev ON LED BO 135 203 1
deleted) Fault Records
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 547

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix

Infor-
mation

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
00264 Failure: RTD-Box 1 (Fail: RTD-Box RTD-Box OUT ON * LED BO
1) OFF
00267 Failure: RTD-Box 2 (Fail: RTD-Box RTD-Box OUT ON * LED BO

2) OFF
00268 Supervision Pressure Measurement OUT on LED BO

(Superv.Pressure) off
00269 Supervision Temperature Measurement OUT on LED BO

(Superv.Temp.) off
00270 Set Point Pressure< (SP. Pres- Set Points (Mea- OUT on LED BO
sure<) sured Values) off
00271 Set Point Temp> (SP. Temp>) Set Points (Mea- OUT on LED BO
sured Values) off
00272 Set Point Operating Hours (SP. Op Set Points (Stati- OUT on LED BO 135 229 1 GI
Hours>) stic) off
00273 Set Point Phase A dmd> (SP. I A Set Points (Mea- OUT on LED BO 135 230 1 GI
dmd>) sured Values) off
00274 Set Point Phase B dmd> (SP. I B Set Points (Mea- OUT on LED BO 135 234 1 GI
00275 Set Point Phase C dmd> (SP. I C Set Points (Mea- OUT on LED BO 135 235 1 GI
00276 Set Point positive sequence Set Points (Mea- OUT on LED BO 135 236 1 GI
I1dmd> (SP. I1dmd>) sured Values) off
00277 Set Point |Pdmd|> (SP. |Pdmd|>) Set Points (Mea- OUT on LED BO 135 237 1 GI
sured Values) off
00278 Set Point |Qdmd|> (SP. |Qdmd|>) Set Points (Mea- OUT on LED BO 135 238 1 GI
sured Values) off
00279 Set Point |Sdmd|> (SP. |Sdmd|>) Set Points (Mea- OUT on LED BO 135 239 1 GI
sured Values) off
00284 Set Point 37-1 Undercurrent alarm Set Points (Mea- OUT on LED BO 135 244 1 GI
(SP. 37-1 alarm) sured Values) off
00285 Set Point 55 Power factor alarm Set Points (Mea- OUT on LED BO 135 245 1 GI
(SP. PF(55)alarm) sured Values) off
00301 Power System fault (Pow.Sys.Flt.) Device, General OUT ON ON 135 231 2 GI
Settings OFF OFF
00302 Fault Event (Fault Event) Device, General OUT ON 135 232 2 GI
Settings
00303 sensitive Ground fault (sens Gnd Device, General OUT ON ON 135 233 1 GI
flt) Settings OFF
00356 >Manual close signal (>Manual Power System SP LED BI BO 150 6 1 GI

Close) Data 2
00395 >I MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>I Min- Min/Max Measu- SP ON BI BO

Max Reset) rement Setup
548 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1

Infor-
mation

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
00396 >I1 MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>I1 Min/Max Measu- SP ON BI BO
MiMaReset) rement Setup
00397 >V MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>V Min/Max Measu- SP ON BI BO

MiMaReset) rement Setup
00398 >Vphph MIN/MAX Buffer Reset Min/Max Measu- SP ON BI BO

(>VphphMiMaRes) rement Setup
00399 >V1 MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>V1 Min/Max Measu- SP ON BI BO

MiMa Reset) rement Setup
00400 >P MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>P Min/Max Measu- SP ON BI BO

00401 >S MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>S Min/Max Measu- SP ON BI BO

00402 >Q MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>Q Min/Max Measu- SP ON BI BO

00403 >Idmd MIN/MAX Buffer Reset Min/Max Measu- SP ON BI BO

(>Idmd MiMaReset) rement Setup
00404 >Pdmd MIN/MAX Buffer Reset Min/Max Measu- SP ON BI BO

(>Pdmd MiMaReset) rement Setup
00405 >Qdmd MIN/MAX Buffer Reset Min/Max Measu- SP ON BI BO

(>Qdmd MiMaReset) rement Setup
00406 >Sdmd MIN/MAX Buffer Reset Min/Max Measu- SP ON BI BO

(>Sdmd MiMaReset) rement Setup
00407 >Frq. MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>Frq Min/Max Measu- SP ON BI BO

00408 >Power Factor MIN/MAX Buffer Min/Max Measu- SP ON BI BO

Reset (>PF MiMaReset) rement Setup
00409 >BLOCK Op Counter (>BLOCK Statistics SP on LED BI BO

Op Count) off
00412 >Theta MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (> Min/Max Measu- SP ON BI BO

Θ MiMa Reset) rement Setup
00501 Relay PICKUP (Relay PICKUP) Power System OUT ON M LED BO 150 151 2 GI
Data 2
00511 Relay GENERAL TRIP command Power System OUT ON M LED BO 150 161 2 GI
(Relay TRIP) Data 2
00533 Primary fault current Ia (Ia =) Power System OUT ON 150 177 4
Data 2 OFF
00534 Primary fault current Ib (Ib =) Power System OUT ON 150 178 4
Data 2 OFF
00535 Primary fault current Ic (Ic =) Power System OUT ON 150 179 4
Data 2 OFF
00561 Manual close signal detected Power System OUT ON LED BO

(Man.Clos.Detect) Data 2 OFF
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 549

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix

Infor-
mation

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
01020 Counter of operating hours Statistics OUT
(Op.Hours=)
01021 Accumulation of interrupted current Statistics OUT

Ph A (Σ Ia =)

Ph B (Σ Ib =)

Ph C (Σ Ic =)
01106 >Start Fault Locator (>Start Flt. Fault Locator SP ON LED BI BO 151 6 1 GI
Loc)
01118 Flt Locator: secondary REAC- Fault Locator OUT ON 151 18 4

TANCE (Xsec =) OFF
01119 Flt Locator: Distance to fault (dist Fault Locator OUT ON 151 19 4
=) OFF
01123 Fault Locator Loop AG (FL Loop Fault Locator OUT ON

AG)
01124 Fault Locator Loop BG (FL Loop Fault Locator OUT ON

BG)
01125 Fault Locator Loop CG (FL Loop Fault Locator OUT ON

CG)
01126 Fault Locator Loop AB (FL Loop Fault Locator OUT ON

AB)
01127 Fault Locator Loop BC (FL Loop Fault Locator OUT ON

BC)
01128 Fault Locator Loop CA (FL Loop Fault Locator OUT ON

CA)
01132 Fault location invalid (Flt.Loc.inva- Fault Locator OUT ON

lid)
01201 >BLOCK 64 (>BLOCK 64) 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, SP ON LED BI BO 151 101 1 GI
67Ns (Sensitive) OFF
Gnd Flt
01202 >BLOCK 50Ns-2 (>BLOCK 50Ns- 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, SP ON LED BI BO 151 102 1 GI
2) 67Ns (Sensitive) OFF
Gnd Flt
01203 >BLOCK 50Ns-1 (>BLOCK 50Ns- 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, SP ON LED BI BO 151 103 1 GI
1) 67Ns (Sensitive) OFF
Gnd Flt
01204 >BLOCK 51Ns (>BLOCK 51Ns) 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, SP ON LED BI BO 151 104 1 GI
Gnd Flt
01207 >BLOCK 50Ns/67Ns (>BLK 50Ns/ 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, SP ON LED BI BO 151 107 1 GI
67Ns) 67Ns (Sensitive) OFF
Gnd Flt
550 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1

Infor-
mation

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
01211 50Ns/67Ns is OFF (50Ns/67Ns 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, OUT ON LED BO 151 111 1 GI
OFF) 67Ns (Sensitive) OFF
Gnd Flt
01212 50Ns/67Ns is ACTIVE (50Ns/67Ns 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, OUT ON LED BO 151 112 1 GI
ACT) 67Ns (Sensitive) OFF
Gnd Flt
01215 64 displacement voltage pick up 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, OUT ON LED BO 151 115 2 GI
(64 Pickup) 67Ns (Sensitive) OFF
Gnd Flt
01217 64 displacement voltage element 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, OUT ON M LED BO 151 117 2 GI
TRIP (64 TRIP) 67Ns (Sensitive)
Gnd Flt
01221 50Ns-2 Pickup (50Ns-2 Pickup) 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, OUT ON LED BO 151 121 2 GI
Gnd Flt
01223 50Ns-2 TRIP (50Ns-2 TRIP) 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, OUT ON M LED BO 151 123 2 GI
67Ns (Sensitive)
Gnd Flt
01224 50Ns-1 Pickup (50Ns-1 Pickup) 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, OUT ON LED BO 151 124 2 GI
Gnd Flt
01226 50Ns-1 TRIP (50Ns-1 TRIP) 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, OUT ON M LED BO 151 126 2 GI
67Ns (Sensitive)
Gnd Flt
01227 51Ns picked up (51Ns Pickup) 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, OUT ON LED BO 151 127 2 GI
Gnd Flt
01229 51Ns TRIP (51Ns TRIP) 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, OUT ON M LED BO 151 129 2 GI
67Ns (Sensitive)
Gnd Flt
01230 Sensitive ground fault detection 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, OUT ON ON LED BO 151 130 1 GI
BLOCKED (Sens. Gnd block) 67Ns (Sensitive) OFF OFF
Gnd Flt
01272 Sensitive Ground fault picked up in 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, OUT ON ON ON LED BO 160 48 1 GI
Ph A (Sens. Gnd Ph A) 67Ns (Sensitive) OFF
Gnd Flt
Ph B (Sens. Gnd Ph B) 67Ns (Sensitive) OFF
Gnd Flt
Ph C (Sens. Gnd Ph C) 67Ns (Sensitive) OFF
Gnd Flt
01276 Sensitive Gnd fault in forward 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, OUT ON ON ON LED BO 160 51 1 GI
direction (SensGnd Forward) 67Ns (Sensitive) OFF
Gnd Flt
01277 Sensitive Gnd fault in reverse 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, OUT ON ON ON LED BO 160 52 1 GI
direction (SensGnd Reverse) 67Ns (Sensitive) OFF
Gnd Flt
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 551

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix

Infor-
mation

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
01278 Sensitive Gnd fault direction unde- 64, 50Ns, 51Ns, OUT ON ON ON LED BO 151 178 1 GI
fined (SensGnd undef.) 67Ns (Sensitive) OFF
Gnd Flt
01403 >BLOCK 50BF (>BLOCK 50BF) 50BF Breaker SP ON LED BI BO 166 103 1 GI
Failure OFF
01431 >50BF initiated externally (>50BF 50BF Breaker SP ON LED BI BO 166 104 1 GI
ext SRC) Failure OFF
01451 50BF is switched OFF (50BF OFF) 50BF Breaker OUT ON LED BO 166 151 1 GI
Failure OFF
01452 50BF is BLOCKED (50BF BLOCK) 50BF Breaker OUT ON ON LED BO 166 152 1 GI
Failure OFF OFF
01453 50BF is ACTIVE (50BF ACTIVE) 50BF Breaker OUT ON LED BO 166 153 1 GI
Failure OFF
01456 50BF (internal) PICKUP (50BF int 50BF Breaker OUT ON LED BO 166 156 2 GI
Pikkup) Failure OFF
01457 50BF (external) PICKUP (50BF ext 50BF Breaker OUT ON LED BO 166 157 2 GI
Pickup) Failure OFF
01471 50BF TRIP (50BF TRIP) 50BF Breaker OUT ON M LED BO 160 85 2
Failure
01480 50BF (internal) TRIP (50BF int 50BF Breaker OUT ON LED BO 166 180 2 GI
TRIP) Failure
01481 50BF (external) TRIP (50BF ext 50BF Breaker OUT ON LED BO 166 181 2 GI
TRIP) Failure
01503 >BLOCK 49 Overload Protection 49 Thermal Over- SP LED BI BO 167 3 1 GI

(>BLOCK 49 O/L) load
01507 >Emergency start of motors 49 Thermal Over- SP ON LED BI BO 167 7 1 GI

(>EmergencyStart) load OFF
01511 49 Overload Protection is OFF (49 49 Thermal Over- OUT ON LED BO 167 11 1 GI
O / L OFF) load OFF
01512 49 Overload Protection is BLOK- 49 Thermal Over- OUT ON ON LED BO 167 12 1 GI

KED (49 O/L BLOCK) load OFF OFF
01513 49 Overload Protection is ACTIVE 49 Thermal Over- OUT ON LED BO 167 13 1 GI

(49 O/L ACTIVE) load OFF
01515 49 Overload Current Alarm (I 49 Thermal Over- OUT ON LED BO 167 15 1 GI

alarm) (49 O/L I Alarm) load OFF
01516 49 Overload Alarm! Near Thermal 49 Thermal Over- OUT ON LED BO 167 16 1 GI
Trip (49 O/L Θ Alarm) load OFF
01517 49 Winding Overload (49 Winding 49 Thermal Over- OUT ON LED BO 167 17 1 GI
O/L) load OFF
01521 49 Thermal Overload TRIP (49 Th 49 Thermal Over- OUT ON M LED BO 167 21 2 GI
O/L TRIP) load
01580 >49 Reset of Thermal Overload 49 Thermal Over- SP ON LED BI BO

Image (>RES 49 Image) load OFF
552 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1

Infor-
mation

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
01581 49 Thermal Overload Image reset 49 Thermal Over- OUT ON LED BO
(49 Image res.) load OFF
01704 >BLOCK 50/51 (>BLK 50/51) 50/51 Phase/ SP LED BI BO

Ground Overcur-
rent
01714 >BLOCK 50N/51N (>BLK 50N/ 50/51 Phase/ SP LED BI BO

51N) Ground Overcur-
rent
01721 >BLOCK 50-2 (>BLOCK 50-2) 50/51 Phase/ SP LED BI BO 60 1 1 GI

Ground Overcur-
rent
01722 >BLOCK 50-1 (>BLOCK 50-1) 50/51 Phase/ SP LED BI BO 60 2 1 GI

Ground Overcur-
rent
01723 >BLOCK 51 (>BLOCK 51) 50/51 Phase/ SP LED BI BO 60 3 1 GI

Ground Overcur-
rent
01724 >BLOCK 50N-2 (>BLOCK 50N-2) 50/51 Phase/ SP LED BI BO 60 4 1 GI

Ground Overcur-
rent
01725 >BLOCK 50N-1 (>BLOCK 50N-1) 50/51 Phase/ SP LED BI BO 60 5 1 GI

Ground Overcur-
rent
01726 >BLOCK 51N (>BLOCK 51N) 50/51 Phase/ SP LED BI BO 60 6 1 GI

Ground Overcur-
rent
01730 >BLOCK Cold-Load-Pickup Cold Load Pickup SP LED BI BO

(>BLOCK CLP)
01731 >BLOCK Cold-Load-Pickup stop Cold Load Pickup SP ON LED BI BO 60 243 1 GI

timer (>BLK CLP stpTim) OFF
01732 >ACTIVATE Cold-Load-Pickup Cold Load Pickup SP ON LED BI BO

(>ACTIVATE CLP) OFF
01751 50/51 O/C switched OFF (50/51 50/51 Phase/ OUT ON LED BO 60 21 1 GI
PH OFF) Ground Overcur- OFF
rent
01752 50/51 O/C is BLOCKED (50/51 PH 50/51 Phase/ OUT ON ON LED BO 60 22 1 GI

BLK) Ground Overcur- OFF OFF
rent
01753 50/51 O/C is ACTIVE (50/51 PH 50/51 Phase/ OUT ON LED BO 60 23 1 GI

ACT) Ground Overcur- OFF
rent
01756 50N/51N is OFF (50N/51N OFF) 50/51 Phase/ OUT ON LED BO 60 26 1 GI

Ground Overcur- OFF
rent
01757 50N/51N is BLOCKED (50N/51N 50/51 Phase/ OUT ON ON LED BO 60 27 1 GI

BLK) Ground Overcur- OFF OFF
rent
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 553

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix

Infor-
mation

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
01758 50N/51N is ACTIVE (50N/51N 50/51 Phase/ OUT ON LED BO 60 28 1 GI
ACT) Ground Overcur- OFF
rent
01761 50(N)/51(N) O/C PICKUP (50(N)/ 50/51 Phase/ OUT ON M LED BO 160 84 2 GI
51(N) PU) Ground Overcur- OFF
rent
01762 50/51 Phase A picked up (50/51 50/51 Phase/ OUT ON M LED BO 160 64 2 GI
Ph A PU) Ground Overcur- OFF
rent
01763 50/51 Phase B picked up (50/51 50/51 Phase/ OUT ON M LED BO 160 65 2 GI
Ph B PU) Ground Overcur- OFF
rent
01764 50/51 Phase C picked up (50/51 50/51 Phase/ OUT ON M LED BO 160 66 2 GI
Ph C PU) Ground Overcur- OFF
rent
01765 50N/51N picked up (50N/ 50/51 Phase/ OUT ON M LED BO 160 67 2 GI

51NPickedup) Ground Overcur- OFF
rent
01791 50(N)/51(N) TRIP (50(N)/ 50/51 Phase/ OUT ON M LED BO 160 68 2

51(N)TRIP) Ground Overcur-
rent
01800 50-2 picked up (50-2 picked up) 50/51 Phase/ OUT ON LED BO 60 75 2 GI
Ground Overcur- OFF
rent
01804 50-2 Time Out (50-2 TimeOut) 50/51 Phase/ OUT LED BO 60 49 2 GI
Ground Overcur-
rent
01805 50-2 TRIP (50-2 TRIP) 50/51 Phase/ OUT ON M LED BO 160 91 2
Ground Overcur-
rent
01810 50-1 picked up (50-1 picked up) 50/51 Phase/ OUT ON LED BO 60 76 2 GI
Ground Overcur- OFF
rent
01814 50-1 Time Out (50-1 TimeOut) 50/51 Phase/ OUT LED BO 60 53 2 GI
Ground Overcur-
rent
01815 50/51 I> TRIP (50/51 TRIP) 50/51 Phase/ OUT ON M LED BO 160 90 2
Ground Overcur-
rent
01820 51 picked up (51 picked up) 50/51 Phase/ OUT ON LED BO 60 77 2 GI

Ground Overcur- OFF
rent
01824 51 Time Out (51 Time Out) 50/51 Phase/ OUT LED BO 60 57 2 GI
Ground Overcur-
rent
01825 51 TRIP (51 TRIP) 50/51 Phase/ OUT ON M LED BO 60 58 2 GI

Ground Overcur-
rent
554 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1

Infor-
mation

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
01831 50N-2 picked up (50N-2 picked up) 50/51 Phase/ OUT ON LED BO 60 59 2 GI
Ground Overcur- OFF
rent
01832 50N-2 Time Out (50N-2 TimeOut) 50/51 Phase/ OUT LED BO 60 60 2 GI
Ground Overcur-
rent
01833 50N-2 TRIP (50N-2 TRIP) 50/51 Phase/ OUT ON M LED BO 160 93 2
Ground Overcur-
rent
01834 50N-1 picked up (50N-1 picked up) 50/51 Phase/ OUT ON LED BO 60 62 2 GI
Ground Overcur- OFF
rent
01835 50N-1 Time Out (50N-1 TimeOut) 50/51 Phase/ OUT LED BO 60 63 2 GI
Ground Overcur-
rent
01836 50N-1 TRIP (50N-1 TRIP) 50/51 Phase/ OUT ON M LED BO 160 92 2
Ground Overcur-
rent
01837 51N picked up (51N picked up) 50/51 Phase/ OUT ON LED BO 60 64 2 GI
Ground Overcur- OFF
rent
01838 51N Time Out (51N TimeOut) 50/51 Phase/ OUT LED BO 60 65 2 GI
Ground Overcur-
rent
01839 51N TRIP (51N TRIP) 50/51 Phase/ OUT ON M LED BO 60 66 2 GI

Ground Overcur-
rent
01840 Phase A trip blocked by inrush 50/51 Phase/ OUT ON LED BO 60 101 2 GI
detection (PhA InrushBlk) Ground Overcur- OFF
rent
01841 Phase B trip blocked by inrush 50/51 Phase/ OUT ON LED BO 60 102 2 GI
detection (PhB InrushBlk) Ground Overcur- OFF
rent
01842 Phase C trip blocked by inrush 50/51 Phase/ OUT ON LED BO 60 103 2 GI
detection (PhC InrushBlk) Ground Overcur- OFF
rent
01843 Cross blk: PhX blocked PhY 50/51 Phase/ OUT ON LED BO 60 104 2 GI
(INRUSH X-BLK) Ground Overcur- OFF
rent
01851 50-1 BLOCKED (50-1 BLOCKED) 50/51 Phase/ OUT ON ON LED BO 60 105 1 GI
Ground Overcur- OFF OFF
rent
01852 50-2 BLOCKED (50-2 BLOCKED) 50/51 Phase/ OUT ON ON LED BO 60 106 1 GI
rent
01853 50N-1 BLOCKED (50N-1 BLOK- 50/51 Phase/ OUT ON ON LED BO 60 107 1 GI
KED) Ground Overcur- OFF OFF
rent
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 555

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix

Infor-
mation

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
01854 50N-2 BLOCKED (50N-2 BLOK- 50/51 Phase/ OUT ON ON LED BO 60 108 1 GI
KED) Ground Overcur- OFF OFF
rent
01855 51 BLOCKED (51 BLOCKED) 50/51 Phase/ OUT ON ON LED BO 60 109 1 GI

rent
01856 51N BLOCKED (51N BLOCKED) 50/51 Phase/ OUT ON ON LED BO 60 110 1 GI
rent
01910 >50-2 instantaneously 50/51 Phase/ SP LED BI BO

(>INSTANT. 50-2) Ground Overcur-
rent
01911 50-2 instantaneously (50-2 50/51 Phase/ OUT ON ON LED BO

INSTANT.) Ground Overcur- OFF OFF
rent
01912 >50-1 instantaneously 50/51 Phase/ SP LED BI BO

(>INSTANT. 50-1) Ground Overcur-
rent
01913 50-1 instantaneously (50-1 50/51 Phase/ OUT ON ON LED BO

rent
01914 >51 instantaneously (>INSTANT. 50/51 Phase/ SP LED BI BO

51) Ground Overcur-
rent
01915 51 instantaneously (51 INSTANT.) 50/51 Phase/ OUT ON ON LED BO

rent
01916 >50N-2 instantaneously 50/51 Phase/ SP LED BI BO

(>INSTANT. 50N-2) Ground Overcur-
rent
01917 50N-2 instantaneously (50N-2 50/51 Phase/ OUT ON ON LED BO

rent
01918 >50N-1 instantaneously 50/51 Phase/ SP LED BI BO

(>INSTANT. 50N-1) Ground Overcur-
rent
01919 50N-1 instantaneously (50N-1 50/51 Phase/ OUT ON ON LED BO

rent
01983 >51N instantaneously (>INSTANT. 50/51 Phase/ SP LED BI BO

51N) Ground Overcur-
rent
01984 51N instantaneously (51N 50/51 Phase/ OUT ON ON LED BO

rent
01994 Cold-Load-Pickup switched OFF Cold Load Pickup OUT ON LED BO 60 244 1 GI
(CLP OFF) OFF
556 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1

Infor-
mation

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
01995 Cold-Load-Pickup is BLOCKED Cold Load Pickup OUT ON ON LED BO 60 245 1 GI
(CLP BLOCKED) OFF OFF
01996 Cold-Load-Pickup is RUNNING Cold Load Pickup OUT ON LED BO 60 246 1 GI

(CLP running) OFF
01997 Dynamic settings are ACTIVE Cold Load Pickup OUT ON LED BO 60 247 1 GI
(Dyn set. ACTIVE) OFF
02604 >BLOCK 67/67-TOC (>BLK 67/67- 67 Directional SP LED BI BO

TOC) Phase/Ground
Overcurrent
02614 >BLOCK 67N/67N-TOC (>BLK 67 Directional SP LED BI BO

67N/67NTOC) Phase/Ground
Overcurrent
02615 >BLOCK 67-2 (>BLOCK 67-2) 67 Directional SP LED BI BO 63 73 1 GI

Phase/Ground
Overcurrent
02616 >BLOCK 67N-2 (>BLOCK 67N-2) 67 Directional SP LED BI BO 63 74 1 GI

Phase/Ground
Overcurrent
02621 >BLOCK 67-1 (>BLOCK 67-1) 67 Directional SP LED BI BO 63 1 1 GI

Phase/Ground
Overcurrent
02622 >BLOCK 67-TOC (>BLOCK 67- 67 Directional SP LED BI BO 63 2 1 GI

TOC) Phase/Ground
Overcurrent
02623 >BLOCK 67N-1 (>BLOCK 67N-1) 67 Directional SP LED BI BO 63 3 1 GI

Phase/Ground
Overcurrent
02624 >BLOCK 67N-TOC (>BLOCK 67N- 67 Directional SP LED BI BO 63 4 1 GI

TOC) Phase/Ground
Overcurrent
02628 Phase A forward (Phase A for- 67 Directional OUT ON LED BO 63 81 1 GI

ward) Phase/Ground
Overcurrent
02629 Phase B forward (Phase B for- 67 Directional OUT ON LED BO 63 82 1 GI

ward) Phase/Ground
Overcurrent
02630 Phase C forward (Phase C for- 67 Directional OUT ON LED BO 63 83 1 GI

ward) Phase/Ground
Overcurrent
02632 Phase A reverse (Phase A 67 Directional OUT ON LED BO 63 84 1 GI

reverse) Phase/Ground
Overcurrent
02633 Phase B reverse (Phase B 67 Directional OUT ON LED BO 63 85 1 GI

Overcurrent
02634 Phase C reverse (Phase C 67 Directional OUT ON LED BO 63 86 1 GI

Overcurrent
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 557

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix

Infor-
mation

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
02635 Ground forward (Ground forward) 67 Directional OUT ON LED BO 63 87 1 GI
Phase/Ground
Overcurrent
02636 Ground reverse (Ground reverse) 67 Directional OUT ON LED BO 63 88 1 GI

Phase/Ground
Overcurrent
02637 67-1 is BLOCKED (67-1 BLOK- 67 Directional OUT ON ON LED BO 63 91 1 GI

KED) Phase/Ground OFF OFF
Overcurrent
02642 67-2 picked up (67-2 picked up) 67 Directional OUT ON LED BO 63 67 2 GI

Phase/Ground OFF
Overcurrent
02646 67N-2 picked up (67N-2 picked up) 67 Directional OUT ON LED BO 63 62 2 GI

Phase/Ground OFF
Overcurrent
02647 67-2 Time Out (67-2 Time Out) 67 Directional OUT LED BO 63 71 2 GI
Phase/Ground
Overcurrent
02648 67N-2 Time Out (67N-2 Time Out) 67 Directional OUT LED BO 63 63 2 GI
Phase/Ground
Overcurrent
02649 67-2 TRIP (67-2 TRIP) 67 Directional OUT ON M LED BO 63 72 2 GI

Phase/Ground
Overcurrent
02651 67/67-TOC switched OFF (67/67- 67 Directional OUT ON LED BO 63 10 1 GI

TOC OFF) Phase/Ground OFF
Overcurrent
02652 67/67-TOC is BLOCKED (67 67 Directional OUT ON ON LED BO 63 11 1 GI

BLOKKED) Phase/Ground OFF OFF
Overcurrent
02653 67/67-TOC is ACTIVE (67 67 Directional OUT ON LED BO 63 12 1 GI

ACTIVE) Phase/Ground OFF
Overcurrent
02655 67-2 is BLOCKED (67-2 BLOK- 67 Directional OUT ON ON LED BO 63 92 1 GI

Overcurrent
02656 67N/67N-TOC switched OFF (67N 67 Directional OUT ON LED BO 63 13 1 GI

OFF) Phase/Ground OFF
Overcurrent
02657 67N/67N-TOC is BLOCKED (67N 67 Directional OUT ON ON LED BO 63 14 1 GI

BLOCKED) Phase/Ground OFF OFF
Overcurrent
02658 67N/67N-TOC is ACTIVE (67N 67 Directional OUT ON LED BO 63 15 1 GI

ACTIVE) Phase/Ground OFF
Overcurrent
02659 67N-1 is BLOCKED (67N-1 BLOK- 67 Directional OUT ON ON LED BO 63 93 1 GI

Overcurrent
558 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1

Infor-
mation

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
02660 67-1 picked up (67-1 picked up) 67 Directional OUT ON LED BO 63 20 2 GI
Phase/Ground OFF
Overcurrent
02664 67-1 Time Out (67-1 Time Out) 67 Directional OUT LED BO 63 24 2 GI
Phase/Ground
Overcurrent
02665 67-1 TRIP (67-1 TRIP) 67 Directional OUT ON M LED BO 63 25 2 GI

Phase/Ground
Overcurrent
02668 67N-2 is BLOCKED (67N-2 BLOK- 67 Directional OUT ON ON LED BO 63 94 1 GI

Overcurrent
02669 67-TOC is BLOCKED (67-TOC 67 Directional OUT ON ON LED BO 63 95 1 GI

BLOKKED) Phase/Ground OFF OFF
Overcurrent
02670 67-TOC picked up (67-TOC picke- 67 Directional OUT ON LED BO 63 30 2 GI

dup) Phase/Ground OFF
Overcurrent
02674 67-TOC Time Out (67-TOC Time 67 Directional OUT LED BO 63 34 2 GI

Out) Phase/Ground
Overcurrent
02675 67-TOC TRIP (67-TOC TRIP) 67 Directional OUT ON M LED BO 63 35 2 GI

Phase/Ground
Overcurrent
02677 67N-TOC is BLOCKED (67N-TOC 67 Directional OUT ON ON LED BO 63 96 1 GI

BLOCKED) Phase/Ground OFF OFF
Overcurrent
02679 67-2 TRIP (67N-2 TRIP) 67 Directional OUT ON M LED BO 63 64 2 GI

Phase/Ground
Overcurrent
02681 67N-1 picked up (67N-1 picked up) 67 Directional OUT ON LED BO 63 41 2 GI

Phase/Ground OFF
Overcurrent
02682 67N-1 Time Out (67N-1 Time Out) 67 Directional OUT LED BO 63 42 2 GI
Phase/Ground
Overcurrent
02683 67N-1 TRIP (67N-1 TRIP) 67 Directional OUT ON M LED BO 63 43 2 GI

Phase/Ground
Overcurrent
02684 67N-TOC picked up (67N-TOCPik- 67 Directional OUT ON LED BO 63 44 2 GI

kedup) Phase/Ground OFF
Overcurrent
02685 67N-TOC Time Out (67N-TOC 67 Directional OUT LED BO 63 45 2 GI

TimeOut) Phase/Ground
Overcurrent
02686 67N-TOC TRIP (67N-TOC TRIP) 67 Directional OUT ON M LED BO 63 46 2 GI

Phase/Ground
Overcurrent
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 559

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix

Infor-
mation

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
02691 67/67N picked up (67/67N picke- 67 Directional OUT ON M LED BO 63 50 2 GI
dup) Phase/Ground OFF
Overcurrent
02692 67/67-TOC Phase A picked up (67 67 Directional OUT ON LED BO 63 51 2 GI

A picked up) Phase/Ground OFF
Overcurrent
02693 67/67-TOC Phase B picked up (67 67 Directional OUT ON LED BO 63 52 2 GI

B picked up) Phase/Ground OFF
Overcurrent
02694 67/67-TOC Phase C picked up (67 67 Directional OUT ON LED BO 63 53 2 GI

C picked up) Phase/Ground OFF
Overcurrent
02695 67N/67N-TOC picked up (67N pik- 67 Directional OUT ON LED BO 63 54 2 GI

ked up) Phase/Ground OFF
Overcurrent
02696 67/67N TRIP (67/67N TRIP) 67 Directional OUT ON M LED BO 63 55 2 GI

Phase/Ground
Overcurrent
02701 >79 ON (>79 ON) 79M Auto Reclo- SP ON LED BI BO 40 1 1 GI

sing OFF
02702 >79 OFF (>79 OFF) 79M Auto Reclo- SP ON LED BI BO 40 2 1 GI

sing OFF
02703 >BLOCK 79 (>BLOCK 79) 79M Auto Reclo- SP ON LED BI BO 40 3 1 GI

sing OFF
02711 >79 External start of internal A/R 79M Auto Reclo- SP ON LED BI BO
(>79 Start) sing OFF
02715 >Start 79 Ground program (>Start 79M Auto Reclo- SP ON LED BI BO 40 15 1 GI

79 Gnd) sing
02716 >Start 79 Phase program (>Start 79M Auto Reclo- SP ON LED BI BO 40 16 1 GI

79 Ph) sing
02720 >Enable 50/67-(N)-2 (override 79 Power System SP ON LED BI BO 40 20 1 GI

blk) (>Enable ANSI#-2) Data 2 OFF
02722 >Switch zone sequence coordina- 79M Auto Reclo- SP ON LED BI BO

tion ON (>ZSC ON) sing OFF
02723 >Switch zone sequence coordina- 79M Auto Reclo- SP ON LED BI BO

tion OFF (>ZSC OFF) sing OFF
02730 >Circuit breaker READY for reclo- 79M Auto Reclo- SP ON LED BI BO 40 30 1 GI
sing (>CB Ready) sing OFF
02731 >AR: Sync. release from ext. 79M Auto Reclo- SP ON LED BI BO
sync.-check (>Sync.release) sing
02781 79 Auto recloser is switched OFF 79M Auto Reclo- OUT ON LED BO 40 81 1 GI
(79 OFF) sing
02782 79 Auto recloser is switched ON 79M Auto Reclo- IntSP ON LED BO 160 16 1 GI
(79 ON) sing OFF
560 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1

Infor-
mation

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
02784 79 Auto recloser is NOT ready (79 79M Auto Reclo- OUT ON LED BO 160 130 1 GI
is NOT ready) sing OFF
02785 79 - Auto-reclose is dynamically 79M Auto Reclo- OUT ON ON LED BO 40 85 1 GI

BLOCKED (79 DynBlock) sing OFF
02788 79: CB ready monitoring window 79M Auto Reclo- OUT ON LED BO
expired (79 T-CBreadyExp) sing
02801 79 - in progress (79 in progress) 79M Auto Reclo- OUT ON LED BO 40 101 1 GI
sing
02808 79: CB open with no trip (79 BLK: 79M Auto Reclo- OUT ON LED BO
CB open) sing OFF
02809 79: Start-signal monitoring time 79M Auto Reclo- OUT ON LED BO
expired (79 T-Start Exp) sing
02810 79: Maximum dead time expired 79M Auto Reclo- OUT ON LED BO
(79 TdeadMax Exp) sing
02823 79: no starter configured (79 no 79M Auto Reclo- OUT ON LED BO
starter) sing OFF
02824 79: no cycle configured (79 no 79M Auto Reclo- OUT ON LED BO
cycle) sing OFF
02827 79: blocking due to trip (79 BLK by 79M Auto Reclo- OUT ON LED BO
trip) sing
02828 79: blocking due to 3-phase pickup 79M Auto Reclo- OUT ON LED BO
(79 BLK:3ph p.u.) sing
02829 79: action time expired before trip 79M Auto Reclo- OUT ON LED BO
(79 Tact expired) sing
02830 79: max. no. of cycles exceeded 79M Auto Reclo- OUT ON LED BO
(79 Max. No. Cyc) sing
02844 79 1st cycle running (79 1stCyc. 79M Auto Reclo- OUT ON LED BO
run.) sing
02845 79 2nd cycle running (79 2ndCyc. 79M Auto Reclo- OUT ON LED BO
run.) sing
02846 79 3rd cycle running (79 3rdCyc. 79M Auto Reclo- OUT ON LED BO
run.) sing
02847 79 4th or higher cycle running (79 79M Auto Reclo- OUT ON LED BO
4thCyc. run.) sing
02851 79 - Close command (79 Close) 79M Auto Reclo- OUT ON M LED BO 160 128 1
sing
02862 79 - cycle successful (79 Suc- 79M Auto Reclo- OUT ON ON LED BO 40 162 1 GI
cessful) sing
02863 79 - Lockout (79 Lockout) 79M Auto Reclo- OUT ON ON LED BO 40 163 2 GI
sing
02865 79: Synchro-check request (79 79M Auto Reclo- OUT ON LED BO
Sync.Request) sing
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 561

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix

Infor-
mation

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
02878 79-A/R single phase reclosing 79M Auto Reclo- OUT ON LED BO 40 180 2 GI
sequence (79 L-N Sequence) sing
02879 79-A/R multi-phase reclosing 79M Auto Reclo- OUT ON LED BO 40 181 2 GI
sequence (79 L-L Sequence) sing
02883 Zone Sequencing is active (ZSC 79M Auto Reclo- OUT ON ON LED BO
active) sing OFF
02884 Zone sequence coordination swit- 79M Auto Reclo- OUT ON LED BO
ched ON (ZSC ON) sing
02885 Zone sequence coordination swit- 79M Auto Reclo- OUT ON LED BO
ched OFF (ZSC OFF) sing
02889 79 1st cycle zone extension 79M Auto Reclo- OUT LED BO
release (79 1.CycZoneRel) sing
02890 79 2nd cycle zone extension 79M Auto Reclo- OUT LED BO
02891 79 3rd cycle zone extension 79M Auto Reclo- OUT LED BO
02892 79 4th cycle zone extension 79M Auto Reclo- OUT LED BO
02896 No. of 1st AR-cycle CLOSE com- Statistics OUT

mands,3pole (79 #Close1./3p=)
02898 No. of higher AR-cycle CLOSE Statistics OUT

commands,3p (79 #Close2./3p=)
02899 79: Close request to Control 79M Auto Reclo- OUT ON LED BO
Function (79 CloseRequest) sing
04601 >52-a contact (OPEN, if bkr is Power System SP LED BI BO

open) (>52-a) Data 2
04602 >52-b contact (OPEN, if bkr is clo- Power System SP LED BI BO

sed) (>52-b) Data 2
04822 >BLOCK Motor Startup counter 48/66 Motor SP LED BI BO

(>BLOCK 66) (Startup Monitor /
Counter)
04823 >Emergency start (>66 emer.start) 48/66 Motor SP ON LED BI BO 168 51 1 GI

(Startup Monitor / OFF
Counter)
04824 66 Motor start protection OFF (66 48/66 Motor OUT ON LED BO 168 52 1 GI
OFF) (Startup Monitor / OFF
Counter)
04825 66 Motor start protection BLOK- 48/66 Motor OUT ON ON LED BO 168 53 1 GI
KED (66 BLOCKED) (Startup Monitor / OFF OFF
Counter)
04826 66 Motor start protection ACTIVE 48/66 Motor OUT ON LED BO 168 54 1 GI
(66 ACTIVE) (Startup Monitor / OFF
Counter)
562 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1

Infor-
mation

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
04827 66 Motor start protection TRIP (66 48/66 Motor OUT ON LED BO 168 55 1 GI
TRIP) (Startup Monitor / OFF
Counter)
04828 >66 Reset thermal memory (>66 48/66 Motor SP ON LED BI BO

RM th.repl.) (Startup Monitor / OFF
Counter)
04829 66 Reset thermal memory (66 RM 48/66 Motor OUT ON LED BO

th.repl.) (Startup Monitor / OFF
Counter)
05143 >BLOCK 46 (>BLOCK 46) 46 Negative SP LED BI BO 70 126 1 GI

Sequence (Time
Overcurrent)
05145 >Reverse Phase Rotation Power System SP ON LED BI BO

(>Reverse Rot.) Data 1 OFF
05147 Phase rotation ABC (Rotation Power System OUT ON LED BO 70 128 1 GI
ABC) Data 1 OFF
05148 Phase rotation ACB (Rotation Power System OUT ON LED BO 70 129 1 GI
ACB) Data 1 OFF
05151 46 switched OFF (46 OFF) 46 Negative OUT ON LED BO 70 131 1 GI

Sequence (Time OFF
Overcurrent)
05152 46 is BLOCKED (46 BLOCKED) 46 Negative OUT ON ON LED BO 70 132 1 GI

Sequence (Time OFF OFF
Overcurrent)
05153 46 is ACTIVE (46 ACTIVE) 46 Negative OUT ON LED BO 70 133 1 GI

Sequence (Time OFF
Overcurrent)
05159 46-2 picked up (46-2 picked up) 46 Negative OUT ON LED BO 70 138 2 GI
Sequence (Time OFF
Overcurrent)
05165 46-1 picked up (46-1 picked up) 46 Negative OUT ON LED BO 70 150 2 GI
Sequence (Time OFF
Overcurrent)
05166 46-TOC picked up (46-TOC picke- 46 Negative OUT ON LED BO 70 141 2 GI

dup) Sequence (Time OFF
Overcurrent)
05170 46 TRIP (46 TRIP) 46 Negative OUT ON M LED BO 70 149 2 GI

Sequence (Time
Overcurrent)
05171 46 Disk emulation picked up (46 46 Negative OUT LED BO

Dsk pickedup) Sequence (Time
Overcurrent)
05203 >BLOCK 81O/U (>BLOCK 81O/U) 81 Over/Under SP ON LED BI BO 70 176 1 GI

Frequency OFF
05206 >BLOCK 81-1 (>BLOCK 81-1) 81 Over/Under SP ON LED BI BO 70 177 1 GI

Frequency OFF
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 563

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix

Infor-
mation

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
Frequency OFF

Frequency OFF

Frequency OFF
05211 81 OFF (81 OFF) 81 Over/Under OUT ON LED BO 70 181 1 GI

Frequency OFF
05212 81 BLOCKED (81 BLOCKED) 81 Over/Under OUT ON ON LED BO 70 182 1 GI

Frequency OFF OFF
05213 81 ACTIVE (81 ACTIVE) 81 Over/Under OUT ON LED BO 70 183 1 GI

Frequency OFF
05214 81 Under Voltage Block (81 Under 81 Over/Under OUT ON ON LED BO 70 184 1 GI
V Blk) Frequency OFF OFF
05232 81-1 picked up (81-1 picked up) 81 Over/Under OUT ON LED BO 70 230 2 GI
Frequency OFF
Frequency OFF
Frequency OFF
Frequency OFF
05236 81-1 TRIP (81-1 TRIP) 81 Over/Under OUT ON M LED BO 70 234 2 GI

Frequency

Frequency

Frequency

Frequency
06503 >BLOCK 27 undervoltage protec- 27/59 Under/Over SP LED BI BO 74 3 1 GI

tion (>BLOCK 27) Voltage
06505 >27-Switch current supervision ON 27/59 Under/Over SP ON LED BI BO 74 5 1 GI

(>27 I SUPRVSN) Voltage OFF
06506 >BLOCK 27-1 Undervoltage pro- 27/59 Under/Over SP ON LED BI BO 74 6 1 GI

tection (>BLOCK 27-1) Voltage OFF
06508 >BLOCK 27-2 Undervoltage pro- 27/59 Under/Over SP ON LED BI BO 74 8 1 GI

tection (>BLOCK 27-2) Voltage OFF
06509 >Failure: Feeder VT (>FAIL:FEE- Measurement SP ON LED BI BO 74 9 1 GI

DER VT) Supervision OFF
06510 >Failure: Busbar VT (>FAIL: BUS Measurement SP ON LED BI BO 74 10 1 GI

VT) Supervision OFF
564 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1

Infor-
mation

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
06513 >BLOCK 59-1 overvoltage protec- 27/59 Under/Over SP LED BI BO 74 13 1 GI
tion (>BLOCK 59-1) Voltage
06530 27 Undervoltage protection swit- 27/59 Under/Over OUT ON LED BO 74 30 1 GI

ched OFF (27 OFF) Voltage OFF
06531 27 Undervoltage protection is 27/59 Under/Over OUT ON ON LED BO 74 31 1 GI

BLOKKED (27 BLOCKED) Voltage OFF OFF
06532 27 Undervoltage protection is 27/59 Under/Over OUT ON LED BO 74 32 1 GI

ACTIVE (27 ACTIVE) Voltage OFF
06533 27-1 Undervoltage picked up (27-1 27/59 Under/Over OUT ON LED BO 74 33 2 GI

picked up) Voltage OFF
06534 27-1 Undervoltage PICKUP w/curr. 27/59 Under/Over OUT ON LED BO 74 34 2 GI

superv (27-1 PU CS) Voltage OFF
06537 27-2 Undervoltage picked up (27-2 27/59 Under/Over OUT ON LED BO 74 37 2 GI

picked up) Voltage OFF
06538 27-2 Undervoltage PICKUP w/curr. 27/59 Under/Over OUT ON LED BO 74 38 2 GI

superv (27-2 PU CS) Voltage OFF
06539 27-1 Undervoltage TRIP (27-1 27/59 Under/Over OUT ON M LED BO 74 39 2 GI

TRIP) Voltage
06540 27-2 Undervoltage TRIP (27-2 27/59 Under/Over OUT ON M LED BO 74 40 2 GI

TRIP) Voltage
06565 59-Overvoltage protection swit- 27/59 Under/Over OUT ON LED BO 74 65 1 GI

ched OFF (59 OFF) Voltage OFF
06566 59-Overvoltage protection is 27/59 Under/Over OUT ON ON LED BO 74 66 1 GI

BLOKKED (59 BLOCKED) Voltage OFF OFF
06567 59-Overvoltage protection is 27/59 Under/Over OUT ON LED BO 74 67 1 GI

ACTIVE (59 ACTIVE) Voltage OFF
06568 59 picked up (59-1 picked up) 27/59 Under/Over OUT ON LED BO 74 68 2 GI

Voltage OFF
06570 59 TRIP (59-1 TRIP) 27/59 Under/Over OUT ON M LED BO 74 70 2 GI

Voltage
06571 59-2 Overvoltage V>> picked up 27/59 Under/Over OUT ON LED BO

(59-2 picked up) Voltage OFF
06573 59-2 Overvoltage V>> TRIP (59-2 27/59 Under/Over OUT ON LED BO
TRIP) Voltage
06575 Voltage Transformer Fuse Failure Measurement OUT ON LED BO 74 74 1 GI

(VT Fuse Failure) Supervision OFF
06801 >BLOCK Startup Supervision 48/66 Motor SP LED BI BO

(>BLK START-SUP) (Startup Monitor /
Counter)
06805 >Rotor locked (>Rotor locked) 48/66 Motor SP LED BI BO

(Startup Monitor /
Counter)
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 565

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix

Infor-
mation

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
06811 Startup supervision OFF (START- 48/66 Motor OUT ON LED BO 169 51 1 GI
SUP OFF) (Startup Monitor / OFF
Counter)
06812 Startup supervision is BLOCKED 48/66 Motor OUT ON ON LED BO 169 52 1 GI

(START-SUP BLK) (Startup Monitor / OFF OFF
Counter)
06813 Startup supervision is ACTIVE 48/66 Motor OUT ON LED BO 169 53 1 GI

(START-SUP ACT) (Startup Monitor / OFF
Counter)
06821 Startup supervision TRIP (START- 48/66 Motor OUT ON M LED BO 169 54 2 GI
SUP TRIP) (Startup Monitor /
Counter)
06822 Rotor locked (Rotor locked) 48/66 Motor OUT ON LED BO 169 55 2 GI
(Startup Monitor /
Counter)
06823 Startup supervision Pickup 48/66 Motor OUT ON LED BO 169 56 1 GI

(START-SUP pu) (Startup Monitor / OFF
Counter)
06851 >BLOCK 74TC (>BLOCK 74TC) 74TC Trip Circuit SP LED BI BO

Supervision
06852 >74TC Trip circuit superv.: trip 74TC Trip Circuit SP ON LED BI BO 170 51 1 GI
relay (>74TC trip rel.) Supervision OFF
06853 >74TC Trip circuit superv.: bkr 74TC Trip Circuit SP ON LED BI BO 170 52 1 GI
relay (>74TC brk rel.) Supervision OFF
06861 74TC Trip circuit supervision OFF 74TC Trip Circuit OUT ON LED BO 170 53 1 GI
(74TC OFF) Supervision OFF
06862 74TC Trip circuit supervision is 74TC Trip Circuit OUT ON ON LED BO 153 16 1 GI
BLOKKED (74TC BLOCKED) Supervision OFF OFF
06863 74TC Trip circuit supervision is 74TC Trip Circuit OUT ON LED BO 153 17 1 GI
ACTIVE (74TC ACTIVE) Supervision OFF
06864 74TC blocked. Bin. input is not set 74TC Trip Circuit OUT ON LED BO 170 54 1 GI
(74TC ProgFail) Supervision OFF
06865 74TC Failure Trip Circuit (FAIL: 74TC Trip Circuit OUT ON LED BO 170 55 1 GI
Trip cir.) Supervision OFF
06903 >block interm. E/F prot. (>IEF Intermittent Earth SP LED BI BO 152 1 1 GI
block) Fault
06921 Interm. E/F prot. is switched off Intermittent Earth OUT ON LED BO 152 10 1 GI
(IEF OFF) Fault OFF
06922 Interm. E/F prot. is blocked (IEF Intermittent Earth OUT ON ON LED BO 152 11 1 GI
blokked) Fault OFF OFF
06923 Interm. E/F prot. is active (IEF ena- Intermittent Earth OUT ON LED BO 152 12 1 GI
bled) Fault OFF
06924 Interm. E/F detection stage Iie> Intermittent Earth OUT LED BO
(IIE Fault det) Fault
566 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1

Infor-
mation

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
06925 Interm. E/F stab detection (IIE Intermittent Earth OUT LED BO
stab.Flt) Fault
06926 Interm. E/F detection stage Iie> Intermittent Earth OUT ON 152 13 2
(IIE Fault det) Fault
06927 Interm. E/F detected (Intermitt.EF) Intermittent Earth OUT ON LED BO 152 14 2 GI
Fault OFF
06928 Counter of det. times elapsed (IEF Intermittent Earth OUT ON LED BO 152 15 2
Tsum exp.) Fault
06929 Interm. E/F: reset time running Intermittent Earth OUT ON LED BO 152 16 2 GI
(IEF Tres run.) Fault OFF
06930 Interm. E/F: trip (IEF Trip) Intermittent Earth OUT ON LED BO 152 17 2
Fault
06931 Max RMS current value of fault = Intermittent Earth OUT ON 152 18 2
(Iie/In=) Fault OFF
06932 No. of detections by stage Iie>= Intermittent Earth OUT ON 152 19 2

(Nos.IIE=) Fault OFF
07551 50-1 InRush picked up (50-1 50/51 Phase/ OUT ON LED BO 60 80 2 GI

InRushPU) Ground Overcur- OFF
rent
07552 50N-1 InRush picked up (50N-1 50/51 Phase/ OUT ON LED BO 60 81 2 GI

rent
07553 51 InRush picked up (51 InRus- 50/51 Phase/ OUT ON LED BO 60 82 2 GI

hPU) Ground Overcur- OFF
rent
07554 51N InRush picked up (51N InRus- 50/51 Phase/ OUT ON LED BO 60 83 2 GI
hPU) Ground Overcur- OFF
rent
07556 InRush OFF (InRush OFF) 50/51 Phase/ OUT ON LED BO 60 92 1 GI

Ground Overcur- OFF
rent
07557 InRush Phase BLOCKED (InRus- 50/51 Phase/ OUT ON ON LED BO 60 93 1 GI

hPhBLOCKED) Ground Overcur- OFF OFF
rent
07558 InRush Ground BLOCKED 50/51 Phase/ OUT ON LED BO 60 94 1 GI

(InRush Gnd BLK) Ground Overcur- OFF
rent
07559 67-1 InRush picked up (67-1 50/51 Phase/ OUT ON LED BO 60 84 2 GI

rent
07560 67N-1 InRush picked up (67N-1 50/51 Phase/ OUT ON LED BO 60 85 2 GI

rent
07561 67-TOC InRush picked up (67- 50/51 Phase/ OUT ON LED BO 60 86 2 GI

TOC InRushPU) Ground Overcur- OFF
rent
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 567

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix

Infor-
mation

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
07562 67N-TOC InRush picked up (67N- 50/51 Phase/ OUT ON LED BO 60 87 2 GI
TOCInRushPU) Ground Overcur- OFF
rent
07563 >BLOCK InRush Phase (>BLOCK 50/51 Phase/ SP LED BI BO

InRushPh) Ground Overcur-
rent
07564 Ground InRush picked up (Gnd 50/51 Phase/ OUT ON LED BO 60 88 2 GI

InRush PU) Ground Overcur- OFF
rent
07565 Phase A InRush picked up (Ia 50/51 Phase/ OUT ON LED BO 60 89 2 GI

rent
07566 Phase B InRush picked up (Ib 50/51 Phase/ OUT ON LED BO 60 90 2 GI

rent
07567 Phase C InRush picked up (Ic 50/51 Phase/ OUT ON LED BO 60 91 2 GI

rent
14101 Fail: RTD (broken wire/shorted) RTD-Box OUT ON * LED BO

(Fail: RTD) OFF
14111 Fail: RTD 1 (broken wire/shorted) RTD-Box OUT ON * LED BO

(Fail: RTD 1) OFF
14112 RTD 1 Temperature stage 1 picked RTD-Box OUT ON * LED BO

up (RTD 1 St.1 p.up) OFF


(Fail: RTD 2) OFF



(Fail: RTD 3) OFF



(Fail: RTD 4) OFF


568 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1

Infor-
mation

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
(Fail: RTD 5) OFF



(Fail: RTD 6) OFF



(Fail: RTD 7) OFF



(Fail: RTD 8) OFF



(Fail: RTD 9) OFF


14201 Fail: RTD10 (broken wire/shorted) RTD-Box OUT ON * LED BO

(Fail: RTD10) OFF
14202 RTD10 Temperature stage 1 pik- RTD-Box OUT ON * LED BO

ked up (RTD10 St.1 p.up) OFF


(Fail: RTD11) OFF


7SJ62/63/64 Manual 569

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix

Infor-
mation

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
(Fail: RTD12) OFF


14501 >67-2 instantaneously 67 Directional SP LED BI BO

(>INSTANT. 67-2) Phase/Ground
Overcurrent
14502 67-2 instantaneously (67-2 67 Directional OUT ON ON LED BO

INSTANT.) Phase/Ground OFF OFF
Overcurrent
14503 >67-1 instantaneously 67 Directional SP LED BI BO

(>INSTANT. 67-1) Phase/Ground
Overcurrent
14504 67-1 instantaneously (67-1 67 Directional OUT ON ON LED BO

Overcurrent
14505 >67-TOC instantaneously 67 Directional SP LED BI BO

(>INSTANT 67-TOC) Phase/Ground
Overcurrent
14506 67-TOC instantaneously (67-TOC 67 Directional OUT ON ON LED BO

Overcurrent
14507 >67N-2 instantaneously 67 Directional SP LED BI BO

(>INSTANT. 67N-2) Phase/Ground
Overcurrent
14508 67N-2 instantaneously (67N-2 67 Directional OUT ON ON LED BO

Overcurrent
14509 >67N-1 instantaneously 67 Directional SP LED BI BO

(>INSTANT. 67N-1) Phase/Ground
Overcurrent
14510 67N-1 instantaneously (67N-1 67 Directional OUT ON ON LED BO

Overcurrent
14511 >67N-TOC instantaneously 67 Directional SP LED BI BO

(>INST. 67N-TOC) Phase/Ground
Overcurrent
14512 67N-TOC instantaneously (67N- 67 Directional OUT ON ON LED BO

TOC INSTANT) Phase/Ground OFF OFF
Overcurrent
170.2095 25 alphadiff too large (a2<a1) (25 SYNC Function OUT on LED BO
α2<α1) group 1 off
570 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1

Infor-
mation

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
170.2094 25 alphadiff too large (a2>a1) (25 SYNC Function OUT on LED BO
α2>α1) group 1 off
170.2032 25 Angle difference (alphadiff) SYNC Function OUT on LED BO 41 209 1 GI

okay (25 αdiff ok) group 1 off
170.2032 25 Angle difference (alphadiff) SYNC Function OUT on LED BO



170.2103 25 CLOSE command is BLOCKED SYNC Function OUT on LED BO 41 37 1 GI

(25 CLOSE BLK) group 1 off
170.2103 25 CLOSE command is BLOCKED SYNC Function OUT on LED BO



170.2029 25 Condition V1<V2< fulfilled (25 SYNC Function OUT on LED BO

V1< V2<) group 1 off



170.2027 25 Condition V1<V2> fulfilled (25 SYNC Function OUT on LED BO

V1< V2>) group 1 off


7SJ62/63/64 Manual 571

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix

Infor-
mation

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
170.2028 25 Condition V1>V2< fulfilled (25 SYNC Function OUT on LED BO

V1> V2<) group 1 off



170.2093 25 fdiff too large (f2<f1) (25 f2<f1) SYNC Function OUT on LED BO
group 1 off
group 2 off
group 3 off
group 4 off
170.2092 25 fdiff too large (f2>f1) (25 f2>f1) SYNC Function OUT on LED BO
group 1 off
group 2 off
group 3 off
group 4 off
170.2031 25 Frequency difference (fdiff) SYNC Function OUT on LED BO 41 208 1 GI

okay (25 fdiff ok) group 1 off
170.2031 25 Frequency difference (fdiff) SYNC Function OUT on LED BO



170.2034 25 Frequency f1 < fmin permissible SYNC Function OUT on LED BO

(25 f1<<) group 1 off



572 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1

Infor-
mation

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
170.2033 25 Frequency f1 > fmax permissi- SYNC Function OUT on LED BO
ble (25 f1>>) group 1 off











170.2025 25 Monitoring time exceeded (25 SYNC Function OUT on LED BO 41 205 1 GI
MonTimeExc) group 1 off
170.2025 25 Monitoring time exceeded (25 SYNC Function OUT on LED BO



170.2096 25 Multiple selection of func- SYNC Function OUT on LED BO

groups (25 FG-Error) group 1 off



170.2097 25 Setting error (25 Set-Error) SYNC Function OUT on LED BO

group 1 off
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 573

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix

Infor-
mation

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
group 2 off

group 3 off

group 4 off
170.2007 25 Sync. Measuring request of SYNC Function SP on LED

Control (25 Measu. req.) group 1 off



170.0049 25 Sync. Release of CLOSE Com- SYNC Function OUT on LED BO 41 201 1 GI
mand (25 CloseRelease) group 1 off
170.0049 25 Sync. Release of CLOSE Com- SYNC Function OUT on LED BO



170.2026 25 Synchronization conditions SYNC Function OUT on LED BO 41 206 1 GI

okay (25 Synchron) group 1 off
170.2026 25 Synchronization conditions SYNC Function OUT on LED BO



170.0050 25 Synchronization Error (25 Sync. SYNC Function OUT on LED BO 41 202 1 GI
Error) group 1 off
170.0050 25 Synchronization Error (25 Sync. SYNC Function OUT on LED BO

Error) group 2 off

Error) group 3 off

Error) group 4 off
170.2091 25 Vdiff too large (V2<V1) (25 SYNC Function OUT on LED BO
V2<V1) group 1 off
V2<V1) group 2 off
574 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1

Infor-
mation

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
V2<V1) group 3 off
V2<V1) group 4 off
170.2090 25 Vdiff too large (V2>V1) (25 SYNC Function OUT on LED BO
V2>V1) group 1 off
V2>V1) group 2 off
V2>V1) group 3 off
V2>V1) group 4 off
170.2030 25 Voltage difference (Vdiff) okay SYNC Function OUT on LED BO 41 207 1 GI
(25 Vdiff ok) group 1 off
170.2030 25 Voltage difference (Vdiff) okay SYNC Function OUT on LED BO



170.2038 25 Voltage V1 < Umin permissible SYNC Function OUT on LED BO

(25 V1<<) group 1 off



170.2037 25 Voltage V1 > Umax permissible SYNC Function OUT on LED BO

(25 V1>>) group 1 off






7SJ62/63/64 Manual 575

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix

Infor-
mation

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED




170.0051 25-group 1 is BLOCKED (25-1 SYNC Function OUT on LED BO 41 204 1 GI

BLOCK) group 1 off
170.2022 25-group 1: measurement in pro- SYNC Function OUT on LED BO 41 203 1 GI

gress (25-1 meas.) group 1 off
170.0051 25-group 2 is BLOCKED (25-2 SYNC Function OUT on LED BO

BLOCK) group 2 off
170.2022 25-group 2: measurement in pro- SYNC Function OUT on LED BO


BLOCK) group 3 off


BLOCK) group 4 off

234.2100 27, 59 blocked via operation (27, 27/59 Under/Over IntSP ON LED BO
59 blk) Voltage OFF
52 Breaker (52Breaker) Control Device CF_D12 on BO 240 160 1 GI

off
52 Breaker (52Breaker) Control Device DP on BI CB 240 160 1 GI

off
170.2009 >25 Direct Command output SYNC Function SP on LED BI

(>25direct CO) group 1 off



170.2011 >25 Start of synchronization (>25 SYNC Function SP on LED BI

Start) group 1 off
576 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1

Infor-
mation

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
Start) group 2 off

Start) group 3 off

Start) group 4 off
170.2012 >25 Stop of synchronization (>25 SYNC Function SP on LED BI

Stop) group 1 off

Stop) group 2 off

Stop) group 3 off

Stop) group 4 off
170.2015 >25 Switch to V1< and V2< (>25 SYNC Function SP on LED BI
V1<V2<) group 1 off
V1<V2<) group 2 off
V1<V2<) group 3 off
V1<V2<) group 4 off
170.2014 >25 Switch to V1< and V2> (>25 SYNC Function SP on LED BI
V1<V2>) group 1 off
V1<V2>) group 2 off
V1<V2>) group 3 off
V1<V2>) group 4 off
170.2013 >25 Switch to V1> and V2< (>25 SYNC Function SP on LED BI
V1>V2<) group 1 off
V1>V2<) group 2 off
V1>V2<) group 3 off
V1>V2<) group 4 off
170.0043 >25 Sync. Measurement Only (>25 SYNC Function SP on LED BI

Measu. Only) group 1 off

7SJ62/63/64 Manual 577

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix

Infor-
mation

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED

170.0001 >25-group 1 activate (>25-1 act) SYNC Function SP on LED BI

group 1 off

group 2 off

group 3 off

group 4 off
>Back Light on (>Light on) Device, General SP on * LED BI BO

Settings off
170.2102 >BLOCK 25 CLOSE command SYNC Function SP on LED BI

(>BLK 25 CLOSE) group 1 off



170.2008 >BLOCK 25-group 1 (>BLK 25-1) SYNC Function SP on LED BI

group 1 off

group 2 off

group 3 off

group 4 off
>Cabinet door open (>Door open) Process Data SP on LED BI BO CB 101 1 1 GI

off
>CB ready Spring is charged (>CB Process Data SP * LED BI BO CB

ready)
>CB waiting for Spring charged Process Data SP on LED BI BO CB 101 2 1 GI

(>CB wait) off
>Door closed (>DoorClose) Process Data SP * LED BI BO CB
>Error Control Voltage (>ErrCn- Process Data SP on LED BI BO CB 240 182 1 GI

trlV) off
>Error Meter (>Err Meter) Process Data SP on LED BI BO CB 240 184 1 GI

off
>Error Motor Voltage (>Err Mot V) Process Data SP on LED BI BO CB 240 181 1 GI
off
578 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1

Infor-
mation

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
>No Voltage (Fuse blown) (>No Process Data SP ON LED BI BO CB 160 38 1 GI
Volt.) OFF
>SF6-Loss (>SF6-Loss) Process Data SP on LED BI BO CB 240 183 1 GI

off
>Transformer Danger (>Tx Dan- Process Data SP on LED BI BO CB 240 186 1 GI

ger) off
>Transformer Temperature (>Tx Process Data SP on LED BI BO CB 240 185 1 GI

Temp.) off
Breaker OPENED (Brk OPENED) Device, General IntSP * * LED BO

Settings
Clock Synchronization (Synch- Device, General IntSP_E

Clock) Settings v
Control Authority (Cntrl Auth) Control Authori- DP ON LED 101 85 1 GI

zation OFF
Control Authority (Cntrl Auth) Control Authori- IntSP ON LED

zation OFF
Controlmode LOCAL (ModeLO- Control Authori- DP ON LED 101 86 1 GI

CAL) zation OFF
Controlmode LOCAL (ModeLO- Control Authori- IntSP ON LED

CAL) zation OFF
Controlmode REMOTE (ModeRE- Control Authori- IntSP ON LED

MOTE) zation OFF
Disconnect Switch (Disc.Swit.) Control Device CF_D2 on BO 240 161 1 GI

off
Disconnect Switch (Disc.Swit.) Control Device DP on BI CB 240 161 1 GI

off
Error FMS FO 1 (Error FMS1) Device, General OUT on LED BO

Settings off
Error FMS FO 2 (Error FMS2) Device, General OUT on LED BO

Settings off
Error Systeminterface (SysIntErr.) Protocol IntSP on LED BO

off
Fan ON/OFF (Fan ON/OFF) Control Device CF_D2 on BO 240 175 1 GI

off
Fan ON/OFF (Fan ON/OFF) Control Device DP on BI CB 240 175 1 GI

off
Fault Recording Start (FltRecSta) Oscillographic IntSP ON LED BO

Fault Records OFF
Feeder GROUNDED (Feeder gnd) Device, General IntSP * * LED BO

Settings
Ground Switch (GndSwit.) Control Device CF_D2 on BO 240 164 1 GI

off
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 579

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix

Infor-
mation

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
Ground Switch (GndSwit.) Control Device DP on BI CB 240 164 1 GI
off
Group A (Group A) Change Group IntSP ON LED BO 160 23 1 GI

OFF
Group B (Group B) Change Group IntSP ON LED BO 160 24 1 GI

OFF
Group C (Group C) Change Group IntSP ON LED BO 160 25 1 GI

OFF
Group D (Group D) Change Group IntSP ON LED BO 160 26 1 GI

OFF
Hardware Test Mode (HWTest- Device, General IntSP ON LED BO

Mod) Settings OFF
Interlocking: 52 Close (52 Close) Control Device IntSP
Interlocking: 52 Open (52 Open) Control Device IntSP
Interlocking: Disconnect switch Control Device IntSP

Close (Disc.Close)
Interlocking: Disconnect switch Control Device IntSP

Open (Disc.Open)
Interlocking: Ground switch Close Control Device IntSP

(GndSw Cl.)
Interlocking: Ground switch Open Control Device IntSP

(GndSw Open)
Q2 Open/Close (Q2 Op/Cl) Control Device CF_D2 on BO 240 162 1 GI

off
Q2 Open/Close (Q2 Op/Cl) Control Device DP on BI CB 240 162 1 GI

off
Q9 Open/Close (Q9 Op/Cl) Control Device CF_D2 on BO 240 163 1 GI

off
Q9 Open/Close (Q9 Op/Cl) Control Device DP on BI CB 240 163 1 GI

off
Stop data transmission (DataStop) Device, General IntSP ON LED BO 160 20 1 GI

Settings OFF
170.2101 Sync-group 1 is switched OFF (25- SYNC Function OUT on LED BO 41 36 1 GI

1 OFF) group 1 off
170.2101 Sync-group 2 is switched OFF (25- SYNC Function OUT on LED BO

2 OFF) group 2 off

3 OFF) group 3 off

4 OFF) group 4 off
Test mode (Test mode) Device, General IntSP ON LED BO 160 21 1 GI

Settings OFF
580 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1

Infor-
mation

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
Threshold Value 1 (ThreshVal1) Threshold-Switch IntSP on LED BI FK BO CB
off
Unlock data transmission via BI Control Device IntSP

(UnlockDT)
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 581

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix
A.11 Measured Values
F.No. Description Function IEC 60870-5-103 Configurable in

Matrix
Data Unit (ASDU)
Control Display
Default Display
Information-No
Function type
Compatibility
Position
CFC
00601 Ia (Ia =) Measurement 134 137 priv 9 1 CFC CD DD
00602 Ib (Ib =) Measurement 160 145 comp 3 1 CFC CD DD
134 137 priv 9 2
00603 Ic (Ic =) Measurement 134 137 priv 9 3 CFC CD DD
00604 In (In =) Measurement 134 137 priv 9 4 CFC CD DD
00605 I1 (positive sequence) (I1 =) Measurement CFC CD DD
00606 I2 (negative sequence) (I2 =) Measurement CFC CD DD
00621 Va (Va =) Measurement 134 137 priv 9 5 CFC CD DD
00622 Vb (Vb =) Measurement 134 137 priv 9 6 CFC CD DD
00623 Vc (Vc =) Measurement 134 137 priv 9 7 CFC CD DD
00624 Va-b (Va-b=) Measurement 160 145 comp 3 2 CFC CD DD
134 137 priv 9 8
00625 Vb-c (Vb-c=) Measurement 134 137 priv 9 9 CFC CD DD
00626 Vc-a (Vc-a=) Measurement 134 137 priv 9 10 CFC CD DD
00627 VN (VN =) Measurement CFC CD DD
00629 V1 (positive sequence) (V1 =) Measurement CFC CD DD
00630 V2 (negative sequence) (V2 =) Measurement CFC CD DD
00632 Vsync (synchronism) (Vsync =) Measurement CFC CD DD
00641 P (active power) (P =) Measurement 134 137 priv 9 11 CFC CD DD
00642 Q (reactive power) (Q =) Measurement 134 137 priv 9 12 CFC CD DD
00644 Frequency (Freq=) Measurement 134 137 priv 9 13 CFC CD DD
00645 S (apparent power) (S =) Measurement CFC CD DD
00661 Threshold of Restart Inhibit (Θ REST. =) Measurement CFC CD DD
00701 Resistive ground current in isol systems (INs Measurement 134 137 priv 9 15 CFC CD DD
Real)
00702 Reactive ground current in isol systems (INs Measurement 134 137 priv 9 16 CFC CD DD
Reac)
00805 Temperature of Rotor (Θ Rotor) Measurement CFC CD DD
00807 Thermal Overload (Θ /Θtrip) Measurement CFC CD DD
00809 Time untill release of reclose-blocking (T rec- Measurement CFC CD DD

lose=)
00830 INs Senstive Ground Fault Current (INs =) Measurement CFC CD DD
582 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1

Matrix
Data Unit (ASDU)
Control Display
Default Display
Information-No
Function type
Compatibility
Position
CFC
00831 3Io (zero sequence) (3Io =) Measurement CFC CD DD
00832 Vo (zero sequence) (Vo =) Measurement CFC CD DD
00833 I1 (positive sequence) Demand (I1 dmd=) Demand Mea- CFC CD DD

surement Setup
00834 Active Power Demand (P dmd =) Demand Mea- CFC CD DD

surement Setup
00835 Reactive Power Demand (Q dmd =) Demand Mea- CFC CD DD

surement Setup
00836 Apparent Power Demand (S dmd =) Demand Mea- CFC CD DD

surement Setup
00837 I A Demand Minimum (IAdmdMin) Min/Max Mea- CFC CD DD

surement Setup
00838 I A Demand Maximum (IAdmdMax) Min/Max Mea- CFC CD DD

surement Setup
00839 I B Demand Minimum (IBdmdMin) Min/Max Mea- CFC CD DD

surement Setup
00840 I B Demand Maximum (IBdmdMax) Min/Max Mea- CFC CD DD

surement Setup
00841 I C Demand Minimum (ICdmdMin) Min/Max Mea- CFC CD DD

surement Setup
00842 I C Demand Maximum (ICdmdMax) Min/Max Mea- CFC CD DD

surement Setup
00843 I1 (positive sequence) Demand Minimum Min/Max Mea- CFC CD DD

(I1dmdMin) surement Setup
00844 I1 (positive sequence) Demand Maximum Min/Max Mea- CFC CD DD

(I1dmdMax) surement Setup
00845 Active Power Demand Minimum (PdMin=) Min/Max Mea- CFC CD DD

surement Setup
00846 Active Power Demand Maximum (PdMax=) Min/Max Mea- CFC CD DD

surement Setup
00847 Reactive Power Minimum (QdMin=) Min/Max Mea- CFC CD DD

surement Setup
00848 Reactive Power Maximum (QdMax=) Min/Max Mea- CFC CD DD

surement Setup
00849 Apparent Power Minimum (SdMin=) Min/Max Mea- CFC CD DD

surement Setup
00850 Apparent Power Maximum (SdMax=) Min/Max Mea- CFC CD DD

surement Setup
00851 Ia Min (Ia Min=) Min/Max Mea- CFC CD DD

surement Setup
00852 Ia Max (Ia Max=) Min/Max Mea- CFC CD DD

surement Setup
00853 Ib Min (Ib Min=) Min/Max Mea- CFC CD DD

surement Setup
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 583

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix

Matrix
Data Unit (ASDU)
Control Display
Default Display
Information-No
Function type
Compatibility
Position
CFC
00854 Ib Max (Ib Max=) Min/Max Mea- CFC CD DD
surement Setup
00855 Ic Min (Ic Min=) Min/Max Mea- CFC CD DD

surement Setup
00856 Ic Max (Ic Max=) Min/Max Mea- CFC CD DD

surement Setup
00857 I1 (positive sequence) Minimum (I1 Min=) Min/Max Mea- CFC CD DD

surement Setup
00858 I1 (positive sequence) Maximum (I1 Max=) Min/Max Mea- CFC CD DD

surement Setup
00859 Va-n Min (Va-nMin=) Min/Max Mea- CFC CD DD

surement Setup
00860 Va-n Max (Va-nMax=) Min/Max Mea- CFC CD DD

surement Setup
00861 Vb-n Min (Vb-nMin=) Min/Max Mea- CFC CD DD

surement Setup
00862 Vb-n Max (Vb-nMax=) Min/Max Mea- CFC CD DD

surement Setup
00863 Vc-n Min (Vc-nMin=) Min/Max Mea- CFC CD DD

surement Setup
00864 Vc-n Max (Vc-nMax=) Min/Max Mea- CFC CD DD

surement Setup
00865 Va-b Min (Va-bMin=) Min/Max Mea- CFC CD DD

surement Setup
00867 Va-b Max (Va-bMax=) Min/Max Mea- CFC CD DD

surement Setup
00868 Vb-c Min (Vb-cMin=) Min/Max Mea- CFC CD DD

surement Setup
00869 Vb-c Max (Vb-cMax=) Min/Max Mea- CFC CD DD

surement Setup
00870 Vc-a Min (Vc-aMin=) Min/Max Mea- CFC CD DD

surement Setup
00871 Vc-a Max (Vc-aMax=) Min/Max Mea- CFC CD DD

surement Setup
00872 V neutral Min (Vn Min =) Min/Max Mea- CFC CD DD

surement Setup
00873 V neutral Max (Vn Max =) Min/Max Mea- CFC CD DD

surement Setup
00874 V1 (positive sequence) Voltage Minimum (V1 Min Min/Max Mea- CFC CD DD
=) surement Setup
00875 V1 (positive sequence) Voltage Maximum (V1 Min/Max Mea- CFC CD DD

Max =) surement Setup
00876 Active Power Minimum (Pmin=) Min/Max Mea- CFC CD DD

surement Setup
00877 Active Power Maximum (Pmax=) Min/Max Mea- CFC CD DD

surement Setup
584 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1

Matrix
Data Unit (ASDU)
Control Display
Default Display
Information-No
Function type
Compatibility
Position
CFC
00878 Reactive Power Minimum (Qmin=) Min/Max Mea- CFC CD DD
surement Setup
00879 Reactive Power Maximum (Qmax=) Min/Max Mea- CFC CD DD

surement Setup
00880 Apparent Power Minimum (Smin=) Min/Max Mea- CFC CD DD

surement Setup
00881 Apparent Power Maximum (Smax=) Min/Max Mea- CFC CD DD

surement Setup
00882 Frequency Minimum (fmin=) Min/Max Mea- CFC CD DD

surement Setup
00883 Frequency Maximum (fmax=) Min/Max Mea- CFC CD DD

surement Setup
00884 Power Factor Maximum (PF Max=) Min/Max Mea- CFC CD DD

surement Setup
00885 Power Factor Minimum (PF Min=) Min/Max Mea- CFC CD DD

surement Setup
00888 Pulsed Energy Wp (active) (Wp(puls)) Energy CD DD
00889 Pulsed Energy Wq (reactive) (Wq(puls)) Energy CD DD
00901 Power Factor (PF =) Measurement 134 137 priv 9 14 CFC CD DD
00924 Wp Forward (WpForward) Energy CD DD
00925 Wq Forward (WqForward) Energy CD DD
00928 Wp Reverse (WpReverse) Energy CD DD
00929 Wq Reverse (WqReverse) Energy CD DD
00963 I A demand (Ia dmd=) Demand Mea- CFC CD DD

surement Setup
00964 I B demand (Ib dmd=) Demand Mea- CFC CD DD

surement Setup
00965 I C demand (Ic dmd=) Demand Mea- CFC CD DD

surement Setup
00991 Pressure (Press =) Measurement CD DD
00992 Temperature (Temp =) Measurement CD DD
00996 Transducer 1 (Td1=) Measurement CFC CD DD
00997 Transducer 2 (Td2=) Measurement CFC CD DD
01058 Overload Meter Max (Θ /ΘTrpMax=) Min/Max Mea- CFC CD DD

surement Setup
01059 Overload Meter Min (Θ /ΘTrpMin=) Min/Max Mea- CFC CD DD

surement Setup
01068 Temperature of RTD 1 (Θ RTD 1 =) Measurement 134 146 priv 9 1 CFC CD DD
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 585

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix

Matrix
Data Unit (ASDU)
Control Display
Default Display
Information-No
Function type
Compatibility
Position
CFC
01077 Temperature of RTD10 (Θ RTD10 =) Measurement 134 146 priv 9 10 CFC CD DD
30701 P, L1 (active power, phase L1) (P, L1 =) Measurement CFC CD DD
30704 Q, L1 (reactive power, phase L1) (Q, L1 =) Measurement CFC CD DD
30707 Power Factor, phase L1 (PF, L1 =) Measurement CFC CD DD
37-1 under current (37-1) Set Points CFC CD DD

(Measured
Values)
170.2056 dalpha = (dα =) SYNC Function 130 1 priv 9 6 CFC CD DD

group 1

group 2

group 3

group 4
170.2055 df = (df =) SYNC Function 130 1 priv 9 5 CFC CD DD

group 1

group 2

group 3

group 4
170.2054 dV = (dV =) SYNC Function 130 1 priv 9 2 CFC CD DD

group 1

group 2
586 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1

Matrix
Data Unit (ASDU)
Control Display
Default Display
Information-No
Function type
Compatibility
Position
CFC
group 3

group 4
170.2051 f1 = (f1 =) SYNC Function 130 1 priv 9 4 CFC CD DD

group 1

group 2

group 3

group 4

group 1

group 2

group 3

group 4
I A dmd> (I Admd>) Set Points CFC CD DD

(Measured
Values)
I B dmd> (I Bdmd>) Set Points CFC CD DD

(Measured
Values)
I C dmd> (I Cdmd>) Set Points CFC CD DD

(Measured
Values)
I1dmd> (I1dmd>) Set Points CFC CD DD

(Measured
Values)
Number of TRIPs= (#of TRIPs=) Statistics CD DD
Operating hours greater than (OpHour>) CD DD
Pressure< (Press<) Set Points CFC CD DD

(Measured
Values)
Temp> (Temp>) Set Points CFC CD DD

(Measured
Values)
170.2050 V1 = (V1 =) SYNC Function 130 1 priv 9 1 CFC CD DD

group 1

group 2

group 3
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 587

C53000-G1140-C147–1
A Appendix

Matrix
Data Unit (ASDU)
Control Display
Default Display
Information-No
Function type
Compatibility
Position
CFC
group 4

group 1

group 2

group 3

group 4
|Pdmd|> (|Pdmd|>) Set Points CFC CD DD

(Measured
Values)
|Power Factor|< (|PF|<) Set Points CFC CD DD

(Measured
Values)
|Qdmd|> (|Qdmd|>) Set Points CFC CD DD

(Measured
Values)
|Sdmd|> (|Sdmd|>) Set Points CFC CD DD

(Measured
Values)
588 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
Index
Index
Numerics A–I/O–2 292

Analog Inputs 2, 346
27 10, 94, 372 Analog Outputs 346
46 10, 104, 373 Angular Error Compensation 166
46-1 104, 373 Automatic Reclosing 11, 194
46-2 104, 373 Automatic Reclosing System 177, 388
46-TOC 10, 105, 373 Auxiliary voltage 288
48 112, 379 Auxiliary Voltages 140
49 130, 382 Average Calculation 247
50 9, 38, 359
50-1 9
50-2 9
50BF 205, 389 B
50c 87
Battery 424
50N 9, 38, 359
B–CPU 294
50N-1 9
B–I/O–2 300
50N-2 9
Binary Inputs 4
50Nc 87
Binary Inputs and Outputs 4, 276
50Ns 11, 155, 384
Binary Outputs 4
51 9, 38, 360
Blocked by Protection 261
51 and 51N 360
Blocking of auto reclose via internal control 192
51N 9, 38, 360
Blocking of Reclosing 190
51Nc 87
Blocking Three-Phase Faults 192
51Ns 11
Blocking Time 181, 188
59 10, 94, 372
Breaker Control 13, 252, 399
64 155, 384
Breaker Failure Protection 12, 205, 209, 389
66/68 112, 380
Buffer Battery 140
67 10, 64, 370
Bus address 307, 310, 312
67 and 67N Elements 370
67c 87
67N 10, 64, 370
67Nc 87 C
67Ns 11, 155, 384
67N-TOC 10 Caution (definition) ii
67-TOC 10 CFC 392
74TC 147, 398 Changeover of setting groups 277
79M 177, 388 Check
81 126, 381 Current and voltage connection 331
81 O/U 126 Rotation 331
Checking Connections 318
Checking System Connections 321
Checking the Binary Inputs and Outputs 326
A Circuit Breaker Monitoring 183, 188
Climatic Stress Tests 356
Accessories 423
Clock 353, 399
Acknowledgement of
Command Duration 29
commands to local/remote/Digsi 262
Command Output and Switching Relays 263
commands to the device front 262
Command Sequence 254
A–CPU 288
Commissioning 323
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 589

C53000-G1140-C147–1
Index
Commissioning Aids 245 Direction check with load current 333

Communication 7 Directional Time Overcurrent Ground Protection 81
Communications Interfaces 349 Directional Time Overcurrent Protection 10, 63, 370
Connection Examples 470 Disassembly of the Device 281
Connections 275, 318 Display Editor 424
Construction 357 DNP3.0 8, 352
Contact mode for output relay BO1 and BO2 291 Double Operation 261
Contact type for output relays 281 Dynamic Blocking 181, 188
Control Functions 6 Dynamic Cold Load Pick-up Function 87, 371
Control voltage 288, 291, 294 Dynamic Cold Load Setting Adjustment 10
Control voltage of BI 1 to BI 7 294
Control voltage of BI8 to BI20 309 E
Control voltages of BI 25 to BI 37 308 Electrical Tests 353
Control voltages of BI18 to BI33 309 Elementary Diagrams 426
Control voltages of BI4 to BI11 293 EMC Tests for Immunity 353
Covering Caps 423 EMC Tests For Noise Emission 354
Cross Blocking 47 Emergency Start 117
Cross blocking 58 Emergency Starting 136
Cubicle Installation 426, 432, 456 Excessive rotor temperature 114
Current Flow Monitoring 29 Exchanging interface modules 313
Current Inputs 346 Extension of Time Constants 116, 136
Current Rotation 143 External Current Transformer Circuits 142
Current Supervision 101
Current Symmetry 142
Currents 275, 276
F
Fault Location 201, 204, 389
D Fault value recording 245
Femal Plugs 424
Danger (definition) ii Fibre optic cable 320
DCF77 399 Final Preparation of the Device 344
Default Settings 494 Frequency Protection 10, 126, 128, 381
Definite 359 Front Elements 4
Definite Time Elements (46-1, 46-2) 104 Functional Scope 20
Definite Time, Directional Overcurrent Protection 66 Fuse 144
Definite Time, Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection 39 Fuse–Failure–Monitoring 144
Definite-Time, Overcurrent Protection 359
Detached Operation Unit 446
Detached Operator Panel 405
Determination of Direction 70, 156 G
Determination of the Phase with a Ground Connection
164 General Device Dropout 236
Device Dropout 236 General Device Pickup 236
Device Pickup 236 Graphic Tools 425
Device Position 261 Graphical symbols iii
DIGRA 424 Ground fault check 336
DIGSI REMOTE 4 425 Ground Impedance Ratios 34
Dimensions 400 Group alarms 154
590 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
Index
H Measurements 242
Measuring Transducer Inputs 346
Hardware Modifications 279 Mechanical Stress Tests 355
Hardware Monitoring 140 Memory Components 140
Housing Message Processing 239
for Panel Flush Mounting or Cubicle Installation Microcomputer System 4
(Size 1/1 x 19”) 402 Min/Max Report 397
for Panel Surface Mounting (Size 1/1) 404 Minimum and Maximum Values 247
for Panel Surface Mounting (Size 1/3 x 19") 403 MODBUS 8
for Panel Surface Mounting (Size 1/3 x 19”) 403 Monitoring Functions 11, 140
Monitoring of feedback information 262
Motor Starting Protection 112, 379
Motor Starting Recognition 138
I
Mounting Rail for 19"-Racks 424
Information List 545 Multi-Shot Reclosing 180
Initiation of Reclosing 190
Inrush Restraint 371
Installation 266
N
Insulation Tests 353
Interface Cable 424 Negative Sequence Current Protection 10
Interface Modules 313 Negative Sequence Protection 104, 373
Interface modules 423 No Trip – No Flag 23
Interlocking 255 Nominal Frequency 26
Intermittent Ground Fault Protection 387 Nominal rated values 34
Intermittierender Erdfehlerschutz 170 Note (definition) ii
Interoperability List 503 Numerical Values 18
Inverse Time Element (46-TOC) 105
Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protection 43, 360
IRIG B 399
O
Open Breaker Times 191
K Operating Hours Counter 398
Operating Software 424
k–factor 134 Ordering Data 410
Kühlmitteltemperatur 136 Ordering Information 410
Overcurrent 38
Overcurrent Protection 38
Over-Frequency 381
L
Overview of the masking features 541
Life contact 303 Overvoltage Protection 95, 101
Limit Values 247 Overvoltage protection 100
Load 333
Location of Ground Connections 160
Long-Term Mean Value 397
P
Panel Flush Mounting 426, 432, 456
Panel Installation 401
M
Panel Surface Mounting 271, 428, 437
Manual Close Mode 50, 78, 82 Parameter names iii
Measured Values 395 Parameter options iii
Measured Values Monitoring 140 PC Front Interface 349
Measured Values Supervision 397 PC Operating Interface at Front 318
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 591

C53000-G1140-C147–1
Index
Phase Rotation 26, 235, 331 Schalten bei asynchronen Netzbedingungen 213
Pickup voltages of BI 6 and BI 7 307 Schalten bei synchronen Netzbedingungen 213
Pickup voltages of BI1 to BI5 303 Sensitive Ground Fault Detection 11, 155, 384
Pickup voltages of BI1 to BI7 295, 297 Serial Interfaces 4, 281
Pickup voltages of BI18 to BI15 312 Service Conditions 356
Pickup voltages of BI21 to BI24 299 Set points 244
Pickup voltages of BI8 to BI20 301 Setting Groups 33
Polarity Check 337 Setting groups
Polarity of Current Transformers 27 Changeover 277
Power Supply 5, 346 Short Circuit Links 423
Power System Data 1 26 SIMATIC CFC 4 425
Power System Data 2 34 Single-Shot Reclosing 180
Pre-Defined CFC Charts 500 Software Monitoring 141
Probing 141 Start Inhibit for Motors 10, 380
Processor Printed Circuit Boards C-CPU-2 288, 290 Starting Time Monitoring for Motors 10
PROFIBUS 7, 351 Static Blocking 181
Profibus–Interface 316 Statistical Counters 237
Protective Functions 6 Statistics 398
Protocol 505 Switching Authority 259
Protocol-dependent functions 505 Switching elements on the printed circuit boards 302
Switching Mode 260, 261
Symbol conventions iii
Synchrones Schalten 212
Q Synchronisierfunktion 210
Qualified personnel (definition) iii System (SCADA) Interface 318
R T
Rack mounting and cubicle mounting 268 Temperature Detection 391

Reactance Setting 35 Temperature meter 320
Rear Service–/Modem– Interface 350 Temperature unit 26
Reassembly of Device 317 Temperaturerfassung 226
Recognition of Running Condition 36 Termination 304, 315
Recording of Event and Fault Data 7 Testing the Reverse Interlocking Scheme 332
Reference Voltages 140 Text Values 18
Regionalization 16 Thermal Overload Protection 10, 130, 382
Reset Time Characteristics Thermobox 226, 320
As Per ANSI 365, 375 Time Constant 135
Restarting limit 115 Time Stamping 398
Reverse Interlocking Bus Protection 49 Time synchronization interface 5, 320
Reverse Interlocking for Looped Lines 73 Time-Overcurrent Protection 9
Reverse Interlocking Scheme 332 Triggering Oscillographic Recordings 342
RS232 350 Trip and Close Command Duration 29
RS485 350 Trip Circuit Monitor 398
RTD 226 Trip Log 236, 398
Trip Time Characteristics
As Per ANSI 364, 374
As Per IEC 360, 374
S Typographic conventions iii
SCADA Interface 351
592 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
Index
U VT’s Nominal Values 28

VT’s Ratios 28
UL-listing 349, 357
Unbalanced Load 104
Under-Frequency 381
Undervoltage Protection 96, 100 W
Units of Length 27
Warning (definition) ii
User Specified Curves 69, 79, 82
Watchdog 141
Waveform Capture 247, 398
V
Vibration and Shock Stress 355 Z
Voltage Inputs 346
Zone Controlled/ Field Interlocking 261
Voltage Protection 10, 94, 372
Zone Sequence Coordination 186
Voltage Rotation 143
Zone Sequencing 193
Voltage Symmetry 142
Voltage transformer m.c.b. 423
7SJ62/63/64 Manual 593

C53000-G1140-C147–1
Index
594 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

C53000-G1140-C147–1
Corrections
To From
Siemens AG Name:
Dept. PTD PA D DM
D–13623 Berlin Company/Dept.:
Germany
Address:
Dear reader,
printing errors can never be entirely eliminated:
therefore, should you come across any when read- Phone no.: Fax no.:
ing this manual, kindly enter them in this form to-
gether with any comments or suggestions for im-
provement that you may have.
Corrections/Suggestions
7SJ62/63/64 Manual
C53000-G1140-C147-1
Copying of this document and giving it to others and the use
or communication of the contents thereof, are forbidden with-
out express authority. Offenders are liable to the payment of
damages. All rights are reserved in the event of the grant of
Subject to technical alteration a patent or the registration of a utility model or design.
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Order-no.: C53000-G1140-C147-1

Available from: LZF Fürth-Bislohe
Printed in Germany/Imprimé en Allemagne
AG 0302 0.2 FO 610 Am

7SJ6x Iec

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

7SJ6x Iec

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Preface

Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Buch-Nr. C53000-G1140-C147–1

This product is UL–certified with the data as stated in Section 4.1:

IND. CONT. EQ. IND. CONT. EQ.

Earth fault device-internal logical input signal

Earth fault device-internal logical output signal

UL1–L2 internal input signal of an analogue quantity

1234 FUNCTION example of a parameter switch designated FUNCTION with the

7SJ62/63/64 Manual iii

Input signal of an analogue quantity

& AND gate

Exclusive–OR gate (antivalence): output is active, if only one

Coincidence gate (equivalence): output is active, if both input are

Dynamic inputs (edge–triggered)

Formation of one analogue output signal from

T Dynamic triggered pulse timer T (monoflop)

S Q Static memory (RS–flipflop) with setting input (S),

1.1 Overall Operation ................................................................................................................... 2

1.2 Applications ............................................................................................................................ 6

2.2 Overcurrent Protection (50, 50N, 51, 51N)........................................................................... 38

2.2.2.6 Inrush Restraint .................................................................................................................... 58

2.3 Directional Overcurrent Protection (67, 67N)........................................................................ 64

2.5 Voltage Protection (27, 59) ................................................................................................... 94

2.6 Negative Sequence Protection (46).................................................................................... 104

2.8 Frequency Protection (81 O/U)........................................................................................... 126

2.9 Thermal Overload Protection (49) ...................................................................................... 130

2.10 Monitoring Functions .......................................................................................................... 140

2.11 Sensitive Ground Fault Detection (64, 50Ns, 67Ns)........................................................... 155

7SJ62/63/64 Manual vii

2.11.2 Programming Settings ........................................................................................................ 161

2.12 Intermittent Ground Fault Protection................................................................................... 170

2.13 Automatic Reclosing System (79M).................................................................................... 177

2.14 Fault Location ..................................................................................................................... 201

2.15 Breaker Failure Protection (50BF) ...................................................................................... 205

2.16 Synchronism and Voltage Check (7SJ64 only) .................................................................. 210

viii 7SJ62/63/64 Manual

2.16.2.4 Synchronous Conditions..................................................................................................... 221

2.17 Temperature Detection via RTD-boxes .............................................................................. 226

2.18 Phase Rotation ................................................................................................................... 235

2.19 Protection Function Logic ................................................................................................... 236

2.20 Auxiliary Functions ............................................................................................................. 239

2.21 Breaker Control .................................................................................................................. 252

3 Installation and Commissioning..................................................................................................... 265

3.1 Installation and Connections............................................................................................... 266

3.2 Checking Connections........................................................................................................ 318

3.3 Commissioning ................................................................................................................... 323

3.4 Final Preparation of the Device .......................................................................................... 344

4 Technical Data.................................................................................................................................. 345

4.1 General Device Data .......................................................................................................... 346

4.1.7 Climatic Stress Tests.......................................................................................................... 356

4.5 Inrush Restraint .................................................................................................................. 371

4.7 Voltage Protection (27 and 59)........................................................................................... 372

4.8 Negative Sequence Protection (46).................................................................................... 373

4.9 Motor Starting Protection (48) ............................................................................................ 379

4.10 Start Inhibit for Motors (66/68)............................................................................................ 380

4.11 Frequency Protection (81 Over-Frequency and Under-Frequency) ................................... 381

4.12 Thermal Overload Protection (49) ...................................................................................... 382

4.13 Sensitive Ground Fault Detection (64, 50Ns, 67Ns)........................................................... 384

4.14 Intermittent Ground Fault Protection .................................................................................. 387

4.15 Automatic Reclosing System (79M) ................................................................................... 388

4.16 Fault Location ..................................................................................................................... 389

4.17 Breaker Failure Protection (50BF)...................................................................................... 389

4.19 RTD-Boxes for Temperature Detection ............................................................................. 391